Nissan - Quest - Workshop Manual - 2011 - 2011

£9.99

Get your hands on the complete Nissan factory workshop software

Download now

Check out our popular Nissan Quest Manuals below:

2012 Nissan Quest Model E52 Series Service Repair Manual

2008 Nissan Quest Model V42 Series Service Repair Manual

2006 Nissan Quest Model V42 Series Service Repair Manual

2011 Nissan Quest Model E52 Series Service Repair Manual

See All

2012 Nissan Quest Model E52 Series Service Repair Manual

2008 Nissan Quest Model V42 Series Service Repair Manual

2006 Nissan Quest Model V42 Series Service Repair Manual

2011 Nissan Quest Model E52 Series Service Repair Manual

See All

Get your hands on the Complete Nissan Factory Workshop Software

Download now

9.99

Summary of Content

ENGINE SECTION ACC ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM A ACC C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Exploded View .......................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................. 4 F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ACC-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495933 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September ACC-2 2012 QUEST ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495934 ACC C D E F G JPBIA5304GB H 1. Accelerator pedal assembly 2. Accelerator pedal bracket A. Locating hole B. Locating pin I : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495935 J REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector. Remove accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: • Never disengage accelerator pedal assembly and bracket. • Never disassemble accelerator lever. Never remove accelerator pedal position sensor from accelerator lever. • Avoid impact from dropping etc. during handling. • Be careful to keep accelerator lever away from water. K L M INSTALLATION Read the following instructions carefully, and install accelerator pedal assembly in the reverse order of removal. • Insert pawl (A) of bracket into locating hole (B) of accelerator pedal assembly to tighten the mounting bolts. N O P JSBIA1415ZZ Revision: 2011 September ACC-3 2012 QUEST ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Inspection INFOID:0000000007495936 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the whole operation range when it is fully depressed and released. • Check accelerator pedal securely returns to the fully released position. • For the electrical inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor, refer to EC-401, "Component Inspection". - CAUTION: When harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-119, "Description". Revision: 2011 September ACC-4 2012 QUEST BODY INTERIOR SECTION ADP AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 CONSULT Function .................................................21 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 24 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 24 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ...................... 25 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit .................... 8 Seat Memory Switch ................................................. 8 Driver Seat Control Unit ............................................ 8 SYSTEM .............................................................. 9 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM ............. 9 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description ................................................... 9 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Schematic ............................................................... 11 Reference Value ......................................................25 Fail-safe ...................................................................29 DTC Index ...............................................................30 Reference Value ......................................................31 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM ... 33 Revision: 2011 September ADP K Wiring Diagram ........................................................33 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 35 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 38 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) ........................................................21 I WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 33 MEMORY FUNCTION ............................................... 14 MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description .......... 15 INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION .......... 19 INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description ................................................. 19 Fail-safe .................................................................. 20 H AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 31 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 35 ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION ..................................... 18 ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description .... 18 G List of ECU Reference .............................................24 MANUAL FUNCTION ................................................ 13 MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description ............ 14 EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION .......................................... 16 EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description .... 17 F Work Flow ................................................................35 L M Description ...............................................................38 Work Procedure .......................................................38 N ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ...................... 39 O Description ...............................................................39 Work Procedure .......................................................39 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 40 Description ...............................................................40 Work Procedure .......................................................40 MEMORY STORING ......................................... 41 Description ...............................................................41 Work Procedure .......................................................41 ADP-1 2012 QUEST P INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING ... 42 LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) ................................ 58 Description .............................................................. 42 Work Procedure ...................................................... 42 Component Function Check .................................. 58 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58 Component Inspection ............................................ 59 SYSTEM SETTING ............................................ 43 Description .............................................................. 43 Work Procedure ...................................................... 43 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 44 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 44 Description .............................................................. 44 DTC Logic ............................................................... 44 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 44 Special Repair Requirement ................................... 44 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 45 DTC Logic ............................................................... 45 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45 B2112 SLIDING MOTOR ................................... 46 DTC Logic ............................................................... 46 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 46 B2113 RECLINING MOTOR .............................. 47 SEAT MEMORY SWITCH ................................. 60 Component Function Check .................................. 60 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60 Component Inspection ............................................ 61 DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH ............................................................. 62 MIRROR SWITCH ..................................................... 62 MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check ... 62 MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 62 MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection ........... 63 CHANGEOVER SWITCH .......................................... 63 CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check ...................................................................... 64 CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ... 64 CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection .......................................................................... 65 DTC Logic ............................................................... 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 47 POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ... 66 B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 48 SLIDING SENSOR ............................................ 67 Description .............................................................. 48 DTC Logic ............................................................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 48 Component Function Check .................................. 67 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67 B2130 EEPROM ................................................ 49 DTC Logic ............................................................... 49 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 49 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 50 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 RECLINING SENSOR ....................................... 69 Component Function Check .................................. 69 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 69 LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) ............................. 71 Component Function Check .................................. 71 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71 DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .............................. 50 DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 50 LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) ............................... 73 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT .......................................................................... 50 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 50 MIRROR SENSOR ............................................ 75 SLIDING SWITCH .............................................. 52 Component Function Check ................................. 52 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 52 Component Inspection ............................................ 53 RECLINING SWITCH ........................................ 54 Component Function Check ................................. 54 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 54 Component Inspection ............................................ 55 LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) .............................. 56 Component Function Check ................................. 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 56 Component Inspection ............................................ 57 Revision: 2011 September Component Function Check .................................. 73 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 75 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 75 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 75 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 76 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check .................................. 76 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 77 SLIDING MOTOR .............................................. 79 Component Function Check .................................. 79 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 79 RECLINING MOTOR ......................................... 81 Component Function Check .................................. 81 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 81 ADP-2 2012 QUEST LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ................................83 Component Function Check .................................. 83 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 83 LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) ..................................85 Component Function Check .................................. 85 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85 DOOR MIRROR MOTOR ...................................87 Component Function Check .................................... 87 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87 Component Inspection ............................................ 88 SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR ............................90 Component Function Check .................................. 90 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 90 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 92 MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE....92 ALL COMPONENT .................................................... 92 ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 92 POWER SEAT ........................................................... 92 POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 92 SEAT SLIDING .......................................................... 92 SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 92 SEAT RECLINING ..................................................... 93 SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 93 SEAT SLIDING ..........................................................96 SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ...................96 SEAT RECLINING .....................................................97 SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure ..............97 A B SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ...........................................97 SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure ....97 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) .............................................97 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure .......97 C DOOR MIRROR .........................................................98 DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................98 D ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ......................................................... 99 E Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................99 INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 100 F Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100 MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE . 101 G Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 102 Description ............................................................. 102 H REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 103 I DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .................... 103 Removal and Installation ....................................... 103 SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ........................................... 93 SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure .... 93 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) ............................................. 94 SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure ...... 94 DOOR MIRROR ......................................................... 94 DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 95 MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE....96 ADP AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 104 Removal and Installation ....................................... 104 SEAT MEMORY SWITCH ............................... 105 K Removal and Installation ....................................... 105 POWER SEAT SWITCH ................................. 106 L Removal and Installation ....................................... 106 ALL COMPONENT .................................................... 96 ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 96 M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-3 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492468 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September ADP-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492469 B C D E F G H I ADP K L JMJIA6177GB A. View with instrument lower panel RH B. removed No. 1. View with seat cushion pad and seat back pad removed Component parts Backside of seat cushion Description Door mirror motor Mirror sensor • Mirror sensor is installed to door mirror. • The resistance of 2 sensors (horizontal and vertical) is changed when door mirror is operated. • Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates door mirror position according to the change of the voltage of 2 sensor input terminals. Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. ADP-5 M N It makes mirror face operate from side to side and up and down with the electric power that automatic drive positioner control unit supplies. Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Door mirror (driver side/ passenger side) Revision: 2011 September C. 2012 QUEST O P COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component parts Description 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Transmit the vehicle speed signal to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 3. Automatic drive positioner control unit Refer to ADP-8, "Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit". CVT sift selector (Detention switch) • Detention switch is installed on CVT shift selector. It is turned OFF when CVT shift selector is in P position. • Driver seat control unit judges that CVT shift selector is in P position if continuity does not exist in this circuit. Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. TCM The following signals are transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. • Shift position signal (P range) • Identification of transmission: CVT Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Combination meter Transmit the vehicle speed signal to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. BCM Recognizes the following status and transmits it to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. • Handle position: LHD • Driver door: OPEN/CLOSE • Ignition switch position: ACC/ON • Door lock: UNLOCK (with Intelligent key or driver side door request switch operation) • Key ID • Starter: CRANKING/OTHER Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. IPDM E/R ON/OFF signal of CVT shift selector (detention switch) is transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Mirror switch • Mirror switch is integrated in door mirror remote control switch. • It operates angle of door mirror face. • It transmits mirror face adjust operation to automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Changeover switch • Changeover switch is integrated in door mirror remote control switch. • Changeover switch has three positions (L, N and R). • It changes operating door mirror motor by transmitting control signal to automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Set switch Refer to ADP-8, "Seat Memory Switch". Door mirror remote control switch Seat memory switch Revision: 2011 September ADP-6 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. 11. Component parts Lifting motor (rear) • Lifting motor (rear) is installed to seat slide cushion frame. • Lifting motor (rear) is activated with driver seat control unit. • Seat lifter (rear) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting sensor (rear) • Lifting sensor (rear) is installed to seat side cushion frame. • The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting (rear) is operated. • Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the lifting (rear) amount of the seat. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting motor (rear) Reclining motor 12. Reclining motor Reclining sensor 13. Sliding motor Sliding sensor 15. • Seat reclining motor is installed to seat back frame. • Seat reclining motor is activated with driver seat control unit. • Seatback is reclined frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. • Reclining sensor is integrated in reclining motor. • The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when the reclining is operated. • Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the reclining amount of the seat. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. A B C D E F G H Refer to ADP-8, "Driver Seat Control Unit". Driver seat control unit Sliding motor 14. Description • Seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame. • Seat sliding motor is activated with driver seat control unit. • Slides the seat frontward/ rearward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. • Sliding sensor is integrated in sliding motor. • The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when sliding is performed. • Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the sliding amount of the seat. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting motor (front) • Lifting motor (front) is installed to seat side cushion frame. • Lifting motor is activated with driver seat control unit. • Seat lifter (front) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting sensor (front) • Lifting sensor (front) is installed in lifting motor (rear). • When lifting motor (rear) operates, pulse signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit from lifting sensor. Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the lift position (rear) of the seat. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting motor (front) I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-7 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. 16. 17. Component parts Description Sliding switch • Sliding switch is equipped to power seat switch on seat cushion side surface. • The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when sliding switch is operated. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Reclining switch • The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when reclining switch is operated. • The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when reclining switch is operated. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting switch (front) • Lifting switch (front) is equipped to power seat switch on seat cushion side surface. • The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting switch (front) is operated. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Lifting switch (rear) • Lifting switch (rear) is equipped to power seat switch on seat cushion side surface. • The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting switch (rear) is operated. Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Power seat switch Front door switch (driver side) Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit • • • • INFOID:0000000007836766 It communicates with driver seat control unit via UART communication. Perform various controls with the instructions of driver seat control unit. Perform the controls of door mirror and seat memory switch. Operates door mirror with the signal from the driver seat control. Seat Memory Switch INFOID:0000000007836767 SET SWITCH It is used for registration and setting change of driving position and Intelligent Key interlock function. SEAT MEMORY SWITCH • The maximum 2 driving positions can be registered by memory switch 1 to 2. • Driving position is set to the registered driving position when memory switch is pressed while operation conditions are satisfied. SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR Memory indicator indicates the status of auto driving position system by turning ON or blinking. Driver Seat Control Unit • • • • • • • • • INFOID:0000000007836768 Main units of automatic drive positioner system. It is connected to the CAN. It communicates with automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. It perform memory function after receiving the door unlock signal from BCM. The address of each part is recorded. Operates each motor of seat to the registered position. Requests the operation of door mirror to automatic drive positioner control unit. Operates the specific seat motor with the signal from power seat switch. Transmits the ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) via UART communication to automatic driver positioner control unit. Revision: 2011 September ADP-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492470 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F G H I ADP K L M N JMJIA5854GB DESCRIPTION The system automatically moves the driver seat and door mirror position by the driver seat control unit and the automatic drive positioner control unit. The driver seat control unit corresponds with the automatic drive positioner control unit by UART communication. Function P Description Manual function The driving position (seat and door mirror position) can be adjusted by using the power seat switch or door mirror remote control switch. Memory function The seat and door mirror move to the stored driving position by pressing seat memory switch (1 or 2). Revision: 2011 September ADP-9 O 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Function Entry/Exit assist function Description Exit On exit, the seat moves backward. Entry On entry, the seat returns from exiting position to the previous driving position. Intelligent Key interlock function Perform memory operation, exiting operation and entry operation by Intelligent Key unlock operation or driver side door request switch unlock operation. Sleep Control Driver seat control unit equips sleep control for reducing power consumption. The system switches to sleep control when all of the following conditions are satisfied. • Ignition switch is OFF. • All devices of auto driving position system are not operating. • 45 seconds timer of driver seat control unit is not operating. • Set switch and memory switch (1 and 2) are OFF. Wake-up Control Sleep control releases when detecting status change in either of the following item. • CAN communication • Power seat switch • Set switch and seat memory switch (1 and 2) Revision: 2011 September ADP-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Schematic INFOID:0000000007492471 A B C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O JMJIA5995GB Revision: 2011 September ADP-11 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > JMJIA5996GB Revision: 2011 September ADP-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > A B C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O JMJIA6122GB P MANUAL FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September ADP-13 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007492472 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMJIA5855GB DESCRIPTION • The driving position (seat and door mirror position) can be adjusted manually with power seat switch and door mirror remote control switch. • The power seat can be operated manually regardless of the ignition switch position. • The door mirrors can be operated manually when ignition switch is in either ACC or ON position. • When power seat switch is operated, operation signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit. Each motor is operated according to operation signal. • When mirror switch and changeover switch are operated, operation signal is transmitted to automatic drive positioner control unit. Mirror motor is operated according to operation signal. MEMORY FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September ADP-14 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007492473 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G H I ADP K L M JMJIA5856GB DESCRIPTION • The driver seat control unit can store the optimum driving positions (seat and door mirror position) for 2 people. If the front seat position is changed, one-touch (pressing desired memory switch) operation allows changing to the other driving position. • When memory switch 1 and 2 are operated, operation signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit. • When driver seat control unit detects that memory switch is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, driver seat control unit operates each motor of driver seat and detects the driver seat position according to signals transmitted from each sensor. Driver seat control unit requests the operation of mirror motor to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. • Automatic drive positioner control unit operates mirror motor, detects the door mirror position according to signal transmitted from mirror sensor, and transmits the detected door mirror position to driver seat control unit via UART communication. • Driver seat control unit stops the operation of each motor when each part reaches the memorized positions. • Driver seat control unit turns memory indicator lamp OFF that is blinking while each motor operates. NOTE: Further information for the memory storage procedure. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September ADP-15 2012 QUEST N O P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Operation Condition Satisfy all of the following items. The memory function is not performed if these items are not satisfied. Item Request status ON* Ignition position Switch inputs • Power seat switch • Door mirror control switch • Set switch • Memory switch OFF (Not operated) CVT shift selector P position Memory function Registered Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH) CONSULT Not connected *: When timer function does not operate. Timer Function • The memory function can be performed for 45 seconds after opening the driver door even if the ignition switch position is in OFF position. • Satisfy all of the following items. The timer function is not performed if these items are not satisfied. Item Request status Ignition position OFF Set switch/memory switch OFF Memory function Registered CVT shift selector P position Front door switch (driver side) OFF CUNSULT Not connected EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September ADP-16 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007492474 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G H JMJIA5857GB I DESCRIPTION • This function slides driver seat toward vehicle rear and facilitates entry/exit of the vehicle. • Seat slide set amount of exit assist function is adjustable. ADP • When driver side door is open while operation conditions are satisfied, driver seat control unit receives front door switch (driver side) signal (open/close) from BCM via CAN communication. Driver seat control unit operates sliding motor and moves driver seat toward vehicle rear to the seat slide set amount when driver K seat control unit detects that driver side door is open. • Driver seat control unit receives sliding sensor position signal from sliding sensor. Driver seat control unit stops the operation of sliding motor when driver seat control unit detects that driver seat is slid to the seat slide set amount. L NOTE: • This function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting). • Further information for the system setting procedure. Refer to ADP-43, "Description". M Operation Condition Satisfy all of the following items. The exit assist function is not performed if these items are not satisfied. Item Ignition position OFF System setting (Entry/exit assist function) ON Initialization O Done Switch inputs • Power seat switch • Door mirror remote control switch • Set switch • Memory switch P OFF (Not operated) CVT shift selector P position Handle position Revision: 2011 September N Request status LHD ADP-17 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Item Request status Transmission CVT CUNSULT Not connected ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007492475 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMJIA5858GB DESCRIPTION • This function allows the driver seat control unit to return the driver seat from the exiting position to the previous driving position, when ignition switch is operated from OFF to ACC. • Entry assist function stops when starter signal is ON while entry assist function is being operated. Entry assist function restarts when starter signal is OFF. • When ignition switch is operated OFF to ACC while operation conditions are satisfied, driver seat control unit receives ACC signal from BCM via CAN communication. Driver seat control unit operates sliding motor when driver seat control unit detects that ignition switch is changed to ACC. • Driver seat control unit receives sliding sensor position signal from sliding sensor. Driver seat control unit stops the operation of sliding motor when driver seat control unit detects that driver seat is returned to the previous driving position from the exiting position. NOTE: • This function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting). • Further information for the system setting procedure. Refer to ADP-43, "Description". Operation Condition Satisfy all of the following items. The entry assist function is not performed if these items are not satisfied. Item Seat Request status The vehicle is not moved after performing the exit assist function. Switch inputs • Power seat switch • Door mirror control switch • Set switch • Memory switch Revision: 2011 September OFF (Not operated) ADP-18 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Item Request status Vehicle speed A 0 km/h (0 MPH) Starter OFF Transmission CVT CONSULT B Not connected INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description C INFOID:0000000007492476 D SYSTEM DIAGRAM E F G H I ADP K JMJIA5859GB DESCRIPTION L • By associating Intelligent Key and automatic drive positioner system, the unlock operation of Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch performs memory function and entry/exit function. • Registration of Intelligent Key interlock function can register a different key ID to the driver seat control unit, one by one, for memory switch 1 and 2. A total of 2 key IDs can be registered. • Driver seat control unit receives door unlock signal and key ID signal from BCM when driver side door is unlocked using Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch. • Driver seat control unit automatically adjusts driver seat and door mirror to the driving position according to key ID. Driver seat performs turnout position and sets to standby status. • In standby status, when ignition switch is operated from OFF to ACC, return operation sets driver seat to the registered position. NOTE: • When another key ID is newly registered to a key switch to which a key ID is already registered, the previously registered key ID is overwritten and becomes unusable. • When starter signal turns ON during return operation, the operation is interrupted, starter signal turns from ON to OFF, and operation restarts. • Further information for Intelligent Key interlock function. Refer to ADP-42, "Description". Operation Condition Satisfy all of the following items. The Intelligent Key interlock function is not performed if these items are not satisfied. Revision: 2011 September ADP-19 2012 QUEST M N O P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Item Request status Ignition position OFF Intelligent key interlock function Registered Switch inputs • Power seat switch • Door mirror control switch • Set switch • Memory switch OFF (Not operated) CVT shift selector P position Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492477 The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed. Operating in fail-safe mode Related DTC Diagnosis CAN communication U1000 ADP-44, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 ADP-45, "DTC Logic" EEPROM B2130 ADP-49, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally. UART communication B2128 ADP-48, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally. Seat sliding output B2112 ADP-46, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally. Seat reclining output B2113 ADP-47, "DTC Logic" Malfunction Item Only manual functions operate normally. Revision: 2011 September ADP-20 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) CONSULT Function A INFOID:0000000007492478 The automatic drive positioner system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation using CONSULT. B APPLICATION ITEMS C Diagnostic mode Description Ecu Identification Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit. Self Diagnostic Result Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results. Data Monitor Displays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat control unit in real time. Active Test Drives each output unit. Work support Changes the setting for each system function. D E F SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR Monitor Item G Unit Main Signals Selection From Menu Contents H STARTER SW “ON/OFF” × × Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal. SET SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal. MEMORY SW 1 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal. MEMORY SW 2 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal. DETENT SW “ON/OFF” × × The CVT shift selector position “OFF (P position) / ON (other than P position)” judged from the detention switch signal. “LOCK/UNLOCK” × × NOTE: This item is indicated, but not monitored. SLIDE SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) signal. SLIDE SW–RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward) signal. STEERING STATUS RECLN SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward) signal. RECLN SW–RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward) signal. LIFT FR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (up) signal. LIFT FR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (down) signal. LIFT RR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (up) signal. LIFT RR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (down) signal. MIR CON SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (up) signal. MIR CON SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (down) signal. MIR CON SW–RH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (right) signal. Revision: 2011 September ADP-21 2012 QUEST I ADP K L M N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Unit Main Signals Selection From Menu MIR CON SW–LH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (left) signal. MIR CHNG SW–R “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to right) signal. MIR CHNG SW–L “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to left) signal. VEHICLE SPEED — × × Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h]. Monitor Item Contents P RANG SW CAN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the P range switch signal. R RANGE (CAN) “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the R range switch signal. DOOR SW–FL “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the front door switch (driver side) signal. DOOR SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door switch (front passenger side) signal. IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the ACC switch signal. KEY ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the key on switch signal. KEYLESS ID — × × Key ID status judged from the key ID signal. KYLS DR UNLK “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the driver side door unlock actuator output switch signal. VHCL SPEED (ABS) “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from vehicle speed signal. HANDLE “RHD/LHD” × × RHD/LHD status judged from handle position signal. TRANSMISSION “AT or CVT/ MT” × × AT or CVT/MT status judged from transmission. SLIDE PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. RECLN PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. LIFT FR PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. LIFT RR PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. MIR/SEN RH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/ down is displayed. MIR/SEN RH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/ right is displayed. MIR/SEN LH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down is displayed. MIR/SEN LH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right is displayed. ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: When driving vehicle, do not perform active test. Test item Description SEAT SLIDE Activates/deactivates the sliding motor. SEAT RECLINING Activates/deactivates the reclining motor. Revision: 2011 September ADP-22 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item Description SEAT LIFTER FR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front). SEAT LIFTER RR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear). MIRROR MOTOR RH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side). MIRROR MOTOR LH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side). MEMORY SW INDCTR Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator. A B C WORK SUPPORT Work item Content Item D 40 mm SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be selected from 3 items. 80 mm 150 mm EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected: ON (operated) – OFF (not operated) E ON OFF F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-23 2012 QUEST BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007492479 ECU Reference BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" BCS-59, "DTC Index" Revision: 2011 September ADP-24 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT A Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492480 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Monitor Item SET SW B Condition Set switch MEMORY SW1 Memory switch 1 MEMORY SW2 Memory switch 2 SLIDE SW–FR Sliding switch (forward) SLIDE SW–RR Sliding switch (backward) RECLN SW–FR Reclining switch (forward) RECLN SW–RR Reclining switch (backward) LIFT FR SW–UP Lifting switch front (up) LIFT FR SW–DN Lifting switch front (down) LIFT RR SW–UP Lifting switch rear (up) LIFT RR SW–DN Lifting switch rear (down) MIR CON SW–UP Mirror switch MIR CON SW–DN Mirror switch MIR CON SW–RH Mirror switch MIR CON SW–LH Mirror switch MIR CHNG SW–R Changeover switch MIR CHNG SW–L Changeover switch DETENT SW CVT shift selector STARTER SW Ignition position Revision: 2011 September Value/Status Push ON Release OFF Push ON Release OFF Push ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Up ON Other than the above OFF Down ON Other than the above OFF Right ON Other than the above OFF Left ON Other than the above OFF Right ON Other than the above OFF Left ON Other than the above OFF P position OFF Other than the above ON Cranking ON Other than the above OFF ADP-25 C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition Value/Status Forward SLIDE PULSE RECLN PULSE Seat sliding Seat reclining The numeral value decreases * Backward The numeral value increases* Other than the above No change to numeral value* Forward The numeral value decreases* Backward The numeral value increases * No change to numeral value* Other than the above LIFT FR PULSE Seat lifter (front) Up The numeral value decreases * Down The numeral value increases * No change to numeral value* Other than the above LIFT RR PULSE Seat lifter (rear) Up The numeral value decreases * Down The numeral value increases * No change to numeral value* Other than the above * MIR/SEN RH U–D Door mirror (passenger side) Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) MIR/SEN RH R–L Door mirror (passenger side) Change between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) MIR/SEN LH U–D Door mirror (driver side) Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) MIR/SEN LH R–L Door mirror (driver side) Change between 0.6 (close to left edge) 3.4 (close to right edge) STEERING STATUS Steering lock unit VEHICLE SPEED The condition of vehicle speed is displayed P RANG SW CAN CVT shift selector R RANGE (CAN) CVT shift selector DOOR SW-FL Driver door Unlock NOTE: This item is indicated, but not monitored. km/h P position ON Other than the above OFF R position ON Other than the above OFF Open ON Close OFF Open ON Close OFF ON position ON Other than the above OFF ACC or ON position ON Other than the above OFF DOOR SW-FR Passenger door IGN ON SW Ignition switch ACC ON SW Ignition switch KEYLESS ID UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed KYLS DR UNLK Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch VHCL SPEED (ABS) Can signal from ABS HANDLE The BCM for handle position is displayed TRANSMISSION Transmission type is displayed 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 ON ON OFF OFF Received ON Not received OFF LHD RHD AT or CVT MT : The value at the position attained when the battery is connected is regarded as 32768. Revision: 2011 September ADP-26 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TERMINAL LAYOUT A B C JMJIA3903ZZ D PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) + - 1 (R/Y) — E Description Signal name CAN-H Condition Input/ output Voltage (V) F — — — G 2 (R) Ground UART communication (TX/RX) Input H Ignition switch ON JMJIA1391ZZ I ADP 4 (R/L) Ground Reclining sensor signal Operate Input Seat reclining K JMJIA0119ZZ Other than the above 6 (R/W) 7 (R/G) 8 (SB) 9 (L) 10 (L/B) Ground Memory switch 2 signal Ground Memory indicator 2 signal Ground Sliding switch backward signal Ground Ground Reclining switch backward signal Lifting switch (front) down signal Revision: 2011 September Input Output Input Input Input Memory switch 2 Memory indicator 2 Sliding switch Reclining switch Lifting switch (front) ADP-27 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Press 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Illuminate 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (backward) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (backward) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (down) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 L M N O P 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + - 11 (L/W) Ground 12 (L/R) Ground 17 (V) — 18 (B/W) Ground Description Signal name Lifting switch (rear) down signal Sensor power supply CAN-L Condition Input/ output Input Lifting switch (rear) Voltage (V) Operate (down) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Output — 9 – 16 — — — Operate Sliding sensor signal Input Seat sliding JMJIA0119ZZ Other than the above 19 (B/R) Ground Lifting sensor (front) signal 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Operate Input Seat lifting (front) JMJIA0119ZZ Other than the above 20 (B/L) Ground Lifting sensor (rear) signal Input Seat lifting (rear) 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Operate JMJIA0119ZZ Other than the above 22 (W/L) Ground Memory switch 1 signal 23 (W/R) Ground Memory indicator 1 signal 24 (V/W) 25 (Y/B) Ground Ground Sliding switch forward signal Reclining switch forward signal Revision: 2011 September Input Memory switch 1 Output Memory indicator 1 Input Input Sliding switch Reclining switch ADP-28 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Press 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Illuminate 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (forward) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (forward) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 26 (Y/R) - Ground Set switch signal Input Ground Battery power supply Input Ground Sliding motor backward output signal 33 (R) 38 (GR) 39 (Y) 40 (W) 41 (V) Input Ground 28 (G) 36 (L) Lifting switch (front) up signal Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 42 (P/B) Ground 43 (LG) Ground Reclining motor forward output signal Lifting motor (front) down output signal Sliding motor forward output signal Reclining motor backward output signal Lifting motor (front) up output signal Lifting motor (rear) up output signal Lifting motor (rear) down output signal Ground Condition Input/ output Input Ground 35 (G) Signal name A Lifting switch (rear) up signal 27 (Y/L) 34 (B) Description Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Lifting switch (front) Lifting switch (rear) Set switch Seat reclining Seat lifting (front) Seat sliding Seat reclining Seat lifting (front) Seat lifting (rear) Seat lifting (rear) — B Operate (up) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Operate (up) 0 – 1 Other than the above 9 – 16 Press 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 — Seat sliding Voltage (V) C D E 9 – 16 Operate (backward) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (forward) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (down) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (forward) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (backward) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (up) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (up) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (down) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 — Fail-safe F G H I ADP K L M N O P 0 – 1 INFOID:0000000007492481 The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed. Revision: 2011 September ADP-29 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Operating in fail-safe mode Related DTC Diagnosis CAN communication U1000 ADP-44, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 ADP-45, "DTC Logic" EEPROM B2130 ADP-49, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally. UART communication B2128 ADP-48, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally. Seat sliding output B2112 ADP-46, "DTC Logic" Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally. Seat reclining output B2113 ADP-47, "DTC Logic" Malfunction Item Only manual functions operate normally. DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492482 Timing* CONSULT display Item Reference page Current malfunction Previous malfunction CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] 0 1-39 CAN communication ADP-44, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] 0 1-39 Control unit ADP-45, "DTC Logic" SEAT SLIDE [B2112] 0 1-39 Seat slide motor output ADP-46, "DTC Logic" SEAT RECLINING [B2113] 0 1-39 Seat reclining motor output ADP-47, "DTC Logic" UART COMM [B2128] 0 1-39 UART communication ADP-48, "DTC Logic" EEPROM [B2130] 0 1-39 EEPROM ADP-49, "DTC Logic" *: • 0: Current malfunction is present • 1-39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. The numeral value increases by one at each IGN ON to OFF cycle from 1 to 39. The counter remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. However, the counter is reset to 1 if any malfunction is detected again, the normal operation is resumed and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON. Revision: 2011 September ADP-30 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT A Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492483 TERMINAL LAYOUT B C D JMJIA3671ZZ E PHYSICAL VALUES F Terminal No. (wire color) + - 2 (Y) Ground 3 (V) Ground Description Signal name Changeover switch RH signal Mirror switch up signal Condition Input/ Output Input Input Voltage (V) G Changeover switch position Mirror switch RH 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Operated (up) 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Operated (left) 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 H I ADP 4 (LG) Ground 5 (R) Ground Door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/down signal Input Door mirror RH position Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) 6 (V) Ground Door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down signal Input Door mirror LH position Change between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) Mirror switch left signal Input Mirror switch K L M 8 (GR) Ground UART communication (TX/RX) Output Ignition switch ON N JMJIA1391ZZ 10 (BR) 11 (W) Ground Ground Door mirror motor (passenger side) up output signal Door mirror motor (passenger side) left output signal Revision: 2011 September Output Output Door mirror RH Door mirror RH ADP-31 Operate (up) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (left) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 O P 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (wire color) + Description - Signal name 12 (Y) Ground Door mirror motor (driver side) down/right output signal 14 (GR) Ground 15 (O) Ground Changeover switch LH signal Mirror switch down signal Condition Input/ Output Output Input Input Door mirror (LH) Changeover switch position Mirror switch Voltage (V) Operate (down/right) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 LH 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Operate (down) 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 Operate (right) 0 – 1 Other than the above 4 – 6 16 (W) Ground 17 (BR) Ground Door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/right signal Input Door mirror RH position Change between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) 18 (SB) Ground Door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right signal Input Door mirror LH position Change between 0.6 (close to left edge) 3.4 (close to right edge) 20 (P) Ground Sensor ground 21 (Y) Ground Door mirror motor sensor power supply Ground Door mirror motor (passenger side) down/right output signal 22 (V) 23 (G) Ground Mirror switch right signal Door mirror motor (driver side) up output signal 24 (W) Ground 25 (R) Ground Battery power supply 30 (B/W) Ground Ground Door mirror motor (driver side) left output signal Revision: 2011 September Input Mirror switch — — 0 – 1 Input — 4 – 6 Output Output Output Door mirror (RH) Door mirror (LH) Door mirror (LH) Operate (down/right) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (up) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Operate (left) 9 – 16 Other than the above 0 – 1 Input — 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 ADP-32 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492484 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P JCJWA1525GB Revision: 2011 September ADP-33 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCJWA1526GB Revision: 2011 September ADP-34 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492485 B OVERALL SEQUENCE C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P JMJIA1702GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September ADP-35 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM Check “Self Diagnostic Result” with CONSULT. Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index" Is any symptom described and any DTC is displayed? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 3. Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 6. Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed.>>GO TO 4. 3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. >> GO TO 6. 4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Check normal operating condition. Refer to ADP-102, "Description". Is the incident normal operation? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 7. 6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform the confirmation procedure for the detected DTC. Is the DTC displayed? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". 7.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK Perform the component function check for the isolated malfunctioning point. >> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Isolate the malfunctioning point by performing the diagnosis procedure relevant to the symptom during the component diagnosis. >> GO TO 9. 9.REPARE OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. >> GO TO 10. 10.FINAL CHECK Perform the DTC confirmation procedure (if DTC is detected) or component function check (if no DTC is detected) again, and then check that the malfunction can be repaired securely. Are all malfunctions corrected? Revision: 2011 September ADP-36 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > YES >> INSPECTION END Symptom is detected.>> GO TO 5. DTC is detected.>> GO TO 6. A B C D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-37 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL Description INFOID:0000000007492486 Each function is reset to the following condition when the battery terminal is disconnected. Function Memory (Seat, mirror) Condition Erased Procedure Perform storing Perform initialization Entry/exit assist Intelligent Key interlock *: ON Erased Set slide amount* Perform initialization Perform storing Default value is 40 mm. NOTE: Notice that disconnecting the battery when detected DTC are present will erase the DTC memory. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007492487 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 2. 2.MEMORY STORAGE Perform memory storage. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 3. 3.INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORAGE Perform Intelligent Key interlock storage. Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 4. 4.SYSTEM SETTING Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure". >> END Revision: 2011 September ADP-38 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Description A INFOID:0000000007492488 B Each function is reset to the following condition when the driver seat control unit is replaced. Function Memory (Seat, mirror) Condition Erased Procedure C Perform storing Perform initialization Entry/exit assist Intelligent Key interlock *: ON Erased D Set slide amount* Perform initialization E Perform storing Default value is 40 mm. NOTE: Notice that disconnecting the battery when detected DTC are present will erase the DTC memory. Work Procedure F INFOID:0000000007492489 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION G Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure". H >> GO TO 2. 2.MEMORY STORAGE I Perform memory storage. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 3. ADP 3.INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORAGE Perform Intelligent Key interlock storage. Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure". K >> GO TO 4. 4.SYSTEM SETTING L Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure". M >> END N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-39 2012 QUEST SYSTEM INITIALIZATION < BASIC INSPECTION > SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Description INFOID:0000000007492490 Always perform the initialization when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is replaced. The entry/exit assist function will not operate normally if no initialization is performed. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007492491 1.STEP 1 There are two initialization methods. Which method do you use? With door switch>>GO TO 2. With vehicle speed>>GO TO 3. 2. STEP 2-A (WITH DOOR SWITCH) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch from ACC to OFF position. Front door switch (driver side) is ON (open) → OFF (close) → ON (open). >> END 3. STEP 2-B (WITH VEHICLE SPEED) Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH). >> END Revision: 2011 September ADP-40 2012 QUEST MEMORY STORING < BASIC INSPECTION > MEMORY STORING A Description INFOID:0000000007492492 Always perform the memory storage when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is replaced. The memory function will not operate normally if no memory storage is performed. Work Procedure B INFOID:0000000007492493 C Two positions for the driver seat and outside mirror can be stored for memory operation by following procedure. NOTE: If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted. D 1.STEP 1 Check the following conditions. • Ignition switch: ON • CVT shift selector: P position E F >> GO TO 2. 2.STEP 2 1. 2. 3. 4. G Adjust driver seat and outside mirror position manually. Push set switch. NOTE: • Memory indicator for which driver seat position is already retained in memory is illuminated for 5 sec- H onds. • Memory indicator for which driver seat position is not retained in memory is illuminated for 0.5 second. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) for at least 1 second within 5 seconds after pushing the set switch. I NOTE: • To enter driver seat positions into blank memory, memory indicator will be turned on for 5 seconds. • To modify driver seat positions, memory indicator will be turned OFF for 0.5 second, then turned ON for ADP 5 seconds. Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation. K >> END L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-41 2012 QUEST INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING < BASIC INSPECTION > INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING Description INFOID:0000000007492494 Always perform the Intelligent Key interlock function storage when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is replaced. The Intelligent Key interlock function will not operate normally if no memory storage is performed. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007492495 Performing the following operation associates the registered driving position with Intelligent Key. When driver door unlock operation is performed by Intelligent Key or driver door request switch, display of the registered driving position and turnout operation can be performed. 1.STEP 1 Check the following conditions. • Ignition switch: OFF • Initialization: done • Driving position: registered >> GO TO 2. 2.STEP 2 1. 2. 3. Push set switch. NOTE: Memory indicator for which driver seat position is already retained in memory is illuminated for 5 seconds. Push the Intelligent Key unlock button within 5 seconds after pushing memory switch (while the memory indicator is turned ON). NOTE: From the time registration is performed, the applicable memory indicator blinks for 5 seconds. Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation and Intelligent Key interlock operation. >> END Revision: 2011 September ADP-42 2012 QUEST SYSTEM SETTING < BASIC INSPECTION > SYSTEM SETTING A Description INFOID:0000000007492496 The settings of the automatic driving positioner system can be changed, using CONSULT and the set switch. Always check the settings before and after disconnecting the battery terminal or replacing driver seat control unit. B C SETTING CHANGE ×: Applicable Item Content CONSULT Set switch Factory setting Amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be selected from 3 items. [40 mm/80 mm/150 mm] x — 40 mm Entry/exit assist (seat) Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected: ON (operated) – OFF (not operated) x x ON E F Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007492497 1.STEP 1 G There are three way of setting method. Which method do you choose? With CONSULT>>GO TO 2. With set switch>>GO TO 3. H 2.STEP 2-A (WITH CONSULT) 1. 2. 3. 4. D I Select “Work support”. Select “EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING” then touch display to change between ON and OFF. EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING: Entry/exit assist (seat) Select “SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET” and touch either of “40 mm”, “80 mm”, or “150 mm”. Then touch “OK”. ADP K >> END 3.STEP 2-B (WITH SET SWITCH) 1. 2. - Turn ignition switch OFF. Push set switch and hold for more than 10 seconds, then confirm blinking of the memory switch indicator. Entry/exit assist are ON: Memory switch indicator blink two times. Entry/exit assist are OFF: Memory switch indicator blink once. L M >> END N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-43 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007492498 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492499 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. U1000 CONSULT display description CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detecting condition • Driver seat control unit cannot communicate to other control units. • When driver seat control unit cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more. Possible cause CAN communication system DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.STEP 1 Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. >> GO TO 2. 2.STEP 2 Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to ADP-44, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492500 Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000007492501 Refer to ADP-40, "Description". Revision: 2011 September ADP-44 2012 QUEST U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492502 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition CONTROL UNIT (CAN) When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of driver seat control unit. Possible cause C U1010 Driver seat control unit D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492503 1.REPLACE DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT E When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace driver seat control unit. >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-45 2012 QUEST B2112 SLIDING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2112 SLIDING MOTOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492504 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2112 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause The driver seat control unit detects the output of slid• Driver seat control unit ing motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more • Slide motor harness is shorted even if the sliding switch is not input. SEAT SLIDE DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to ADP-46, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492505 1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding motor connector and driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground. (+) Sliding motor Connector (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 0 Terminals 34 B561 38 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 0–1 Terminals B551 34 38 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September ADP-46 2012 QUEST B2113 RECLINING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2113 RECLINING MOTOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492506 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2113 B Trouble diagnosis name SEAT RECLINING DTC detecting condition Possible cause The driver seat control unit detects the output of reclining motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more even if the reclining switch is not input. • Driver seat control unit • Reclining motor harness is shorted C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to ADP-47, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492507 G 1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT) 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect reclining motor connector and driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground. I (+) Reclining motor Connector (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminals 35 B554 Ground 39 ADP 0 K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. L 2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. M (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Voltage (V) N Ground 0–1 O Terminals B551 35 39 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". P 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September ADP-47 2012 QUEST B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE Description INFOID:0000000007492508 Driver seat control unit performs UART communication with the automatic drive positioner control unit using 1 communication lines. Driver seat control unit receives the operation signals of door mirror remote control switch and the position signals of door mirror sensor from the automatic drive positioner control unit and transmits the operation request signal. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492509 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2128 Trouble diagnosis name UART COMM DTC detecting condition Possible cause The communication between driver seat control unit and auto drive positioner control unit is interrupted for a period of time. • UART communication line (UART communication line is open or shorted) • Driver seat control unit • Automatic drive positioner control unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to ADP-48, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492510 1.CHECK UART COMMUNICATION LINE CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 2 M75 8 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 2 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-48 2012 QUEST B2130 EEPROM < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2130 EEPROM A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492511 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2130 B Trouble diagnosis name EEPROM DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Driver seat control unit detected CPU malfunction. Driver seat control unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT. Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to ADP-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure E F INFOID:0000000007492512 G 1.REPLACE DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". H >> INSPECTION END I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-49 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492513 NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed with CONSULT. 1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following fusible link is not fusing. Signal name Fusible link No. Battery power supply L (40 A) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing affected circuit. 2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. (+) Driver seat control unit Connector Terminals B551 33 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness between driver seat control unit and fusible link L (40 A). NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker and replace it if necessary. 3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between the driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B551 43 Continuity Ground Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492514 NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed with CONSULT. 1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following fusible link is not fusing. Signal name Fusible link No. Battery power supply L (40 A) Revision: 2011 September ADP-50 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit. A 2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. B C (+) Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminals M104 25 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness between driver seat control unit and fusible link L (40 A). NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker and replace it if necessary. E F 3.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal M104 30 Ground D G Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-51 2012 QUEST SLIDING SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING SWITCH Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492515 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “SLIDE SW-FR”, “SLIDE SW-RR” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check sliding switch signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition SLIDE SW-FR Sliding switch (forward) SLIDE SW-RR Sliding switch (backward) Status Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-52, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492516 1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power seat switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Terminals 8 B559 24 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 8 B552 4. Power seat switch 8 B559 24 Continuity Terminal Existed 24 Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector B552 Continuity Terminal Ground 8 Not existed 24 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September ADP-52 2012 QUEST SLIDING SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH A Refer to ADP-53, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". B Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492517 C 1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch (sliding switch) connector. Check continuity between power seat switch (sliding switch) terminals under the following conditions. D E Power seat switch (Sliding switch) Condition Terminal 8 Sliding switch (backward) 43 24 Sliding switch (forward) Continuity Operate Existed Release Not existed Operate Existed Release Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-53 2012 QUEST RECLINING SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > RECLINING SWITCH Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492518 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “RECLN SW-FR”, “RECLN SW-RR” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check reclining switch signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition RECLINE SW-FR Reclining switch (forward) RECLINE SW-RR Reclining switch (backward) Status Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-54, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492519 1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power seat switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Terminals 9 B559 25 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 9 B552 4. Power seat switch 9 B559 25 Continuity Terminal Existed 25 Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector B552 Continuity Terminal Ground 9 Not existed 25 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September ADP-54 2012 QUEST RECLINING SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH A Refer to ADP-55, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". B Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492520 C 1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch (reclining switch) connector. Check continuity between power seat switch (reclining switch) terminals under the following conditions. D E Power seat switch (Reclining switch) Condition Terminal 9 Reclining switch (backward) 43 25 Reclining switch (forward) Continuity Operate Existed Release Not existed Operate Existed Release Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-55 2012 QUEST LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492521 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “LIFT FR SW-UP”, “LIFT FR SW-DN” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check lifting switch (front) signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition LIFT FR SW-UP Lifting switch front (up) LIFT FR SW-DN Lifting switch front (down) Status Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492522 1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power seat switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Terminals 10 B559 26 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 10 B552 4. Power seat switch 10 B559 26 Continuity Terminal Existed 26 Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector B552 Continuity Terminal Ground 10 Not existed 26 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September ADP-56 2012 QUEST LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) A Refer to ADP-57, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". B Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492523 C 1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch (lifting switch front) connector. Check continuity between power seat switch (lifting switch front) terminals under the following conditions. D E Power seat switch (lifting switch front) Condition Terminal 10 Lifting switch front (down) 43 26 Lifting switch front (up) Continuity Operate Existed Release Not existed Operate Existed Release Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-57 2012 QUEST LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492524 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “LIFT RR SW-UP”, “LIFT RR SW-DN” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check lifting switch (rear) signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition LIFT RR SW-UP Lifting switch rear (up) LIFT RR SW-DN Lifting switch rear (down) Status Operate ON Release OFF Operate ON Release OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-58, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492525 1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power seat switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Terminals 11 B559 27 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 11 B552 4. Power seat switch 11 B559 27 Continuity Terminal Existed 27 Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector B552 Continuity Terminal Ground 11 Not existed 27 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September ADP-58 2012 QUEST LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) A Refer to ADP-59, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". B Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492526 C 1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch (lifting switch rear) connector. Check continuity between power seat switch (lifting switch rear) terminals under the following conditions. D E Power seat switch (lifting switch rear) Condition Terminal 11 Lifting switch rear (down) 43 27 Lifting switch rear (up) Continuity Operate Existed Release Not existed Operate Existed Release Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation". F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-59 2012 QUEST SEAT MEMORY SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SEAT MEMORY SWITCH Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492527 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “MEMORY SW 1”, “MEMORY SW 2”, “SET SW” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check seat memory switch signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition MEMORY SW 1 Memory switch 1 MEMORY SW 2 Memory switch 2 SET SW Set switch Status Push ON Release OFF Push ON Release OFF Push ON Release OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-60, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492528 1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground. (+) Seat memory switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 4–6 Terminals 1 D13 2 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness connector. Driver seat control unit Seat memory switch Connector Terminal B552 22 Connector 6 Continuity 2 D13 28 4. Terminal 1 Existed 3 Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-60 2012 QUEST SEAT MEMORY SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Continuity Terminal 6 B552 A Ground 22 Not existed B 28 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. C 3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT D Check continuity between seat memory switch harness connector and ground. E Seat memory switch Connector Terminal D13 4 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. G 4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH Refer to ADP-61, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection H I INFOID:0000000007492529 1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH 1. 2. 3. ADP Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch connector. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals under the following conditions. Seat memory switch Condition Terminal 3 K Continuity L 1 2 F Memory switch 1 4 Memory switch 2 Set switch Push Release Push Release Push Release Existed Not existed Existed M Not existed Existed N Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation". O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-61 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH MIRROR SWITCH MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492530 1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH FUNCTION Check the operation on “MIR CON SW–UP/DN” and “MIR CON SW–RH/LH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Monitor item Condition MIR CON SW-UP/DN MIR CON SW-RH/LH When operating the mirror switch toward the up or down side. : ON Other than the above. : OFF When operating the mirror switch toward the right or left side. : ON Other than the above. : OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-62, "MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492531 1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground. (+) Door mirror remote control switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 4–6 Terminal 4 12 D14 13 15 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror remote control switch harness connector. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal Door mirror remote control switch Connector 3 M75 4 15 Continuity 15 D14 16 4. Terminal 13 12 Existed 4 Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-62 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Continuity Terminal 3 Ground 4 M75 A B Not existed 15 16 C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. D 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground. Door mirror remote control switch Connector Terminal D14 7 Ground E Continuity F Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. G 4.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH H Check door mirror remote control switch. Refer to ADP-63, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. I MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection ADP INFOID:0000000007492532 1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH K 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals under the following conditions. Door mirror remote control switch Condition Terminal Continuity M RIGHT 4 Other than the above DOWN 12 7 Mirror switch 13 Other than the above LEFT Other than the above UP 15 Other than the above Existed Not existed Existed Not existed Existed Existed Not existed CHANGEOVER SWITCH ADP-63 O Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Revision: 2011 September N 2012 QUEST P DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492533 1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH FUNCTION Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW-R” or “MIR CHNG SW-L” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Monitor item Condition MIR CHNG SW-R/L When operating the changeover toward the right or left side. : ON Other than the above. : OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-64, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492534 1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground. (+) Door mirror remote control switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) Ground 4–6 Terminal 10 D14 11 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror remote control switch harness connector. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M75 4. Door mirror remote control switch Terminal Connector 2 Terminal 11 D14 14 10 Continuity Existed Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M75 Continuity Terminal Ground 2 Not existed 14 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-64 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Door mirror remote control switch Connector Terminal D14 7 Ground Continuity Existed B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. C 4.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH Check door mirror remote control switch. Refer to ADP-65, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection D E INFOID:0000000007492535 1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals under the following conditions. Door mirror remote control switch Condition Terminal LEFT 10 7 A Changeover switch 11 Other than the above RIGHT Other than the above Continuity G H Existed Not existed I Existed Not existed ADP Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-65 2012 QUEST POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492536 1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch connector. Check continuity between power seat switch harness connector and ground. Power seat switch Connector Terminal B559 43 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-66 2012 QUEST SLIDING SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING SENSOR A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492537 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “SLIDE PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check sliding sensor signal under the following conditions. C Monitor item Condition SLIDE PULSE * Seat sliding Value Operate (forward) Change (increase)* Operate (backward) Change (decrease)* Release No change* E : The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768. Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-67, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492538 G 1.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. H (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Signal (V) (Reference value) Condition I Terminals ADP Operate B552 18 Ground K Seat sliding JMJIA0119ZZ L Other than the above 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding sensor connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Sliding motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 18 B561 18 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-67 2012 QUEST P SLIDING SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 18 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground. (+) Sliding motor Connector Terminals B561 12 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding motor harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Sliding motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 12 B561 12 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 12 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 5.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between sliding motor harness connector and ground. Sliding motor Connector Terminal B561 43 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding motor. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-68 2012 QUEST RECLINING SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > RECLINING SENSOR A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492539 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “RECLN PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check reclining sensor signal under the following conditions. C Monitor item Condition RECLN PULSE * Seat reclining Value Operate (forward) Change (increase)* Operate (backward) Change (decrease)* Release No change* E : The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768. Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-69, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492540 G 1.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. H (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Signal (V) (Reference value) Condition I Terminals ADP Operate B552 4 Ground K Seat reclining JMJIA0119ZZ L Other than the above 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR CIRCUIT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and reclining motor connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Reclining motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 4 B554 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-69 2012 QUEST P RECLINING SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 4 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground. (+) Reclining motor Connector Terminals B554 12 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Reclining motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 12 B554 12 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 12 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 5.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and ground. Reclining motor Connector Terminal B554 43 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace reclining motor. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-70 2012 QUEST LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492541 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “LIFT FR PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check the lifting sensor (front) signal under the following conditions. C Monitor item Condition LIFT FR PULSE * Seat lifting (front) Value Operate (up) Change (increase)* Operate (down) Change (decrease)* Release No change* E : The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768. Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-71, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492542 G 1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) SIGNAL 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. H (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Signal (V) (Reference value) Condition I Terminals ADP B552 19 Ground Operate Seat Lifting (front) K JMJIA0119ZZ L Other than the above 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and lifting motor (front) connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Lifting motor (front) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 19 B555 19 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-71 2012 QUEST P LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 19 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground. (+) Lifting motor (front) Connector Terminals B555 12 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Lifting motor (front) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 12 B555 12 Continuity Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 12 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground. Lifting motor (front) Connector Terminal B555 43 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (front). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-72 2012 QUEST LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492543 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “LIFT RR PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check lifting sensor (rear) signal under the following conditions. C Monitor item Condition LIFT RR PULSE * Seat lifting (rear) Value Operate (up) Change (increase)* Operate (down) Change (decrease)* Release No change* E : The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768. Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-73, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492544 G 1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) SIGNAL 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. H (+) Driver seat control unit Connector (-) Signal (V) (Reference value) Condition I Terminals ADP B552 20 Ground Operate Seat Lifting (rear) K JMJIA0119ZZ L Other than the above 0 – 1 or 4 – 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) CIRCUIT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and lifting motor (rear) connector. Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Lifting motor (rear) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 20 B556 20 Continuity Existed Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September ADP-73 2012 QUEST P LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 20 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect driver seat control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground. (+) Lifting motor (rear) Connector Terminals B556 12 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector. Driver seat control unit 4. Lifting motor (rear) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B552 12 B556 12 Continuity Existed Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal B552 12 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground. Lifting motor (rear) Connector Terminal B556 43 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-74 2012 QUEST MIRROR SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > MIRROR SENSOR A DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492545 B 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “MIR/SEN LH U-D”, “MIR/SEN LH R-L” in “Data monitor” with CONSULT. Check mirror sensor (driver side) signal under the following condition. Monitor item Condition C Value D Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) MIR/SEN LH U-D Door mirror (driver side) E Change between 0.6 [V] (close to left edge) 3.4 [V] (close to right edge) MIR/SEN LH R-L Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-75, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". F DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492546 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. G H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground. I (+) Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminals D43 23 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 4–6 K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. L 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. ADP Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector. M N Automatic drive positioner control unit 4. Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M75 21 D43 23 Continuity Existed O Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. P Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal M75 21 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-75 2012 QUEST MIRROR SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector. Automatic drive positioner control unit 4. Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M75 20 D43 24 Continuity Existed Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal M75 20 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness connector. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal Connector 6 M75 2. Door mirror (driver side) 21 D43 18 Continuity Terminal Existed 22 Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M75 Continuity Terminal Ground 6 Not existed 18 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace door mirror sensor (built in driver side door mirror). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492547 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “MIR/SEN RH U-D”, “MIR/SEN RH R-L” in “Data monitor” with CONSULT. Check the mirror sensor (passenger side) signal under the following conditions. Monitor item Condition MIR/SEN RH U-D Door mirror (passenger side) MIR/SEN RH R-L Value Change between 3.4 [V] (close to peak) 0.6 [V] (close to valley) Change between 3.4 [V] (close to left edge) 0.6 [V] (close to right edge) Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September ADP-76 2012 QUEST MIRROR SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Refer to ADP-77, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". A PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492548 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground. C (+) Door mirror (passenger side) Connector Terminals D3 23 (-) Voltage (V) D Ground 4–6 E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. F 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector. G H Automatic drive positioner control unit 4. Door mirror (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M75 21 D3 23 Continuity Existed I Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. ADP Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal M75 21 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. K L 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector. M N Automatic drive positioner control unit 4. Door mirror (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M75 20 D3 24 Continuity Existed O Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. P Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Terminal M75 20 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-77 2012 QUEST MIRROR SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M75 2. Door mirror (passenger side) Terminal Connector 5 Terminal 21 D3 17 22 Continuity Existed Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector M75 Continuity Terminal Ground 5 Not existed 17 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace door mirror sensor (built in passenger side door mirror). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-78 2012 QUEST SLIDING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING MOTOR A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492549 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “SEAT SLIDE” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT. Check the sliding motor operation. C Test item Description OFF SEAT SLIDE Stop FR Seat sliding D Forward RR Backward Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-79, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492550 F 1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Active test” (“SEAT SLIDE”) with CONSULT. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground. H (+) I Sliding motor Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminals 34 B561 Ground SEAT SLIDE 38 OFF 0–1 Backward 9 – 16 OFF 0–1 Forward 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding motor (built in seat slide cushion frame). NO >> GO TO 2. ADP K L 2.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding motor harness connector. M N Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 34 B551 4. Sliding motor Terminal 34 B561 38 38 Continuity O Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit Connector B551 P Continuity Terminal Ground 34 Not existed 38 Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September ADP-79 2012 QUEST SLIDING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-80 2012 QUEST RECLINING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > RECLINING MOTOR A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492551 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “SEAT RECLINING” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT. Check the reclining motor operation. C Test item Description OFF SEAT RECLINING Stop FR Seat reclining D Forward RR Backward Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-81, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492552 F 1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect reclining motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Active test” (“SEAT RECLINING”) with CONSULT. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground. H (+) I Reclining motor Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminals 35 B554 Ground SEAT RECLINING 39 OFF 0–1 Forward 9 – 16 OFF 0–1 Backward 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace reclining motor (built in seat back frame). NO >> GO TO 2. ADP K L 2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 35 B551 4. Reclining motor Terminal 35 B554 39 39 Continuity Connector B551 Revision: 2011 September Ground 35 Not existed 39 ADP-81 O P Continuity Terminal N Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit M 2012 QUEST RECLINING MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-82 2012 QUEST LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492553 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “SEAT LIFTER FR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT. Check the lifting motor (front) operation. C Test item Description OFF SEAT LIFTER FR Stop UP Seat lifting (front) D Upward DWN Downward Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-83, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492554 F 1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Active test” (“SEAT LIFTER FR”) with CONSULT. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground. H (+) I Lifting motor (front) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminals 36 B555 Ground SEAT LIFTER FR 40 OFF 0–1 Downward 9 – 16 OFF 0–1 Upward 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (front) (built in seat cushion frame). NO >> GO TO 2. ADP K L 2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 36 B551 4. Lifting motor (front) Terminal 36 B555 40 40 Continuity Connector B551 Revision: 2011 September Ground 36 Not existed 40 ADP-83 O P Continuity Terminal N Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit M 2012 QUEST LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-84 2012 QUEST LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492555 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. B Select “SEAT LIFTER RR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT. Check the lifting motor (rear) operation. C Test item Description OFF SEAT LIFTER RR Stop UP Seat lifting (rear) D Upward DWN Downward Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492556 F 1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Active test” (“SEAT LIFTER RR”) with CONSULT. Check voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground. H (+) I Lifting motor (rear) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminals 41 B556 Ground SEAT LIFTER RR 42 OFF 0–1 Upward 9 – 16 OFF 0–1 Downward 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear) (built in seat cushion frame). NO >> GO TO 2. ADP K L 2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector. Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 41 B551 4. Lifting motor (rear) Terminal 41 B556 42 42 Continuity Connector B551 Revision: 2011 September Ground 41 Not existed 42 ADP-85 O P Continuity Terminal N Existed Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. Driver seat control unit M 2012 QUEST LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-86 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DOOR MIRROR MOTOR A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492557 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR FUNCTION B Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” and “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT Refer to ADP-21, "CONSULT Function". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure C D INFOID:0000000007492558 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror harness connector and ground. [Driver side] G (+) Door mirror Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminals H 10 D43 11 Ground Door mirror remote control switch 12 DOWN / RIGHT 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 LEFT 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 UP 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 I ADP [Passenger side] K (+) Door mirror Connector (-) Condition Terminals 10 D3 Voltage (V) 11 Ground Door mirror remote control switch 12 DOWN / RIGHT 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 LEFT 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 UP 9 – 16 Other than the above 0–1 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. L M N O 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror harness connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-87 2012 QUEST P DOOR MIRROR MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [Driver side] Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Door mirror Terminal Connector 12 M75 Continuity Terminal 10 23 D43 12 24 Existed 11 [Passenger side] Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Door mirror Terminal Connector 10 M75 12 11 D3 11 22 4. Continuity Terminal Existed 10 Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground. [Driver side] Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Continuity Terminal 12 M75 Ground 23 Not existed 24 [Passenger side] Automatic drive positioner control unit Connector Continuity Terminal 10 M75 Ground 11 Not existed 22 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR Check door mirror motor. Refer to ADP-88, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace door mirror motor. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492559 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR 1 Check that door mirror motor does not trap foreign objects and does not have any damage. Refer to MIR-25, "Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace door mirror. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR 2 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror connector. Apply 12 V to each power supply terminal of door mirror motor terminals. Revision: 2011 September ADP-88 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Door mirror A Terminal Operational direction (+) (-) 10 11 RIGHT 11 10 LEFT 12 10 UP 10 12 DOWN B C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace door mirror motor. D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-89 2012 QUEST SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492560 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT. Check the memory indicator operation. Test item Description OFF MEMORY SW INDCTR OFF ON-1 Memory switch indicator ON-2 Indicator 1: ON Indicator 2: ON Is the operation of relevant parts normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to ADP-90, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492561 1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION Check seat memory switch indicator operation. Which is the malfunctioning indicator? All indicators are NG>>GO TO 2. An indicator is NG>>GO TO 4. 2.CHECK FUSE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check that the following fuse is not fusing. Signal name Fuse No. Battery power supply 10 (10 A) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing affected circuit. 3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground. (+) Seat memory switch Connector Terminals D13 5 (-) Voltage (V) Ground Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness between seat memory switch and 10 A fuse [No.10, located in fuse block (J/B)]. 4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and seat memory switch connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness connector. Revision: 2011 September ADP-90 2012 QUEST SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver seat control unit Connector Terminal Connector 7 B552 4. Seat memory switch 7 D13 23 Continuity Terminal Existed 6 A B Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground. C Driver seat control unit Connector B552 Continuity Terminal Ground 7 Not existed 23 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. D E F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-91 2012 QUEST MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ALL COMPONENT ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492562 1.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check driver seat control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ADP-50, "DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check automatic drive positioner control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ADP-50, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. POWER SEAT POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492563 1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check power seat switch ground circuit. Refer to ADP-66, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. SEAT SLIDING SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492564 1.CHECK SLIDING MECHANISM Check for the following. • Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. • Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH Revision: 2011 September ADP-92 2012 QUEST MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Check sliding switch. Refer to ADP-52, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. A B 3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR Check sliding motor. Refer to ADP-79, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. C D 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION E Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. F SEAT RECLINING SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492565 G 1.CHECK RECLINING MECHANISM H Check for the following. • Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. • Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. I 2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH ADP Check reclining switch. Refer to ADP-54, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. K L 3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR Check reclining motor. Refer to ADP-81, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. M N 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. O P SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492566 1.CHECK LIFTING (FRONT) MECHANISM Check for the following. • Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. Revision: 2011 September ADP-93 2012 QUEST MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > • Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) Check lifting switch (front). Refer to ADP-56, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) Check lifting motor (front). Refer to ADP-83, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. SEAT LIFTING (REAR) SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492567 1.CHECK LIFTING (REAR) MECHANISM Check for the following. • Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. • Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) Check lifting switch (rear). Refer to ADP-58, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) Check lifting motor (rear). Refer to ADP-85, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. DOOR MIRROR Revision: 2011 September ADP-94 2012 QUEST MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492568 A 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MECHANISM Check for the following. • Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials. • Interference with other parts because of poor installation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. B C 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH D Check door mirror remote control switch. Refer to following. • Mirror switch : Refer to ADP-62, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check". • Changeover switch : Refer to ADP-64, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR Check door mirror motor. Refer to ADP-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. E F G H 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-95 2012 QUEST MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ALL COMPONENT ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492569 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION AND MEMORY STORING PROCEDURE 1. Perform initialization procedure. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure". 2. Perform memory storing procedure. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure". 3. Check memory function. Refer to ADP-15, "MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Memory function is normal. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH Check seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-60, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace seat memory switch. 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. SEAT SLIDING SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492570 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-92, "SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure" 2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR Check sliding sensor. Refer to ADP-67, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Revision: 2011 September ADP-96 2012 QUEST MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NO >> GO TO 1. SEAT RECLINING A SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492571 B 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-93, "SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure" C 2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR D Check reclining sensor. Refer to ADP-69, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. E F 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. G H SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492572 I 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-93, "SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure" ADP K 2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) Check lifting sensor (front). Refer to ADP-71, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. L M 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. N O SEAT LIFTING (REAR) SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492573 P 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-94, "SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure" Revision: 2011 September ADP-97 2012 QUEST MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > 2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) Check lifting sensor (rear). Refer to ADP-73, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. DOOR MIRROR DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492574 1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION Check manual operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to ADP-95, "DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure" 2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR Check mirror sensor. Refer to following. • Driver side : ADP-75, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". • Passenger side : ADP-76, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Check the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September ADP-98 2012 QUEST ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007492575 1.CHECK SYSTEM SETTING B 1. Check system setting. Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure". 2. Check the operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. C D 2.PERFORM SYSTEM INITIALIZATION 1. Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure". 2. Check the operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. E F 3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) G Check front door switch (driver side). Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. H 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION I Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-99 2012 QUEST INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492576 1.PERFORM INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING PROCEDURE 1. Perform Intelligent Key interlock storing procedure. Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure". 2. Check the operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION Check door lock function. Refer to DLK-133, "Work Flow". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check the intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September ADP-100 2012 QUEST MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007492577 1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR B Check seat memory switch indicator. Refer to ADP-90, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-101 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description INFOID:0000000007492578 The following symptoms are normal operations, and they do not indicate a malfunction. Symptom Action to take Reference page No initialization has been performed. Perform initialization. ADP-40, "Description" Entry/exit assist function is disabled. NOTE: Entry/exit assist function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting). Change the settings. ADP-43, "Description" Entry assist function does not operate. Manual operation with power seat switch was performed after exit assist function execution. Perform the entry assist function. ADP-18, "ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description" Lumbar support does not perform memory operation. The lumbar support system are controlled independently with no link to the automatic drive positioner system. — SE-13, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : System Description" Entry/exit assist function do not operate. Cause Memory function : ADP-15, "MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description" Memory function, entry/exit assist function, or Intelligent Key interlock function does not operate. The operating conditions are not fulfilled. Fulfill the operation conditions. Entry assist function : ADP-18, "ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description" Exit assist function : ADP-17, "EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description" Intelligent Key interlock function : ADP-19, "INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description" Revision: 2011 September ADP-102 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492579 B REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove driver seat. Refer to SE-84, "Removal and Installation". Remove screws (A), and then remove driver seat control unit (2) from seat cushion frame (1) C D E JMJIA4721ZZ F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installing the driver seat, perform additional service when replacing control unit. Refer to ADP-39, "Description". G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-103 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492580 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove screw (A), and then remove automatic drive positioner control unit (2) from bracket (1). JMJIA6178ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installing the driver seat, perform additional service when replacing control unit. Refer to ADP-39, "Description". Revision: 2011 September ADP-104 2012 QUEST SEAT MEMORY SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SEAT MEMORY SWITCH A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492581 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Press pawls and remove seat memory switch (1) from switch finisher (1) using remover tool (A). : C D Pawl E JMJIA4724ZZ F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. G H I ADP K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ADP-105 2012 QUEST POWER SEAT SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > POWER SEAT SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492582 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove seat cushion outer finisher. Refer to SE-90, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly". Remove screws (A), and then remove power seat switch (2) from seat cushion outer finisher (1). JMJIA6179ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September ADP-106 2012 QUEST ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL SECTION BCS BODY CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM DOOR LOCK) ..........................................................18 F Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ...................................19 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) .............................19 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 BUZZER .....................................................................19 BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....19 H INT LAMP ...................................................................20 INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) ......................................................................20 I COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 4 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ..................................................................... 4 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 4 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 HEADLAMP ...............................................................21 HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP) ......................................................................21 G J K SYSTEM .............................................................. 6 WIPER ........................................................................24 WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) .......24 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 6 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description...... 6 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ..................... 7 FLASHER ...................................................................25 FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) ..........................................................................25 L COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ........... 8 COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description ................................................... 8 AIR CONDITIONER ...................................................26 AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) (Auto A/C) .............................26 AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) (Manual A/C) .........................26 SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ...................................... 11 SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description.... 12 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ....... 13 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ................................................. 13 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................16 COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 16 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 16 DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 17 Revision: 2011 September BCS N INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................26 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................................26 O COMB SW ..................................................................30 COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SW) ..........................................................................30 P BCM ...........................................................................30 BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) ...............30 IMMU ..........................................................................30 IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) ............30 BCS-1 2012 QUEST BATTERY SAVER .................................................... 31 BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) ................................................. 31 TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION ......... 70 TRUNK ...................................................................... 32 TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) ..... 32 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 71 THEFT ALM .............................................................. 32 THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM THEFT) ................................................................... 33 Description .............................................................. 70 Work Procedure ...................................................... 70 U1000 CAN COMM ........................................... 71 Description .............................................................. 71 DTC Logic ............................................................... 71 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 71 RETAIND PWR ......................................................... 33 RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) ........................................................ 34 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 72 SIGNAL BUFFER ...................................................... 34 SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM SIGNAL BUFFER) .................................................. 34 U0415 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 73 AIR PRESSURE MONITOR ...................................... 34 AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) ..................... 34 DTC Logic ............................................................... 72 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72 Description .............................................................. 73 DTC Logic ............................................................... 73 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 73 B2562 LOW VOLTAGE ..................................... 74 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 36 DTC Logic ............................................................... 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74 BCM ................................................................... 36 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 75 Reference Value ..................................................... 36 Fail-safe .................................................................. 58 DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 58 DTC Index .............................................................. 59 COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT ... 76 WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 62 BCM ................................................................... 62 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76 COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ....... 78 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 80 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 67 COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ................................................................. 80 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 67 Symptom Table ....................................................... 80 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) ............................................ 67 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description .................... 67 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure ............ 67 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 81 CONFIGURATION (BCM) ......................................... 67 CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description ................. 68 CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure ......... 68 CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list ........ 69 COMBINATION SWITCH .................................. 83 Revision: 2011 September Description .............................................................. 81 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 82 BCM ................................................................... 82 Removal and Installation ......................................... 82 Exploded View ........................................................ 83 Removal and Installation ......................................... 83 BCS-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007493253 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS BODY CONTROL SYSTEM BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007493254 JMMIA0856ZZ 1. BCM A. Behind of combination meter POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007493255 JMMIA0857ZZ 1. 2. Sliding door control unit RH Refer to DLK-23, "AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". Revision: 2011 September 3. Combination meter Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". BCS-4 BCM Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > 4. 7. IPDM E/R Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location". 5. Driver seat control unit Refer to ADP-5, "Component Parts Location". 6. Sliding door control unit LH Refer to DLK-23, "AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". Automatic back door control module Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-5 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM BODY CONTROL SYSTEM BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007493256 OUTLINE • BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor. • BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving control function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF. • BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT and various settings. BCM CONTROL FUNCTION LIST System Reference Combination switch reading system BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description" Signal buffer system BCS-12, "SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description" Power consumption control system BCS-13, "POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description" Headlamp system • EXL-11, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-111, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Auto light system • Xenon type headlamp models - EXL-13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) : System Description" (Except for Canada) - EXL-16, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (FOR CANADA) : System Description" (For Canada) • Halogen type headlamp models - EXL-13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) : System Description" (Except for Canada) - EXL-116, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (FOR CANADA) : System Description" (For Canada) Daytime running light system • EXL-19, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-119, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system • EXL-21, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-121, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Parking, license plate, side maker and tail lamps system • EXL-22, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-122, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Front fog lamp system • EXL-25, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-125, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Exterior lamp battery saver system • EXL-27, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp) • EXL-127, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp) Revision: 2011 September BCS-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > System Reference Interior room lamp control system INL-6, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description" Interior room lamp battery saver system INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description" Front wiper and washer system WW-7, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description" Rear wiper and washer system WW-11, "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description" Rear window defogger system DEF-6, "System Description" Warning chime system WCS-5, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description" Air conditioning control system • HAC-16, "FRONT AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (Automatic air conditioning) • HAC-153, "FRONT MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (Manual air cinditionimg) Power door lock system DLK-33, "System Description" Intelligent Key system/engine start system DLK-36, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description" Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) - NATS SEC-15, "NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS : System Description" Theft warning alarm Vehicle security system Panic alarm A B C D E F G SEC-20, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Diagram" Power window system PWC-9, "System Description" Retained accessory power (RAP) system PWC-9, "System Description" TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) WT-8, "System Description" H I BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007827916 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC J BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation K B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2195: ANTI-SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF B2196: DONGLE NG Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC Inhibit engine cranking 500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent • Starter motor relay control signal • Starter relay status signal (CAN) N Inhibit engine cranking When any of the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch changes to ACC • Receives engine status signal (CAN) O Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON B26F2: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF B26F3: START CONT RLY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF B2608: STARTER RELAY B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF Revision: 2011 September BCS-7 L BCS 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON B26F7: BCM Inhibit engine cranking by Intelligent Key system When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal. When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor. Condition of cancellation 1. 2. 3. More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop. Turn rear wiper switch OFF. Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch. FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input voltage is less than approximately 9 V. NOTE: When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function returns to normal operation. COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007493257 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMMIA0636GB NOTE: *: TAIL LAMP switch links lighting switch 1ST and 2ND positions. OUTLINE • BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the status of each switch. • BCM has a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a maximum of 20 switch status. COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX Revision: 2011 September BCS-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Combination switch circuit A B C D E JMMIA0637GB F NOTE: *: TAIL LAMP switch links lighting switch 1ST and 2ND positions. G Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 OUTPUT 1 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LOW TURN LH TURN RH OUTPUT 2 FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEADLAMP 1 OUTPUT 3 INT VOLUME 1 RR WASHER — HEADLAMP 2 HI BEAM OUTPUT 4 RR WIPER INT INT VOLUME 3 AUTO LIGHT — TAIL LAMP OUTPUT 5 INT VOLUME 2 RR WIPER ON — FR FOG — NOTE: H I J Headlamp has a dual system switch. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION K Description • BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms interval normally. L BCS N O JPMIA0609GB NOTE: BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms interval when BCM is controlled at low power consumption control mode. • BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch. - It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5, and outputs voltage waveform. Revision: 2011 September BCS-9 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > - The voltage waveform of OUTPUT corresponding to the formed circuit is input into the interface on INPUT side if any (1 or more) switches are ON. - It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch. JMMIA0326GB Operation Example In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced as follows: INPUT 1 - 5 to “1 - 5” and OUTPUT 1 - 5 to “A - E”. Example 1: When a switch (TAIL LAMP switch) is turned ON • The circuit between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 is formed when the TAIL LAMP switch is turned ON. JPMIA1545GB • BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5D” when the signal of OUTPUT 4 is input to INPUT 5. • BCM judges that the TAIL LAMP switch is ON when the signal “5D” is detected. Example 2: When some switches (TURN RH switch, TAIL LAMP switch) are turned ON Revision: 2011 September BCS-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • The circuits between OUTPUT 1 and INPUT 5 and between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 are formed when the TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are turned ON. A B C D E F JPMIA1546GB • BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5AD” when the signals of OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 4 are input to INPUT 5. • BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are ON when the signal “5AD” is detected. G WIPER INTERMITTENT DIAL POSITION BCM judges the wiper intermittent dial 1 - 7 by the status of INT VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches. H Switch status Wiper intermittent dial position INT VOLUME 1 INT VOLUME 2 INT VOLUME 3 1 ON ON ON 2 ON ON OFF 3 ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON 7 OFF ON OFF I J K L NOTE: For details of wiper intermittent dial position, refer to WW-7, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description". SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007493258 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMMIA0858GB OUTLINE BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit. Signal transmission function list Signal name Input Output Description Inputs the push-button ignition switch (push switch) signal and transmits the ignition switch status judged with BCM via CAN communication. • Ignition switch ON signal • ACC signal Push-button ignition switch (Push switch) • IPDM E/R (CAN) • Driver seat control unit (CAN) • Sliding door control unit LH (CAN) • Sliding door control unit RH (CAN) Door switch signal Any door switch • Combination meter (CAN) • IPDM E/R (CAN) • Driver seat control unit (CAN) Inputs the door switch signal and transmits it via CAN communication. Oil pressure switch signal IPDM E/R (CAN) Combination meter (CAN) Transmits the received oil pressure switch signal via CAN communication. Blower fan ON signal • A/C auto amp. (Auto A/C) • A/C amp. (Manual A/C) ECM (CAN) Input blower fan ON signal, and transmits it via CAN communication. A/C ON signal • A/C auto amp. (Auto A/C) • A/C amp. (Manual A/C) ECM (CAN) Input A/C ON signal, and transmits it via CAN communication. Revision: 2011 September BCS-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Signal name Stop lamp switch signal Interlock/PNP switch signal Input Stop lamp relay TCM Output TCM (CAN) IPDM E/R (CAN) Description Inputs the stop lamp switch 1 signal and stop lamp switch 2 signal, and transmits it via CAN communication. Inputs the P/N position signal and transmits Interlock/PNP switch signal via CAN communication. A B C POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description D INFOID:0000000007493259 SYSTEM DIAGRAM E F G H I J K L JMMIA0859GB OUTLINE • BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the BCS vehicle status. • BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep request to each unit (IPDM E/R, combination meter, driver seat control unit, automatic back door control N module, sliding door control unit LH and sliding door control unit RH) that operates with the ignition switch OFF. O Normal mode (wake-up) - CAN communication is normally performed with other units - Each control with BCM is operating properly P CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep) - CAN transmission is stopped - Control with BCM only is operating Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep) - Low power consumption control is active - CAN transmission is stopped LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM Revision: 2011 September BCS-13 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode. • The reading interval of the each switches changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval. Sleep mode activation • BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R, combination meter, automatic back door control module, sliding door control unit LH and sliding door control unit RH via CAN communication. • BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are fulfilled. • Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. BCM is in CAN communication sleep mode. • BCM is in the low power consumption mode and perform the low power consumption control when all of the BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition. Sleep condition CAN sleep condition • • • • • • • • • • • • • Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units Ignition switch: OFF Vehicle security system: Not operation Warning chime: Not operation Intelligent Key system buzzer: Not operation Stop lamp switch: OFF Turn signal indicator lamp: Not operation Exterior lamp: OFF Door lock status: No change CONSULT communication status: Not communication Meter display signal: Non-transmission Door switch status: No change Rear window defogger: OFF BCM sleep condition • • • • Interior room lamp battery saver: Time out* RAP system: OFF NVIS: Not operation Remote keyless entry receiver communication status: No communication • LOCK indicator lamp: Not operation • ACC indicator lamp: Not operation • ON indicator lamp: Not operation NOTE: *: Refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description" for details of the interior room lamp battery saver time. Wake-up operation • BCM transmits sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any condition listed below is established, and then goes into normal mode from low power consumption mode. • Each unit starts transmissions with CAN communication by receiving sleep wake up signals. Each unit transmit wake up signals to BCM with CAN communication to convey the start of CAN communication. Revision: 2011 September BCS-14 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Wake-up condition BCM wake-up condition Back door opener switch: OFF → ON CAN wake-up condition A • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units Push-button ignition switch (push switch): OFF→ ON Hazard switch: ON HI BEAM switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF PASSING switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF HEADLAMP 1 switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF HEADLAMP 2 switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF TAIL LAMP switch: OFF → ON FR FOG switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF TURN RH: OFF → ON, ON → OFF TURN LH: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Driver door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Passenger door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Rear RH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Rear LH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Back door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF Driver door request switch: OFF → ON Passenger door request switch: OFF → ON Back door request switch: OFF → ON Stop lamp switch: ON Door lock and unlock switch: NEUTRAL → LOCK, NEUTRAL → UNLOCK • Front door lock assembly (driver side) (door key cylinder switch): NEUTRAL → LOCK, NEUTRAL → UNLOCK • Remote keyless entry receiver communication: Receiving • Front door lock assembly (driver side) (unlock sensor): OFF → ON, ON → OFF B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-15 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007493260 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × Door lock DOOR LOCK × × Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September BCS-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter A Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* C D E F While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 B G H I J K The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: L BCS *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC N • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. O • Closing door P • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. DOOR LOCK Revision: 2011 September BCS-17 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000007860704 BCM CONSULT FUNCTION CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. WORK SUPPORT Monitor item Description DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode • VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 24 km/h (15 MPH) • P RANGE: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other than the P position AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode • MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF • MODE 2: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position • MODE 3: Driver side door is unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF • MODE 4: Driver side door is unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position • MODE 5: This item is displayed, but cannot be used • MODE 6: This item is displayed, but cannot be used AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SET Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode • Off: Non-operation • Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only • Lock Only: Door lock operation only • Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation DATA MONITOR Monitor Item Contents REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of sliding door switch RH DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of sliding door switch LH DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch KEY CYL LK-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch ACTIVE TEST Revision: 2011 September BCS-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item Description A This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched • The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched • The front door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched • The front door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked when “AS UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched • The door lock actuator (other) is unlocked when “OTR ULK” on CONSULT screen is touched DOOR LOCK B C REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) D INFOID:0000000007860703 E Data monitor Monitor Item Description REAR DEF SW Displays “Press (ON)/other (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch. PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch. F G ACTIVE TEST Test Item REAR DEFOGGER Description H Rear window defogger operates when ON on CONSULT screen is touched. BUZZER I BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER) INFOID:0000000007860713 CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS Test item BUZZER J Diagnosis mode Description Data Monitor Displays BCM input data in real time. Active Test Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending driving signal to them. K DATA MONITOR L Display item [Unit] Description BCS PUSH SW [On/Off] Status of push-button ignition switch judged by BCM. UNLK SEN-DR [On/Off] Status of unlock sensor judged by BCM. VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] Value of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter with CAN communication line. TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] Status of lighting switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function. FR FOG SW [On/Off] Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function. DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM. CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Status of door lock unlock switch judged by BCM. N O ACTIVE TEST Revision: 2011 September BCS-19 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display item [Unit] Description SEAT BELT WARN TEST The seat belt warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). ID REGIST WARNING The ID regist warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). LIGHT WARN ALM The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). INT LAMP INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000007860700 WORK SUPPORT JPLIA0093GB Service item ROOM LAMP TIMER SET SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET Setting item Setting MODE 2 7.5 sec. MODE 3* 15 sec. MODE 4 30 sec. Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time) On* With the interior room lamp timer function Off Without the interior room lamp timer function MODE 1 0.5 sec. MODE 2* 1 sec. MODE 3 2 sec. MODE 4 3 sec. MODE 5 0 sec. MODE 1 0.5 sec. Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time. MODE 2* 1 sec. MODE 3 2 sec. MODE 4 3 sec. MODE 5 0 sec. MODE 1* Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors. MODE 2 Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door only. Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time. *: Factory setting DATA MONITOR Revision: 2011 September BCS-20 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item [Unit] A Description REQ SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side) B REQ SW-RR [On/Off] C NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. REQ SW-RL [On/Off] D PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch RH DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch LH DOOR SW- BK [On/Off] The switch status input from back door switch CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver E F G H I J K L BCS ACTIVE TEST Test item INT LAMP STEP LAMP TEST Operation N Description On Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps ON. [Map lamp, personal lamp (when applicable lamps switch is in DOOR position.)] Off Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps. On Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON. Off Stops the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON. P HEADLAMP HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP) INFOID:0000000007860131 WORK SUPPORT Revision: 2011 September BCS-21 O 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Service item Setting item MODE 1*3 CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING*1 BATTERY SAVER SET More sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON earlier than normal operation) MODE 3 More sensitive setting than MODE 2 (Turns ON earlier than MODE 2) MODE 4 Less sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON later than normal operation.) On* 3 MODE 1*3 With the exterior lamp battery saver function Without the exterior lamp battery saver function 45 sec. MODE 2 Without the function MODE 3 30 sec. MODE 4 60 sec. MODE 5 90 sec. MODE 6 120 sec. MODE 7 150 sec. MODE 8 180 sec. MODE 1*3 AUTO LIGHT LOGIC SET*2 Normal MODE 2 Off ILL DELAY SET*1 Setting Sets delay timer function timer operation time. (All doors closed) With twilight ON custom & with wiper INT, LO and HI MODE 2 With twilight ON custom & with wiper LO and HI MODE 3 With twilight ON custom & without MODE 4 Without twilight ON custom & with wiper INT, LO and HI MODE 5 Without twilight ON custom & with wiper LO and HI MODE 6 Without twilight ON custom & without *1: For models without auto light system, this item is displayed but is not operated. *2: For models without auto light system and all models for Canada, this item is displayed but is not operated. *3: Factory setting DATA MONITOR Monitor item [Unit] Description PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] The engine status received from ECM with CAN communication VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] The value of the vehicle speed received from combination meter via CAN communication Revision: 2011 September BCS-22 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item [Unit] Description A TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off] B TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] C HI BEAM SW [On/Off] D HEAD LAMP SW1 [On/Off] Each switch status that BCM judges from the combination switch reading function HEAD LAMP SW2 [On/Off] E PASSING SW [On/Off] AUTO LIGHT SW*1 [On/Off] F FR FOG SW*2 [On/Off] G DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch RH DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch LH DOOR SW-BK [On/Off] The switch status input from back door switch OPTICAL SENSOR [On/Off/NG] NOTE: This item is indicated, but can not monitored H I J K 1 OPTI SEN (DTCT)* [V] The value of outside brightness voltage input from the optical sensor OPTI SEN (FILT)*1 [V] The value of outside brightness voltage filtered by BCM L *1: For models without auto light system, this item is not displayed. *2: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed but is not monitored. BCS ACTIVE TEST N Test item TAIL LAMP HEAD LAMP FR FOG LAMP*1 Revision: 2011 September Operation Description On Transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to turn the tail lamp ON Off Stops the tail lamp request signal transmission Hi Transmits the high beam request signal via CAN communication to turn the headlamp (HI) Lo Transmits the low beam request signal via CAN communication to turn the headlamp (LO) Off Stops the high & low beam request signal transmission On Transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to turn the front fog lamp ON Off Stops the front light request signal transmission BCS-23 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT*2 Operation Description On Transmits the daytime running light request signal via CAN communication to IPDM E/R Off Stop the daytime running light request signal transmission • Transmits the dimmer signal to combination meter via CAN communi- ILL DIM SIGNAL On cation and dims combination meter*3 • Transmits the dimmer signal to AV control unit and dims display Off Stops the dimmer signal transmission *1: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed but is not tested. *2: For models without daytime running light system, this item is not displayed. *3: Except for CANADA WIPER WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) INFOID:0000000007860702 WORK SUPPORT Service item Setting item Description On With vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and wiper intermittent dial position) Off* Without vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper intermittent dial position) WIPER SPEED SETTING The setting of front wiper INT operation can be changed *: Factory setting DATA MONITOR Monitor Item [Unit] Description PUSH SW [Off/On] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch. VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter via CAN communication. FR WIPER HI [Off/On] FR WIPER LOW [Off/On] FR WASHER SW [Off/On] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function FR WIPER INT [Off/On] FR WIPER STOP [Off/On] Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication. INT VOLUME [1 − 7] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function RR WIPER ON [Off/On] RR WIPER INT [Off/On] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function RR WASHER SW [Off/On] RR WIPER STOP [Off/On] Revision: 2011 September Rear wiper motor (stop position) status input from the rear wiper motor BCS-24 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > ACTIVE TEST A Test item Operation Description Hi Transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper HI operation. Lo Transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper LO operation. INT Transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper INT operation. Off Stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to stop the front wiper operation. On Output the voltage to operate the rear wiper motor. Off Stops the voltage to stop the rear wiper motor. FR WIPER RR WIPER B C D FLASHER E FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) INFOID:0000000007860132 F WORK SUPPORT Service item HAZARD ANSWER BACK Setting item Setting Lock Only With locking only Unlk Only With unlocking only Lock&Unlk* Off With locking/unlocking G Sets the hazard warning lamp answer back function when the door is lock/unlock with the request switch or the key fob. H Without the function *: Factory setting I DATA MONITOR Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from the request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from the request switch (passenger side) PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from the push-button ignition switch TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off] TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] J Description K L Each switch status that BCM detects from the combination switch reading function HAZARD SW [On/Off] The switch status input from the hazard switch RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Lock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Unlock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver RKE-PANIC [On/Off] Panic alarm signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver N O ACTIVE TEST Revision: 2011 September BCS BCS-25 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item FLASHER Operation Description RH Outputs the voltage to blink the right side turn signal lamps. LH Outputs the voltage to blink the left side turn signal lamps. Off Stops the voltage to turn the turn signal lamps OFF. AIR CONDITIONER AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) (Auto A/C) INFOID:0000000007862802 DATA MONITOR Display Item List Monitor Item [Unit] Contents FAN ON SIG [On/Off] Displays the status of blower fan ON signal received from A/C auto amp. AIR COND SW [On/Off] Displays the status of A/C ON signal received from A/C auto amp. AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) (Manual A/C) INFOID:0000000007862803 DATA MONITOR Display Item List Monitor Item [Unit] Contents FAN ON SIG [On/Off] Displays the status of blower fan ON signal received from A/C amp. AIR COND SW [On/Off] Displays the status of A/C ON signal received from A/C amp. INTELLIGENT KEY INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000007860705 WORK SUPPORT Monitor item Description INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation ENGINE START BY I-KEY Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used PANIC ALARM SET Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • MODE 1: 0.5 sec • MODE 2: Non-operation • MODE 3: 1.5 sec TRUNK OPEN DELAY NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation Revision: 2011 September BCS-26 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item Description A ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation HAZARD ANSWER BACK Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • Lock Only: Door lock operation only • Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only • Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation • Off: Non-operation ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected from the following with this mode • Horn Chirp: Sound horn • Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer • Off: Non-operation ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT Starter motor can operate during the times below • 70 msec • 100 msec • 200 msec CONFIRM KEY FOB ID It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode AUTO LOCK SET Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode • MODE 1: OFF • MODE 2: 30 sec • MODE 3: 1 minute • MODE 4: 2 minutes • MODE 5: 3 minutes • MODE 6: 4 minutes • MODE 7: 5 minutes HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation PW DOWN SET B C D E F G H I J Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • MODE 1: 3 sec • MODE 2: Non-operation • MODE 3: 5 sec SELF-DIAG RESULT K L BCS Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR N Monitor Item Condition REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch CLUTCH SW NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]* condition of stop lamp switch power supply BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT PN/N SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position Revision: 2011 September BCS-27 O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor Item Condition S/L -LOCK NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L -UNLOCK NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L RELAY -F/B NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1 DETE SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position SFT P -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT N -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states S/L LOCK-IPDM NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L UNLK-IPDM NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L RELAY-REQ NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h] VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [km/h] DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of unlock sensor DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility PRMT RKE STRT NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored TRNK/HAT MNTR NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key RKE-TR/BD NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored RKE-PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key RKE OPE COUN1 When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing RKE OPE COUN2 NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored *: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF. ACTIVE TEST Revision: 2011 September BCS-28 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item Description A BATTERY SAVER This test is able to check interior room lamp operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation OUTSIDE BUZZER This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation INSIDE BUZZER This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation • Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Off: Non-operation B C D INDICATOR This test is able to check warning lamp operation • KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched • KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched • Off: Non-operation E INT LAMP This test is able to check interior room lamp operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation F LCD This test is able to check meter display information • Engine start information displays when “BP N” on CONSULT screen is touched • Engine start information displays when “BP I” on CONSULT screen is touched • Key ID warning displays when “ID NG” on CONSULT screen is touched • ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used. • P position warning displays when “SFT P” on CONSULT screen is touched • INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored • BATT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored • Take away through window warning displays when “NO KY” on CONSULT screen is touched • Take away warning display when “OUTKEY” on CONSULT screen is touched • OFF position warning display when “LK WN” on CONSULT screen is touched G H I J FLASHER This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation • LH: LH side hazard warning lamps operate • RH: RH side hazard warning lamps operate • Off: Non-operation P RANGE This test is able to check CVT shift selector power supply • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation ENGINE SW ILLUMI This test is able to check push-button ignition switch illumination operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation LOCK INDICATOR This test is able to check LOCK indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation This test is able to check ACC indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation N ACC INDICATOR IGNITION ON IND This test is able to check ON indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation O HORN This test is able to check horn operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation TRUNK/BACK DOOR NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used POWER SLIDE DOOR This test is able to check automatic siding door operation • RR PSD ON: Auto open/close operate • RL PSD ON: Auto open/close operate Revision: 2011 September BCS-29 K L BCS P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > COMB SW COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SW) INFOID:0000000007493271 DATA MONITOR Monitor item [UNIT] Description FR WIPER HI [Off/On] Displays the status of the FR WIPER HI switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. FR WIPER LOW [Off/On] Displays the status of the FR WIPER LOW switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. FR WASHER SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the FR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. FR WIPER INT [Off/On] Displays the status of the FR WIPER INT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. INT VOLUME [1 - 7] Displays the status of wiper intermittent dial position judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. RR WIPER ON [Off/On] Displays the status of the RR WIPER ON switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. RR WIPER INT [Off/On] Displays the status of the RR WIPER INT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. RR WASHER SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the RR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. TURN SIGNAL R [Off/On] Displays the status of the TURN RH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. TURN SIGNAL L [Off/On] Displays the status of the TURN LH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. TAIL LAMP SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the TAIL LAMP switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. HI BEAM SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the HI BEAM switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. HEAD LAMP SW 1 [Off/On] Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 1 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. HEAD LAMP SW 2 [Off/On] Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 2 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. PASSING SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the PASSING switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. AUTO LIGHT SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the AUTO LIGHT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. FR FOG SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the FR FOG switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function. BCM BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) INFOID:0000000007493272 WORK SUPPORT Item RESET SETTING VALUE Description Return a value set with Work Support of each system to a default value in factory shipment. IMMU IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) INFOID:0000000007860708 WORK SUPPORT Revision: 2011 September BCS-30 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Service item CONFIRM DONGLE ID Description A It is possible to check that dongle unit is applied to the vehicle. DATA MONITOR B Monitor item Content CONFRM ID ALL CONFIRM ID4 CONFIRM ID3 CONFIRM ID2 C Indicates [YET] at all time. Switches to [DONE] when a registered Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch. D CONFIRM ID1 NOT REGISTERED Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received. Indicates [ID NG] when key ID that is not registered is received. E Indicates the number of IDs that are registered. F Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch. G TP 4 TP 3 TP 2 TP 1 PUSH SW ACTIVE TEST H Test item Description This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched. THEFT IND I BATTERY SAVER BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000007860701 J WORK SUPPORT K Service item ROOM LAMP TIMER SET BATTERY SAVER SET Setting item Setting MODE 1 30 min. MODE 2 60 min. MODE 3* 15 min. On* With the exterior lamp battery saver function Off Without the exterior lamp battery saver function Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time. L BCS *:Factory setting N DATA MONITOR Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW-RR [On/Off] REQ SW-RL [On/Off] Revision: 2011 September O Description P NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. BCS-31 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item [Unit] Description PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch RH DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch LH DOOR SW- BK [On/Off] The switch status input from back door switch CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver ACTIVE TEST Test item Operation BATTERY SAVER Description Off Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps OFF. On Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps ON.* *: Each lamp switch is in ON position. TRUNK TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000007860706 DATA MONITOR Monitor Item Contents PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock sensor VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter TR/BD OPEN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch TRNK/HAT MNTR NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored RKE-TR/BD NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored THEFT ALM Revision: 2011 September BCS-32 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - THEFT) INFOID:0000000007860707 A WORK SUPPORT Service Item B Description SECURITY ALARM SET This mode is able to confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting. THEFT ALM TRG The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT screen. C DATA MONITOR D Monitored Item Description REQ SW -DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side). REQ SW -AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side). REQ SW -RR NOTE: This is displayed even when it is not equipped. REQ SW -RL NOTE: This is displayed even when it is not equipped. REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door request switch. PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver door UNLOCK status. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side). DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. DOOR SW-BK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch. CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch. CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder. TR/BD OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door opener switch. TRNK/HAT MNTR NOTE: This is displayed even when it is not equipped. RKE-LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key. RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key. RKE-TR/BD NOTE: This is displayed even when it is not equipped. E F G H I J K L BCS N ACTIVE TEST Test Item Description O THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched. VEHICLE SECURITY HORN This test is able to check horns operation. Horns are activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched. HEADLAMP(HI) This test is able to check headlamp operation. Headlamps are activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched. FLASHER This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation. Hazard warning lamps are activated after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched. P RETAIND PWR Revision: 2011 September BCS-33 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000007860709 DATA MONITOR Monitor Item Description DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch. SIGNAL BUFFER SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER) INFOID:0000000007493278 DATA MONITOR Monitor item [UNIT] Description PUSH SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch (push switch) judged by BCM. ACTIVE TEST Operation Test item OIL PRESSURE SW Description Off OFF On BCM transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via CAN communication, which illuminates the oil pressure warning lamp in the combination meter. AIR PRESSURE MONITOR AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) INFOID:0000000007860712 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Self Diagnostic Result Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. Active Test Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed. Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR MODE Monitor item (Unit) Remarks AIR PRESS FL (kPa kg/cm2 or Psi) AIR PRESS FR (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) AIR PRESS RR (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) Tire pressure AIR PRESS RL (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) Revision: 2011 September BCS-34 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item (Unit) Remarks A ID REGST FL1 (Yet, Done) ID REGST FR1 (Yet, Done) B Registration ID ID REGST RR1 (Yet, Done) C ID REGST RL1 (Yet, Done) WARNING LAMP (On/Off) Low tire pressure warning lamp BUZZER (On/Off) NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item. D E ACTIVE TEST MODE NOTE: After completing the work below, perform an active test. 1. Check ID registration state and perform self-diagnosis. 2. Erase the self-diagnosis result history. F Item G Description WARNING LAMP Low tire pressure warning lamp can be turned ON arbitrarily. ID REGIST WARNING NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. RUN FLAT TIRE W/L NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. RUN FLAT/T WARN BUZZER NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. FLASHER Turn signal lamps can be turned ON arbitrarily. HORN This test is able to check to check that the horn sounds. H I J WORK SUPPORT K Item Description ID READ Registered tire pressure sensor ID can be displayed. ID REGIST Tire pressure sensor ID can be registered. L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-35 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM Reference Value INFOID:0000000007493280 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL CONSULT MONITOR ITEM Monitor Item FR WIPER HI FR WIPER LOW FR WASHER SW FR WIPER INT FR WIPER STOP INT VOLUME RR WIPER ON RR WIPER INT RR WASHER SW RR WIPER STOP TURN SIGNAL R TURN SIGNAL L TAIL LAMP SW HI BEAM SW HEAD LAMP SW 1 HEAD LAMP SW 2 PASSING SW AUTO LIGHT SW FR FOG SW Revision: 2011 September Condition Value/Status Other than front wiper switch HI Off Front wiper switch HI On Other than front wiper switch LO Off Front wiper switch LO On Front washer switch OFF Off Front washer switch ON On Other than front wiper switch INT Off Front wiper switch INT On Front wiper is not in STOP position Off Front wiper is in STOP position On Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7 Wiper intermittent dial position Other than rear wiper switch ON Off Rear wiper switch ON On Other than rear wiper switch INT Off Rear wiper switch INT On Rear washer switch OFF Off Rear washer switch ON On Rear wiper is in STOP position Off Rear wiper is not in STOP position On Other than turn signal switch RH Off Turn signal switch RH On Other than turn signal switch LH Off Turn signal switch LH On Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Off Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND On Other than lighting switch HI Off Lighting switch HI On Other than lighting switch 2ND Off Lighting switch 2ND On Other than lighting switch 2ND Off Lighting switch 2ND On Other than lighting switch PASS Off Lighting switch PASS On Other than lighting switch AUTO Off Lighting switch AUTO On Front fog lamp switch OFF Off Front fog lamp switch ON On BCS-36 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-BK CDL LOCK SW CDL UNLOCK SW KEY CYL LK-SW KEY CYL UN-SW HAZARD SW REAR DEF SW TR/BD OPEN SW TRNK/HAT MNTR FAN ON SIG AIR COND SW RKE-LOCK RKE-UNLOCK RKE-TR/BD RKE-PANIC RKE-MODE CHG Condition Driver door closed Off Driver door opened On Passenger door closed Off Passenger door opened On Sliding door RH closed Off Sliding door RH opened On Sliding door LH closed Off Sliding door LH opened On Back door closed Off Back door opened On Other than power door lock switch LOCK Off Power door lock switch LOCK On Other than power door lock switch UNLOCK Off Power door lock switch UNLOCK On Other than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Off Driver door key cylinder LOCK position On Other than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Off Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position On Hazard switch is OFF Off Hazard switch is ON On Rear window defogger switch OFF Off Rear window defogger switch ON On Back door opener switch OFF Off While the back door opener switch is turned ON On NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off Blower fan OFF Off Blower fan ON On • Air conditioner OFF (A/C switch indicator OFF) (Automatic A/C) • A/C switch OFF (Manual A/C) Off • Air conditioner ON (A/C switch indicator ON) (Automatic A/C) • A/C switch ON (Manual A/C) On LOCK button of the key is not pressed Off LOCK button of the key is pressed On UNLOCK button of the key is not pressed Off UNLOCK button of the key is pressed On NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off PANIC button of the key is not pressed Off PANIC button of the key is pressed On LOCK/UNLOCK button of the key is not pressed and held simultaneously Off LOCK/UNLOCK button of the key is pressed and held simultaneously On Air bag signal (NORMAL) is detected. SHOCK SENSOR Revision: 2011 September Value/Status B C D E F G H I J K L BCS NOMAL Air bag signal (AIR BAG OPEN) is detected. On Air bag signal is not detected. Off BCS-37 A 2012 QUEST N O P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item OPTI SEN (DTCT) OPTI SEN (FILT) Condition Value/Status Bright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V Dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V Bright outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO) Close to 5 V Dark outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO) Close to 1.50 V OPTICAL SENSOR NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off RAIN SENSOR NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off Driver door request switch is not pressed Off Driver door request switch is pressed On Passenger door request switch is not pressed Off Passenger door request switch is pressed On REQ SW -RR NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off REQ SW -RL NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off Back door request switch is not pressed Off Back door request switch is pressed On REQ SW -DR REQ SW -AS REQ SW -BD/TR Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Off Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed On NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off The brake pedal is not depressed Off The brake pedal is depressed On The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown Off The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is normal On Selector lever in P position Off Selector lever in any position other than P On Selector lever in any position other than P and N Off Selector lever in P or N position On S/L -LOCK NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off S/L -UNLOCK NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off S/L RELAY-F/B NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off Driver door is locked Off Driver door is unlocked On Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Off Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed On Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position Off Ignition switch in ON position On Selector lever in any position other than P Off Selector lever in P position On Selector lever in any position other than P and N Off Selector lever in P or N position On PUSH SW CLUCH SW BRAKE SW 1 BRAKE SW 2 DETE/CANCL SW SFT PN/N SW UNLK SEN -DR PUSH SW -IPDM IGN RLY1 -F/B DETE SW -IPDM SFT PN -IPDM Revision: 2011 September BCS-38 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item SFT P -MET SFT N -MET ENGINE STATE Condition Value/Status Selector lever in any position other than P Off Selector lever in P position On Selector lever in any position other than N Off Selector lever in N position Stop While the engine stalls Stall Run S/L LOCK-IPDM NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off S/L UNLK-IPDM NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off S/L RELAY-REQ NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off VEH SPEED 1 While driving VEH SPEED 2 While driving Equivalent to speedometer reading Driver door is locked Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) Passenger door is unlocked Driver side door is open after ignition switch is turned OFF (Shift position is in the P position) Ignition switch ON PRMT RKE STRT READY READY Reset The engine start is prohibited Reset The engine start is permitted Set NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Reset — The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. Yet The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM. L BCS N Done The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. Yet The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM. Done The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. Yet The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM. Done BCS-39 K Operation frequency of the key NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Revision: 2011 September J Set RKE OPE COUN2 CONFIRM ID3 I UNLOCK During the operation of the key CONFIRM ID4 H LOCK RKE OPE COUN1 CONFRM ID ALL G UNLOCK Passenger door is locked PRMT ENG STRT E LOCK Driver door is unlocked ID OK FLAG D F Equivalent to speedometer reading DOOR STAT-AS C Crank Engine running DOOR STAT-DR B On Engine stopped At engine cranking A O P 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item CONFIRM ID2 CONFIRM ID1 NOT REGISTERED TP 4 TP 3 TP 2 TP 1 Condition Value/Status The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. Yet The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID registered to BCM. Done The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. Yet The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM. Done BCM detects registered key ID, or BCM does not detect key ID. ID OK BCM detects non-registration key ID. ID NG The ID of fourth key is not registered to BCM The ID of fourth key is registered to BCM The ID of third key is not registered to BCM The ID of third key is registered to BCM The ID of second key is not registered to BCM Yet Done Yet Done Yet The ID of second key is registered to BCM Done The ID of first key is not registered to BCM Yet The ID of first key is registered to BCM Done AIR PRESS FL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Air pressure of front LH tire AIR PRESS FR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Air pressure of front RH tire AIR PRESS RR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Air pressure of rear RH tire AIR PRESS RL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received) Air pressure of rear LH tire ID REGST FL1 ID REGST FR1 ID REGST RR1 ID REGST RL1 WARNING LAMP BUZZER Revision: 2011 September ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Done Yet Tire pressure indicator OFF Off Tire pressure indicator ON On Tire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Off Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding On BCS-40 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TERMINAL LAYOUT A B C D E F G H I J K L JMMIA0323ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) + − 1 (W) Ground BCS Description Signal name Input/ Output Rear window defogger relay control Input Condition Rear window defogger Value (Approx.) OFF 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 0.6 V N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-41 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output All switches OFF Value (Approx.) 0V Turn signal switch RH Lighting switch HI Lighting switch 1ST 2 (LG) Ground Combination switch INPUT 5 Input Combination switch (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4958J 1.0 V Lighting switch 2ND JPMIA0342JP 2.0 V All switches OFF 0V Turn signal switch LH Lighting switch PASS Lighting switch 2ND 3 (Y) Ground Combination switch INPUT 4 Input Combination switch (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4958J 1.0 V Front fog lamp switch ON PKIB4956J 0.8 V All switches OFF 0V Front wiper switch LO 4 (O) Ground Combination switch INPUT 3 Input Combination switch (Wiper volume dial 4) Front wiper switch MIST Front wiper switch INT Lighting switch AUTO PKIB4958J 1.0 V Revision: 2011 September BCS-42 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output All switches OFF (Wiper volume dial 4) Value (Approx.) A 0V B Front washer switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) C Rear washer switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) 5 (G) Ground Combination switch INPUT 2 Input Combination switch Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 1 • Wiper volume dial 5 • Wiper volume dial 6 D PKIB4958J 1.0 V E F Rear wiper switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) G PKIB4956J 0.8 V All switches OFF (Wiper volume dial 4) H 0V Front wiper switch HI (Wiper volume dial 4) I Rear wiper switch INT (Wiper volume dial 4) J Wiper volume dial 3 (All switches OFF) PKIB4958J 1.0 V K 6 (L) Ground Combination switch INPUT 1 Input Combination switch Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 1 • Wiper volume dial 2 L BCS PKIB4952J 1.9 V N Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 6 • Wiper volume dial 7 O PKIB4956J 0.8 V Revision: 2011 September BCS-43 2012 QUEST P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − 7*1 (W) Ground Description Signal name Door key cylinder switch UNLOCK Condition Input/ Output Input Door key cylinder switch Value (Approx.) NEUTRAL position PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V UNLOCK position Power window switch communication (with automatic sliding door system) Input/ Output 0V Ignition switch ON PKIA7023E 9.0 - 10 V 8 (GR)*2 Ground (Y)*1 Door key cylinder switch LOCK (without automatic sliding door system) Input Door key cylinder switch NEUTRAL position PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V 9 (V) Ground 12*1 (GR) Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Door lock and unlock switch LOCK Input Input Stop lamp switch Door lock and unlock switch LOCK position 0V OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) 0V ON (Brake pedal is depressed) 9 – 16 V NEUTRAL position JPMIA0012GB 1.0 - 1.5 V LOCK position 13*1 (BR) Ground Door lock and unlock switch UNLOCK Input Door lock and unlock switch 0V NEUTRAL position JPMIA0012GB 1.0 - 1.5 V UNLOCK position Revision: 2011 September BCS-44 0V 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) − + 14 (L) Ground Description Signal name Optical sensor Input Value (Approx.) A When bright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V B When dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V Condition Input/ Output Ignition switch ON C D 15 (W) Ground Rear window defogger switch Input Rear window defogger switch Not pressed JPMIA0012GB E 1.0 - 1.5 V Pressed 3 16* (Y) Ground Dimmer signal Output Ignition switch ON Either of the following conditions • Lighting switch OFF • The area around the vehicle is bright (Shine a light on the optical sensor) The area around the vehicle is dark (Block the light from the optical sensor) 17 (O) Ground Sensor power supply Output 18 (R) Ground Receiver and sensor ground Input 21 (R) Ground NATS antenna amp. Input/ Output Ignition switch OFF, ACC ON Ignition switch ON Intelligent Key: Intelligent Key battery is removed 0V F 0V G H 7.5 – 16 V I 0V 4.65 – 5.5 V 0V J Brake pedal: Depressed NOTE: Waveform varies each time when brake pedal is depressed K L JMKIA6232JP Brake pedal: Not depressed 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 0.5 V BCS N 23 (V) Ground Security indicator lamp Output Security indicator lamp Blinking (Ignition switch OFF) O JPMIA0590GB 12.0 V OFF 24*4 (B) Ground Dongle link Revision: 2011 September Input/ Output Ignition switch OFF BCS-45 9 – 16 V 5V 2012 QUEST P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 25 (W) − Ground Description Signal name NATS antenna amp. Condition Input/ Output Input/ Output During waiting Value (Approx.) Brake pedal: Depressed NOTE: Waveform varies each time when brake pedal is depressed JMKIA6233JP Brake pedal: Not depressed A/C ON (Automatic air conditioner) 27 (O) 28 (BR) 9 – 16 V OFF (A/C switch indicator: OFF) A/C Input Ground PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V Ground A/C ON (Manual c air conditioner) Ignition switch ON and blower fan switch other than OFF Blower fan ON (Automatic air conditioner) Fan switch Blower fan ON (Manual air conditioner) ON (A/C switch indicator: ON) 0V A/C switch OFF 12 V A/C switch ON 0V OFF 12 V ON 0V Input Fan switch OFF PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V Other than OFF 29 (P) Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 1.5 V Pressed 30 (L) Ground Back door opener switch Input Back door opener switch 0V OFF 0V Not pressed JPMIA0012GB 1.0 - 1.5 V Revision: 2011 September BCS-46 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) A B 31 (O) Ground Front door lock assembly driver side (Unlock sensor) Input Driver door LOCK status (Unlock sensor switch OFF) C PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V UNLOCK status (Unlock sensor switch ON) D 0V E F All switches OFF (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4960J G 7.0 - 8.0 V 32 (Y) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 5 Output Combination switch Front fog lamp switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) H Rear wiper switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 1 • Wiper volume dial 2 • Wiper volume dial 6 • Wiper volume dial 7 I PKIB4956J J 1.0 V K All switches OFF (Wiper volume dial 4) L PKIB4960J BCS 7.0 - 8.0 V 33 (W) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 4 Output Combination switch Lighting switch 1ST (Wiper volume dial 4) N Lighting switch AUTO (Wiper volume dial 4) Rear wiper switch INT (Wiper volume dial 4) Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 1 • Wiper volume dial 5 • Wiper volume dial 6 Revision: 2011 September BCS-47 O PKIB4958J 1.2 V 2012 QUEST P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) All switches OFF (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V 34 (GR) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 3 Output Combination switch Lighting switch 2ND (Wiper volume dial 4) Lighting switch HI (Wiper volume dial 4) Rear washer switch ON (Wiper volume dial 4) Any of the condition below with all switches OFF • Wiper volume dial 1 • Wiper volume dial 2 • Wiper volume dial 3 PKIB4958J 1.2 V All switches OFF 35 (SB) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 2 Output Combination switch (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V Lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch PASS Front wiper switch INT Front wiper switch HI PKIB4958J 1.2 V All switches OFF 36 (R) Ground Combination switch OUTPUT 1 Output Combination switch (Wiper volume dial 4) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V Turn signal switch RH Turn signal switch LH Front wiper switch LO Front wiper switch MIST Front washer switch ON PKIB4958J 1.2 V Revision: 2011 September BCS-48 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output P position (Release selector button) 37 (G) Ground Detention switch Input Selector lever P position (Push selector button) Value (Approx.) A 0 – 1.5 V B 6 – 16 V C Any position other than P Waiting 12 V D Ignition switch OFF (Remote keyless entry communication) When operating either button on Intelligent Key E JMMIA0572GB 38 (SB) Ground Receiver communication Input/ Output F G Waiting H Ignition switch ON (TPMS communication) JMMIA0573GB I When receiving signal from tire pressure sensor J JMMIA0574GB 39 (L) Ground CAN-H Input/ Output — — 40 (P) Ground CAN-L Input/ Output — — K L BCS 43 (P) Ground Back door switch Input Back door switch OFF (When back door closed) N JPMIA0593GB 9.0 - 10.0 V 44 (Y) Ground Rear wiper stop position Revision: 2011 September Input Ignition switch ON ON (When back door opened) 0V Rear wiper stop position 12 V Any position other than rear wiper stop position 0V BCS-49 2012 QUEST O P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 45 (SB) − Ground Description Signal name Passenger door switch Condition Input/ Output Input Passenger door switch Value (Approx.) OFF (When passenger door closed) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V ON (When passenger door opened) 46 (R) Ground Sliding door RH switch Input Sliding door RH switch 0V OFF (When sliding door RH closed) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V ON (When sliding door RH opened) 47 (G) Ground Driver door switch Input Driver door switch 0V OFF (When driver door closed) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V ON (When driver door opened) 48 (O) Ground Sliding door LH switch Input Sliding door LH switch 0V OFF (When sliding door LH closed) PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V ON (When sliding door LH opened) 49 (B) Ground 50*2 (V) Ground 51 (LG) Ground Luggage room lamp Output Selective unlock relay control (Sliding door LH UNLOCK control) Input Back door request switch Input Revision: 2011 September Luggage room lamp Sliding door LH Back door request switch 0V OFF 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 1.0 V UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) 0 – 0.6 V Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) 9 – 16 V ON (Pressed) 0 – 1.5 V OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V BCS-50 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 53*5 (BR) 54 (R) 55 (G) 56 (P) 57 (GR) − Description Signal name Ground Back door open request Output Back door opener switch Ground Rear wiper Output Rear wiper Sliding door RH UNLOCK (with automatic sliding door system) Ground Ground Interior room lamp power supply Battery power supply Input 9 – 16 V B ON (Actuator is activated) 0 – 1.5 V (Approx. 500m seconds) ON (Activated) 9 – 16 V UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) 9 – 16 V Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) 0V UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) 9 – 16 V Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) 0V Interior room lamp battery saver is activated. (Cuts the interior room lamp power supply) 0V Sliding door Output OFF (Actuator is not activated) 0V Sliding door RH Sliding door UNLOCK (without automatic sliding door system) A OFF (Stopped) Output Ground Value (Approx.) Condition Input/ Output 58 (O) D E F G Interior room lamp battery saver is not activated. (Outputs the interior room lamp power supply) 9 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF 9 – 16 V OFF C H I 5V J Ground Air bag signal Input Ignition switch ON K JPMIA1034GB 2.5 V 59 (SB) Ground Passenger door UNLOCK Output Passenger door UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) 9 – 16 V Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) 0V Turn signal switch OFF 0V L BCS N 60 (V) Ground Turn signal LH Output Ignition switch ON O Turn signal switch LH PKIC6370E 6.5 V (Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16 V) Revision: 2011 September BCS-51 2012 QUEST P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Turn signal switch OFF 61 (G) Ground Turn signal RH Output Ignition switch ON Value (Approx.) 0V Turn signal switch RH PKIC6370E 6.5 V (Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16 V) 62 (W) Ground Step lamp Output Step lamp 63 (R) Ground Interior room lamp control Output Interior room lamp 64 (LG) 65 (V) Ground Ground 66 (G) Ground 67 (B) 68 (L) Cranking request All doors LOCK input Output Driver door UNLOCK Output Ground Ground Output Ground P/W power supply (IGN) Output 69 (P) Ground P/W power supply (BAT) 70 (L) Ground Battery power supply 73 (Y) Ground 75 (SB) Ground 76 (V) Ground ON indicator lamp Driver door request switch Push-button ignition switch (push switch) Revision: 2011 September Ignition switch ON All doors Driver door, fuel lid ON 0 – 1.0 V OFF 9 – 16 V OFF 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 1.0 V Engine stopped (Selector lever is in P position) 0 – 1.0 V Engine stopped (Selector lever is not in P position) 9 – 16 V Engine running 9 – 16 V LOCK (Actuator is activated) 9 – 16 V Other then LOCK (Actuator is not activated) 0V UNLOCK (Actuator is activated) 9 – 16 V Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated) 0V Ignition switch ON 0V Ignition switch OFF 0V Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 V Output Ignition switch OFF 9 – 16 V Input Ignition switch OFF 9 – 16 V Output Ignition switch OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 1.5 V 0 – 1.5 V Input Driver door request switch ON (Pressed) OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V Pressed 0 – 1.5 V Input Push-button ignition switch (push switch) Not pressed 9 – 16 V BCS-52 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) A B When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) 78 (P) Ground Driver door antenna (+) Output When the driver door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON C JMKIA5954GB When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) D E F JMKIA5955GB G When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) 79 (V) Ground Driver door antenna (-) Output When the driver door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON H JMKIA5954GB I J When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) K JMKIA5955GB L 80 (R) Ground Passenger door antenna (+) Output When the passenger door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) BCS N JMKIA5954GB O When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) P JMKIA5955GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-53 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 81 (L) − Ground Description Signal name Passenger door antenna (-) Condition Input/ Output Output When the passenger door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON Value (Approx.) When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) JMKIA5955GB When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) 82 (G) Ground Rear bumper antenna (+) Output When the back door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON JMKIA5954GB When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) JMKIA5955GB When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: Approx. 2 m) 83 (R) Ground Rear bumper antenna (-) Output When the back door request switch is operated with ignition switch ON JMKIA5954GB When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area (The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna: 80 cm or less) JMKIA5955GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-54 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) A B When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area C JMKIA5951GB 84 (Y) Ground Room antenna 1 (+) (Instrument center) Output Ignition switch ON D E When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area F JMKIA3839GB G H When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area JMKIA5951GB 85 (BR) Ground Room antenna 1 (-) (Instrument center) Output I Ignition switch ON J When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area K JMKIA3839GB L BCS When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area N JMKIA5951GB 86 (LG) Ground Room antenna 2 (+) (Console) Output Ignition switch ON O When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area P JMKIA3839GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-55 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area JMKIA5951GB 87 (V) Ground Room antenna 2 (−) (Console) Output Ignition switch ON When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area JMKIA3839GB When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area JMKIA5951GB 88 (W) Ground Luggage room antenna (+) Output Ignition switch ON When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area JMKIA3839GB When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area JMKIA5951GB 89 (B) Ground Luggage room antenna (-) Output Ignition switch ON When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area JMKIA3839GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-56 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Value (Approx.) + − 90 (P) Push-button ignition switch illumination 9 – 16 V Output Push-button ignition switch illumination ON Ground OFF 0 – 1.5 V 91 (SB) Ground LOCK indicator lamp Output LOCK indicator lamp OFF (Ignition switch OFF) 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 1.5 V OFF 0V A B C NOTE: When the illumination brightening/dimming level is in the neutral position 92 (G) Ground Push-button ignition switch illumination ground D E Output Tail lamp ON F JPMIA1554GB 6.0 - 7.0 V 93 (R) Ground Intelligent Key warning buzzer Output Intelligent Key warning buzzer 96 (BR) Ground ACC relay control Output Ignition switch 97 (W) Ground Starter relay control Output Ignition switch ON 98 (LG) Ground Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control Output Ignition switch 99 (GR) Ground Ignition relay control Output Ignition switch 100 (GR) Ground Passenger door request switch Input Passenger door request switch Sounding 0 – 1.5 V Not sounding 9 – 16 V OFF 0 – 0.5 V ACC or ON 9 – 16 V Other than engine cranking 9 – 16 V Engine cranking 0 – 0.5 V OFF or ACC 9 – 16 V ON 0 – 0.5 V OFF or ACC 0 – 0.5 V ON 9 – 16 V ON (Pressed) 0 – 1.5 V OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V OFF or ACC Ground Ignition power supply No. 2 102 (Y) Ground P/N position 104 (L) Ground CVT shift selector (detention switch) power supply Output Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 V 105 (GR) Ground Stop lamp switch 2 Input Ignition switch OFF 9 – 16 V 106 (O) 109 (GR) Ground Ground Blower fan motor relay control ACC indicator lamp Ignition switch Input Selector lever Output Output Ignition switch Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 V P or N position 9 – 16 V Except P and N positions 0 – 1.5 V OFF or ACC 0 – 0.5 V ON 9 – 16 V OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated) 9 – 16 V ACC 0 – 1.5 V • *1: Without automatic sliding door system • *2: With automatic sliding door system • *3: With rear entertainment • *4: For Canada Revision: 2011 September BCS-57 H I J K L 0V 101 (BR) Output G 2012 QUEST BCS N O P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > • *5: Without automatic back door system Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007493281 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2195: ANTI-SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF B2196: DONGLE NG Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking 500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent • Starter motor relay control signal • Starter relay status signal (CAN) B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST Inhibit engine cranking When any of the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch changes to ACC • Receives engine status signal (CAN) B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON B26F2: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF B26F3: START CONT RLY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON B26F7: BCM Inhibit engine cranking by Intelligent Key system When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal. When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor. Condition of cancellation 1. 2. 3. More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop. Turn rear wiper switch OFF. Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch. FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input voltage is less than approximately 9 V. NOTE: When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function returns to normal operation. DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000007493282 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. Revision: 2011 September BCS-58 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Priority DTC 1 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE 2 • U1000: CAN COMM • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 3 • • • • • B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM B2195: ANTI-SCANNING B2196: DONGLE NG B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP 4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • B2555: STOP LAMP B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B2557: VEHICLE SPEED B2601: SHIFT POSITION B2602: SHIFT POSITION B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS B2604: PNP/CLUTCH SW B2605: PNP/CLUTCH SW B2608: STARTER RELAY B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST B2614: BCM B2615: BCM B2616: BCM B2618: BCM B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF B26F2: IGN RELAY ON B26F3: START CONT RLY ON B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF B26F6: BCM B26F7: BCM B26F8: BCM B26F9: CRANK REQ CIR SHORT B26FA: CRANK REQ CIR OPEN B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR U0415: VEHICLE SPEED • • • • • • • • • • • • C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL C1708: [NO DATA] FL C1709: [NO DATA] FR C1710: [NO DATA] RR C1711: [NO DATA] RL C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL 5 5 • B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA 6 • B2626: OUTSIDE ANTENNA • B2627: OUTSIDE ANTENNA • B2628: OUTSIDE ANTENNA A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P DTC Index INFOID:0000000007493283 NOTE: The details of time display are as follows. • CRNT: A malfunction is detected now. • PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past. Revision: 2011 September BCS-59 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-16, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)". CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data •Vehicle Speed •Odo/Trip Meter •Vehicle Condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON Reference page No DTC is detected. further testing may be required. — — — — — U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-71 U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) — — — — BCS-72 U0415: VEHICLE SPEED — — × — BCS-73 B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-50 B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-51 B2195: ANTI-SCANNING × — — — SEC-52 B2196: DONGLE NG × — — — SEC-53 B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — — SEC-55 B2555: STOP LAMP — × × — SEC-58 B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — SEC-61 B2557: VEHICLE SPEED — × × — SEC-63 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE — × — — BCS-74 B2601: SHIFT POSITION — × × — SEC-64 B2602: SHIFT POSITION — × × — SEC-66 B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS — × × — SEC-69 B2604: PNP/CLUTCH SW — × × — SEC-73 B2605: PNP/CLUTCH SW — × × — SEC-75 B2608: STARTER RELAY × × × — SEC-77 B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST × × × — SEC-79 B2614: BCM — × × — PCS-50 B2615: BCM — × × — PCS-52 B2616: BCM — × × — PCS-54 B2618: BCM — × × — PCS-56 B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — PCS-58 B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-194 B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-196 B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-198 B2626: OUTSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-202 B2627: OUTSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-200 B2628: OUTSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-204 B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF × × × — PCS-60 B26F2: IGN RELAY ON × × × — PCS-61 B26F3: START CONT RLY ON × × × — SEC-82 B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF × × × — SEC-83 B26F6: BCM — × × — PCS-63 B26F7: BCM × × × — SEC-84 Revision: 2011 September BCS-60 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data •Vehicle Speed •Odo/Trip Meter •Vehicle Condition Intelligent Key warning lamp ON Tire pressure monitor warning lamp ON A Reference page B B26F8: BCM — × × — SEC-85 B26F9: CRANK REQ CIR SHORT — × × — SEC-86 B26FA: CRANK REQ CIR OPEN — × × — SEC-88 B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION — × × — SEC-90 C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL — — — × C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR — — — × C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR — — — × C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL — — — × C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — × C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — × C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — × C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — × C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL — — — × C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR — — — × C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR — — — × C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL — — — × C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR — — — × C D WT-22 E WT-24 F G WT-26 H WT-28 I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-61 2012 QUEST BCM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM BCM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007493284 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JRMWC4349GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-62 2012 QUEST BCM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O JRMWC4350GB P Revision: 2011 September BCS-63 2012 QUEST BCM < WIRING DIAGRAM > JRMWC4351GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-64 2012 QUEST BCM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O JRMWC4352GB P Revision: 2011 September BCS-65 2012 QUEST BCM < WIRING DIAGRAM > JRMWC4353GB Revision: 2011 September BCS-66 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) B ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description INFOID:0000000007493285 C BEFORE REPLACEMENT When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replacement. NOTE: If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after replacing BCM. D E AFTER REPLACEMENT CAUTION: When replacing BCM, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. Or not doing so, BCM control function does not operate normally. • Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order. • Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. • If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur. NOTE: When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS) (if equipped). F G ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure H 1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION I INFOID:0000000007493286 CONSULT Configuration Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-68, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description". NOTE: If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after replacing BCM. J K >> GO TO 2. L 2.REPLACE BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". BCS >> GO TO 3. 3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION N CONSULT Configuration Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-68, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure". O >> GO TO 4. 4.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS) (IF EQUIPPED) P Perform BCM initialization. (NATS) >> WORK END CONFIGURATION (BCM) Revision: 2011 September BCS-67 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description INFOID:0000000007493287 Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing BCM. Configuration has three functions as follows. Function Description READ CONFIGURATION • Reads the vehicle configuration of current BCM. • Saves the read vehicle configuration. WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection. WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. NOTE: Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting can not be changed) For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. Or not doing so, BCM control function does not operate normally. • Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order. • Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. • Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new BCM. • If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur. CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007493288 1.WRITING MODE SELECTION CONSULT Configuration Select “CONFIGURATION” of BCM. When writing saved data>>GO TO 2. When writing manually>>GO TO 3. 2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - CONFIG FILE” CONSULT Configuration Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file”. >> WORK END 3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - MANUAL SELECTION” CONSULT Configuration Select "WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection". Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to BCS-69, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list". 3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item. CAUTION: Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if the setting is not correct. NOTE: If items are not displayed, touch “SETTING”. Refer to BCS-69, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list" for written items and setting value. 4. Select "SETTING". CAUTION: Make sure to select “SETTING” even if the indicated configuration of brand new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized. 5. When "COMMAND FINISHED", select "END". 1. 2. Revision: 2011 September BCS-68 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > >> GO TO 4. 4.OPERATION CHECK A Confirm that each function controlled by BCM operates normally. B >> WORK END CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list INFOID:0000000007493289 C CAUTION: Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if the setting is not correct. SETTING ITEM Items D NOTE Setting value E CAN CONNECTION UNIT WITHOUT ⇔ MODE13 ⇔ MODE15 • WITHOUT: Without automatic sliding door system and automatic back door system • MODE13: With automatic sliding door system and automatic back door system • MODE15: With automatic sliding door system, and without automatic back door system H/L BULB DEFAULT — AUTO LIGHT WITH ⇔ WITHOUT — HANDLE LHD — DTRL WITH ⇔ WITHOUT • WITH: With daytime running light system • WITHOUT: Without daytime running light system ⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-69 2012 QUEST TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION < BASIC INSPECTION > TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION Description INFOID:0000000007827913 • BCM is in transit mode if turn signal indicator on combination meter turns ON for 1 minute when ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON. • In this case, cancel operation must be performed. NOTE: Do not cancel transit mode during storage of the vehicle. Always cancel transit mode before delivery of the vehicle to customer. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007827914 1.TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn and hold front wiper switch to HI, and then operate turn signal switch to RH or LH. >> GO TO 2. 2.TRANSIT MODE CANCEL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Turn front wiper switch and turn signal switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Check that turn signal indicator on combination meter does not turn ON. >> WORK END Revision: 2011 September BCS-70 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A U1000 CAN COMM Description INFOID:0000000007493290 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart". DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493291 B C D E DTC DETECTION LOGIC F DTC U1000 CONSULT display description CAN COMM DTC Detection Condition When BCM cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more. Diagnosis Procedure Possible cause G CAN communication system INFOID:0000000007493292 H 1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC I 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM. Is DTC “U1000” displayed? YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-71 2012 QUEST U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493293 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONSULT display description DTC Detection Condition U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction. Diagnosis Procedure Possible cause BCM INFOID:0000000007493294 1.REPLACE BCM When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM. >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September BCS-72 2012 QUEST U0415 VEHICLE SPEED < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0415 VEHICLE SPEED A Description INFOID:0000000007493295 U0415 is displayed if any unusual condition is present in the reception status of the vehicle speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). DTC Logic B INFOID:0000000007493296 C DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0415 CONSULT display description VEHICLE SPEED D DTC Detection Condition Probable cause When the vehicle speed signal received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) remains abnormal for 2 seconds or more. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • BCM E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.DTC CONFIRMATION F 1. 2. 3. G Erase the DTC. Turn ignition switch OFF. Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 2 seconds or more after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Refer to BCS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493297 H I 1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAG RESULTS Perform “Self-Diagnostic Result” of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CONSULT. Refer to BRC37, "DTC Index". Is any DTC detected? YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-73 2012 QUEST B2562 LOW VOLTAGE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2562 LOW VOLTAGE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493298 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B2562 CONSULT display description LOW VOLTAGE DTC Detection Condition When the power supply voltage to BCM remains less than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or more Possible cause Harness or connector (power supply circuit) DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.DTC CONFIRMATION 1. 2. 3. Erase DTC. Turn ignition switch OFF. Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 120 seconds or more after the ignition switch is turned ON. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Refer to BCS-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493299 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check BCM power supply circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the circuit normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair the malfunctioning part. Revision: 2011 September BCS-74 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493300 1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK B Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown. Signal name C Fuse and fusible link No. L Battery power supply 10 D Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown. NO >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. G Terminals (+) (−) BCM Connector Terminal 70 M123 Voltage (Approx.) H Ground I Battery voltage 57 Is the measurement value normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. J 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. L BCM Connector Terminal M123 67 Ground Continuity Existed BCS Does continuity exist? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-75 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493301 1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector. System BCM Connector Combination switch Terminal Connector Terminal OUTPUT 1 36 11 OUTPUT 2 35 9 OUTPUT 3 M121 34 M103 7 OUTPUT 4 33 10 OUTPUT 5 32 13 Continuity Existed Does continuity exist? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. System BCM Connector OUTPUT 1 36 OUTPUT 2 35 OUTPUT 3 Continuity Terminal M121 Ground 34 OUTPUT 4 33 OUTPUT 5 32 Not existed Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. Connect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) System (−) BCM Connector Terminal OUTPUT 1 36 OUTPUT 2 35 OUTPUT 3 34 OUTPUT 4 M121 OUTPUT 5 Voltage (Approx.) Ground 33 32 PKIB4960J 7.0 - 8.0 V Is the measurement value normal? Revision: 2011 September BCS-76 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Replace combination switch. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-77 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493302 1.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector. System BCM Connector Combination switch Terminal Connector Terminal INPUT 1 6 12 INPUT 2 5 14 INPUT 3 M121 4 M103 5 INPUT 4 3 2 INPUT 5 2 8 Continuity Existed Does continuity exist? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. System BCM Connector INPUT 1 6 INPUT 2 5 INPUT 3 Continuity Terminal M121 Ground 4 INPUT 4 3 INPUT 5 2 Not existed Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunction. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) System BCM Connector INPUT 1 Voltage (Approx.) Terminal 6 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 (−) 5 M121 4 INPUT 4 3 INPUT 5 2 Ground Refer to BCS36, "Reference Value". Is the measurement value normal? Yes >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September BCS-78 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > No >> Replace combination switch. A B C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-79 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS Symptom Table 1. 2. INFOID:0000000007493303 Perform “Data Monitor” of CONSULT to check for any malfunctioning item. Check the malfunction combinations. Malfunction item: × × × × × × × × × × FR FOG SW PASSING SW AUTO LIGHT SW B × C × × D × E × F × G × × × × 3. × × × × × × Malfunction combination A × × HEAD LAMP SW 2 HEAD LAMP SW 1 × HI BEAM SW TURN SIGNAL L × TAIL LAMP SW TURN SIGNAL R INT VOLUME RR WASHER SW RR WIPER INT × RR WIPER ON FR WASHER SW × FR WIPER INT FR WIPER LOW FR WIPER HI Data monitor item × × × × H × × I J All Items K If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K L Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part. Malfunction combination Malfunctioning part A Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit B Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit C Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit Repair or replace Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-76, "Diagnosis Procedure". D Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit E Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit F Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit G Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit H Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit I Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit J Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit K BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". L Combination switch Replace combination switch. Revision: 2011 September Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-78, "Diagnosis Procedure". BCS-80 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description A INFOID:0000000007827915 TRANSIT MODE B • Transit mode inhibits battery power consumption during transportation or storage of the vehicle. • BCM is set to transit mode before delivery. • In transit mode, remote keyless entry function, headlamp ON/OFF function, theft warning alarm function, and other BCM control functions do not operate normally. • Therefore, cancel operation must be performed so that the vehicle is used in normal status. • For transit mode cancel operation, refer to BCS-70, "Description". NOTE: Do not cancel transit mode during storage of the vehicle. Always cancel transit mode before delivery of the vehicle to customer. C D E F G H I J K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-81 2012 QUEST BCM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION BCM Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493304 NOTE: Before replacing BCM, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-67, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description". REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". Remove bolts. Remove BCM and disconnect the connectors. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Be sure to perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” when replacing BCM. Or not doing so, BCM control function does not operate normally. NOTE: Be sure to perform the system initialization (NATS) when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September BCS-82 2012 QUEST COMBINATION SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > COMBINATION SWITCH A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493305 B C D E F JMMIA0383ZZ 1. Combination switch 2. G Combination switch connector Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493306 H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove screws. Disconnect the connector. Pull up the combination switch to remove it. I J INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. K L BCS N O P Revision: 2011 September BCS-83 2012 QUEST BRAKES SECTION BR BRAKE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............14 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 16 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3 Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3 BRAKE PAD ..............................................................16 BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ...............16 G DISC ROTOR .............................................................16 DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............16 H PREPARATION ............................................ 5 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 18 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 18 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................18 Removal and Installation .........................................18 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................19 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 6 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 6 BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 20 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 6 FRONT .......................................................................20 FRONT : Exploded View .........................................20 FRONT : Hydraulic Piping .......................................21 FRONT : Removal and Installation ..........................21 FRONT : Inspection .................................................22 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7 BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 7 Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 7 BRAKE FLUID ....................................................10 Inspection ................................................................ 10 Draining ................................................................... 10 Refilling ................................................................... 10 Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 11 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................12 REAR .........................................................................23 REAR : Exploded View ............................................23 REAR : Hydraulic Piping ..........................................24 REAR : Removal and Installation ............................24 REAR : Inspection ...................................................25 Exploded View .........................................................27 Removal and Installation .........................................27 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................29 Inspection ................................................................30 BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................13 Inspection ................................................................ 13 BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 31 BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 14 BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 14 Exploded View .........................................................31 Removal and installation .........................................31 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................32 DISC ROTOR ............................................................. 14 VACUUM LINES ............................................... 33 Revision: 2011 September I J K L M N BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 27 Inspection ................................................................ 12 FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................14 BR BR-1 2012 QUEST O P Exploded View ........................................................ 33 Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 Inspection ............................................................... 33 FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................ 35 BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 35 BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 35 BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 35 BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 37 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 37 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 37 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ................................................................. 39 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................ 40 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........... 42 REAR DISC BRAKE .......................................... 43 BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 43 BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 43 Revision: 2011 September BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 43 BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 45 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 45 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 45 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .................................................................. 47 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................ 48 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............ 50 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 51 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 51 General Specifications ............................................ 51 Brake Pedal ............................................................ 51 Brake Booster ......................................................... 51 Front Disc Brake ..................................................... 51 Rear Disc Brake ...................................................... 51 BR-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007732195 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: E Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by BR an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag G Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover I J K INFOID:0000000007732196 When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to windshield. L M N PIIB3706J Precaution for Brake System WARNING: Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. • Brake fluid use refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. Revision: 2011 September O INFOID:0000000007491372 BR-3 2012 QUEST P PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > • Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes. • After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value. • Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other components. • Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause improper operation. • Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench. • Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B). • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work. • Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the parts. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. - Front brake pad: Refer to BR-14, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and JPFIA0001ZZ Adjustment". - Front disc rotor: Refer to BR-14, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". - Rear brake pad: Refer to BR-16, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". - Rear disc rotor: Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". Revision: 2011 September BR-4 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007491373 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B C D E PBIC0190E BR Pin punch a: 4 mm (0.16 in) Removing and installing reservoir tank G NT410 H • Air tight • Inspection of check valve Handy vacuum pump I J ZZC1313D K Brake caliper wrench Return the piston L NNFIA0040ZZ M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-5 2012 QUEST Symptom BRAKE Revision: 2011 September BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 BR-14, BR-16 Rotor imbalance Rotor damage Rotor runout Rotor deformation Rotor deflection Rotor rust Rotor thickness variation × × Shake × Shimmy, Judder × BR-6 × × × × × × × × × × × NVH in ST section × STEERING × NVH in FAX section × DRIVE SHAFT × × NVH in WT section ROAD WHEEL NVH Troubleshooting Chart × × NVH in WT section TIRE × NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section × AXLE AND SUSPENSION NVH in PB section BR-37, BR-45 Shims damaged × Drum out of round BR-14, BR-16 Noise Pads uneven wear Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS BR-14, BR-16 Reference page Pads damaged NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING INFOID:0000000007491374 Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × ×: Applicable 2012 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491375 B INSPECTION C Brake Pedal Height Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake pedal upper surface. D H1 : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". CAUTION: Remove the floor trim. E BR JPFIA0065ZZ Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Switch Check the clearance (C) among the stopper rubber (1) and the stop lamp switch and brake switch (2) threaded end. C G H : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". CAUTION: The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released. NOTE: Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between the stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber. I J JPFIA0122ZZ Brake Pedal Play Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A) (stroke until fluid pressure occurs). A K : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". L M JPFIA0277ZZ Depressed Brake Pedal Height Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON. H2 O : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". P CAUTION: Remove the floor trim. JPFIA0068ZZ ADJUSTMENT Revision: 2011 September N BR-7 2012 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Brake Pedal Height 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector. Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise. Loosen the lock nut of input rod (1). Rotate the input rod (2), adjust the brake pedal to the specified height (H1). CAUTION: The threaded end of the input rod must project to the inner side of the clevis (3). JPFIA0662ZZ H1 6. : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". Tighten the lock nut. Refer to BR-31, "Exploded View". JPFIA0279ZZ Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Switch 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector. Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise. Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake switch (2) until the stop lamp switch and brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1) 45° clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly. CAUTION: • The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded and must be the specified value. C : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". • The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is released. JPFIA0122ZZ Brake Pedal Play 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector. Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise. Revision: 2011 September BR-8 2012 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 4. Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake switch (2) until the stop lamp switch and brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1) 45° clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly. CAUTION: • The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded and must be the specified value. C A B C : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". • The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is released. JPFIA0122ZZ D Depressed Brake Pedal Height 1. 2. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON. H2 3. E BR : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal". CAUTION: Remove the floor trim. Adjust brake pedal height and brake pedal play. G JPFIA0068ZZ H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-9 2012 QUEST BRAKE FLUID < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > BRAKE FLUID Inspection INFOID:0000000007491376 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL • • • • Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range (MAX – MIN lines). Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the reservoir tank and sub tank. Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is extremely low (lower than MIN). Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp remains illuminated even after the parking brake is released. • Check the reservoir tank and sub tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid. BRAKE LINE 1. 2. Check brake line (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage. CAUTION: Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present. SBR389C Draining INFOID:0000000007491377 CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work. • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleed valve. 2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradually discharge brake fluid. BRA0007D Refilling INFOID:0000000007491378 CAUTION: • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work. • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. 1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank and sub tank, and refill with new brake fluid. CAUTION: • Never reuse drained brake fluid. Revision: 2011 September BR-10 2012 QUEST BRAKE FLUID < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • Never allow oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank. 2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged. Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed. Repeat the same work on each wheel. 3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". Bleeding Brake System A B INFOID:0000000007491379 C CAUTION: • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work. • Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding D • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. E • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank and sub tank, and refill with new brake fluid. CAUTION: BR • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Never allow oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear right brake. G 3. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the bleeder valve. H 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the air is out of the brake line. 6. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque. • Front disc brake: refer to BR-37, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View". I • Rear disc brake: refer to BR-45, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6. Occasionally fill with the brake fluid in order to keep it in the reservoir tank at least half of MAX line. Bleed air in the following order: rear right brake → front left brake → rear left brake → and front right brake in order. J 8. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR10, "Inspection". 9. Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-7, K "Inspection and Adjustment". L M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-11 2012 QUEST BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Inspection INFOID:0000000007491380 FLUID LEAK Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face, sub tank mounting face and brake tube connections. Revision: 2011 September BR-12 2012 QUEST BRAKE BOOSTER < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > BRAKE BOOSTER A Inspection INFOID:0000000007491381 OPERATION B Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases. C AIR TIGHT 1. 2. 3. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more. D E BR G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-13 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > FRONT DISC BRAKE BRAKE PAD BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491382 INSPECTION Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder body. Check using a scale if necessary. Wear thickness : Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake". MAA0439D ADJUSTMENT Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: • Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc rotor are securely fitted. • Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. DISC ROTOR DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491383 INSPECTION Appearance Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". Runout 1. 2. 3. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least). Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection. Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection". Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge. Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) : Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake". 4. SBR019B Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value. • Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.] CAUTION: • Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or more. Revision: 2011 September BR-14 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Refer to FAX8, "Removal and Installation". Wear thickness : Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake". B Thickness Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". Wear thickness A C : Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake". D E SBR020B ADJUSTMENT Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: • Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. • Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. BR G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-15 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > REAR DISC BRAKE BRAKE PAD BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491384 INSPECTION Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder body. Check using a scale if necessary. Wear thickness : Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake". BRA0010D ADJUSTMENT Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: • Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc rotor are securely fitted. • Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. DISC ROTOR DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491385 INSPECTION Appearance Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Runout 1. 2. 3. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least). Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection. Refer to RAX-4, "Inspection". Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge. Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) : Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake". 4. SBR019B Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value. • Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.] CAUTION: • Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or more. Revision: 2011 September BR-16 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Wear thickness : Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake". B Thickness Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Wear thickness A C : Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake". D E SBR020B ADJUSTMENT Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: • Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. • Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted. BR G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September BR-17 2012 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION BRAKE PEDAL Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491386 JSFIA0957GB 1. Clevis pin 2. Brake pedal assembly 3. Brake pedal pad 4. Snap pin 5. Clip 6. Brake switch 7. Stop lamp switch : Apply multi-purpose grease. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491387 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the stop lamp switch and the brake switch harness connectors. Rotate the stop lamp switch and the brake switch (1) counter clockwise to remove. JPFIA0815ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-18 2012 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2) from clevis (3) of brake booster. 5. Remove the brake pedal assembly. CAUTION: Hold the brake booster and master cylinder assembly so as not to drop out or contact them other parts. 6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection and Adjustment". A B C JPFIA0816ZZ D INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been E already applied) NOTE: The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction. • Perform adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection and Adjustment". BR Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491388 G INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Check for the following items and replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary. - Check the brake pedal upper rivet (made by aluminum) (A) for deformation. - Check the brake pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the welded parts. - Check the lapping length (D) of sub-bracket (B) and slide plate (C). H I D : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) or more J JSFIA0459ZZ K • Check clevis pin and plastic stopper (A) for damage and deformation. If any is found, replace clevis pin. L M N PFIA0756J ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust each item of brake pedal after installing the brake pedal assembly to the vehicle. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment". O P Revision: 2011 September BR-19 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BRAKE PIPING FRONT FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491389 JSFIA0958GB 1. Brake tube 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 3. Master cylinder assembly 4. Brake booster 5. Connector bracket 6. Connector 7. Lock plate 8. Brake hose 9. Union bolt 10. Copper washer A. To rear brake tube : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. Revision: 2011 September BR-20 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000007491390 A B C D E BR JSFIA0959ZZ 1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 2. Front disc brake 3. Master cylinder assembly 4. Brake booster 5. Connector 6. Rear disc brake A. Brake tube B. Brake hose G H : Flare nut : Union bolt I FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491391 J REMOVAL CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut (1) with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate the brake tube (2) from the brake hose (3). CAUTION: • Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. • Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes. • Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. K L M N O P JPFIA0847ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-21 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove the union bolt (1) and copper washers (2), and remove the brake hose (3) from the brake caliper assembly. 5. Remove the lock plate (4) and remove the brake hose. JPFIA0819ZZ INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Assemble the union bolt (1) and the copper washer (2) to the brake hose. CAUTION: Never reuse the copper washer. 2. Align the brake hose L-pin (A) with the brake caliper assembly hole (B), and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque. JSFIA0559ZZ 3. Install the brake tube (2) to the brake hose (1), temporarily tighten the flare nut (3) by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose to the bracket (5) with the lock plate (4). CAUTION: Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted and bent. JPFIA0821ZZ 4. 5. 6. 7. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B). CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-22, "FRONT : Inspection". JPFIA0001ZZ FRONT : Inspection INFOID:0000000007491392 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September BR-22 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interference with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections. 2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage. CAUTION: Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present. REAR A B C REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491393 D E BR G H I J K JSFIA0960GB 1. Brake tube 2. Lock plate 4. Union bolt 5. Copper washer A. To connector 3. L Brake hose M : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) N : Always replace after every disassembly. : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. O P Revision: 2011 September BR-23 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000007491394 JSFIA0959ZZ 1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 2. Front disc brake 3. Master cylinder assembly 4. Brake booster 5. Connector 6. Rear disc brake A. Brake tube B. Brake hose : Flare nut : Union bolt REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491395 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining". 3. Loosen the flare nut (1) with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate the brake tube (2) from the brake hose (3). CAUTION: • Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. • Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes. • Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. JSFIA0561ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-24 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove the union bolt (1) and copper washers (2), and remove the brake hose (3) from the brake caliper assembly. 5. Remove the lock plate (4), and remove brake hose. A B C JSFIA0562ZZ D INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, E never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. BR • If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Assemble the union bolt (1) and the copper washer (2) to the brake hose. G CAUTION: Never reuse the copper washer. 2. Align the brake hose L-pin (A) with the brake caliper assembly H hole (B), and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. I JSFIA0563ZZ J 3. Install the brake tube (2) to the brake hose (1), temporarily tighten the flare nut (3) by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose with the lock plate (4). CAUTION: Check that all brake hose and brake tube are not twisted and bent. K L M JSFIA0564ZZ 4. 5. 6. 7. N Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B). CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-25, "REAR : Inspection". O P JPFIA0001ZZ REAR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007491396 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September BR-25 2012 QUEST BRAKE PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness at connections. 2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage. CAUTION: Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present. Revision: 2011 September BR-26 2012 QUEST BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491397 B C D E BR G H I JSFIA0961GB 1. Reservoir cap 2. Reservoir tank 3. Reservoir tank bracket 4. Clamp 5. Hose 6. Bracket 7. Clamp 10. O-ring A. 8. Cylinder body 9. Pin 11. Grommet 12. Sub tank J K Paint mark : Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant. L : Apply brake fluid. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) M : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. N Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491398 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. 1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-30, "Inspection". 2. Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining". 4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector. Revision: 2011 September BR-27 2012 QUEST O P BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Remove reservoir tank, bracket and hose. 6. Remove air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation". 7. Separate the brake tube from master cylinder assembly with a flare nut wrench (A). CAUTION: Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. 8. Remove the master cylinder assembly. CAUTION: • Never deform or bend the brake tubes. • Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed. JPFIA0844ZZ 9. • The piston (A) of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when removing the master cylinder. • The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder assembly. Remove the O-ring. JSFIA0567ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed. • Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to the brake booster [see (A) in the figure] when installing the master cylinder assembly to the brake booster. JPFIA0013ZZ • The piston (A) of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when handling the master cylinder. • Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with new brake fluid if necessary. • The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder assembly. • Never reuse the O-ring. • Never deform or bend the brake tubes. JSFIA0567ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-28 2012 QUEST BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a crowfoot and torque wrench (A). Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". A B C JPFIA0844ZZ D • Align paint mark of hose with sub tank projection (A), and install hose to sub tank. E BR G JSFIA0573ZZ H • When installing hose, insert it until its tip reaches the back-end of length (A) or further as show in the figure. A I : 25 mm (0.98 in) or more • Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-30, "Inspection". J K PFIA0761J Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007491399 L DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: • Never disassemble the cylinder body. • Remove the sub tank only when necessary. • Never drop the when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped. 1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise. CAUTION: • Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise. • Never overtighten the vise. 2. Remove the sub tank mounting pin with a pin punch (A) [4 mm (0.16 in)]. 3. Remove the sub tank and grommet from the cylinder body. M N O P JSFIA0568ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-29 2012 QUEST BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ASSEMBLY CAUTION: • Never use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and assembly process. • Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank. • Never drop the when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped. 1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse the grommets. 2. Install the sub tank to the cylinder body. 3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise. CAUTION: • Place the sub tank with the chamfered pin hole ( ) facing up. • Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise. • Never overtighten the vise. JSFIA0569ZZ 4. Tilt the sub tank so that a mounting pin can be inserted. Insert a mounting pin with a pin punch (A) [4 mm (0.16 in)]. Return the sub tank to the horizontal position. Insert another mounting pin into the pin hole on the opposite side in the same manner after the mounting pin passes through the cylinder body pin hole. CAUTION: Never reuse the pin. JSFIA0568ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007491400 INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-86, "Component Inspection". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the following items and replace if necessary. • Check the master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection. • Check for fluid leakage from connection. Refer to BR-22, "FRONT : Inspection". CAUTION: If the fluid leakage is present, retighten to the specified torque. Replace if necessary. Revision: 2011 September BR-30 2012 QUEST BRAKE BOOSTER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BRAKE BOOSTER A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491401 B C D E BR G JSFIA0962GB 1. Master cylinder assembly 2. Brake booster 4. Clevis 5. Gasket 3. Lock nut H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) I Removal and installation INFOID:0000000007491402 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-32, "Inspection and Adjustment". Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation". Remove intelligent key warning buzzer. Refer to DLK-458, "Removal and Installation". Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation". Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2). Refer to BR-18, "Exploded View". Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. CAUTION: Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out. Remove brake booster. CAUTION: Never deform or bend the brake tubes. NOTE: If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake booster. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-32, "Inspection and Adjustment". J K L M N JPFIA0019ZZ O INSTALLATION CAUTION: Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads. • Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster. • Always use a gasket between the brake booster and the dash panel. Revision: 2011 September BR-31 2012 QUEST P BRAKE BOOSTER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Replace the clevis pin if it is damaged. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection and Adjustment". • Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". • Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment". Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007491403 INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL Air Tight CAUTION: Check the air tight condition when the master cylinder and the brake booster is installed. 1. Check the air tight use a handy vacuum pump. At vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg) 2. a. b. c. : Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg, 0.98 inHg) for 15 seconds. If the air tight condition cannot be maintained, perform the following operation. Check the no dirt and dust are present on the brake booster and brake master cylinder mating faces. Clean it if necessary. Check the O-ring on the master cylinder. If anything is found, replace the O-ring. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation". Check the air tight condition again. If the condition still cannot be maintained, replace the brake booster. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Input Rod Length Inspection 1. Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the specified length (A). A 2. : Refer to BR-51, "Brake Booster". Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. JPFIA0238ZZ INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Operation Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases. NOTE: A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation. Air Tight 1. 2. 3. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment". Revision: 2011 September BR-32 2012 QUEST VACUUM LINES < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > VACUUM LINES A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491404 B C D E BR G JSFIA0963ZZ 1. Clamp 2. Vacuum hose (check valve built-in) 4. Clip 5. Vacuum hose A. To intake manifold B. Paint mark D. To brake booster 3. Vacuum piping H C. Stamp indicating engine direction I Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491405 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. J Remove air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation". Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-33, "Inspection". K INSTALLATION Note the following, install to the vacuum hose. • The check valve built-in the vacuum hose must face the right direction, referring to BR-33, "Exploded View". If the vacuum hose is installed in the wrong direction, the brake booster may not operate normally. • When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Never use lubricating oil during assembly. L M N A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more - Face the paint mark of vacuum piping (brake booster side) and vacuum hose (intake manifold side) to vehicle front to assemble. - Face the other paint marks upward to assemble. - For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR33, "Exploded View". - Install clip to the correct position, refer to BR-33, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Both cooler pipe and vacuum piping must be clipped. Inspection O JPFIA0023ZZ INFOID:0000000007491406 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Revision: 2011 September BR-33 2012 QUEST P VACUUM LINES < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Appearance Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration. Check Valve Airtightness • Use a handy vacuum pump (A) to check. When connected to the booster side (B): Vacuum should decrease within 1.3 kPa (9.8 mmHg, 0.38 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.70 inHg). When connected to the engine side (C): Vacuum should not exist. • Replace vacuum hose if vacuum hose and check valve are malfunctioning. Revision: 2011 September BR-34 JPFIA0024ZZ 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT DISC BRAKE A BRAKE PAD BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491407 B C D E BR G JSFIA0578GB 1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Cylinder body 3. Inner shim cover 4. Inner shim 5. Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) 6. Pad return spring 7. Pad retainer 8. Torque member 9. Outer pad 11. Outer shim cover 10. Outer shim H I 1: Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease. J ® 3: Apply MOLYKOTE 7439 or equivalent. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491408 L REMOVAL WARNING: Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove sliding pin bolt (lower side) from cylinder body. M N O P JSFIA0579ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-35 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. 4. Remove pad return spring. CAUTION: Never deform the pad return spring. 5. Remove the brake pads from the torque member. JSFIA0580ZZ 6. CAUTION: • Never deform the pad retainer (2) when removing the pad retainer from the torque member (1). • Never damage the piston boot. • Never drop the brake pads, shims, and the shim covers. • Remember each position of the removed brake pads. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-37, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". JPFIA0118ZZ INSTALLATION WARNING: Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off. 1. Install the pad retainers (1) to the torque member (2) if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: • Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. • Never deform the pad retainers. PFIA0763J 2. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the mating faces (A) between the brake pads and the shims, and install the shims and shim covers to the brake pads. CAUTION: Always replace the shim and shim cover together when replacing the brake pad. 3. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the mating faces (B) between the brake pads and the pad retainers. Install the brake pads to the torque member. 4. JSFIA0581ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-36 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Install the pad return spring (1) to the brake pad (2). CAUTION: • Never deform the pad return spring. • Correctly insert the pad return spring in to the pad return spring hole on the brake pad. 6. Install cylinder body to torque member. CAUTION: • Never damage the piston boot. • When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. 7. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolt (lower side), and install the sliding pin bolt (lower side) and tighten it to the specified torque. 8. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-37, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". 9. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". A B C JSFIA0582ZZ D E BR G JSFIA0579ZZ BRAKE PAD : Inspection H INFOID:0000000007491409 I INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Replace the shims and the shim covers if rust is excessively attached. • Eliminate rust on the pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached. J INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. 1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times. 5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if necessary. Refer to BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly" • Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-14, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". K L M BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View N INFOID:0000000007491410 REMOVAL O P Revision: 2011 September BR-37 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JSFIA0990GB 1. Brake caliper assembly : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) DISASSEMBLY JSFIA0584GB 1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Bushing 3. Cap 4. Bleeder valve 5. Cylinder body 6. Piston seal 7. Piston 8. Piston boot 9. Sliding pin boot 10. Torque member : Apply rubber grease. : Apply brake fluid. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Revision: 2011 September BR-38 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491411 A REMOVAL WARNING: Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a B dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it C out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake D fluid may splash. • Never drop removed parts. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. E 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining". BR 4. Separate brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. G CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly. 6. When removing disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and InstalH lation". I JSFIA0585ZZ INSTALLATION J WARNING: Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • Never drop removed parts. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". 4. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake SysJSFIA0585ZZ tem". 5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". 6. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September BR-39 2012 QUEST K L M N O P FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007491412 DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never drop the parts. NOTE: Never remove the torque member, brake pad, pad return spring and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop. 2. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Remove bushing (1) from sliding pin bolt (2). JSFIA0496ZZ 4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the pistons. BRB0032D 5. 6. 7. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using seal pick tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. Remove bleeder valve and cap. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". SFIA0141E ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never drop the parts. 1. Install bleeder valve and cap. Revision: 2011 September BR-40 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Apply rubber grease to piston seals (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seals. A B C JPFIA0032ZZ D 3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boots. E BR G JPFIA0033ZZ 4. Apply new brake fluid to pistons (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. H I J JPFIA0034ZZ 5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt (1) and bushing (2), and install bushing to sliding pin bolt. K L M N JSFIA0497ZZ O P Revision: 2011 September BR-41 2012 QUEST FRONT DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt (1) and sliding pin boot (2), and install sliding pin boot to torque member. 7. Install the cylinder body to torque member, and tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. JSFIA0498ZZ BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000007491413 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Check the following items and replace if necessary. Cylinder Body Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Torque Member Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Pistons Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper. Sliding Pin Bolt, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing Check the sliding pin bolts, sliding boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. 1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times. 5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if necessary. Refer to BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly". • Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor or brake pad, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-14, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". Revision: 2011 September BR-42 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR DISC BRAKE A BRAKE PAD BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491414 B C D E BR G JSFIA0586GB 1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Cylinder body 3. Inner shim cover 4. Inner shim 5. Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) 6. Pad retainer 7. Torque member 8. Outer pad 9. Outer shim H I 10. Outer shim cover 1 Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease. J ® 3: Apply MOLYKOTE 7439 or equivalent. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491415 L REMOVAL WARNING: Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off. 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Remove sliding pin bolt (upper side). M N O P JSFIA0587ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-43 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. 4. Remove the brake pads from the torque member. JSFIA0588ZZ 5. CAUTION: • Never deform the pad retainer (2) when removing the pad retainer from the torque member (1). • Never damage the piston boot. • Never drop the brake pads, shims, and the shim covers. • Remember each position of the removed brake pads. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-45, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". JPFIA0118ZZ INSTALLATION WARNING: Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off. 1. Install the pad retainers (1) to the torque member (2) if the pad retainers has been removed. CAUTION: • Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member. • Never deform the pad retainers. PFIA0763J 2. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the mating faces (A) between the brake pads and the shims, and install the shims and shim covers to the brake pads. CAUTION: Always replace the shim together with the shim cover when replacing the brake pad. 3. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the mating faces (B) between the brake pads and the pad retainers. Install the brake pads to the torque member. 4. JSFIA0589ZZ Revision: 2011 September BR-44 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the pawls part (A) of cylinder body, and install cylinder body to the torque member. CAUTION: • Never damage the piston boot. • When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston. A B C JSFIA0591ZZ D 6. 7. 8. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolt (upper side), and install the sliding pin bolt (upper side) and tighten it to the specified torque. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-45, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". E BR G JSFIA0587ZZ BRAKE PAD : Inspection INFOID:0000000007491416 H INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Replace the shims and the shim covers if rust is excessively attached. • Eliminate rust on the pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached. I INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. 1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times. 5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if necessary. Refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly" • Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". J K L M BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491417 N REMOVAL O P Revision: 2011 September BR-45 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JPFIA0311GB 1. Brake caliper assembly : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) DISASSEMBLY JSFIA0674GB 1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Bushing 3. Cap 4. Bleeder valve 5. Cylinder body 6. Piston seal 7. Piston 8. Piston boot 9. Sliding pin boot 10. Torque member 1: Apply rubber grease. 2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease. 3: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant. : Apply brake fluid. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Revision: 2011 September BR-46 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491418 A REMOVAL WARNING: Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a B dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it C out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake D fluid may splash. • Never drop removed parts. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. E 1. Remove tires with power tool. 2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining". BR 4. Separate brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR-24, "REAR : Removal and Installation". 5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. G CAUTION: Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly. 6. When removing disc rotor. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and InstalH lation". I JSFIA0495ZZ INSTALLATION J WARNING: Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. CAUTION: • Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts, never wash them with water. • Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may splash. • Never drop removed parts. • If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. 1. Install disc rotor. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". 2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the axle housing and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture. 3. Install brake hose. Refer to BR-24, "REAR : Removal and Installation". 4. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake SysJSFIA0495ZZ tem". 5. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". 6. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September BR-47 2012 QUEST K L M N O P REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007491419 DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never drop the parts. NOTE: Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body. 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop. 2. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Remove bushing (1) from sliding pin bolt (2). JSFIA0496ZZ 4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Never get fingers caught in the pistons. MAA0272D 5. 6. 7. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using seal pick tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall. Remove bleeder valve and cap. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection". JPFIA0038ZZ ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never drop the parts. 1. Install bleeder valve and cap. Revision: 2011 September BR-48 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to piston seals (1), and install them to cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston seals. A B C JPFIA0039ZZ D 3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Never reuse piston boots. E BR G JPFIA0040ZZ 4. Apply new brake fluid to pistons (1). Push piston into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. H I J JPFIA0034ZZ 5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt (1) and bushing (2), and install bushing to sliding pin. K L M N JSFIA0497ZZ O P Revision: 2011 September BR-49 2012 QUEST REAR DISC BRAKE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt (1) and sliding pin boot (2), and install sliding pin and sliding pin boot to sliding torque member. JSFIA0498ZZ 7. 8. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the pawls part (A) of cylinder body. Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Exploded View". JSFIA0591ZZ BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000007491420 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Check the following items and replace if necessary. Cylinder Body Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. CAUTION: Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil. Torque Member Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Pistons Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. CAUTION: A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper. Sliding Pin Bolt, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing Check the sliding pin bolts, sliding boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. 1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". 4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times. 5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if necessary. Refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly". • Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor or brake pad, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". Revision: 2011 September BR-50 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications INFOID:0000000007491421 B Unit: mm (in) 47.62 (1.8748) × 2 Cylinder bore diameter Front brake Pad length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness 290 × 28.0 (11.42 × 1.102) Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake 83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335) Rotor outer diameter × thickness Cylinder bore diameter Control valve Valve type Brake booster Diaphragm diameter D 42.86 (1.6874) Pad length × width × thickness Master cylinder C 132.0 × 44.5 × 10.0 (5.20 × 1.752 × 0.394) 308 × 16.0 (12.13 × 0.630) E 25.4 (1.0) Electric brake force distribution BR Primary: 228.5 (9.00) Secondary: 203 (7.99) Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". Recommended brake fluid Brake Pedal G INFOID:0000000007491422 Unit: mm (in) Item H Standard Brake pedal height 195.6 – 205.6 (7.70 – 8.09) Depressed brake pedal height [Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON] Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber Brake pedal play I 105.0 (4.13) or more 0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.0772) 3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43) Brake Booster J INFOID:0000000007491423 K Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Input rod length L 127.0 – 128.0 (5.00 – 5.04) Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000007491424 Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 26.0 (1.024) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) N 0.040 (0.0016) O Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000007491425 Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Revision: 2011 September M Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 14.0 (0.551) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) BR-51 0.050 (0.0020) 2012 QUEST P CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE SECTION CCS CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS ASCD SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ............................................................... 2 F Information ................................................................ 2 G H I J K L M N CCS P Revision: 2011 September CCS-1 2012 QUEST AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [ASCD] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Information INFOID:0000000007495955 Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) system is controlled by ECM. Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-40, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description". Revision: 2011 September CCS-2 2012 QUEST ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL SECTION CHG CHARGING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 10 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 10 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable Control System .......................................................... 3 Work Flow ................................................................10 PREPARATION ............................................ 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ................................................ 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ........................................................ 13 F G Inspection Procedure ...............................................13 H POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION ........................................................ 14 I Inspection Procedure ...............................................14 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16 J B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 16 Description ...............................................................16 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16 K CHARGING SYSTEM .................................................. 5 CHARGING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ............................................................................ 5 L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) ........................ 17 POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................... 5 POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location...... 5 L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ..................... 19 CHG SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 20 CHARGING SYSTEM .................................................. 7 CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description ............. 7 Description ...............................................................20 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20 POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................... 7 POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............... 7 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 21 Description ...............................................................17 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17 Description ...............................................................19 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19 Symptom Table .......................................................21 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 22 CHARGING SYSTEM .......................................... 9 ALTERNATOR .................................................. 22 Revision: 2011 September N O CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 21 WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 9 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 9 L Exploded View .........................................................22 Removal and Installation .........................................23 Inspection ................................................................24 CHG-1 2012 QUEST P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........................................................... 25 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 25 Alternator ................................................................ 25 Revision: 2011 September CHG-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007494993 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable Control System I J K INFOID:0000000007494994 CAUTION: L For thailand model, the battery current sensor that is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal measures the charging/discharging current of the battery, and performs various controls. If the electrical component or the ground wire is connected directly to the battery terminal, the current other than that being measured with the battery current sensor is charging to or discharging from the bat- CHG tery. This condition causes the malfunction of the control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007494995 Tool number Tool name Description Tests starting and charging systems. For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. (J-44373 Model MCR620) Starting/Charging System Tester SEL403X Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007494996 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts, nuts and screws PIIB1407E Revision: 2011 September CHG-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS CHARGING SYSTEM B CHARGING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007494997 C D E F G H JMMIA0854ZZ No. 1. 2. Component part Description Combination meter (Charge warning lamp) Alternator The IC voltage regulator warning function activates to illuminate the charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while alternator is operating: • Excessive voltage is produced. • No voltage is produced. “B” terminal Refer to CHG-16, "Description". “S” terminal Refer to CHG-20, "Description". “L” terminal Refer to CHG-17, "Description". I J K POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM L POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-5 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Parts Location INFOID:0000000007494998 JMMIA0855ZZ A. Battery No. Component part Description IPDM E/R IPDM E/R converts the received power generation command value into the power generation command signal (PWM signal) and sends it to the IC voltage regulator. Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location". ECM Battery current sensor detects the charging/discharging current of the battery. ECM judges the battery condition based on this signal. ECM judges whether to perform the power generation voltage variable control according to the battery condition. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage according to the battery condition and sends the calculated value as the power generation command value signal to IPDM E/R. Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 3. Alternator (IC voltage regulator) IC voltage regulator controls the power generation voltage by the target power generation voltage based on the received power generation command signal. When there is no power generation command signal, the alternator performs the normal power generation according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator. 4. Battery current sensor (with battery temperature sensor) Battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal, and it detects the charging/discharging current of the battery and sends the voltage signal to ECM according to the current value. 1. 2. Revision: 2011 September CHG-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A CHARGING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007494999 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F G H I JPMIA0426GB J OUTLINE The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. The voltage output is controlled by the IC voltage regulator. K POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description L INFOID:0000000007495000 SYSTEM DIAGRAM CHG N O P JMMIA0388GB Revision: 2011 September CHG-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > OUTLINE By performing the power generation voltage variable control, the engine load due to the power generation of the alternator is reduced and fuel consumption is decreased. NOTE: When any malfunction is detected in the power generation voltage variable control system, the power generation is performed according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator. Revision: 2011 September CHG-8 2012 QUEST CHARGING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A CHARGING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495001 B C D E F G H I J K L CHG N O P JCMWA7679GB Revision: 2011 September CHG-9 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495002 OVEROALL SEQUENCE JSMIA0009GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September CHG-10 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and alternator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. A 1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION B Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-13, "Inspection Procedure". >> GO TO 2. C 2.STOP POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM Stop the operation of the power generation voltage variable control in either of the following procedures. • After selecting “ENGINE” of “SELECT SYSTEM” using CONSULT, set the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” to 0 % by selecting “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “Active Test”. Continue “Active Test” until the end of inspection. (When the DUTY value is 0 or 100 %, the normal power generation is performed according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator.) • Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery current sensor connector. [However, DTC (P1550 P1557) of the engine might remain. After finishing the inspection, connect the battery current sensor connector and erase the self-diagnostic results history of the engine using CONSULT.] D E F >> GO TO 3. 3.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER G Perform the charging system test using Starting/Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. Test result CHARGING SYSTEM NOMAL>>Charging system is normal and will also show “DIODE RIPPLE” test result. NO CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 4. LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 12. HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 14. DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL>>Diode ripple is OK and will also show “CHARGING VOLTAGE” test result. EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED>>Replace the alternator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Starting/ Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373) to confirm repair. DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED>>GO TO 4. 4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON) H I J K Turn the ignition switch ON. Does the charge warning lamp illuminate? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 5. L 5.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) INSPECTION CHG Check “L” terminal circuit (open). Refer to CHG-17, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the “L” terminal circuit normal? YES >> Replace alternator. NO >> Repair as needed. N 6.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING) O Start the engine and run it at idle. Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> GO TO 7. P 7.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION Check “L” terminal circuit (short). Refer to CHG-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the “L” terminal circuit normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair as needed. Revision: 2011 September CHG-11 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 8.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the “S” terminal circuit normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair as needed. 9.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 3,000 RPM) Increase and maintain the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. Does the charge warning lamp remain off? YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> GO TO 10. 10.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-24, "Inspection". Is alternator pulley normal? YES >> Replace alternator. NO >> Repair as needed. 11.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is “B” terminal circuit normal? YES >> Replace alternator. NO >> Repair as needed. 12.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is “B” terminal circuit normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair as needed. 13.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-24, "Inspection". Is alternator pulley normal? YES >> Replace alternator. NO >> Repair as needed. 14.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the “S” terminal circuit normal? YES >> Replace alternator. NO >> Repair as needed. Revision: 2011 September CHG-12 2012 QUEST CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION < BASIC INSPECTION > CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION A Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007495003 1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION B Check if battery terminals are clean and tight. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair battery terminals connection. C 2.CHECK FUSE D Check for blown fuse and fusible link. Unit Alternator Combination meter Power source (Power supply terminals) Fuse No. Battery (“S” terminal) 38 Ignition switch ON (“L” terminal) 4 E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. F 3.CHECK “E” TERMINAL CONNECTION (ALTERNATOR GROUND) G Check if “E” terminal (alternator ground) is clean and tight. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair “E” terminal (alternator ground) connection. H 4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION I Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-14, "Checking". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair as needed. J K L CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-13 2012 QUEST POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION < BASIC INSPECTION > POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007495004 CAUTION: When performing this inspection, always use a charged battery that has completed the battery inspection. (When the charging rate of the battery is low, the response speed of the voltage change will become slow. This can cause an incorrect inspection.) 1.CHECK ECM (CONSULT) Perform ECM self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function". Self-diagnostic results content No malfunction detected>> GO TO 2. Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts. 2.CHECK OPERATION OF POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. Connect CONSULT and start the engine. Check that the selector lever is in “P” or “N” position and that all of the electric loads and A/C, etc. are turned OFF. Select “ALTERNATOR DUTY” at “Active Test” of “ENGINE”, and then check the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to 40.0 %. “BATTERY VOLT” 2 seconds after setting the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” to 40.0 % 4. : 12 - 13.6 V Check the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to 80.0%. “BATTERY VOLT” 20 seconds after setting the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” to 80.0 % : +0.5 V or more against the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value is 40.0 % Is the measurement value within the specification? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK IPDM E/R (CONSULT) Perform IPDM E/R self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Refer to PCS-13, "CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)". Self-diagnostic results content No malfunction detected>> GO TO 4. Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts. 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ALTERNATOR AND IPDM E/R 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect alternator connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between alternator harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. Alternator harness connector 4. IPDM E/R harness connector Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F60 5 F12 76 Continuity Existed Check continuity between alternator harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September CHG-14 2012 QUEST POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION < BASIC INSPECTION > A Alternator harness connector Connector Terminal F60 5 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair harness or connector between IPDM E/R and alternator. B C D E F G H I J K L CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-15 2012 QUEST B TERMINAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS B TERMINAL CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007495005 “B” terminal circuit supplies power to charge the battery and to operate the vehicle’s electrical system. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495006 1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair “B” terminal connection. 2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between alternator “B” terminal and ground. Terminals (+) Alternator “B” terminal Terminal F59 1 (–) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fusible link. 3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) 1. 2. Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and alternator “B” terminal. Terminals (+) Battery positive terminal (–) Voltage (Approx.) Alternator “B” terminal Terminal F59 1 Less than 0.2 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow". NO >> Check harness between battery and alternator for poor continuity. Revision: 2011 September CHG-16 2012 QUEST L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) A Description INFOID:0000000007495007 The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated. Diagnosis Procedure D 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check if “L” terminal is clean and tight. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system test. Refer to Technical Service Bulletine. 2.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) Disconnect alternator connector. Apply ground to alternator harness connector terminal. Check condition of the charge warning lamp with the ignition switch in the ON position. Alternator harness connector Terminal F60 3 Ignition switch position Charge warning lamp ON Illuminate Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Disconnect the combination meter connector. Check continuity between alternator harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Combination meter harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No. F60 3 M34 38 L Existed Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M34 terminal 25 and 10A fuse [No.4 located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Does continuity exist? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair the harness. 5.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. CHG-17 CHG N 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Revision: 2011 September K Continuity Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair the harness or connector. 1. 2. I J 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Alternator harness connector F H Condition Ground E G Does it illuminate? YES >> “L” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow". NO >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. C INFOID:0000000007495008 1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION 1. 2. 3. B 2012 QUEST O P L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Terminals (+) Combination meter harness connector Terminal M34 25 Condition Voltage (Approx.) When the ignition switch is in ON position Battery voltage (–) Ground Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. NO >> Inspect the power supply circuit. Refer to PG-29, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY ". Revision: 2011 September CHG-18 2012 QUEST L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) A Description INFOID:0000000007495009 The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated. Diagnosis Procedure C INFOID:0000000007495010 1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) D 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect alternator connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Does charge warning lamp illuminate? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow". E F 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) 1. 2. 3. 4. B Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. G H Combination meter harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. M34 38 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. NO >> Repair the harness. I J K L CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-19 2012 QUEST S TERMINAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > S TERMINAL CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007495011 The output voltage of the alternator is controlled by the IC voltage regulator at the “S” terminal detecting the input voltage. The “S” terminal circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the alternator output voltage with the IC voltage regulator. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495012 1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check if “S” terminal is clean and tight. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system test. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin. 2.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between alternator harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) Alternator harness connector Terminal F60 4 (–) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow". NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fuse. Revision: 2011 September CHG-20 2012 QUEST CHARGING SYSTEM < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A CHARGING SYSTEM Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007495013 Symptom Reference C Discharged battery The charge warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is set to ON. The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine starts. B D Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow". The charging warning lamp turns ON when increasing the engine speed. E F G H I J K L CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-21 2012 QUEST ALTERNATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ALTERNATOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495014 REMOVAL JMMIA0590GB 1. Alternator mounting bolt (lower) 2. Alternator bracket 3. Alternator bracket mounting bolt 4. Alternator harness connector 5. Alternator 6. Alternator mounting nut (lower) 7. “B” terminal harness nut 8. Alternator mounting bolt (upper) : Vehicle front : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) DISASSEMBLY Revision: 2011 September CHG-22 2012 QUEST ALTERNATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Type: A003TJ1791 A B C D E F G H JMMIA0851GB 1. Rear bearing 2. Rotor assembly 3. Retainer 4. Front bearing 5. Front bracket assembly 6. Through bolt 7. Pulley 8. Pulley nut 9. Stator assembly 10. IC voltage regulator assembly 11. Diode assembly I 12. Rear bracket assembly J 13. Terminal set : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) K : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495015 L REMOVAL CHG Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the parts, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal first. N 2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". 3. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". 4. Disconnect alternator harness connector. O 5. Remove “B” terminal harness nut, and then disconnect “B” terminal harness. 6. Remove alternator mounting bolt (upper). 7. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-27, "Exploded View". P 8. Remove front wheel RH. 9. Remove splash guard RH. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation". 11. Remove idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation". 12. Remove compressor mounting bolts, and then move compressor to secure work space. Refer to HA-29, "Exploded View". 1. Revision: 2011 September CHG-23 2012 QUEST ALTERNATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: Never disconnect low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor. 13. Remove water pipe mounting bolts, and then move water pipe to secure work space. Refer to LU-11, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Never disconnect water hose from water pipe. 14. Remove return tube fixing clamps, and then move return tube to secure work space. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Never disconnect return tube from return hose assembly. 15. Remove alternator mounting bolt (lower) and alternator mounting nut (lower). 16. Remove alternator from the right side of the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to contact with and damage surrounding parts when removing alternator from the vehicle. : Vehicle front JMMIA0594ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Temporarily tighten all of alternator bolts and nut. And then tighten them in numerical order shown in the figure. JPMIA0831ZZ • Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-14, "Checking". • Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut carefully. • For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power generation voltage of the alternator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation voltage variable control system operation inspection should be performed after replacing the alternator, and then make sure that the system operates normally. Refer to CHG-14, "Inspection Procedure". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495016 ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION Perform the following. • Make sure that alternator pulley does not rattle. • Make sure that alternator pulley nut is tight. Refer to CHG-22, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September CHG-24 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Alternator INFOID:0000000007495017 A003TJ1791 Type Nominal rating 12 -130 Ground polarity Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 V is applied) Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied) C MITSUBISHI make [V - A] Negative [rpm] [A/rpm] D Less than 1,300 More than 61/1,500 More than 109/2,500 More than 129/5,000 E 14.1 - 14.7* Regulated output voltage [V] Minimum length of brush [mm (in)] More than 5.00 (0.1969) [N (g, oz)] 4.1 - 5.3 (418 - 541, 14.7 - 19.1) [mm (in)] More than 22.1 (0.870) Brush spring pressure Slip ring minimum outer diameter Rotor (Field coil) resistance B [Ω] F G 1.8 - 2.2 *: Adjustment range of power generation voltage variable control is 11.4 − 15.6 V. H I J K L CHG N O P Revision: 2011 September CHG-25 2012 QUEST ENGINE SECTION CO ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A CO C D E CONTENTS F SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 13 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2 RADIATOR ........................................................ 13 Engine Cooling System ........................................... 2 Engine Cooling System Schematic ......................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................13 Removal and Installation .........................................13 Inspection ................................................................16 G COOLING FAN .................................................. 17 H SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 3 PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................17 Removal and Installation .........................................17 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................18 Inspection ................................................................18 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 WATER PUMP .................................................. 19 Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 5 Liquid Gasket ........................................................... 5 PREPARATION ............................................ 7 Exploded View .........................................................19 Removal and Installation .........................................19 Inspection ................................................................23 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY .................................................................... 24 Exploded View .........................................................24 Removal and Installation .........................................24 Inspection ................................................................25 PREPARATION ................................................... 7 Special Service Tool ................................................. 7 Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 7 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8 K L M Exploded View .........................................................26 Removal and Installation .........................................27 Inspection ................................................................27 N SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 28 RADIATOR .........................................................12 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 28 RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 12 RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 12 Periodical Maintenance Specification ......................28 Radiator ...................................................................28 Thermostat ..............................................................28 RADIATOR ................................................................ 12 RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 12 Revision: 2011 September J WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING .......... 26 ENGINE COOLANT ............................................ 8 Inspection .................................................................. 8 Draining ..................................................................... 8 Refilling ..................................................................... 9 Flushing ................................................................... 10 I CO-1 2012 QUEST O P DESCRIPTION < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000007495956 JPBIA5297GB Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000007495957 JPBIA5298GB Revision: 2011 September CO-2 2012 QUEST OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000007495958 Symptom Check items Water pump malfunction Poor heat transfer — Dust contamination or paper clogging Damaged fins C Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed CO D — Physical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube E Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation F Fan assembly — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction G Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper engine coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density Cooling hose Water pump Radiator cap Engine coolant leakage — Loose clamp Cracked hose Radiator J Loose Poor sealing Overflowing reservoir tank Exhaust gas leakage into cooling system K Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank I Poor sealing O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient engine coolant H Cracked reservoir tank L Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration M N O P Revision: 2011 September CO-3 2012 QUEST OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Symptom Check items High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Powertrain system malfunction Installed improper size wheels and tires Except cooling system parts malfunction — Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked bumper — Installed car brassiere Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow Blocked radiator — — Blocked condenser Installed large fog lamp Revision: 2011 September Mud contamination or paper clogging CO-4 Blocked air flow 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" CO INFOID:0000000007495959 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Liquid Gasket J K INFOID:0000000007495960 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING L • After removing mounting nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface using the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] (A) and remove old liquid gasket sealing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. • Tap (B) the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] to insert it, and then slide (C) it by tapping on the side as shown in the figure. • In areas where seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason tool such as a screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. M N O JPBIA0052ZZ LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE Revision: 2011 September I CO-5 P 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > 1. Using a scraper (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface. • Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. 2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. JPBIA0053ZZ 3. 4. Attach liquid gasket tube to the tube presser (commercial service tool). Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. • If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove. EMA0622D • As for the bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Check to read the text of service manual. A : Groove : Inside • Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. • If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. • Never retighten after mounting bolts and nuts the installation. • After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. Revision: 2011 September CO-6 JPBIA0010ZZ 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007495961 CO The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name C Description Removing water pump cover KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter D E NT046 F Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495962 G Tool name Description Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket H I S-NT052 Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts J K L PBIC0190E Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap M N PBIC1982E Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator pipe (upper) filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 Revision: 2011 September CO-7 2012 QUEST O P ENGINE COOLANT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ENGINE COOLANT Inspection INFOID:0000000007495963 LEVEL • Check if the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the “MIN” to “MAX” when the engine is cool. A : MAX B : MIN • Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary. CAUTION: Refill Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refe to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". JPBIA0102ZZ LEAKAGE • To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) (A) and radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (B). Testing pressure : Refer to CO-28, "Radiator". WARNING: Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from engine cooling system. CAUTION: Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. NOTE: In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant. • If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. Draining PBIC5121J INFOID:0000000007495964 WARNING: • To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot. • Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way. 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Open radiator drain plug (1) at the bottom of radiator, and then remove radiator cap. : Vehicle front JPBIA5339ZZ 3. When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to EM-63, "Setting". Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing. Revision: 2011 September CO-8 2012 QUEST ENGINE COOLANT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 4. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-10, "Flushing". Refilling A INFOID:0000000007495965 CO CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Do not put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging. • When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality C mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". 1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug. CAUTION: D Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. Tightening torque 2. 3. 4. : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly". Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Remove air bleeder plug (1) of heater pipe. E F G : Vehicle front H I JPBIA5340ZZ 5. Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level. CAUTION: Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) • Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck slowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute to allow air in system to escape. • When coolant comes out from the air bleeder plug of heater pipe, tighten the bleeder plug. J K L M JPBIA0412ZZ N Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) : Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". O Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) : Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". P Revision: 2011 September CO-9 2012 QUEST ENGINE COOLANT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > A : MAX B : MIN JPBIA0102ZZ 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Install radiator cap. Start the engine. Maintain the engine at 1,800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. After performing this, stop the engine. Remove radiator cap with the engine cold (approx. 50°C or less), and check the cooling water level. If the fluid level is low, refill with cooling water to the lip of radiator. Repeat Steps from 7 to 9 four times. Cap the radiator, and start the engine. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at 3,000 rpm. • Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water. CAUTION: Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F). • Cool down using fan to reduce the time. • If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant. CAUTION: Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant. Repeat steps 7 through 10 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no longer drops. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”. • Sound may be noticeable at heater unit. Repeat step 13 three times. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5, and steps from 7 to 14 until engine coolant level no longer drops. Flushing 1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug. CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. Tightening torque 2. 3. 4. INFOID:0000000007495966 : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly". Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Remove air bleeder plug. Fill with cooling water until it overflows from the bleeder plug. Revision: 2011 September CO-10 2012 QUEST ENGINE COOLANT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 5. Install air bleeder plug. A 6. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. CAUTION: Never adhere the water to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) • When water overflows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the CO water. 7. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". C 8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. D 11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". 12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September CO-11 2012 QUEST RADIATOR < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > RADIATOR RADIATOR CAP RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000007495967 • Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap. - Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the plunger (B) cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top. - Check if valve seat has no soil and damage. - Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure valve. - Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of negative-pressure valve. JPBIA1961ZZ • Check radiator cap relief pressure. Standard and limit : Refer to CO-28, "Radiator". - When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (A), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface. JPBIA0109ZZ • Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three. CAUTION: When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator pipe (upper) filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. RADIATOR RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007495968 Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: CAUTION: • Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins. • When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan assembly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. • Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81 in). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. Revision: 2011 September CO-12 2012 QUEST RADIATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A RADIATOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495969 CO C D E F G H I J JPBIA4641GB 1. Radiator upper clip 2. Mounting rubber (upper) 3. Radiator 4. Mounting rubber (lower) 5. Clamp 6. Radiator hose (lower) 7. Cooling fan assembly 8. Grommet 9. Radiator hose (lower) 10. Radiator pipe (lower) 11. Radiator hose (upper) 12. Radiator pipe (upper) 13. Clamp 14. Reservoir tank 15. Reservoir tank cap 16. Reservoir tank hose 17. Radiator cap adapter 18. Radiator cap 19. Radiator hose (upper) 20. O-ring 21. Drain plug 22. Water drain hose 23. Radiator core support A B To transaxle assembly To water inlet K L M N C To water outlet : Always replace after every disassembly. O : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495970 REMOVAL WARNING: Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way. 1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". Revision: 2011 September CO-13 2012 QUEST P RADIATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: • Perform this step when the engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. 2. Remove the following parts: • Air duct (inlet): Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". • Front grille: Refer to EXT-17, "Exploded View". • Hood lock: Refer to DLK-426, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation". 3. Disconnect reservoir tank hose from radiator pipe (upper). 4. Disconnect CVT fluid cooler hoses from radiator. • Install blind plug to avoid leakage of CVT fluid. 5. Separate low pressure flexible hose from low pressure pipe and move the separated hose. Refer to HA35, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation". 6. Remove radiator cap adapter and each radiator hoses (upper and lower) and radiator pipe (upper) assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belt. 7. Remove condenser. Refer to HA-42, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Be careful not to damage condenser core. 8. Remove each radiator upper clips (2) by pulling the tabs (A) outside to release the lock (B) and then remove each mounting rubbers (upper) (1). C : Mounting pin : Vehicle front CAUTION: Never pull the tabs outside excessively to prevent it from damping. JPBIA1689ZZ 9. Lift up and remove radiator from front of radiator core support. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. NOTE: When installing radiator core support (upper), check that the upper and lower mounts of radiator and air condenser are securely inserted in each mounting hole of radiator core support (upper and lower). CAUTION: Always use genuine bolts for cooling fan assembly mounting bolts and observe the tightening torque. (To prevent damage to radiator) Radiator Upper Clip Install each radiator upper clips on radiator core connection as follows: 1. Install each mounting rubbers (upper) (1) on mounting pins (A) of radiator. : Vehicle front 2. 3. Align each radiator upper clips (2) with radiator core connection (B), then insert each radiator upper clips straight into radiator core connections until a click is heard. After connecting each radiator upper clips, use the following method to check it is fully connected. JPBIA1690ZZ Revision: 2011 September CO-14 2012 QUEST RADIATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Visually confirm that each radiator upper clips are connected to radiator core connections. • Move each radiator upper clips and the radiator forward and backward to check they are securely connected. Reservoir tank NOTE: Insert reservoir tank straight to the mounting position. A CO Radiator hose NOTE: Insert the radiator hose (1) all the way to the stopper (2) or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper). C D E F JPBIA4294GB G unit: mm(in) A. Radiator side B. Engine side • For the orientation of the hose clamp pawl, refer to the figure. Radiator hose Radiator hose (upper) Radiator hose (lower) H Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp* Radiator side Right side C Radiator side (radiator pipe) — B Engine side (radiator pipe) — C Engine side Upper D Radiator side Upper A Radiator side (radiator pipe) — A Engine side (radiator pipe) — A Engine side Upper E I J K L *:Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. M N O P JPBIA4777ZZ Revision: 2011 September CO-15 2012 QUEST RADIATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > F. View F :Vehicle upper g. :45° :Vehicle back side • The angle (b) created by the hose clamp pawl and the specifiedline (A) must be within ±15°as shown in the figure. JPBIA4295ZZ • To install hose clamps (1), check that the dimension (A) from the end of the paint mark (2) on the radiator hose to the hose clamp is within the reference value. Dimension "A" (-1) - (+1) mm (-0.04) - (+0.04) in JSBIA0241ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495971 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and CVT fluid. Revision: 2011 September CO-16 2012 QUEST COOLING FAN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > COOLING FAN A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495972 CO C D E F G H I JPBIA1687GB 1. Fan motor (LH) 2. Fan motor (RH) 3. Fan shroud 4. Mounting rubber 5. Cooling fan (RH) 6. Cooling fan (LH) A. Apply on fan motor shaft J : Vehicle front K : Apply genuine high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent. L : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495973 M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the following parts. • Engine under cover • Air duct (inlet): Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". • Oil level gauge: Refer to EM-93, "Exploded View". • Battery and battery tray: Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation". Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". CAUTION: • Perform this step engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. Remove radiator cap adapter and each radiator hoses (upper) and radiator pipe (upper) assembly. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". Disconnect harness connector from crash zone sensor, and move harness to aside. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View". Disconnect harness connector from fan motors (RH and LH), and move harness to aside. Remove cooling fan assembly. Revision: 2011 September CO-17 2012 QUEST N O P COOLING FAN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Only use genuine parts for cooling fan mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent radiator from being damaged). NOTE: Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-41, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description". Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007495974 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fans (RH and LH). Remove fan motors (RH and LH). ASSEMBLY Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them. • Install each fan in the following position. Right side Left side : 11 blades : 9 blades • Secure the harness tightly to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose. Inspection INFOID:0000000007495975 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Cooling Fan Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend. • If anything is found, replace cooling fan. Revision: 2011 September CO-18 2012 QUEST WATER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WATER PUMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495976 CO C D E F G JPBIA2460GB 1. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 2. Valve timing control cover gasket (bank 1) 3. Valve timing control cover (bank 1) 4. Water drain plug (front) 5. Water pump cover 6. O-ring 7. O-ring 8. Water pump A. Apply engine coolant B. Identify with white mark H I : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) J : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Should be lubricated with oil. K : Sealing point Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495977 CAUTION: • When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. • Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. • After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leakage using the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool). L M N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the following parts. • Cowl top extension. • Engine under cover • Front road wheel and tire • Splash guard (RH): Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View". Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". CAUTION: • Perform this step when the engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". Remove idler pulleys and harness bracket. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September CO-19 O P 2012 QUEST WATER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Remove torque rod (upper). Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove water drain plug (front) on water pump side of cylinder block to drain engine coolant from engine inside. 7. Remove valve timing control cover (bank 1) and water pump cover from front timing chain case. • Use the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] to cut liquid gasket for removal. 8. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) (1) as follows: a. Remove lower mounting bolt (A). CAUTION: Be careful not to drop mounting bolt inside timing chain case. b. Loosen upper mounting bolt (B) slowly, and then turn chain tensioner (primary) on the mounting bolt so that plunger (C) is fully expanded. NOTE: Even if plunger is fully expanded, it is not dropped from the body JPBIA1537ZZ of timing chain tensioner (primary). c. d. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary). Refer to EM-67, "Removal and Installation". Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose. 1 : Crankshaft pulley JPBIA0446ZZ 9. Remove water pump as follows: NOTE: The use of the following item simplifies the procedure. • Thin plastic sheet cut as shown in the figure. a :60 mm (2.36 in) b :140 mm (5.51 in) JPBIA4771ZZ a. Remove three water pump mounting bolts. b. Turn the crankshaft pulley counterclockwise to slack the water pump side timing chain for allowance. • With the timing chain around water pump sprocket held with fingers, turn crank pulley counterclockwise to the position where the timing chain cannot be pulled in cylinder head direction. Revision: 2011 September CO-20 2012 QUEST WATER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > c. Insert sheet (A) between timing chain and water pump sprocket (1) of water pump housing. A CO C JPBIA4675ZZ D d. Screw bolts (B) of size M8 x 1.25 (threads length: approx. 50 mm) into the upper and lower bolt holes used for mounting water pump and tighten the bolts alternately by half turn all the way to pull out water pump (1). A E :Sheet F • Pull out water pump straight to protect the mounting part from damage caused by vane. • Do not allow sprocket to interfere with timing chain. G JPBIA4676ZZ 10. Remove M8 bolt and two O-rings from water pump. H INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. 1. Install new O-rings to water pump. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. • Clean mounting grooves of O-ring to remove foreign matter. • Install O-ring with a white identification mark to the engine front side (sprocket side) and O-ring with no identification mark to the engine rear side (vane side). CAUTION: Each O-ring is made of different material. Always install appropriate O-ring to the correct position. 2. a. Install water pump. Insert water pump by widening timing chain (1) with sheet (A) so as not to allow O-ring to interfere with timing chain and the corner of cylinder block. • Apply engine oil around the O-ring with a white identification mark. • Apply LLC around the O-ring with no identification mark. • Insert water pump direct to cylinder block. • Do not allow O-ring to be displaced. • Press into water pump by tightening the mounting bolts alternately and evenly. • Check timing chain and water pump sprocket for proper engagement. I J K L M N O JPBIA4674ZZ P 3. a. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: Completely remove dust and foreign matter from the back of chain tensioner (primary) and the mounting surface on the rear timing chain case. Revision: 2011 September CO-21 2012 QUEST WATER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Turn crank pulley (1) clockwise (direction shown by arrow) to loosen timing chain on the chain tensioner (primary) side. JPBIA0446ZZ c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Lift self-locking pawl (A) to obtain allowance between the pawl and the ratchet of plunger (D). Press plunger into tensioner body. Fix self-locking pawl at the tip of ratchet and maintain plunger in its maximum compression. Insert stopper pin (E) into the tensioner body hole (B) to fix lever (C). • Plunger becomes fixed at this step because of the interlock between the lever and self-locking pawl. NOTE: JPBIA0118ZZ The figure shows a work example of using a precision screw driver of axis diameter φ1.2 mm as a stopper pin. Install chain tensioner (primary). • Completely remove dust and foreign matter from the back of chain tensioner (primary) and the mounting surface before installing chain tensioner. After the installation, remove stopper pin (A) to release plunger. Check again that water pump sprocket and timing chain are engaged. JPBIA1774ZZ 4. 5. a. b. c. 6. 7. Install cam sprocket cover (Bank 1). Refer to EM-67, "Removal and Installation". Install water pump cover as per the following instructions: Remove old liquid gasket on the back of cover, the front timing chain case mounting surface, mounting bolt threads, and the bolt hole, by using a scraper. • Clean the mounting surface with white gasoline. Apply liquid gasket evenly without any gap and overlap. Refer to CO-5, "Liquid Gasket" 1 :Water pump cover a : φ2.3 - 3.3 mm Tighten mounting bolts. Install water drain plug (front). • Apply liquid gasket to the threads and tighten the screw. Install the following items in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: JPBIA1722ZZ When starting the engine or immediately after an engine start after the removal/installation procedure of chain tensioner (primary), slapping sound may be heard. This is Revision: 2011 September CO-22 2012 QUEST WATER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > not a malfunction. The slapping sound is generated due to decrease in oil pressure of the chain tensioner (primary) and eliminated as oil pressure increases. Inspection A INFOID:0000000007495978 CO INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly. • Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. • If anything is found, replace water pump. C D E SLC943A F INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September CO-23 2012 QUEST WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495979 JPBIA1688GB 1. Gasket 4. Radiator hose (lower) A. To radiator 2. Water inlet and thermostat assembly 3. Clamp : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495980 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting". CAUTION: • Perform this step when the engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. Remove reservoir tank of radiator, and move it aside. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". Remove camshaft sprocket cover (bank 2). Refer toEM-66, "Exploded View". Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet and thermostat assembly. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly (1) and gascket. A : Never loosen these screw CAUTION: Never disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly. Replace them as a unit, if necessary. JPBIA0261ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant. Revision: 2011 September CO-24 2012 QUEST WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Inspection INFOID:0000000007495981 A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve operation. Thermostat (Standard) CO : Refer to CO-28, "Thermostat". C • If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinary room temperature, or measured values are out of the standard, replace water inlet and thermostat assembly. D E SLC949A INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September CO-25 2012 QUEST WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495982 JPBIA4661GB 1. Gasket 2. Water connector 3. 4. Water bypass pipe 5. Clamp 6. O-ring Water hose 7. Clamp 8. Water hose 9. Bracket 10. Clamp 11. Water hose 13. Clamp 14. Water hose 12. Heater thermostat 15. Heater pipe 16. O-ring 17. Clamp 18. Water hose 19. Clamp 20. Heater hose 21. Clamp 22. Clip 23. Heater hose 24. Clamp 25. Heater hose 26. Air bleeder plug 27. O-ring 28. Heater pipe 29. Heater hose 30. Clamp 31. Clamp 32. Water hose 33. Gasket 34. Engine coolant temperature sensor 35. Gasket 36. Water outlet 37. Bracket A. To oil cooler B. To radiator C. To CVT fluid warmer D. To electric throttle control actuator E. To heater core F. To rear heater : Always replace after every disassembly. Revision: 2011 September CO-26 2012 QUEST WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) A : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495983 CO REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Remove air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View". Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting". CAUTION: • Perform this step when the engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. Remove battery and battery tray. Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation". Remove CVT fluid charging pipe and CVT fluid level gauge. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". Remove oil level gauge. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". Move CVT control cable aside. Refer to TM-147, "Exploded View". Remove vacuum tube (front) mounting bolt from water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Exploded View". Remove radiator hose (upper) from water outlet. Remove water hoses and heater hoses. Remove harness bracket. Disconnect harness connectors, and move harness to aside. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor if necessary. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". Remove alternator bracket. Refer to CHG-22, "Exploded View". Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass pipe and water connector. C D E F G H I J INSTALLATION K CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. • When inserting water bypass pipe and heater pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring. L Inspection M INFOID:0000000007495984 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant. N O P Revision: 2011 September CO-27 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000007495985 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) (US qt, lmp qt) 11.3 (12, 10) Reservoir tank 0.75 (6/8, 5/8) Radiator INFOID:0000000007495986 Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Cap relief pressure Standard 122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 17.7 - 22.0) Limit 108 (1.1, 15.6) Leakage test pressure 156 (1.59, 22.6) Thermostat INFOID:0000000007495987 Standard Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) Maximum valve lift 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F) Valve closing temperature Revision: 2011 September 77°C (171°F) CO-28 2012 QUEST CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE SECTION DAS DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS BSW CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT) .............19 PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH) ....... 20 CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) ...........20 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 Precaution for BSW System Service ......................... 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 BSW Control Module ................................................. 6 Side Radar LH/RH .................................................... 6 BSW Indicator LH/RH ............................................... 7 BSW Switch .............................................................. 7 Combination Meter .................................................... 7 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ........... 7 BCM .......................................................................... 7 TCM .......................................................................... 7 ECM .......................................................................... 7 SYSTEM .............................................................. 8 System Description ................................................... 8 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 12 Fail-safe (BSW Control Module) ............................. 12 Fail-safe (Side Radar) ............................................. 13 OPERATION .......................................................14 Switch Name and Function ..................................... 14 System Display and Warning .................................. 14 G ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21 BSW CONTROL MODULE ............................... 21 Reference Value ......................................................21 Fail-safe ...................................................................22 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................22 DTC Index ...............................................................22 H I SIDE RADAR LH ............................................... 24 Reference Value ......................................................24 Fail-safe ...................................................................24 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................25 DTC Index ...............................................................25 J K SIDE RADAR RH .............................................. 26 Reference Value ......................................................26 Fail-safe ...................................................................26 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................27 DTC Index ...............................................................27 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 28 L M BLIND SPOT WARNING .................................. 28 Wiring Diagram ........................................................28 N BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 30 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 30 DAS Work Flow ................................................................30 HANDLING PRECAUTION ................................16 PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS .............. 32 Precautions for Blind Spot Warning ........................ 16 Inspection Procedure ...............................................32 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE) ...........................................................17 ACTION TEST ................................................... 33 CONSULT Function (BSW) ..................................... 17 Description ...............................................................33 Work Procedure .......................................................33 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH) ........19 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 35 Revision: 2011 September F DAS-1 2012 QUEST P C1A00 CONTROL UNIT .................................... 35 DTC Logic ............................................................... 35 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35 C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 ............................ 36 DTC Logic ............................................................... 36 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36 SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 48 SIDE RADAR RH ...................................................... 48 SIDE RADAR RH : Description ............................... 48 SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic ................................ 48 SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 48 DTC Logic ............................................................... 37 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 37 BSW CONTROL MODULE ....................................... 48 BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description ................ 48 BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic ................. 49 BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure ... 49 C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION ............. 38 U0104 ADAS CAN 1 .......................................... 50 C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .................. 37 DTC LOGIC ............................................................ 38 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 38 DTC Logic ............................................................... 50 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 50 C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT ................................................................... 39 U0121 VDC CAN 2 ............................................ 51 DTC Logic ............................................................... 39 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 39 DTC Logic ............................................................... 51 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 51 U0401 ECM CAN 1 ............................................ 52 C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT ................................................................... 40 DTC Logic ............................................................... 52 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 52 DTC Logic ............................................................... 40 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40 U0402 TCM CAN 1 ............................................ 53 C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION... 42 DTC Logic ............................................................... 42 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 42 C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION ... 43 DTC Logic ............................................................... 43 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43 C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE ............................. 44 DTC Logic ............................................................... 44 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 45 SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 45 SIDE RADAR LH : Description ............................... 45 SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic ................................ 45 SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 45 SIDE RADAR RH ...................................................... 45 SIDE RADAR RH : Description .............................. 45 SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic ............................... 46 SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 46 BSW CONTROL MODULE ....................................... 46 BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description ................ 46 BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic ................. 46 BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure ... 46 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 48 SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 48 SIDE RADAR LH : Description ............................... 48 SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic ................................ 48 Revision: 2011 September DTC Logic ............................................................... 53 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 53 U0405 ADAS CAN 2 .......................................... 54 DTC Logic ............................................................... 54 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 54 U0415 VDC CAN 1 ............................................ 55 DTC Logic ............................................................... 55 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 55 U150B ECM CAN 3 ........................................... 56 DTC Logic ............................................................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56 U150C VDC CAN 3 ............................................ 57 DTC Logic ............................................................... 57 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57 U150D TCM CAN 3 ........................................... 58 DTC Logic ............................................................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58 U150E BCM CAN 3 ........................................... 59 DTC Logic ............................................................... 59 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 59 U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2 ............................... 60 DTC Logic ............................................................... 60 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 60 U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1 ............................... 61 DTC Logic ............................................................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 61 U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2 ............................... 62 DTC Logic ............................................................... 62 DAS-2 2012 QUEST Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 62 BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT .................................... 71 U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1 ................................63 Component Function Check ....................................71 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................71 Component Inspection .............................................72 A BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT ....................... 73 B DTC Logic ............................................................... 63 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63 U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R) ...................64 DTC Logic ............................................................... 64 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64 U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L) ....................65 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................73 Component Inspection .............................................73 C SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 75 DTC Logic ............................................................... 65 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 65 BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ............................. 75 U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3 ................................66 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 76 DTC Logic ............................................................... 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 66 Description ...............................................................76 U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3 ................................67 Symptom Table .......................................................75 D E REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 77 DTC Logic ............................................................... 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67 BSW CONTROL MODULE ............................... 77 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......68 SIDE RADAR .................................................... 78 F Removal and Installation .........................................77 Removal and Installation .........................................78 BSW CONTROL MODULE ........................................ 68 BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure .... 68 BSW INDICATOR ............................................. 80 SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 68 SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 68 BSW SWITCH ................................................... 81 Exploded View .........................................................80 Removal and Installation .........................................81 G H I SIDE RADAR RH ....................................................... 69 SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 69 J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-3 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [BSW] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492632 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for BSW System Service INFOID:0000000007492633 WARNING: Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test. CAUTION: • Never perform the active test while driving. • Never change BSW initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer. TO KEEP THE BSW SYSTEM OPERATING PROPERLY, BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: System Maintenance The two side radar for the BSW system are located near the rear bumper. • Always keep the area near the side radar clean. • Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the side radar. • Do not strike or damage the area around the side radar. Revision: 2011 September DAS-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492634 B C D E F G H I J K L M N JSOIA0502GB A. Rear bumper removed condition (RH) D. Instrument lower panel (LH) No. B. Rear bumper removed condition (LH) Component C. Center of the instrument panel P Function 1 Side radar RH Refer to DAS-6, "Side Radar LH/RH" 2 BCM Refer to DAS-7, "BCM" Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location 3 BSW indicator RH Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Indicator LH/RH" Revision: 2011 September DAS-5 DAS 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component Function 4 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Refer to DAS-7, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location 5 TCM Refer to DAS-7, "TCM" Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location 6 ECM Refer to DAS-7, "ECM" Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location 7 BSW indicator LH Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Indicator LH/RH" 8 Side radar LH Refer to DAS-6, "Side Radar LH/RH" 9 BSW control module Refer to DAS-6, "BSW Control Module" 10 Combination meter • Description: Refer to DAS-7, "Combination Meter" • System display and warning: DAS-14, "System Display and Warning" Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location 11 BSW switch • Description: Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Switch" • System display and warning: DAS-14, "Switch Name and Function" 12 BSW ON indicator (On the BSW switch) Refer to DAS-14, "System Display and Warning" BSW Control Module INFOID:0000000007492635 JSOIA0503ZZ • Controls the BSW system, based on received signals. • Communicates with each control unit via CAN communication. • Connected with the side radar (LH and RH) via BSW communication, BSW control module receives a vehicle detection signal and transmits a BSW indicator signal and a BSW indicator dimmer signal to the side radar. • Receives a BSW switch signal from the BSW switch. • Transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Side Radar LH/RH INFOID:0000000007492636 JSOIA0504ZZ • Installed near the rear bumper, the side radar detects vehicles in the adjacent lane. • Connected with the BSW control module via BSW communication, the side radar transmits a vehicle detection signal. • Receives a BSW indicator signal and a BSW indicator dimmer signal from the BSW control module and transmits an indicator operation signal to the BSW indicator LH/RH. Revision: 2011 September DAS-6 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > BSW Indicator LH/RH INFOID:0000000007492637 A B C JSOIA0505ZZ • Installed on the door mirror surface, the BSW indicator warns the driver by lighting/blinking. • Receives a BSW indicator operation signal from the side radar LH/RH and blinks or turns ON/OFF the BSW indicator lamp. BSW Switch D E INFOID:0000000007492638 • Installed to the instrument lower panel, the BSW switch is used to activate/deactivate the BSW system. • Transmits a BSW switch signal to the BSW control module. Combination Meter INFOID:0000000007492639 • Receives BSW warning lamp signal and buzzer output signal from BSW control module via CAN communication. • Turns the BSW warning lamp ON/OFF according to the signals from the BSW control module • Operates the buzzer according to the signal from the BSW control module ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) F G H INFOID:0000000007492640 I Transmits vehicle speed signal to BSW control module via CAN communication. BCM INFOID:0000000007492641 J • Transmits turn indicator signal to BSW control module via CAN communication. • Transmits dimmer signal to BSW control module via CAN communication. TCM INFOID:0000000007492642 K Transmits shift position signal to BSW control module via CAN communication. L ECM INFOID:0000000007492643 Transmits engine speed signal to BSW control module via CAN communication. M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000007492644 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSOIA0506GB BSW CONTROL MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM Input Signal Item Transmit unit Signal name Description TCM CAN communication Shift position signal Receives a selector lever position ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) CAN communication Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives wheel speeds of four wheels BCM CAN communication Turn indicator signal Receives an operational state of the turn signal lamp and the hazard lamp Dimmer signal Receives an ON/OFF state of dimmer signal Side radar LH, RH BSW communication Vehicle detection signal Receives vehicle detection condition of detection zone ECM CAN communication Engine speed signal Receives an engine speed BSW switch BSW switch signal Receives an ON/OFF state of the BSW switch Output Signal Item Reception unit Combination meter Signal name CAN communication Revision: 2011 September Description BSW warning lamp signal Transmits a BSW warning lamp signal to turn ON the BSW warning lamp Buzzer output signal Transmits a buzzer output signal to activate buzzer DAS-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Reception unit Side radar LH, RH BSW ON indicator Signal name BSW communication Description BSW indicator signal Transmits a BSW indicator signal to turn ON the BSW indicator BSW indicator dimmer signal Transmits a BSW indicator dimmer signal to dimmer BSW indicator Vehicle speed signal Transmits a vehicle speed calculated by the BSW control module A B C BSW ON indicator signal Turns ON the BSW ON indicator FUNCTION DESCRIPTION • • • • The BSW system can help alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes. The BSW system uses side radar installed near the rear bumper to detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. The side radar can detect vehicles on either side of vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways. • The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH). • If the side radar detects vehicles in the detection zone, the BSW indicator illuminates. D E F G H I J JSOIA0509GB • If the driver then activates the turn signal, a buzzer will sound twice and the BSW indicator will blink. NOTE: A buzzer sounds if the side radar have already detected vehicles when the driver activates the turn signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the BSW indicator blinks and no buzzer sounds. K L M N DAS P JSOIA0510GB BSW SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION • BSW control module enables BSW system. • The BSW control module turns on the BSW system when the BSW switch is turned ON. Revision: 2011 September DAS-9 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • Side radar detects a vehicle in the adjacent lane, and transmits the vehicle detection signal to BSW control module via BSW communication. • BSW control module starts the control as follows, based on a vehicle detection signal, turn signal and dimmer signal transmitted from BCM via CAN communication: - Buzzer output signal transmission to combination meter via CAN communication. - BSW indicator signal and BSW indicator dimmer signal transmission to side radar via BSW communication. • Side radar transmits an indicator operation signal to the BSW indicator according to BSW indicator signal and BSW indicator dimmer signal. Operation Condition of BSW System BSW control module performs the control when the following conditions are satisfied. • When the BSW switch in turned ON. • When the vehicle drives at approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH) or more to the forward direction. NOTE: • After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed reaches approximately 29 km/h (18 MPH) • The BSW system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-16, "Precautions for Blind Spot Warning". BULB CHECK ACTION AND FAIL-SAFE INDICATION Vehicle condition/Driver′s operation Ignition switch: OFF ⇒ ON BSW indicator BSW ON indicator Approx. 2 sec. ON Approx. 5 sec. ON* Indication on the combination meter JSOIA0374GB When DTC is detected OFF ON JSOIA0254GB When radar blockage is detected OFF ON JSOIA0255GB *: If BSW initial state is ON, BSW ON indicator continues turned ON. Revision: 2011 September DAS-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Blinking cycle when the side radar blockage condition A B C D E JSOIA0358GB NOTE: Time shown in the figure is approximate time. F BSW INITIAL STATE CHANGE CAUTION: Never change BSW initial state “ON” ⇒ “OFF” without the consent of the customer. BSW initial state can be changed. • BSW initial ON* - BSW function is automatically turned ON, when the ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON. • BSW initial OFF - BSW function is still OFF when the ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON. *: Factory setting G H How to change BSW initial state 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Switch BSW functions to OFF. Push and hold BSW switch for more than 4 seconds. Buzzer sounds and blinking of the BSW ON indicator informs that the BSW initial state changes completed. I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007492645 JSOIA0516GB Fail-safe (BSW Control Module) INFOID:0000000007492646 If a malfunction occurs in the system, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates. Revision: 2011 September DAS-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Fail-safe (Side Radar) INFOID:0000000007492647 A FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates. B TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled. • The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. • The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar. C D E F G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-13 2012 QUEST OPERATION [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > OPERATION Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000007492648 JSOIA0507ZZ No. 1 Name Function BSW switch Turns BSW system ON/OFF System Display and Warning INFOID:0000000007492649 INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMP JSOIA0508ZZ No. Name Description 1 BSW ON indicator Turns ON while BSW system is ON 2 BSW warning lamp (In the combination meter) • Turns ON when BSW system is malfunctioning • Blinks when radar blockage is detected DISPLAY AND WARNING OPERATION Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation BSW ON indicator Vehicle speed (Approx.) [km/h (MPH)] OFF — Revision: 2011 September Action Turn signal condition Status of vehicle detection within detection area Indication on the BSW indicator Buzzer — — OFF OFF DAS-14 2012 QUEST OPERATION [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation BSW ON indicator ON Action A Vehicle speed (Approx.) [km/h (MPH)] Turn signal condition Status of vehicle detection within detection area Less than approx. 29 (18) — — OFF OFF — Vehicle is absent OFF OFF OFF Vehicle is detected ON OFF Blink Short continuous beep Approx. 32 (20) or more Indication on the BSW indicator Buzzer B C D Before turn signal operates Vehicle is detected ON (Vehicle detected direction) E F JSOIA0251GB JSOIA0452GB Blink Vehicle is detected after turn signal operates G H OFF I JSOIA0251GB NOTE: • If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle speed becomes lower than approximately 29km/h (18MPH). • Time shown in the figure is approximate time. J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-15 2012 QUEST HANDLING PRECAUTION [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > HANDLING PRECAUTION Precautions for Blind Spot Warning INFOID:0000000007492650 SIDE RADAR HANDLING • • • • • Side radar for BSW system is located inside the rear bumper. Always keep the rear bumper near the side radar clean. Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material), install an accessory or paintwork near the side radar. Do not strike or damage the areas around the side radar. Do not strike, damage, and scratch the side radar, especially the vent seal (gray circular) area, under repair. PRECAUTIONS FOR BLIND SPOT WARNING • The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and are not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction driver will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. • The BSW system may not provide a warning for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly. • Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer because the system may not function properly. • Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. • The side radar may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as: - Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. - Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles. - Oncoming vehicles. - Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when driver accelerate from a stop. - A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as vehicle. - A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. - A vehicle which vehicle overtakes rapidly. • Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the side radar to detect other vehicles. • The side radar detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the side radar may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the side radar may detect vehicles driving two lanes away. • The side radar are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition. Revision: 2011 September DAS-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE) [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE) CONSULT Function (BSW) A INFOID:0000000007492651 APPLICATION ITEMS B CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication using BSW control module. Diagnosis mode Description C Self Diagnostic Result Displays the name of a malfunctioning system stored in the BSW control module Data Monitor Displays BSW control module input/output data in real time Active Test Enables an operational check of a load by transmitting a driving signal from the BSW control module to the load Ecu Identification Displays BSW control module part number CAN Diag Support Monitor Displays a reception/transmission state of CAN communication and BSW communication D E SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to DAS-22, "DTC Index". F DATA MONITOR NOTE: SIGNAL B, SIGNAL C are displayed, but not used. SIGNAL A BSW MAIN SIGNAL G Description VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × Indicates vehicle speed calculated from BSW control module through CAN communication [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) through CAN communication] BUZZER O/P [On/Off] × Monitored item [Unit] H I Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW warning chime output K Shift position [Off, P, R, N, D] × Indicates shift position read from BSW control module through CAN communication (TCM transmits shift position signal through CAN communication) Turn signal [OFF/LH/RH/LH&RH] × Indicates turn signal operation status read from BSW control module through CAN communication (BCM transmits turn indicator signal through CAN communication) × Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW switch BSW/BSI WARN LMP [On/Off] × Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW warning lamp output BSW SYSTEM ON [On/Off] × Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW system WARN SYS SW [On/Off] × N DAS CAUTION: • Never perform “Active Test” while driving the vehicle. • The “Active Test” cannot be performed when the BSW warning lamp is illuminated. • Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then perform the test. P Description ICC BUZZER Sounds a buzzer used for BSW system by arbitrarily operating ON/OFF BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP The BSW warning lamp can be illuminated by ON/OFF operations as necessary ICC BUZZER Revision: 2011 September DAS-17 L M ACTIVE TEST Test item J 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE) [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item ICC BUZZER Operation Description BSW warning chime operation sound MODE1 Transmits the buzzer output signals to the combination meter via CAN communication Intermittent beep sound Test start Starts the tests of “MODE1” — Stops transmitting the buzzer output signal below to end the test — Returns to the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen — Reset End BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP Test item BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP Operation Description BSW warning lamp Off Stops transmitting the BSW warning lamp signal below to end the test — On Transmits the BSW warning lamp signal to the combination meter via CAN communication ON Revision: 2011 September DAS-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH) [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH) A CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT) INFOID:0000000007492652 DESCRIPTION B CONSULT performs the following functions by communicating with the side radar LH. Select diag mode C Function Self Diagnostic Result Displays memorized DTC in the side radar Data Monitor Displays real-time data of side radar Active Test Enables operation check of electrical loads by sending driving signal to them Ecu Identification Displays part number of side radar D E SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Self Diagnostic Result Displays memorized DTC in side radar LH. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index". F FFD (Freeze Frame Data) The side radar records the following data when the malfunction is detected. Freeze Frame Data item G Description VHCL SP from ADAS The vehicle speed (from BSW control module) at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed TURN SIG STATUS Turn signal status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed DATA MONITOR H I Monitored item [Unit] Description BEAM DISTANCE [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used BEAM POSITION [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used SIDE RADAR MALF [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar malfunction BLOCKAGE COND [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar blockage ACTIVATE OPE [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used VEHICLE DETECT [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle detection J K L M N ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: • Never perform the active test while driving. • Active test cannot be started while the BSW indicator is illuminated. Active test item BSW/BSI INDICATOR DRIVE Revision: 2011 September Operation DAS Description On Outputs the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator Off Stops the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator DAS-19 P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH) [BSW] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH) CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) INFOID:0000000007492653 DESCRIPTION CONSULT performs the following functions by communicating with the side radar RH. Select diag mode Function Self Diagnostic Result Displays memorized DTC in the side radar Data Monitor Displays real-time data of side radar Active Test Enables operation check of electrical loads by sending driving signal to them Ecu Identification Displays part number of side radar SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Self Diagnostic Result Displays memorized DTC in side radar RH. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index". FFD (Freeze Frame Data) The side radar records the following data when the malfunction is detected. Freeze Frame Data item Description VHCL SP from ADAS The vehicle speed (from BSW control module) at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed TURN SIG STATUS Turn signal status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed DATA MONITOR Monitored item [Unit] Description BEAM DISTANCE [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used BEAM POSITION [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used SIDE RADAR MALF [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar malfunction BLOCKAGE COND [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar blockage ACTIVATE OPE [—] NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used VEHICLE DETECT [On/Off] Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle detection ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: • Never perform the active test while driving. • Active test cannot be started while the BSW indicator is illuminated. Active test item BSW/BSI INDICATOR DRIVE Revision: 2011 September Operation Description On Outputs the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator Off Stops the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator DAS-20 2012 QUEST BSW CONTROL MODULE [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BSW CONTROL MODULE Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492654 B VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL C Monitor item Condition VHCL SPEED SE While driving BUZZER O/P Engine running Shift position • Engine running • While driving Turn signal Value/Status Displays the vehicle speed calculated by BSW control module When the buzzer of the BSW system operates On When the buzzer of the BSW system not operates Off Displays the shift position Turn signal lamps OFF Off Turn signal lamp LH blinking LH Turn signal lamp RH blinking RH Turn signal lamp LH and RH blinking WARN SYS SW Ignition switch ON BSW/BSI WARN LMP Ignition switch ON BSW SYSTEM ON Ignition switch ON D E F G LH&RH When BSW switch is pressed On When BSW switch is not pressed Off BSW warning lamp ON On BSW warning lamp OFF Off When the BSW system is ON (BSW ON indicator ON) On When the BSW system is OFF (BSW ON indicator OFF) Off TERMINAL LAYOUT H I J K PHYSICAL VALUES L M JSOIA0213ZZ Terminal No. (Wire color) + 1 (BR) 4 (Y) 6 (B/W) − Description Signal name BSW switch signal 6 (B/W) Ground BSW ON indicator signal Ground Revision: 2011 September Input Output — Standard value Reference value (Approx.) Pressed 0 - 0.1 V 0V Released 9.5 -16 V 12 V Illuminated 0 - 0.1 V 0V OFF 9.5 - 16 V 12 V 0 - 0.1 V 0V Condition Input/ Output BSW switch BSW ON indicator Ignition switch ON DAS-21 2012 QUEST N DAS P BSW CONTROL MODULE [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Condition Standard value Reference value (Approx.) Signal name Input/ Output 7 (L) BSW communication-H — — — — 8 (Y) BSW communication-L — — — — CAN -H — — — — 15 (P) CAN -L — — — — 16 (G) Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON 9.5 - 16 V Battery Voltage − + 14 (L) 6 (B/W) Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492655 If a malfunction occurs in the system, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates. DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000007492656 If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspection priority chart. Priority Detected items (DTC) 1 • U1508: LOST COMM (SIDE RDR L) 2 • U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) • U1507: LOST COMM (SIDE RDR R) 3 • C1B53: SIDE RDR R MALF • C1B54: SIDE RDR L MALF 4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5 • C1A03: VHCL SPEED SE CIRC 6 • C1A00: CONTROL UNIT C1A01: POWER SUPPLY CIR C1A02: POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 U0121: VDC CAN CIR 2 U0401: ECM CAN CIR 1 U0402: TCM CAN CIR 1 U0415: VDC CAN CIR 1 U150B: ECM CAN CIRC 3 U150C: VDC CAN CIRC 3 U150D: TCM CAN CIRC 3 U150E: BCM CAN CIRC 3 U1503: SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2 U1504: SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1 U1505: SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2 U1506: SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1 U1518: SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3 U1519: SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3 DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492657 NOTE: • The details of time display are as per the following. - CRNT: A malfunction is detected now - PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past • IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame Data). - 0: The malfunctions that are detected now CAN communication system (U1000, U1010) Revision: 2011 September DAS-22 2012 QUEST BSW CONTROL MODULE [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > - 1 - 39: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process. - If it is over 39, it is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased. Other than CAN communication system (Other than U1000, U1010) - 1 - 49: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 49 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process. - If it is over 49, it is fixed to 49 until the self-diagnosis results are erased. A B ×: Applicable DTC BSW warning lamp Fail-safe Reference C1A00 CONTROL UNIT ON × DAS-35 C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIR ON × DAS-36 C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 ON × DAS-36 C1A03 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ON × DAS-37 C1B53 SIDE RDR R MALF ON × DAS-42 C1B54 SIDE RDR L MALF ON × DAS-43 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ON × DAS-46 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ON × DAS-49 C D E F — — — G U0121 VDC CAN CIR 2 ON × DAS-51 U0401 ECM CAN CIR 1 ON × DAS-52 U0402 TCM CAN CIR 1 ON × DAS-53 U0415 VDC CAN CIR 1 ON × DAS-55 U150B ECM CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-56 U150C VDC CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-57 U150D TCM CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-58 U150E BCM CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-59 U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2 ON × DAS-60 U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1 ON × DAS-61 U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2 ON × DAS-62 U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1 ON × DAS-63 U1507 LOST COMM (SIDE RDR R) ON × DAS-64 U1508 LOST COMM (SIDE RDR L) ON × DAS-65 U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-66 U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3 ON × DAS-67 H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-23 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR LH [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > SIDE RADAR LH Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492658 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL CONSULT MONITOR ITEM Monitor Item Condition Value/Status BEAM DISTANCE NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — BEAM POSITION NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — Side radar is normal. Off Side radar is malfunctioning. On Side radar is not blocked. Off Side radar is blocked. On NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — Side radar does not detect a vehicle. Off Side radar detects a vehicle. On SIDE RADAR MALF BLOCKAGE COND ACTIVATE OPE VEHICLE DETECT TERMINAL LAYOUT JSOIA0244ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) + – 2 (B) Ground 3 (Y) 4 (L) 5 (V) 6 (W) 2 (B) Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Standard value Reference value (Approx.) Ground — — 0 - 0.1 V 0V BSW communication-L — — — — BSW communication-H — — — — Ignition switch ON 10 - 16 V Battery voltage Approx. 2 sec. after ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb check) 5.5 - 16 V 6V Ignition power supply BSW indicator Input Output Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492659 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates. Revision: 2011 September DAS-24 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR LH [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled. • The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. • The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar. DTC Inspection Priority Chart Detected items (DTC) 1 • U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 2 • U0104: ADAS CAN CIR 1 • U0405: ADAS CAN CIR 2 3 C1B50: SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION 4 • C1B51: BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR • C1B52: BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR • C1B55: RADAR BLOCKAGE B INFOID:0000000007492660 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. Priority A C D E F DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492661 G ×: Applicable DTC BSW warning lamp Fail-safe Reference page C1B50 SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION ON × DAS-38 C1B51 BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR ON × DAS-39 C1B52 BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR ON × DAS-40 C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE Blink × DAS-44 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ON × DAS-45 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ON × DAS-48 U0104 ADAS CAN CIR1 ON × DAS-50 U0405 ADAS CAN CIR2 ON × DAS-54 H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-25 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR RH [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > SIDE RADAR RH Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492662 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL CONSULT MONITOR ITEM Monitor Item Condition Value/Status BEAM DISTANCE NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — BEAM POSITION NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — Side radar is normal. Off Side radar is malfunctioning. On Side radar is not blocked. Off Side radar is blocked. On NOTE: The item is displayed, but it is not used. — Side radar does not detect a vehicle. Off Side radar detects a vehicle. On SIDE RADAR MALF BLOCKAGE COND ACTIVATE OPE VEHICLE DETECT TERMINAL LAYOUT JSOIA0244ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) + – 2 (B) Ground 3 (Y) 4 (L) 5 (G) 6 (W) 2 (B) Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Standard value Reference value (Approx.) Ground — — 0 - 0.1 V 0V BSW communication-L — — — — BSW communication-H — — — — Ignition switch ON 10 - 16 V Battery voltage Approx. 2 sec. after ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb check) 5.5 - 16 V 6V Ignition power supply BSW indicator Input Output Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492663 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in the combination meter illuminates. Revision: 2011 September DAS-26 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR RH [BSW] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled. • The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. • The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar. DTC Inspection Priority Chart Detected items (DTC) 1 • U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 2 • U0104: ADAS CAN CIR 1 • U0405: ADAS CAN CIR 2 3 C1B50: SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION 4 • C1B51: BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR • C1B52: BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR • C1B55: RADAR BLOCKAGE B INFOID:0000000007492664 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. Priority A C D E F DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492665 G ×: Applicable DTC BSW warning lamp Fail-safe Reference page C1B50 SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION ON × DAS-38 C1B51 BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR ON × DAS-39 C1B52 BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR ON × DAS-40 C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE Blink × DAS-44 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ON × DAS-46 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ON × DAS-48 U0104 ADAS CAN CIR1 ON × DAS-50 U0405 ADAS CAN CIR2 ON × DAS-54 H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-27 2012 QUEST BLIND SPOT WARNING [BSW] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM BLIND SPOT WARNING Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492666 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if notde- JCOWA0521GB Revision: 2011 September DAS-28 2012 QUEST BLIND SPOT WARNING [BSW] < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K L M N DAS JCOWA0522GB P Revision: 2011 September DAS-29 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [BSW] < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492667 OVERALL SEQUENCE JSOIA0485GB DETAILED FLOW 1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customer about the concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully. NOTE: Revision: 2011 September DAS-30 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [BSW] < BASIC INSPECTION > The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the customer mentioned this symptom”. A >> GO TO 2. 2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT B 1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 2. Check if the DTC is detected on the self-diagnosis results of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT” and/or “BSW”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS C D Perform pre-inspection for diagnosis. Refer to DAS-32, "Inspection Procedure". E >> GO TO 4. 4.ACTION TEST F Perform BSW system action test to check the operation status. Refer to DAS-33, "Description". Check if any other malfunctions occur. G >> GO TO 6. 5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC 1. 2. Check the DTC in the self-diagnosis results. Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT) or DAS-27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) and/or DAS-22, "DTC Index" (BSW). NOTE: If “DTC: U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system or BSW communication system. H I J >> GO TO 7. 6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Perform the applicable diagnosis according to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to DAS-75, "Symptom Table". K L >> GO TO 7. 7.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. M >> GO TO 8. 8.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT) N 1. Erases self-diagnosis results. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” again after repairing or replacing the specific items. 3. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT” and “BSW”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 9. 9.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST) Perform the BSW system action test. Check that the malfunction symptom is solved or no other symptoms occur. Is there a malfunction symptom? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DAS-31 2012 QUEST DAS P PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS [BSW] < BASIC INSPECTION > PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007492668 1.CHECK REAR BUMPER NEAR THE SIDE RADAR Are rear bumper near the side radar contaminated with foreign materials? YES >> Clean the rear bumper. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR AND THE SIDE RADAR OUTSKIRTS Are side radar and the side radar outskirts contaminated with foreign materials? YES >> Clean the side radar or side radar outskirts. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK SIDE RADAR INSTALLATION CONDITION Check side radar installation condition (installation position, properly tightened, a bent bracket). Is it properly installed? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Install side radar properly. Revision: 2011 September DAS-32 2012 QUEST ACTION TEST [BSW] < BASIC INSPECTION > ACTION TEST A Description INFOID:0000000007492669 Always perform the BSW system action test to check that the system operates normally after replacing the side radar LH/RH, or repairing any BSW system malfunction. WARNING: Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test. CAUTION: Fully understand the following items well before the road test; • Precautions: Refer to DAS-4, "Precaution for BSW System Service". • System description: Refer to DAS-8, "System Description". • Normal operating condition: Refer to DAS-76, "Description". Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007492670 WARNING: Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test. CAUTION: Fully understand the following items well before the road test; • Precautions: Refer to DAS-4, "Precaution for BSW System Service". • System description: Refer to DAS-8, "System Description". • Normal operating condition: Refer to DAS-76, "Description". B C D E F G 1.BSW SYSTEM ACTION TEST 1. 2. 3. H Drive the vehicle. Turn BSW switch ON (BSW ON indicator is ON). Check BSW operation according to the following table. I Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation Turn signal condition Status of vehicle detection within detection area Indication on the BSW indicator Buzzer — — — OFF OFF Less than approx. 29 (18) — — OFF OFF — Vehicle is absent OFF OFF OFF Vehicle is detected ON OFF Blink Short continuous beep BSW ON indicator Vehicle speed (Approx.) [km/h (MPH)] OFF ON Action Approx. 32 (20) or more J K L M N Before turn signal operates Vehicle is detected ON (Vehicle detected direction) DAS JSOIA0251GB JSOIA0452GB P Blink Vehicle is detected after turn signal operates OFF JSOIA0251GB Revision: 2011 September DAS-33 2012 QUEST ACTION TEST [BSW] < BASIC INSPECTION > NOTE: • If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle speed becomes lower than approximately 29km/h (18MPH). • Time shown in the figure is approximate time. >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DAS-34 2012 QUEST C1A00 CONTROL UNIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A C1A00 CONTROL UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492671 B DTC DETECTION LOGIC C DTC C1A00 Trouble diagnosis name CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition BSW control module internal malfunction Possible causes BSW control module D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 3. Check if the “C1A00” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “C1A00” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-35, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END E Diagnosis Procedure G INFOID:0000000007492672 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC other than “C1A00” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-22, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". F H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-35 2012 QUEST C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492673 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIR The battery voltage sent to BSW control module remains less than 7.9 V for 5 seconds C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 The battery voltage sent to BSW control module remains more than 19.3 V for 5 seconds Possible causes • Connector, harness, fuse • BSW control module DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “C1A01” or “C1A02” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “C1A01” or “C1A02” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-36, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492674 1.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit of BSW control module. Refer to DAS-68, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September DAS-36 2012 QUEST C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR DTC Logic A INFOID:0000000007492675 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1A03 B Trouble diagnosis name VHCL SPEED SE CIRC DTC detecting condition Possible causes C If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) received by the BSW control module via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Wheel speed sensor • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • BSW control module NOTE: If DTC “C1A03” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F 1. 2. 3. G Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more. CAUTION: Always drive safely. 4. Stop the vehicle. 5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 6. Check if the “C1A03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “C1A03” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-37, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492676 H I J 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1A03” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to BRC-37, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-37 2012 QUEST C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION DTC LOGIC INFOID:0000000007492677 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1B50 Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION DTC detecting condition Side radar malfunction Possible causes Side radar DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “C1B50” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is the “C1B50” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492678 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT Check if any DTC other than “C1B50” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT” Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunction part. Refer to DAS27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) or DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT). NO >> Replace the side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-38 2012 QUEST C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492679 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1B51 B Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR Short circuit in BSW indicator circuit is detected. (Over current is detected) Possible cause • BSW indicator circuit • BSW indicator • Side radar C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “C1B51” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is the “C1B51” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-39, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure Side radar B57 (LH) B317 (RH) Terminal G H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect side radar harness connector and BSW indicator harness connector. Check continuity between side radar harness connector and ground. Connector F INFOID:0000000007492680 1.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. 3. E I J Continuity Ground 6 Not existed K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. L 2.REPLACE THE SIDE RADAR 1. Replace the side radar. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 3. Check if the “C1B51” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT” Is the DTC “C1B51” detected? YES >> Replace the side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". NO >> INSPECTION END M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-39 2012 QUEST C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492681 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Trouble diagnosis name C1B52 BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR DTC detecting condition Open circuit in BSW indicator circuit is detected. Possible cause • BSW indicator circuit • BSW indicator • Side radar DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “C1B52” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is the “C1B52” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-40, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492682 1.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect side radar harness connector and door mirror harness connector. Check continuity between side radar harness connector and door mirror harness connector. Side radar Connector Door mirror Terminal B57 (LH) 6 B317 (RH) Connector D43 (LH) D3 (RH) Continuity Terminal 1 Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 2 1. 2. Disconnect BSW indicator harness connector. Check continuity between door mirror harness connector and BSW indicator harness connector. Door mirror Connector D43 (LH) D3 (RH) D43 (LH) D3 (RH) BSW indicator Terminal 1 13 Connector D201 (LH) D202 (RH) D201 (LH) D202 (RH) Continuity Terminal 1 Existed 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 3.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 3 Check continuity between door mirror harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September DAS-40 2012 QUEST C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > A Door mirror Connector Terminal D43 (LH) Continuity Ground 13 D3 (RH) B Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. C 4.CHECK SIDE RADAR VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1. 2. D Connect side radar harness connector. Check voltage between door mirror harness connector and ground. Door mirror Connector Ground D43 (LH) D3 (RH) Condition Terminal 1 Ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON (Approx. 2 sec.) Standard voltage E Reference voltage (Approx.) F 5.5 - 16 V 6V G Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace glass mirror. NO >> Replace side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-41 2012 QUEST C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492683 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1B53 Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR R MALF DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects that side radar RH has a malfunction. Possible cause Side radar RH DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “C1B53” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “C1B53” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492684 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1B53” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT). NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-42 2012 QUEST C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492685 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1B54 B Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR L MALF DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects that side radar LH has a malfunction. Possible cause C Side radar LH DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “C1B54” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “C1B54” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-43, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". E F G Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492686 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS H Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1B54” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS J Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT). NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-43 2012 QUEST C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492687 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. C1B55 Trouble diagnosis name RADAR BLOCKAGE DTC detecting condition Side radar is blocked. Possible cause Stain or foreign materials is deposited. NOTE: DTC “C1B55” may be detected under the following conditions except for possible cause. (Explain to the customer about the difference between the contamination detection function and the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”.) • The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. • The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar. • Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not actually be blocked. This is rare and is known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked condition either self-clears or clears after an ignition cycle. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492688 1.CHECK THE REAR BUMPER Check rear bumper near the side radar contaminated with foreign materials. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK THE SIDE RADAR Check side radar and the side radar outskirts contaminated with foreign materials. >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK THE SIDE RADAR INSTALL CONDITION Check side radar installation condition (installation position, properly tightened, a bent bracket). >> GO TO 4. 4.INTERVIEW 1. Ask if there is stain or foreign materials. 2. Ask if there is any temporary ambient condition such as splashing water, mist or fog. 3. Ask if there is any object such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar. Is any of above conditions seen? YES >> Explain to the customer about the difference between the blockage detection function and the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DAS-44 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT A SIDE RADAR LH SIDE RADAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000007492689 B CAN COMMUNICATION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only. CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart". BSW COMMUNICATION • BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines. • BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic C D E F INFOID:0000000007492690 G DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1000 Trouble diagnosis name CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detecting condition If side radar LH is not transmitting or receiving BSW communication signal for 2 seconds or more SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure Possible causes H BSW communication system I INFOID:0000000007492691 1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS J 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". SIDE RADAR RH K L M SIDE RADAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000007492692 CAN COMMUNICATION N CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with DAS other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only. CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- P tion Signal Chart". BSW COMMUNICATION • BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines. • BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. Revision: 2011 September DAS-45 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492693 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1000 Trouble diagnosis name CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detecting condition If Side radar RH is not transmitting or receiving BSW communication signal for 2 seconds or more SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure Possible causes BSW communication system INFOID:0000000007492694 1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". BSW CONTROL MODULE BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description INFOID:0000000007492695 CAN COMMUNICATION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only. CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart". BSW COMMUNICATION • BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines. • BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492696 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1000 Trouble diagnosis name CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detecting condition Possible causes If BSW control module is not transmitting or re• CAN communication system ceiving CAN communication signal or BSW com• BSW communication system munication signal for 2 seconds or more NOTE: If “U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system. BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492697 1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction? Revision: 2011 September DAS-46 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". [BSW] A B C D E F G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-47 2012 QUEST U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) SIDE RADAR LH SIDE RADAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000007492698 CAN controller controls the communication of BSW communication signal and the error detection. SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492699 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1010 Trouble diagnosis name CONTROL UNIT (CAN) DTC detecting condition If side radar LH detects malfunction by CAN controller initial diagnosis. SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure Possible cause Side radar LH INFOID:0000000007492700 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT 1. 2. 3. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Replace the side radar LH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". NO >> INSPECTION END SIDE RADAR RH SIDE RADAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000007492701 CAN controller controls the communication of BSW communication signal and the error detection. SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492702 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1010 Trouble diagnosis name CONTROL UNIT (CAN) DTC detecting condition If Side radar RH detects malfunction by CAN controller initial diagnosis. SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure Possible cause Side radar RH INFOID:0000000007492703 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT 1. 2. 3. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Replace the side radar RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". NO >> INSPECTION END BSW CONTROL MODULE BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description INFOID:0000000007492704 CAN controller controls the communication of CAN communication signal and BSW communication signal, and the error detection. Revision: 2011 September DAS-48 2012 QUEST U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492705 A DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) If BSW control module detects malfunction by CAN controller initial diagnosis BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure Possible causes B BSW control module C INFOID:0000000007492706 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D 1. Turn the BSW system ON. 2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 3. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". NO >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-49 2012 QUEST U0104 ADAS CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0104 ADAS CAN 1 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492707 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0104 Trouble diagnosis name ADAS CAN CIR1 DTC detecting condition Side radar detected an error of BSW communication signal that was received from BSW control module. Possible cause BSW control module NOTE: If DTC “U0104” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT). DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT Check if the U0104 is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is the DTC “U0104” detected? YES >> Refer to DAS-50, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492708 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0104” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT). NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-22, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace side radar LH or RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation" Revision: 2011 September DAS-50 2012 QUEST U0121 VDC CAN 2 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0121 VDC CAN 2 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492709 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0121 B Trouble diagnosis name VDC CAN CIR2 DTC detecting condition Possible causes If BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) C NOTE: If DTC “U0121” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U0121” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U0121” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-51, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492710 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0121” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to BRC-37, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-51 2012 QUEST U0401 ECM CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0401 ECM CAN 1 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492711 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0401 Trouble diagnosis name ECM CAN CIR1 DTC detecting condition If BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication Possible causes ECM NOTE: If DTC “U0401” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U0401” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U0401” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-52, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492712 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0401” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-52 2012 QUEST U0402 TCM CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0402 TCM CAN 1 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492713 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0402 B Trouble diagnosis name TCM CAN CIRC1 DTC detecting condition If BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from TCM via CAN communication Possible causes C TCM NOTE: If DTC “U0402” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U0402” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U0402” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-53, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure D INFOID:0000000007492714 F G H 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0402” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I J K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-53 2012 QUEST U0405 ADAS CAN 2 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0405 ADAS CAN 2 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492715 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0405 Trouble diagnosis name ADAS CAN CIR2 DTC detecting condition Side radar detected an error of BSW communication signal that was received from BSW control module. Possible cause BSW control module NOTE: If DTC “U0405” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT). DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine. Turn the BSW system ON. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. Check if the U0405 is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is the DTC “U0405” detected? YES >> Refer to DAS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492716 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0405” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT). NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-22, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace side radar LH or RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-54 2012 QUEST U0415 VDC CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U0415 VDC CAN 1 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492717 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U0415 B Trouble diagnosis name VDC CAN CIR1 DTC detecting condition Possible causes If BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) C NOTE: If DTC “U0415” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U0415” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U0415” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-55, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492718 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0415” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to BRC-37, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-55 2012 QUEST U150B ECM CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U150B ECM CAN 3 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492719 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U150B Trouble diagnosis name ECM CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication Possible causes ECM NOTE: If DTC “U150B” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U150B” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U150B” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492720 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150B” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-56 2012 QUEST U150C VDC CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U150C VDC CAN 3 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492721 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U150C B Trouble diagnosis name VDC CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication Possible causes ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) C NOTE: If DTC “U150C” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U150C” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U150C” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-57, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492722 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150C” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to BRC-37, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-57 2012 QUEST U150D TCM CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U150D TCM CAN 3 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492723 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U150D Trouble diagnosis name TCM CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from TCM via CAN communication Possible causes TCM NOTE: If DTC “U150D” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U150D” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U150D” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-58, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492724 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150D” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-58 2012 QUEST U150E BCM CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U150E BCM CAN 3 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492725 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U150E B Trouble diagnosis name BCM CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from BCM via CAN communication Possible causes C BCM NOTE: If DTC “U150E” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U150E” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U150E” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-59, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492726 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150E” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-59 2012 QUEST U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492727 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1503 Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar LH via BSW communication Possible causes Side radar LH NOTE: If DTC “U1503” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”. • Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”. • Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1503” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1503” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492728 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1503” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected? YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-60 2012 QUEST U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492729 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1504 B Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar LH via BSW communication Possible causes C Side radar LH NOTE: If DTC “U1504” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”. • Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”. • Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”. D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1504” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1504” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492730 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1504” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected? YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J K 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-61 2012 QUEST U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492731 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1505 Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar RH via BSW communication Possible causes Side radar RH NOTE: If DTC “U1505” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1505” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1505” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-62, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492732 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1505” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-62 2012 QUEST U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492733 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1506 B Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar RH via BSW communication Possible causes C Side radar RH NOTE: If DTC “U1506” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1506” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1506” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-63, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492734 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1506” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-63 2012 QUEST U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R) [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R) DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492735 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1507 Trouble diagnosis name LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R) DTC detecting condition BSW control module cannot receive BSW communication signal from side radar RH for 2 seconds or more Possible causes • BSW communication system • Side radar RH NOTE: If DTC “U1507” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1507” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1507” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492736 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1507” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-64 2012 QUEST U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L) [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L) A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492737 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1508 B Trouble diagnosis name LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L) DTC detecting condition BSW control module cannot receive BSW communication signal from side radar LH for 2 seconds or more Possible causes • Side radar LH harness connector • BSW communication system • Side radar LH NOTE: DTC “U1508” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1508”. C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1508” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1508” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-65, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492738 F G H 1.CHECK SIDE RADAR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the terminals and connectors of the side radar LH for damage, bend and short (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Repair the terminal or connector. I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-65 2012 QUEST U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3 DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492739 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1518 Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar LH via BSW communication Possible causes Side radar LH NOTE: If DTC “U1518” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”. • Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”. • Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1518” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1518” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-66, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492740 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1518” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected? YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-66 2012 QUEST U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3 [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3 A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492741 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1519 B Trouble diagnosis name SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3 DTC detecting condition BSW control module detects an error signal that is received from side radar RH via BSW communication Possible causes C Side radar RH NOTE: If DTC “U1519” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the BSW system ON. 3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. 4. Check if the “U1519” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1519” detected as the current malfunction? YES >> Refer to DAS-67, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Diagnosis Procedure F G H INFOID:0000000007492742 1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS I Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1519” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic". NO >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS K Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-67 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT BSW CONTROL MODULE BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492743 1.CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses are blown: Signal name Fuse No. Ignition power supply 45 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. 2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between BSW control module harness connector and ground. Terminal (+) Condition (–) BSW control module Connector Ignition switch Terminal Ground M61 Standard voltage OFF 16 ON Reference voltage (Approx.) 0 - 0.1 V 0V 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the BSW control module power supply circuit. 3.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BSW control module connector. Check for continuity between BSW control module harness connector and ground. BSW control module Connector Terminal M61 6 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair the BSW control module ground circuit. SIDE RADAR LH SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492744 1.CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses are blown: Signal name Fuse No. Ignition power supply 45 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. Revision: 2011 September DAS-68 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the side radar LH connector. Check voltage between side radar LH harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (−) Side radar LH Connector Condition Reference voltage (Approx.) OFF 0 - 0.1 V 0V ON 10 - 16 V Battery voltage Ignition switch Terminal Ground B57 Standard voltage 5 B C D E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the side radar LH power supply circuit. F 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between side radar LH harness connectors and ground. G Side radar LH Connector Terminal B57 2 Ground Continuity H Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair the side radar LH ground circuit. I SIDE RADAR RH J SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492745 1.CHECK FUSES K Check if any of the following fuses are blown: Signal name Fuse No. Ignition power supply 45 L Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. M 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the side radar RH connector. Check voltage between side radar RH harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (−) Side radar RH Connector Standard voltage Reference voltage (Approx.) OFF 0 - 0.1 V 0V ON 10 - 16 V Battery voltage Ignition switch Terminal Ground B317 Condition 5 DAS P Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September DAS-69 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the side radar RH power supply circuit. [BSW] 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between side radar RH harness connectors and ground. Side radar RH Connector Terminal B317 2 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair the side radar RH ground circuit. Revision: 2011 September DAS-70 2012 QUEST BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492746 1.CHECK BSW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL B 1. 2. 3. C Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the DATA MONITOR item “WARN SYS SW” of “BSW” with CONSULT. With operating the BSW switch, check the monitor status. Monitor item Condition Monitor status BSW switch is pressed WARN SYS SW D On BSW switch is not pressed OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> BSW switch circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to DAS-71, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492747 F 1.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON. With operating the BSW switch, check voltage between BSW control module harness connector and ground. G H Terminals (+) (−) BSW control module Connector Terminal M61 1 Condition Voltage (Approx.) I Pressed 0V J Released 12 V BSW switch Ground Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. K 2.CHECK BSW SWITCH L 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove BSW switch. 3. Check BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation". M N 3.CHECK BSW SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BSW switch harness connector and the ground. BSW switch Connector Terminal M60 2 Ground DAS Continuity P Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. Disconnect the BSW control module connector. Revision: 2011 September DAS-71 2012 QUEST BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and BSW switch harness connector. BSW control module BSW switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M61 1 M60 1 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 5.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and ground. BSW control module Connector Terminal M61 1 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492748 1.CHECK BSW SWITCH Check continuity of BSW switch. Terminal 1 2 Condition Continuity When BSW switch is pressed Existed When BSW switch is released Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace BSW switch. Revision: 2011 September DAS-72 2012 QUEST BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT A Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492749 1.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BSW switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BSW switch harness connector and ground. C D Terminals (+) (−) Voltage (Approx.) BSW switch Connector Terminal M60 5 E Ground Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the BSW ON indicator power supply circuit. F 2.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR SIGNAL FOR OPEN G 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BSW control module harness connector. Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and BSW switch harness connector. H BSW control module I BSW switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M61 4 M60 6 Continuity Existed J Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. K 3.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and ground. BSW control module Connector Terminal M61 4 Ground L Continuity M Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. N 4.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR DAS Check the BSW ON indicator. Refer to DAS-73, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace BSW switch. DAS-81, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection P INFOID:0000000007492750 1.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR Apply battery voltage to BSW switch terminals 5 and 6, and then check if the BSW ON indicator illuminates. Revision: 2011 September DAS-73 2012 QUEST BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT [BSW] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Terminals (+) (-) 5 6 Condition BSW ON indicator When the battery voltage is applied On When the battery voltage is not applied Off Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace the BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September DAS-74 2012 QUEST BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS [BSW] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007492751 B CAUTION: Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected. NOTE: For the operational conditions of BSW, refer to DAS-8, "System Description". C D Symptom BSW warning lamp (Yellow) does not illuminate Possible cause Inspection item/Reference page • BSW warning lamp signal (CAN) - Combination meter - BSW control module • BSW warning lamp (combination meter) • Power supply and ground circuit of BSW control module Refer to DAS-68, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure" • BSW control module Active test “BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP” Refer to DAS-17, "CONSULT Function (BSW)". • BSW control module Data monitor “BSW/BSI WARN LMP” Refer to DAS-17, "CONSULT Function (BSW)" • Combination meter Data monitor “BSW W/L” Refer to MWI-35, "CONSULT Function" Indicator/warning lamps do not illuminate when ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON. BSW system is not activated. (Indicator/warning lamps illuminate when ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON.) E F G H I BSW ON indicator (on the BSW switch) does not illuminate • Harness between BSW control module and BSW switch • BSW switch • BSW control module BSW ON indicator circuit Refer to DAS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure" J BSW indicator does not turn ON Perform self-diagnosis of side radar Refer to DAS-19, "CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT)" or DAS-20, "CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR RIGHT)" K • Harness between side radar and BSW indicator • Side radar LH/RH • BSW indicator • Harness between BSW control module and BSW switch • Harness between BSW switch and ground • BSW control module • BSW switch BSW ON indicator circuit Refer to DAS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure" M • BSW control module • Combination meter Meter buzzer circuit Refer to WCS-35, "Component Function Check" BSW ON indicator is not turned ON ⇔ OFF when operating BSW switch Buzzer is not sounding L N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-75 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION [BSW] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description INFOID:0000000007492752 PRECAUTIONS FOR BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) • The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and are not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction driver will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. • The BSW system may not provide a warning for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly. • Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer because the system may not function properly. • Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. • The side radar may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as: - Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. - Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles. - Oncoming vehicles. - Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when driver accelerate from a stop. - A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as vehicle. - A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. - A vehicle which vehicle overtakes rapidly. • Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the side radar to detect other vehicles. • The side radar detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the side radar may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the side radar may detect vehicles driving two lanes away. • The side radar are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition. Revision: 2011 September DAS-76 2012 QUEST BSW CONTROL MODULE [BSW] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A BSW CONTROL MODULE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492753 B REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolts from BSW control module. Disconnect BSW control module connector. Remove BSW control module. C D INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. E F G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-77 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR [BSW] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SIDE RADAR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492754 EXPLODED VIEW JSOIA0511GB 1. Bracket 2. Side radar LH 3. Bracket 4. Bracket 5. Side radar RH 6. Bracket A. LH side B. RH side Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbol makes in the figure. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-15, "REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation". Remove the side radar connector. 3. NOTE: This illustration is an example. Remove the mounting nuts to remove the side radar RH/LH from bracket. JSOIA0280ZZ Installation Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September DAS-78 2012 QUEST SIDE RADAR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Tighten mounting nuts in the numerical order as shown in the figure. • Always lock the side radar connector. CAUTION: Since right side radar and left side radar are similar in shape, never confuse right with left. [BSW] A B C JSOIA0359ZZ D E F G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-79 2012 QUEST BSW INDICATOR [BSW] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BSW INDICATOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492755 BSW indicator is installed on the door mirror surface. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation". NOTE: Always remove BSW indicator together with glass mirror. Revision: 2011 September DAS-80 2012 QUEST BSW SWITCH [BSW] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BSW SWITCH A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492756 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. B Remove the instrument lower panel (LH). Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove the bracket for BSW switch and other switches from instrument driver lower panel. Insert remover tool (B) in pawl (A) of the bracket and widen the pawl in (C) direction to release the fit. Remove BSW switch from the bracket in (D) direction. C D E F JSOIA0515ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. G H I J K L M N DAS P Revision: 2011 September DAS-81 2012 QUEST DRIVER CONTROLS SECTION DEF DEFOGGER A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 14 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ........... 14 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 Rear window defogger .............................................. 5 Door mirror defogger ................................................. 5 WITH AUTO A/C ........................................................14 WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check ......14 WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure .................14 F G H WITH MANUAL A/C ...................................................15 WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check ....15 WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure ............15 I REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ............. 17 J System Description ................................................... 6 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 7 Component Function Check ....................................17 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17 Component Inspection .............................................18 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 8 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .......................... 19 K COMMON ITEM ........................................................... 8 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ....................................................... 8 DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ........................... 21 SYSTEM .............................................................. 6 Component Function Check ....................................19 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19 Component Function Check ....................................21 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ..................................... 9 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) ............................ 10 DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ... 22 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11 Component Function Check ....................................22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 BCM ....................................................................11 DEF M N List of ECU Reference ............................................ 11 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ................................................................... 23 Component Function Check ....................................23 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23 O WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 12 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL ............................................................. 24 P REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ............12 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 12 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 13 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........13 Work Flow ............................................................... 13 WITH AUTO A/C ........................................................24 WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check ......24 WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure .................24 WITH MANUAL A/C ...................................................25 Revision: 2011 September DEF-1 2012 QUEST WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check ... 25 WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 25 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 27 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE .......................................................... 27 Description .............................................................. 27 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 27 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE ... 28 Description .............................................................. 28 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE ....................................... 29 Description .............................................................. 29 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29 DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE ............................................................... 30 BOTH SIDES ............................................................. 30 BOTH SIDES : Description ..................................... 30 BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 30 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 30 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 30 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 30 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 30 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 30 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 30 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE .................................. 32 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 32 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 33 FILAMENT ......................................................... 33 Inspection and Repair .......................................... Revision: 2011 September DEF-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492583 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492584 JMLIA2621ZZ No. Component Function • Detects rear window defogger switch signal then turns rear window defogger relay ON. • Performs the timer control of rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 1. BCM 2. Door mirror defogger*3 Refer to DEF-5, "Door mirror defogger". 3. Rear window defogger relay (built in fuse block J/B) Operates the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3 with BCM control. • The rear window defogger switch is installed. • A/C auto amp.*1 4. 5. • A/C amp.*2 (Rear window defogger switch) • Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3 are operated by turning the rear window defogger switch ON. • The indicator lamp in the rear window defogger switch illuminates when the rear window defogger is operating. Refer to HAC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Rear window defogger connector (Rear window defogger) Refer to DEF-5, "Rear window defogger". *1: With auto A/C *2: With manual A/C *3: For models with door mirror defogger Revision: 2011 September DEF-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Rear window defogger INFOID:0000000007850481 A Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up. B C D JMLIA2595GB Door mirror defogger INFOID:0000000007850482 E Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the door mirror from fogging up. F G H JMLIA2596GB I J K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-5 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000007492585 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMLIA2164GB *1: With auto A/C *2: With manual A/C OPERATION DESCRIPTION • When BCM receives rear window defogger switch signal, BCM transmits rear window defogger ON signal to rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B) for approximately 15 minutes. • When rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B) turns ON, power supply is supplied to rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (For models with door mirror defogger). • When rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (For models with door mirror defogger) are operated, rear window defogger feedback signal is transmitted to A/C auto amp.*1 or A/C amp.*2, and then indicator lamp of rear window defogger switch is turned ON. 1 * : With auto A/C *2: With manual A/C TIMER FUNCTION • BCM transmits rear window defogger ON signal to rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B) for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch is turned ON while ignition switch is ON. • Timer is cancelled when rear window defogger switch is pressed again during timer operation. BCM stops the output of rear window defogger ON signal. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation when ignition switch is turned OFF. Revision: 2011 September DEF-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007492586 A B C D E F G H I J K DEF M N O JMLIA2151GB Revision: 2011 September DEF-7 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007848978 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × Door lock DOOR LOCK × × Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September DEF-8 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter A Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* C D E F While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 B G H I J K The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: DEF M *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC N • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. O • Closing door P • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Revision: 2011 September DEF-9 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) INFOID:0000000007492588 Data monitor Monitor Item Description REAR DEF SW Displays “Press (ON)/other (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch. PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch. ACTIVE TEST Test Item REAR DEFOGGER Revision: 2011 September Description Rear window defogger operates when ON on CONSULT screen is touched. DEF-10 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BCM List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007492591 ECU Reference C BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM B BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D BCS-59, "DTC Index" E F G H I J K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-11 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492592 JCLWA5186GB Revision: 2011 September DEF-12 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492593 B DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM C Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in. D >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FOR DTC E Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT Is any DTC detected? YES >> BCM: Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 3. F 3.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION G Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes. Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur. H >> GO TO 4. 4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS” Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 3. Then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. I J >> GO TO 5. 5.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS” K Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system. >> GO TO 6. DEF 6.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts. M >> GO TO 7. 7.FINAL CHECK Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3. Are all malfunctions corrected? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 4. N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-13 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH WITH AUTO A/C WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007849079 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION 1. 2. Perform (“REAR DEF SW”) in BCM - REAR DEFOGGER “DATA MONITOR” mode by using CONSULT. Operate rear window defogger switch and check Monitor Status on CONSULT screen. Monitor Item Condition REAR DEF SW Rear window defogger switch Monitor Status Pressed On Released Off Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure". WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007849074 1.CHECK AUTO A/C Check the operating condition of auto A/C Does auto A/C operate normally? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform auto A/C diagnosis. Refer to HAC-64, "Work Flow". 2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector. Check voltage between A/C auto amp. harness connector and ground by oscilloscope. (+) A/C auto amp. Voltage (Approx.) (-) Connector Terminal M50 27 Ground JPMIA0012GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector. BCM 3. A/C auto amp. Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M121 15 M50 27 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September DEF-14 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM Connector Terminal M121 15 Ground Continuity A Not existed B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. C 4.REPLACE A/C AUTO AMP. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Replace A/C auto amp. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> GO TO 5. D E 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? >> INSPECTION END G WITH MANUAL A/C WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007849080 H 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION 1. 2. Perform (“REAR DEF SW”) in BCM - REAR DEFOGGER “DATA MONITOR” mode by using CONSULT. Operate rear window defogger switch and check Monitor Status on CONSULT screen. Monitor Item REAR DEF SW Condition Rear window defogger switch Monitor Status Pressed On Released Off J K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure". WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure I DEF INFOID:0000000007849081 1.CHECK MANUAL A/C M Check the operating condition of manual A/C Does manual A/C operate normally? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform manual A/C diagnosis. Refer to HAC-175, "Work Flow". N 2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL O 1. 2. 3. P Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/C amp. connector. Check voltage between A/C amp. harness connector and ground by oscilloscope. Revision: 2011 September DEF-15 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > (+) A/C amp. Voltage (Approx.) (-) Connector Terminal M49 27 Ground JPMIA0012GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and A/C amp. harness connector. BCM 3. A/C amp. Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M121 15 M49 27 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M121 15 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.REPLACE A/C AMP. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Replace A/C amp. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DEF-16 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007849069 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B 1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT. 2. Touch “ON”. 3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger relay power supply circuit function is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-17, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007849070 1.CHECK FUSE E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check 10A fuse [No.3, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. F G 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. H (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M121 1 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch Ground ON 0 − 0.6 OFF 9 − 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. Fixed at 0 V>>GO TO 3. Fixed at 9 − 16 V >>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". DEF Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and fuse block (J/B). Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector. BCM Fuse block (J/B) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M121 1 M2 4B M Continuity N Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. O 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 1 P Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-18, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay. 5.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) Revision: 2011 September J K 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 2 1. 2. 3. I DEF-17 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Install the rear window defogger relay. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground. (+) (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Fuse block (J/B) Connector Terminal M2 4B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace fuse block (J/B). 6.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 2 Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-18, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay. 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007849071 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Check rear window defogger relay. Rear window defogger relay Condition Continuity 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed Terminal 3 5 No current supply Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay. Revision: 2011 September SEF497Y DEF-18 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492607 B 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT. 2. Touch “ON”. 3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492608 E 1.CHECK FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check 20A fuse [No.15, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. F G 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Disconnect rear window defogger harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground. I (+) Rear window defogger Connector Terminal D184 1 (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch Ground ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear window defogger harness connector and ground. Rear window defogger Connector Terminal D185 2 Ground M Continuity O 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT P Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) harness connector. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and rear window defogger harness connector. Revision: 2011 September N Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between rear window defogger and ground. 1. 2. 3. K DEF 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. J DEF-19 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Fuse block (J/B) Rear window defogger Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B6 10G D184 1 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and rear window defogger. 5.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground. (+) Fuse block (J/B) (-) Connector Terminal B6 10G Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace fuse block (J/B). 6.CHECK FILAMENT Check the filament for damage or blown. Refer to DEF-33, "Inspection and Repair". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair filament. 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DEF-20 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492610 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER B 1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT. 2. Touch “ON”. 3. Check that both side door mirror glasses are getting warmer. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Door mirror defoggers are OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492611 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror (both sides) connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) connector and ground. G (+) Door mirror (driver side) Connector (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Terminal D43 7 H Ground Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) J 1. 2. 3. 4. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground. DEF (+) Fuse block (J/B) Connector M3 (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Terminal 10C Ground Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 M Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (driver side). NO >> Replace fuse block (J/B). N 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? >> INSPECTION END P Revision: 2011 September DEF-21 2012 QUEST DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492613 1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER 1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT. 2. Touch “ON”. 3. Check that the driver side door mirror glass is getting warmer. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Driver side door mirror defogger is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-22, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492614 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground. (+) Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminal D43 7 (-) Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (driver side). 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground. Door mirror (driver side) Connector Terminal D43 19 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace glass mirror (driver side). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between door mirror (driver side) and ground. Revision: 2011 September DEF-22 2012 QUEST PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492617 1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER B 1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT. 2. Touch “ON”. 3. Check that the passenger side door mirror glass is getting warmer. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Passenger side door mirror defogger is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-23, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492618 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground. G (+) Door mirror (Passenger side) Connector (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Terminal D3 H 7 Ground Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (passenger side). I J 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Door mirror (passenger side) Connector Terminal D3 19 Ground K Continuity DEF Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace glass mirror (passenger side). NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector between door mirror (passenger side) and ground. M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-23 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL WITH AUTO A/C WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007848994 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger switch is illuminated when turning the rear window defogger switch ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger feedback signal is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-24, "WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure". WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007848995 1.CHECK FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check 10A fuse [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)] Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/C auto amp. harness connector and ground. (+) A/C auto amp. (-) Connector Terminal M50 7 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/C auto amp. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector. Fuse block (J/B) 4. A/C auto amp. Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M3 9C M50 7 Continuity Existed Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) and ground. Fuse block (J/B) Connector Terminal M3 9C Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) Revision: 2011 September DEF-24 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground. A (+) Fuse block (J/B) (-) Connector Terminal M3 9C Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch Ground ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace fuse block (J/B). B C D 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". F >> INSPECTION END WITH MANUAL A/C WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007849066 G 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger switch is illuminated when turning the rear window defogger switch ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Rear window defogger feedback signal is OK. NO >> Refer to DEF-25, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure". WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007849067 H I J 1.CHECK FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check 10A fuse [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)] Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. K DEF 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. M Disconnect A/C amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/C amp. harness connector and ground. N (+) A/C amp. (-) Connector Terminal M49 7 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/C amp. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. Revision: 2011 September DEF-25 2012 QUEST O P REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and A/C amp. harness connector. Fuse block (J/B) 4. A/C amp. Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M3 9C M49 7 Continuity Existed Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) and ground. Fuse block (J/B) Connector Terminal M3 9C Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground. (+) Fuse block (J/B) (-) Connector Terminal M3 9C Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace fuse block (J/B). 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September DEF-26 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE Description INFOID:0000000007849005 B INFOID:0000000007492620 C Check rear window defogger switch. Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (with auto A/C) or DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (with manual A/C). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. D 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY F For models without door mirror defogger. Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-17, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. E G H 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Check rear window defogger. Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I J 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-27 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE Description INFOID:0000000007849006 For models with door mirror defogger. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492621 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH Check rear window defogger switch. Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (with auto A/C) or DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (with manual A/C). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-17, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Check rear window defogger. Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September DEF-28 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE Description A INFOID:0000000007849007 B For models with door mirror defogger. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492622 C 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Check rear window defogger. Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. D E 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION F Confirm the operation again Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. G H I J K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-29 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BOTH SIDES BOTH SIDES : Description INFOID:0000000007492623 Driver side and passenger side door mirror defoggers do not operate. BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492624 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check door mirror defogger. Refer to DEF-21, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007492625 Driver side door mirror defogger does not operate. DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492626 1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check driver side door mirror defogger. Refer to DEF-22, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007492627 Passenger side door mirror defogger does not operate. PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492628 1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER. Check passenger side door mirror defogger. Refer to DEF-23, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Revision: 2011 September DEF-30 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. A B C D E F G H I J K DEF M N O P Revision: 2011 September DEF-31 2012 QUEST REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007849097 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL Check rear window defogger feedback signal. Refer to DEF-24, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (With auto A/C) or DEF-25, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (With manual A/C). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September DEF-32 2012 QUEST FILAMENT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A FILAMENT Inspection and Repair INFOID:0000000007492630 B INSPECTION 1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. C D E SEL122R 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of each filament. F G H I SEL263 J 3. 4. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. K DEF M N O P SEL265 REPAIR REPAIR EQUIPMENT • Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent) Revision: 2011 September DEF-33 2012 QUEST FILAMENT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long • Drawing pen • Heat gun • Alcohol • Cloth REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. PIIA0215E 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. SEL012D 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. SEL013D Revision: 2011 September DEF-34 2012 QUEST ENGINE SECTION EX EXHAUST SYSTEM A EX C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4 F Inspection ................................................................. 4 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Removal and Installation ........................................... 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 5 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Exploded View .......................................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 Inspection ................................................................. 6 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4 G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September EX-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493650 CAUTION: • Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. • Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot just after engine stops. • Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. Revision: 2011 September EX-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007493651 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts EX C D E PBIC0190E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September EX-3 2012 QUEST EXHAUST SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE EXHAUST SYSTEM Inspection INFOID:0000000007493652 Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage or deterioration. • If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. SMA211A Revision: 2011 September EX-4 2012 QUEST EXHAUST SYSTEM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A EXHAUST SYSTEM Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493653 EX C D E F G H I J K L M N JPBIA5303GB 1. Gasket 2. Gasket 3. Mounting rubber 4. Exhaust front tube 5. Seal bearing 6. Mounting rubber 7. Spring 8. Center muffler 9. Mounting rubber 10. Gasket 11. Mounting rubber 13. Rear muffler 14. Mounting rubber A. B. To exhaust manifold (bank2) O 12. Dynamic damper P To exhaust manifold (bank1) : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Revision: 2011 September EX-5 2012 QUEST EXHAUST SYSTEM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493654 REMOVAL Disconnect each joint and mounting using power tool. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Always replace exhaust tube gaskets with new ones when reassembling. • If heat insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the heat insulator, remove them. • When installing heat insulator avoid large gaps or interference between heat insulator and each exhaust pipe. • Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid gases leakage. • Temporarily tighten mounting nuts and bolts. Check each part for unusual interference, and then tighten them to the specified torque. • When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or unusual extension in up/down and right/left directions. Exhaust Front Tube to Center Muffler 1. Securely insert seal bearing (2) into exhaust front tube (1) side in the direction shown in the figure. 3 2. 3. : Spring 4 : Bolt 5 : Center muffler CAUTION: Be careful not to damage seal bearing surface when installing. With spring, tighten bolt. CAUTION: • Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not sitting on (A). • Be careful that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler ( ). After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler. Inspection JPBIA2174ZZ INFOID:0000000007493655 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check clearance between tail tube and rear bumper is even. • With engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. • Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Revision: 2011 September EX-6 2012 QUEST TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE SECTION FAX FRONT AXLE A B C FAX E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT .......................... 11 F Exploded View .........................................................11 WHEEL SIDE .............................................................12 WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation ................12 G H PREPARATION ............................................ 3 TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................15 TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation .......15 Inspection ................................................................15 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ..................................... 16 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precautions for Drive Shaft ....................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 6 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 6 Inspection .................................................................. 6 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ........................................ 7 Inspection .................................................................. 7 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 8 Exploded View .......................................................... 8 Removal and Installation ........................................... 8 Inspection ................................................................ 10 Revision: 2011 September Exploded View .........................................................16 I LEFT SIDE .................................................................17 LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation ....................17 J RIGHT SIDE ...............................................................18 RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation ..................18 WHEEL SIDE .............................................................20 WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly ...........21 TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................23 TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) ................................................................23 TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) ..............................................................25 Inspection ................................................................29 K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 30 N SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 30 O Wheel Bearing .........................................................30 Drive Shaft ...............................................................30 FAX-1 2012 QUEST P PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495702 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precautions for Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000007495703 • - Observe the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft. Never disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. Clean the parts, before disassembling and assembling. Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location. Reassemble disassembled parts carefully in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. - Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. - Clean disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper waste. Revision: 2011 September FAX-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007495704 B The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. C Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Removing and Installing wheel hub lock nut. KV40104000 ( — ) Hub lock nut wrench a: 85 mm (3.35 in) b: 65 mm (2.56 in) FAX E F ZZA0802D Installing boot band KV40107300 ( — ) Boot band crimping tool G H ZZA1229D Removing drive shaft KV40107500 ( — ) Drive shaft attachment I J ZZA1230D K Installing drive shaft KV38107900 ( — ) Protector a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia. L M PDIA1183J Installing support bearing ST35271000 (J-26091) Drift a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. N O ZZA0837D Removing support bearing ST17130000 ( — ) Drift a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. P ZZA0836D Revision: 2011 September FAX-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495705 Tool name Description Drive shaft puller Removing drive shaft joint sub assembly JPDIG0152ZZ Sliding hammer Removing drive shaft ZZA0023D Ball joint remover Removing hub bolt NT146 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: 2011 September FAX-4 2012 QUEST NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000007495706 B Symptom FRONT AXLE NVH in ST section NVH in BR section BRAKE STEERING Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart NVH in WT section ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section Refer to FRONT AXLE in this chart NVH in FAX and FSU sections FAX-6, "Inspection" × × × × × × × × × × × × × × H I Noise × × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × × Vibration × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × Judder × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × E G DRIVE SHAFT — FAX-8, "Exploded View" — × TIRE × FRONT AXLE Shake FAX F FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION × Parts interference × C Wheel bearing damage DRIVE SHAFT Improper installation, looseness Joint sliding resistance Noise Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Imbalance Excessive joint angle Reference FAX-29, "Inspection" — Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × J K L × ×: Applicable M N O P Revision: 2011 September FAX-5 2012 QUEST FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Inspection INFOID:0000000007495707 COMPONENT PART Check that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE) Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. • Move wheel hub assembly in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play : Refer to FAX-30, "Wheel Bearing". • Rotate wheel hub assembly and check there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub assembly. Revision: 2011 September FAX-6 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > FRONT DRIVE SHAFT A Inspection INFOID:0000000007495708 Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. • Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage. CAUTION: Replace entire drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occurs from drive shaft. • Check boot for cracks and other damage. B C FAX E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FAX-7 2012 QUEST FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495709 JPDIF0315GB 1. Stopper cap 2. Stopper bolt 3. Steering knuckle 4. Splash guard 5. Hub bolt 6. Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type) 7. Disc rotor 8. Wheel hub lock nut 9. Cotter pin A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495710 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: • Put matching marks (A) on the wheel hub assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. • Never drop disc rotor. JPDIG0066ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-8 2012 QUEST FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) [SST: KV40104000 ( — )]. A B C JSDIA2708ZZ 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation". Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. Hang drive shaft not to interfere with work. JPDIG0070ZZ CAUTION: • Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. • Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts. Remove wheel hub assembly and splash guard from steering knuckle. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation". Separate steering knuckle from transverse link. Remove stopper cap and stopper bolt from steering knuckle. Remove hub bolts (1) from wheel hub assembly, using the ball joint remover (A) (commercial service tool). CAUTION: • Remove hub bolt only when necessary. • Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel hub assembly. • Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the wheel hub assembly. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-10, "Inspection". FAX E F G H I J K L M JPDIF0299ZZ INSTALLATION N Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal. • Place a washer (A) as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts (1) by using the tightening force of the nut (B). CAUTION: • Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub assembly, and hub bolt. • Never reuse hub bolt. • Never reuse steering knuckle and transverse link fixing nut. • Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. Revision: 2011 September FAX-9 O P JPDIF0300ZZ 2012 QUEST FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Clean the matching surface of drive shaft, wheel hub assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste : 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz) • Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut. JPDIG0122ZZ : 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb) • • • • CAUTION: • Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. • Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. • Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. NOTE: Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than torque for avoiding looseness. Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: • Never reuse cotter pin. • Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness. Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing suspension component. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-10, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495711 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. • Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. • Check ball joint of transverse link and steering outer socket. - Transverse link: Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection". - Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September FAX-10 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495712 LEFT SIDE B C FAX E F G JPDIF0242ZZ 1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing assembly 4. Boot band 5. Boot 6. Damper band Dynamic damper 8. Circular clip 9. Joint sub-assembly 7. H I : Wheel side : Always replace after every disassembly. J 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]. RIGHT SIDE K L M N O P JSDIA2706GB 1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band 4. Boot 5. Housing assembly 6. Dust shield 7. Snap ring 8. Support bearing 9. Bearing housing 10. Support bearing bracket Revision: 2011 September FAX-11 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > : Wheel side : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]. WHEEL SIDE WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495713 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. JPDIG0070ZZ CAUTION: • Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. • Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts. 11. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. 12. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assembly from housing assembly. CAUTION: • Align drive shaft puller and drive shaft and remove them by pulling firmly and uniformly. • If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. JPDIF0258ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-12 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 13. Remove circular clip (1) from shaft of housing assembly. 14. Remove boot from shaft. A B C JPDIF0007ZZ FAX INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim. CAUTION: After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly. CAUTION: • Wrap serration on shaft with tape to protect the boot from damage. • Never reuse boot and boot band. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly. Then assemble shaft with joint sub-assembly holding circular clip. E F G JPDIF0008ZZ H I J K JPDIF0007ZZ 7. 8. L Install joint sub-assembly (1) to shaft using plastic hammer. CAUTION: • Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. • Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. Apply the specified amount of grease into the boot inside from large diameter side of boot. Grease amount M N : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". O JPDIF0011ZZ P Revision: 2011 September FAX-13 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown in the figure. L : Boot installation length CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” marks) on the shaft or joint sub-assembly, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting surface. 10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value shown below by inserting the suitable tool into inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot and discharging the inside air. Boot installation length JPDIF0222ZZ : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". CAUTION: • If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot. • Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) [SST: KV40107300 ( — )]. CAUTION: • Never reuse boot band. JPDIF0012ZZ • Secure boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification as shown in the figure. A : 7.0 mm (0.276 in) or less. 12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft of housing assembly fixed. CAUTION: • Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. • Never reuse boot band. 13. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. 14. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft, wheel hub assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste JPDIF0268ZZ : 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz) 15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut. CAUTION: Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. Revision: 2011 September FAX-14 JPDIG0122ZZ 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 16. Install strut assembly to steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Exploded View". 17. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 18. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". 19. Install lock plate to strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". 20. Install wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". 21. Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut. A B C : 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb) CAUTION: FAX • Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. • Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. E • Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. NOTE: Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than torque for avoiding looseness. F 22. When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: • Never reuse cotter pin. G • Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness. 23. Install tires. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". 24. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-15, "Inspection". H TRANSAXLE SIDE TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495714 Remove boot after drive shaft is removed from the vehicle. • For drive shaft removal and installation, follow the instructions bellow. - Left side: Refer to FAX-17, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation". - Right side: Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation". • For drive shaft disassembly and assembly, follow the instructions bellow. - Left side: Refer to FAX-23, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)". - Right side: Refer to FAX-25, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)". Inspection I J K INFOID:0000000007495715 L INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". M N O P Revision: 2011 September FAX-15 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495716 LEFT SIDE JPDIF0242ZZ 1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing assembly 4. Boot band 5. Boot 6. Damper band 7. Dynamic damper 8. Circular clip 9. Joint sub-assembly : Wheel side : Always replace after every disassembly. 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]. RIGHT SIDE JSDIA2706GB 1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band 4. Boot 5. Housing assembly 6. Dust shield 7. Snap ring 8. Support bearing 9. Bearing housing 10. Support bearing bracket Revision: 2011 September FAX-16 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > : Wheel side A : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. B 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]. LEFT SIDE C LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495717 FAX REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. JPDIG0070ZZ CAUTION: • Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. • Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts. 11. Use the drive shaft attachment (A) [SST: KV40107500 ( — )] and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between shaft and transaxle assembly, and then remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. CAUTION: • Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. • Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. 12. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". E F G H I J K L M N O JPDIF0004ZZ INSTALLATION P Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Transaxle Side • Always replace transaxle side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-153, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September FAX-17 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Place the protector (A) [SST: KV38107900 ( — )] onto transaxle assembly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: Check that circular clip is completely engaged. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". JPDIF0023ZZ Wheel Hub Side • Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. • Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste : 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz) • Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut. JPDIG0122ZZ : 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb) • • • • CAUTION: • Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. • Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. • Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. NOTE: Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than torque for avoiding looseness. Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: • Never reuse cotter pin. • Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness. Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing suspension component. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495718 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September FAX-18 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". A 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft canB not be separated even after performing the above procedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation". C 9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. FAX JPDIG0070ZZ CAUTION: • Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. • Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other E parts. 11. Remove splash guard. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View". F 12. Remove bearing housing mounting bolts. 13. Remove drive shaft assembly from transaxle assembly. CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when G removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. Remove heat insulator from front suspenstion member. H 15. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation". 16. Remove three way catalyst (bank 1) and heated oxygen sensor I JSDIA2709ZZ harness bracket. Refer to EM-33, "Removal and Installation". 17. Remove support bearing bracket. 18. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". J INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Transaxle Side • Always replace transaxle side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-153, "Removal and Installation". • Place the protector (A) [SST: KV38107900 ( — )] onto transaxle assembly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. K L M N JPDIF0049ZZ • Install support bearing bracket in following procedure. Revision: 2011 September FAX-19 O P 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > - Temporarily tighten support bearing bracket (1) mounting bolts (A), then tighten them to specified torque. JSDIA2710ZZ - Insert drive shaft into transaxle assembly, temporarily tighten bearing housing (1) mounting bolts (A), then tighten them to specified torque. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". JSDIA2711ZZ Wheel Hub Side • Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. • Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste : 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz) • Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut. JPDIG0122ZZ : 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb) • • • • CAUTION: • Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. • Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. • Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. NOTE: Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than torque for avoiding looseness. Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: • Never reuse cotter pin. • Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness. Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing suspension component. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". WHEEL SIDE Revision: 2011 September FAX-20 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007495719 A DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fix shaft of housing assembly with a vise. CAUTION: Protect shaft when fixing with a vise using aluminum or copper plates. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assembly from shaft. CAUTION: • Align drive shaft puller and drive shaft and remove them by pulling firmly and uniformly. • If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. Remove circular clip from shaft. Remove boot from shaft. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". B C FAX E JPDIG0151ZZ G ASSEMBLY 1. 2. F Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim. CAUTION: After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. H I J JPDIF0008ZZ 3. 4. Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly. CAUTION: • Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot from damage. • Never reuse boot and boot band. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. K L M N O JPDIF0009ZZ P Revision: 2011 September FAX-21 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip. 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly. Then assemble shaft with joint sub-assembly holding circular clip. JPDIF0305ZZ 7. 8. Install joint sub-assembly to shaft using plastic hammer. CAUTION: • Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. • Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. Apply the specified amount of grease into the boot inside from large diameter side of boot. Grease amount : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". RAC0049D 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown in the figure. L : Boot installation length CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” marks) on the shaft or joint sub-assembly, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting surface. 10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value shown below by inserting the suitable tool into inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot and discharging the inside air. Boot installation length JPDIF0222ZZ : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". CAUTION: • If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot. • Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) [SST: KV40107300 ( — )]. CAUTION: • Never reuse boot band. JPDIF0012ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-22 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Secure boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification as shown in the figure. A A : 7.0 mm (0.276 in) or less. B 12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft of housing assembly fixed. CAUTION: • Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. • Never reuse boot band. C JPDIF0268ZZ FAX TRANSAXLE SIDE TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) INFOID:0000000007495720 E DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Fix housing assembly with a vise. CAUTION: Protect housing assembly using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. Remove wheel side boot from joint sub-assembly. Refer to FAX-12, "WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation". Remove damper band, then remove dynamic damper from shaft of housing assembly. Remove boot bands, then remove boot from shaft of housing assembly. Remove circular clip from housing assembly. Remove dust shield from housing assembly. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". F G H I ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clean the old grease on housing assembly with paper waste. Install dust shield to housing assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Install circular clip to housing. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly. CAUTION: • Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot from damage. • Never reuse boot and boot band. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. Apply NISSAN genuine grease (refer to parts catalog) to housing assembly. Grease amount J K L M N : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". O JSDIA2232ZZ P Revision: 2011 September FAX-23 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown in the figure. L 8. : Boot installation length CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (with “*” marks) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the surface. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the value shown below by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. Boot installation length 9. JPDIF0144ZZ : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". CAUTION: • If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot. • Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. Install boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot bands. For one-touch clamp band • Install boot bands securely as shown in the figure. PDIA1188J For low profile type band 1. 2. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes to temporary installation. NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at first. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. JPDIF0157ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-24 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked with dotted circle) as shown in the figure. 10. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the housing assembly fixed. CAUTION: • If displacement occurs, reinstall band. • Never reuse boot band. A B C JPDIF0158ZZ FAX 11. Install dynamic damper, follow the procedure described below. a. Install dynamic damper and damper bands to shaft of housing assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse damper band. b. Install boot to the wheel side. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly". c. Securely dynamic damper with damper bands in the following specified position (A) when installing. A E F : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". G H JPDIF0178ZZ I • Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure. J K L PDIA1188J TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) INFOID:0000000007495721 M DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Fix housing assembly with a vise. CAUTION: Protect housing assembly using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. Remove wheel side boot from joint sub-assembly. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly". Remove boot bands, then remove boot from housing assembly. Remove support bearing, follow the procedure described below. Revision: 2011 September FAX-25 2012 QUEST N O P FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > a. Remove dust shield from housing. YAX002 b. Remove snap ring (1). JPDIF0073ZZ c. d. Press out bearing housing and support bearing from housing assembly. Remove dust shield from housing assembly. SFA693 e. Remove snap ring (1). JPDIF0177ZZ f. 5. Press out support bearing from bearing housing (1), using the drift (A) [SST: ST17130000 ( — )]. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection". JPDIF0313ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-26 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ASSEMBLY 1. Install dust shield to housing assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. 2. Install support bearing, follow the procedure described below. a. Press support bearing to bearing housing (1), using the drift (A) [SST: ST35271000 (J-26091)]. A B C FAX E JPDIF0314ZZ b. c. Install snap ring (1). CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. Press bearing housing and support bearing to housing assembly. F G H JPDIF0177ZZ d. Install snap ring (1). CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. I J K L JPDIF0073ZZ e. 3. M Install dust shields. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Clean the old grease on housing assembly with paper waste. N O P JPDIF0127ZZ 4. Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September FAX-27 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot from damage. • Never reuse boot and boot band. 5. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. 6. Apply NISSAN genuine grease (refer to parts catalog) to housing assembly. Grease amount : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". JSDIA2232ZZ 7. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown in the figure. L 8. : Boot installation length CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (with “*” marks) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the surface. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. Boot installation length 9. a. b. JPDIF0144ZZ : Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft". CAUTION: • If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot. • Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. Install boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot bands. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes to temporary installation. NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at first. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. JPDIF0157ZZ c. Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked with dotted circle) as shown in the figure. 10. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the housing assembly fixed. CAUTION: • If displacement occurs, reinstall band. • Never reuse boot band. 11. Install boot to the wheel side. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly". JPDIF0158ZZ Revision: 2011 September FAX-28 2012 QUEST FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Inspection INFOID:0000000007495722 A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. • Move joint up/down, left/right, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for significant looseness. • Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. • Check the support bearing bracket for cracks, deformation and other damage. B C INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. FAX Dynamic Damper (Left Side) Check damper for cracks or wear. Joint Sub-Assembly Check the following: • Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness. • The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material. • Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly. Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components. E F Housing assembly • Replace housing assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing assembly roller contact surface. • Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage. G Support Bearing (Right Side) Check bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions. H Bearing Housing (Right Side) Check for bearing housing, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard conditions. I INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. J Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FAX-29 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000007495723 Item Standard Axial end play 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000007495724 Standard Item Left side Grease quantity Boots installed length* Dimension of dynamic damper * Right side Wheel side 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz) Transaxle side 155 – 175 g (5.47 – 6.17 oz) Wheel side 158.6 mm (6.24 in) Transaxle side 163.67 mm (6.44 in) 237 – 243 mm (9.33 – 9.57 in) — *: For measuring position, refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly" (Wheel side), FAX23, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)" [Transaxle side (Left side)], FAX-25, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)" [Transaxle side (Right side)]. Revision: 2011 September FAX-30 2012 QUEST SUSPENSION SECTION FSU FRONT SUSPENSION A B C D FSU CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 2 Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 2 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ................................................ 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 5 Inspection .................................................................. 5 WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6 Inspection .................................................................. 6 Adjustment ................................................................ 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8 FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ................. 8 F Exploded View .......................................................... 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 9 Inspection ................................................................10 Disposal ...................................................................11 G TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 12 H Exploded View .........................................................12 Removal and Installation .........................................12 Inspection ................................................................12 I FRONT STABILIZER ........................................ 14 Exploded View .........................................................14 Removal and Installation .........................................14 Inspection ................................................................15 J FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 16 K Exploded View .........................................................16 Removal and Installation .........................................16 Inspection ................................................................16 L SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 18 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 18 Wheel Alignment .....................................................18 Ball Joint ..................................................................20 Wheelarch Height ....................................................20 N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495799 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007495800 When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to windshield. PIIB3706J Precautions for Suspension INFOID:0000000007495801 • When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. - Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. • After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment. • Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled, tighten as they are. Revision: 2011 September FSU-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495802 B The actual shapes of Kent-More tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. C Tool number (Kent-More No.) Tool name Description Disassembling and assembling strut ST35652000 ( — ) Strut attachment D FSU F ZZA0807D Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495803 G Tool name Description Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring H I S-NT717 Power tool J Loosening bolts and nuts K L PBIC0190E M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-3 2012 QUEST NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000007495804 NVH in WT section NVH in WT section NVH in FAX section NVH in BR section NVH in ST section TIRE ROAD WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT BRAKE STEERING NVH in FAX and FSU sections FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Judder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × Stabilizer bar fatigue Shake Incorrect wheel alignment × — × × FSU-6 × × × FSU-8, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16 Suspension looseness × — Spring fatigue × — × Parts interference × — × Bushing or mounting deterioration FSU-10 × Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection × × Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FRONT SUSPENSION × Noise Reference Symptom × Improper installation, looseness FSU-8, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16 Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: 2011 September FSU-4 2012 QUEST FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Inspection INFOID:0000000007495805 B Check the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal. C COMPONENT PART Ball Joint Axial End Play 1. 2. D Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Move axle side of transverse link in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no end play. FSU Axial end play : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint". CAUTION: • Never depress brake pedal when measuring. • Never perform with tires on level ground. • Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Never damage the installation position by applying excessive force. F G JSEIA0444ZZ STRUT ASSEMBLY H Check for oil leakage, damage, and replace if necessary. I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-5 2012 QUEST WHEEL ALIGNMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > WHEEL ALIGNMENT Inspection INFOID:0000000007495806 DESCRIPTION CAUTION: • Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted. • If camber, caster, or kingpin inclination angle is outside the standard, check front suspension parts for wear and damage. Replace suspect parts if a malfunction is detected. • Kingpin inclination angle is reference value, no inspection is required. Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions. NOTE: “Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. PRELIMINARY CHECK Check the following: • Tires for improper air pressure and wear. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". • Road wheels for runout. • Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection". • Transverse link ball joint axial end play. Refer to FSU-5, "Inspection". • Strut operation. • Each mounting part of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation. • Each of suspension member, strut assembly and transverse link for cracks, deformation and other damage. • Vehicle height (posture). GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS • A four-wheel thrust alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle. - The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle. - The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. • Check the machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. • When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Never use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. • Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with both “Rolling Compensation” method and optional “Jacking Compensation” method to “compensate” the alignment targets or head units. “Rolling Compensation” is the preferred method. - If using the “Rolling Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body. - If using the “Jacking Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. NOTE: Do not use the “Rolling Compensation” method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment. - Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you're using for more information. Adjustment INFOID:0000000007495807 TOE-IN • Loosen the steering outer socket, and then adjust the length using steering inner socket. Revision: 2011 September FSU-6 2012 QUEST WHEEL ALIGNMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Toe-in : Refer to FSU-18, "Wheel Alignment". A CAUTION: • Always evenly adjust both toe-in alternately and adjust the difference between the left and right to the standard. • Always fix the steering inner socket when tightening the steering outer socket. • After toe-in adjustment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". B C D FSU F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-7 2012 QUEST FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495808 JPEIA0136GB 1. Piston rod lock nut 2. Mounting insulator 3. Mounting bearing 4. Coil spring 5. Bound bumper 6. Lower rubber seat 7. Strut : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495809 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Separate stabilizer connecting rod from strut assembly. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". Remove strut mounting bolts and nuts from steering knuckle. : Vehicle front 6. 7. Remove cowl top extension. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolt of mounting insulator, and then remove strut assembly. JSEIA0392ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September FSU-8 2012 QUEST FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Install strut assembly with the protrusion (A) of mounting insulator faced outside of the vehicle. A : Vehicle front B • Never reuse strut mounting nut. • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection". • After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the strut. Refer to FSU-11, "Disposal". Disassembly and Assembly C JPEIA0094ZZ D INFOID:0000000007495810 DISASSEMBLY FSU CAUTION: Never damage strut assembly piston rod when removing components from strut assembly. 1. Install strut attachment (A) [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] to strut assembly and secure it in a vise. CAUTION: When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly, wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect from damage. F G H JPEIA0006ZZ 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Using a spring compressor (A) (commercial service tool), compress coil spring between spring upper seat and lower seat (strut assembly) until coil spring with a spring compressor is free. CAUTION: Be sure a spring compressor is securely attached to coil spring. Compress coil spring. Check coil spring with a spring compressor between spring upper seat and lower seat (strut assembly) is free. And then remove piston rod lock nut while securing the piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn. JPEIA0007ZZ Remove mounting insulator, mounting bearing, and bound bumper from strut. After removing coil spring with a spring compressor (commercial service tool), then gradually release a spring compressor. CAUTION: Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position does not move. Remove lower rubber seat. Remove strut attachment [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] from strut. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection". ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never damage strut assembly piston rod when installing components from strut assembly. 1. Install strut attachment [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] to strut and secure it in a vise. CAUTION: When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly, wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect from damage. 2. Install lower rubber seat. Revision: 2011 September FSU-9 2012 QUEST I J K L M N O P FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Apply soapy water to bound bumper. CAUTION: Never use machine oil. 4. Insert bound bumper into mounting insulator. 5. Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (commercial service tool), and install it onto strut assembly. CAUTION: • Be sure a spring compressor is securely attached to coil spring, before compress coil spring. • Align the lower end of coil spring (1) with “A” of lower rubber seat (2) as shown in the figure. • Set coil spring so that its paint marks are aligned with the positions of 1.25 turns and 2.25 turns from the bottom end of the coil spring. JPEIA0095ZZ 6. Check the location of protrusion (A) of the mounting insulator and install it with faced outside of the vehicle to the strut. : Vehicle front 7. Secure piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, then tighten piston rod lock nut with specified torque. CAUTION: Never reuse piston rod lock nut. JPEIA0094ZZ 8. Gradually release a spring compressor (A) (commercial service tool), and remove coil spring. CAUTION: Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position does not move. JPEIA0007ZZ 9. Remove the strut attachment (A) [SST: ST35652000 ( from strut assembly. — )] JPEIA0006ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495811 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Revision: 2011 September FSU-10 2012 QUEST FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary. A Strut • Strut for deformation, cracks or damage • Piston rod for damage, uneven wear or distortion • Oil leakage B Strut Mounting Insulator and bound bumper Check strut mounting insulator and bound bumper for cracks, wear or damage. C Coil Spring Check coil spring for cracks, wear or damage. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. D Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". FSU Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Disposal INFOID:0000000007495812 1. Set strut assembly horizontally to the ground with the piston rod fully extracted. 2. Drill 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top as shown in the figure to release gas gradually. CAUTION: • Wear eye protection (safety glasses). • Wear gloves. • Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas. NOTE: • Drill vertically in this direction show by arrow. • Directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets. • The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless. A 3. F G H I JPEIA0160ZZ J : 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in) Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times. CAUTION: Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-11 2012 QUEST TRANSVERSE LINK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > TRANSVERSE LINK Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495813 JPEIA0091GB 1. Transverse link 2. Front suspension member : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495814 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. • Left side: Refer to FAX-17, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation". • Right side: Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation". Separate transverse link from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View". Remove transverse link from suspension member. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Never reuse transverse link mounting nut. • Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495815 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary. Transverse Link • Transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage. • Ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage. Swing Torque 1. 2. Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding. Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement. Revision: 2011 September FSU-12 2012 QUEST TRANSVERSE LINK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Hook a spring balance (A) at cutout on ball stud (B). Confirm spring balance measurement value is within specifications when ball stud begins moving. Swing torque Measurement on spring balance A : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint". : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint" B C • If swing torque exceeds standard range, replace transverse link assembly. JPEIA0138ZZ D Axial End Play 1. 2. Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement. Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness. Axial end play FSU : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint". F • If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace transverse link assembly. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-13 2012 QUEST FRONT STABILIZER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT STABILIZER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495816 JPEIA0164GB 1. Stabilizer clamp 2. Stabilizer bushing 4. Front suspension member 5. Stabilizer connecting rod 3. Stabilizer bar : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495817 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation". Remove wheel sensor harness from strut assembly. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation". Remove stabilizer connecting rod. Remove drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolts ( ) of stabilizer clamp, and then remove stabilizer clamp and stabilizer bushing from front suspension member. Remove stabilizer bar. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FSU-15, "Inspection". WEIA0182E INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September FSU-14 2012 QUEST FRONT STABILIZER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Install stabilizer clamp and stabilizer bush with notch (A) and slit (B) faced forward of the vehicle ( ). A B C JPEIA0058ZZ D • To install stabilizer connecting rod (1), tighten the mounting nut with the hexagonal part (A) on the stabilizer connecting rod side fixed. • Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection". FSU F G JPEIA0252ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495818 H INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check stabilizer bar, stabilizer connecting rod, stabilizer bushing and stabilizer clamp for deformation, cracks or damage. Replace it if necessary. I INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-15 2012 QUEST FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495819 JPEIA0131GB 1. Front suspension member 2. Rebound stopper 3. Front suspension member stay : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495820 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove the engine and the transaxle assembly from the vehicle together with the front suspension member. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". Remove the following parts from front suspension member. • Engine assembly: Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". • Transaxle assembly: Refer to TM-163, "Removal and Installation". • Steering gear assembly: Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation". • Steering hydraulic line: Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View". • Stabilizer bar: Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". • Transverse link: Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation". Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection". INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495821 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Revision: 2011 September FSU-16 2012 QUEST FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check front suspension member for cracks, wear or damage. Replace it if necessary. A INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". B C D FSU F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-17 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000007495822 FOR USA MODELS Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 3° 55′ (3.92°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 40′ (4.67°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) Maximum 5° 25′ (5.41°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Left and right difference*1 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. FOR CANADA MODELS For 3.5S Grade Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 3° 50′ (3.84°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 35′ (4.58°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) Maximum 5° 20′ (5.33°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Left and right difference*1 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Revision: 2011 September –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) FSU-18 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard Item Total toe-in Distance Left side Right side Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) A B In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. C D *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. FSU For 3.5SV Grade Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) G –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 3° 50′ (3.84°) 4° 00′ (4.00°) Nominal 4° 35′ (4.58°) 4° 45′ (4.75°) Maximum 5° 20′ (5.33°) 5° 30′ (5.50°) Left and right difference*1 F H I –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) J K Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) L M Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. N For 3.5SL and 3.5LE Grade Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Revision: 2011 September O Standard Item FSU-19 –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) 2012 QUEST P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard Item Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum 3° 55′ (3.92°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 40′ (4.67°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) Maximum 5° 25′ (5.41°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Left and right difference*1 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. Ball Joint INFOID:0000000007495823 Item Standard Swing torque 0.5 – 4.9 N·m (0.06 – 0.49 kg-m, 5 – 43 in-lb) Measurement on spring balance 11.1 – 108.9 N (1.2 – 11.1 kg, 3 – 24 lb) Axial end play 0 mm (0 in) Wheelarch Height INFOID:0000000007495824 FOR USA MODELS Item Grade Standard 3.5SL 3.5LE Front (Hf) 3.5S 760 mm (29.92 in) 3.5SV 769 mm (30.28 in) 770 mm (30.31 in) Rear (Hr) 751 mm (29.57 in) 760 mm (29.92 in) 759 mm (29.88 in) WEIA0030E Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. FOR CANADA MODELS Revision: 2011 September FSU-20 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Item Standard Grade 3.5S Front (Hf) Rear (Hr) 3.5SV 760 mm (29.92 in) 752 mm (29.61 in) A 3.5SL 3.5LE 770 mm (30.31 in) 751 mm (29.57 in) B 760 mm (29.92 in) C D FSU WEIA0030E F Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September FSU-21 2012 QUEST Edition: September 2011 Publication No. SM2E-1E52U0 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX A GENERAL INFORMATION B ENGINE C ELECTRIC POWER TRAIN D TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE E SUSPENSION F BRAKES G STEERING H RESTRAINTS I VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER J BODY INTERIOR K BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY L DRIVER CONTROLS M ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. N DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA O CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE P MAINTENANCE GI EM LU CO EC FL EX STR ACC HBC HBB HBR EVC TMS EVB VC HCO CL TM DLN FAX RAX FSU RSU SCS WT BR PB BRC ST STC SB SBC SR SRC VTL HA HAC INT IP SE ADP DLK SEC GW PWC RF HD EXT BRM MIR EXL INL WW DEF HRN VSP PWO BCS LAN PCS CHG PG MWI WCS SN AV CCS DAS DMS MA General Information Engine Mechanical Engine Lubrication System Engine Cooling System Engine Control System Fuel System Exhaust System Starting System Accelerator Control System Hybrid Control System Hybrid Battery System Hybrid Brake System EV Control System Traction Motor System EV Battery System Vehicle Charging System High Voltage Cooling System Clutch Transaxle & Transmission Driveline Front Axle Rear Axle Front Suspension Rear Suspension Suspension Control System Road Wheels & Tires Brake System Parking Brake System Brake Control System Steering System Steering Control System Seat Belt Seat Belt Control System SRS Airbag SRS Airbag Control System Ventilation System Heater & Air Conditioning System Heater & Air Conditioning Control System Interior Instrument Panel Seat Automatic Drive Positioner Door & Lock Security Control System Glass & Window System Power Window Control System Roof Hood Exterior Body Repair Mirrors Exterior Lighting System Interior Lighting System Wiper & Washer Defogger Horn Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP) Power Outlet Body Control System LAN System Power Control System Charging System Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements Meter, Warning Lamp & Indicator Warning Chime System Sonar System Audio, Visual & Navigation System Cruise Control System Driver Assistance System Drive Mode System Maintenance A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P FOREWORD This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2012 NISSAN QUEST. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected. PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER! Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals. Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals. Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to: Nissan North America, Inc. Technical Service Information 39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200 Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331 FAX: (248) 488-3880 SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year: PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ): Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail: Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. Page number(s) Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. If no, what page number(s)? Please describe the issue or problem in detail: Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO Please comment: What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or repairing customer vehicles? DATE: DEALER: CITY: YOUR NAME: DEALER NO.: STATE/PROV./COUNTRY: POSITION: ADDRESS: ZIP/POSTAL CODE: QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST ENGINE TUNE-UP DATA (VQ35DE) Engine model PFP:00000 ELS0003W VQ35DE Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Idle speed CVT (In “P” or “N” position) rpm 650 ± 50 Ignition timing (BTDC at idle speed) CVT (In “P” or “N” position) 12° ± 2° Tensions of drive belt Auto adjustment by auto tensioner kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Radiator cap relief pressure Standard 122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 17.7 - 22.0) Limit 108 (1.1, 15.6) 2 Cooling system leakage testing pressure kPa (kg/cm , psi) Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm Spark plug 2012 156 (1.59, 22.6) Standard 1,275 (13.0, 185)/300 Minimum 981 (10.0, 142)/300 Make DENSO Standard type Gap FXE22HR11 Standard 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Limit 1.4 mm (0.055 in) FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT ELS0003X FOR USA MODELS Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference* Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) 1 Minimum 3° 55′ (3.92°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 40′ (4.67°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) Maximum 5° 25′ (5.41°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Left and right difference*1 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST 2012 FOR CANADA MODELS For 3.5S Grade Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 3° 50′ (3.84°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 35′ (4.58°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) 5° 20′ (5.33°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Maximum Left and right difference* Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) 1 –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum Toe-in Minimum Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. For 3.5SV Grade Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference*1 Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 3° 50′ (3.84°) 4° 00′ (4.00°) Nominal 4° 35′ (4.58°) 4° 45′ (4.75°) Maximum 5° 20′ (5.33°) 5° 30′ (5.50°) Left and right difference*1 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum Toe-in –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) 2 Measure value under unladen* conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST 2012 For 3.5SL and 3.5LE Grade Standard Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left side Right side Minimum –1° 00′ (–1.00°) –1° 15′ (–1.25°) Nominal –0° 15′ (–0.25°) –0° 30′ (–0.50°) 0° 30′ (0.50°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) Maximum 1 Left and right difference* Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 3° 55′ (3.92°) 4° 05′ (4.09°) Nominal 4° 40′ (4.67°) 4° 50′ (4.83°) 5° 25′ (5.41°) 5° 35′ (5.58°) Maximum 1 Left and right difference* Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) Minimum 12° 00′ (12.00°) Nominal 12° 45′ (12.75°) Maximum 13° 30′ (13.50°) Minimum Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in) Nominal In 0.6 mm (0.024 in) Maximum Toe-in –0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°) In 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) In 0° 01′ (0.02°) Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°) In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°) In 0° 05′ (0.08°) Measure value under unladen*2 conditions. *1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard. *2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT ELS0003Y FOR USA MODELS Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Standard Minimum –1° 06′ (–1.10°) Nominal –0° 36′ (–0.60°) Maximum –0° 06′ (–0.10°) Minimum In 1.2 mm (0.047 in) Nominal In 2.8 mm (0.110 in) Maximum In 4.4 mm (0.173 in) Minimum In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Nominal In 0° 07′ (0.12°) Maximum In 0° 11′ (0.18°) Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST 2012 FOR CANADA MODELS Item Standard Wheel size 16 inch Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) 18 inch Minimum –1° 05′ (–1.08°) Nominal –0° 35′ (–0.58°) Maximum –0° 05′ (–0.09°) Minimum In 0.8 mm (0.031 in) In 0.9 mm (0.035 in) Nominal In 2.4 mm (0.094 in) In 2.5 mm (0.098 in) Maximum In 4.0 mm (0.157 in) In 4.1 mm (0.161 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) Nominal In 0° 06′ (0.10°) Maximum In 0° 10′ (0.16°) Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. BRAKE PEDAL Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pedal height Standard 195.6 – 205.6 (7.70 – 8.09) Depressed brake pedal height [Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON] Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber Brake pedal play 105.0 (4.13) or more 0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.0772) 3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43) BRAKE BOOSTER Vacuum type Unit: mm (in) Item Input rod length Standard 127.0 – 128.0 (5.00 – 5.04) FRONT DISC BRAKE Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 26.0 (1.024) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.040 (0.0016) REAR DISC BRAKE Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 14.0 (0.551) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.050 (0.0020) QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST 2012 FREFILL CAPACITIES UNIT Liter US measure Fuel tank 75.6 20 gal Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) 11.3 12 qt With oil filter change 4.6 4-7/8 qt Without oil filter change 4.3 4-1/2 qt Dry engine (Overhaul) 5.3 5-5/8 qt CVT 10.2 10-6/8 qt 1.0 1-1/8 qt 0.25 7.1 fl oz 0.9 kg 1.98 lb Drain and refill Engine oil capacity Transmission Power steering system Air conditioning system Compressor oil Refrigerant GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION GI GENERAL INFORMATION GI B C D E CONTENTS F HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 3 PRECAUTION .............................................. 28 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 28 Description ................................................................ 3 Terms ........................................................................ 3 Units .......................................................................... 3 Contents .................................................................... 3 Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 4 Components .............................................................. 4 Description ...............................................................28 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................28 Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service .............28 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover....29 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) .............29 General Precautions ................................................29 Three Way Catalyst .................................................31 Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System .....................................................................31 Hoses ......................................................................31 Engine Oils ..............................................................32 Air Conditioning .......................................................32 Fuel ..........................................................................33 G LIFTING POINT ................................................. 34 L Commercial Service Tools .......................................34 Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift .......34 Board-On Lift ...........................................................35 M HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ..... 6 Description ................................................................ 6 How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis...... 6 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures ..................................................................... 7 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS ................ 9 Connector Symbols ................................................... 9 Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- ......................... 10 Connector Information ............................................. 12 ABBREVIATIONS ..............................................14 Abbreviation List ...................................................... 14 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ................................................................19 Description .............................................................. 19 Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) ........................................................................... 19 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS ................................................22 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.... 22 Tow Truck Towing ...................................................36 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) ...........36 J K N BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 38 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT .......................................................... 38 Work Flow ................................................................38 Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................38 How to Check Terminal ...........................................39 Intermittent Incident .................................................42 Circuit Inspection .....................................................45 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .....................23 Revision: 2011 September I TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 36 VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................ 23 Model Variation ....................................................... 23 Information About Identification or Model Code ...... 23 Dimensions ............................................................. 26 Wheels & Tires ........................................................ 27 H CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM ............. 50 GI-1 Description ...............................................................50 CONSULT Function and System Application*1 .......50 2012 QUEST O P CONSULT/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit .......................................................................... 51 Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM - ............................................................... 52 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 53 Revision: 2011 September ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................. 53 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection ................... 53 GI-2 2012 QUEST HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GI HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Description INFOID:0000000007492144 This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”. Terms B C INFOID:0000000007492145 • The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed. CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed. BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment. Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment. Units D E F INFOID:0000000007492146 • The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system. Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the standard tightening torque. G H “Example” Range I Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N·m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb) J Standard Drive Shaft Installation Bolt : 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) K Contents INFOID:0000000007492147 • A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab. • THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section. • THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system. • THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”). • THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-3 2012 QUEST HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions INFOID:0000000007492148 The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in the text and the service procedures. SAIA0519E Components INFOID:0000000007492149 • THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to perform repairs. The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG. Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration. Revision: 2011 September GI-4 2012 QUEST HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > GI B C D E JPFIA0511GB 1. Cap 2. Bleeder valve 3. 4. Piston seal 5. Piston 6. Piston boot 7. Sliding pin 8. Sliding pin boot 9. Bushing F Cylinder body G 10. Torque member : Apply rubber grease. H : Apply brake fluid. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) I : Always replace after every disassembly SYMBOLS J K L M N SAIA0749E O P Revision: 2011 September GI-5 2012 QUEST HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Description INFOID:0000000007492150 NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. • Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section. • After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. • Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. • When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. • Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors. • Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. • After accomplishing the Diagnosis Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, check that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000007492151 JPAIA0021GB 1. 2. 3. 4. Test group number and test group title • Test group number and test group title are shown in the upper portion of each test group. Work and diagnosis procedure • Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. Questions and results • Questions and required results are indicated in test group. Action • Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Revision: 2011 September GI-6 2012 QUEST HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures INFOID:0000000007492152 GI B C D E F G H JPAIA0982GB I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-7 2012 QUEST HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > JSAIA1461GB Revision: 2011 September GI-8 2012 QUEST HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector Symbols GI INFOID:0000000007807310 Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. • Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. • Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. • Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. B C D E F G H SAIA0257E I • Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. J K L M N O SGI363 Revision: 2011 September GI-9 2012 QUEST P HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- INFOID:0000000007807311 Each section includes wiring diagrams. JCAWA0150GB Description Number Item Description 1 Power supply • This means the power supply of fusible link or fuse. 2 Fuse • “/” means the fuse. 3 Current rating of fusible link/fuse • This means the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. 4 Number of fusible link/ fuse • This means the number of fusible link or fuse location. 5 Fusible link • “X” means the fusible link. 6 Connector number • Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed. • Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors. 7 Switch • This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position. 8 Circuit (Wiring) • This means the wiring. Revision: 2011 September GI-10 2012 QUEST HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > Number Item Description GI 9 Shielded line • The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire. 10 Connectors • This means that a transmission line bypasses two connectors or more. 11 Option abbreviation • This means the vehicle specifications which layouts the circuit between “ ”. 12 Relay • This shows an internal representation of the relay. 13 Optional splice • The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application. 14 Splice • The shaded circle “ 15 System branch • This shows that the circuit is branched to other systems. 16 Page crossing • This circuit continues to an adjacent page. 17 Component name • This shows the name of a component. 18 Terminal number • This means the terminal number of a connector. 19 Ground (GND) • This shows the ground connection. 20 Explation of option description • This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page. B C ” means the splice. D E F SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: • ignition switch is “OFF” • doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed • pedals are not depressed • parking brake is released G H I J K L M SGI860 N MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. • The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. O P Revision: 2011 September GI-11 2012 QUEST HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > • The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. JSAIA0017GB Connector Information INFOID:0000000007807312 CONNECTOR LIST Connector information and harness layout are described in “POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS” Section. Connector No. Harness Connector Information Harness Layout B Body harness PG-56, "B Body Harness" PG-46, "Body Harness" C Chassis harness PG-74, "C Chassis Harness" PG-48, "Chassis Harness" D Door harness PG-75, "D Door Harness" PG-49, "Door Harness" E Engine room harness PG-85, "E Engine Room Harness" PG-42, "Engine Room Harness" F Engine control harness PG-93, "F Engine Control Harness" PG-44, "Engine Control Harness" M Main harness PG-99, "M Main Harness" PG-45, "Main Harness" R Room lamp harness PG-116, "R Room Lamp Harness" PG-54, "Room Lamp Harness" Revision: 2011 September GI-12 2012 QUEST HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > HOW TO USE CONNECTOR INFORMATION GI B C D E JCAWA0152GB Description Number Item F Description 1 Connector number • Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed. • Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors. 2 Connector type • This means the connector number. Refer to PG-55, "How to Read Connector Type". 3 Terminal number • This means the terminal number of a connector. • This shows a code for the color of the wire. 4 Wire color H BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (Violet) = Purple GY or GR = Gray SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BG = Beige I J • When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe 5 Connector G K • This means the connector information. • This unit-side is described by the connector symbols. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-13 2012 QUEST ABBREVIATIONS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000007492156 The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: A ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION A/C Air conditioner A/C Air conditioning A/F sensor Air fuel ratio sensor A/T Automatic transaxle/transmission ABS Anti-lock braking system ACCS ACL AP Advance climate control system Air cleaner Accelerator pedal APP Accelerator pedal position ATF Automatic transmission fluid AV Audio visual AWD All wheel drive B ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION BARO Barometric pressure BCM Body control module BLSD Brake limited slip differential BPP Brake pedal position BSW Blind spot warning C ABBREVIATION CKP CL DESCRIPTION Crankshaft position Closed loop CMP Camshaft position CPP Clutch pedal position CTP Closed throttle position CVT Continuously variable transaxle/transmission D ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION D1 Drive range first gear D2 Drive range second gear D3 Drive range third gear D4 Drive range fourth gear DCA Distance control assist DDS Downhill drive support DFI Direct fuel injection system DLC Data link connector DTC Diagnostic trouble code Revision: 2011 September GI-14 2012 QUEST ABBREVIATIONS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > E ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION E/T Exhaust temperature EBD Electric brake force distribution EC Engine control ECL Engine coolant level ECM Engine control module ECT Engine coolant temperature ECV Electrical control valve EEPROM B C Engine fuel temperature EGR Exhaust gas recirculation EGRT Exhaust gas recirculation temperature EGT Exhaust gas temperature EOP Engine oil pressure E F Exhaust pressure EPR Exhaust pressure regulator EPS Electronically controlled power steering ESP Electronic stability program system EVAP canister EVSE EXC D Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EFT EP GI G H Evaporative emission canister Electric vehicle supply equipment Exhaust control I F ABBREVIATION FC FCW DESCRIPTION Fan control J Forward collision warning FIC Fuel injector control FP Fuel pump FR Front FRP Fuel rail pressure FRT Fuel rail temperature FTP Fuel tank pressure FTT Fuel tank temperature K L M G ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION GND Ground GPS Global positioning system GST Generic scan tool N O H ABBREVIATION HBMC DESCRIPTION HDD Hard disk drive HO2S Heated oxygen sensor HOC Heated oxidation catalyst HPCM P Hydraulic body-motion control system Hybrid power train control module Revision: 2011 September GI-15 2012 QUEST ABBREVIATIONS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > I ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION I/M Inspection and maintenance IA Intake air IAC Idle air control IAT Intake air temperature IBA Intelligent brake assist IC Ignition control ICC Intelligent cruise control ICM Ignition control module IPDM E/R Intelligent power distribution module engine room ISC Idle speed control ISS Input shaft speed K ABBREVIATION KS DESCRIPTION Knock sensor L ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION LBC Li-ion battery controller LCD Liquid crystal display LCU Local control unit LDP Lane departure prevention LDW Lane departure warning LED Light emitting diode LH Left-hand LIN Local interconnect network M ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION M/T Manual transaxle/transmission MAF Mass airflow MAP Manifold absolute pressure MDU Multi display unit MI Malfunction indicator MIL Malfunction indicator lamp N ABBREVIATION NOX DESCRIPTION Nitrogen oxides O ABBREVIATION O2 DESCRIPTION Oxygen O2S Oxygen sensor OBD On board diagnostic OC Oxidation catalytic converter OD Overdrive OL Open loop OSS Output shaft speed Revision: 2011 September GI-16 2012 QUEST ABBREVIATIONS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > P ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION P/S Power steering PBR Potentio balance resistor PCV Positive crankcase ventilation PNP Park/Neutral position PSP Power steering pressure PTC Positive temperature coefficient PTO Power takeoff PWM Pulse width modulation GI B C D R ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION RAM Random access memory RAS Rear active steer RH Right-hand ROM Read only memory RPM Engine speed RR E F G Rear S ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. SCK Serial clock SDS Service Data and Specifications SRT System readiness test SST Special Service Tools H I J T ABBREVIATION TC DESCRIPTION Transmission control module TCS Traction control system TCU Telematics communication unit TP TPMS K Turbocharger TCM L Throttle position Tire pressure monitoring system TSS Turbine shaft speed TWC Three way catalytic converter M N U ABBREVIATION USS DESCRIPTION Uphill start support O V ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION VCM Vehicle control module VDC Vehicle dynamics control system VIN Vehicle identification number VSS Vehicle speed sensor Revision: 2011 September P GI-17 2012 QUEST ABBREVIATIONS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > W ABBREVIATION WOT DESCRIPTION Wide open throttle 1 ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION 11 1st range first gear 12 1st range second gear 1GR First gear 2 ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION 21 2nd range first gear 22 2nd range second gear 2GR Second gear 2WD 2-wheel drive 3 ABBREVIATION 3GR DESCRIPTION Third gear 4 ABBREVIATION 4GR DESCRIPTION Fourth gear 4WAS Four wheel active steer 4WD Four wheel drive 5 ABBREVIATION 5GR DESCRIPTION Fifth gear 6 ABBREVIATION 6GR DESCRIPTION Sixth gear 7 ABBREVIATION 7GR DESCRIPTION Seventh gear Revision: 2011 September GI-18 2012 QUEST TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS GI Description INFOID:0000000007492157 This vehicle has both new standard based on ISO* and previous standard bolts/nuts. There are some differences between these two types of bolts/ nuts; shape of the head, grade of strength, hexagonal width across flats and the standard tightening torque. • For guidance in discriminating, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)". • The new standard machine screws and tapping screws have a head of ISO standard torx recess. • If the tightening torque is not described in the description or figure, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)". *ISO: International Organization for Standardization Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) PREVIOUS STANDARD 4T 7T 9T E F Tightening torque (Without lubricant) Hexagonal width across flats mm Pitch mm M6 6.0 10 M8 8.0 12 Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt H N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62 1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 — 1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 — 1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — 1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 — M10 10.0 14 M12 12.0 17 M14 14.0 19 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 — M6 6.0 10 1.0 9 0.92 7 80 11 1.1 8 97 1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 — 1.0 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 — 1.5 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — 1.25 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — 1.75 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 — 1.25 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 — M8 8.0 12 M10 10.0 14 M12 12.0 17 M14 14.0 19 1.5 130 13 96 — 170 17 125 — M6 6.0 10 1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 — 1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.0 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.5 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 — 1.25 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 — 1.75 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 — 1.25 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 — 1.5 170 17 125 — 210 21 155 — M8 8.0 12 M10 10.0 14 M12 12.0 17 M14 14.0 19 CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September D G Bolt diameter mm Bolt size C INFOID:0000000007492158 CAUTION: • The special parts are excluded. • The bolts/nuts in these tables have a strength (discrimination) number/symbol assigned to the head or the like. As to the relation between the strength grade in these tables and the strength (discrimination) number/symbol, refer to “DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS”. Grade (Strength grade) B GI-19 2012 QUEST I J K L M N O P TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > The parts with aluminum or the cast iron washer surface/thread surface are excluded. NEW STANDARD BASED ON ISO Grade (Strength grade) 4.8 (Without lubricant) 4.8 (With lubricant) 8.8 (With lubricant) 10.9 (With lubricant) Tightening torque Bolt diameter mm Hexagonal width across flats mm Pitch mm M6 6.0 10 M8 8.0 13 M10 10.0 16 Bolt size Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62 1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 — 1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 — 1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — 1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 — M12 12.0 18 M14 14.0 21 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 — M6 6.0 10 1.0 4 0.41 3 35 5.5 0.56 4 49 M8 8.0 13 1.25 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 — 1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 — M10 10.0 16 1.5 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 — 1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 — 1.75 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 — 1.25 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 — M12 12.0 18 M14 14.0 21 1.5 65 6.6 48 — 80 8.2 59 — M6 6.0 10 1.0 8 0.82 6 71 10 1.0 7 89 M8 8.0 13 1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 — 1.0 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 — M10 10.0 16 M12 12.0 18 M14 14.0 M6 1.5 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 — 1.25 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 — 1.75 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 — 1.25 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 — 21 1.5 120 12 89 — 140 14 103 — 6.0 10 1.0 10 1.0 7 89 12 1.2 9 106 M8 8.0 13 1.25 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 — 1.0 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 — M10 10.0 16 M12 12.0 18 M14 14.0 21 1.5 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 — 1.25 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 — 1.75 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 — 1.25 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 — 1.5 160 16 118 — 180 18 133 — CAUTION: 1. Use tightening torque with lubricant for the new standard bolts/nuts in principle. Friction coefficient stabilizer is applied to the new standard bolts/nuts. 2. However, use tightening torque without lubricant for the following cases. Friction coefficient stabilizer is not applied to the following bolts/nuts. Grade 4.8, M6 size bolt, Conical spring washer installed Paint removing nut (Size M6 and M8) for fixing with weld bolt Revision: 2011 September GI-20 2012 QUEST TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS GI B C D E F G H I J K L M N SAIA0453E O P Revision: 2011 September GI-21 2012 QUEST RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS < HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants INFOID:0000000007492159 Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant. 1 2 3 6 Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos. Rear View Mirror Adhesive Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to windows. 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844 Anaerobic Liquid Gasket For metal-to-metal flange sealing. Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications. 999MP-AM001P 99998-50503 Permatex 51813 and 51817 High Performance Thread Sealant Provides instant sealing on any threaded straight or parallel threaded fitting. (Thread sealant only, no locking ability.) • Do not use on plastic. 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521 99998-50506 (Ultra Grey) Permatex Ultra Grey 82194; Three Bond 1207,1215, 1216, 1217F, 1217G and 1217H Nissan RTV Part No. 999MP-A7007 999MP-AM003P (Ultra Grey) Silicone RTV Gasket Maker for Maxima/ Quest 5-speed automatic transmission (RE5F22A) 5 Nissan Canada Part No. (Canada) Purpose Gasket Maker 4 Nissan North America Part No. (USA) Product Description High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Blue) Revision: 2011 September Threadlocker Threadlocker (service tool removable) – 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM005P GI-22 – Three Bond 1281B or exact equivalent in its quality 999MP-AM004P Permatex 27200; Three Bond 1360, 1360N, 1305 N&P, 1307N, 1335, 1335B, 1363B, 1377C, 1386B, D&E and 1388 Loctite 648 999MP-AM005P Permatex 24200, 24206, 24240, 24283 and 09178; Three Bond 1322, 1322N, 1324 D&N, 1333D, 1361C, 1364D, 1370C and 1374 2012 QUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < VEHICLE INFORMATION > VEHICLE INFORMATION GI IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Model Variation Destination Body INFOID:0000000007492160 Engine Axle Handle Transmission USA 4-door wagon VQ35DE 2WD LHD Canada CVT Grade Model 3.5S VLJALLZ-EU7 3.5SV VLJALRZ-EU7 3.5SL VLJALPZ-EU7 3.5LE VLJALGZ-EU7 3.5S VLJALLZ-EN7 3.5SV VLJALRZ-EN7 3.5SL VLJALPZ-EN7 3.5LE VLJALGZ-EN7 B C D E F Model variation code (Prefix and suffix designations) G H I J K JSAIA1903GB Information About Identification or Model Code L INFOID:0000000007492161 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-23 2012 QUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < VEHICLE INFORMATION > JSAIA1703ZZ 1. Vehicle identification number plate 2. Emission control information label 3. Air conditioner specification label 4. FMVSS certification label / CMVSS certification label 5. Tire and loading information label 6. Vehicle identification numbe (Chassis number) VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT JSAIA1901GB CERTIFICATION LABEL FMVSS Certification Label Revision: 2011 September GI-24 2012 QUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < VEHICLE INFORMATION > GI B C D E JSAIA1700ZZ 1. MFR Month/Year 2. Gross vehicle weight rating 3. Gross axle weight ratihng (Front) 4. Tire size 5. Wheel size 6. Tire inflation pressure 7. Gross axle weight rating (Rear) 8. Vehicle identification number 9. Verification model code 10. Body color number 11. Trim color number 12. Transmission type 13. Axle type 14. Engine type 15. Engine displacement F G H 16. Vin bar code CMVSS Certification Label I J K L M N JSAIA1701ZZ 1. MFR Month/Year 2. Gross vehicle weight rating 3. Gross axle weight ratihng (Front) 4. Tire size 5. Wheel size 6. Tire inflation pressure 7. Gross axle weight rating (Rear) 8. Vehicle identification number 9. Verification model code 10. Body color number 11. Trim color number 12. Transmission type 13. Axle type 14. Engine type 15. Engine displacement P 16. Vin bar code ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER Revision: 2011 September GI-25 O 2012 QUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < VEHICLE INFORMATION > : Vehicle front JPAIA0388ZZ AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBER : Vehicle front JPAIA0389ZZ Dimensions INFOID:0000000007492162 Unit: mm (in) 5,100 (200.8)*1 Overall length 5,110 (201.2)*2 Overall width 1,970 (77.6) 1,815 (71.5)*3 Overall height 1,855 (73.0)*4 1,730 (68.1)*5 Front tread 1,720 (67.7)*6 1,730 (68.1)*5 Rear tread 1,720 (67.7)*6 Wheelbase 3,000 (118.1) *1: Without front licence plate bracket *2: With front licence plate bracket *3: Without roof rail *4: With roof rail *5: 16-inch tire equipped models *6: 18-inch tire equipped models Revision: 2011 September GI-26 2012 QUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < VEHICLE INFORMATION > Wheels & Tires INFOID:0000000007492163 GI Tire 16 inch Conventional P225/65R16 99T Road wheel (Steel) Size Road wheel (Aluminum) Size Offset Offset Tire 18 inch Road wheel (Aluminum) 16 inch Road wheel (Steel) B 50 mm (1.97 in) 16 × 7J 50 mm (1.97 in) C P235/55R18 99T Size Offset 18 × 7J D 55 mm (2.17 in) T135/80D16 101M T135/90D16 102M Tire Spare 16 × 6-1/2JJ Size Offset E 16 × 4T 30 mm (1.18 in) F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-27 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Description INFOID:0000000007492164 Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section. Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492165 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service INFOID:0000000007492166 WARNING: Comply with the following warnings to prevent any serious accident. • Disconnect the battery cable (negative terminal) or the power supply fuse before installing, removing, or touching the xenon headlamp (bulb included). The xenon headlamp contains high-voltage generated parts. • Never work with wet hands. • Check the xenon headlamp ON-OFF status after assembling it to the vehicle. Never turn the xenon headlamp ON in other conditions. Connect the power supply to the vehicle-side connector. (Turning it ON outside the lamp case may cause fire or visual impairments.) • Never touch the bulb glass immediately after turning it OFF. It is extremely hot. CAUTION: Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction. • Install the xenon bulb securely. (Insufficient bulb socket installation may melt the bulb, the connector, the housing, etc. by high-voltage leakage or corona discharge.) • Never perform HID circuit inspection with a tester. • Never touch the xenon bulb glass with hands. Never put oil and grease on it. • Dispose of the used xenon bulb after packing it in thick vinyl without breaking it. • Never wipe out dirt and contamination with organic solvent (thinner, gasoline, etc.). Revision: 2011 September GI-28 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007492167 GI When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to windshield. B C D PIIB3706J Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) E INFOID:0000000007492168 CAUTION: Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds. Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds. General Precautions F G INFOID:0000000007492169 H • Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. I J K SGI285 L • Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. • When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder. M N SGI231 O P Revision: 2011 September GI-29 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > • Before starting repairs which do not require battery power: Turn off ignition switch. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. • If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of radio and each control unit is erased. SEF289H • To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. • Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an appropriate manner. • Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. • Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent prior to inspection or assembly. • Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. • Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set. • Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence. • Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM). Static electricity may damage internal electronic components. • After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection. • Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual. • Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required. • Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. • When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems, check all affected lines for leakage. SGI233 JPAIA0335ZZ • Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. SGI234 WARNING: To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, never carelessly disconnect the harness connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module) Revision: 2011 September GI-30 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and TM sections. GI Three Way Catalyst INFOID:0000000007492170 If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. • Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. • When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. • Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System INFOID:0000000007492171 • Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the multiport fuel injection system or ECM: Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM. • Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure. • Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow sensor. B C D E F G H SGI787 Hoses INFOID:0000000007492172 I HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION • To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with tapered tool or screwdriver. J K L SMA019D • To reinstall the rubber hose securely, check that hose insertion length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose stopper.) M N O P SMA020D HOSE CLAMPING Revision: 2011 September GI-31 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > • If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at that position. • Discard old clamps; replace with new ones. SMA021D • After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. SMA022D Engine Oils INFOID:0000000007492173 Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS • • • • • • • • • • • • Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. Do not put oily rags in pockets. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Air Conditioning INFOID:0000000007492174 Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to HA section “REFRIGERANT” for specific instructions. Revision: 2011 September GI-32 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > Fuel INFOID:0000000007492175 GI Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). B CAUTION: • Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage. • Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. • Do not use E-85 fuel in the vehicle. The vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-33 2012 QUEST LIFTING POINT < PRECAUTION > LIFTING POINT Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007492176 Tool name Description Board on attachment S-NT001 Safety stand attachment S-NT002 CAUTION: • Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. • Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a mission jack or equivalent. • Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a mission jack or equivalent. • Be careful not to smash or never do anything that would affect piping parts. Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift INFOID:0000000007492177 WARNING: • Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Check to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. • Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. • Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. • When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. • When setting the lift arm, never allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. Revision: 2011 September GI-34 2012 QUEST LIFTING POINT < PRECAUTION > GI B C D E F JMAIA0349ZZ 1. Safety stand point and lift up point (front) 2. 4. Garage jack point (rear) Safety stand point and lift up point (rear) 3. Garage jack point (front) G CAUTION: There is canister just behind Garage jack point rear. Jack up carefully. Board-On Lift H INFOID:0000000007492178 CAUTION: Check vehicle is empty when lifting. • The board-on lift attachment (A) set at front end of vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. • Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. I J : Vehicle front K Size of attachment L: 200 mm (7.87 in), W: 90 mm (3.54 in), H: 110 mm (4.33 in) L M JMAIA0295ZZ • When using lift attachment (B), set lift attachment so that its width center contacts to side sill as shown in the figure. N : Vehicle front O Size of attachment L: 1400 mm (55.12 in), W: 120 mm (4.72 in), H: 100 mm (3.94 in) P JMAIA0005ZZ Revision: 2011 September GI-35 2012 QUEST TOW TRUCK TOWING < PRECAUTION > TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing INFOID:0000000007492179 CAUTION: • All applicable state or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. • It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. • Always attach safety chains before towing. • When towing, check that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. • Never tow a CVT model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 2WD MODELS JMAIA0233ZZ NISSAN recommends that vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or that a dolly be used as illustrated. CAUTION: • Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. • When towing CVT models with the front wheels on towing dollies: - Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. - Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position. • When the battery of vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, your vehicle should be towed with the front wheels on towing dollies or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck. • When towing two wheel drive CVT model with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake. Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) INFOID:0000000007492180 FRONT Securely install the vehicle recovery hook stored with jacking tools. Check that the hook is properly secured in the stored place after use. WARNING: • Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Revision: 2011 September GI-36 2012 QUEST TOW TRUCK TOWING < PRECAUTION > • Never spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. GI CAUTION: • Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle recovery hooks or main structural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. B • Never use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks. • Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle. • Pulling devices should be routed so they never touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or C cooling systems. • Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. D E F JMAIA0348ZZ G REAR WARNING: • Rear hook is not available. H I J JMAIA0286ZZ K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-37 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492181 WORK FLOW SGI838 STEP DESCRIPTION Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred. The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: STEP 1 WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio). WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency. WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation. HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction). Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. STEP 2 Operate the system, road test if necessary. Verify the parameter of the incident. If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”. STEP 3 Get the proper diagnosis materials together including: • Power Supply Routing • System Operation Descriptions • Applicable Service Manual Sections • Check for any Service Bulletins Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments. STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts. STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component. STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Check you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps. Control Units and Electrical Parts INFOID:0000000007492182 PRECAUTIONS • • • • Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. Install only parts specified for a vehicle. Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. Revision: 2011 September GI-38 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > • Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. • Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. • Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. • Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. • Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. GI B C SAIA0255E D • When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. • When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. E F G H I J SEF348N How to Check Terminal K INFOID:0000000007492183 L CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT • Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. • The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-39 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J38751-95NI) Connector and terminal pin kit (NISSAN) (J38751-95INF) Connector and terminal pin kit (INFINITI) (J42992-98KIT) OBD and terminal repair kit (J42992-2000UPD) OBD-II Connector Kit Update Description WAIA0004E WAIA0005E HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS • Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. • The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with “T” pin. • If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. • Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. SGI841 Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL • There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. SEL265V Revision: 2011 September GI-40 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > • Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. GI B C SEL266V D MALE TERMINAL • Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin. CAUTION: Never bend terminal. E F G SEL267V How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal • An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. • If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. NOTE: Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. H I J K L SEL270V 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. CAUTION: Never force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. M N O SEL271V Revision: 2011 September GI-41 2012 QUEST P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. SEL272V • If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. SEL273V Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION • Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. • The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, check the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION • The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. SEL275V Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. SEL330V Intermittent Incident INFOID:0000000007492184 DESCRIPTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The fol- Revision: 2011 September GI-42 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > lowing section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. GI The section is broken into the six following topics: • Vehicle vibration • Heat sensitive • Freezing • Water intrusion • Electrical load • Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. Connector & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensor & Relay Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. B C D E F G H I J K L SGI839 Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: • Connectors not fully seated. • Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. • Wires laying across brackets or moving components. • Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. • Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas Revision: 2011 September GI-43 2012 QUEST M N O P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. HEAT SENSITIVE • The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. • To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. CAUTION: Never heat components above 60°C (140°F). • If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. JPAIA0733GB FREEZING • The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. • There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Check it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. • The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. SGI843 WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. CAUTION: Never spray water directly on any electrical components. SGI844 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. SGI845 COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Revision: 2011 September GI-44 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000007492185 GI DESCRIPTION • In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. • You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. B C D There are two types of shorts. SHORT • SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. • SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to GI-39, "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. E F TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. G H I J SGI846-A Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Check to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. • Disconnect the battery negative cable. • Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) • Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. • Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) • Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) • Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. • Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. • Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. • With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage: open is further down the circuit than SW1. Revision: 2011 September GI-45 2012 QUEST K L M N O P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > no voltage: open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). • Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage: open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage: open is between SW1 and relay (point B). • Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage: open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage: open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. SGI847-A Resistance Check Method • Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. • Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. • Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. • With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity: short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity: short is further down the circuit than SW1. • Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity: short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity: short is further down the circuit than the relay. • Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity: short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity: check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method • Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. • Turn the ignition switch to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). • With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage: short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage: short is further down the circuit than SW1. • With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage: short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage: short is further down the circuit than the relay. • With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage: short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage: retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION • Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. • Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. Revision: 2011 September GI-46 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > • When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. GI - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. B - Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Check all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet check no ground wires have excess wire insulation. C • For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section. D E F G H SGI853 I VOLTAGE DROP TESTS • Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. • Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. • Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. • If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method • Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. • Operate the circuit. • The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit. J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-47 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. SGI974 Measuring Voltage Drop — Step-by-Step • The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”). • Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage. • The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. • The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. SAIA0258E CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST System Description • When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. CASE 1 MGI034A Revision: 2011 September GI-48 2012 QUEST SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < BASIC INSPECTION > INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Terminal No. + 1 2 − Description Signal name Body ground Switch Body ground Lamp Value (Approx.) In case of high resistance such as single strand (V) * Switch ON Battery voltage Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example) Switch OFF 0V Switch ON Battery voltage Switch OFF 0V Condition Input/ Output Input Output GI B Approx. 0 Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp) C Approx. 0 • The voltage value is based on the body ground. • *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. D E CASE 2 F G H MGI035A INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Terminal No. + − Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output 1 Body ground Lamp Output 2 Body ground Switch Input Value (Approx.) In case of high resistance such as single strand (V) * I Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp) J Switch ON 0V Switch OFF Battery voltage Switch ON 0V Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example) Switch OFF 5V Approx. 5 Battery voltage K • The voltage value is based on the body ground. • *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-49 2012 QUEST CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM < BASIC INSPECTION > CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000007492186 • When CONSULT/GST is connected with a data link connector (A) equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. 1 : Instrument lower panel LH • Refer to “CONSULT Software Operation Manual” for more information. JSAIA1705ZZ CONSULT Function and System Application*1 INFOID:0000000007492187 FUNCTION Mode Function All DTC Reading Display all DTCs or diagnostic items that all ECUs are recording and judging. Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by diagram. CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor It monitors the status of CAN communication. Active Test Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system. Function Test This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engines, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available. Configuration Function to READ/WRITE vehicle configuration. Special Function Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed. All DTC Reading Work Support Self Diagnostic Results Data Monitor CAN Diagnosis CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor Active Test DTC & SRT confirmation ECU Identification Function Test Configuration Special Function SYSTEM APPLICATION*1 ENGINE x x x x x x x x x x - - TRANSMISSION x x x x x x - - x x - x ABS x x x x x x x - x x - - AIR BAG x - x - x - - - - x - x IPDM E/R x - x x x x x - x - - - BCM x x x x x x x - x - x - System Revision: 2011 September GI-50 2012 QUEST CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM Work Support Self Diagnostic Results Data Monitor CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor Active Test DTC & SRT confirmation ECU Identification Function Test MULTI AV x x x x x x - - x - x x METER / M&A x - x x x x - - - - - x AUTO BACK DOOR x - x x x x - - x - - - AUTO SLIDE DOOR x - x x x x x - x - - - AUTO SLIDE DOOR RIGHT x - x x x x x - x - - - AUTO DRIVE POS. x x x x x x x - x - - - EPS x - x x x x - - x - - - BSW x - x x x x x - x - - - SIDE RADAR LEFT x - x x x x x - x - - - SIDE RADAR RIGHT x - x x x x x - x - - - OCCUPANT DETECTION - x - - - - - - - - - - Special Function GI Configuration System CAN Diagnosis All DTC Reading < BASIC INSPECTION > B C D E F G H x: Applicable *1: If GST application is equipped, functions in accordance with SAE J1979 and ISO 15031-5 can be used. CONSULT/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INFOID:0000000007492188 INSPECTION PROCEDURE I J If the CONSULT/GST cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items. Symptom Check item CONSULT/GST cannot access any system. • CONSULT/GST DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8 and 16) and ground circuit (Terminal 4 and 5) CONSULT cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.) • Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) • Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) • Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". K NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT access to other systems. If the GST cannot operate properly, check the circuit based on the information of SAE J1962 and ISO 150313. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-51 2012 QUEST CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM < BASIC INSPECTION > Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000007492189 JRAWC0061GB Revision: 2011 September GI-52 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection GI B INFOID:0000000007492190 SYSTEM ITEM Temperature setting trimmer (Front) HAC-73, "Temperature Setting Trimmer (Front)" Temperature setting trimmer (Rear) HAC-74, "Temperature Setting Trimmer (Rear)" Foot position setting trimmer HAC-75, "Foot Position Setting Trimmer" Inlet port memory function (FRE)*1 — Inlet port memory function (REC)*1 — Exhaust gas / outside odor detecting gas sensor sensitivity adjustment function*2 Auto intake switch interlocking movement change*2 Clean switch interlocking movement change*1 D E F HAC-76, "Exhaust Gas/Outside Odor Detecting Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Function" G HAC-76, "AUTO Intake Switch Interlocking Movement Change Function" H — I Automatic drive positioner Automatic drive positioner system ADP-38, "Description" Power window control Power window control system PWC-25, "Description" Sunroof system*1 Sunroof system — Sunshade system*1 Sunshade system — Rear view monitor Rear view monitor predictive course line center position adjustment — Around view monitor*1 Predictive course line center position adjustment — Automatic sliding door sys- C HAC-75, "Inlet Port Memory Function" Inlet port memory function Automatic air conditioning system REFERENCE tem*1 Automatic sliding door system Automatic back door system*1 Automatic back door system Engine oil level read*1 Engine oil level read J K DLK-136, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM : Description" L DLK-137, "Description" M — *1: Not equipped. *2: With ACCS (Advanced climate control system) N O P Revision: 2011 September GI-53 2012 QUEST BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY SECTION GW GLASS & WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................17 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 SIDE WINDOW GLASS .................................... 18 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 2 Handling for Adhesive and Primer ............................ 2 Exploded View .........................................................18 Removal and Installation .........................................19 Inspection ................................................................20 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tools .............................................. 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 4 F G BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS ...................... 21 H Exploded View .........................................................21 Removal and Installation .........................................22 Inspection ................................................................25 I FRONT DOOR GLASS ..................................... 26 Exploded View .........................................................26 Removal and Installation .........................................26 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................27 J FRONT REGULATOR ....................................... 28 GW Work Flow ................................................................. 4 Inspection Procedure ................................................ 6 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 Exploded View .........................................................28 Removal and Installation .........................................28 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................29 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................29 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 10 SLIDE DOOR GLASS ....................................... 31 WINDSHIELD GLASS ........................................10 Exploded View .........................................................31 Removal and Installation .........................................31 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................32 M SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR ............................. 33 N Exploded View ........................................................ 10 Removal and Installation ......................................... 11 Inspection ................................................................ 14 OPERA WINDOW ..............................................15 Exploded View ........................................................ 15 Removal and Installation ......................................... 16 Exploded View .........................................................33 Removal and Installation .........................................33 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................34 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................34 L O P Revision: 2011 September GW-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495991 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007495992 When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to windshield. PIIB3706J Handling for Adhesive and Primer INFOID:0000000007495993 • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. • Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder. • Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found, do not use it. • If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with soap. • When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual. Revision: 2011 September GW-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495994 B The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. C Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description D (J-39570) Chassis ear E Locates the noise F SIIA0993E G (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairs the cause of noise H SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495995 Tool name Description I J GW Engine ear Locates the noise L SIIA0995E M Remover tool Removes clips, pawls and metal clips N JMKIA3050ZZ O P Revision: 2011 September GW-3 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495996 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer comments. Refer to GW-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a test drive with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so that the customer, service adviser, and technician use the same language when describing the noise. • Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact / fast movement / brought on by road conditions / hard surfaces = high-pitched noise / softer surfaces = low-pitched noises / edge to surface = chirping • Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact / slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement / pitch dependent on materials / often brought on by activity. • Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include fast repeated contact / vibration or similar movement / loose parts/missing clip or fastener / incorrect clearance. • Knock – (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounds / sometimes repeating / often brought on by driver action. • Tick – (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials / loose components / can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock / dull sounds often brought on by activity. • Buzz – (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle / firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level varies depending upon the person. A noise that a technician may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to a customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE Revision: 2011 September GW-4 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following items: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to the concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis ear: J-39570, engine ear, and mechanics stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • Removing the component(s) in the area that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • Tapping or pushing/pulling the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component(s) with excessive force, otherwise the noise is eliminated only temporarily. • Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. • Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise. • Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to GW-6, "Inspection Procedure". A B C D E F 1. H I J GW REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the components, if possible. Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape, or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. • 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in) • 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in) • 76884-71L02: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. • 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in) • 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.181 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in) FELT CLOTHTAPE Revision: 2011 September G GW-5 2012 QUEST L M N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. • 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad • 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that is visible or does not fit. Only lasts a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Used when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Used to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR After repair is complete, test drive the vehicle to confirm that the cause of noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007495997 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the recheck of repair becomes impossible. CENTER CONSOLE Components to check include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Check the following items: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon connection to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping, moving the components, or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer. In addition check for the following items: Revision: 2011 September GW-6 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > 1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing, or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof / headlining area can often be traced to one of the following items: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage, or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. A B C D E SEATS When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Causes of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. F G H I UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. J Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall GW 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment L 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move, or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM M or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. N O P Revision: 2011 September GW-7 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000007495998 PIIB8740E Revision: 2011 September GW-8 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > A B C D E F G H I J GW L M N O PIIB8742E P Revision: 2011 September GW-9 2012 QUEST WINDSHIELD GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION WINDSHIELD GLASS Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495999 JMKIA8221GB Revision: 2011 September GW-10 2012 QUEST WINDSHIELD GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Windshield glass molding 2. Dam sealant rubber (upper) 3. Upper clip 4. Windshield glass 5. Dam sealant rubber (lower) 6. Lower clip 7. Insulator 8. Mirror base 9. Adhesive 10. Primer 11. Roof 12. Headlining assembly 13. Cowl top cover 14. Roof side molding 15. Body side outer panel G : 12 (0.472) H : 8 (0.315) K : 20 (0.787) A B 16. Front pillar garnish E : Black print mark F : 7 (0.276) C I : 20 (0.787) J : 15 (0.591) L : 8 (0.315) M : 17 (0.669) D Unit: mm (in) : Always replace after every disassembly. E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496000 REMOVAL F 1. Remove front pillar garnish (LH and RH). Refer to INT-20, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". G 2. Remove partially headlining (front edge). Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove front wiper arm (LH and RH). Refer to WW-43, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation". 4. Remove front fender cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". H 5. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove the roof side molding (LH and RH). Refer to EXT-28, "Removal and Installation". 7. Apply protective tape around windshield to prevent painted surface from being damaged. I 8. Guiding a cutter knife along glass, cut the windshield molding. 9. Using a pair of pliers, pull molding remaining at the body flange out of bonded area of glass. 10. Paint matching marks on the body and glass if the windshield is J reused. NOTE: • Positioning during installation can be easily performed. GW • When installing a new windshield glass mount the glass on the body and put the matching marks after clearing the body side. L PIIB3503J 11. Cut the adhesive. Depending on the tool in use, follow the procedures below: CAUTION: Never use a windshield cutter if the windshield is reused. (It may scratch the glass surface) a. With piano wire (when reusing glass). M N O P Revision: 2011 September GW-11 2012 QUEST WINDSHIELD GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > i. Pass the piano wire (B) from the passenger room to the bonded area of glass using a wire pierce (A). CAUTION: • Never press the piano wire excessively against the edge of the glass. • Always use a Standish cover (C) to keep the piano wire clear of plastic parts such as the instrument panel. • For the corner area, never insert the piano wire into the mating surfaces of glass. • Never damage the harness around the glass. JMKIA0721ZZ ii. Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc. JMKIA0722ZZ iii. With 2 persons, one holding the piano wire (B) inside the vehicle along with the glass and the other holding it outside the vehicle along with the gap between the body and glass, pull it to cut off the adhesive. CAUTION: Always use a Standish cover (C) to keep the piano wire clear of plastic parts such as the instrument panel. JMKIA1139ZZ b. i. ii. With a windshield cutter (A) (when replacing glass) Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for smooth movement of the windshield cutter. Insert the windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut the adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to the edge of the glass. JMKIA0306ZZ 12. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A), etc. to remove glass from the vehicle. JMKIA1138ZZ Revision: 2011 September GW-12 2012 QUEST WINDSHIELD GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > INSTALLATION 1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive (sealant) on the body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm (0.079 in) thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth. CAUTION: If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type paint. A B C JMKIA0307ZZ 2. When reusing the glass (2), use the cutter (A) to remove the remaining adhesive (1) (sealant) and smooth out the surface. D E F G JMKIA0726ZZ H 3. 4. Mount the glass onto the vehicle and paint matching marks on the body and glass when installing new glass. Then remove the glass again. Use the rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) to set the glass (1) on the glass stand (B). I J GW JMKIA1137ZZ 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clean the bonded area on the glass and body with white gasoline or degreasing agent. Install new glass insulator. Install new clips (lower and upper). Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass. Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools. CAUTION: There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods. • Primer for painted surfaces • Primer for glass NOTE: The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between the glass and the painted surface. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface. CAUTION: • If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply the primer after drying the paint. • If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent. • Always use a Standish cover (stainless plate) to prevent primer for painted surfaces from adhering to the instrument panel. Revision: 2011 September GW-13 2012 QUEST L M N O P WINDSHIELD GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 10. Affix the dam sealant rubber and apply adhesive along the edge of the glass within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying primer. • When reusing the glass, affix new dam sealant rubber at the same place where old dam rubber is affixed. • When installing new glass, apply the dam sealant rubber from the edge of the glass so as to hide the black print. CAUTION: • Apply the dam sealant rubber (1) from the outline mark of black print as shown in Exploded View. • Start to apply the dam sealant rubber at the outline mark of black print. Apply it so as to only place it without pulling. Stop applying at another outline mark of black print. NOTE: Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun. JMKIA0727ZZ 11. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) that are installed in advance, align the matching marks between the spacer and roof panel hole and between the body and glass (1) to install them on the vehicle. CAUTION: 2 or more workers are required when installing the glass. JMKIA0732ZZ 12. 13. 14. 15. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth. Remove the protective tape. Install new windshield glass molding. NOTE: Lightly affix the center of molding. Affix the whole length while checking the length on the left and right. CAUTION: • Always install the windshield molding before the adhesive hardens. • After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive is completely cured. Never drive the vehicle. 16. Install the removed parts. CAUTION: • Adjust the front wiper arms stop position. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment". • Check the mating area with surrounding parts. Adjust if necessary. Inspection INFOID:0000000007496001 WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION CAUTION: Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test. Revision: 2011 September GW-14 2012 QUEST OPERA WINDOW < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > OPERA WINDOW A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496002 B C D E F G H I J GW L M N O P JMKIA8222GB 1. Opera window 2. Body side outer 3. Front pillar garnish 4. Primer 5. Adhesive 6. Front fender 7. Front pillar inner lower Revision: 2011 September GW-15 2012 QUEST OPERA WINDOW < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > D : Glass primer application area E : Double sided tape F : 6 (0.236) G : 10 (0.394) H : 13 (0.512) I : 20 (0.787) J : 20 (0.787) K : 20 (0.787) L : 20 (0.787) M : 14 (0.551) Unit: mm (in) : Clip : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496003 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. a. i. ii. b. i. Remove front pillar garnish. Refer to INT-20, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Remove front fender assembly. Refer to DLK-397, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation". Apply protective tape on body panel around opera window glass to protect painted surfaces from damage. Cut the adhesive. Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use piano wire or a cutter knife. With a windshield cutter Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A). Insert windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to body flange edge. With piano wire Pass both sides of piano wire through each room side from the area cut by the windshield cutter. JMKIA0306ZZ ii. Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc. iii. Lift up the molding using a plastic spatula, pass the piano wire through the inside of molding, and then cut the adhesive by pulling the wire grips alternately. CAUTION: Never contact the piano wire with the coated panel surface. c. With a cutter knife i. Working from inside vehicle, insert cutter knife between opera window glass and body panel. Guide cutter edge along molding to cut off adhesive. JMKIA0722ZZ CAUTION: Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip. 5. Use piano wire to cut the opera window glass mounting clip. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter to remove the glass from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September GW-16 2012 QUEST OPERA WINDOW < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive on the body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth. CAUTION: If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type paint. A B C JMKIA0307ZZ D 2. 3. 4. Clean bonded and surrounding area on glass with white gasoline or degreasing agent. Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass. Refer to GW-15, "Exploded View". • Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools. CAUTION: There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods. • Primer for painted surfaces • Primer for glass NOTE: The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface as shown in the figure (A=20mm (0.787in)). CAUTION: • If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply the primer after drying the paint. • If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent. E F G H I J JMKIA8223ZZ 5. Apply adhesive along glass edge within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying GW primer with the procedure shown in the exploded view. Refer to GW-15, "Exploded View". NOTE: Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun. 6. After setting rubber suction cups or suction lifter to glass, align matching marks on body and glass. Install L glass to the body. 7. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely. 8. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth. M CAUTION: After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive has completely cured. Avoid driving the vehicle. N 9. Remove the protective tape. 10. Install the removed parts. Inspection INFOID:0000000007496004 O WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION CAUTION: Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test. Revision: 2011 September GW-17 2012 QUEST P SIDE WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SIDE WINDOW GLASS Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496005 JMKIA8224GB 1. Side window glass 2. Body side outer 3. 4. Primer 5. Adhesive 6. Rear pillar garnish 7. Slide door corner cover outer 8. Luggage side lower finisher 9. Rear door slide rail cover Revision: 2011 September GW-18 Roof side garnish 2012 QUEST SIDE WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 10. Back door window glass A : Clip E : 12 (0.472) F : 7 (0.276) G : 17 (0.669) H : 20 (0.787) K : 17 (0.669) I : 25 (0.984) J : 25 (0.984) L : 20 (0.787) M : 17 (0.787) N : 20 (0.787) B Unit :mm (in) C : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496006 D REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. i. ii. b. i. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal E and Installation". Remove back pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Remove rear pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "REAR PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". F Remove roof side garnish. Refer to INT-27, "ROOF SIDE GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Disconnect rear side antenna harness connector. Remove slide door rail cover. Refer to EXT-42, "Removal and Installation". G Apply protective tape on body panel around side window glass to protect painted surfaces from damage. Cut the adhesive from passenger room side. Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use H piano wire or a cutter knife. With a windshield cutter I Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A). Insert windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to body flange edge. J With piano wire Pass both sides of piano wire through each passenger room GW side from the area cut by the windshield cutter. JMKIA0306ZZ L ii. Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc. iii. Lift up the molding using a plastic spatula, pass the piano wire through the inside of molding, and then cut the adhesive by pulling the wire grips alternately. CAUTION: Never contact the piano wire with the coated panel surface. c. With a cutter knife i. Working from inside vehicle, insert cutter knife between side window glass and body panel. Guide cutter edge along molding to cut off adhesive. JMKIA0722ZZ CAUTION: Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip. 9. Use piano wire to cut the side window glass mounting clip. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter to remove the glass from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September GW-19 2012 QUEST M N O P SIDE WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive on the body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth. CAUTION: If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type paint. JMKIA0307ZZ 2. 3. Clean bonded and surrounding area on glass with white gasoline or degreasing agent. Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass. • Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools. CAUTION: There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods. • Primer for painted surfaces • Primer for glass NOTE: The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface. 4. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface. CAUTION: • If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply the primer after drying the paint. • If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent. 5. Apply adhesive along glass edge within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying primer with the procedure shown in the Exploded View. NOTE: Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun. 6. After setting rubber suction cups or suction lifter to glass, align matching marks on body and glass. Install glass to the body. 7. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely. 8. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth. CAUTION: After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive has completely cured. Avoid driving the vehicle. 9. Remove the protective tape. 10. Install the removed parts. Inspection INFOID:0000000007496007 WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION CAUTION: Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test. Revision: 2011 September GW-20 2012 QUEST BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496008 B C D E F G H I J GW L M N O P JMKIA8225GB 1. Back door window glass molding RH 2. Back door window glass molding LH 3. Dam sealant rubber (upper) 4. Fastener 5. Back door window glass 6. Clip 7. Dam sealant rubber (lower) 8. Back door panel 9. Adhesive Revision: 2011 September GW-21 2012 QUEST BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 10. Primer 11. Back door upper molding 12. Rear spoiler 13. Side window glass 14. Back door inner 15. Back door lower molding 16. Back door outer 17. Adhesive for clip E : 7 (0.276) F : 12 (0.472) G : 22 (0.866) H : 15 (0.591) I : 22 (0.866) J : 22 (0.866) K : 22 (0.866) L : 15.7 (0.618) Unit: mm (in) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496009 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove back door molding upper and lower. Refer to EXT-38, "Removal and Installation". Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Remove back door side finisher (LH and RH). Refer to INT-48, "BACK DOOR SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Remove connectors and grounds for rear window defogger and printed antenna. Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-47, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation". Apply protective tape around back door window glass to prevent painted surface from being damaged. If back door window glass will be reused, paint matching marks on the body and glass. NOTE: Positioning during installation can be easily performed. Mount the glass on the body and put the matching marks after clearing the body side especially when installing new glass. PIIB3503J 9. a. i. ii. Cut the adhesive. Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use piano wire or a cutter knife. With a windshield cutter Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A). Insert windshield knife into the bonded area from the passenger room side. Cut adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to the edge of the glass. JMKIA0306ZZ b. i. ii. With piano wire For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use piano wire. From the area cut by the windshield cutter, pass the piano wire through the passenger room side and tie both sides to wire grips. Cut the adhesive by alternately pulling the piano wire along with the glass. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September GW-22 2012 QUEST BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Never press the piano wire excessively against the edge of the glass. • Always use a Standish cover (stainless plate) to keep the piano wire clear of plastic parts. c. With a cutter knife i. Working from inside cabin, insert a cutter knife between back door window glass and body side outer panel. Work the cutter knife along the edge of the back door window glass to cut off the adhesive. CAUTION: Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip. 10. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A), etc. to remove glass from the vehicle. A B C D E JMKIA1138ZZ F INSTALLATION 1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive (sealant) on the body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm (0.08 in) thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth. CAUTION: If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type paint. G H I JMKIA0307ZZ 2. When reusing the glass (2), use the cutter (A) to remove the remaining adhesive (1) (sealant) and smooth out the surface. J GW L M JMKIA0726ZZ 3. 4. Mount the glass onto the vehicle and paint matching marks on the body and glass when installing new glass. Then remove the glass again. Use the rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) to set the glass (1) on the glass stand (B). N O P JMKIA1137ZZ Revision: 2011 September GW-23 2012 QUEST BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Clean the bonded area on the glass and body with white gasoline or degreasing agent. 6. Install new fastener. 7. Install new clips. 8. Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass. Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools. CAUTION: There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods. • Primer for painted surfaces • Primer for glass NOTE: The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface. 9. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface. CAUTION: • If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply the primer after drying the paint. • If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent. 10. Affix the dam sealant rubber and apply adhesive along the edge of the glass within the time period indicated in the instruction manual after applying primer. • When reusing the glass, affix new dam sealant rubber at the same place where old dam sealant rubber was affixed. • When installing new glass, apply the dam sealant rubber from the edge of the glass so as to hide the black print. CAUTION: Apply the dam sealant rubber (1) to the outer edge of the outline mark of black print as shown in Exploded View. Apply it so as to only place it without pulling. NOTE: Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun. JMKIA0727ZZ 11. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) that are installed in advance, align the matching marks to install. CAUTION: 2 or more workers are required when installing the glass. JMKIA1138ZZ 12. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely. 13. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth. CAUTION: After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive is completely cured. Avoid driving the vehicle. 14. Remove the protective tape. 15. Install both new back door window glass molding. 16. Install the removed parts. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September GW-24 2012 QUEST BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the mating area with surrounding parts. Adjust if necessary. A Inspection INFOID:0000000007496010 WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION CAUTION: Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test. B C D E F G H I J GW L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GW-25 2012 QUEST FRONT DOOR GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT DOOR GLASS Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496011 JMKIA8226ZZ 1. Front door panel 2. Front door sash 3. Front door glass run 4. Front door glass 5. Front door regulator assembly 6. Front door module base 7. Front door hole seal 8. Power window motor 9. Front door inside seal 10. Front door module assembly 11. Pull handle bracket : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496012 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fully open front door glass. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove front door inside seal. Remove the front door hole seal. Reconnect the power window main switch and then operate the power window main switch to raise or lower the door window until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. Remove the glass mounting bolts. Revision: 2011 September GW-26 2012 QUEST FRONT DOOR GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Remove front door glass run from front door panel. 8. Hold securely the front door glass and pull it out of the sash to remove the door glass as shown in the figure. A B C JMKIA6236ZZ 9. Remove front door lower sash. 10. Remove front door glass run. D E INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. F Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007496013 G SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Initialize the system if any of the following work is complete. Refer to PWC-25, "Work Procedure". FITTING INSPECTION • Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove. • Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel. H I J GW L M N O P Revision: 2011 September GW-27 2012 QUEST FRONT REGULATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT REGULATOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496014 JMKIA8226ZZ 1. Front door panel 2. Front door sash 3. Front door glass run 4. Front door glass 5. Front door regulator assembly 6. Front door module base 7. Front door hole seal 8. Power window motor 9. Front door inside seal 10. Front door module assembly 11. Pull handle bracket : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496015 REMOVAL 1. Remove front door glass. Refer to GW-26, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September GW-28 2012 QUEST FRONT REGULATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Disconnect the power window motor harness connector (C) and harness fixing clip from front door module assembly (1). 3. Remove front door regulator assembly mounting bolts (A). 4. Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts (B). A B : Clip C JMKIA6237ZZ 5. 6. 7. Remove front door module assembly from front door panel. Remove pull handle bracket mounting bolts and then remove pull handle bracket from front door module assembly. Remove regulator assembly mounting bolts and then remove front door regulator assembly from front door module base. INSTALLATION D E F Install in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007496016 G DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove front door module assembly. Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". Remove front door power window motor from front door module base. Remove front door regulator assembly from front door module base. H INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL I Check the front door regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected. • Wire wear • Regulator deformation J ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. GW Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007496017 L Inspection after removal Check the front regulator for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected. • Wire wear • Front regulator deformation M N O P Revision: 2011 September GW-29 2012 QUEST FRONT REGULATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Apply 0.1 to 0.2 g of grease to the surface of carrier plate (1) and on the surface in contact with glass. A : 5 mm (0.197in) JMKIA8227ZZ SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Initialize the system if any of the following work is complete. Refer to PWC-25, "Work Procedure". FITTING INSPECTION • Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove. • Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel. Revision: 2011 September GW-30 2012 QUEST SLIDE DOOR GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SLIDE DOOR GLASS A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496018 B C D E F G H I J GW L JMKIA6108ZZ 1. Grommet 2. Door upper sash (rear) 3. Door upper sash (front) 4. Door lower sash (front) 5. Door glass run 6. Slide door glass 7. Regulator assembly 8. Power winodw motor 9. Door lower sash (rear) 10. Slide door panel M 11. Sealing screen N : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496019 O REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove slide door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation". Fully open slide door glass. Remove slide door lock release actuator. Refer to DLK-441, "LOCK RELEASE ACTUATOR : Removal and Installation". Remove remote control assembly. Refer to DLK-440, "REMOTE CONTROL ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove sliding door control unit. Revision: 2011 September GW-31 2012 QUEST P SLIDE DOOR GLASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • For RH: Refer to DLK-467, "RH : Removal and Installation". • For LH: Refer to DLK-467, "LH : Removal and Installation". 6. Remove slide door speaker harness connector. 7. Remove partially the sealing screen. NOTE: Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing screen is reused. 8. Reconnect the power window switch and then operate the power window switch to raise the door window until the slide door glass mounting bolts can be seen. 9. Remove slide door glass mounting bolts. 10. Remove slide door outside molding. Refer to EXT-32, "Removal and Installation". 11. Remove slide door sash cover. Refer to EXT-42, "Removal and Installation". 12. Remove slide door corner outer cover. Refer to EXT-35, "Removal and Installation". 13. Remove slide door glass run from partition sash. 14. Remove slide door upper sash (rear). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View". 15. Remove slide door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View". 16. Pull out slide door glass out off front door panel to remove. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007496020 FITTING INSPECTION • Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove. • Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel. Revision: 2011 September GW-32 2012 QUEST SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496021 B C D E F G H I J GW L JMKIA6108ZZ 1. Grommet 2. Door upper sash (rear) 3. Door upper sash (front) 4. Door lower sash (front) 5. Door glass run 6. Slide door glass 7. Regulator assembly 8. Power winodw motor 9. Door lower sash (rear) 10. Slide door panel M 11. Sealing screen N : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496022 O REMOVAL 1. P Remove slide door glass. Refer to GW-31, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September GW-33 2012 QUEST SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Disconnect the power window motor (1) harness connector (A). 3. Remove the slide door regulator assembly mounting bolts (B) and then remove slide door regulator assembly from door panel. JMKIA6361ZZ 4. 5. Remove slide door upper sash (front). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View". Remove slide door lower sash (front). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View". INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007496023 DISASSEMBLY Remove the power window motor from the slide door regulator. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the slide door regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected. • Wire wear • Regulator deformation ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007496024 Inspection after removal Check the slide regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected. • Wire wear • Slide door regulator deformation • Grease condition for each sliding part : Grease point JMKIA8228ZZ FITTING INSPECTION • Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove. • Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel. Revision: 2011 September GW-34 2012 QUEST DRIVER CONTROLS SECTION HRN HORN A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 3 HORN ................................................................. 3 F Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 4 G HORN ................................................................. 4 Exploded View .......................................................... 4 Removal and Installation .......................................... 4 H I J K HRN M N O P Revision: 2011 September HRN-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492140 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September HRN-2 2012 QUEST HORN < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A HORN Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492141 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K HRN M N O P JCLWA5192GB Revision: 2011 September HRN-3 2012 QUEST HORN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION HORN Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492142 JMLIA2110GB 1. Horn assembly N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492143 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the horn (high and low) connectors. Remove the horn assembly mounting bolt. Remove the horn assembly. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September HRN-4 2012 QUEST DRIVER CONTROLS SECTION INL INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................19 F Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 INT LAMP ...................................................................20 INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) ......................................................................21 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 H COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 BATTERY SAVER .....................................................22 BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) ..................................................22 Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 Bulb Specifications .................................................... 5 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 24 I SYSTEM .............................................................. 6 BCM ................................................................... 24 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 6 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ................................................... 6 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM ............................................................................ 10 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description ............................... 11 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ...................................... 13 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM ....................... 14 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description .............................................................. 15 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ...................................................................... 16 AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM .................... 16 AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System Description .............................................................. 17 AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 18 List of ECU Reference .............................................24 J WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 25 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM ... 25 K Wiring Diagram ........................................................25 ILLUMINATION ................................................. 28 INL Wiring Diagram ........................................................28 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 33 M DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 33 Work Flow ................................................................33 N DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 36 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ............................................................ 36 Component Function Check ....................................36 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT ... 38 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................19 Component Function Check ....................................38 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38 COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 19 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT .................. 40 Revision: 2011 September G INL-1 2012 QUEST O P Description .............................................................. 40 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40 STEP LAMP CIRCUIT ....................................... 42 Component Function Check ................................... 42 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 42 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT .............................................. 44 Component Function Check ................................... 44 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 46 INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 46 Symptom Table ...................................................... 46 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 47 MAP LAMP ........................................................ 47 Exploded View ........................................................ 47 Removal and Installation ........................................ 47 Replacement .......................................................... 47 VANITY MIRROR LAMP ................................... 49 FOOT LAMP ...................................................... 52 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 52 DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View .............................. 52 DRIVER SIDE : Replacement ................................. 52 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 53 PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View ..................... 53 PASSENGER SIDE : Replacement ........................ 53 STEP LAMP ....................................................... 55 Exploded View ........................................................ 55 Removal and Installation ......................................... 55 Replacement ........................................................... 55 PERSONAL LAMP ............................................ 57 Exploded View ........................................................ 57 Removal and Installation ......................................... 57 Replacement ........................................................... 58 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP .................................. 59 Exploded View ........................................................ 59 Removal and Installation ......................................... 59 Replacement ........................................................... 59 Exploded View ........................................................ 49 Replacement .......................................................... 49 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 61 GLOVE BOX LAMP ........................................... 50 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 61 Exploded View ........................................................ 50 Replacement .......................................................... 50 Revision: 2011 September Bulb Specifications .................................................. 61 INL-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007496029 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007496030 JMLIA2148ZZ No. Part Description IPDM E/R Controls the integrated relay according to the request signal from BCM (via CAN communication). Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. BCM • Activates the interior room lamp timer depending on the vehicle condition to turn the interior room lamps ON/OFF. • Operates the interior room lamp battery saver depending on the vehicle condition to cut the interior room lamp power supply. • Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function. • Judges the illumination lamp ON/OFF status depending on the vehicle condition. And then it transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter (with CAN communication). Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 3. Optical sensor Refer to EXL-7, "Component Parts Location". 4. Step lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". 5. Door switch Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 6. Front door lock assembly (driver side) (door key cylinder switch) Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 7. Door request switch Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 8. Luggage room lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". 9. Automatic back door close switch Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 10. Back door lock assembly (back door switch) Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 11. Third personal lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". 12. Seconnd personal lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". 1. 13. Remote keyless entry receiver Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 14. Vanity mirror lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". 15. Combination meter Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". Revision: 2011 September INL-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Part Description 16. Door lock and unlock switch Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 17. Push-button ignition switch Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 18. AV control unit Receives the dimmer signal from BCM via CAN communication. Refer to AV-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 19. Combination switch (Lighting & turn signal switch) Refer to BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description". 20. Map lamp Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications". Bulb Specifications Item INFOID:0000000007496031 Type Wattage (W) Wedge 8 LED — — 1.2 LED — Glove box lamp — 1.4 Foot lamp (driver side) — 1.4 Foot lamp (passenger side) — 1.4 Wedge 3.4 Personal lamp — 8 Luggage room lamp — 8 Map lamp Total coordination of illumination Vanity mirror lamp Push-button ignition switch illumination Step lamp A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-5 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007496032 SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR) JMLIA2120GB Revision: 2011 September INL-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR) A B C D E F G H I JMLIA2208GB OUTLINE • Interior room lamps* are controlled by interior room lamp timer control function of BCM. *: Map lamp and personal lamp (when map lamp switch and personal lamp switch are in DOOR position). • Step lamp is controlled by step lamp control function of BCM. • Luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination are controlled by luggage room lamp control function of BCM. • Push-button ignition switch illumination is controlled by the push-button ignition switch illumination control function of BCM and combination meter. J K INL INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER CONTROL Interior Room Lamp Timer Basic Operation M N O P JPLIA0093GB • The interior room lamp turns ON and OFF (gradual brightening and dimming) by the interior room lamp timer. • BCM judges the vehicle condition with the following items. It activates the interior room timer. Revision: 2011 September INL-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > - Ignition switch status - Door switch signal (except back door) - Door lock/unlock signal (remote keyless entry receiver, each door request switch, door key cylinder switch, door lock/unlock switch) NOTE: Each function of interior room lamp timer can be set by CONSULT. Refer to INL-21, "INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP)". Interior Room Lamp ON Operation • BCM always turns the interior room lamp ON when any door opens excepting back door. • BCM activates the interior room timer in any of the following conditions to turn the interior room lamp ON for a period of time. - Any door opens before all doors close excepting back door. - Ignition switch is turned ON → OFF. - Any door unlock signal is detected when all doors close excepting back door with ignition switch OFF. NOTE: The timer restarts if new condition is input during the timer operating time. Interior Room Lamp OFF Operation BCM stops the timer and turns interior room lamp OFF, when any of the following conditions is satisfied. • The interior room lamp timer operating time is expired with all doors closed excepting back door. • Ignition switch position is other than OFF with all doors close excepting back door. • Any door lock signal is detected with all doors close excepting back door. LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CONTROL BCM controls the luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination (ground-side) to turn ON with back door switch ON. • When luggage room lamp switch is in the DOOR position and back door is opened, luggage room lamp turns ON. • When back door is opened, automatic back door close switch illumination turn ON. STEP LAMP CONTROL BCM controls the step lamp (ground-side) to turn ON with any door switch ON excepting back door. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CONTROL Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination Basic Operation BCM provides the power supply to turn the push-button ignition switch illumination ON. Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination ON Operation BCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination ON in the following conditions. • Ignition switch ON • Any of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF/ACC - Engine start permission is entered - Driver side door is LOCK → UNLOCK - Driver side door is open Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination OFF Operation BCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination OFF in any of the following conditions. • The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not satisfy. • Any of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF. - The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not change (15 seconds after the ignition switch OFF) - Driver side door is UNLOCK → LOCK Revision: 2011 September INL-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007496033 A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O JMLIA2125GB Revision: 2011 September INL-9 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > JMLIA2126GB INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM Revision: 2011 September INL-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007496034 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR) B C D E F G H I J JMLIA2121GB K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR) JMLIA2209GB OUTLINE • Interior room lamp battery saver is controlled by BCM. • BCM turns applicable lamps OFF depending on the vehicle condition. This function prevents the battery from over-discharging if the driver neglects turning OFF the any lamps. Applicable lamps • Map lamp • Personal lamp • Luggage room lamp • Automatic back door close switch illumination • Step lamp • Vanity mirror lamp INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER FUNCTION • When the ignition switch is turned to a position other than ON, BCM operates the timer for a period of time to cut the interior room lamp power supply. • BCM restart the timer when any of the following signals changes while operating the timer. - Ignition switch status - Door switch signal (ALL) - Door lock/unlock signal (remote keyless entry receiver, each door request switch, door lock and unlock switch, door key cylinder switch) • BCM provides the interior room lamp power supply continuously when the ignition switch position is ON. NOTE: Each function of interior room lamp battery saver can be set by CONSULT. Refer to INL-22, "BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)". Revision: 2011 September INL-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007496035 A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O JMLIA2125GB Revision: 2011 September INL-13 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > JMLIA2128GB ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM Revision: 2011 September INL-14 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007496036 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F JMLIA2210GB G OUTLINE Each illumination lamp is controlled by each function of BCM, IPDM E/R and combination meter. H Control by BCM • Combination switch reading function • Headlamp control function I Control by IPDM E/R • Relay control function Control by combination meter • Meter illumination control function (Refer to MWI-17, "METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description".) ILLUMINATION CONTROL • BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. • BCM transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter according to tail lamp ON condition. J K INL Tail lamp ON condition • Lighting switch 1ST Lighting switch 2ND Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function ON judgment Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON IPDM E/R turns the integrated tail lamp relay ON according to position light request signal. It provides the power supply to each illumination lamp. • Combination meter enters in the nighttime mode according to position light request signal. Under the nighttime mode the combination meter controls the illuminance by controlling each illumination lamp (ground side). M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-15 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007496037 JMLIA2129GB AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM Revision: 2011 September INL-16 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007496038 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E JMLIA0967GB F OUTLINE Auto light adjustment system is controlled by each function of BCM, combination meter and AV control unit G Control by BCM • Auto light system • Auto light adjustment system H AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM Description • BCM supplies voltage to the optical sensor when the ignition switch is turned ON or ACC. • Optical sensor converts outside brightness (lux) to voltage and transmits the optical sensor signal to BCM. • BCM judges dimming/brightening of combination meter and display according to brightness outside the vehicle, when ignition switch is ON. • BCM transmits dimmer signal to combination meter via CAN communication, according to auto light adjustment conditions (Except for CANADA). Dimmer signal is also transmitted to AV control unit. NOTE: As to dimming/brightening timing, the sensitivity depends on settings. The settings can be changed with CONSULT. Refer to EXL-31, "HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP)". I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-17 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007496039 JMLIA2130GB Revision: 2011 September INL-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) A COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007807462 B APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. C Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. D CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. E F SYSTEM APPLICATION G BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × × × Door lock DOOR LOCK Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × I J K INL M N × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September H INL-19 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. • Closing door • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. INT LAMP Revision: 2011 September INL-20 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000007496041 A WORK SUPPORT B C D E JPLIA0093GB Service item ROOM LAMP TIMER SET SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET Setting item F Setting G MODE 2 7.5 sec. MODE 3* 15 sec. MODE 4 30 sec. On* With the interior room lamp timer function Off Without the interior room lamp timer function Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time) H MODE 1 0.5 sec. MODE 2* 1 sec. MODE 3 2 sec. MODE 4 3 sec. MODE 5 0 sec. MODE 1 0.5 sec. MODE 2* 1 sec. MODE 3 2 sec. MODE 4 3 sec. MODE 5 0 sec. MODE 1* Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors. MODE 2 Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door only. I Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time. J K Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time. INL *: Factory setting M N DATA MONITOR Monitor item [Unit] REQ SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW-RR [On/Off] REQ SW-RL [On/Off] Revision: 2011 September O Description P NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. INL-21 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item [Unit] Description PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch RH DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch LH DOOR SW- BK [On/Off] The switch status input from back door switch CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver ACTIVE TEST Test item INT LAMP STEP LAMP TEST Operation Description On Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps ON. [Map lamp, personal lamp (when applicable lamps switch is in DOOR position.)] Off Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps. On Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON. Off Stops the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON. BATTERY SAVER BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000007496042 WORK SUPPORT Service item ROOM LAMP TIMER SET BATTERY SAVER SET Setting item Setting MODE 1 30 min. MODE 2 60 min. MODE 3* 15 min. On* With the exterior lamp battery saver function Off Without the exterior lamp battery saver function Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time. *:Factory setting Revision: 2011 September INL-22 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DATA MONITOR A Monitor item [Unit] Description REQ SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (driver side) REQ SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW-RR [On/Off] B C NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. REQ SW-RL [On/Off] PUSH SW [On/Off] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (driver side) DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch RH DOOR SW- RL [On/Off] The switch status input from sliding door switch LH DOOR SW- BK [On/Off] The switch status input from back door switch CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch TRNK/HAT MNTR [On/Off] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver D E F G H I J K INL M ACTIVE TEST Test item N Operation BATTERY SAVER Description Off Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps OFF. On Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps ON.* O *: Each lamp switch is in ON position. P Revision: 2011 September INL-23 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007496043 ECU Reference BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" BCS-59, "DTC Index" Revision: 2011 September INL-24 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007496044 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P JRLWC1005GB Revision: 2011 September INL-25 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > JRLWC1006GB Revision: 2011 September INL-26 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O JRLWC1007GB P Revision: 2011 September INL-27 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION < WIRING DIAGRAM > ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007496045 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCLWA5164GB Revision: 2011 September INL-28 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O JCLWA5165GB P Revision: 2011 September INL-29 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCLWA5166GB Revision: 2011 September INL-30 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O JCLWA5167GB P Revision: 2011 September INL-31 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCLWA5168GB Revision: 2011 September INL-32 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007496046 B OVERALL SEQUENCE C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P JMKIA8652GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September INL-33 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM 1. 2. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurs). Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected. Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) Erase DTC. Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5. 3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 5. 4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time. If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DTC INSPECTION PRIORITY CHART, and determine trouble diagnosis order. NOTE: • Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. • Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. Is the symptom described? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE Revision: 2011 September INL-34 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". A 8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B 1. 2. 3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it. C D >> GO TO 9. 9.FINAL CHECK When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the malfunction is repaired securely. When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the symptom is not detected. Is DTC detected and does symptom remain? YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7. YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC. E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-35 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007496047 1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. 4. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch ON. Turn each interior room lamp ON. Personal lamp Map lamp Luggage room lamp Automatic back door close switch illumination Step lamp Vanity mirror lamp Select “BATTERY SAVER” of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item. With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF. Off On : Interior room lamp OFF : Interior room lamp ON Does the interior room lamp turn ON/OFF? YES >> Interior room lamp power supply circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to INL-36, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007496048 1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the following connectors. Personal lamp(ALL) Map lamp Luggage room lamp Automatic back door close switch Step lamp (both sides) Vanity mirror lamp (both sides) Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BATTERY SAVER” of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item. With operating the test item, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM (+) (–) Connector Terminal M123 56 Ground Voltage (Approx.) Test item BATTERY SAVER Off 0V On 12 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and each interior room lamp harness connector. Revision: 2011 September INL-36 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM Connector M123 Each interior room lamp Terminal 56 Connector Terminal Map lamp R109 6 Second personal lamp LH R18 1 Second personal lamp RH R17 1 Third personal lamp LH R28 1 Third personal lamp RH R27 1 Luggage room lamp B51 1 Automatic back door close switch D169 3 Step lamp (driver side) D51 1 Step lamp (passenger side) D17 1 Vanity mirror lamp LH R24 1 Vanity mirror lamp RH R10 1 Continuity A B C Existed D E F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check for internal short circuit of each interior room lamp. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. G 3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. I BCM Connector Terminal M123 56 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-37 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007496049 CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal. • Interior room lamp power supply • Map lamp bulb • Personal lamp bulb 1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. 4. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Switch the map lamp switch and personal lamp switch to DOOR. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item. With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming). On Off : Interior room lamp gradual brightening : Interior room lamp gradual dimming Does the interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming)? YES >> Interior room lamp control circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to INL-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007496050 1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Switch the map lamp switch and personal lamp switch to DOOR. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove all the bulbs of map lamp and personal lamp. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item. With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 63 Test item Ground INT LAMP Continuity On Existed Off Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. Fixed ON>>GO TO 3. Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector, map lamp connector and personal lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and map lamp harness connector. BCM 4. Map lamp Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 63 R109 5 Continuity Existed Check continuity between personal lamp harness connector and map lamp harness connector. Revision: 2011 September INL-38 2012 QUEST INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Map lamp Personal lamp Connector Terminal R109 3 Connector Terminal Second LH R18 Second RH R17 Third LH R28 Third RH R27 Continuity A B 2 Existed C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace map lamp or personal lamp. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. D 3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector, map lamp connector and personal lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. F BCM 4. E Connector Terminal M123 63 Ground Continuity Not existed Check continuity between map lamp harness connector and ground. Map lamp Connector Terminal R109 3 Ground Continuity G H Not existed I Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-39 2012 QUEST LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007496051 Controls the luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination (ground side) to turn the luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination ON and OFF. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007496052 CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal. • Interior room lamp power supply • Luggage room lamp bulb 1.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the luggage room bulb. Disconnect automatic back door close switch connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M122 49 Condition Ground Back door Continuity Open Existed Closed Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. Fixed ON>>GO TO 3. Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and luggage room lamp harness connector. BCM 3. Luggage room lamp Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M122 49 B51 2 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and automatic back door close switch harness connector. BCM Automatic back door close switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M122 49 D169 4 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace luggage room lamp or automatic back door close switch. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. 3.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M122 49 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September INL-40 2012 QUEST LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. A B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-41 2012 QUEST STEP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > STEP LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007496053 CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal. • Interior room lamp power supply • Step lamp bulb 1.CHECK STEP LAMP OPERATION 1. 2. 3. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch ON. Select “STEP LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item. With operating the test items, check that step lamp turns ON/OFF. On Off : Step lamp ON : Step lamp OFF Does the step lamp turn ON/OFF? YES >> Step lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to INL-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007496054 1.CHECK STEP LAMP OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the step lamp bulbs (ALL). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “STEP LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item. With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 62 Test item Ground STEP LAMP TEST Continuity On Existed Off Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. Fixed ON>>GO TO 3. Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK STEP LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector, and step lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and step lamp harness connector. BCM Step lamp Connector Terminal M123 62 Connector Terminal Driver side D51 Passenger side D17 2 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace step lamp. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. 3.CHECK STEP LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: 2011 September INL-42 2012 QUEST STEP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. A BCM Connector Terminal M123 62 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Repair or replace harnesses. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-43 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007496055 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION 1. 2. 3. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch ON. Select “ENGINE SW ILLUMI” of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item. With operating the test items, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF. On Off : Push-button ignition switch illumination ON : Push-button ignition switch illumination OFF Does the push-button ignition switch illumination turn ON/OFF? YES >> Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to INL-44, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007496056 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Lighting switch OFF. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector. Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. (+) Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 3 (–) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Push-button ignition switch illumination ON Condition 12 V OFF Condition 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the push-button ignition switch harness connector. BCM Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M124 90 M101 3 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. 3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 90 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September INL-44 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. 4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT-1 1. 2. A Connect push-button ignition switch connector. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. B (+) (–) BCM Connector Terminal M124 92 Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Push-button ignition switch illumination ON Condition C 0V D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". E 5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT-2 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector, and push-button ignition switch connector. Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and BCM harness connector. Push-button ignition switch 4. BCM Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M101 2 M124 92 Continuity Existed Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 2 Ground Continuity F G H I Not existed J Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch. NO >> Repair or replace harnesses. K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-45 2012 QUEST INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007496057 CAUTION: Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected. Symptom Possible cause All the following lamps do not turn ON. • Map lamp • Personal lamp • Vanity mirror lamp • Step lamp • Luggage room lamp • Automatic back door close switch illumination • Harness between BCM and each interior room lamp • BCM • Interior room lamp does not turn ON even though the door is open. (It turns ON when turning the interior room lamp ON.) • Interior room lamp does not turn OFF even though the door is closed. • Harness between BCM and each door switch • Harness between BCM and each interior room lamp • BCM Interior room lamp timer does not activate. (It turns ON/ OFF when the door opens/closes.) — Luggage room lamp or automatic back door close switch illumination does not turn ON even though the back door is open. • Harness between BCM and back door switch • Harness between BCM and luggage room lamp • Harness between BCM and automatic back door close switch • BCM Step lamps (ALL) do not turn ON. • Harness between BCM and each step lamp • BCM Inspection item Interior room lamp power supply circuit Refer to INL-36, "Component Function Check". Door switch circuit Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Interior room lamp control circuit Refer to INL-38, "Component Function Check". Check the interior room lamp setting. Refer to INL-21. Back door switch circuit Refer to DLK-211, "Component Function Check". Luggage room lamp circuit Refer to INL-40, "Diagnosis Procedure". Door switch circuit Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Step lamp circuit Refer to INL-42. Push-button ignition switch illumination does not illuminate. • Harness between BCM and pushbutton ignition switch • BCM Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit Refer to INL-44, "Component Function Check". Interior room lamp battery saver does not activate. BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September INL-46 2012 QUEST MAP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A MAP LAMP Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496058 B C D E F G JMLIA1418ZZ H 1. Map lamp assembly 2. Bulb 3. Lens : Pawl I : Metal clip Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496059 J CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. K REMOVAL 1. Disengage map lamp assembly fixing metal clips with a remover tool (A). INL : Metal clip 2. M Disconnect harness connector, and then remove map lamp assembly. N JMLIA1525ZZ O INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Replacement INFOID:0000000007496060 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. Revision: 2011 September INL-47 2012 QUEST P MAP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. MAP LAMP BULB 1. Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A). : Pawl 2. Remove bulb. JMLIA1526ZZ Revision: 2011 September INL-48 2012 QUEST VANITY MIRROR LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > VANITY MIRROR LAMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496061 B C D E F JMLIA1419ZZ 1. Lens 2. G Bulb : Pawl Replacement INFOID:0000000007496062 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. H I J K VANITY MIRROR LAMP 1. INL Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A). : Pawl 2. M CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. Remove bulb. N O JMLIA1527ZZ P Revision: 2011 September INL-49 2012 QUEST GLOVE BOX LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > GLOVE BOX LAMP Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496063 JMLIA2177ZZ 1. Bulb & socket assembly 2. Lamp housing 3. Instrument lower panel RH : Pawl : Vehicle front Replacement INFOID:0000000007496064 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. GLOVE BOX LAMP BULB 1. Remove Instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September INL-50 2012 QUEST GLOVE BOX LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock it and then remove bulb & socket assembly. A B C JMLIA1528ZZ D E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-51 2012 QUEST FOOT LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FOOT LAMP DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496065 JMLIA2178ZZ 1. Instrument lower panel LH 2. Lamp housing 3. Bulb & socket assembly : Pawl : Vehicle front DRIVER SIDE : Replacement INFOID:0000000007496066 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. FOOT LAMP BULB (DRIVER SIDE) 1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September INL-52 2012 QUEST FOOT LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock it and then remove bulb & socket assembly. A B C JMLIA1528ZZ PASSENGER SIDE D PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496067 E F G H I J K INL JMLIA2179ZZ M 1. Instrument lower panel RH 2. Lamp housing 3. Bulb& socket assembly : Pawl N : Vehicle front PASSENGER SIDE : Replacement INFOID:0000000007496068 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. FOOT LAMP BULB (PASSENGER SIDE) Revision: 2011 September INL-53 2012 QUEST O P FOOT LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". 2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock it and then remove bulb & socket assembly. JMLIA1528ZZ Revision: 2011 September INL-54 2012 QUEST STEP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > STEP LAMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496069 B C D E F JMLIA1423ZZ 1. Step lamp assembly 2. G Bulb : Pawl Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496070 CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. H I REMOVAL 1. J Disengage step lamp assembly fixing pawls with a remover tool (A). CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. K : Pawl 2. INL Disconnect harness connector, and then remove step lamp assembly. JMLIA1529ZZ M INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. N Replacement INFOID:0000000007496071 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. STEP LAMP BULB Revision: 2011 September INL-55 2012 QUEST O P STEP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Push bulb with a remover tool (A), and then remove bulb. JMLIA1530ZZ Revision: 2011 September INL-56 2012 QUEST PERSONAL LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > PERSONAL LAMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496072 B C D E F G H I J JMLIA1424ZZ 1. Headlining 2. Rear cooler grille 4. Bulb 5. Lens 3. K Personal lamp case : Pawl INL : Metal clip Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496073 M CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. N REMOVAL 1. a. Remove rear cooler grille. Disengage rear cooler grille fixing metal clips with a remover tool (A). O P : Metal clip b. Disconnect harness connector, and then remove rear cooler grille. JMIIA1185ZZ Revision: 2011 September INL-57 2012 QUEST PERSONAL LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove personal lamp case. Disengage personal lamp case fixing metal clips with a remover tool (A), and then remove personal lamp case. : Metal clip JMLIA1532ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Replacement INFOID:0000000007496074 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. PERSONAL LAMP BULB 1. 2. 3. Remove personal lamp case. Refer to INL-57, "Removal and Installation". Remove lens fixing screw. Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A), and then remove lens. JMLIA1533ZZ : Pawl 4. Remove bulb. Revision: 2011 September INL-58 2012 QUEST LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007496075 B C D E F G H I JMLIA2180ZZ 1. Luggage room lamp case 4. Luggage side lower finisher LH 2. Bulb 3. Lens J : Pawl K : Metal clip : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007496076 CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. INL M REMOVAL Disengage luggage room lamp case fixing metal clips with a remover tool (A), and then remove luggage room lamp case. INSTALLATION O Install in the revers order of removal. Replacement INFOID:0000000007496077 CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb. • Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns. Revision: 2011 September N INL-59 2012 QUEST P LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP BULB 1. 2. 3. Remove luggage room lamp case. Refer to INL-59, "Removal and Installation". Remove lens fixing screw. Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A), and then remove lens. JMLIA1533ZZ : Pawl 4. Remove bulb. Revision: 2011 September INL-60 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Bulb Specifications Item INFOID:0000000007496078 Type Wattage (W) Wedge 8 LED — — 1.2 LED — Glove box lamp — 1.4 Foot lamp (driver side) — 1.4 Map lamp Total coordination of illumination Vanity mirror lamp Push-button ignition switch illumination Foot lamp (passenger side) — 1.4 Wedge 3.4 Personal lamp — 8 Luggage room lamp — 8 Step lamp B C D E F G H I J K INL M N O P Revision: 2011 September INL-61 2012 QUEST ENGINE SECTION LU ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM A LU C D E CONTENTS F SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2 OIL COOLER .................................................... 11 Engine Lubrication System ...................................... 2 Engine Lubrication System Schematic ...................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 Inspection ................................................................12 G UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 13 H PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4 OIL PUMP ......................................................... 13 Exploded View .........................................................13 Removal and Installation .........................................13 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................13 Inspection ................................................................14 PREPARATION ............................................ 5 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7 ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 7 Inspection .................................................................. 7 Draining ..................................................................... 8 Refilling ..................................................................... 9 I J SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 16 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 16 OIL FILTER ........................................................10 Periodical Maintenance Specification ....................16 Engine Oil Pressure ...............................................16 Oil Pump .................................................................16 Regulator Valve ......................................................16 Removal and Installation ......................................... 10 Inspection ................................................................ 10 K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September LU-1 2012 QUEST DESCRIPTION < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Engine Lubrication System INFOID:0000000007493513 JPBIA1773GB Revision: 2011 September LU-2 2012 QUEST DESCRIPTION < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Engine Lubrication System Schematic INFOID:0000000007493514 A LU C D E F G H I JPBIA1775GB J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September LU-3 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000007493515 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface. • Remove liquid gasket completely from the liquid gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Apply liquid gasket to the liquid gasket application surface. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". • Within 5 minutes of liquid gasket application, install in the mating component. • If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. • Never retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation. • After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. Revision: 2011 September LU-4 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007493516 LU The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST25051001 (J-25695-1) Oil pressure gauge Description C Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 D kg/cm2, 356 psi) E NT050 Adapting oil pressure gauge to oil pan (upper) ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Hose F G H S-NT559 Removing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench I J S-NT375 Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007493517 Tool name Description Power tools Loosening nuts and bolts K L M N PBIC0190E O P Revision: 2011 September LU-5 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > Tool name Description Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket NT052 Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch 27 mm (1.06 in) PBIC4066E Revision: 2011 September LU-6 2012 QUEST ENGINE OIL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A ENGINE OIL Inspection INFOID:0000000007493518 LU ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOTE: Before starting engine, put vehicle horizontally and check the engine oil level. If engine is already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking. 1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean. 2. Insert oil level gauge and check the engine oil level is within the range shown in the figure. 3. If it is out of range, adjust it. C D E F G PBIC4202E ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE • Check engine oil for white turbidity or heavy contamination. • If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. H ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE I Check for engine oil leakage around the following areas: • Oil pans (lower and upper) • Oil pan drain plug • Oil pressure switch • Oil temperature sensor • Oil filter • Oil cooler • Camshaft sprocket cover(bank 1 and bank 2) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1 and bank 2) • Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover • Mating surface between front timing chain case and rear timing chain case • Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder head • Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder block • Mating surface between rear timing chain case and oil pan (upper) • Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head • Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear) • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) J K L M N OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: • Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. • Oil pressure check should be done in “Parking position”. 1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September LU-7 O P 2012 QUEST ENGINE OIL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 3. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch (2), and remove oil pressure switch using deep socket (commercial service tool). 1 : Oil filter : Vehicle front CAUTION: Never drop or shock oil pressure switch. JPBIA1677ZZ 4. Install the oil pressure gauge [SST: ST25051001 (J-25695-1)] (A) and hose [SST: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)] (B). JPBIA0074ZZ 5. 6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. NOTE: When the engine oil temperature is low, the engine oil pressure becomes high. Engine oil pressure 7. a. b. If difference is extreme, check engine oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leakage. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows: Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and the mating surface. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Tightening torque c. : Refer to LU-16, "Engine Oil Pressure". : Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". After warming up engine, check there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine. Draining INFOID:0000000007493519 WARNING: • Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. • Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". 2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap. Revision: 2011 September LU-8 2012 QUEST ENGINE OIL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 4. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain engine oil. A : Vehicle front LU C JPBIA1676ZZ D Refilling 1. INFOID:0000000007493520 Install drain plug with new drain plug washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • Do not reuse drain plug washer. • Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer. E F Tightening torque 2. Refill with new engine oil. Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". Engine oil capacity 3. 4. 5. : Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". G : Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". CAUTION: • When filling engine oil, never pull out oil level gauge. • The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. • Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine. Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September LU-9 2012 QUEST OIL FILTER < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > OIL FILTER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493521 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. • Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot. • When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. • Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt. • Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle. 1. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View". 2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (A), remove oil filter. : Vehicle front JPBIA1678ZZ INSTALLATION 1. 2. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter. SMA010 3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification. Oil filter: : 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) JPBIA0077ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007493522 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September LU-10 2012 QUEST OIL COOLER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A OIL COOLER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493523 LU C D E F G H I JPBIA4859GB 1. Connector bolt 2. Copper gasket 3. Water drain plug 4. Water pipe 5. Bracket 6. Clamp 7. Water hose 8. Relief valve 9. O-ring 10. Oil cooler 11. Connector bolt 12. Oil filter 15. Water hose 13. Water hose 14. Water pipe A. To water connector B. Refer to LU-10 J K L : Engine front M : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) N : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Should be lubricated with oil. O : Sealing point Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493524 P REMOVAL WARNING: Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil and engine coolant may be hot. NOTE: When remove oil cooler only, step 2 is unnecessary. 1. Remove front wheel (RH). 2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September LU-11 2012 QUEST OIL COOLER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting". NOTE: Perform this step when removing water pipes. 4. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never spill engine oil on drive belt. 5. Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler. • When removing oil cooler only, pinching water hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling out. • Remaining engine coolant in piping will come out. Use a tray to collect it. CAUTION: • Perform this step when the engine is cold. • Never spill engine coolant on drive belt. 6. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler. CAUTION: Never spill engine oil to rubber parts such as drive belt. 7. Remove water hoses if necessary. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Check that no foreign objects are adhering to the installation surfaces of oil cooler and oil pan (upper). • Align cutout (B) on oil cooler (2) with protrusion (A) on oil pan (upper) side, and tighten connector bolt (1). JPBIA1680ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007493525 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler. Relief Valve Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve in place by tapping it. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8, "Inspection". Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil or engine coolant. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level again. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September LU-12 2012 QUEST OIL PUMP < UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A OIL PUMP Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493526 LU C D E F G JPBIA1681GB H 1. Oil pump body 2. Oil pump outer rotor 3. Oil pump inner rotor 4. Oil pump cover 5. Regulator valve plug 6. Regulator valve spring 7. Regulator valve I : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) J : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Should be lubricated with oil. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493527 K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan (lower and upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". Remove front timing chain case and timing chain (primary). Refer to EM-66, "Exploded View". Remove oil pump assembly. L M INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • When installing, align crankshaft flat faces with oil pump inner rotor flat faces. Disassembly and Assembly N INFOID:0000000007493528 O DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pump cover. Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body. After removing regulator valve plug, remove regulator valve spring and regulator valve. P ASSEMBLY Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: 2011 September LU-13 2012 QUEST OIL PUMP < UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > • Install oil pump inner rotor with the groove (C) faced to oil pump cover side (B). A : Oil pump body side JPBIA0084ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007493529 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Oil Pump Clearance • Measure the clearance with feeler gauge (C). - Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body. [Position (B)] Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". - Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor. [Position (A)] Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". JPBIA0078ZZ • Measure the clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge (A). - Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body. [Position (C)] Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". - Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body. [Position (B)] Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". JPBIA0079ZZ • Calculate the clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body as follows: OIL PUMP BODY INNER DIAMETER - Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer. [Position (A)] OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR OUTER DIAMETER - Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of oil pump inner rotor (1) with micrometer. [Position (B)] JPBIA0080ZZ OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR TO OIL PUMP BODY CLEARANCE - (Clearance) = (Oil pump body inner diameter) – (Oil pump inner rotor outer diameter) Revision: 2011 September LU-14 2012 QUEST OIL PUMP < UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". A • If measured/calculated values are out of the standard, replace oil pump assembly. Regulator Valve Clearance (Clearance) = (Regulator valve hole diameter) – (Regulator valve outer diameter) 1 : Regulator valve 2 : Oil pump body Standard LU C D : Refer to LU-16, "Regulator Valve". • If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace oil pump assembly. CAUTION: • Coat regulator valve with engine oil. • Check that it falls smoothly into valve hole by its own weight. E JPBIA0081ZZ INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION F 1. 2. 3. 4. G Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". Start the engine, and check that there is no leakage of engine oil. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September LU-15 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000007493530 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: With oil filter change Drain and refill Without oil filter change Dry engine (Overhaul) (US qt, lmp qt) 4.6 (4-7/8, 4) 4.3 (4-1/2, 3-3/4) 5.3 (5-5/8, 4-5/8) Engine Oil Pressure INFOID:0000000007493531 Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure* Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14) 2,000 rpm More than 294 (3.0, 43) *: Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F) Oil Pump INFOID:0000000007493532 Unit: mm (in) Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body 0.114 - 0.260 (0.0045 - 0.0102) Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor Below 0.180 (0.0071) Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body 0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043) Oil pump inner rotor to oil pump body clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) Regulator Valve INFOID:0000000007493533 Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump body clearance Revision: 2011 September 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) LU-16 2012 QUEST MAINTENANCE SECTION MA MAINTENANCE A B C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ............................................ 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................ 4 Explanation of General Maintenance ........................ 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ................................ 6 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ........................ 6 Schedule 1 ................................................................ 6 Schedule 2 ................................................................ 8 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................................10 Fluids and Lubricants .............................................. 10 Engine Oil Recommendation .................................. 10 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio .......................... 10 ENGINE MAINTENANCE ...................................12 DRIVE BELT .............................................................. 12 DRIVE BELT : Exploded View ................................ 12 DRIVE BELT : Checking ......................................... 12 DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment ........................ 12 ENGINE COOLANT ................................................... 12 ENGINE COOLANT : Draining ................................ 12 ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling ................................ 13 ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing ............................... 15 RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 15 RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 15 RADIATOR ................................................................ 16 RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 16 FUEL LINES .............................................................. 16 FUEL LINES : Inspection ........................................ 16 AIR CLEANER FILTER ............................................. 16 Revision: 2011 September AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation ....16 ENGINE OIL ...............................................................17 ENGINE OIL : Draining ............................................17 ENGINE OIL : Refilling ............................................17 F G OIL FILTER ................................................................17 OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation ...................18 OIL FILTER : Inspection ..........................................18 H SPARK PLUG ............................................................18 SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation ...............19 SPARK PLUG : Inspection ......................................19 I POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM....19 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM : Work Procedure ............................................20 J K EVAP VAPOR LINES ................................................20 EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection ...........................20 CHASSIS MAINTENANCE ............................... 21 L EXHAUST SYSTEM ...................................................21 EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection ............................21 M CVT FLUID .................................................................21 CVT FLUID : Inspection ...........................................21 WHEELS ....................................................................22 WHEELS : Wheel Balance Adjustment ...................22 WHEELS : Tire Rotation ..........................................24 N O BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS .........................24 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection ....25 BRAKE LINES AND CABLES ...................................25 BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection ..............25 BRAKE FLUID ...........................................................25 BRAKE FLUID : Changing .......................................25 DISC BRAKE .............................................................25 DISC BRAKE : Inspection .......................................25 MA-1 2012 QUEST MA DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake ............................ 26 DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake ............................. 26 SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection ................. 29 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ........................... 26 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection ...... 26 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 30 POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES .................. 27 POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspection .......................................................................... 27 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 30 AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS ........................... 27 AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection ..... 27 DRIVE SHAFT ........................................................... 27 DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection .................................... 28 BODY MAINTENANCE ..................................... 29 LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH ..................... 29 LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricating ........................................................................... 29 SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS ...................................... 29 Revision: 2011 September DRIVE BELT .............................................................. 30 DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt ........................................ 30 ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 30 ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification ............................................................ 30 ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 30 ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification .................... 30 SPARK PLUG ........................................................... 30 SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug .................................... 30 ROAD WHEEL .......................................................... 30 ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel ................................. 30 MA-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007494684 B The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench Description C Removing and installing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) D E S-NT375 F Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007494685 G Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Power tool ( — ) Loosening nuts and bolts H I PBIC0190E Spark plug wrench ( — ) Removing and installing spark plug a : 14 mm (0.55 in) J K L JPBIA0399ZZ M N O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-3 2012 QUEST GENERAL MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE Explanation of General Maintenance INFOID:0000000007494686 General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them. OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Item Tires Reference page Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. WT-48 Wheel nuts When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). MA-24 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. WT-45 If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "lmportant Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet. FSU-6 RSU-6 MA-22 Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. — Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. — Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back door, trunk lid and glass hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. MA-29 Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis. — Wheel alignment and balance Lamps — INSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Item Reference page Warning lamps and chimes Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly. — Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. — Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. — Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in) — Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restrains move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks. — Seats Revision: 2011 September MA-4 2012 QUEST GENERAL MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Item Seat belts Reference page A Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. MA-29 Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. — Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. — Brake pedal and booster Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal. BR-7 BR-13 Parking brake Check that the pedal has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. PB-3 CVT P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. — B C D E UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Item Reference page Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. CO-8 Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. MA-16 Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir. MA-25 Battery Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. PG-119 Engine drive belt Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-12 Engine oil level Check the level on the oil level gauge after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. MA-27 Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. MA-21 The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate. — Underbody Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately. F — G H I J LU-7 K L M N — O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-5 2012 QUEST PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Introduction of Periodic Maintenance INFOID:0000000007494687 Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: • Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. • Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits. Emission Control System Maintenance Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-6 Emission Control System Maintenance Chassis and Body Maintenance Schedule 1 MA-8 INFOID:0000000007494688 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Drive belt NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section Page or Content Title MA-12 [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* MA-20 Fuel lines I* MA-16 Fuel filter NOTE (3) — Engine coolant* NOTE (4) MA-12 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km). NOTE (5) EM-18 MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MA-19 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title Drive belt NOTE (1) I* MA-12 Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* MA-20 Fuel lines I* MA-16 Revision: 2011 September MA-6 2012 QUEST PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title Fuel filter NOTE (3) — Engine coolant* NOTE (4) MA-12 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 B C D Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* A Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km). MA-19 NOTE (5) EM-18 E NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit. F (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. G H (5) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. I CHASSIS AND BODY Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 Brake lines & cables I I MA-25 I MA-25 R R MA-25 I I MA-21 I MA-26 MA-27 I Brake fluid NOTE (1) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Reference Section Page or Content Title 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 I Brake pads & rotors CVT fluid 30 (48) 24 15 (24) 12 I I I I MA-4 WT-42 NOTE (2) Drive shaft boots I I I I MA-28 Exhaust system I I I I MA-21 R VTL-18 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title I MA-25 I MA-25 R MA-25 In-cabin microfilter R MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 I I I Brake fluid Revision: 2011 September 45 (72) 36 R MA-7 I 56.25 (90) 45 2012 QUEST J K L M N O MA PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months CVT fluid 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 NOTE (1) 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 I Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation 41.25 (66) 33 I I I 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title I MA-21 I MA-26 MA-27 MA-4 WT-42 NOTE (2) Drive shaft boots I I I I MA-28 Exhaust system I I I I MA-21 R VTL-18 In-cabin microfilter R NOTE: (1) Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid (NS-2). If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealers every 100,000 km (60,000 miles), then change CVT fluid NS-2 if necessary. And if the inspection is not be performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid NS-2 every 100,000 km (60,000 miles). Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty. (2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section. Schedule 2 INFOID:0000000007494689 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title I* MA-12 [R] [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* I* MA-20 Fuel lines I* I* MA-16 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belt Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter Fuel filter NOTE (2) — Engine coolant* NOTE (3) MA-12 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km). NOTE (4) MA-19 EM-18 NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit. (2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section. (3) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. (4) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. CHASSIS AND BODY Revision: 2011 September MA-8 2012 QUEST PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title Brake lines & cables I I I I MA-25 Brake pads & rotors I I I I MA-25 R MA-25 I MA-21 I MA-26 MA-27 Brake fluid CVT fluid R NOTE (1) I Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Drive shaft boots I I MA-4 WT-42 NOTE (2) I Exhaust system In-cabin microfilter I I I I R R R I MA-28 I MA-21 R VTL-18 A B C D E F NOTE: (1) Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. G (2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section. H I J K L M N O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-9 2012 QUEST RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000007494690 Capacity (Approximate) Engine oil Drain and refill US measure Imp measure Liter With oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 Without oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3 5-5/8 qt 4-5/8 qt 5.3 With reservoir tank 12 qt 10 qt 11.3 Reservoir tank 6/8 qt 5/8 qt Dry engine (Overhaul) Cooling system CVT fluid 9 qt *6 10-6/8 qt 0.75 *6 10.2*6 Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • Engine oil with API Certification Mark • Viscosity SAE 5W-30*1,*2 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) or equivalent Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2*3 1-1/8 qt 7/8 qt 1.0 Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent*4 Brake fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No.116) Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent Fuel recommendation — — — Refer to GI-33, "Fuel". Power steering fluid (PSF) *1: For additional information, see “Engine Oil Recommendation”. *2: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester oil available an NISSAN dealer. *3: Using only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. *4: Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly. *5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through an NISSAN dealer. *6: The fluid capacity is the reference value. Engine Oil Recommendation INFOID:0000000007494691 NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification and International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. JSPIA0006ZZ 1. API certification mark 2. API service symbol Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio INFOID:0000000007494692 The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary. Revision: 2011 September MA-10 2012 QUEST RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > WARNING: • Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. • The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. CAUTION: • When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacture's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system. • The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-11 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > ENGINE MAINTENANCE DRIVE BELT DRIVE BELT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494693 JPBIA4631ZZ 1. Idler pulley 2. Drive belt 3. Idler pulley 4. Drive belt auto-tensioner 5. Crankshaft pulley 6. Idler pulley C. Range when new drive belt is installed 7. A/C compressor 8. Alternator A. Indicator B. Possible use range D. View D : Engine front DRIVE BELT : Checking INFOID:0000000007494694 WARNING: Be sure to perform the this step when engine is stopped. • Check that the indicator (A) of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the possible use range (B). NOTE: • Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold. • When new drive belt is installed, the indicator should be within the range (C) in the figure. • Visually check entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks. • If the indicator is out of the possible use range or belt is damaged, replace drive belt. DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment INFOID:0000000007494695 Refer to MA-30, "DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt". ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT : Draining INFOID:0000000007881968 WARNING: • To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot. • Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way. 1. Remove engine under cover. Revision: 2011 September MA-12 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 2. Open radiator drain plug (1) at the bottom of radiator, and then remove radiator cap. A : Vehicle front B C JPBIA5339ZZ D 3. 4. When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to EM-63, "Setting". Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-10, "Flushing". ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling INFOID:0000000007825214 CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Do not put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging. • When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". 1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug. CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. Tightening torque 2. 3. 4. E F G H I : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly". Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Remove air bleeder plug (1) of heater pipe. J K L : Vehicle front M N JPBIA5340ZZ 5. O Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level. CAUTION: MA Revision: 2011 September MA-13 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) • Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck slowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute to allow air in system to escape. • When coolant comes out from the air bleeder plug of heater pipe, tighten the bleeder plug. JPBIA0412ZZ Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) : Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) : Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". A : MAX B : MIN JPBIA0102ZZ 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". Install radiator cap. Start the engine. Maintain the engine at 1,800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. After performing this, stop the engine. Remove radiator cap with the engine cold (approx. 50°C or less), and check the cooling water level. If the fluid level is low, refill with cooling water to the lip of radiator. Repeat Steps from 7 to 9 four times. Cap the radiator, and start the engine. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at 3,000 rpm. • Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water. CAUTION: Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F). • Cool down using fan to reduce the time. • If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant. CAUTION: Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant. Repeat steps 7 through 10 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no longer drops. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”. Revision: 2011 September MA-14 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • Sound may be noticeable at heater unit. 19. Repeat step 13 three times. 20. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5, and steps from 7 to 14 until engine coolant level no longer drops. B ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing 1. INFOID:0000000007829823 Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug. CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. Tightening torque A C D : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly". 2. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". 3. Remove air bleeder plug. 4. Fill with cooling water until it overflows from the bleeder plug. 5. Install air bleeder plug. 6. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. CAUTION: Never adhere the water to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.) • When water overflows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the water. 7. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". 8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". 12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. RADIATOR CAP E F G H I J K RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494699 L • Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap. - Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the plunger (B) cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top. - Check if valve seat has no soil and damage. - Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure valve. - Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of negative-pressure valve. M N JPBIA1961ZZ O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-15 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • Check radiator cap relief pressure. Standard and limit : Refer to CO-28, "Radiator". - When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (A), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface. JPBIA0109ZZ • Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three. CAUTION: When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator pipe (upper) filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. RADIATOR RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494700 Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: CAUTION: • Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins. • When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan assembly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. • Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81 in). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. FUEL LINES FUEL LINES : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494701 • Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. A : Engine B : Fuel line C : Fuel tank • If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts. JPBIA0129ZZ AIR CLEANER FILTER AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494702 REMOVAL 1. 2. Unhook air cleaner case (lower) side clips and lift up air cleaner case (upper). Remove air cleaner filter and holder assembly from air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September MA-16 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • Insert pawls (B) of air cleaner case (upper) (1) into 3 notches (A) of air cleaner case (lower) (2) and fix with clips. A :Vehicle front B • Check that the air cleaner case (upper) is securely installed with no backlash. C JPBIA4858ZZ ENGINE OIL D ENGINE OIL : Draining INFOID:0000000007494703 E WARNING: • Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. • Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". 2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap. 4. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain engine oil. : Vehicle front F G H I J K JPBIA1676ZZ ENGINE OIL : Refilling INFOID:0000000007494704 L 1. Install drain plug with new drain plug washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer. Tightening torque 2. : Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". N Refill with new engine oil. Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". Engine oil capacity 3. 4. 5. M : Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification". O CAUTION: • When filling engine oil, never pull out oil level gauge. • The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifica- MA tions for reference only. • Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine. Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". OIL FILTER Revision: 2011 September MA-17 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494705 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. • Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot. • When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. • Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt. • Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle. 1. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View". 2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (A), remove oil filter. : Vehicle front JPBIA1678ZZ INSTALLATION 1. 2. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter. SMA010 3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification. Oil filter: : 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) JPBIA0077ZZ OIL FILTER : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494706 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". SPARK PLUG Revision: 2011 September MA-18 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494707 A REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View". 2. Remove air cleaner cases (upper and lower) and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". 3. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View". 4. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View". 5. Remove spark plug with a spark plug wrench (commercial service tool). a B C D : 14 mm (0.55 in) E F JPBIA0030ZZ G INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. H SPARK PLUG : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494708 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL I Use the standard type spark plug for normal condition. Spark plug (Standard type) : Refer to MA-30, "SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug". J CAUTION: • Never drop or shock spark plug. • Never use a wire brush for cleaning. • If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. K L Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm , 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds 2 M SMA773C • Spark plug gap adjustment is not required between replacement intervals. • Measure spark plug gap. When it exceeds the limit, replace spark plug even if it is within the specified replacement mileage. Refer to MA-30, "SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug". N O MA JPBIA0031ZZ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM Revision: 2011 September MA-19 2012 QUEST ENGINE MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007494709 1.CHECK PCV VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace PCV valve. Refer to .EM-52, "Exploded View" PBIB1589E EVAP VAPOR LINES EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection 1. 2. INFOID:0000000007494710 Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Refer to EC-455, "Work Procedure". Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc. Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection". Revision: 2011 September MA-20 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > CHASSIS MAINTENANCE A EXHAUST SYSTEM EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494711 B Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage or deterioration. • If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. C D E SMA211A CVT FLUID F CVT FLUID : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494712 CHECKING CVT FLUID G The fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). The fluid level check procedure is as follows: 1. Check for fluid leakage. 2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area. When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10 minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). 3. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 4. Apply parking brake firmly. 5. With engine at idle, while depressing brake pedal, move shift selector throughout the entire shift range. SMA146B 6. Pull out the CVT fluid level gauge from the CVT fluid charging pipe after pressing the tab on the CVT fluid level gauge to release the lock. H I J K L M N SCIA1933E 7. O Wipe fluid off the CVT fluid level gauge. Insert the CVT fluid level gauge rotating 180° from the originally installed position, then securely push the CVT fluid level gauge until it meets the top end of the CVT fluid charging pipe. CAUTION: When wiping away the CVT fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth rag. MA SCIA1931E Revision: 2011 September MA-21 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 8. Place the selector lever in “P” or “N” and check that the fluid level is within the specified range. CAUTION: When reinstalling CVT fluid level gauge, insert it into the CVT fluid charging pipe and rotate it to the original installation position until securely locked. SCIA1932E CVT FLUID CONDITION Check CVT fluid condition. • If CVT fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of CVT. Flush cooling system after repair of CVT. • If CVT fluid contains frictional material (clutches, brakes, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of CVT. Refer to TM-142, "Cleaning". Fluid status Conceivable cause Required operation Varnished (viscous varnish state) CVT fluid becomes degraded due to high temperatures. Replace the CVT fluid and check the CVT main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.) Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid Replace the CVT fluid and check for places where water is getting in. Large amount of metal powder mixed in Unusual wear of sliding parts within CVT Replace the CVT fluid and check for improper operation of the CVT. ATA0022D WHEELS WHEELS : Wheel Balance Adjustment INFOID:0000000007494713 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTMENT Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel. CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. • After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road wheel. ADJUSTMENT (ALUMINUM WHEEL) • The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to each instruction manual. • If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for aluminum wheels. 1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value above and install to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: • Never install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. • Before installing the balance weight, always clean the mating surface of the road wheel. Revision: 2011 September MA-22 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > a. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) NOTE: Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz) 36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) A B C SMA054D D b. Installed balance weight in the position. • When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) is aligned with the tire balance machine indication position (angle) (C). CAUTION: • Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights. • Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones. • Never install three or more sheets of balance weight. E F G H I J JPEIC0040ZZ c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Never install one balance weight sheet on top of another. K L M N PEIA0033E 3. 4. 5. O Start the tire balance machine again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the tire balance machine indication position (angle). MA CAUTION: Never install three or more balance weight. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the allowable unbalance value. CAUTION: If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures. Revision: 2011 September MA-23 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > Allowable unbalance value Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". Static (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". ADJUSTMENT (STEEL WHEEL) Preparation Before Adjustment Remove balance weight from the road wheel. Wheel Balance Adjustment • The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to each instruction manual. • If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for steel wheels. 1. Set road wheel to wheel balancer, and then start wheel balancer. 2. Install balance weight to road wheel according to the unbalance and position (angle) displayed on wheel balancer. CAUTION: • Never install three or more balance weights on one side. • Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights. • Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones. • Always use a plastic hammer when attaching the weight. 3. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the allowable unbalance value. CAUTION: If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures. Allowable unbalance value Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". Static (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". WHEELS : Tire Rotation INFOID:0000000007494714 • Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-4, "Explanation of General Maintenance". • When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified torque. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires. • When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. • Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding the criteria. • Use NISSAN genuine wheel nut. • Perform the ID registration, after tire rotation. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". SMA829C BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS Revision: 2011 September MA-24 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494715 A • If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. B C D SBR451D BRAKE LINES AND CABLES BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection E INFOID:0000000007494716 • Check brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, etc. F G H SBR389C BRAKE FLUID BRAKE FLUID : Changing 1. 2. I INFOID:0000000007494717 J Drain brake fluid from each bleed valve. Refill until new brake fluid comes out from each bleed valve. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System". • Refill with recommended Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116). Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. K L M SBR419C DISC BRAKE N DISC BRAKE : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494718 O DISC ROTOR Check condition, wear, and damage. CALIPER MA • Check for leakage. Revision: 2011 September MA-25 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > SMA922A BRAKE PAD • Check for wear or damage. BRA0010D DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000007494719 Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 26.0 (1.024) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.040 (0.0016) DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000007494720 Unit: mm (in) Item Brake pad Disc rotor Limit Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) Wear thickness 14.0 (0.551) Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.050 (0.0020) STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494721 STEERING GEAR • Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease leakage. • Check connection with steering column for looseness. SLIA0014E Revision: 2011 September MA-26 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > STEERING LINKAGE Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage. A POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494722 Check fluid level in reservoir tank with engine off. Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) or “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). CAUTION: • Do not overfill. • Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". B C D E SST850C F • Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. • Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. G H I SST851C AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection J INFOID:0000000007494723 Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage. • Shake each wheel to check for excessive play. • Check wheel bearings for smooth operation. • Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness. • Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage. • Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. K L M SMA525A N O MA JPPIA0011ZZ DRIVE SHAFT Revision: 2011 September MA-27 2012 QUEST CHASSIS MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection INFOID:0000000007494724 Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease leakage. SFA108A Revision: 2011 September MA-28 2012 QUEST BODY MAINTENANCE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > BODY MAINTENANCE A LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricating INFOID:0000000007494725 B For hood and hood lock illustration. • Hood: Refer to DLK-391, "Exploded View". • Hood lock: Refer to DLK-426, "Exploded View". For door and door lock illustration. • Front door: Refer to DLK-399, "Exploded View". • Front door lock: Refer to DLK-430, "Exploded View". • Slide door: Refer to DLK-404, "Exploded View". • Slide door lock: Refer to DLK-433, "Exploded View". For back door and back door lock illustration. • Back door: Refer to DLK-418, "Exploded View" . • Back door lock: Refer to DLK-443, "Exploded View". C D E SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection F INFOID:0000000007494726 For front seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-4, "Exploded View". For second seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-10, "Exploded View". For third seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-15, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hardwares (I.e. anchor bolt, guide rail set). Nissan recommends to replace all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision, unless not damaged and properly operating after minor collision. Also inspect seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision, and replace if damaged or improperly operating. Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags are deployed. • If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace as seat belt assembly. • If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace belt assembly. • Never oil tongue and buckle. • Use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. For details, refer to SB-6, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection", SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection", SB-17, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection"in SB section. • Check anchors for loose mounting • Check belts for damage • Check retractor for smooth operation • Check function of buckles and tongues when buckled and released G H I J K L M N O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-29 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) DRIVE BELT DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt INFOID:0000000007494727 DRIVE BELT Tension of drive belt Belt tension is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by drive belt auto-tensioner. ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000007494728 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) (US qt, lmp qt) 11.3 (12, 10) Reservoir tank 0.75 (6/8, 5/8) ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000007494729 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: With oil filter change Drain and refill (US qt, lmp qt) 4.6 (4-7/8, 4) Without oil filter change 4.3 (4-1/2, 3-3/4) Dry engine (Overhaul) 5.3 (5-5/8, 4-5/8) SPARK PLUG SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug INFOID:0000000007494730 SPARK PLUG Unit: mm (in) Make DENSO Standard type FXE22HR11 Gap Standard 1.1 (0.043) Limit 1.4 (0.055) ROAD WHEEL ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel INFOID:0000000007494731 ALUMINUM WHEEL Item Runout Allowable unbalance Limit Axial runout Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in) Radial runout Dynamic (At flange) Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side) Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) STEEL WHEEL Revision: 2011 September MA-30 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Item Runout Limit Axial runout (Average) Less than 0.8 mm (0.031 in) Radial runout (Average) Less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in) Dynamic (At flange) Allowable unbalance A B Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side) Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) STEEL WHEEL (EMERGENCY) C Item Runout Limit Axial runout (Average) Radial runout (Average) D Less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in) E F G H I J K L M N O MA Revision: 2011 September MA-31 2012 QUEST DRIVER CONTROLS SECTION MIR MIRRORS A B C D E CONTENTS WITH ADP WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 13 PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ................................. 13 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Wiring Diagram ........................................................13 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM ............................................................ 15 PREPARATION ............................................ 4 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 16 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................... 16 Special Service Tools .............................................. 4 Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch .......................... 5 Door Mirror ................................................................ 6 Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror ................................ 6 SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ........................................... 7 DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description ...... 7 DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : Schematic .................... 8 AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM .............................................................................. 8 AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description ......................................... 8 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) ......................................................... 9 CONSULT Function .................................................. 9 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 12 DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT .........12 Wiring Diagram ........................................................15 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16 G H I J SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .............................................................. 17 Work Flow ................................................................17 Inspection Procedure ...............................................19 Diagnostic Worksheet ..............................................21 K REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 23 MIR INSIDE MIRROR ............................................... 23 Exploded View .........................................................23 Removal and Installation .........................................23 M DOOR MIRROR ................................................ 25 Exploded View .........................................................25 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY ....................................26 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..................................................................26 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly .................................................................28 N O P GLASS MIRROR ........................................................29 GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation ...........29 DOOR MIRROR COVER ...........................................30 DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................30 List of ECU Reference ............................................ 12 Revision: 2011 September F MIR-1 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH ............................................................. 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 WITHOUT ADP PRECAUTION ............................................. 33 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 37 INSIDE MIRROR ................................................ 37 Exploded View ........................................................ 37 Removal and Installation ......................................... 37 DOOR MIRROR ................................................. 39 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 33 Exploded View ........................................................ 39 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................. 33 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY .................................... 40 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .................................................................. 40 DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................ 42 PREPARATION ........................................... 34 PREPARATION ................................................. 34 Special Service Tools ........................................... 34 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 34 WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 35 DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ................................. 35 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 35 AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM ............................................................. 36 GLASS MIRROR ....................................................... 43 GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation .......... 43 DOOR MIRROR COVER ........................................... 44 DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 44 DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH ............................................................. 46 Removal and Installation ......................................... 46 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 36 Revision: 2011 September MIR-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [WITH ADP] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492243 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION [WITH ADP] < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007492244 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39570) Chassis ear Locates the noise SIIA0993E (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairs the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007492245 Tool name Description Remover tool Remove the clip and pawl and metal clip PIIB7923J Revision: 2011 September MIR-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492246 B C D E F G H I JMLIA2141ZZ No. 1. 2. 3. Component parts Function BCM The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Automatic drive positioner control unit Door mirror is supplied with power after receiving the input of mirror switch and changeover switch. Refer to ADP-8, "Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit" for detailed installation location. TCM The CVT shift position signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN communication. Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 4. Door mirror remote control switch Refer to MIR-5, "Door Mirror Remote Control Switch". 5. Door mirror (driver side) Refer to MIR-6, "Door Mirror". 6. Driver seat control unit The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. Refer to ADP-8, "Driver Seat Control Unit" for detailed installation location. 7. Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror Refer to MIR-6, "Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror". Door Mirror Remote Control Switch INFOID:0000000007836763 It transmits mirror face adjust operation to automatic drive positioner control unit. CHANGEOVER SWITCH MIR-5 K MIR M N O MIRROR SWITCH Revision: 2011 September J 2012 QUEST P COMPONENT PARTS [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > It transmits the LH/RH control of door mirror that supplies power to automatic drive positioner control unit. Door Mirror INFOID:0000000007836764 It makes mirror face operate from side to side and up and down via integrated motor. Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror INFOID:0000000007836765 It automatically changes the light transmittance according to the brightness of the light from the headlight of the vehicle behind. Revision: 2011 September MIR-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492247 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F G H I JMLIA2115GB J MANUAL FUNCTION Description K • Automatic drive positioner control unit controls door mirror. • Automatic drive positioner control unit inputs changeover switch signal and perform the LH/RH control of door mirror motor supplying electric power when changeover switch is operated. • Automatic drive positioner control unit inputs mirror switch signal and supplies electric power to door mirror. MIR • The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted from BCM to driver seat control unit via CAN communication and from driver seat control unit to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication. M Operation Conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied, operation is not performed. • Ignition switch: ON or ACC • Changeover switch: Select either left or right N REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM Description • Select either of the door mirror faces by changeover switch, and then set mirror face downward. • When ignition switch is ON position and CVT shift selector is in R position, TCM sends the R signal to driver seat control unit. • The R signal is transmitted to automatic drive positioner control unit from driver seat control unit via UART communication. • When the R signal is detected, automatic drive positioner control unit activated mirror motor. Operation Conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied, operation is not performed. • Ignition switch: ON • Changeover switch: Select either left or right • CVT shift selector: R position Revision: 2011 September MIR-7 2012 QUEST O P SYSTEM [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > NOTE: During the reverse interlock door mirror system, if all of the above conditions are not satisfied, mirror face returns to original angle. AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM LINKED OPERATION Description Door mirror control is included in automatic drive positioner system. Refer to automatic drive positioner system for more details. Refer to ADP-9, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description". DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : Schematic INFOID:0000000007492248 JMLIA2117GB AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492249 The sensor built in inside mirror detects the brightness of headlight of the vehicle behind and automatically changes the light transmission to decrease the brightness. Revision: 2011 September MIR-8 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) CONSULT Function A INFOID:0000000007492250 The automatic drive positioner system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation using CONSULT. B APPLICATION ITEMS C Diagnostic mode Description Ecu Identification Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit. Self Diagnostic Result Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results. Data Monitor Displays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat control unit in real time. Active Test Drives each output unit. Work support Changes the setting for each system function. D E F SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR Monitor Item G Unit Main Signals Selection From Menu Contents H STARTER SW “ON/OFF” × × Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal. SET SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal. MEMORY SW 1 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal. MEMORY SW 2 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal. DETENT SW “ON/OFF” × × The CVT shift selector position “OFF (P position) / ON (other than P position)” judged from the detention switch signal. “LOCK/UNLOCK” × × NOTE: This item is indicated, but not monitored. SLIDE SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) signal. SLIDE SW–RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward) signal. STEERING STATUS RECLN SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward) signal. RECLN SW–RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward) signal. LIFT FR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (up) signal. LIFT FR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (down) signal. LIFT RR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (up) signal. LIFT RR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (down) signal. MIR CON SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (up) signal. MIR CON SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (down) signal. MIR CON SW–RH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (right) signal. Revision: 2011 September MIR-9 2012 QUEST I J K MIR M N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Unit Main Signals Selection From Menu MIR CON SW–LH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (left) signal. MIR CHNG SW–R “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to right) signal. MIR CHNG SW–L “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to left) signal. VEHICLE SPEED — × × Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h]. Monitor Item Contents P RANG SW CAN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the P range switch signal. R RANGE (CAN) “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the R range switch signal. DOOR SW–FL “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the front door switch (driver side) signal. DOOR SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door switch (front passenger side) signal. IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the ACC switch signal. KEY ON SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the key on switch signal. KEYLESS ID — × × Key ID status judged from the key ID signal. KYLS DR UNLK “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the driver side door unlock actuator output switch signal. VHCL SPEED (ABS) “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from vehicle speed signal. HANDLE “RHD/LHD” × × RHD/LHD status judged from handle position signal. TRANSMISSION “AT or CVT/ MT” × × AT or CVT/MT status judged from transmission. SLIDE PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. RECLN PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. LIFT FR PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. LIFT RR PULSE — – × Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. MIR/SEN RH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/ down is displayed. MIR/SEN RH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/ right is displayed. MIR/SEN LH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down is displayed. MIR/SEN LH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right is displayed. ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: When driving vehicle, do not perform active test. Test item Description SEAT SLIDE Activates/deactivates the sliding motor. SEAT RECLINING Activates/deactivates the reclining motor. Revision: 2011 September MIR-10 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) [WITH ADP] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item Description SEAT LIFTER FR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front). SEAT LIFTER RR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear). MIRROR MOTOR RH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side). MIRROR MOTOR LH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side). MEMORY SW INDCTR Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator. A B C WORK SUPPORT Work item Content Item D 40 mm SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be selected from 3 items. 80 mm 150 mm EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected: ON (operated) – OFF (not operated) E ON OFF F G H I J K MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-11 2012 QUEST DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT [WITH ADP] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007492251 ECU Reference ADP-25, "Reference Value" DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ADP-29, "Fail-safe" ADP-30, "DTC Index" AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Revision: 2011 September ADP-31, "Reference Value" MIR-12 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM [WITH ADP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492252 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O P JCLWA5123GB Revision: 2011 September MIR-13 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM [WITH ADP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCLWA5124GB Revision: 2011 September MIR-14 2012 QUEST AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM [WITH ADP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM Wiring Diagram A INFOID:0000000007492253 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not B C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O P JCLWA5133GB Revision: 2011 September MIR-15 2012 QUEST REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492254 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (MANUAL FUNCTION) Check door mirror function with door mirror remote control switch. Refer to ADP-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK DTC Check DTC for TCM. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September MIR-16 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow A INFOID:0000000007492255 B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H customer's comments; refer to MIR-21, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain I all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. • Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) K Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces=higher pitch noise/softer surfaces=lower pitch noises/edge to surface=chirping • Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- MIR dent on materials/often brought on by activity. • Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. • Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. N • Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) O Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. • Buzz—(Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that you may judge P as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: 2011 September MIR-17 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear and mechanics stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. • feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. • placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to MIR-19, "Inspection Procedure". REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/7688471L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/7398250Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in) FELT CLOTHTAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Revision: 2011 September MIR-18 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. [WITH ADP] A B CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007492256 C D Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installationinformation. INSTRUMENT PANEL E Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturatethe area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. F G H I J CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to thecenter console. K MIR DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on startsand stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK MIR-19 N O P Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put intothe trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: 2011 September M 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulatingthe item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knockingnoise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicatingthe conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consistof insulating with felt cloth tape. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seatis in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditionsshould be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspectedcomponents while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component orapplying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or onthe engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: 2011 September MIR-20 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000007492257 A B C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O PIIB8741E Revision: 2011 September MIR-21 2012 QUEST P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [WITH ADP] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > PIIB8742E Revision: 2011 September MIR-22 2012 QUEST INSIDE MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A INSIDE MIRROR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492258 B Manual anti-dazzling type C D E F G JMLIA0400ZZ 1. Windshield glass 2. Inside mirror base 3. H Inside mirror assembly : Always replace after every disassembly. I Auto anti-dazzling type J K MIR M N JMLIA0177GB O 1. Windshield glass 2. Inside mirror base 3. Harness connector 4. TORX bolt 5. Inside mirror assembly 6. Inside mirror cover P N·m (kg·m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492259 REMOVAL Manual anti-dazzling type Revision: 2011 September MIR-23 2012 QUEST INSIDE MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) under the inside mirror (1). 2. Slide the inside mirror to the upper side while pushing the pawl downward. CAUTION: • Never reuse the inside mirror disassembled from inside mirror base. • Never use excessive force to remove the inside mirror because it is inserted tightly into the mirror base. • Wrap the flat-bladed screwdriver with a shop cloth to avoid damage on the windshield glass. [WITH ADP] JMLIA0055ZZ Auto anti-dazzling type 1. 2. 3. Remove inside mirror cover. Disconnect harness connector from inside mirror. Loosen TORX bolt and slide inside mirror upward to remove. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When inserting the inside mirror into the mirror base, be sure to push the pawl until it get connected to the mirror base (manual anti-dazzling type only). Revision: 2011 September MIR-24 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492260 Models with side turn signal lamp B C D E F G H I JMLIA2186ZZ 1. Door mirror cover 2. Side turn signal lamp 3. Glass mirror 4. Door mirror corner cover 5. Door mirror under cover 6. Door mirror J : Clip K : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-25 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Models without side turn signal lamp JMLIA2187ZZ 1. Door mirror cover 2. Glass mirror 4. Door mirror under cover 5. Door mirror 3. Door mirror corner cover : Clip : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492261 CAUTION: • When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. • Be careful not to scratch or damage door mirror body when removing. • Always replace door mirror corner cover after every disassembly. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts, pull out the front door module assembly to make space in order to disengage the harness connector. Revision: 2011 September MIR-26 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove harness connector (A). 4. Remove front door speaker and then, from the hole of front door speaker disconnect the harness connectors. [WITH ADP] A B : Clip 5. Peel off front door weather-strip (1), and then remove door mirror mounting nuts (B). C D E F G JMLIA2195ZZ 6. a. Remove door mirror corner cover. Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with remover tool (A). (front door side) H I : Pawl : Vehicle front J CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. K JMLIA1582ZZ b. Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with remover tool (A). (front fender side) MIR : Pawl M : Vehicle front CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. N JMLIA1583ZZ 7. 8. Remove door mirror mounting bolt. Remove door mirror assembly from door panel. P INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert door mirror harness connector through the door outer panel hole. Install door mirror assembly into the door panel and tighten the mounting bolt and nuts. Install the door mirror harness fixing clips to the door panel from the hole of door speaker. Install front door finisher. Revision: 2011 September MIR-27 O 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007492262 CAUTION: When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. a. Remove door mirror assembly from the door panel. Refer to MIR-26, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove glass mirror. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-30, "DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror under cover (1). (with side turn signal lamp) Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A). JMLIA2188ZZ b. Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl. : Pawl JMLIA2190ZZ c. Remove door mirror side turn signal lamp mounting screws (A) and remove side turn signal lamp. JMLIA2191ZZ 5. a. Remove door mirror under cover (1). (without side turn signal lamp) Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A). JMLIA2189ZZ Revision: 2011 September MIR-28 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl. A : Pawl B C JMLIA2190ZZ 6. a. b. c. Remove door mirror actuator (1). Remove the mounting screws (A). Disconnect the harness connectors behind the actuator. Disconnect auto driving positioning harness connector (B).(if equipped) D E F G JMLIA2194ZZ ASSEMBLY H Assemble in the reverse order of disassemble. GLASS MIRROR GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation I INFOID:0000000007492263 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. J Place the glass mirror upward. As shown in the figure, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) into the recess between glass mirror (1) and actuator. Push up both pawls simultaneously to remove glass mirror lower half side. NOTE: • Insert the screwdriver between the fixing pawls. • Insert screwdriver into recesses, and push up while rotating (twisting) to make work easier. CAUTION: Put a strip of protective tape (B) on housing assembly. Lift up and slide glass mirror as shown by the arrows in the figure to disengage the fixing pawls. K MIR M N : Pawl O P JMLIA2193ZZ Revision: 2011 September MIR-29 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove BSW indicator harness connector (A). (if equipped) 5. Remove both terminals of mirror heater attachment (B).(if equipped) JMLIA2192ZZ 6. Lightly lift up lower side of glass mirror, and detach both pawls of upper side as if pulling it out. Remove glass mirror from actuator. NOTE: Be certain not to allow grease on sealing agent in center of mirror or back side of glass mirror. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of disassemble. CAUTION: After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged. DOOR MIRROR COVER DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492264 CAUTION: When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the glass mirror. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation". With a remover tool, disengage the fixing pawls (A). : Pawl JMLIA1145ZZ 3. Insert a remover tool between door mirror cover and mirror housing to disengage the fixing pawls, and then remove the door mirror cover from the door mirror assembly. JMLIA2196ZZ A Without side turn signal lamp B With side turn signal lamp : Pawl INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of disassemble. Revision: 2011 September MIR-30 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged. [WITH ADP] A B C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-31 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH [WITH ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492265 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror remote control switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using remover tool (A). : Pawl JMLIA1450ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September MIR-32 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [WITHOUT ADP] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492266 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-33 2012 QUEST PREPARATION [WITHOUT ADP] < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007492267 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39570) Chassis ear Locates the noise SIIA0993E (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairs the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007492268 Tool name Description Remover tool Remove the clip and pawl and metal clip PIIB7923J Revision: 2011 September MIR-34 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM [WITHOUT ADP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492269 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O P JCLWA5130GB Revision: 2011 September MIR-35 2012 QUEST AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM [WITHOUT ADP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492270 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCLWA5133GB Revision: 2011 September MIR-36 2012 QUEST INSIDE MIRROR [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A INSIDE MIRROR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492271 B Manual anti-dazzling type C D E F G JMLIA0400ZZ 1. Windshield glass 2. Inside mirror base 3. H Inside mirror assembly : Always replace after every disassembly. I Auto anti-dazzling type J K MIR M N JMLIA0177GB O 1. Windshield glass 2. Inside mirror base 3. Harness connector 4. TORX bolt 5. Inside mirror assembly 6. Inside mirror cover P N·m (kg·m, in-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492272 REMOVAL Manual anti-dazzling type Revision: 2011 September MIR-37 2012 QUEST INSIDE MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) under the inside mirror (1). 2. Slide the inside mirror to the upper side while pushing the pawl downward. CAUTION: • Never reuse the inside mirror disassembled from inside mirror base. • Never use excessive force to remove the inside mirror because it is inserted tightly into the mirror base. • Wrap the flat-bladed screwdriver with a shop cloth to avoid damage on the windshield glass. [WITHOUT ADP] JMLIA0055ZZ Auto anti-dazzling type 1. 2. 3. Remove inside mirror cover. Disconnect harness connector from inside mirror. Loosen TORX bolt and slide inside mirror upward to remove. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When inserting the inside mirror into the mirror base, be sure to push the pawl until it get connected to the mirror base (manual anti-dazzling type only). Revision: 2011 September MIR-38 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492273 Models with side turn signal lamp B C D E F G H I JMLIA2186ZZ 1. Door mirror cover 2. Side turn signal lamp 3. Glass mirror 4. Door mirror corner cover 5. Door mirror under cover 6. Door mirror J : Clip K : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-39 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Models without side turn signal lamp JMLIA2187ZZ 1. Door mirror cover 2. Glass mirror 4. Door mirror under cover 5. Door mirror 3. Door mirror corner cover : Clip : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492274 CAUTION: • When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. • Be careful not to scratch or damage door mirror body when removing. • Always replace door mirror corner cover after every disassembly. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts, pull out the front door module assembly to make space in order to disengage the harness connector. Revision: 2011 September MIR-40 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove harness connector (A). 4. Remove front door speaker and then, from the hole of front door speaker disconnect the harness connectors. [WITHOUT ADP] A B : Clip 5. Peel off front door weather-strip (1), and then remove door mirror mounting nuts (B). C D E F G JMLIA2195ZZ 6. a. Remove door mirror corner cover. Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with remover tool (A). (front door side) H I : Pawl : Vehicle front J CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. K JMLIA1582ZZ b. Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with remover tool (A). (front fender side) MIR : Pawl M : Vehicle front CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. N JMLIA1583ZZ 7. 8. Remove door mirror mounting bolt. Remove door mirror assembly from door panel. P INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert door mirror harness connector through the door outer panel hole. Install door mirror assembly into the door panel and tighten the mounting bolt and nuts. Install the door mirror harness fixing clips to the door panel from the hole of door speaker. Install front door finisher. Revision: 2011 September MIR-41 O 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007492275 CAUTION: When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. a. Remove door mirror assembly from the door panel. Refer to MIR-40, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove glass mirror. Refer to MIR-43, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-44, "DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror under cover (1). (with side turn signal lamp) Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A). JMLIA2188ZZ b. Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl. : Pawl JMLIA2190ZZ c. Remove door mirror side turn signal lamp mounting screws (A) and remove side turn signal lamp. JMLIA2191ZZ 5. a. Remove door mirror under cover (1). (without side turn signal lamp) Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A). JMLIA2189ZZ Revision: 2011 September MIR-42 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl. A : Pawl B C JMLIA2190ZZ 6. a. b. Remove door mirror actuator (1). Remove the mounting screws (A). Disconnect the harness connectors behind the actuator. D E F G JMLIA1507ZZ ASSEMBLY H Assemble in the reverse order of disassemble. GLASS MIRROR GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation I INFOID:0000000007492276 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. J Place the glass mirror upward. As shown in the figure, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) into the recess between glass mirror (1) and actuator. Push up both pawls simultaneously to remove glass mirror lower half side. NOTE: • Insert the screwdriver between the fixing pawls. • Insert screwdriver into recesses, and push up while rotating (twisting) to make work easier. CAUTION: Put a strip of protective tape (B) on housing assembly. Lift up and slide glass mirror as shown by the arrows in the figure to disengage the fixing pawls. K MIR M N : Pawl O P JMLIA2193ZZ Revision: 2011 September MIR-43 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove BSW indicator harness connector (A). (if equipped) 5. Remove both terminals of mirror heater attachment (B).(if equipped) [WITHOUT ADP] JMLIA2192ZZ 6. Lightly lift up lower side of glass mirror, and detach both pawls of upper side as if pulling it out. Remove glass mirror from actuator. NOTE: Be certain not to allow grease on sealing agent in center of mirror or back side of glass mirror. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of disassemble. CAUTION: After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged. DOOR MIRROR COVER DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492277 CAUTION: When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the glass mirror. Refer to MIR-43, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation". With a remover tool, disengage the fixing pawls (A). : Pawl JMLIA1145ZZ 3. Insert a remover tool between door mirror cover and mirror housing to disengage the fixing pawls, and then remove the door mirror cover from the door mirror assembly. JMLIA2196ZZ A Without side turn signal lamp B With side turn signal lamp : Pawl INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of disassemble. Revision: 2011 September MIR-44 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged. [WITHOUT ADP] A B C D E F G H I J K MIR M N O P Revision: 2011 September MIR-45 2012 QUEST DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH [WITHOUT ADP] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492278 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove door mirror remote control switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using remover tool (A). : Pawl JMLIA1450ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September MIR-46 2012 QUEST DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA SECTION MWI METER, WARNING LAMP & INDICATOR A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 PREPARATION ............................................ 5 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6 METER SYSTEM ......................................................... 6 METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ........ 6 METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter .................... 7 METER SYSTEM : Meter Control Switch and Illumination Control Switch ............................................ 8 METER SYSTEM ................................................. 9 METER SYSTEM ......................................................... 9 METER SYSTEM : System Description .................... 9 METER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ........................ 13 METER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe .................................. 13 SPEEDOMETER ........................................................ 14 SPEEDOMETER : System Description ................... 15 TACHOMETER .......................................................... 15 TACHOMETER : System Description ..................... 15 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........ 15 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description ................................................. 15 FUEL GAUGE ............................................................ 16 FUEL GAUGE : System Description ....................... 16 OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ........................... 16 OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description ...................................................................16 MASTER WARNING LAMP .......................................16 MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description....17 G METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL .........................17 METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description ...................................................................17 H METER EFFECT FUNCTION ....................................18 METER EFFECT FUNCTION : System Description ...........................................................................19 I INFORMATION DISPLAY ..........................................21 INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description ....21 J COMPASS ......................................................... 32 System Description ..................................................32 K OPERATION ..................................................... 33 Switch Name and Function ......................................33 L DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) ............................................................. 34 On Board Diagnosis Function ..................................34 CONSULT Function .................................................35 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 40 M MWI COMBINATION METER ................................... 40 Reference Value ......................................................40 Fail-Safe ..................................................................47 DTC Index ...............................................................48 IPDM E/R ........................................................... 49 List of ECU Reference .............................................49 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 50 METER SYSTEM .............................................. 50 Wiring Diagram ........................................................50 COMPASS ......................................................... 52 Revision: 2011 September F MWI-1 2012 QUEST O P Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 52 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 53 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM) ............................................. 53 Work flow ................................................................ 53 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70 Component Inspection ............................................ 70 WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT... 72 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72 Component Inspection ............................................ 72 ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS) ...... 56 A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................................... 73 Work Procedure ...................................................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73 CALIBRATION (COMPASS) ............................. 57 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 74 Work Procedure ...................................................... 57 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 58 THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE .......................................................... 74 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 58 Description .............................................................. 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74 Description .............................................................. 58 DTC Logic ............................................................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 58 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 59 Description .............................................................. 59 DTC Logic ............................................................... 59 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59 B2205 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 60 Description .............................................................. 60 DTC Logic ............................................................... 60 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 60 B2267 ENGINE SPEED ..................................... 61 Description .............................................................. 61 DTC Logic ............................................................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61 B2268 WATER TEMP ........................................ 62 Description .............................................................. 62 DTC Logic ............................................................... 62 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 62 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 63 COMBINATION METER ........................................... 63 COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure ... 63 METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 64 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 64 Component Inspection ............................................ 64 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................................................. 66 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 Component Inspection ............................................ 66 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....... 68 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 68 Component Inspection ............................................ 68 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 70 Component Function Check ................................... 70 Revision: 2011 September THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE ................................................................. 75 Description .............................................................. 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75 THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE ................................................... 76 Description .............................................................. 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76 THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON ....................................... 77 Description .............................................................. 77 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77 THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF ..................................... 78 Description .............................................................. 78 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78 THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ............................................................ 79 Description .............................................................. 79 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79 THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, or DOES NOT DISPLAY .................................................................. 80 Description .............................................................. 80 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 80 THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ......... 81 Description .............................................................. 81 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81 THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT ...................................................... 82 Description .............................................................. 82 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 82 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 83 MWI-2 2012 QUEST COMPASS ................................................................. 83 COMPASS : Description ......................................... 83 METER CONTROL SWITCH ............................ 86 Exploded View .........................................................86 Removal and Installation .........................................86 INFORMATION DISPLAY ......................................... 83 INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description .................. 83 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH ............... 87 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 84 Exploded View .........................................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 COMBINATION METER .....................................84 COMPASS ......................................................... 88 Exploded View ........................................................ 84 Removal and Installation ......................................... 84 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 84 A B C Exploded View .........................................................88 Removal and Installation .........................................88 D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-3 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495485 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September MWI-4 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495486 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening screws B C D E PBIC0191E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-5 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS METER SYSTEM METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007495487 JSNIA4335ZZ A. Under the left second seat No. Component Function 1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. Oil pressure switch Transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the IPDM E/R. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View" for detailed installation location. 3. Washer level switch Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter. 4. Ambient sensor Transmits the ambient sensor signal to the IPDM E/R. 5. TCM Transmits the shift position signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. ECM Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication. • Engine speed signal • Engine coolant temperature signal • Fuel consumption monitor signal • Fuel filler cap warning display signal • Engine status signal Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 6. Revision: 2011 September MWI-6 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. 7. 8. 9. Component Function IPDM E/R • Transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the BCM via CAN communication. • Transmits the ambient sensor signal to the combination meter. Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. BCM Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication. • Position light request signal • Door switch signal • Door lock/unlock status signal • Meter display signal • Low tire pressure warning lamp signal • Dimmer signal • Starter relay status signal • Oil pressure switch signal Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. A B C D E Fuel level sensor unit Transmits the fuel level sensor signal to the combination meter. 10. Meter control switch Transmits the following signals to the combination meter. • Enter switch signal • Select switch signal • Trip reset switch signal 11. Combination meter Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter". Illumination control switch Transmits the following signals to the combination meter. • Illumination control switch signal (+) • Illumination control switch signal (−) G 12. 13. Parking brake switch Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter. H 14. A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C) Transmits the A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal to the combination meter. Refer to HAC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. F I METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter INFOID:0000000007495488 The combination meter controls the following items according to the signals received from each unit via CAN communication and the signals from switches and sensors. • Measuring instruments • Indicator lamps • Warning lamps • Meter illumination control • Meter effect function • Information display J K L ARRANGEMENT OF COMBINATION METER M MWI O P JSNIA4133ZZ Revision: 2011 September MWI-7 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > A. For U.S.A B. For Canada METER SYSTEM : Meter Control Switch and Illumination Control Switch INFOID:0000000007495489 • The meter control switch is located on the cluster lid A RH. • The illumination control switch is located on the cluster lid A LH. JSNIA3342ZZ Switch name Illumination control switch Meter control switch • - Description Illumination control switch (+) (1) An illuminance level of the back light of the combination meter can be adjusted. Illumination control switch (−) (2) Enter switch (3) • The information display screen can be switched. • The item indicated on the information display can be confirmed. Select switch (4) When plural items are shown on the information display, a selected item can be changed to the other item. Trip reset switch (5) • The trip meter can be switched between A and B. • Trip meter A/B can be reset by pressing and holding the trip reset switch. Transmits the following signals to the combination meter. Illumination control switch signal (+) Illumination control switch signal (−) Enter switch signal Select switch signal Trip reset switch signal Revision: 2011 September MWI-8 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > METER SYSTEM A METER SYSTEM METER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007495490 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F G H I JSNIA4136GB J COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL) Transmit unit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) K Signal name Vehicle speed signal Position light request signal L Door switch signal Door lock/unlock status signal BCM Oil pressure switch signal M Meter display signal Low tire pressure warning lamp signal MWI Dimmer signal Starter relay status signal TCM Shift position signal O Engine speed signal Engine coolant temperature signal ECM P Fuel consumption monitor signal Fuel filler cap warning display signal Engine status signal DESCRIPTION Combination Meter Revision: 2011 September MWI-9 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • The combination meter receives necessary signals from each unit, switch, and sensor to control the following functions. - Measuring instruments - Warning lamps - Indicator lamps - Meter illumination control - Meter effect function - Information display • The combination meter incorporates a buzzer function that sounds an audible alarm with the integrated buzzer device. Refer to WCS-4, "Combination Meter" for further details. • The combination meter includes an on board diagnosis function. • The combination meter can be diagnosed with CONSULT. METER CONTROL FUNCTION LIST System Description Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. MWI-15, "SPEEDOMETER : System Description" Tachometer Indicates engine speed. MWI-15, "TACHOMETER : System Description" Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature. MWI-15, "ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description" Fuel gauge Indicates fuel level. MWI-16, "FUEL GAUGE : System Description" Oil pressure warning lamp The warning lamp turns ON or turns OFF, according to engine hydraulic pressure. MWI-16, "OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description" Master warning lamp Turns ON/OFF in synchronization with a warning indicated on the information display. MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description" Meter illumination control function Controls the back light of combination meter. MWI-17, "METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description" Engine-start effect function Controls pointers of combination meter and meter illumination at engine start to produce illumination effects. Driver welcome function Controls meter illumination to produce illumination effects when getting in the vehicle. Measuring instruments Warning lamp/ indicator lamp Meter illumination control Meter effect function Reference Revision: 2011 September MWI-10 MWI-19, "METER EFFECT FUNCTION : System Description" 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > System Description Odo/trip meter Displays mileage. Shift position indicator Displays shift position. Trip computer Current fuel consumption Displays current fuel consumption. Average fuel consumption Displays average fuel consumption. Distance to empty Displays distance to empty. Average vehicle speed Displays average vehicle speed. Travel time Displays travel time. Travel distance Displays mileage. Ambient temperature Displays ambient temperature. Warning Information display Interrupt indication Alert Door open warning Warns when a door is open. Parking brake release warning Warns if traveling when the parking brake is under operating condition. Low fuel warning Warns when being low on fuel. Low washer fluid warning Displayed/Hidden, depending on washer fluid level. Fuel filler cap warning Receives fuel filler cap warning display signal and displays warning. Low tire pressure warning Receives low tire pressure warning lamp signal and displays warning. NO KEY warning Receives meter display signal and displays warning. Travel time Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set time. Low ambient temperature Causes an interrupt when ambient temperature reaches below 3°C (37°F). Tire Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance. Oil filter Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance. Engine oil Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance. Other Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance. Maintenance Meter illumination level Reference A B C D E F MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description" G H I J K L M Indicates the brightness of the meter illumination in stages. MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-11 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > System Description Timer Allows the user to set a display time for “Travel time”. ICY Allows the ON/OFF setting of the low ambient temperature (alert) function. Tire Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”. Filter Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”. Oil Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”. Other Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”. Language Allows the user to set language for information display. Unit Allows unit settings. Effects Allows the ON/OFF setting of the enginestart effect function. Alert Information display Setting Maintenance Options Revision: 2011 September MWI-12 Reference MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description" 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > METER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007495491 A B C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O JSNIA4222GB METER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000007495492 FAIL-SAFE The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning. Revision: 2011 September MWI-13 2012 QUEST P METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Function Specifications Speedometer Tachometer Reset to zero by suspending communication. Engine coolant temperature gauge When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode. Illumination control Odo/trip meter An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout. Shift position indicator The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Door open warning Interrupt indication Fuel filler cap warning The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Low tire pressure warning Information display Current fuel consumption Trip computer Average fuel consumption Distance to empty Average vehicle speed • When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result. • When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two seconds, the last calculation results are indicated. Travel distance Buzzer The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication. ABS warning lamp VDC warning lamp Brake warning lamp The lamp turns ON by suspending communication. EPS warning lamp Malfunction indicator lamp Low tire pressure warning lamp The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication. High beam indicator lamp Warning lamp/indicator lamp Turn signal indicator lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp O/D OFF indicator lamp Tail lamp indicator lamp The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication. CRUISE indicator lamp Oil pressure warning lamp Key warning lamp BSW warning lamp SPEEDOMETER Revision: 2011 September MWI-14 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SPEEDOMETER : System Description INFOID:0000000007495493 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D JSNIA2973GB DESCRIPTION • The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) converts the rectangular wave signal provided by the wheel sensor to a vehicle speed signal and transmits it to the combination meter via CAN communication. • The combination meter indicates the vehicle speed to the speedometer according to the vehicle speed signal received via CAN communication. E F TACHOMETER TACHOMETER : System Description INFOID:0000000007495494 G SYSTEM DIAGRAM H I J JSNIA2974GB K DESCRIPTION • ECM converts the pulse signal provided by the crankshaft position sensor to an engine speed signal and transmits it to the combination meter via CAN communication. • The combination meter indicates the engine speed to the tachometer according to the engine speed signal received via CAN communication. L ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description M INFOID:0000000007495495 SYSTEM DIAGRAM MWI O P JSNIA3015GB DESCRIPTION • ECM reads the engine coolant temperature signal from the engine coolant temperature sensor and transmits the signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Revision: 2011 September MWI-15 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • The combination meter indicates the engine coolant temperature to the engine coolant temperature gauge according to the engine coolant temperature signal received via CAN communication. FUEL GAUGE FUEL GAUGE : System Description INFOID:0000000007495496 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JPNIA0983GB DESCRIPTION Control Outline The combination meter reads the fuel level sensor signal from the fuel level sensor unit and indicates the fuel level to the fuel gauge. Refuel Control The combination meter accelerates the fuel gauge if the all conditions listed below are met, or the ignition switch is ON from OFF. • Ignition switch is ON position. • The vehicle is not moving. • The fuel level change by 15 (4 US gal, 3-1/4 Imp gal) or more. OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description INFOID:0000000007495497 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSNIA2464GB DESCRIPTION • IPDM E/R receives an oil pressure switch signal from the oil pressure switch and transmits the signal to BCM via CAN communication. • BCM transmits the oil pressure switch signal received from IPDM E/R to the combination meter via CAN communication. • The combination meter turns ON/OFF the oil pressure warning lamp, according to an oil pressure switch signal received from BCM via CAN communication. MASTER WARNING LAMP Revision: 2011 September MWI-16 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description INFOID:0000000007495498 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E JSNIA4137GB F DESCRIPTION When receiving a signal from each unit, switch, or sensor, the combination meter turns ON/OFF the master warning lamp in synchronization with the following warnings on the information display. • Door open warning • Parking brake release warning • Low fuel warning • Low washer fluid warning • NO KEY warning • Low tire pressure warning • Fuel filler cap warning NOTE: For details on warnings displayed on the information display, refer to MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description". G H I J METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000007495499 K SYSTEM DIAGRAM L M MWI O P JSNIA4138GB DESCRIPTION Meter Illumination On/off Control Function • Combination meter turns ON meter illumination when the following condition is satisfied: - Ignition switch ON • Combination meter turns OFF meter illumination when any of the following condition is satisfied: Revision: 2011 September MWI-17 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > - During a crank with vehicle speed less than 1 km/h (0.6 MPH) - Ignition switch OFF or ACC • The combination meter receives the following signals to control meter illumination. Signal name Signal path Ignition signal — Engine status signal ECM Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and control unit (control unit) Starter relay status signal BCM Combination meter Combination meter Combination meter Meter Illumination Control Function • Combination meter controls meter illumination, based on the following signal. - Dimmer signal (for U.S.A) - Position light request signal (for Canada) • The combination meter switches mode between Daytime mode and Nighttime mode, according to the following conditions. Meter illumination Condition 1ST or 2ND position Combination switch (lighting switch) AUTO POSITION For U.S.A For Canada Outdoor: Bright* Daytime mode Nighttime mode Outdoor: Dark* Nighttime mode Nighttime mode Outdoor: Bright* Daytime mode Daytime mode Outdoor: Dark* Nighttime mode Nighttime mode Daytime mode Daytime mode Off *: For further information, refer to INL-17, "AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System Description". • The operation of the illumination control switch allows the brightness adjustment of meter illumination. Meter illumination The number of adjustable steps Daytime 22 step Nighttime 22 step Signal Path Signal name Signal source Ignition signal — Dimmer signal (for U.S.A) BCM Combination meter Position light request signal (for Canada) BCM Combination meter METER EFFECT FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September MWI-18 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > METER EFFECT FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007495500 A SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E JSNIA4139GB F DESCRIPTION Engine-start Effect Function When recognizing an engine start, the combination meter controls the following items for producing the effect. • Speedometer • Tachometer • Engine coolant temperature gauge • Fuel gauge • Meter illumination J Operation Speedometer Sweeps the pointer. Tachometer Sweeps the pointer. Engine coolant temperature gauge Stops the pointer. Fuel gauge Stops the pointer. Pointer Turns on the illumination at the normal brightness level. Printed area of the dial Turns on the illumination at the effect level. Illumination ring Increases the brightness to the effect level in stages. Information display (Dot matrix display and segment display) Turns on the illumination at the normal brightness level. K L M NOTE: The pointers are stopped and illumination is turned off while cranking the engine. MWI Engine Start Judgement The combination meter judges “engine-start” and activates the engine-start effect only once when the following operational conditions are all satisfied. ON position Vehicle speed Less than 1 km/h (0.6 MPH) Engine state Other than the time of cranking the engine 500 rpm or more Revision: 2011 September O P Operational condition Ignition switch H I Meter and Illumination Operations During Engine-start Effect The combination meter controls the following items during the engine-start effect. Control item G MWI-19 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Operational condition Shift position “P” Information display (SETTING) The setting of “EFFECT” is “ON” NOTE: ENGINE-START EFFECT exits when any of the above operational conditions is cancelled during the enginestart effect. Signal Path The combination meter judges “engine-start”, according to the following signals and activates the engine-start effect function. Signal name Signal source Ignition signal — Starter relay status signal BCM Combination meter ECM Combination meter Engine speed signal Engine status signal Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Shift position signal TCM Combination meter Combination meter NOTE: The engine-start effect function ends if any one of the above conditions is lost during the activation of this function. Driver Welcome Function BCM transmits a meter ring illumination request signal to the illumination meter when all the following operational conditions are satisfied. When receiving the meter ring illumination request signal from BCM via CAM communication, the combination meter increases illumination brightness of the combination meter to the set brightness level in stages. After a certain period of time, the meter illumination gradually dims to be turned OFF. Operational condition Ignition switch LOCK position Driver side door Open → Close* *: Close the driver side door with the intelligent key left inside the vehicle. Signal Path The combination meter receives the following signals to control meter ring illumination. Signal name Signal source Ignition signal — Door switch signal (driver) BCM Combination meter Door lock/unlock status signal BCM Combination meter Revision: 2011 September MWI-20 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Timing Chart A B C D E JSNIA4336GB • *1: The driver welcome function is not performed when the driver’s door is opened/closed for the first time after turning the ignition switch from ON to LOCK. • *2: The operation of the following switches allows the door to be locked/unlocked. - Door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key - Door request switch - Door key cylinder switch - Door lock and unlock switch F G H INFORMATION DISPLAY INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description INFOID:0000000007495501 I SYSTEM DIAGRAM J K L M MWI O P JSNIA4140GB DESCRIPTION • The combination meter receives signals necessary for controlling the operation of the information display from each unit, sensor and switch. Revision: 2011 September MWI-21 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • The combination meter incorporates a trip computer that displays the warning/information according to the information received from each unit, sensor and switch. • The combination meter shows the following functions on the information display. - Odo/trip meter - Shift position indicator - Trip computer - Interrupt indication - Warning check indication - Setting • The vehicle information display is comprised of dot matrix information display (1) and segment information display (2). Each display shows the items listed below. JSNIA3395ZZ Revision: 2011 September MWI-22 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display A Display item Door open warning Parking brake release warning B Low fuel warning Warning Low washer warning C Fuel filler cap warning Low tire pressure warning NO KEY warning Interrupt indication D Travel time Alert ICY Tire Maintenance E Oil filter Engine oil F Other Meter illumination level Current fuel consumption Dot matrix information display G Average fuel consumption Average vehicle speed Trip computer H Travel time Travel distance Distance to empty I Ambient temperature Timer Alert J ICY Tire Setting Maintenance Oil filter K Engine oil Other L Language Options Unit Effect Segment information display M • Shift position indicator • Odo/trip meter MWI ODO/TRIP METER The combination meter calculates mileage, based on the following signals and displays the mileage on the information display. O Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal Vehicle speed signal — ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) P Combination meter SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR The combination meter receives the shift position signal from TCM via CAN communication, and displays the shift position to the shift position indicator. Revision: 2011 September MWI-23 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Signal name Shift position signal Signal Path TCM Combination meter TRIP COMPUTER Current Fuel Consumption The combination meter calculates current fuel consumption based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display. Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Fuel consumption monitor signal ECM Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Combination meter NOTE: • Current fuel consumption on the information display is updated approximately every 0.1 seconds. • Current fuel consumption on the information display shows 30 l/100km (0 mpg) when vehicle speed is 0 km/ h (0 MPH). Average Fuel Consumption The combination meter calculates average fuel consumption based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display. Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Fuel consumption monitor signal ECM Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Combination meter NOTE: • Average fuel consumption on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds. • Soon after a reset or when the ignition switch is turned ON after battery installation, “−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds and approximately 500 m (0.31 mile). Distance to Empty The combination meter calculates distance to empty based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display. Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Fuel level sensor signal Fuel level sensor unit Fuel consumption monitor signal ECM Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Combination meter Combination meter NOTE: • Distance to empty on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds. • When the ignition switch is turned ON, “−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds because stored values are deleted after battery installation. • The indicated values may not match each other when refueling with the ignition switch ON. Average Vehicle Speed Revision: 2011 September MWI-24 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The combination meter calculates average vehicle speed based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display. Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal B — Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter NOTE: • Average vehicle speed on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds. • Soon after a reset or when the ignition switch is turned ON after battery installation, “−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds. Travel Time The combination meter measures and displays travel time (ignition switch ON time). Travel Distance The combination meter calculates mileage, based on the following signals and displays the mileage on the information display. Signal name C D E F Signal Path Ignition signal — Vehicle speed signal A ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) G Combination meter Ambient Temperature The combination meter calculates ambient temperature based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display. H I Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — J Ambient sensor signal Ambient sensor A/C auto amp. recognition signal (with auto A/C) A/C auto amp. Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) IPDM E/R Combination meter K Combination meter Combination meter L NOTE: • The indicated temperature is corrected based on an ignition signal, ambient temperature detected by the ambient sensor, and vehicle speed signal. The indicated temperature is not raised under vehicle speed less M than 20 km/h (12 MPH). • The ambient sensor input value that is displayed on “Data Monitor” of CONSULT is the value before the correction. It may not match the indicated temperature on the information display. • Depending on engine heat or heat on the road surfaces, an ambient temperature may be indicated higher MWI than actual one. INTERRUPT INDICATION • The combination meter displays an interrupt regarding a warning, alert, and maintenance on the information display, based on signals received from each unit and switch. • When conditions are satisfied, the normal screen switches to a warning screen to display an interrupt. O Door Open Warning • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a door open warning on the information display by an interrupt. P Operating condition Ignition switch ON Door Any door is open Revision: 2011 September MWI-25 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “door open warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Door switch signal Door switch BCM Combination meter Parking Brake Release Warning • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a parking brake release warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Parking brake Applied Vehicle speed 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “parking brake release warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Parking brake switch signal Parking brake switch Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Combination meter Low Fuel Warning • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low fuel warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Fuel remaining quantity* Approximately 11.4 (3 US gal, 2 - 1/2 Imp gal) or less (including fuel remained) *: With the vehicle in a horizontal position • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low fuel warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Fuel level sensor signal Fuel level sensor Combination meter Low washer fluid warning • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low washer fluid warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Washer level switch Decrease in fluid level (washer level switch ON for 180 seconds or more) Revision: 2011 September MWI-26 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > A B C JSNIA0033GB • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low washer fluid warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name D Signal Path Ignition signal E — Washer level switch signal Washer level switch Combination meter F Fuel Filler Cap Warning • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “fuel filler cap warning”, according to the signals below: G Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Fuel filler cap warning display signal ECM H Combination meter • For further information, refer to EC-47, "FUEL FILLER CAP WARNING SYSTEM : System Description". I Low Tire Pressure Warning • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low tire pressure warning”, according to the signals below: J Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — K Low tire pressure warning lamp signal BCM Combination meter • For further information, refer to WT-8, "System Description". L NO KEY Warning • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “NO KEY warning”, according to the signals below: M Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — MWI Meter display signal BCM Combination meter • For further information, refer to DLK-47, "WARNING FUNCTION : System Description". O Travel Time (Alert) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a travel time on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch Switch-ON time • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “travel time”, according to the signal below: Revision: 2011 September MWI-27 2012 QUEST P METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Low Ambient Temperature (Alert) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low ambient temperature on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Ambient temperature 3 °C (37 °F) or less information display “ON” is selected in “SETTING” • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low ambient temperature”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Ambient sensor signal Ambient sensor IPDM E/R Combination meter Tire (Maintenance) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a tire warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Mileage More than value set in “SETTING” • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “tire warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal — Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Oil Filter (Maintenance) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a oil filter warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition Ignition switch ON Mileage More than value set in “SETTING” • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “oil filter warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal Vehicle speed signal — ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Engine Oil (Maintenance) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a engine oil warning on the information display by an interrupt. Revision: 2011 September MWI-28 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > A Operating condition Ignition switch ON Mileage More than value set in “SETTING” B • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “engine oil warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal C — Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter D Other (Maintenance) • When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a other warning on the information display by an interrupt. Operating condition F Ignition switch ON Mileage More than value set in “SETTING” • The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “other warning”, according to the signals below: Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) G H — Vehicle speed signal E Combination meter I Meter Illumination Level Indication When receiving the following signals, the combination meter causes an interrupt on the information display to indicate an illumination level. Signal name J Signal Path Ignition signal K — Illumination control switch signal (+) Illumination control switch Illumination control switch signal (−) Combination meter L WARNING CHECK INDICATION • The combination meter can cause an interrupt on the information display to indicate a warning, based on signals received from each unit and switch. • The indicated warning can be checked with “WARNING” during the satisfaction of an interrupt indication condition for each warning. M MWI SETTING Warning indication timing and time can be set. Alert Setting values for travel time, and low ambient temperature can be adjusted to meet the user's needs. Setting item Alert Setting range Timer No setting, 0.5 h - 6 h ICY ON/OFF Setting unit P 0.5 h — Maintenance Setting values for engine oil, oil filter, tire, and other maintenance items can be adjusted to meet the user's needs. Revision: 2011 September MWI-29 O 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Setting item Setting range Engine oil No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km (No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile) Oil filter No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km (No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile) Tire No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km (No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile) Other No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km (No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile) Maintenance Options Setting values for language, unit, and effect items can be adjusted to meet the user's needs. Setting item Language Options Unit Effect ENGLISH FRANCAISE miles, MPG, °F km, l/100 km,°C ON/OFF Settings-reject Indication • Regarding settings-reject indications, “SETTING CAN BE OPERATED WHEN STOPPED” is shown on the information display when indication conditions are satisfied. • When reaching 5 km/h (3.1 MPH) after accelerating from a stopping condition, a settings-reject indication is displayed. • When reaching less than 2 km/h (1.2 MPH) after decelerating from 5 km/h (3.1 MPH), a settings-reject indication is cancelled to allow settings. • The combination meter judges a vehicle condition based on the following signals and displays a settingsreject indication on the information display. Signal name Signal Path Ignition signal Vehicle speed signal Revision: 2011 September — ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) MWI-30 Combination meter 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > TIMING CHART A B C D E F G H JSNIA4356GB I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-31 2012 QUEST COMPASS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > COMPASS System Description INFOID:0000000007495502 DESCRIPTION • This electronic compass is able to display 8 primary directions: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW. • The inside mirror switch is used to operate the compass. 1 : Compass switch 2 : Compass display SKIB8868E Switch Operation Press Compass is turned ON/OFF Press and hold (for 3- 9 sec.) Compass display turns to zone variation change mode Press and hold (for more than 9 sec.) Compass display turns to calibration mode • All standard compasses determine direction relative to magnetic north, however, this electronic compass is designed to display direction relative to true north. • The difference between magnetic north and true north varies from place to place across the surface of the earth. • This electronic compass must be “told” approximately where it is on the earth’s surface so that the magnetic north reading can be properly converted into a true north display. • To tell the electronic compass where it’s at, the earth is separated into numbered “Zone Variances”. The zone variance number in which the compass is to function must be entered into this electronic compass. • Each zone is magnetically about 4.2° wide. Typically, anything under a 22.5° total zone change is not noticed on the electronic compass display. However, if a change over 22.5° occurs, a reading may be off by one or more primary directions. • On long trips, the vehicle may leave its original zone and enter one or more new zones. Generally, you do not need to reset the compass zone if you travel between 3 or 4 zones, such as business travel or vacation. The typical driver will not notice any difference on the display within 3 or 4 zones. However, if the vehicle is “permanently” moved to a new location, it is recommended that the compass zone be reset. Revision: 2011 September MWI-32 2012 QUEST OPERATION < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > OPERATION A Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000007495503 B C D JSNIA3342ZZ Switch name Illumination control switch Operation Illumination control switch (+) (1) F An illuminance level of the back light of the combination meter can be adjusted. Illumination control switch (−) (2) • The information display screen can be switched. • The item indicated on the information display can be confirmed. G Select switch (4) When plural items are shown on the information display, a selected item can be changed to the other item. H Trip reset switch (5) • The trip meter can be switched between A and B. • Trip meter A/B can be reset by pressing and holding the trip reset switch. Enter switch (3) Press Meter control switch Description E I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-33 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000007495504 ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM The combination meter allows the following diagnosis items with the on-board diagnosis function. Diagnosis item Drive circuit check • • • • Speedometer Tachometer Engine coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge LCD (liquid crystal display) check Information display (dot matrix information display and segment information display) METHOD OF STARTING 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. While pressing the trip reset switch (1), turn ignition switch ON. JSNIA3524ZZ 3. 4. 5. 6. If the diagnosis function is activated with “trip A” displayed, the mileage on “trip A” is reset to “0000.0”. (The same way for “trip B”.) Make sure that the trip meter displays “0000.0”. Press the trip reset switch at least 3 times. (Within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.) The combination meter is turned to self-diagnosis mode. • Speedometer, tachometer, engine coolant temperature gauge, and fuel gauge return to zero, simultaneously. • The dot matrix dots on the information display (dot matrix information display) (1) blink alternately. JPNIA0766ZZ Revision: 2011 September MWI-34 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • All segments of the information display (segment information display) (1) are displayed. A B C JSNIA3443ZZ D 7. NOTE: • Check the following items when the self-diagnosis mode of the combination meter does not start. Replace combination meter if the following items are normal. - Combination meter power supply and ground circuit. - Meter control switch signal circuit (trip reset switch signal circuit) and meter control switch. • If any of the dots are not displayed, replace combination meter. Each meter activates by pressing the trip reset switch. E F G H I J K JSNIA4141ZZ NOTE: • If any of the meters or gauges is not activated, replace combination meter. • The figure is reference. CONSULT Function L INFOID:0000000007495505 M CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS CONSULT can perform the following diagnosis modes via CAN communication and the combination meter. System METER/M&A Diagnosis mode Description Self Diagnostic Result The combination meter checks the conditions and displays memorized errors. Data Monitor Displays the combination meter input/output data in real time. W/L ON History Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked. O P SELF DIAG RESULT Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR Display Item List Revision: 2011 September MWI MWI-35 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > X: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description SPEED METER [km/h] X Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] X Vehicle speed signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication. NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. Display item [Unit] ODO OUTPUT [km/h or mph] Odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication. TACHO METER [rpm] X Value of the engine speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication. NOTE: 8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. FUEL METER [L] X Fuel level indicated on combination meter. X Value of engine coolant temperature signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. NOTE: 215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input. W TEMP METER [°C] ABS W/L [On/Off] Status of ABS warning lamp detected from ABS warning lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. VDC/TCS IND [On/Off] Status of VDC OFF indicator lamp detected from VDC OFF indicator lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. SLIP IND [On/Off] Status of VDC warning lamp detected from VDC warning lamp signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. BRAKE W/L [On/Off] Status of brake warning lamp detected from brake warning lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. NOTE: Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts, the parking brake switch is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON. DOOR W/L [On/Off] Status of door open warning detected from door switch signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HI-BEAM IND [On/Off] Status of high beam indicator lamp detected from high beam request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. TURN IND [On/Off] Status of turn indicator lamp detected from turn indicator signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. LIGHT IND [On/Off] • Status of light indicator lamp detected from dimmer signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For U.S.A) • Status of light indicator lamp detected from position light request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For Canada) OIL W/L [On/Off] Status of oil pressure warning lamp detected from oil pressure switch signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. MIL [On/Off] Status of malfunction indicator lamp detected from malfunctioning indicator lamp signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. CRUISE IND [On/Off] Status of CRUISE indicator detected from ASCD status signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. SET IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. CRUISE W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. BA W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Revision: 2011 September MWI-36 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description A O/D OFF IND [On/Off] Status of O/D OFF indicator detected from O/D OFF indicator signal is received from CVT shift selector. 4WD W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. 4WD LOCK IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. FUEL W/L [On/Off] Low fuel warning status detected by the identified fuel level. WASHER W/L [On/Off] Status of low washer fluid warning judged from washer level switch input to combination meter. AIR PRES W/L [On/Off] Status of low tire pressure warning lamp judged from TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. KEY G/Y W/L [On/Off] Status of Intelligent Key system malfunction detected from Intelligent Key warning display signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. EPS W/L [On/Off] Status of EPS warning lamp judged from EPS warning lamp signal received from EPS control unit with CAN communication line. AFS OFF IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ECO MODE IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. LCD [B&P N, B&P I, ID NG, ROTAT, SFT P, INSRT, BATT, NO KY, OUTKY, LK WN, KY>PSW, Off] Displays status of Intelligent Key system warning judged from meter display signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. ACC TARGET [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC DISTANCE [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC OWN VHL [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC SET SPEED [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC UNIT [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. SHIFT IND [P, R, N, D, L] Status of shift position indicator judged from shift position signal received from TCM with CAN communication line. BSW IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. BSW W/L [On/Off] Status of BSW warning lamp judged from BSW warning lamp signal received from BSW control module with CAN communication line. FUEL CAP W/L [On/Off] Status of fuel filler cap warning detected from fuel filler cap warning display signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. O/D OFF SW [On/Off] Status of overdrive control switch. M RANGE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NM RANGE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. AT SFT UP SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. AT SFT DWN SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Revision: 2011 September B C D E F G H I J K MWI-37 L M MWI O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > MAIN SIGNALS Display item [Unit] Description COMP F/B SIG [On/Off] A/C compressor activation condition that ECM judges according to the water temperature and the acceleration degree. PKB SW [On/Off] Status of parking brake switch. BUCKLE SW [On/Off] Status of seat belt buckle switch (driver side). BRAKE OIL SW [On/Off] Status of brake fluid level switch. A/C AMP CONN [On/Off] Status of A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal. ENTER SW [On/Off] Status of (ENTER) switch. SELECT SW [On/Off] Status of (SELECT) switch. ECO MODE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. DISTANCE [km] Value of distance to empty calculated by combination meter. OUTSIDE TEMP [°C or °F] Ambient temperature value converted from ambient sensor signal received from ambient sensor. NOTE: This may not match with the temperature value indicated on the information display. (Because the information display value is a corrected value from the ambient sensor input value.) FUEL LOW SIG [On/Off] Status of fuel level low warning signal to output to AV control unit via CAN communication. BUZZER [On/Off] X Buzzer status (in the combination meter) is detected from the buzzer output signal received from each unit via CAN communication and the warning output condition of the combination meter. TPMS PRESS L [On/Off] Status of low tire pressure warning judged from low tire pressure warning lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. 4WD AUTO IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NOTE: Some items are not available according to vehicle specification. W/L ON HISTORY • • • - Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on. “W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/indicator lamp is turned on. The “TIME” above is: 0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine and waiting for 30 seconds. - 1 - 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition. - NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp. NOTE: • W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts. • Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets low. Display Item Display item Description ABS W/L Lighting history of ABS warning lamp. VDC/TCS IND Lighting history of VDC OFF indicator lamp. SLIP IND Lighting history of VDC warning lamp. Revision: 2011 September MWI-38 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display item Description BRAKE W/L Lighting history of brake warning lamp. DOOR W/L Lighting history of door open warning. OIL W/L Lighting history of oil pressure warning lamp. C-ENG W/L Lighting history of malfunction indicator lamp. CRUISE IND Lighting history of CRUISE indicator. O/D OFF IND Lighting history of O/D OFF indicator lamp. FUEL W/L Lighting history of low fuel level warning. WASHER W/L Lighting history of low washer fluid warning. AIR PRES W/L Lighting history of low tire pressure warning lamp. KEY G/Y W/L Lighting history of Intelligent Key system malfunction. EPS W/L Lighting history of EPS warning lamp. BSW W/L Lighting history of BSW warning lamp. A B C D E NOTE: In items displayed on the CONSULT screen, only those listed in the above table are used. F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-39 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION COMBINATION METER Reference Value INFOID:0000000007495506 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Monitor Item SPEED METER [km/h] Condition Ignition switch ON SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] Ignition switch ON ODO OUTPUT [km/h or mph] Ignition switch ON TACHO METER [rpm] Ignition switch ON FUEL METER [L] Ignition switch ON Value/Status While driving Input value of vehicle speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received While driving Output value of vehicle speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received — Output value of odometer signal (CAN communication signal) Input value of engine speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received Engine running — Input value of fuel level sensor signal — Input value of engine coolant temperature signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input W TEMP METER [°C] Ignition switch ON ABS W/L Ignition switch ON ABS warning lamp ON On ABS warning lamp OFF Off VDC/TCS IND Ignition switch ON VDC OFF indicator lamp ON On VDC OFF indicator lamp OFF Off SLIP IND Ignition switch ON VDC warning lamp ON On VDC warning lamp OFF Off BRAKE W/L Ignition switch ON Brake warning lamp ON On Brake warning lamp OFF Off DOOR W/L Ignition switch ON Door open warning ON On Door open warning OFF Off HI-BEAM IND Ignition switch ON High-beam indicator lamp ON On High-beam indicator lamp OFF Off TURN IND Ignition switch ON Turn signal indicator lamp ON On Turn signal indicator lamp OFF Off LIGHT IND Ignition switch ON Light indicator lamp ON On Light indicator lamp OFF Off Ignition switch ON Oil pressure warning lamp ON On Oil pressure warning lamp OFF Off OIL W/L Revision: 2011 September MWI-40 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition Value/Status A MIL Ignition switch ON Malfunction indicator lamp ON On Malfunction indicator lamp OFF Off CRUISE IND Ignition switch ON CRUISE indicator ON On CRUISE indicator OFF Off Off C D SET IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. CRUISE W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off BA W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off O/D OFF IND Ignition switch ON O/D OFF indicator lamp ON On O/D OFF indicator lamp OFF Off Off 4WD W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. 4WD LOCK IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off FUEL W/L Ignition switch ON During low fuel warning indication On Other than the above Off WASHER W/L Ignition switch ON During low washer fluid warning indication On Other than the above Off AIR PRES W/L Ignition switch ON Low tire pressure warning lamp ON On Low tire pressure warning lamp OFF Off KEY G/Y W/L Ignition switch ON During Intelligent Key system malfunction indication On Other than the above Off EPS warning lamp ON On EPS warning lamp OFF Off Off EPS W/L Ignition switch ON AFS OFF IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ECO MODE IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. B E F G H I J K L M Off MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-41 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition Value/Status Ignition switch ON During engine start information indication B&P I Ignition switch ACC During engine start information indication B&P N Ignition switch LOCK During key ID warning indication ID NG Ignition switch LOCK During steering lock information indication ROTAT Ignition switch LOCK During P position warning indication SFT P Ignition switch LOCK During Intelligent Key insert information indication INSRT Ignition switch LOCK During Intelligent Key low battery warning indication BATT Ignition switch ON During take away warning indication NO KY Ignition switch LOCK During key warning indication OUTKY Ignition switch ON During ACC warning indication LK WN Ignition switch LOCK During Key ID verification information indication Ignition switch ON Other than above Off ACC TARGET Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC DISTANCE Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC OWN VHL Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC SET SPEED Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC UNIT Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off During the indication of “P” by shift position indicator P During the indication of “R” by shift position indicator R During the indication of “N” by shift position indicator N During the indication of “D” by shift position indicator D During the indication of “L” by shift position indicator L NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off BSW warning lamp ON On BSW warning lamp OFF Off LCD SHIFT IND Ignition switch ON BSW IND Ignition switch ON BSW W/L Ignition switch ON Revision: 2011 September MWI-42 KY>PSW 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item FUEL CAP W/L Condition Ignition switch ON Value/Status A During fuel filler cap warning display indication On Other than above Off Overdrive control switch ON On Overdrive control switch OFF Off B O/D OFF SW Ignition switch ON M RANGE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off NM RANGE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off AT SFT UP SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off E AT SFT DWN SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off F COMP F/B SIG Ignition switch ON A/C compressor activation condition On A/C compressor deactivation condition Off PKB SW Ignition switch ON Parking brake switch ON On Parking brake switch OFF Off BUCKLE SW Ignition switch ON Driver seat belt not fastened On Driver seat belt fastened Off BRAKE OIL SW Ignition switch ON Brake fluid level switch ON On Brake fluid level switch OFF Off A/C AMP CONN Ignition switch ON Other than the following On Receives ambient sensor power signal Off Ignition switch ON When On ENTER SW SELECT SW Ignition switch ON switch (enter switch) is pressed D G H I J K Other than above When C Off switch (select switch) is pressed On Other than above Off L ECO MODE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off DISTANCE [km] Ignition switch ON — Distance to empty calculated by combination meter — Input value of ambient sensor signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: This may not match the indicated value on the information display. OUTSIDE TEMP [°C or °F] Ignition switch ON FUEL LOW SIG Ignition switch ON During low fuel warning indication On Other than above Off Ignition switch ON Buzzer ON On Buzzer OFF Off BUZZER Revision: 2011 September MWI-43 M MWI O P 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition TPMS PRESS L Ignition switch ON 4WD AUTO IND Ignition switch ON Value/Status During low tire pressure warning indication On Other than above Off NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off NOTE: Some items are not available according to vehicle specification. TERMINAL LAYOUT JPNIA1324ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) + – 1 (O) Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF — Battery voltage 2 (Y) Ground Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON — Battery voltage 3 (B) Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V 4 (B) Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V Revision: 2011 September MWI-44 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + – Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output A Value (Approx.) B • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is maximum C JPNIA1687GB 5 (B/P) Ground Illumination control signal Output Ignition switch ON D E • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is step 11 F JPNIA1686GB 8 (SB) 10 (P) 10 (P) Ground 11 (G) 10 (P) Trip reset switch signal Meter control switch ground Enter switch signal Input Ignition switch ON • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is minimum 12 V When trip reset switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V G H I — Ignition switch ON Input Ignition switch ON When switch (enter switch) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V Ignition switch ON When switch (select switch) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When switch [illumination control switch (+)] is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When switch [illumination control switch (−)] is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V — 0V J K 12 (BR) 13 (Y) 14 (V) 15 (BR) 10 (P) 10 (P) 10 (P) Select switch signal Illumination control switch signal (+) Illumination control switch signal (−) Input Input Input Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON L M MWI O — Air bag signal Input — — — P Revision: 2011 September MWI-45 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description – Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) At idle [after warming up, approx. 20°C (68°F)] 16 (L) Ground Engine coolant temperature signal Output Ignition switch ON JSNIA3528ZZ At idle [after warming up, approx. 80°C (176°F)] JSNIA3530ZZ 18 (LG) Ground Ambient sensor signal Input Ignition switch ON — JSNIA0014GB Input Ignition switch ON — 5V Ambient sensor ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V — CAN-H — — — — 22 (P) — CAN-L — — — — 23 (B) Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V 24 (B) Ground Fuel level sensor ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V 25 (BR) 12 V Alternator signal Input Ignition switch ON Charge warning lamp ON Ground Charge warning lamp OFF 0V 26 (BR) 0V Parking brake switch signal Input Ignition switch ON Parking brake applied. Ground Parking brake released. 12 V 27 (Y) Brake fluid level switch signal 12 V Input Ignition switch ON Brake fluid level is normal Ground Brake fluid level is less than LOW level 0V 28 (V) 0V Security signal Input Ignition switch ON Security indicator lamp ON Ground Security indicator lamp OFF 12 V 19 (R) Ground A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal 20 (Y) Ground 21 (L) Revision: 2011 September MWI-46 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 29 (G) – Ground Description Signal name Washer level switch signal Value (Approx.) A Washer level switch ON 0V B Washer level switch OFF 5V Condition Input/ Output Input Ignition switch ON NOTE: The maximum voltage varies depending on the specification (destination unit). 31 (SB) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Output Ignition switch ON C D Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)] E JSNIA0012GB 32 (P) Ground 34 (O) 24 (B) 35 (P) Ground 36 (BR) — Overdrive control switch signal Fuel level sensor signal Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) Passenger seat belt warning signal Input Ignition switch ON Input Ignition switch ON Input Ignition switch ON Input F When overdrive control switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V — H When driver seat belt is fastened 5V When driver seat belt is unfastened 0V — — — G MWI-68, "Component Inspection" I J Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000007495507 FAIL-SAFE K The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning. Function Specifications L Speedometer Tachometer Reset to zero by suspending communication. M Engine coolant temperature gauge Illumination control When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode. MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-47 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Function Specifications Odo/trip meter An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout. Shift position indicator The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Door open warning Interrupt indication Fuel filler cap warning The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Low tire pressure warning Information display Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Trip computer Distance to empty Average vehicle speed • When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result. • When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two seconds, the last calculation results are indicated. Travel distance Buzzer The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication. ABS warning lamp VDC warning lamp Brake warning lamp The lamp turns ON by suspending communication. EPS warning lamp Malfunction indicator lamp Low tire pressure warning lamp The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication. High beam indicator lamp Warning lamp/indicator lamp Turn signal indicator lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp O/D OFF indicator lamp Tail lamp indicator lamp The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication. CRUISE indicator lamp Oil pressure warning lamp Key warning lamp BSW warning lamp DTC Index Display contents of CONSULT INFOID:0000000007495508 Diagnostic item is detected when... Refer to CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. MWI-58, "Diagnosis Procedure" CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination meter. MWI-59, "Diagnosis Procedure" VEHICLE SPEED [B2205] The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more. MWI-60, "Diagnosis Procedure" ENGINE SPEED [B2267] If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more. MWI-61, "Diagnosis Procedure" WATER TEMP [B2268] If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or more. MWI-62, "Diagnosis Procedure" Revision: 2011 September MWI-48 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > IPDM E/R A List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007495509 B ECU Reference PCS-16, "Reference Value" IPDM E/R C PCS-23, "Fail-safe" PCS-24, "DTC Index" D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-49 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM METER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495510 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if notde- JCNWA3906GB Revision: 2011 September MWI-50 2012 QUEST METER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O JCNWA3907GB P Revision: 2011 September MWI-51 2012 QUEST COMPASS < WIRING DIAGRAM > COMPASS Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495511 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if notde- JCNWA3915GB Revision: 2011 September MWI-52 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM) < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM) Work flow INFOID:0000000007495512 B OVERALL SEQUENCE C D E F G H I J K L M MWI JSNIA4491GB • • • • • Reference 1···MWI-34, "On Board Diagnosis Function". Reference 2···MWI-48, "DTC Index". Reference 3···MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". Reference 4···MWI-64, "Component Inspection". Reference 5···MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure". O P DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under which the malfunction occurred. >> GO TO 2. Revision: 2011 September MWI-53 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM) < BASIC INSPECTION > 2.CHECK SYMPTOM • Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer. • Check that any other malfunctions are present. >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS OPERATION Check that the on board diagnosis function operates. Refer to MWI-34, "On Board Diagnosis Function". Does the on board diagnosis function operate normally? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 6. 4.CHECK CONSULT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS 1. Connect CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index". 2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below: Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data. Are self-diagnosis results normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 10. 5.NARROW DOWN THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 10. 6.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check meter control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> GO TO 10. 7.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH Check meter control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection". Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> GO TO 10. 8.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS Check combination meter power supply and ground circuits. Refer to MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure". Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> GO TO 10. 9.REPLACE COMBINATION METER Replace combination meter. >> GO TO 11. 10.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. NOTE: If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repair or replace malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 11. Revision: 2011 September MWI-54 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM) < BASIC INSPECTION > 11.FINAL CHECK A Check that the combination meter operates normally. Do they operate normally? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 1. B C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-55 2012 QUEST ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS) < BASIC INSPECTION > ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS) Work Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000007495513 Press and hold the compass switch for 3 – 9 seconds. The current zone setting appears on the compass display. Find the current geographical location number in the zone variation chart. Select the new zone number. (Press the compass switch until the new zone number appears on the compass display.) After select the new zone number, the compass display will automatically shows a direction within a few seconds. Perform the following calibration procedure for more accurate indications. SEL168Y Revision: 2011 September MWI-56 2012 QUEST CALIBRATION (COMPASS) < BASIC INSPECTION > CALIBRATION (COMPASS) A Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495514 NOTE: The compass calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances may cause the compass to operate inaccurately. Example: Driving from rural (wide open) areas to crowded city areas, or if an aftermarket (i.e., non original equipment) antenna with a magnetic base is attached to the vehicle. Calibrate the mirror compass if the display shows only one direction or a limited number of directions. NOTE: • If “magnetic hats” are used in the dealership for vehicle identification, remove the hat from the vehicle before performing the following steps. Do not put the hat back on the vehicle after the procedure is completed. • Drive the vehicle to an open level area; away from large metallic objects, structures, and overhead power lines. • Turn off “non-essential” electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater/air conditioning, wipers) and close the doors. 1. Verify the correct compass zone setting for the geographical location. Refer to MWI-56, "Work Procedure". 2. Press and hold the compass switch for more than 9 seconds. 3. “C” is displayed on the compass display when calibration starts. 4. Drive slowly [less than 8 km/h (5 MPH)] in a circle until the “C / CAL” is replaced with primary headings (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). NOTE: This will require driving at least 2 complete 360 degree circles, 3 complete circles may be required. 5. The compass calibration procedure is now complete. The compass should operate normally. NOTE: If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked, repeat the calibration procedure. B C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-57 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007495515 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication system for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication system with high data communication speed and excellent error detectability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto vehicles, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with two communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart". DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007495516 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display contents of CONSULT U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Diagnostic item is detected when... When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. Diagnosis Procedure Probable malfunction location CAN communication system INFOID:0000000007495517 1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed? YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Revision: 2011 September MWI-58 2012 QUEST U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) A Description INFOID:0000000007495518 Initial diagnosis of combination meter. B DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007495519 C DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1010 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Diagnostic item is detected when... When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination meter. Diagnosis Procedure Probable malfunction location D Combination meter E INFOID:0000000007495520 1.REPLACE COMBINATION METER F When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace combination meter. G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-59 2012 QUEST B2205 VEHICLE SPEED < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2205 VEHICLE SPEED Description INFOID:0000000007495521 Vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication to combination meter. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007495522 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B2205 Display contents of CONSULT VEHICLE SPEED Diagnostic item is detected when... An abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more Probable malfunction location • Wheel sensor • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495523 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. >> Refer to BRC-29, "CONSULT Function". Revision: 2011 September MWI-60 2012 QUEST B2267 ENGINE SPEED < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2267 ENGINE SPEED A Description INFOID:0000000007495524 The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007495525 C DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B2267 Display contents of CONSULT ENGINE SPEED B Diagnostic item is detected when... ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more Probable malfunction location D • Crankshaft position sensor (POS) • ECM E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495526 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM F Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. >> Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index". G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-61 2012 QUEST B2268 WATER TEMP < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2268 WATER TEMP Description INFOID:0000000007495527 The engine coolant temperature signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007495528 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B2268 Display contents of CONSULT WATER TEMP Diagnostic item is detected when... ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or more Probable malfunction location • Engine coolant temperature sensor • ECM Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495529 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM Perform “Self Diagnosis Result” of “ENGINE”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. >> Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index". Revision: 2011 September MWI-62 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A COMBINATION METER COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495530 B 1.CHECK FUSE Check for blown fuses. C Power source Fuse No. Battery 11 Ignition switch ON or START 4 D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. E 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. Terminals G (+) (−) Combination meter Connector Terminal 1 M34 Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.) H Ground 2 OFF ON Battery voltage I Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between combination meter and fuse. J 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. L Combination meter Connector Continuity Terminal 3 M34 K Ground 4 M Existed 23 MWI Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-63 2012 QUEST METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495531 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Measure voltage between the following terminals of the combination meter. Combination meter Connector Terminals (+) (−) 11 M34 Voltage (Approx.) Condition 10 12 8 When enter switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When select switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When trip reset switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and meter control switch connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and meter control switch harness connector. Terminals Combination meter Connector Meter control switch Terminal Connector 8 M34 Terminal 5 10 M54 11 12 4. Continuity 6 3 Existed 4 Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Combination meter Connector 8 M34 Continuity Terminal 10 Ground 11 Not existed 12 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495532 1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: 2011 September MWI-64 2012 QUEST METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Disconnect meter control switch connector. 3. Check meter control switch. Terminals Condition Meter control switch 5 Continuity When enter switch is pressed 3 4 A Existed Other than the above 6 B Not existed When select switch is pressed C Existed Other than the above Not existed When trip reset switch is pressed Other than the above D Existed Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace meter control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation". E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-65 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495533 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Measure voltage between the following terminals of the combination meter. Combination meter Connector Terminals (+) Voltage (Approx.) Condition (−) 13 M34 10 14 When illumination control switch (+) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When illumination control switch (−) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and illumination control switch connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and illumination control switch harness connector. Terminals Combination meter Connector Terminal Meter control switch Connector 10 M34 6 13 M55 3 14 4. Continuity Terminal Existed 4 Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Combination meter Connector 10 M34 Continuity Terminal Ground 13 Not existed 14 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495534 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect illumination control switch connector. Check meter control switch. Revision: 2011 September MWI-66 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > A Terminals Condition Meter control switch When illumination control switch (+) is pressed 3 6 4 Continuity Other than the above Existed B Not existed When illumination control switch (−) is pressed Other than the above Existed C Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation". D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-67 2012 QUEST FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495535 1.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and fuel level sensor unit harness connector. Combination meter 4. Fuel level sensor unit Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M34 34 B40 2 Continuity Existed Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 34 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Fuel level sensor unit 2. Combination meter Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B40 5 M34 24 Continuity Existed Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector and ground. Fuel level sensor unit Connector Terminal B40 5 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495536 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit connector. Connect variable resistor between harness connector terminals located on the vehicle side of the fuel level sensor unit. Fuel level sensor unit Connector B40 4. Terminals 2 5 Set variable resistor according to the resistance value shown in the following table and turn ignition switch ON. Revision: 2011 September MWI-68 2012 QUEST FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Fuel gauge indication position Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) 1 Less than 94 3/4 140 1/2 186 1/4 232 0 More than 278 A B C Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". D 2.REMOVE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT E Remove the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation". >> GO TO 3. F 3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Check the resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Terminals Fuel level sensor unit 2 5 Condition Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Height [mm (in)] * Full (A) 51 133.0 (5.24) Empty* (B) 283 15.7 (0.618) G H I *: When float rod is contact with stopper. Is inspection result OK? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Refer to FL-5, "Exploded View". JSNIA3344ZZ J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-69 2012 QUEST OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495537 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “OIL W/L” monitor value. “OIL W/L” Ignition switch ON : On Engine running : Off >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495538 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and oil pressure switch harness connector. Terminals 4. (+) (−) IPDM E/R Oil pressure switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F12 75 F63 1 Continuity Existed Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (−) Continuity IPDM E/R Connector Terminal F12 75 Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495539 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check continuity between oil pressure switch and ground. Condition Continuity Engine stopped Existed Engine running Not existed ELF0044D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September MWI-70 2012 QUEST OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". A B C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-71 2012 QUEST WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495540 1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and washer level switch connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and washer level switch harness connector. Terminals Combination meter Washer level switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M34 29 E303 1 4. Continuity Existed Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Terminals Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 29 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between washer level switch connector and ground. Terminals Washer level switch Connector Terminal E303 2 Continuity Ground Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495541 1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect washer level switch connector. Check washer level switch. Terminals Condition Continuity Washer level switch ON Existed Washer level switch OFF Not existed Washer level switch 1 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-63, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September MWI-72 2012 QUEST A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495542 1.CHECK A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. B Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. C Terminals (+) (−) Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 19 Voltage (Approx.) D 5V E Ground Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. F 2.CHECK A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and A/C auto amp. connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector. G H Combination meter 4. A/C auto amp. Connector Terminal Connector terminal M34 19 M50 20 Continuity I Existed Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. J Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 19 Continuity Ground Not existed K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-73 2012 QUEST THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE Description INFOID:0000000007495543 Fuel gauge will not indicate from a certain position. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495544 1.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check the fuel level sensor signal circuit. Refer to MWI-68, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.COMPONENT INSPECTION Perform components inspection for the fuel level sensor unit and combination meter. Refer to MWI-68, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK FLOAT INTERFERENCE Check that the float arm interferes with or binds to other components in the fuel tank. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September MWI-74 2012 QUEST THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE Description A INFOID:0000000007495545 If any of the following malfunctions is found for the meter control switch operation. • All switches are inoperative • The specified switch cannot be operated Diagnosis Procedure B INFOID:0000000007495546 C 1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT D Check the meter control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. E 2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH Perform a unit check for the meter control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace meter control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation". F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-75 2012 QUEST THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE Description INFOID:0000000007495547 If any of the following malfunctions is found for the illumination control switch operation. • All switches are inoperative • The specified switch cannot be operated Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495548 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check the illumination control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Perform a unit check for the illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September MWI-76 2012 QUEST THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON Description A INFOID:0000000007495549 The oil pressure warning lamp stays off when the ignition switch is turned ON. Diagnosis Procedure B INFOID:0000000007495550 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP C Perform auto active test. Refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis Description". Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 4. D 2.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT E Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-70, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. F 3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH G Perform a unit check for the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". H 4.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Connect CONSULT and perform an input signal check for the combination meter. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-77 2012 QUEST THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF Description INFOID:0000000007495551 The oil pressure warning lamp remains illuminated while the engine is running (normal oil pressure). Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495552 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Perform auto active test. Refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis Description". Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 5. 2.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between the oil pressure switch harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (−) Oil pressure switch Connector Terminal F63 1 Voltage (Approx.) Ground 12 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Perform a unit check for the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". 4.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-70, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 5.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Connect CONSULT and perform an input signal check for the combination meter. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September MWI-78 2012 QUEST THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY Description A INFOID:0000000007495553 B • The parking brake warning is displayed during vehicle travel even though the parking brake is released. • The parking brake warning is not displayed even though driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495554 1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION 1. 2. C D Start engine. Check the operation of the brake warning lamp when operating the parking brake. E Condition Warning lamp status Parking brake applied ON Parking brake released OFF F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. G 2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to WCS-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. H I 3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH UNIT J Perform a unit check for the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View". K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-79 2012 QUEST THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY Description INFOID:0000000007495555 • The warning is still displayed even after washer fluid is added. • The warning is not displayed even though the washer tank is empty. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495556 1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check the washer level switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-72, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH UNIT Perform a unit check for the washer level switch. Refer to MWI-72, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-63, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September MWI-80 2012 QUEST THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY Description A INFOID:0000000007495557 B • The door ajar warning is displayed even though all of the doors are closed. • The door ajar warning is not displayed even though a door is ajar. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495558 1.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Connect CONSULT and check the BCM input signals. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. C D E 2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL F Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “DOOR W/L” monitor value. “DOOR W/L” Door open : On Door closed : Off G Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". H 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT I Check the door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-209, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair harness or connector. J 4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH K Perform a unit check for the door switch. Refer to DLK-210, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace applicable door switch. Refer to DLK-453, "Removal and Installation". L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-81 2012 QUEST THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT Description INFOID:0000000007495559 • The displayed ambient air temperature is higher than the actual temperature. • The displayed ambient air temperature is lower than the actual temperature. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495560 NOTE: Check that the symptom is not applicable to the normal operating condition before starting diagnosis. Refer to MWI-83, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description". 1.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check the ambient sensor signal circuit. Refer to HAC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR Perform the part check for the ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-86, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-136, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September MWI-82 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION A COMPASS COMPASS : Description INFOID:0000000007495561 B COMPASS • The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic fields. However, some large changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited to): high tension power lines, large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic car washes, large piles of scrap metal, etc. While this does not happen very often, it is possible. • During normal operation, the compass mirror will continuously update the compass calibration to adjust for gradual changes in the vehicle's magnetic “remnant” field. If the vehicle is subjected to high magnetic influences, the compass may appear to indicate false headings, become locked, or appear that it is unable to be calibrated. If this occurs, perform the calibration procedure. • If at any time the compass continually displays an incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked, verify the correct zone variance. C D E Symptom Chart Symptom Cause Solution / Reference F The compass display reads “C”. Compass shows the wrong direction. Compass does not change direction appears “Locked”. Compass does not show all the directions, one or more is missing. The compass was calibrated but it “loses” calibration. G • Compass is not calibrated. • Incorrect zone variance setting. • Large change in magnetic field (Steel bridges, subways, concentrations of metal, carwashes, etc.) • Compass was calibrated incorrectly or in the presence of a strong magnetic field. Perform Calibration. Refer to MWI-57, "Work Procedure". Perform zone variation setting if correct reading is desired in that location. Refer toMWI-56, "Work Procedure". On long trips the compass shows the wrong direction. H I J INFORMATION DISPLAY INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description INFOID:0000000007495562 K AMBIENT TEMPERATURE The displayed ambient temperature on the information display may differ from the actual temperature because it is a corrected value calculated from the ambient sensor signal by the combination meter. Refer to MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description" for details on the correction process. DISTANCE TO EMPTY The calculated distance to empty may differ from the actual distance to empty if the refueling amount is approximately 15 (4 US gal, 3-1/4 Imp gal) or less. This is because the refuel control (moves the fuel gauge needle quicker than normal judging that the driver is refueling the vehicle) is not performing. L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-83 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION COMBINATION METER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495563 REMOVAL Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". DISASSEMBLY JSNIA3340ZZ 1. Unified meter control unit 2. Front cover Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495564 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove screws and connector, and then remove combination meter. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007495565 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Disengage the pawls (4 on the lower part) of the combination meter. Insert the removal tool into the clearance (in the order of A, B) between the front cover and the meter control unit. Remove 4 pawls on the lower side of the front cover by turning the tool while increasing the clearance. CAUTION: Wrap the removal tools with protective tape to prevent scratches. JSNIA3427ZZ 3. Pull the front cover straight to remove it from the unified meter control unit. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September MWI-84 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Never touch the display, pointer, the inside of front cover and the printed area of the dial during the work. • Keep away from magnetic sources. • Never damage the front cover. A ASSEMBLY B Install the front cover straight to the unified meter control unit and engage all the pawl. CAUTION: • Never touch the display, pointer, the inside of front cover and the printed area of the dial during the work. • Keep away from magnetic sources. • Never damage the front cover. C D E F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-85 2012 QUEST METER CONTROL SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > METER CONTROL SWITCH Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495566 REMOVAL Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495567 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disengage the tabs and remove meter control switch. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September MWI-86 2012 QUEST ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Exploded View A INFOID:0000000007495568 REMOVAL B Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495569 C REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disengage the tabs and remove illumination control switch. D INSTALLATION E Install in the reverse order of removal. F G H I J K L M MWI O P Revision: 2011 September MWI-87 2012 QUEST COMPASS < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > COMPASS Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495570 Refer to MIR-23, "Exploded View" (with ADP), or MIR-37, "Exploded View" (without ADP). Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495571 Refer to MIR-23, "Removal and Installation" (with ADP), or MIR-37, "Removal and Installation" (without ADP). Revision: 2011 September MWI-88 2012 QUEST ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL SECTION PCS POWER CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS IPDM E/R Fail-safe ...................................................................23 DTC Index ...............................................................24 PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 IPDM E/R ..................................................................... 4 IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location ..................... 4 SYSTEM .............................................................. 5 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................... 5 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............................................................................ 5 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ................... 6 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................... 8 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............................................................................ 8 SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ........................................ 8 SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description...... 8 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 9 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram ........................................................ 9 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ................................................... 9 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 26 Wiring Diagram ........................................................26 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 29 Description ...............................................................29 DTC Logic ................................................................29 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................29 B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK .............. 30 Description ...............................................................30 DTC Logic ................................................................30 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................30 Description ...............................................................31 DTC Logic ................................................................31 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................31 J K L Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 33 N IPDM E/R ........................................................... 33 Exploded View .........................................................33 Removal and Installation .........................................33 O POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 34 Revision: 2011 September I POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 32 PCS Diagnosis Description ............................................. 11 CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) ............................. 13 Reference Value ..................................................... 16 H B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK ............ 31 PRECAUTION .............................................. 34 IPDM E/R ............................................................16 G IPDM E/R ........................................................... 26 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) .....................11 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 16 F Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................34 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 35 PCS-1 2012 QUEST P COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 35 Component Parts Location ..................................... 35 SYSTEM ............................................................. 36 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ........................... 36 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description .................................................................. 36 Fail-safe .................................................................. 37 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 38 DTC Logic ............................................................... 54 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 54 Component Inspection ............................................ 55 B2618 BCM ....................................................... 56 DTC Logic ............................................................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56 B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ..... 58 DTC Logic ............................................................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58 COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 38 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 38 B26F1 IGNITION RELAY .................................. 60 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 39 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ............................................... 40 B26F2 IGNITION RELAY .................................. 61 DTC Logic ............................................................... 60 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 60 DTC Logic ............................................................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 61 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 44 B26F6 BCM ....................................................... 63 BCM ................................................................... 44 DTC Logic ............................................................... 63 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63 List of ECU Reference ............................................ 44 WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 45 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ................... 45 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 45 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ................. 64 Component Function Check .................................. 64 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64 Component Inspection ............................................ 65 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 47 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR .............................................. 67 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 47 Description .............................................................. 67 Component Function Check .................................. 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67 Work Flow ............................................................... 47 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 50 B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT ........................... 50 DTC Logic ............................................................... 50 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50 Component Inspection ............................................ 51 B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 52 DTC Logic ............................................................... 52 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52 Component Inspection ............................................ 53 B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 54 Revision: 2011 September SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 69 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................. 69 Description .............................................................. 69 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 69 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ... 70 Description .............................................................. 70 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70 PCS-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [IPDM E/R] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492076 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS IPDM E/R IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492077 JMMIA0844ZZ 1. IPDM E/R A. Engine room (LH) Revision: 2011 September PCS-4 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492078 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O JMMIA0834GB DESCRIPTION IPDM E/R activates the internal control circuit to perform the relay ON-OFF control according to the input signals from various sensors and the request signals received from control units via CAN communication. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the parts, IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Revision: 2011 September PCS-5 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Control relay Input/output Transmit unit Control part Headlamp low relay Low beam request signal BCM (CAN) Headlamp (LO) Headlamp high relay High beam request signal BCM (CAN) Headlamp (HI) Front fog lamp relay Tail lamp relay • Front wiper relay • Front wiper high relay Horn relay • Starter relay* • Starter control relay Front fog light request signal BCM (CAN) Position light request signal BCM (CAN) Front fog lamp • • • • • EXL-22 (Xenon type) • EXL-122 (Halogen type) Parking lamp license plate lamp Tail lamp Side marker lamp Illumination INL-15 Front wiper motor WW-7 Front wiper request signal BCM (CAN) Front wiper stop position signal Front wiper motor • Theft warning horn request signal • Horn reminder signal BCM (CAN) Starter control relay signal BCM (CAN) Starter relay control signal TCM Starter motor relay cut off signal ECM (CAN) EC-52 • HAC-19 (Automatic air conditioning) • HAC-154 (Manual air conditioning) • Horn (high) • Horn (low) Starter motor ECM (CAN) A/C compressor (magnet clutch) • Cooling fan relay-1 • Cooling fan relay-2 • Cooling fan relay-3 Cooling fan speed request signal ECM (CAN) • Cooling fan motor-1 • Cooling fan motor-2 Ignition switch ON signal BCM (CAN) Vehicle speed signal Combination meter (CAN) Push-button ignition switch signal Push-button ignition switch Daytime running light request signal BCM (CAN) SEC-20 SEC-5 A/C compressor request signal Daytime running light relay • EXL-11 (Xenon type) • EXL-111 (Halogen type) • EXL-25 (Xenon type) • EXL-125 (Halogen type) A/C relay Ignition relay Reference page Each control unit, sensor, actuator and relay (ignition power supply) Headlamp (HI) EC-41 PCS-30 • EXL-19 (Xenon type) • EXL-119 (Halogen type) *: BCM controls the starter relay. RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492079 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM Revision: 2011 September PCS-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Control part Fail-safe operation A • Turns ON the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is turned ON (Cooling fan operates at HI) • Turns OFF the cooling fan relay-1, the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is turned OFF (Cooling fan does not operate) Cooling fan A/C compressor A/C relay OFF Alternator Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0% B C If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM Control part Headlamp • • • • • D Fail-safe operation Parking lamp License plate lamp Illumination Tail lamp Side marker lamp • Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON • Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF • Headlamp high relay OFF E • Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON • Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF F • The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed. • The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control is activated while the front wiper is set in the AUTO mode and the front wiper motor is operating. • Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other than stop position. Front wiper motor H I Front fog lamp Front fog lamp relay OFF Horn Horn relay OFF Ignition relay The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained. Starter motor Starter control relay OFF J IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION • IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. • IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. • If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay and daytime running light relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. K L PCS Voltage judgment Ignition relay contact side Ignition relay excitation coil side IPDM E/R judgment Operation ON ON Ignition relay ON normal — OFF OFF Ignition relay OFF normal — ON OFF Ignition relay ON stuck • Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON” • Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes OFF ON Ignition relay OFF stuck Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF” N O P FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal. When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times. Revision: 2011 September G PCS-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Ignition switch Front wiper switch Front wiper stop position signal OFF The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds. ON The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds. ON NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item “WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. POWER CONTROL SYSTEM POWER CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492080 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMMIA0810GB DESCRIPTION Alternator Control IPDM E/R outputs power generation command signal (PWM signal) to the alternator according to the status of the power generation command value signal received from ECM via CAN communication. Refer to CHG-7, "CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description". SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492081 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMMIA0835GB DESCRIPTION • IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to MWI-16, "OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description". Revision: 2011 September PCS-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • IPDM E/R receives the rear window defogger control signal from BCM via CAN communication and transmits it to ECM via CAN communication. Refer to DEF-6, "System Description". A POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007492082 POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492083 B C SYSTEM DIAGRAM D E F G H I J JMMIA0859GB K DESCRIPTION Outline • IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. • IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. L PCS Normal mode (wake-up) - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. N Low power consumption mode (sleep) - Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. O Sleep Mode Activation • IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. • IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. Wake-up Operation Revision: 2011 September PCS-9 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Revision: 2011 September PCS-10 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) A Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000007492084 AUTO ACTIVE TEST B Description In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. • Oil pressure warning lamp • Front wiper (LO, HI) • Parking lamp • License plate lamp • Tail lamp • Side marker lamp • Front fog lamp • Headlamp (LO, HI) • A/C compressor (magnet clutch) • Cooling fan Operation Procedure NOTE: Never perform auto active test in the following condition. • Passenger door is open. • CONSULT is connected. 1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation) NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the front door switch (driver side) 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. NOTE: Engine starts when ignition switch is turned ON while brake pedal is depressed. 5. The oil pressure warning lamp starts blinking when the auto active test starts. 6. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: • When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF. • When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". C D E F G H I J K L PCS Inspection in Auto Active Test When auto active test is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. N Operation sequence Inspection location Operation 1 Oil pressure warning lamp Blinks continuously during operation of auto active test 2 Front wiper motor LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds 3 • • • • • 10 seconds 4 Headlamp • LO 10 seconds • HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times 5 A/C compressor (magnet clutch) ON ⇔ OFF 5 times 6 Cooling fan LO for 5 seconds →MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds Parking lamp License plate lamp Tail lamp Side marker lamp Front fog lamp Revision: 2011 September PCS-11 O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Concept of auto active test JMMIA0836GB • IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. • The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test Symptom • • • • • • • Any of the following components do not operate Parking lamp License plate lamp Tail lamp Side marker lamp Front fog lamp Headlamp (HI, LO) Front wiper motor A/C compressor does not operate Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate Revision: 2011 September Inspection contents Perform auto active test. Does the applicable system operate? Possible cause YES BCM signal input circuit NO • Lamp or motor • Lamp or motor ground circuit • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and applicable system • IPDM E/R YES • Combination meter signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between Combination meter and ECM • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Magnet clutch • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and magnet clutch • IPDM E/R YES • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and oil pressure switch • Oil pressure switch • IPDM E/R NO • CAN communication signal between IPDM E/R and BCM • CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination meter • Combination meter Perform auto active test. Does the magnet clutch operate? Perform auto active test. Does the oil pressure warning lamp blink? PCS-12 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause YES • ECM signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Cooling fan • Harness or connector between cooling fan and cooling fan relay • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and cooling fan relay • Cooling fan relay • IPDM E/R Perform auto active test. Does the cooling fan operate? Cooling fan does not operate A B C D CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000007492085 APPLICATION ITEM E CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. Diagnosis mode Description F Ecu Identification Allows confirmation of IPDM E/R part number. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by IPDM E/R. Data Monitor Displays the real-time input/output data from IPDM E/R input/output data. Active Test IPDM E/R can provide a drive signal to electronic components to check their operations. CAN Diag Support Monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. G H SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index". I DATA MONITOR Monitor item Monitor Item [Unit] J MAIN SIGNALS Description × Displays the value of the cooling fan speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication. AC COMP REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the A/C compressor request signal received from ECM via CAN communication. TAIL&CLR REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HL LO REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the low beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HL HI REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the high beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. FR FOG REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi] × Displays the status of the front wiper request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P] × Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal judged by IPDM E/R. WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK] × Displays the status of the front wiper fail-safe operation judged by IPDM E/R. MOTOR FAN REQ [1/2/3/4] IGN RLY1 -REQ [Off/On] IGN RLY [Off/On] PUSH SW [Off/On] Revision: 2011 September Displays the status of the ignition switch ON signal received from BCM via CAN communication. × Displays the status of the ignition relay judged by IPDM E/R. Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch judged by IPDM E/R. PCS-13 2012 QUEST K L PCS N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor Item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description INTER/NP SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the shift position judged by IPDM E/R. ST RLY CONT [Off/On] Displays the status of the starter relay status signal received from BCM via CAN communication. IHBT RLY -REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the starter control relay signal received from BCM via CAN communication. ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI/UNKWN] Displays the status of the starter relay and starter control relay judged by IPDM E/R. DETENT SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the CVT shift selector (detention switch) judged by IPDM E/R. S/L RLY -REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. S/L STATE [LOCK/UNLK/UNKWN] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. DTRL REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the daytime running light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. NOTE: This item is monitored only on the vehicle with daytime running light system. OIL P SW [Open/Close] Displays the status of the oil pressure switch judged by IPDM E/R. HOOD SW [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. HL WASHER REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. THFT HRN REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the theft warning horn request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HORN CHIRP [Off/On] Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BCM via CAN communication. CRNRNG LMP REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. ACTIVE TEST Test item Test item Operation Description Off CORNERING LAMP LH NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. RH HORN FRONT WIPER MOTOR FAN HEAD LAMP WASHER On Operates horn relay for 20 ms. Off OFF Lo Operates the front wiper relay. Hi Operates the front wiper relay and front wiper high relay. 1 OFF 2 Operates the cooling fan relay-1. 3 Operates the cooling fan relay-2. 4 Operates the cooling fan relay-2 and cooling fan relay-3. On NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. Revision: 2011 September PCS-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [IPDM E/R] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item EXTERNAL LAMPS Operation Description A Off OFF TAIL Operates the tail lamp relay and the daytime running light relay. Lo Operates the headlamp low relay. Hi Operates the headlamp low relay and ON/OFF the headlamp high relay at 1 second intervals. Fog Operates the front fog lamp relay. B C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-15 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION IPDM E/R Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492086 VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Monitor Item Condition MOTOR FAN REQ Engine idle speed AC COMP REQ Engine running TAIL&CLR REQ HL LO REQ Changes depending on engine coolant temperature, air conditioner operation status, vehicle speed, etc. A/C switch OFF Off A/C switch ON (compressor is operating) On Off Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) On Lighting switch OFF Off Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) FR FOG REQ Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Off Lighting switch HI or PASS On Lighting switch HI or PASS Front fog lamp switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON WIP PROT Ignition switch ON IGN RLY PUSH SW INTER/NP SW ST RLY CONT IHBT RLY -REQ Revision: 2011 September Off On Front wiper switch OFF Stop Front wiper switch INT 1LOW Front wiper switch LO Low Front wiper switch HI Hi Front wiper stop position WIP AUTO STOP On Lighting switch other than HI and PASS Front fog lamp switch OFF IGN RLY1 -REQ 1/2/3/4 Lighting switch OFF HL HI REQ FR WIP REQ Value/Status Any position other than front wiper stop position Front wiper operates normally Front wiper stops at fail-safe operation STOP P ACT P Off BLOCK Ignition switch OFF or ACC Off Ignition switch ON On Ignition switch OFF or ACC Off Ignition switch ON On Release the push-button ignition switch Off Press the push-button ignition switch On Ignition switch ON Selector lever in any position other than P or N Off Selector lever in P or N position On Ignition switch ON Off At engine cranking On Ignition switch ON Off At engine cranking On PCS-16 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item ST/INHI RLY DETENT SW Condition Value/Status Ignition switch ON Off At engine cranking INHI → ST The status of starter relay or starter control relay cannot be recognized by the battery voltage malfunction, etc. when the starter relay is ON and the starter control relay is OFF • Press the selector button with selector lever in P position • Selector lever in any position other than P Ignition switch ON UNKWN C On S/L RLY -REQ NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off S/L STATE NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. UNLK OIL P SW Off Daytime running light system is operated On Ignition switch ON (engine running) Ignition switch ON (engine stopped) G Close NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off HL WASHER REQ NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off Not operation Off • Panic alarm is activated • Theft warning alarm is activated On Not operation Off Door locking with Intelligent Key (horn chirp mode) On NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. Off HORN CHIRP CRNRNG LMP REQ F Open HOOD SW THFT HRN REQ D E Daytime running light system is not operated Ignition switch OFF or ACC B Off Release the selector button with selector lever in P position DTRL REQ A H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-17 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TERMINAL LAYOUT JPMIA0863ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) + − 1 (R) Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF 6 – 16 V 2 (L) Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF 6 – 16 V 4 (LG) Ground Front wiper LO Output Ignition switch ON Front wiper switch OFF 0–1V Front wiper switch LO 9 – 16 V 5 (Y) Ground Front wiper HI Output Ignition switch ON Front wiper switch OFF 0–1V Front wiper switch HI 9 – 16 V 6 (G) Ground Daytime running light relay power supply 7 (BR) Ground Illuminations 10 (P) 12 (B) Ground Ground ECM relay power supply Ground Revision: 2011 September Input Output Output — Ignition switch OFF 6 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 1ST 9 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF (More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 0–1V • Ignition switch ON • Ignition switch OFF (For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 6 – 16 V Ignition switch ON 0–1V PCS-18 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 13 (G) 15 (L) − Ground Ground Description Signal name Fuel pump power supply Ignition power supply Output Output Ground Front wiper stop position 18 (P) Ground Ignition power supply No. 2 19 (V) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 20 (W) Ground Ambient sensor ground Output 16 (R) 21 (O) Ground Ambient sensor 22 (SB) Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor ground Input Input Input Output 23 (GR) Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor Output 24 (G) Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply Input 25 (GR) Ground Ignition relay power supply 27 (BR) Ground Ignition relay monitor Input 28 (G) Ground Push-button ignition switch Input Output 30 (LG) Ground 34 (O) Ground Cooling fan relay-3 control Input 35 (P) Ground Cooling fan relay-1 power supply Input 36 (G) Ground Battery power supply Input Ground Cooling fan relay-2 power supply 38 (GR) Starter relay control Revision: 2011 September Condition Value (Approx.) A Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON 0–1V B • Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON • Engine running 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Input/ Output Input Output Ignition switch ON C Front wiper stop position 0–1V Any position other than front wiper stop position 9 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch ON 0–1V Ignition switch ON 0 – 4.8 V NOTE: Changes depending to ambient temperature Engine running • Warm-up condition • Idle speed 0–1V Engine running • Warm-up condition • Both A/C switch and blower fan motor switch ON (Compressor operates) 1–4V Ignition switch ON 5V F G H J K 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 6 – 16 V Ignition switch ON 0–1V Press the push-button ignition switch 0–1V Release the push-button ignition switch 6 – 16 V Selector lever in any position other than P or N 6 – 16 V Selector lever P or N 0–1V Cooling fan stopped 6 – 16 V Cooling fan at HI operation 0–1V Cooling fan stopped 6 – 16 V Cooling fan at LO operation 4–8V Ignition switch OFF 6 – 16 V Cooling fan not operation 0–1V Cooling fan at LO operation 4–8V Cooling fan at HI operation 9 – 16 V PCS-19 E I Ignition switch OFF or ACC Ignition switch ON D 2012 QUEST L PCS N O P IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name Input/ Output Condition Value (Approx.) + − 39 (P) — CAN-L Input/ Output — — 40 (L) — CAN-H Input/ Output — — 41 (B) Ground Ground — 42 (SB) Ground Cooling fan relay-2 control 43 (LG) Ground CVT shift selector (Detention switch) Input Input 44 (W) Ground Horn relay control Input 45 (Y) Ground Horn switch Input 46 (O) Ground Starter relay control Input 48 (W) Ground A/C relay power supply Output 49 (R/B) Ground ECM relay power supply Output 51 (LG) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 52 (Y/G) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 53 (R/W) 54 (G/W) Ground Ground ECM relay power supply Throttle control motor relay power supply Output Output 55 (W/L) Ground ECM power supply Output 56 (R/Y) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output Revision: 2011 September Ignition switch ON 0–1V Cooling fan stopped 9 – 16 V • Cooling fan at MID operation • Cooling fan at HI operation 0–1V Ignition switch ON • Press the selector button (selector lever P) • Selector lever in any position other than P 9 – 16 V Release the selector button (selector lever P) 0–1V The horn is deactivated 9 – 16 V The horn is activated 0–1V The horn is deactivated 9 – 16 V The horn is activated 0–1V At engine cranking 0–1V Other than at engine cranking 6 – 16 V Engine running A/C switch OFF 0–1V A/C switch ON (A/C compressor is operating) 9 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF (More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 0–1V • Ignition switch ON • Ignition switch OFF (For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF (More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 0–1V • Ignition switch ON • Ignition switch OFF (For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V PCS-20 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name + − 57 (O) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 58 (Y) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 69 (W/B) 70 (O) Ground Ground ECM relay control Throttle control motor relay control Condition Input/ Output Output Output Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Ignition switch OFF (More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 6 – 16 V • Ignition switch ON • Ignition switch OFF (For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF) 0–1V Ignition switch OFF or ACC 6 – 16 V Ignition switch ON 0–1V Ignition switch OFF 71 (P) Ground Cranking request Output Value (Approx.) Ignition switch ON Selector lever P or N Selector lever in any position other than P or N A B C D E F 0–1V G 9 – 16 V Engine running 72 (R/B) Ground 75 (LG) Ground Starter relay control Oil pressure switch Input Input Ignition switch ON Selector lever in any position other than P or N 6 – 16 V Selector lever P or N 0–1V Engine stopped 0–1V Engine running 9 – 16 V H I J K Ignition switch ON JPMIA0001GB 6.6 V L PCS 76 (SB) Ground Power generation command signal Output 40% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE” N JPMIA0002GB 4.0 V O P 80% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE” JPMIA0003GB 1.3 V Revision: 2011 September PCS-21 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 77 (B) − Ground Description Signal name Fuel pump relay control Condition Value (Approx.) • Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON • Engine running 0–1V Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Other than at engine cranking 0–1V At engine cranking 6 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) 9 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) 9 – 16 V Input/ Output Output 80 (B) Ground Starter motor Output 83 (R) Ground Headlamp LO (RH) Output 84 (L) Ground Headlamp LO (LH) Output 9 – 16 V Ground Front fog lamp (RH) Output Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Front fog lamp switch ON 86 (SB) Front fog lamp switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Front fog lamp switch ON 9 – 16 V Front fog lamp switch OFF 0–1V 87 (Y) Ground Front fog lamp (LH) Output 88 (BR) Ground Ignition relay power supply Output 89 (V) Ground 90 (G) Ground 91 (LG) Ground Headlamp HI (RH) Headlamp HI (LH) Front combination lamp RH Output Output Output 92 (P) Ground Front combination lamp LH Output 93 (W) Ground Headlamp aiming motor RH Output 94 (O) Ground Headlamp aiming motor LH Output 99 (Y) Ground Ambient sensor ground Output 100 (V) Ground Ambient sensor 101 (O) Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor ground Revision: 2011 September Input Output Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0–1V Ignition switch ON 6 – 16 V Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Lighting switch HI or PASS 9 – 16 V Lighting switch other than HI and PASS 0–1V Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated) Lighting switch HI or PASS 9 – 16 V Lighting switch other than HI and PASS 0–1V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 1ST 9 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 1ST 9 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 1ST 9 – 16 V Lighting switch OFF 0–1V Lighting switch 1ST 9 – 16 V Ignition switch ON 0–1V Ignition switch ON 0 – 4.8 V NOTE: Changes depending to ambient temperature Engine running • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PCS-22 0–1V 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description − + 102 (G) Condition Input/ Output Signal name Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor 103 (BR) Ground Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply Input 105 (R) Ground Daytime running light relay control Output Output Engine running • Warm-up condition • Both A/C switch and blower fan motor switch ON (Compressor operates) Ignition switch ON Value (Approx.) A B 1–4V C 5V Daytime running light deactivated 9 – 16 V Daytime running light activated 0–1V Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492087 D E CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. F If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM Control part G Fail-safe operation Cooling fan • Turns ON the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is turned ON (Cooling fan operates at HI) • Turns OFF the cooling fan relay-1, the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is turned OFF (Cooling fan does not operate) A/C compressor A/C relay OFF Alternator Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0% H I If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM J Control part Fail-safe operation Headlamp • Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON • Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF • Headlamp high relay OFF • • • • • • Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON • Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF Parking lamp License plate lamp Illumination Tail lamp Side marker lamp K L Front wiper motor • The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed. • The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control is activated while the front wiper is set in the AUTO mode and the front wiper motor is operating. • Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other than stop position. Front fog lamp Front fog lamp relay OFF Horn Horn relay OFF Ignition relay The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained. Starter motor Starter control relay OFF • IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. • IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. PCS-23 N O P IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September PCS 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > • If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay and daytime running light relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. Voltage judgment Ignition relay contact side Ignition relay excitation coil side IPDM E/R judgment Operation ON ON Ignition relay ON normal — OFF OFF Ignition relay OFF normal — ON OFF Ignition relay ON stuck • Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON” • Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes OFF ON Ignition relay OFF stuck Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF” FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal. When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times. Ignition switch Front wiper switch Front wiper stop position signal OFF The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds. ON The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds. ON NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item “WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492088 NOTE: • The details of time display are as follows. - CRNT: A malfunction is detected now. - PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past. • IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame Data). - The number is 0 when is detected now. - The number increases like 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF → ON. - The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. ×: Applicable CONSULT display Fail-safe Reference No DTC is detected. further testing may be required. — — U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT × PCS-29 B2098: IGN RELAY ON × PCS-30 B2099: IGN RELAY OFF — PCS-31 B209F: STR CUT OFF OPEN — SEC-91 B20A0: STR CUT OFF SHORT — SEC-93 B210B: START CONT RLY ON — SEC-95 B210C: START CONT RLY OFF — SEC-97 B210D: STARTER RELAY ON — SEC-99 B210E: STARTER RELAY OFF — SEC-101 Revision: 2011 September PCS-24 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > CONSULT display Fail-safe Reference B210F: INTRLCK/PNP SW ON — SEC-104 B2110: INTRLCK/PNP SW OFF — SEC-106 A B C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-25 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM IPDM E/R Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492089 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCMWA7669GB Revision: 2011 September PCS-26 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O JCMWA7670GB P Revision: 2011 September PCS-27 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCMWA7671GB Revision: 2011 September PCS-28 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [IPDM E/R] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007492090 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart". DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492091 B C D E DTC DETECTION LOGIC F DTC U1000 CONSULT display description CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC Detection Condition When IPDM E/R cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more Diagnosis Procedure Possible cause G CAN communication system INFOID:0000000007492092 H 1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC I 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. Is DTC “U1000” displayed? YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-29 2012 QUEST B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK [IPDM E/R] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK Description INFOID:0000000007492093 • IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN communication. • Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/ h (2.5 MPH) or less. • Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/C amp.(Emergency OFF) - Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more. - Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds. NOTE: The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switch is pressed. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492094 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B2098 CONSULT display description IGN RELAY ON DTC Detection Condition Possible causes The ignition relay ON is detected for 1 second at ignition switch OFF (CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it) Ignition relay malfunction 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Refer to PCS-30, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492095 1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait 1 second or more. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. Is DTC “B2098” displayed? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Revision: 2011 September PCS-30 2012 QUEST B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK [IPDM E/R] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK A Description INFOID:0000000007492096 • IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN communication. • Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/ h (2.5 MPH) or less. • Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/C amp.(Emergency OFF) - Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more. - Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds. NOTE: The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switch is pressed. DTC Logic B2099 C D E INFOID:0000000007492097 F DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B CONSULT display description IGN RELAY OFF DTC Detection Condition Possible causes The ignition relay OFF is detected for 1 second at ignition switch ON (CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it) Ignition relay malfunction G H NOTE: When IPDM E/R power supply voltage is low (Approx. 7 - 8 V for about 1 second), the “DTC: B2099” may be detected. I 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Refer to PCS-31, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END. Diagnosis Procedure J K INFOID:0000000007492098 1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS L 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait 1 second or more. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. Is “B2099” displayed? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-31 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [IPDM E/R] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492099 1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible links are not blown. Signal name Fuses and fusible link No. E (80 A) C (60 A) H (40 A) Battery power supply 50 (15 A) 51 (15 A) Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is blown. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and the ground. (+) IPDM E/R Connector (−) Voltage Ground 6 – 16 V Terminal 1 E9 2 E10 36 Is the measurement value normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the harness or connector. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and the ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 12 E11 41 Continuity Ground Existed Does continuity exist? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair the harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September PCS-32 2012 QUEST IPDM E/R [IPDM E/R] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A IPDM E/R Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492100 B C D E F G JPMIA0868ZZ 1. Relay box cover 2. IPDM E/R H Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492101 CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays are not serviceable parts, and must not be removed from the unit. I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Remove the relay box cover. Disconnect the harness connector form the IPDM E/R (1). Press the pawl (A) and remove the IPDM E/R from relay box. J K L PCS JPMIA0869ZZ N INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-33 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492102 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September PCS-34 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492103 B C D E F JMMIA0860ZZ No. Component G Description BCM • BCM controls power distribution system. • BCM judges ignition switch position by push-button ignition switch (push switch) and vehicle condition. • BCM checks the ignition switch position internally. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. Stop lamp relay Stop lamp switch detects that brake pedal is depressed, and stop lamp relay transmits the signal to BCM. Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 3. Push-button ignition switch Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed, and transmits the status signal to BCM and IPDM E/R. 4. CVT shift selector (detention switch) CVT shift selector (detention switch) detects shift lever status, transmits detention switch signal to BCM. Refer to TM-16, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Transmission range switch Transmission range switch detects shift position P or N, transmits P/N position signal to BCM. Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. L 5. PCS IPDM E/R • IPDM E/R detects push-button ignition switch (push switch) status, and transmits push-button ignition switch status signal (CAN) to BCM. • IPDM E/R receives ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control signal and ignition switch ON signal (CAN) from BCM, and controls ignition relay (built in IPDM E/R) Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Blower relay (built in fuse block) • Blower relay is controled by BCM. • Blower relay supplies the ignition switch ON power supply or the ignition switch ON signal to air conditiooning system when ignition switch is turned ON. • BCM compares status of blower relay control signal and ignition switch positon judged by BCM. Accessory relay (built in fuse block) • Accessory relay is controled by BCM. • Accessory relay supplies the accessory power supply or the ignition switch ACC signal to each ECU when ignition switch is turned ACC or ON. • BCM compares status of accessory relay control signal, and ignition switch position judged by BCM. Ignition relay (built in fuse block) • Ignition relay is controled by BCM. • Ignition relay supplies the ignition switch ON power supply or the ignition switch ON signal to each ECU and system when ignition switch is turned ON. • BCM compares status of ignition relay control signal and ignition switch positon judged by BCM. • BCM monitors the ignition relay operating status by the ignition relay feedback signal. 1. 6. 7. 8. 9. Revision: 2011 September PCS-35 2012 QUEST H I J K N O P SYSTEM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492104 SYSTEM DIADRAM JMMIA0861GB SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) is the system that BCM controls with the operation of the pushbutton ignition switch and performs the power distribution to each power circuit. This system is used instead of the mechanical power supply changing mechanism with the operation of the conventional key cylinder. • The push-button ignition switch can be operated when Intelligent Key is in the following condition. - Intelligent Key is in the detection area of the inside key antenna. - Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch. • The push-button ignition switch operation is input to BCM as a signal. BCM changes the ignition switch position according to the status and operates the following relays to supply power to each power circuit. - Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) - Ignition relay [fuse block (J/B)] - Accessory relay - Blower relay • The ignition switch position can be confirmed with the lighting of the LOCK/ACC/ON indicator lamp in the push-button ignition switch. BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM When all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply (ignition switch position ACC → OFF) to prevent battery discharge. • The ignition switch is in the ACC position • All doors are closed • Selector lever is in the P position Reset Condition of Battery Saver System If any of the following conditions are met the battery saver system is released. • Opening any door • Operating with door request switch on door lock • Operating with Intelligent Key on door lock • Change ignition switch position to ACC position from OFF position by pressing push-button ignition switch. IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION Refer to SEC-9, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION : System Description". Revision: 2011 September PCS-36 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492105 A FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. B Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2195: ANTI-SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF B2196: DONGLE NG Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking 500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent • Starter motor relay control signal • Starter relay status signal (CAN) B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST Inhibit engine cranking When any of the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch changes to ACC • Receives engine status signal (CAN) B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON G B26F2: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF H B26F3: START CONT RLY ON Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF Inhibit engine cranking When the following conditions are fulfilled • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON B26F7: BCM Inhibit engine cranking by Intelligent Key system When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally C D E F I J K REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal. When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor. Condition of cancellation 1. 2. 3. PCS More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop. Turn rear wiper switch OFF. Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch. FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input voltage is less than approximately 9 V. NOTE: When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function returns to normal operation. Revision: 2011 September PCS-37 L 2012 QUEST N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007628064 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × Door lock DOOR LOCK × × Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September PCS-38 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter A Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* C D E F While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 B G H I J K The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: L PCS *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC N • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. O • Closing door P • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. INTELLIGENT KEY Revision: 2011 September PCS-39 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000007628065 WORK SUPPORT Monitor item Description INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation ENGINE START BY I-KEY Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used PANIC ALARM SET Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • MODE 1: 0.5 sec • MODE 2: Non-operation • MODE 3: 1.5 sec TRUNK OPEN DELAY NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation HAZARD ANSWER BACK Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • Lock Only: Door lock operation only • Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only • Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation • Off: Non-operation ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected from the following with this mode • Horn Chirp: Sound horn • Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer • Off: Non-operation ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to operation with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT Starter motor can operate during the times below • 70 msec • 100 msec • 200 msec CONFIRM KEY FOB ID It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode AUTO LOCK SET Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode • MODE 1: OFF • MODE 2: 30 sec • MODE 3: 1 minute • MODE 4: 2 minutes • MODE 5: 3 minutes • MODE 6: 4 minutes • MODE 7: 5 minutes Revision: 2011 September PCS-40 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor item HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK PW DOWN SET Description Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode • MODE 1: 3 sec • MODE 2: Non-operation • MODE 3: 5 sec SELF-DIAG RESULT A B C D Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR E Monitor Item Condition REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch CLUTCH SW NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]* condition of stop lamp switch power supply BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT PN/N SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position S/L -LOCK NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L -UNLOCK NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L RELAY -F/B NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1 DETE SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position SFT P -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position SFT N -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states S/L LOCK-IPDM NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L UNLK-IPDM NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored S/L RELAY-REQ NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h] VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [km/h] DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of unlock sensor DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID Revision: 2011 September PCS-41 F G H I J K L PCS N O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor Item Condition PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility PRMT RKE STRT NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored TRNK/HAT MNTR NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key RKE-TR/BD NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored RKE-PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key RKE OPE COUN1 When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing RKE OPE COUN2 NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored *: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF. ACTIVE TEST Test item Description BATTERY SAVER This test is able to check interior room lamp operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation OUTSIDE BUZZER This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation INSIDE BUZZER This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation • Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched • Off: Non-operation INDICATOR This test is able to check warning lamp operation • KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched • KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched • Off: Non-operation INT LAMP This test is able to check interior room lamp operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation LCD This test is able to check meter display information • Engine start information displays when “BP N” on CONSULT screen is touched • Engine start information displays when “BP I” on CONSULT screen is touched • Key ID warning displays when “ID NG” on CONSULT screen is touched • ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used. • P position warning displays when “SFT P” on CONSULT screen is touched • INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored • BATT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored • Take away through window warning displays when “NO KY” on CONSULT screen is touched • Take away warning display when “OUTKEY” on CONSULT screen is touched • OFF position warning display when “LK WN” on CONSULT screen is touched FLASHER This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation • LH: LH side hazard warning lamps operate • RH: RH side hazard warning lamps operate • Off: Non-operation Revision: 2011 September PCS-42 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item Description A P RANGE This test is able to check CVT shift selector power supply • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation B ENGINE SW ILLUMI This test is able to check push-button ignition switch illumination operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation This test is able to check LOCK indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation C LOCK INDICATOR ACC INDICATOR This test is able to check ACC indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation D IGNITION ON IND This test is able to check ON indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation E HORN This test is able to check horn operation • On: Operate • Off: Non-operation F TRUNK/BACK DOOR NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used POWER SLIDE DOOR This test is able to check automatic siding door operation • RR PSD ON: Auto open/close operate • RL PSD ON: Auto open/close operate G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-43 2012 QUEST BCM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007492108 ECU Reference BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" BCS-59, "DTC Index" Revision: 2011 September PCS-44 2012 QUEST POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492109 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O P JCMWA7673GB Revision: 2011 September PCS-45 2012 QUEST POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCMWA7674GB Revision: 2011 September PCS-46 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007628059 B OVERALL SEQUENCE C D E F G H I J K L PCS N O P JMKIA8652GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September PCS-47 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < BASIC INSPECTION > 1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM 1. 2. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurs). Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected. Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) Erase DTC. Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5. 3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 5. 4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time. If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble diagnosis order. NOTE: • Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. • Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. Is the symptom described? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Revision: 2011 September PCS-48 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] A 8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. B Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it. C D >> GO TO 9. 9.FINAL CHECK When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the malfunction is repaired securely. When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the symptom is not detected. Is DTC detected and does symptom remain? YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7. YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC. E F G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-49 2012 QUEST B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492111 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2614 Trouble diagnosis name BCM DTC detecting condition Possible cause The following status are compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or more. • State of accessory relay control judgment in BCM • State of accessory relay control signal • Harness or connectors (Accessory relay control signal circuit) • BCM • Accessory relay DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC, and wait for 1 second or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-50, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492112 1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M124 96 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch OFF 0 - 0.5 ACC or ON 9 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and accessory relay. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and accessory relay harness connector. BCM 4. Accessory relay Connector Terminal Terminal M124 96 Coil upstream side Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 96 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PCS-50 2012 QUEST B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 3.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY A Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace accessory relay. Component Inspection B INFOID:0000000007492113 C 1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove accessory relay. Check the continuity between accessory relay terminals. Terminals 3 and 5 Condition Continuity 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed No current supply D E Not existed F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace accessory relay G PBIB0098E H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-51 2012 QUEST B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492114 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2616 Trouble diagnosis name BCM DTC detecting condition Possible cause The following status are compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or more. • State of blower relay control judgment in BCM • State of blower relay control signal • Harness or connectors (Blower relay control signal circuit) • BCM • Blower relay DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492115 1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M124 106 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0 - 0.5 ON 9 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK BLOWER RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and blower relay. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and blower relay harness connector. BCM 4. Blower relay Connector Terminal Terminal M124 106 Coil upstream side Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 106 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK BLOWER RELAY Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection". Revision: 2011 September PCS-52 2012 QUEST B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace blower relay. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492116 A B 1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY 1. 2. 3. Turn blower switch OFF. Remove blower relay. Check the continuity between blower relay terminals. Terminals 3 and 5 C Condition Continuity 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed No current supply D E Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace blower relay F PBIB0098E G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-53 2012 QUEST B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492117 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. B2616 Trouble diagnosis name BCM DTC detecting condition Possible cause The following status are compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or more. • State of ignition relay (fuse block) control judgment in BCM • State of ignition relay (fuse block) control signal • Harness or connectors [Ignition relay (fuse block) control signal circuit] • BCM • Ignition relay (fuse block) DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492118 1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK) CONTROL SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M124 99 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0 - 0.5 ON 9 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and ignition relay (fuse block). Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ignition relay (fuse block) harness connector. BCM 4. Ignition relay (fuse block) Connector Terminal Terminal M124 99 Coil upstream side Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 99 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK) Revision: 2011 September PCS-54 2012 QUEST B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace ignition relay (fuse block). B Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492119 1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove ignition relay. Check the continuity between ignition relay terminals. Terminals 3 and 5 D Condition Continuity 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed No current supply A E Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace ignition relay F PBIB0098E G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-55 2012 QUEST B2618 BCM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B2618 BCM DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492120 DTC DETECTION LOGIC Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. B2618 DTC detecting condition Possible cause The following status are compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or more. • State of ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control judgment in BCM • State of ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control signal BCM • Harness or connectors [Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control signal circuit] • BCM • IPDM E/R DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492121 1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M124 98 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ground Ignition switch OFF or ACC 9 - 16 ON 0 - 0.5 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. BCM 4. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M124 98 E10 27 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 98 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK VOLTAGE OF IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R SIDE) Revision: 2011 September PCS-56 2012 QUEST B2618 BCM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. A (+) IPDM E/R (–) Connector Terminal E10 27 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch OFF B 9 - 16 C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. D E F G H I J K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-57 2012 QUEST B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492122 DTC DETECTION LOGIC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause PUSH-BTN IGN SW The following signal status that BCM receives are compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or more. • Push-button Ignition switch (push switch) signal • Push-button Ignition switch (push switch) status signal (CAN) • Harness or connectors [Push-button Ignition switch (push switch) circuit] • BCM • IPDM E/R DTC No. B261A DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Press push-button ignition switch (push switch) under the following conditions, and wait for 1 second or more. Shift position is in the P position Do not depress brake pedal 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-58, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492123 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. (+) (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 9 - 16 Push-button Ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 4 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM) 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector. BCM 3. Push-button Ignition switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M124 76 M101 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. Push-button Ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 4 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September PCS-58 2012 QUEST B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R) A Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. B (+) IPDM E/R Voltage (V) (Approx.) (–) Connector Terminal E10 28 C Ground 9 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> GO TO 4. D 4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R) 1. 2. IPDM E/R 3. E Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector. Push-button Ignition switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E10 28 M101 4 F Continuity G Existed Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. H Push-button Ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 4 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace harness. I J 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". K >> INSPECTION END L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-59 2012 QUEST B26F1 IGNITION RELAY [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B26F1 IGNITION RELAY DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492124 DTC DETECTION LOGIC Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. B26F1 DTC detecting condition Possible cause • Harness or connectors (Ignition relay circuit is open) • BCM • IPDM E/R BCM transmits the ignition relay control signal (ON: 0 V) or ignition switch ON signal (ON) (CAN), but does not receives ignition switch ON signal (ON) (CAN) from IPDM E/R. IGN RELAY OFF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492125 1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again. Is DTC detected? YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. (+) BCM (–) Connector Terminal M124 98 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ground Ignition switch ON 0 - 0.5 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and IPDM connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. BCM IPDM E/R Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M124 98 E10 27 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PCS-60 2012 QUEST B26F2 IGNITION RELAY [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B26F2 IGNITION RELAY A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492126 DTC DETECTION LOGIC B Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. B26F2 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C • Harness or connectors (Ignition relay circuit is short) • BCM • IPDM E/R BCM transmits the ignition relay control signal (OFF: 12 V) or ignition switch ON signal (OFF) (CAN), but does not receives ignition switch ON signal (OFF) (CAN) from IPDM E/R. IGN RELAY ON D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F G Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492127 1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT H 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again. Is DTC detected? YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. I J 2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. L (+) IPDM E/R (–) Connector Terminal E10 27 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) PCS Ground Ignition switch OFF or ACC 6 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> GO TO 3. N 3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 1 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and IPDM E/R connectors. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. P IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 27 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PCS-61 2012 QUEST B26F2 IGNITION RELAY [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 4.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2 1. 2. Connect IPDM E/R connectors. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. (+) IPDM E/R (–) Connector Terminal E10 27 Condition Ground Ignition switch OFF or ACC Voltage (V) (Approx.) 6 - 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Revision: 2011 September PCS-62 2012 QUEST B26F6 BCM [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B26F6 BCM A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492128 DTC DETECTION LOGIC B NOTE: • If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BCS-71, "DTC Logic". • If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to BCS-72, "DTC Logic". C DTC No. B26F6 D Trouble diagnosis name BCM DTC detecting condition Ignition switch ON signal (CAN) (ON) is not transmitted from IPDM E/R, when BCM turns ignition relay ON [Transmit ignition switch ON signal (CAN) (ON)]. Possible cause E BCM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 0.5 seconds or more. 2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT. Is DTC detected? YES >> Go to PCS-63, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G H INFOID:0000000007492129 1.INSPECTION START I 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch ON. Select “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See PCS-63, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation" NO >> INSPECTION END K L PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-63 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492130 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. Select “PUSH SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT. Check the push-button ignition switch signal under the following conditions. Test item Condition PUSH SW Status Push-button ignition switch is pressed ON Push-button ignition switch is not pressed OFF Is the indication normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Go to PCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492131 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. (+) (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 9 -16 Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 4 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 1 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector. BCM 3. Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M124 76 M101 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M124 76 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 2 Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September PCS-64 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > (+) A IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 28 (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 9 - 16 B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. C 4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 2 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector. D E IPDM E/R 3. Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E10 28 M101 4 Continuity Existed F Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. G IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 28 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair or replace harness. I 5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 1 Ground H J Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness. K L 6.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH PCS Refer to PCS-65, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace push-button ignition switch. N 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". O >> INSPECTION END P Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492132 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector. Check continuity between push-button ignition switch terminals. Revision: 2011 September PCS-65 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Push-button ignition switch Terminal 4 1 Condition Continuity Pressed Existed Not pressed Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace push-button ignition switch. Revision: 2011 September PCS-66 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR A Description INFOID:0000000007492133 Push-button ignition switch changes the power supply position. BCM maintains the power supply position status. BCM changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition switch. Component Function Check B INFOID:0000000007492134 C Check push-button ignition switch (“LOCK INDICATOR”, “ACC INDICATOR” and “IGNITION ON IND”) in Active Test of BCM with CONSULT. D 1.CHECK FUNCTION Test item Description ON LOCK INDICATOR ACC INDICATOR IGNITION ON IND OFF E Illuminates Position indicator Does not illuminate F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Refer to PCS-67, "Diagnosis Procedure". G Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492135 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector. Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground. (+) Push-button ignition switch Connector Terminal M101 8 (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Is the inspection normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO-1 >> Check 10 A fuse [No.10, located in fuse block (J/B)]. NO-2 >> Check harness for open or short between push-button ignition switch and fuse. J K L 2.CHECK BCM INPUT 1. 2. 3. PCS Connect push-button ignition switch connector. Disconnect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. N (+) BCM Connector (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal O 73 M124 91 Ground Battery voltage 109 Is the inspection normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector. Revision: 2011 September PCS-67 2012 QUEST P PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector. Indicator BCM Connector LOCK ACC Terminal Connector Terminal 91 M124 Continuity 5 109 ON 3. Push-button ignition switch M101 6 73 Existed 7 Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Indicator BCM Connector LOCK ACC 91 M124 ON Continuity Terminal 109 Ground Not existed 73 Is the inspection normal? YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PCS-68 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE Description INFOID:0000000007492136 Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and check each symptom. NOTE: The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system, and NATS-IVIS/NVIS in the Intelligent Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. The vehicle security function can operate only when the door lock and power distribution system are operating normally. B C D Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) • “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT. • One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle. Diagnosis Procedure E INFOID:0000000007492137 1.PERFORM WORK SUPPORT F Perform “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” on Work Support of “INTELLIGENT KEY”. Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". G >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT H Perform Self-Diagnosis Result of “BCM”. Is DTC detected? YES >> Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 3. I 3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH J Check push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-64, "Component Function Check". Is the operation normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. K 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION L Confirm the operation again. Is the inspection normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. PCS N O P Revision: 2011 September PCS-69 2012 QUEST PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE Description INFOID:0000000007492138 • Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to PCS-47, "Work Flow". • Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and check each symptom. Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) • “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT. • One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492139 1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INDICATOR Check push-button ignition switch indicator. Refer to PCS-67, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PCS-70 2012 QUEST BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY SECTION PWC POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH Reference Value ......................................................20 Fail-safe ...................................................................21 PRECAUTION ............................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 7 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 7 Component Parts Location ...................................... 7 Power Window Main Switch ...................................... 8 Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) ................. 8 Sliding Door Power Window Switch .......................... 8 Sliding Door Power Window Motor ........................... 8 SYSTEM .............................................................. 9 System Description ................................................... 9 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 11 Fail-safe .................................................................. 11 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................13 COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 13 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 13 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 22 Wiring Diagram ........................................................22 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 24 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 24 I ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 25 J Description ...............................................................25 Work Procedure .......................................................25 PWC ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW SWITCH ............................. 26 Description ...............................................................26 Work Procedure .......................................................26 Description ...............................................................27 Work Procedure .......................................................27 Description ...............................................................28 Work Procedure .......................................................28 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................16 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ............................29 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ................................................................29 Revision: 2011 September M CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION ..................... 28 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 29 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH .................20 L SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 27 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 16 Reference Value ..................................................... 17 Fail-safe .................................................................. 18 H Work Flow ................................................................24 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ....................17 G POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ............................. 22 RETAIND PWR .......................................................... 14 RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) ........................................................ 15 List of ECU Reference ............................................ 16 F FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) .................................................................29 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................30 PWC-1 2012 QUEST N O P SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH .......... 30 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 30 DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE .......................................................... 48 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH... 32 FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 49 Component Function Check ................................... 32 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 32 Component Inspection ............................................ 33 POWER WINDOW MOTOR ............................... 34 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 34 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 34 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 34 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 34 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ... 35 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 35 SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 35 SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check... 36 SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 36 SLIDING DOOR RH .................................................. 36 SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check ... 36 SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 37 ENCODER CIRCUIT .......................................... 38 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 38 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 38 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 38 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 40 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ... 40 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 40 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH ...................... 43 Component Function Check ................................... 43 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43 Component Inspection ............................................ 44 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ..................... 45 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ........................... 45 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 45 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) ................................................................ 46 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 46 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 47 NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH ................... 47 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 48 WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED ............................................................... 49 WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 49 WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED ................................ 49 WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 49 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 49 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 49 SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................. 50 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED ............................................................... 50 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 50 WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED ........................................... 50 WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ... 50 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 50 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 51 SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................. 52 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED ............................................................... 52 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 52 WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED ........................................... 52 WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ... 52 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 52 Revision: 2011 September PWC-2 2012 QUEST WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 53 AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY ............54 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 54 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 54 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 54 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 54 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE) ..............................55 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 55 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 55 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 55 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 55 POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY .......................................................................56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS .........................57 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57 KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................................58 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 63 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................63 A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 64 B COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 64 Component Parts Location ....................................64 Power Window Main Switch ....................................65 Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) ................65 Sliding Door Power Window Switch ........................65 Sliding Door Power Window Motor ..........................65 System Description ..................................................66 Circuit Diagram ........................................................68 Fail-safe ...................................................................68 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 70 RETAIND PWR ..........................................................71 RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) .........................................................72 H ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 73 I BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 73 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................... 74 Reference Value ......................................................74 Fail-safe ...................................................................75 POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ..................................60 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 76 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 60 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 60 Wiring Diagram ........................................................76 SLIDING DOOR RH ................................................... 60 SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 60 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 61 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ....................61 Removal and Installation ......................................... 61 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH....62 Removal and Installation ......................................... 62 PRECAUTION .............................................. 63 Revision: 2011 September POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ............................. 76 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 77 J PWC L M DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 77 Work Flow ................................................................77 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 78 Description ...............................................................78 Work Procedure .......................................................78 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................... 79 Description ...............................................................79 Work Procedure .......................................................79 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 80 Description ...............................................................80 Work Procedure .......................................................80 DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH F G POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION .................................................59 SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 60 SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 60 E COMMON ITEM .........................................................70 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................70 List of ECU Reference .............................................73 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 60 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 60 D SYSTEM ............................................................ 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 59 C CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION ..................... 81 PWC-3 2012 QUEST N O P Description .............................................................. 81 Work Procedure ...................................................... 81 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 82 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 82 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ........................... 82 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 82 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) ................................................................ 82 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 83 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH .......... 83 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 83 FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) .................................................. 85 Component Function Check ................................... 85 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85 Component Inspection ............................................ 86 SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH... 87 Component Function Check ................................... 87 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 87 Component Inspection ............................................ 88 POWER WINDOW MOTOR ............................... 89 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 89 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 89 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 89 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 89 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ... 90 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 90 SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 90 SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check... 91 SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 91 SLIDING DOOR RH .................................................. 91 SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check ... 91 SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 92 ENCODER CIRCUIT .......................................... 93 Component Function Check ................................... 93 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 93 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 96 NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH ................... 96 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 96 DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE .......................................................... 97 Revision: 2011 September Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97 FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 98 WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED ............................................................... 98 WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 98 WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED ................................ 98 WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 98 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 98 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 99 SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................ 100 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED ............................................................. 100 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 100 WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED ......................................... 100 WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure . 100 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................. 100 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 101 SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................ 102 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED ............................................................. 102 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 102 WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED ......................................... 102 WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure . 102 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................. 102 WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 103 PWC-4 2012 QUEST AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) ................................................. 104 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 108 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 108 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 108 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) ........................... 105 SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................. 108 SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105 POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY .. 106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106 POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION ............................................... 107 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107 A B SLIDING DOOR RH ................................................. 108 SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108 C REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 109 D POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................. 109 Removal and Installation ....................................... 109 E SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH . 110 Removal and Installation ....................................... 110 POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ................................ 108 F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-5 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495572 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September PWC-6 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007495573 B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N JMKIA8162GB A. View with front door finisher removed B. No. View with sliding door finisher removed Component O Function P 1. BCM • Supplies power supply to power window switch. • Controls retained power. • Receives key ID signal from remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. Power window main switch Refer to PWC-8, "Power Window Main Switch". 3. Front power window motor (driver side) Refer to PWC-8, "Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)". Revision: 2011 September PWC-7 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component Function 4. Front door switch (driver side) Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-28, "Front Door Switch". 5. Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) Transmits operation condition of key cylinder switch to power window main switch. Refer to DLK-28, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)". 6. Sliding door power window switch LH Refer to PWC-8, "Sliding Door Power Window Switch". 7. Sliding door power window motor LH Refer to PWC-8, "Sliding Door Power Window Motor". 8. Remote keyless entry receiver Receives key ID signal from the Intelligent Key, and then transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Power Window Main Switch INFOID:0000000007836948 • Directly controls all power window motor of all doors. • Controls anti-pinch operation of power window. Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000007836951 • Integrates the encoder and power window motor. • Operates with signals from power window main switch. • Transmits front power window motor (driver side) rotation as a pulse signal to power window main switch. Sliding Door Power Window Switch INFOID:0000000007836950 Controls power window motor of sliding door. Sliding Door Power Window Motor INFOID:0000000007836952 Operates with signals from power window main switch and sliding door power window switch. Revision: 2011 September PWC-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A System Description INFOID:0000000007495574 SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G H I J JMKIA7861GB PWC DESCRIPTION • Power window system is activated by power window switch when ignition switch turns ON, or during the retained power operation after ignition switch turns OFF. • Power window main switch opens/closes all door glass. • Front and sliding door power window switch opens/closes the corresponding door glass. • AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) turns to AUTO. • Power window serial link transmits the signals from power window main switch to front power window switch (passenger side). • Power window lock switch can lock all power windows other than driver seat. • If door glass receives resistance that is the specified value or more while power window of front seat is in AUTO-UP operation, power window of front seat operates in the reverse direction. • Hold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK direction for 1.5 seconds or more to OPEN or CLOSE front power windows when ignition switch OFF. • Front power windows open when pressing Intelligent Key unlock button for 3 seconds. Power Window AUTO-Operation • AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) turns to AUTO. • Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits the encoder pulse signal to power window switch while power window motor is operating. • Power window switch reads the changes of encoder signal and stops AUTO operation when door glass is at the fully opened/closed position. • Power window motor is operable if encoder is malfunctioning. Retained Power Operation Revision: 2011 September PWC-9 2012 QUEST L M N O P SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to operate during the 45 seconds even when ignition switch is turned OFF. Retained Power Cancel Conditions • Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF)→OPEN (door switch ON). • When ignition switch is ON. • When timer time passes (45 seconds). Power Window Lock Function Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits each power window switch operation except the power window main switch. Power Window Serial Link • Power window main switch, front power window switch (passenger side), and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link. • Power window serial link transmits the power window main switch operation signals and retained power signal to power window main switch module and front power window switch (passenger side) module. Anti-Pinch Operation • Pinch foreign matter in the door glass during AUTO-UP operation, and it is the anti-pinch function that lowers the door glass 150 mm (5.9 in) or for 2 seconds when detected. • Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating. • Resistance is applied to the power window motor rotation that changes the frequency of encoder pulse signal if foreign material is trapped in the door glass. • Power window switch controls to lower the door glass for 150 mm (5.9 in) after it detects encoder pulse signal frequency change. Operation Condition When front door glass AUTO-UP operation is performed (anti-pinch function does not operate just before the door glass closes and is fully closed). NOTE: Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the door glass, it may lower. Door Key Cylinder Switch Operation Hold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK direction for 1.5 seconds or more to OPEN or CLOSE front power windows when ignition switch is OFF. In addition, it stops when key position is moved to NEUTRAL when operating. Operation Conditions • Ignition switch OFF. • Hold door key cylinder to LOCK position for 1.5 seconds or more to perform CLOSE operation of the door glass. • Hold door key cylinder to UNLOCK position for 1.5 seconds or more to perform OPEN operation of the door glass. Keyless Power Window Down Operation Front power windows open when the unlock button on Intelligent Key is activated and kept pressed for more than 3 seconds with the ignition switch OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously pressed. The power window opening stops when the following operations are performed. • When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds. • When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated. • When the unlock button is released. While retained power operation activate, keyless power window down function cannot be operated. Keyless power window down operation mode can be changed by “PW DOWN SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". Revision: 2011 September PWC-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007495575 A B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O JMKIA7968GB Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495576 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass. Revision: 2011 September PWC-11 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Error Error condition Pulse sensor malfunction When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value. Both pulse sensors malfunction When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass open/close operation. Pulse direction malfunction When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction. Glass recognition position malfunction 1 When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value. Glass recognition position malfunction 2 When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation. It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side). Revision: 2011 September PWC-12 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) A COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007829619 B APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. C Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. D CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. E F SYSTEM APPLICATION G BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × × × Door lock DOOR LOCK Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × I J PWC L M N × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September H PWC-13 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. • Closing door • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. RETAIND PWR Revision: 2011 September PWC-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000007495578 A DATA MONITOR Monitor Item B Description DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch. C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-15 2012 QUEST BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007495579 ECU Reference BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" BCS-59, "DTC Index" Revision: 2011 September PWC-16 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH A Reference Value INFOID:0000000007495580 TERMINAL LAYOUT B C D JMKIA5358ZZ E PHYSICAL VALUES F Terminal No. (wire color) Description + - Signal name Input/ Output 1 (O) Ground Sliding door power window motor LH UP signal Output 2 (W) Ground Encoder ground 3 (BR) Ground Sliding door power window motor LH DOWN signal 4 (P) Ground Door key cylinder switch LOCK signal 5 (SB) Ground Sliding door power window motor RH DOWN signal 6 (GR) Ground Door key cylinder switch UNLOCK signal Ground Sliding door power window motor RH UP signal Ground Front power window motor (driver side) UP signal 7 (P) 8 (L) Condition Voltage (V) G When sliding door LH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 Output When sliding door LH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. Input Output Input Key position (Neutral → Locked) When sliding door RH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) H I 9 – 16 J 4 – 6 → 0 – 1.5 PWC 9 – 16 4 – 6 → 0 – 1.5 Output When sliding door RH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 Output When front LH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 L M N O 9 (SB) Ground Encoder pulse signal 2 Input When power window motor operates. P JMKIA0070GB Revision: 2011 September PWC-17 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (wire color) + 10 (V) Description - Ground Signal name Retained power signal 11 (LG) Ground Front power window motor (driver side) DOWN signal 13 (Y) Ground Encoder pulse signal 1 Condition Input/ Output Voltage (V) Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF. 9 – 16 When driver side or passenger side door is opened during retained power operation. 0 – 1 Output When front LH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 Input When power window motor operates. Input JMKIA0070GB 14 (BR) Ground Power window serial link Input/ Output Ignition switch ON or power window timer operating. JPMIA0013GB 15 (R) Ground Encoder power supply 17 (B) Ground Ground 19 (LG) Ground Battery power supply Output When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates. 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 Input — 9 – 16 Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495581 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass. Error Error condition Pulse sensor malfunction When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value. Both pulse sensors malfunction When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass open/close operation. Pulse direction malfunction When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction. Glass recognition position malfunction 1 When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value. Glass recognition position malfunction 2 When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation. Revision: 2011 September PWC-18 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function A B Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side). C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-19 2012 QUEST FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH Reference Value INFOID:0000000007495582 TERMINAL LAYOUT JMKIA6211ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (wire color) Description Condition Voltage (V) — — 0 – 1 Encoder power supply Output When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 9 – 16 Ground Front power window motor (passenger side) UP signal Output When front power window switch (passenger side) is in UP operation. 9 – 16 9 (G) Ground Front power window motor (passenger side) DOWN signal Output When front power window switch (passenger side) is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 10 (V) Ground Battery power supply 11 (W) Ground Ground 12 (O) Ground Encoder pulse signal 1 + – Signal name 3 (BR) Ground Encoder ground 4 (SB) Ground 8 (Y) Input/ Output Input — 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 Input When power window motor operates. JMKIA0070GB Revision: 2011 September PWC-20 2012 QUEST FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (wire color) + Description – Signal name A Condition Input/ Output Voltage (V) B 15 (R) Ground Encoder pulse signal 2 When power window motor operates. Input C JMKIA0070GB D E 16 (L) Ground Power window serial link Input/ Output Ignition switch ON or power window timer operating. F JPMIA0013GB G Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495583 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL H Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass. I Error Error condition Pulse sensor malfunction When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value. Both pulse sensors malfunction When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass open/close operation. Pulse direction malfunction When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction. Glass recognition position malfunction 1 When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value. Glass recognition position malfunction 2 When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation. J It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side). PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-21 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495584 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCKWA4074GB Revision: 2011 September PWC-22 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SYSTEM [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O JCKWA4075GB P Revision: 2011 September PWC-23 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495585 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM Interview the customer to obtain as much malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in. >> GO TO 2. 2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes. Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur. >> GO TO 3. 3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS” Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2. Then identify where to start the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. >> GO TO 4. 4.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” Perform the diagnosis with “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” of the applicable system. >> GO TO 5. 5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 6. 6.FINAL CHECK Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2. Is the malfunctioning part repaired or replaced? YES >> Trouble diagnosis is completed. NO >> GO TO 3. Revision: 2011 September PWC-24 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL Description A INFOID:0000000007495586 B When the battery negative terminal is disconnected, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power window system. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure C D INFOID:0000000007495587 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION E Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". F >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure". G >> END H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-25 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW SWITCH Description INFOID:0000000007495588 When the power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced, the initialization in necessary for normal operation of power window system. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495589 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure". >> END Revision: 2011 September PWC-26 2012 QUEST SYSTEM INITIALIZATION [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > SYSTEM INITIALIZATION A Description INFOID:0000000007495590 If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power window system. • Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal. • When power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced. • Electric power supply to power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) or power window motor (driver side/passenger side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc. • Disconnection and connection of power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. • Removal of power window motor (driver side/passenger side) from regulator assembly. • Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit. • Removal and installation of glass. • Removal and installation of door glass run. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495591 B C D E F G 1.STEP 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is already fully open) Continue pulling the power window switch UP (AUTO-UP operation). Even after glass stops at fully closed position, keep pulling the switch for 2 seconds or more. Check that AUTO-UP function operates normally. H I J >> GO TO 2. 2.STEP 2 PWC Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure". >> END L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-27 2012 QUEST CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Description INFOID:0000000007495592 If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of antipinch function. • Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal. • When power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced. • Electric power supply to power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) or power window motor (driver side/passenger side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc. • Disconnection and connection of power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. • Removal of power window motor (driver side/passenger side) from regulator assembly. • Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit. • Removal and installation of glass. • Removal and installation of door glass run. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495593 1.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. 4. - Fully open the door window. Place a piece of wood near fully closed position. Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP. Check the following conditions. Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops. Check that glass does not rise not when operating the power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) while lowering. CAUTION: • Perform initial setting when AUTO-UP operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally. • Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed. • Do not check with hands and other body parts because they may be pinched. Do not get pinched. >> END Revision: 2011 September PWC-28 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH B POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495594 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY C 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 10 D6 19 (–) Condition Ground Ignition switch ON OFF Voltage (V) E 9 – 16 F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. G 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. H I BCM Connector Power window main switch Terminal Connector Terminal 68 D5 10 69 D6 19 M123 4. Continuity J Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Continuity Terminal L Ground 68 M123 PWC Not existed 69 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. M 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT N Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. O Power window main switch Connector Terminal D6 17 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Revision: 2011 September PWC-29 2012 QUEST P POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495595 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. (+) Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 10 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. Front power window switch (passenger side) BCM 3. Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 69 D55 10 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 69 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 11 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495596 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September PWC-30 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > (+) A Sliding door power window switch (–) Connector Voltage (V) Terminal LH D88 RH D108 B 1 Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and sliding door power window switch harness connector. BCM 4. Sliding door power window switch Connector Terminal M123 68 Connector Terminal LH D88 RH D108 1 Continuity Existed F G Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. H BCM Connector Terminal M123 68 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-31 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495597 1. CHECK FUNCTION Check sliding door power window motor operation with sliding door power window switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-32, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495598 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. (+) Sliding door power window switch Connector (-) Condition Terminal 2 LH Power window main switch (sliding door LH side) D88 3 Ground 2 Power window main switch (sliding door RH side) D108 RH Voltage (V) 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. Sliding door power window switch Connector LH RH 4. Power window main switch Terminal D88 D108 Connector 2 Terminal Continuity 1 3 D5 2 3 3 7 Existed 5 Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September PWC-32 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Sliding door power window switch Connector LH 2 D88 RH Continuity Terminal Ground 3 B Not existed 2 D108 A 3 C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. D 3.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Check sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-33, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection F INFOID:0000000007495599 G 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector. Check sliding door power window switch terminals under the following conditions. Sliding door power window switch Condition Terminal 1 5 3 4 2 5 3 4 1 4 2 5 H I Continuity UP NEUTRAL J Existed PWC DOWN Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-33 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MOTOR [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW MOTOR DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495600 1. CHECK FUNCTION Check front power window motor (driver side) operation with power window main switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-34, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495601 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. (+) Front power window motor (driver side) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D7 Ground 2 Power window main switch (driver side) NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector 1 D7 4. Power window main switch Terminal 11 D5 2 8 Continuity Existed Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector D7 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. PASSENGER SIDE Revision: 2011 September PWC-34 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MOTOR [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495602 A 1. CHECK FUNCTION Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-35, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window motor (passenger side) (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal G 1 D46 Ground 2 Front power window switch (passenger side) NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H I J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and front power PWC window switch (passenger side) harness connector. Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector D46 4. E F (+) Connector C INFOID:0000000007495603 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. B Terminal Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector 1 Terminal 9 D55 2 8 Continuity Existed L M Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground. N Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector D46 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. SLIDING DOOR LH Revision: 2011 September PWC-35 2012 QUEST O P POWER WINDOW MOTOR [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495604 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check sliding door power window motor LH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power window switch LH. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure". SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495605 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window motor LH connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground. (+) Sliding door power window motor LH Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D82 Ground Sliding door power window switch LH 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor LH. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch LH connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and sliding door power window switch LH harness connector. Sliding door power window motor LH Sliding door power window switch LH Connector Connector D82 4. Terminal 1 Terminal 5 D88 3 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground. Sliding door power window motor LH Connector D82 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. SLIDING DOOR RH SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495606 1. CHECK FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September PWC-36 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MOTOR [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Check sliding door power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power window switch RH. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-37, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure". SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure A B INFOID:0000000007495607 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL C 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window motor RH connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground. E (+) Sliding door power window motor RH Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D102 Ground Sliding door power window switch RH 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor RH. NO >> GO TO 2. F G H 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch RH connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and sliding door power window switch RH harness connector. Sliding door power window motor RH Connector D102 4. Sliding door power window switch RH Terminal Connector 1 Terminal 5 D108 3 4 Continuity Existed PWC L Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground. Sliding door power window motor RH Connector D102 Continuity Terminal M Ground 1 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-37 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > ENCODER CIRCUIT DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495608 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check that front driver side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when power window main switch is operated. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-38, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495609 1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. (+) Power window main switch Connector (-) Signal (Reference value) Ground Refer to the following signal Terminal 9 D5 13 JMKIA5210GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window motor (driver side) connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. Power window main switch Connector Terminal Connector 9 D5 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Terminal 3 D7 13 5 Continuity Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector D5 Revision: 2011 September Continuity Terminal Ground 9 Not existed 13 PWC-38 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. A 3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect power window main switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. B C (+) Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal D7 4 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. E 4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. Power window main switch 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D5 15 D7 4 Continuity Existed I Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 15 Continuity Ground H J Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. PWC 5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1 L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. Power window main switch 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D5 2 D7 6 Continuity Existed O Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 2 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2 Revision: 2011 September PWC-39 N 2012 QUEST P ENCODER CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Connect power window main switch connector. 2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 2 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495610 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check that front passenger side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when front power window switch (passenger side) is operated. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-40, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495611 1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. (+) Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector D55 (-) Signal (Reference value) Ground Refer to the following signal Terminal 12 15 JMKIA5210GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector and front power window motor (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector. Revision: 2011 September PWC-40 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector 12 D55 4. Front power window motor (passenger side) Terminal 5 D46 15 3 Continuity Existed B Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. C Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 12 D55 Not existed 15 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. D E 3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. A F Connect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground. G (+) Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector Terminal D46 4 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 H Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. I 4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. PWC Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector. Front power window switch (passenger side) 4. Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D55 4 D46 4 L Continuity Existed Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 4 Ground Continuity 5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1 Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector. Revision: 2011 September N Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 1. 2. 3. M Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. PWC-41 2012 QUEST O P ENCODER CIRCUIT [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Front power window switch (passenger side) 4. Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D55 3 D46 6 Continuity Existed Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 3 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2 1. 2. Connect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 3 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September PWC-42 2012 QUEST DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495612 B 1.CHECK FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. Select “KEY CYL LK-SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. Monitor item C Condition KEY CYL LK-SW KEY CYL UN-SW Lock : ON Neutral / Unlock : OFF Unlock : ON Neutral / Lock : OFF D E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-43, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495613 G 1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector and ground. (+) I J Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) Connector H (–) Voltage (V) Ground 4–6 Terminal PWC 5 D48 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. L 2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CIRCUIT M 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector. Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) Power window main switch Connector D5 4. Terminal Connector 4 D48 6 O Continuity Terminal 6 5 Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September PWC-43 2012 QUEST P DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Power window main switch Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 4 D5 Not existed 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector and ground. Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) Connector Terminal D48 4 Continuity Ground Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH Check front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch). Refer to PWC-44, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch). Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495614 COMPONENT INSPECTION 1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) connector. Check front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) terminals under the following conditions. Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) Key position Terminal 5 4 6 Continuity Unlock Existed Neutral / Lock Not existed Lock Existed Neutral / Unlock Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch). Revision: 2011 September PWC-44 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK A POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495615 B 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. C (+) Power window main switch Connector D Signal (Reference value) (–) Terminal E D5 14 Ground F JPMIA0013GB G Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 2. H 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground. I J (+) Power window main switch (–) Connector Terminal D5 14 Voltage (V) PWC Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 3. L 3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT M 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. BCM 4. Power window main switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M121 8 D5 14 Continuity Existed P Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M121 8 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September PWC-45 O 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Repair or replace harness. FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495616 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. (+) Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D55 16 Signal (Reference value) (–) Ground JPMIA0013GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. Power window main switch 4. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D5 14 D55 16 Continuity Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 14 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PWC-46 2012 QUEST NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure B INFOID:0000000007495617 1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT C Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. D 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT E Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-29, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F G 3.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT Check power window main switch serial link circuit. Refer to PWC-45, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H I 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-47 2012 QUEST DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495618 1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW MOTOR Check front power window motor (driver side). Refer to PWC-34, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Revision: 2011 September PWC-48 2012 QUEST FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure A B INFOID:0000000007495619 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check front power window switch (passenger side) power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-30, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C D E 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) F Check front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to PWC-35, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. G 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION H Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. I WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure J INFOID:0000000007495620 PWC 1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation" L >> INSPECTION END M WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495621 N 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT Check front power window switch (passenger side) serial link circuit. Refer to PWC-46, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-49 2012 QUEST O P SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495622 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH Check sliding door power window motor LH. Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495623 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sliding door power window switch LH power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-30, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED Revision: 2011 September PWC-50 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495624 A 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH B Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-51 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495625 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH Check sliding door power window motor RH. Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495626 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sliding door power window switch RH power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-30, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED Revision: 2011 September PWC-52 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495627 A 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH B Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-53 2012 QUEST AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495628 1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE) Check encoder circuit (driver side). Refer to PWC-38, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495629 1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT (PASSENGER SIDE) Check encoder circuit (passenger side). Refer to PWC-40, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-54 2012 QUEST ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE) [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE) DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495630 B 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to PWC-54, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". C D 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495631 G 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to PWC-54, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". H I 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-55 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495632 1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH Check front door switch. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-56 2012 QUEST DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495633 B 1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. C D 2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) E Check driver side door lock assembly (door key cylinder switch). Refer to PWC-43, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION G Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-57 2012 QUEST KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495634 1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION Check remote keyless entry function. Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent key button? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to DLK-44, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description". 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW OPERATION Check power window operation. Does power window up/down with power window main switch? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to PWC-47, "Diagnosis Procedure". 3.CHECK “PW DOWN SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” Check “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Set “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. 4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-58 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495635 1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH B Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". C >> INSPECTION END D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-59 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495636 1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495637 1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END SLIDING DOOR LH SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495638 1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END SLIDING DOOR RH SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495639 1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September PWC-60 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495640 B REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT13, "Removal and Installation". Remove power window main switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A). C D : Pawl E NOTE: The same procedure is also performed for front power window switch (passenger side). JMKIA8164ZZ F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: If power window main switch or front power window (passenger side) is replaced or is removed, it is necessary to perform the initialization procedure. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure". G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-61 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495641 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation". Remove screw (A), disconnect pawls from sliding door finisher (1), and then remove power window switch finisher (2). : Pawl JMKIA8165ZZ 3. Remove power window switch (1) from power window switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A). : Pawl JMKIA8166ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September PWC-62 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007495642 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-63 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007495643 JMKIA8163ZZ A. View with front door finisher removed B. No. View with sliding door finisher removed Component parts Description 1. BCM • Supplies power supply to power window switch. • Controls retained power. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. Power window main switch Refer to PWC-65, "Power Window Main Switch". 3. Front power window motor (driver side) Refer to PWC-65, "Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)". 4. Front door switch (driver side) Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-28, "Front Door Switch". Revision: 2011 September PWC-64 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component parts Description 5. Sliding door power window switch LH Refer to PWC-65, "Sliding Door Power Window Switch". 6. Sliding door power window motor LH Refer to PWC-65, "Sliding Door Power Window Motor". Power Window Main Switch A INFOID:0000000007836986 • Directly controls all power window motor of all doors. • Controls anti-pinch operation of power window. Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) B C INFOID:0000000007836987 • Integrates the encoder and power window motor. • Operates with signals from power window main switch. • Transmits front power window motor (driver side) rotation as a pulse signal to power window main switch. D Sliding Door Power Window Switch E INFOID:0000000007836988 Controls power window motor of sliding door. F Sliding Door Power Window Motor INFOID:0000000007836989 Operates with signals from power window main switch and sliding door power window switch. G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-65 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000007495644 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JMKIA7862GB DESCRIPTION • Power window system is activated by power window switch when ignition switch turns ON, or during the retained power operation after ignition switch turns OFF. • Power window main switch opens/closes all door glass. • Front and sliding door power window switch opens/closes the corresponding door glass. • AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch turns to AUTO. • Power window lock switch can lock all power windows other than driver seat. • If door glass receives resistance that is the specified value or more while power window of driver seat is in AUTO-UP operation, power window of driver seat operates in the reverse direction. Power Window AUTO-Operation • AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch turns to AUTO. • Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating. • Power window switch reads the changes of encoder signal and stops AUTO operation when door glass is at fully opened/closed position. • Power window motor is operable in case encoder is malfunctioning. Retained Power Operation Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to operate for 45 seconds even when ignition switch is turned OFF. Retained Power Cancel Conditions • Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF) → OPEN (door switch ON). • When ignition switch is ON again. • When timer time passes (45 seconds). Power Window Lock Function Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits each power window switch operation except the power window main switch. Revision: 2011 September PWC-66 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Anti-Pinch System • Pinch foreign material in the door glass during AUTO-UP operation, and it is the anti-pinch function that lowers the door glass 150 mm (5.9 in) when detected. • Encoder continues detecting the movement of front power window motor (driver side) and transmits to power window main switch as the encoder pulse signal while front power window motor (driver side) is operating. • Resistance is applied to the front power window motor (driver side) rotation that changes the frequency of encoder pulse signal if foreign material is trapped in the door glass. • Power window main switch controls to lower the window glass for 150 mm (5.9 in) after it detects encoder pulse signal frequency change. Operation Condition When front door glass (driver side) AUTO-UP operation is performed (anti-pinch function does not operate just before the door glass closes and is fully closed). NOTE: Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the door glass, it may lower. A B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-67 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007495645 JMKIA7969GB Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495646 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass. Revision: 2011 September PWC-68 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Error Error condition A Pulse sensor malfunction When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value. Both pulse sensors malfunction When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass open/close operation. Pulse direction malfunction When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction. Glass recognition position malfunction 1 When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value. Glass recognition position malfunction 2 When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation. It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window motor (driver side). B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-69 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007829620 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × Door lock DOOR LOCK × × Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September PWC-70 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter A Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* C D E F While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 B G H I J PWC The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: L M *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC N • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. O • Closing door P • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. RETAIND PWR Revision: 2011 September PWC-71 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000007495648 DATA MONITOR Monitor Item Description DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch. Revision: 2011 September PWC-72 2012 QUEST BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007495649 ECU Reference C BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM B BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D BCS-59, "DTC Index" E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-73 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Reference Value INFOID:0000000007495650 TERMINAL LAYOUT JMKIA5358ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Condition Voltage (V) Output When sliding door LH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 Output When sliding door LH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 Output When sliding door RH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 Ground Sliding door power window motor RH UP signal Output When sliding door RH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 8 (BR) Ground Front power window motor (passenger side) UP signal Output When front RH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 9 (SB) Ground Encoder pulse signal 2 Input When front power window motor (driver side) operates. + - 1 (O) Ground Sliding door power window motor LH UP signal 2 (W) Ground Encoder ground Ground Sliding door power window motor LH DOWN signal Ground Sliding door power window motor RH DOWN signal 7 (P) 3 (BR) 5 (SB) Signal name Input/ Output JMKIA0070GB 10 (V) Ground Retained power signal Revision: 2011 September Input Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF. 9 – 16 When driver side or passenger side door is opened during retained power operation. 0 – 1 PWC-74 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + 11 (GR) 12 (LG) Description - Signal name Ground Front power window motor (passenger side) DOWN signal Ground Front power window motor (driver side) DOWN signal A Condition Input/ Output Voltage (V) B Output When front RH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 Output When front LH switch in power window main switch is in DOWN operation. 9 – 16 C D 13 (Y) Ground Encoder pulse signal 1 Input When front power window motor (driver side) operates. E JMKIA0070GB 15 (R) Ground Encoder power supply 16 (L) Ground Front power window motor (driver side) UP signal 17 (B) Ground Ground 19 (LG) Ground Battery power supply Output When ignition switch ON or power window timer operating. 9 – 16 Output When front LH switch in power window main switch is in UP operation. 9 – 16 — — 0 – 1 F G H Input Ignition switch OFF Fail-safe 9 – 16 I INFOID:0000000007495651 J FAIL-SAFE CONTROL Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between PWC the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass. Error Error condition L Pulse sensor malfunction When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value. Both pulse sensors malfunction When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass open/close operation. Pulse direction malfunction When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction. Glass recognition position malfunction 1 When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value. Glass recognition position malfunction 2 When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation. It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window motor (driver side). Revision: 2011 September PWC-75 2012 QUEST M N O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495652 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JRKWC0868GB Revision: 2011 September PWC-76 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495653 B Interview the customer to obtain as much malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in. C 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM D >> GO TO 2. 2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes. Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur. E >> GO TO 3. F 3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS” Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2. Then identify where to start the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. >> GO TO 4. G H 4.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” Perform the diagnosis with “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” of the applicable system. I >> GO TO 5. 5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS J Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 6. PWC 6.FINAL CHECK Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2. Is the malfunctioning part repaired or replaced? YES >> Trouble diagnosis is completed. NO >> GO TO 3. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-77 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL Description INFOID:0000000007495654 When the battery negative terminal is disconnected, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power window system. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495655 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure". >> END Revision: 2011 September PWC-78 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Description A INFOID:0000000007495656 B When the power window main switch replaced, the initialization in necessary for normal operation of power window system. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure C D INFOID:0000000007495657 1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION E Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure". F >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure". G >> END H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-79 2012 QUEST SYSTEM INITIALIZATION [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Description INFOID:0000000007495658 If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power window system. • Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal. • When power window main switch replaced. • Electric power supply to power window main switch or power window motor (driver side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc. • Disconnection and connection of power window main switch harness connector. • Removal of power window motor (driver side) from regulator assembly. • Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit. • Removal and installation of glass. • Removal and installation of door glass run. CAUTION: The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto-up operation • Anti-pinch function Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007495659 1.STEP 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is already fully open) Continue pulling the power window switch UP (AUTO-UP operation). Even after glass stops at fully closed position, keep pulling the switch for 2 seconds or more. Check that AUTO-UP function operates normally. >> GO TO 2. 2.STEP 2 Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure". >> END Revision: 2011 September PWC-80 2012 QUEST CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < BASIC INSPECTION > CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION A Description INFOID:0000000007495660 If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of antipinch function. • Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal. • When power window main switch replaced. • Electric power supply to power window main switch or power window motor (driver side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc. • Disconnection and connection of power window main switch harness connector. • Removal of power window motor (driver side) from regulator assembly. • Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit. • Removal and installation of glass. • Removal and installation of door glass run. Work Procedure B C D E INFOID:0000000007495661 1.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION F 1. Fully open the door window. 2. Place a piece of wood near fully closed position. 3. Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP. 4. Check the following conditions. Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops. Check that glass does not rise not when operating the power window main switch while lowering. CAUTION: • Perform initial setting when AUTO-UP operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally. • Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed. • Do not check with hands and other body parts because they may be pinched. Do not get pinched. G H I J >> END PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-81 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495662 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground. (+) Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 10 D6 19 (-) Condition Ground Ignition switch ON OFF Voltage (V) 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. BCM Connector Power window main switch Terminal Connector Terminal 68 D5 10 69 D6 19 M123 4. Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 68 M123 Not existed 69 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D6 17 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Revision: 2011 September PWC-82 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495663 A 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. B C (+) Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal D56 8 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. F 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. BCM 4. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 68 D56 8 G H Continuity Existed I Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 68 Continuity Ground J Not existed PWC Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. L SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495664 M 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. N O (+) Sliding door power window switch Connector (-) Voltage (V) P Terminal LH D88 RH D108 1 Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: 2011 September PWC-83 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and sliding door power window switch harness connector. BCM 4. Sliding door power window switch Connector Terminal M123 68 Connector Terminal LH D88 RH D108 1 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 68 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PWC-84 2012 QUEST FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Component Function Check A INFOID:0000000007495665 1. CHECK FUNCTION B Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with front power window switch (passenger side). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". C Diagnosis Procedure D INFOID:0000000007495666 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. E F (+) Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) 11 D56 Power window main switch (passenger side) Ground 12 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. I Turn ignition switch OFF. PWC Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. L Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector D56 4. H J 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. G Terminal Terminal Power window main switch Connector 11 Terminal 11 D5 12 8 Continuity M Existed Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector D56 Continuity Terminal O Ground 11 Not existed 12 P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Check front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-86, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September N PWC-85 2012 QUEST FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495667 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check front power window switch (passenger side) terminals under the following conditions. Front power window switch (passenger side) Condition Terminal 8 7 11 6 11 6 12 7 8 6 12 7 Continuity UP NEUTRAL Existed DOWN Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September PWC-86 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495668 1. CHECK FUNCTION B Check sliding door power window motor operation with sliding door power window switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". C Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495669 D 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. E F (+) Sliding door power window switch Connector (-) Condition Power window main switch (sliding door LH side) D88 3 Ground 2 Power window main switch (sliding door RH side) D108 RH G Terminal 2 LH Voltage (V) 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. H I J PWC 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. Sliding door power window switch Connector LH RH 4. Power window main switch Terminal D88 D108 Connector 2 Terminal Continuity 1 3 D5 2 3 3 7 Existed O 5 P Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September N PWC-87 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Sliding door power window switch Connector LH 2 D88 RH Continuity Terminal Ground 3 Not existed 2 D108 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Check sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-88, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495670 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector. Check sliding door power window switch terminals under the following conditions. Sliding door power window switch Condition Terminal 1 5 3 4 2 5 3 4 1 4 2 5 Continuity UP NEUTRAL Existed DOWN Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September PWC-88 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MOTOR [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW MOTOR A DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495671 B 1. CHECK FUNCTION Check front power window motor (driver side) operation with power window main switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-89, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure C D INFOID:0000000007495672 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. (+) G Front power window motor (driver side) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D7 Ground 2 Power window main switch (driver side) NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and power window main switch harness connector. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector 4. Power window main switch Terminal Connector 1 D7 F Terminal 12 D5 2 16 Continuity H I J PWC L M Existed N Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector D7 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. PASSENGER SIDE Revision: 2011 September O PWC-89 2012 QUEST P POWER WINDOW MOTOR [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495673 1. CHECK FUNCTION Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495674 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor (passenger side) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground. (+) Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D46 Ground 2 Front power window switch (passenger side) NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side). NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector. Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector. Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector D46 4. Terminal Front power window switch (passenger side) Connector 1 Terminal 6 D56 2 7 Continuity Existed Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground. Front power window motor (passenger side) Connector D46 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 2 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. SLIDING DOOR LH Revision: 2011 September PWC-90 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MOTOR [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495675 A 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check sliding door power window motor LH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power window switch LH. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure". SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window motor LH connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground. E F (+) Sliding door power window motor LH Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal G 1 D82 Ground Sliding door power window switch LH 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor LH. NO >> GO TO 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch LH connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and sliding door power PWC window switch LH harness connector. Sliding door power window motor LH Sliding door power window switch LH Connector Connector D82 4. H I 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. C INFOID:0000000007495676 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. B Terminal 1 Terminal 5 D88 3 4 Continuity Existed L M Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground. N Sliding door power window motor LH Connector D82 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. SLIDING DOOR RH SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495677 1. CHECK FUNCTION Revision: 2011 September PWC-91 2012 QUEST O P POWER WINDOW MOTOR [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Check sliding door power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power window switch RH. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-92, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure". SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495678 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window motor RH connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground. (+) Sliding door power window motor RH Connector (-) Condition Voltage (V) Terminal 1 D102 Ground Sliding door power window switch RH 3 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 UP 9 – 16 NEUTRAL 0 – 1 DOWN 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor RH. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door power window switch RH connector. Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and sliding door power window switch RH harness connector. Sliding door power window motor RH Connector D102 4. Sliding door power window switch RH Terminal Connector 1 Terminal 5 D108 3 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground. Sliding door power window motor RH Connector D102 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September PWC-92 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > ENCODER CIRCUIT A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495679 1.CHECK FUNCTION B Check that front driver side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when power window main switch is operated. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to PWC-93, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495680 1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. F (+) Power window main switch Connector Signal (Reference value) (-) Terminal G 9 D5 Ground 13 Refer to the following signal H I J JMKIA5210GB Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. PWC L 2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window motor (driver side) connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. M N Power window main switch Connector Terminal Connector 9 D5 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Terminal 3 D7 13 5 Continuity O Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector D5 P Continuity Terminal Ground 9 Not existed 13 Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September PWC-93 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect power window main switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground. (+) Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal D7 4 (-) Voltage (V) Ground 9 – 16 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. Power window main switch 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D5 15 D7 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 15 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window main switch connector. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor (driver side) harness connector. Power window main switch 4. Front power window motor (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D5 2 D7 6 Continuity Existed Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 2 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2 1. Connect power window main switch connector. Revision: 2011 September PWC-94 2012 QUEST ENCODER CIRCUIT [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground. A Power window main switch Connector Terminal D5 2 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". B C D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-95 2012 QUEST NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495681 1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-82, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-96 2012 QUEST DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495682 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) B Check front power window motor (driver side). Refer to PWC-89, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-97 2012 QUEST FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495683 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Check front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) Check front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to PWC-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495684 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check front power window switch (passenger side) power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-83, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Check front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED Revision: 2011 September PWC-98 2012 QUEST FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495685 A 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) B Check front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-99 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495686 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH Check sliding door power window motor LH. Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495687 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sliding door power window switch LH power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-83, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED Revision: 2011 September PWC-100 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495688 A 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH B Check sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-101 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495689 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH Check sliding door power window motor RH. Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495690 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sliding door power window switch RH power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-83, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED Revision: 2011 September PWC-102 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495691 A 1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH B Check sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-103 2012 QUEST AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495692 1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT Check encoder circuit. Refer to PWC-93, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-104 2012 QUEST ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495693 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION B Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to PWC-104, "Diagnosis Procedure". C 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-105 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495694 1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH Check front door switch. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September PWC-106 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495695 1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH B Replace power window main switch. C >> Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". D E F G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-107 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE DRIVER SIDE DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495696 1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END PASSENGER SIDE PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495697 1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END SLIDING DOOR LH SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495698 1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END SLIDING DOOR RH SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495699 1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation". >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September PWC-108 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495700 B REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT13, "Removal and Installation". Remove power window main switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A). C D : Pawl E NOTE: The same procedure is also performed for front power window switch (passenger side). JMKIA8164ZZ F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: If power window main switch is replaced or is removed, it is necessary to perform the initialization procedure. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure". G H I J PWC L M N O P Revision: 2011 September PWC-109 2012 QUEST SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH [DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495701 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation". Remove screw (A), disconnect pawls from sliding door finisher (1), and then remove power window switch finisher (2). : Pawl JMKIA8165ZZ 3. Remove power window switch (1) from power window switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A). : Pawl JMKIA8166ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September PWC-110 2012 QUEST ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL SECTION PWO POWER OUTLET A B C D E CONTENTS POWER SOCKET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 10 PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 10 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 4 POWER SOCKET ............................................... 4 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 4 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5 POWER SOCKET ............................................... 5 FRONT POWER SOCKET .......................................... 5 FRONT POWER SOCKET : Exploded View ............. 5 FRONT POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 5 LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET ........................ 6 LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Exploded View .......................................................................... 6 LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation .......................................................... 6 Component Parts Location ......................................10 AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch ..................................10 AC 120 V Outlet .......................................................11 Inverter Unit .............................................................11 F G H SYSTEM ............................................................ 12 System Description ..................................................12 Circuit Diagram ........................................................13 Fail-safe ...................................................................13 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 15 I J INVERTER UNIT ............................................... 15 Reference Value ......................................................15 Fail-safe ...................................................................16 K WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 17 AC 120 V POWER OUTLET ............................. 17 L Wiring Diagram ........................................................17 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 18 PWO DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 18 Work Flow ................................................................18 N SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................. 8 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 20 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................... 8 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20 O AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ............................................. 21 P Power Socket ............................................................ 8 AC 120 V OUTLET Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21 PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 9 Revision: 2011 September POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 20 AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................................. 22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 Component Inspection .............................................22 PWO-1 2012 QUEST AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT .............. 24 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 24 AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 26 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 26 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 28 NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET ........... 28 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28 AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON ............................... 29 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 30 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 31 INVERTER UNIT ................................................ 31 Removal and Installation ......................................... 31 AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW ............................ 32 Removal and Installation ......................................... 32 AC 120 V OUTLET ............................................ 33 Removal and Installation ......................................... 33 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 34 AC 120 V Power Outlet ........................................... 34 Description .............................................................. 30 Revision: 2011 September PWO-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [POWER SOCKET] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007495760 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-3 2012 QUEST POWER SOCKET [POWER SOCKET] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495761 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCMWA7649GB Revision: 2011 September PWO-4 2012 QUEST POWER SOCKET [POWER SOCKET] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A POWER SOCKET FRONT POWER SOCKET B FRONT POWER SOCKET : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495762 C 1 : Inner socket 2 : Ring D E JSMIA0698ZZ FRONT POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation F INFOID:0000000007495763 REMOVAL G 1. 2. H Remove instrument lower cover center. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Pull out inner socket (1) by pushing the pawl (B) of the ring (2) from the inner socket hole (square) (A). I J JSMIA0721ZZ 3. Press the ring pawl from the back of the instrument lower cover center to remove the ring. K L : Pawl PWO N JPMIA1610ZZ INSTALLATION O Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. P Revision: 2011 September PWO-5 2012 QUEST POWER SOCKET < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Align the cut outs of inner socket, ring and instrument lower cover center. A [POWER SOCKET] : Cut out JPMIA1614ZZ LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Exploded View 1 : Inner socket 2 : Ring INFOID:0000000007495764 JSMIA0699ZZ LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495765 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove clips on the rear side of the luggage side lower finisher (LH) to obtain space for work. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Disconnect power socket connector. Pull out inner socket (1) by pushing the pawl (B) of the ring (2) from the inner socket hole (square) (A). JSMIA0721ZZ 4. Press the ring pawl from the back of the luggage side lower finisher (LH) to remove the ring. : Pawl JPMIA1610ZZ INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September PWO-6 2012 QUEST POWER SOCKET < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Align the cut outs of inner socket, ring and luggage side lower finisher (LH). A [POWER SOCKET] A : Cut out B C JPMIA1614ZZ D E F G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-7 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [POWER SOCKET] < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Power Socket INFOID:0000000007495766 Rated voltage DC 12 V Maximum electric capacity 120 W or less (Total) Maximum current 10 A or less (Total) Revision: 2011 September PWO-8 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS [AC 120 V OUTLET] < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007495767 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-9 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007495768 JSMIA0710ZZ A. Luggage room finisher RH remove condition COMPONENT PARTS DESCRIPTION No. Component Function 1. AC 120 V outlet main switch PWO-10, "AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch" 2. AC 120 V outlet PWO-11, "AC 120 V Outlet" 3. Inverter unit PWO-11, "Inverter Unit" AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch INFOID:0000000007495769 The operation of the switch enables the inverter unit to activate/inactivate and turn ON/OFF AC 120 V output. JSMIA0425ZZ Revision: 2011 September PWO-10 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > AC 120 V Outlet INFOID:0000000007495770 A The AC 120 V outlet allows using AC 120 V converted in the inverter unit as an outlet. B C D JSMIA0712ZZ Inverter Unit INFOID:0000000007495771 E The inverter unit converts an applied power supply voltage (approximately DC 12 V) to AC 120 V and outputs the converted voltage. F G H JSMIA0711ZZ I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000007495772 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSMIA0295GB SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • When turning ON the AC 120 V outlet main switch with the ignition switch ON, the indicator turns ON and the inverter unit is activated. • The inverter unit converts power supply voltage to AC 120 V and outputs the converted voltage to the AC 120 V outlet two seconds after the AC 120 V outlet main switch is turned ON. Revision: 2011 September PWO-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007495773 A B C D E F G H I J K JSMIA0713GB Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495774 When a malfunction listed below occurs, the inverter unit turns OFF the AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator and stops the output by operating the fail-safe. Malfunction item Fail-safe condition L PWO Fail-safe cancellation condition Inverter unit is overheated When the inverter unit is overheated, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. After the inverter unit temperature is lowered, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. N Inverter unit power supply voltage is 11.5 V or less When inverter unit input voltage is lowered, the output stops to protect the battery from running out. Automatic normal return when inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V. O Inverter unit power supply voltage is 16 V - 18 V When inverter unit input voltage reaches 16 V - 18 V, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. Automatic normal return when inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V. Inverter unit power supply voltage is 18 V or more When inverter unit input voltage reaches 18 V or more, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. After the inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V, the AC 120V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. Revision: 2011 September PWO-13 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Malfunction item Fail-safe condition Fail-safe cancellation condition Inverter unit output current is 2.8 A or more When inverter unit output current reaches 2.8 A or more, the output stops to prevent over current. (e.g. connecting an electric appliance exceeding rated output) Automatic normal return when inverter output current reaches 2.8 A. Inverter unit output signal (AC 120 V output signal) is shorted When inverter unit output signal is shorted, the output stops. After recovering from inverter unit output signal short, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. Revision: 2011 September PWO-14 2012 QUEST INVERTER UNIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A INVERTER UNIT Reference Value INFOID:0000000007495775 B TERMINAL LAYOUT C D E JSMIA0395ZZ F PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) + − G Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Standard value H When AC 120 V outlet main switch OFF — When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON (When using circuit tester) 1 (B/W) 5 (L) AC 120 V output Output Value (Approx.) Ignition switch ON 0V I AC 120 V Reference value When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON (When using oscilloscope) J 108 – 132 V K JSMIA0397GB L AC 120 V 4 (W) Grou nd Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF When AC 120 V outlet main switch OFF 11.5 – 16 V Battery power supply — 0V N When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON (When using circuit tester) 5 (L) 1 (B/W) AC 120 V output Output Ignition switch ON AC 120 V O Reference value When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON (When using oscilloscope) 108 – 132 V P JSMIA0397GB AC 120 V Revision: 2011 September PWO PWO-15 2012 QUEST INVERTER UNIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) − + Description Signal name AC 120 V outlet main switch 6 (P) 7 (BR) Grou nd 8 (B) AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator Ground Input/ Output Input Output — Standard value Value (Approx.) When AC 120 V outlet main switch OFF — 0V When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON — 12 V When AC 120 V outlet main switch OFF — 0V When AC 120 V outlet main switch ON — 5.2 V — 0V Condition Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON CAUTION: • To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester or oscilloscope AC range. • Never allow the probes to contact each other. • Because of modified sine wave output of the AC 120 V output signal, voltage cannot be measured accurately without using a circuit tester that can measure true RMS (root mean square). Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007495776 When a malfunction listed below occurs, the inverter unit turns OFF the AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator and stops the output by operating the fail-safe. Malfunction item Fail-safe condition Fail-safe cancellation condition Inverter unit is overheated When the inverter unit is overheated, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. After the inverter unit temperature is lowered, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. Inverter unit power supply voltage is 11.5 V or less When inverter unit input voltage is lowered, the output stops to protect the battery from running out. Automatic normal return when inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V. Inverter unit power supply voltage is 16 V - 18 V When inverter unit input voltage reaches 16 V - 18 V, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. Automatic normal return when inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V. Inverter unit power supply voltage is 18 V or more When inverter unit input voltage reaches 18 V or more, the output stops to protect the inverter unit. After the inverter unit power supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V, the AC 120V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. Inverter unit output current is 2.8 A or more When inverter unit output current reaches 2.8 A or more, the output stops to prevent over current. (e.g. connecting an electric appliance exceeding rated output) Automatic normal return when inverter output current reaches 2.8 A. Inverter unit output signal (AC 120 V output signal) is shorted When inverter unit output signal is shorted, the output stops. After recovering from inverter unit output signal short, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return. Revision: 2011 September PWO-16 2012 QUEST AC 120 V POWER OUTLET [AC 120 V OUTLET] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A AC 120 V POWER OUTLET Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495777 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G H I J K L PWO N O P JRMWC4348GB Revision: 2011 September PWO-17 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [AC 120 V OUTLET] < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495778 OVERALL SEQUENCE JSMIA0396GB DETAILED FLOW 1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION Interview the symptom to the customer. Revision: 2011 September PWO-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW [AC 120 V OUTLET] < BASIC INSPECTION > >> GO TO 2. 2.SYMPTOM CHECK A Check the symptom from the customer's information. B >> GO TO 3. 3.FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION CHECK C Check that the symptom is applied to the fail-safe activation. Does the fail-safe activate? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 5. D 4.SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Perform the system diagnosis for the system that the fail-safe activates. Specify the malfunctioning part. E >> GO TO 6. F 5.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Perform the symptom diagnosis. Specify the malfunctioning part. G >> GO TO 6. 6.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR H Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. >> GO TO 7. I 7.REPAIR CHECK (OPERATION CHECK) Check the operation of AC 120 V outlet. Does it operate normally? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-19 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495779 1.CHECK FUSE Check that the following fuse is not blown. Signal name Fuse No. Battery power supply 34 Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between inverter unit harness connector and ground. Terminal (+) (–) Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 4 Ground Condition Standard value Voltage (Approx.) 11.5 – 16 V Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the inverter unit power supply circuit. 3.CHECK INVERTER UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the inverter unit connector. Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground. Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 8 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the inverter unit ground circuit. Revision: 2011 September PWO-20 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495780 1.CHECK FUSE B Check that the following fuse is not blown. Signal name Fuse No. Ignition power supply 3 C Is the fuse fusing? YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. NO >> GO TO 2. D 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check for voltage between the AC 120 V main switch harness connector and ground. F Terminals (+) (–) AC 120 V outlet main switch Connector Terminal M24 2 Condition Voltage (Approx.) G OFF 0V H ON Battery voltage Ignition switch Ground Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair the AC 120 V main switch power supply circuit. I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-21 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495781 1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector. Check for continuity between the inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch harness connector. Inverter unit 4. AC 120 V outlet main switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B226 6 M24 3 Continuity Existed Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground. Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 6 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. Check for voltage between the inverter unit harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (–) Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 6 Ground Condition AC 120 V outlet main switch Voltage (Approx.) OFF 0V ON 12 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove AC 120 V outlet main switch. 3. Check AC 120 V outlet main switch. Refer to PWO-22, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495782 1.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH Check continuity of AC 120 V outlet main switch. Revision: 2011 September PWO-22 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Terminal 1 3 Condition A Continuity When AC 120 V outlet main switch is ON Existed When AC 120 V outlet main switch is OFF Not existed B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch. C D E F G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-23 2012 QUEST AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495783 1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet connector. Check for continuity between the inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V outlet harness connector. Inverter unit Connector Terminal Connector 5 B226 4. AC 120 V outlet Terminal 1 B271 1 Existed 2 Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground. Inverter unit Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 5 B226 5. Continuity Not existed 1 Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector. Inverter unit Connector Continuity Terminal B226 5 1 Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet connector. Turn ignition switch ON. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator ON) Check voltage between inverter unit harness connector. Terminals Condition (+) (-) Inverter unit Inverter unit Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B226 5 B226 1 Standard value Voltage (Approx.) OFF Approx. 0 V 0V ON AC 108 – 132 V AC 120 V AC 120 V outlet main switch CAUTION: • To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester AC range. • Never allow the probes to contact each other. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3 NO >> Replace inverter unit. 3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET VOLTAGE 1. 2. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator ON) Check voltage between AC 120 V outlet. Revision: 2011 September PWO-24 2012 QUEST AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > A Terminals (+) (-) AC 120 V outlet Standard value AC 120 V outlet main switch Terminal 1 Condition 2 Voltage (Approx.) B OFF Approx. 0 V 0V ON AC 108 – 132 V AC 120 V C CAUTION: • To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester AC range. • Never allow the probes to contact each other. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AC 120 V outlet. D E F G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-25 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495784 1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector. Check continuity between inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V main switch harness connector. Inverter unit 4. AC 120 V outlet main switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B226 7 M24 5 Continuity Existed Check continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground. Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 7 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 2.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between AC 120 V outlet main switch harness connector and ground. AC 120 V outlet main switch Connector Terminal M24 6 Continuity Ground Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors. 3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect AC 120 V outlet main switch connector and inverter unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V output is normal) Check for voltage between the inverter unit harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (–) Inverter unit Connector Terminal B226 7 Ground Condition AC 120 V outlet main switch Voltage (Approx.) OFF 0V ON 5.2 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace inverter unit. 4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR 1. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V output is normal) 2. Check that AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator is illuminated. Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September PWO-26 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch. [AC 120 V OUTLET] A B C D E F G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-27 2012 QUEST NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495785 1.CHECK FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION Check if the symptom is caused by a fail-safe operation. Refer to PWO-16, "Fail-safe". Is fail-safe operating? YES >> Repair the part causing fail-safe operation. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check inverter unit power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-20, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check AC 120 V outlet main switch power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-21, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check AC 120 V outlet main switch input signal circuit. Refer to PWO-22, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 5.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT Check inverter unit power output circuit. Refer to PWO-24, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September PWO-28 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007495786 1.CHECK FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION B Check if the symptom is caused by a fail-safe operation. Refer to PWO-16, "Fail-safe". Is fail-safe operating? YES >> Repair the part causing fail-safe operation. NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D Check inverter unit power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-20, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. E 3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check AC 120 V outlet main switch power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-21, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F G 4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check AC 120 V outlet main switch input signal circuit. Refer to PWO-22, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H I 5.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT Check AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator circuit. Refer to PWO-26, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-29 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description INFOID:0000000007495787 Because of modified sine wave output, the AC 120 V outlet may not operate normally for electric appliance of which electric power consumption is 150 W or less. • Electric appliances requiring a large amount of electric power consumption at startup (e.g. CRT-based TV, power tool) • Measuring instruments for data requiring accuracy (e.g. medical equipment, measuring instrument) • Microprocessor-controlled appliances (e.g. microprocessor-controlled blanket) Noise may be caused in radio or TV, depending on an electric appliance. Revision: 2011 September PWO-30 2012 QUEST INVERTER UNIT [AC 120 V OUTLET] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A INVERTER UNIT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495788 B Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Disconnect inverter unit connector. Remove mounting bolt. Remove inverter unit. C REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. INSTALLATION D E Install in the reverse order of removal. F G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-31 2012 QUEST AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW [AC 120 V OUTLET] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495789 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument lower panel center. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Insert remover tool (B) into pawl (A) of instrument lower panel center and press the pawl toward direction (C) to release the pawl. Remove AC 120 V main switch from instrument lower panel center in direction (D). JSMIA0457ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September PWO-32 2012 QUEST AC 120 V OUTLET [AC 120 V OUTLET] < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > AC 120 V OUTLET A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495790 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Remove center console upper finisher. Refer to IP-26, "Removal and Installation". Press pawl (A) in direction (B) from the back of center console upper finisher to remove AC 120 V outlet in direction (C). C D E JSMIA0458ZZ F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. G H I J K L PWO N O P Revision: 2011 September PWO-33 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [AC 120 V OUTLET] < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) AC 120 V Power Outlet INFOID:0000000007495791 Rated voltage AC 120 V Maximum electric capacity 150 W or less (Total) Maximum current 1.25 A or less (Total) Revision: 2011 September PWO-34 2012 QUEST TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE SECTION RAX REAR AXLE A B C RAX E CONTENTS F PREPARATION ............................................ 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5 PREPARATION ................................................... 2 REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................ 5 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 G SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3 Exploded View .......................................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 Inspection ................................................................. 7 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................. 8 H PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................. 8 I REAR WHEEL HUB ............................................ 4 Wheel Bearing .......................................................... 8 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 3 J Inspection .................................................................. 4 K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RAX-1 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495792 Tool name Description Ball joint remover • Removing ball joint for suspension arm • Removing hub bolt NT146 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: 2011 September RAX-2 2012 QUEST NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000007495793 B NVH in BR section BRAKE NVH in WT section ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section TIRE NVH in RAX and RSU sections REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION RAX-4, "Inspection" Wheel bearing damage E Parts interference REAR AXLE RAX I Noise × × × × × × × J Shake × × × × × × × Vibration × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × Judder × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom C Improper installation, looseness Reference — RAX-5, "Exploded View" Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × F G H K L ×: Applicable M N O P Revision: 2011 September RAX-3 2012 QUEST REAR WHEEL HUB < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE REAR WHEEL HUB Inspection INFOID:0000000007495794 COMPONENT PART Check the mounting conditions (looseness, back lash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE) Check the following items, and replace the part it necessary. • Move wheel hub assembly in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play : Refer to RAX-8, "Wheel Bearing". • Rotate wheel hub assembly and check there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub assembly. Revision: 2011 September RAX-4 2012 QUEST REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495795 B Except for 3.5LE Grade C RAX E F G H JSDIA2758GB 1. Axle housing 2. Bushing 3. Cotter pin 4. Hub cap 5. Parking brake shoe assembly 6. Hub bolt 7. Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type) 8. Disc rotor 9. Plug I J : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. K For 3.5LE Grade L M N O P JSDIA2759GB 1. Ball seat 2. Axle housing 3. Bushing 4. Cotter pin 5. Hub cap 6. Parking brake shoe assembly Revision: 2011 September RAX-5 2012 QUEST REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Hub bolt 8. Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type) 9. Disc rotor 10. Plug : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495796 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. a. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows. CAUTION: • Parking brake completely in the released position. • Put matching marks (A) on the wheel hub assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. • Never drop disc rotor. Fix the disc rotor with wheel nuts and remove the adjusting hole plug. JSDIA2721ZZ b. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Using suitable tool, rotate adjuster (1) in the direction (B) to retract and loosen brake shoe. Remove wheel hub assembly. Remove parking brake and rear cable from back plate. • Parking brake: Refer to PB-8, "Removal and Installation". • Rear cable: Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation". Remove radius rod from axle housing. Refer to RSU-13, "Exploded View". Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation". JPFIB0007ZZ Set suitable jack under axle housing. CAUTION: • At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift". • Never damage the axle housing with a jack. • Check the stable condition when using a jack. Remove front lower link from shock absorber with power tool. Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View". Remove front lower link from axle housing. Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View". Remove cotter pin, then remove suspension arm mounting nut. Separate suspension arm from axle housing, using ball joint remover (commercial service tool), and then remove axle housing. CAUTION: • Never damage ball joint boot. • Temporarily tighten nuts to prevent damage to threads and to prevent the ball joint remover from coming off. Revision: 2011 September RAX-6 2012 QUEST REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 14. Remove axle housing. 15. Remove hub cap. 16. Remove hub bolts (1) from wheel hub assembly, using the ball joint remover (A) (commercial service tool). CAUTION: • Remove hub bolt only when necessary. • Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel hub assembly. • Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the wheel hub assembly. 17. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RAX-7, "Inspection". A B C RAX JPDIF0299ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Place a washer (A) as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts (1) by using the tightening force of the nut (B). CAUTION: • Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub assembly and hub bolt. • Never reuse hub bolt. • Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor. • Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing suspension component. • Never reuse cotter pin and bushing. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RAX-7, "Inspection". Inspection E F G H JPDIF0300ZZ I INFOID:0000000007495797 J INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the wheel hub assembly for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. K Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-3, "Inspection and Adjustment". Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RAX-7 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000007495798 Item Standard Axial end play Revision: 2011 September 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less RAX-8 2012 QUEST BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY SECTION RF ROOF A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 15 WorkFlow .................................................................15 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 PREPARATION ............................................ 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly .................................. 6 Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear) ...................................... 6 Front Sunroof Motor Assembly ................................. 6 Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch ............... 6 SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 System Description ................................................... 7 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 10 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 16 FRONT SUNROOF ....................................................16 FRONT SUNROOF : Description ............................16 FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement ....16 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 17 J POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 17 FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .................17 FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................17 RF REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...................17 REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................17 L FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ........ 19 Component Function Check ..................................19 Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................19 REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .......... 21 FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .........12 Component Function Check ..................................21 Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................21 Reference Value ..................................................... 12 Component Function Check ....................................23 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 14 SUNROOF SWITCH .......................................... 25 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 15 Revision: 2011 September M N O POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ..................... 23 Reference Value ..................................................... 13 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 14 H I List of ECU Reference ............................................ 11 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .......................14 G REAR SUNROOF ......................................................16 REAR SUNROOF : Description ...............................16 REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement....16 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................11 REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...........13 F FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH .....................................25 FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Function Check ..................................25 RF-1 2012 QUEST P FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 25 FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Inspection .................................................................. 26 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) ....................... 26 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Function Check ................................. 26 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 26 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection ....................................................... 27 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) ......................... 28 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Function Check ................................. 28 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 28 REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Inspection ............................................................... 29 GLASS LID ........................................................ 43 FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 43 FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 43 FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 43 FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment ............................ 44 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 45 REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 45 REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 45 REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment .............................. 46 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...................... 48 FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 48 FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 48 FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 48 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 49 REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 50 REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 50 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 30 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY ........................... 52 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY ....................................................................... 30 FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 52 FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 52 FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 53 FRONT SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly... 54 FRONT SUNROOF ................................................... 30 FRONT SUNROOF : Description ........................... 30 FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 30 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 31 REAR SUNROOF : Description .............................. 31 REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 31 AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ..... 33 FRONT SUNROOF ................................................... 33 FRONT SUNROOF : Description ........................... 33 FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 33 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 33 REAR SUNROOF : Description .............................. 33 REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 33 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTIPINCH FUNCTION ............................................. 35 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35 RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY ..................................... 36 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 54 REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 54 REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 56 REAR SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly ... 57 SUNSHADE ....................................................... 58 FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 58 FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 58 FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 58 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 59 REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 60 REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 60 WIND DEFLECTOR ........................................... 62 FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 62 FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 62 FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 62 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36 REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 63 REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 64 REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 64 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ............................................................... 37 SUNROOF SWITCH .......................................... 66 Work Flow ............................................................... 37 Inspection Procedure .............................................. 39 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 41 FRONT ....................................................................... 66 FRONT : Removal and Installation ......................... 66 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 43 REAR ......................................................................... 67 REAR : Removal and Installation ............................ 67 Revision: 2011 September RF-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007494922 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007494923 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J39570) Chassis ear Locates the noise SIIA0993E (J43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairs the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007494924 Tool name Description Engine ear Locates the noise SIIA0995E Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls and metal clips JMKIA3050ZZ Revision: 2011 September RF-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007494925 B C D E F G H I J RF L M N JMKIA8172GB A. View with headlining removed B. View with headlining removed O No. Component 1. Rear sunroof motor assembly Refer to RF-6, "Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly". 2. Rear sunroof switch (rear) Refer to RF-6, "Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear)". 3. Front sunroof motor assembly Refer to RF-6, "Front Sunroof Motor Assembly". 4. Front sunroof switch/rear sunroof switch (front) Refer to RF-6, "Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch". 5. Combination meter Transmits vehicle speed signal to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly. Revision: 2011 September Function RF-5 P 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component Function 6. BCM Supplies the power supply to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 7. Power window lock switch (Power window main switch) Power window lock switch can lock rear sunroof. 8. Front door switch (driver side) Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly INFOID:0000000007849158 It is rear sunroof motor and CPU integrated type that enables tilt up/down & slide open/close by rear sunroof switch (front/rear) operation. Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear) INFOID:0000000007849159 Transmits tilt up/down & slides open/close operation signal to rear sunroof motor assembly. Front Sunroof Motor Assembly INFOID:0000000007849160 It is front sunroof motor and CPU integrated type that enables tilt up/down & slide open/close by front sunroof switch operation. Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch INFOID:0000000007849161 Transmits tilt up/down & slides open/close operation signal to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly. Revision: 2011 September RF-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A System Description INFOID:0000000007494926 SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G H I JMKIA8122GB DESCRIPTION J • Sunroof motor assembly operates with the power supply that is output from BCM while ignition switch is ON. • Tilt up/down and slide open/close signals sunroof switch enables operate sunroof motor to move arbitrarily. • Sunroof motor assembly receives a vehicle speed signal from combination meter and controls the sunroof RF motor operation. • Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits rear sunroof operation. L Front Sunroof Operation Description The front sunroof operate to the following condition by the sunroof switch operation. Sunroof position before operation Switch operation Sunroof action Sunroof position after operation M Tilt up N Fully-closed Close Tilt up O JMKIA5870ZZ Fully-open P JMKIA5779ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel Open Open JMKIA5947ZZ Revision: 2011 September RF-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Sunroof position before operation Switch operation Sunroof action Sunroof position after operation Fully-open Fully-closed Close Close JMKIA5946ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel JMKIA5948ZZ Tilt up Fully-closed Open Tilt down JMKIA5777ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel JMKIA5869ZZ Rear Sunroof Operation Description The rear sunroof operate to the following condition by the sunroof switch operation. Sunroof position before operation Switch operation Sunroof action Sunroof position after operation Tilt up Fully-closed Close Tilt up JMKIA5870ZZ Fully-open JMKIA5779ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel Open Open JMKIA5871ZZ Revision: 2011 September RF-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Sunroof position before operation Switch operation Sunroof action Sunroof position after operation A Fully-open Fully-closed B Close Close C JMKIA5781ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel JMKIA5872ZZ D Tilt up Fully-closed E Open Tilt down F JMKIA5777ZZ A: Glass lid B: Roof panel JMKIA5869ZZ Auto Operation • Front sunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to slide open or tilt up the sunroof without holding the front sunroof switch in the slide open or tilt up position. • Rear sunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to slide open and slide close or tilt up and tilt down the sunroof without holding the rear sunroof switch (front/rear) in the slide open/tilt down or slide close/tilt up position. NOTE: • Auto operation can not be performed under the non-initialized condition. • Auto operation is not available for tilt down and slide close of front sunroof. Retained Power Operation Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables sunroof system to operate for 45 seconds period after ignition switch is turned OFF. G H I J Retained power function cancel conditions • Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF) → OPEN (door switch ON) • Ignition switch is ON again • Timer passed (45 seconds) RF Anti-Pinch Function The CPU of sunroof motor assembly monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fullyclosed or other) by the signals from sunroof motor. When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following slide close and tilt down operation, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until full up position (when tilt down operate) or 150 mm (5.91 in) or more in an open direction (when slide close operate). NOTE: Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the sunroof, it may lower. L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-9 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007494927 JMKIA8123GB Revision: 2011 September RF-10 2012 QUEST BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007494928 ECU Reference C BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM B BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D BCS-59, "DTC Index" E F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-11 2012 QUEST FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY Reference Value INFOID:0000000007494929 TERMINAL LAYOUT JMKIA2225ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) Description + – 1 (B) Ground Ground 3 (R) Ground Ignition ON signal Ground Front sunroof switch (DOWN/OPEN signal) 5 (LG) Signal name Input/ Output Condition Voltage — — — Input Input Ignition switch ON 9 – 16 V Other than the above 0V Sunroof switch in following position • TILT DOWN • SLIDE OPEN 0 – 3V Other than the above 9 – 16 V 6 (L) Ground Sunroof power supply Input — 8 (Y) Ground Vehicle speed signal Input Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx.40 km/ h (25 MPH)] 9 – 16 V JSNIA0012GB 10 (W) Ground Front sunroof switch (UP/CLOSE signal) Revision: 2011 September Input Sunroof switch in following position • TILT UP • SLIDE CLOSE 0 – 3V Other than the above 9 – 16 V RF-12 2012 QUEST REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY A Reference Value INFOID:0000000007494930 TERMINAL LAYOUT B C D JMKIA2225ZZ E PHYSICAL VALUES F Terminal No. (Wire color) + – 1 (B) Ground 3 (R) 5 (P) 6 (L) Ground Ground Ground Description Signal name Ground Ignition ON signal Rear sunroof switch (DOWN/OPEN signal) Sunroof power supply Input/ Output — Input Input Condition Voltage — — Ignition switch ON Other than the above G H 9 – 16 V 0V I Sunroof switch in following position • TILT DOWN • SLIDE OPEN 0 – 3V Other than the above 9 – 16 V Input — J 9 – 16 V RF 7 (W) Ground Rear sunroof lock signal Input/ Output • Ignition switch ON • Within 45 second after ignition switch is turned to OFF L JPMIA0013GB M N 8 (Y) Ground Vehicle speed signal Input Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx.40 km/ h (25 MPH)] O JSNIA0012GB 10 (G) Ground Rear sunroof switch (UP/CLOSE signal) Revision: 2011 September Input Sunroof switch in following position • TILT UP • SLIDE CLOSE 0 – 3V Other than the above 9 – 16 V RF-13 2012 QUEST P SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007494931 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCKWA4091GB Revision: 2011 September RF-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW WorkFlow INFOID:0000000007494932 B DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM C Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in. D >> GO TO 2. 2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION E Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes. Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur. F >> GO TO 3. 3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS” Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2 and then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. G H >> GO TO 4. 4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS” I Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system. >> GO TO 5. J 5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts. RF >> GO TO 6. 6.FINAL CHECK L Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2. Are the malfunctions corrected? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-15 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494933 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE Initialization of system should be conducted after the following conditions. • When the front sunroof motor is changed. • When the front sunroof does not open automatically. FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000007494934 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Press front sunroof switch toward tilt up side and set glass lid to the tilt up position. Release the front sunroof switch, press the front sunroof switch toward tilt up side again, press and hold the switch for 10 seconds or more until glass lid starts to move. Release the front sunroof switch once, press and hold the front sunroof switch toward tilt up side. The glass lid moves little by little and closes. (Press and hold the switch during this operation) After the glass lid stops, release the front sunroof switch, and within the first 4 seconds, press and hold front sunroof switch toward tilt up side. After 4 seconds, the glass lid automatically operates in sequence of slide open and slide close. When the glass lid stops, release the front sunroof switch after 0.5 second or more. Operate front sunroof switch, and if front sunroof is operated normally, the initialization is complete. REAR SUNROOF REAR SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494935 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE Initialization of system should be conducted after the following conditions. • When the rear sunroof motor is changed. • When the rear sunroof does not open or close automatically. REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000007494936 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press rear sunroof switch (front or rear) toward tilt up side and set glass lid to the tilt up position. Release the rear sunroof switch, press the rear sunroof switch toward tilt up side again, press and hold the switch for 10 seconds or more until glass lid starts to move. The glass lid moves slightly toward tilt up direction then stops. (Press and hold the rear sunroof switch during this operation). Release the rear sunroof switch once, press and hold the rear sunroof switch (tilt up side) within the first 4 seconds. After 4 seconds, the glass lid automatically operates in sequence of tilt down, slide open and slide close. When the glass lid stops, release the rear sunroof switch after 0.5 seconds or more. Operate front sunroof switch, and if front sunroof is operated normally, the initialization is complete. ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION 1. Full open the sunroof. 2. Place a wooden piece (wooden hammer handle, etc.) at near fully closed position. 3. Close the sunroof completely with auto-slide close. Check that sunroof lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.91in) with out pinching a wooden piece and stops. CAUTION: • Never check with hands and other part of body because they may be pinched. Never get pinched. • Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or lord is applied to the sunroof it may lower. • Check that auto-slide operates before inspection when system initialization is performed. • Perform initial setting when auto-slide operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally. Revision: 2011 September RF-16 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY B FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494937 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. (+) D E Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R31 6 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. F G 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly harness connector. BCM 4. I Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 69 R31 6 Continuity Existed J Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. RF BCM Connector Terminal M123 69 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R31 1 Ground M N Continuity O Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. P REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494938 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY Revision: 2011 September L RF-17 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. (+) Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R32 6 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. BCM 4. Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 69 R32 6 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M123 69 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R32 1 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September RF-18 2012 QUEST FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494939 1.CHECK FUNCTION-I B Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK FUNCTION-II D 1. Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement". 2. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to RF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". E 3.CHECK FUNCTION-III F 1. 2. Start engine. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. 3. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494940 G H I J 1.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. RF L (+) Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R31 3 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 N Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. O 2.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly harness connector. BCM 4. Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 68 R31 3 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September M RF-19 2012 QUEST P FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM Connector Terminal M123 68 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Front sunroof motor assembly 4. Combination meter Connector Terminal Connector Terminal R31 8 M34 31 Continuity Exists Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. Front sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R31 8 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter. Refer to MWI-60, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September RF-20 2012 QUEST REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494941 1.CHECK FUNCTION-I B Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK FUNCTION-II D 1. Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement". 2. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to RF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure". E 3.CHECK FUNCTION-III F 1. 2. Start engine. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. 3. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494942 G H I J 1.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. RF L (+) Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R32 3 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 N Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. O 2.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. BCM 4. Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M123 68 R32 3 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September M RF-21 2012 QUEST P REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM Connector Terminal M123 68 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Rear sunroof motor assembly 4. Combination meter Connector Terminal Connector Terminal R32 8 M34 31 Continuity Exists Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R32 8 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter. Refer to MWI-60, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September RF-22 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494943 1.CHECK FUNCTION B Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. Power window main switch (power window lock switch) C Rear sunroof ON (LOCK) Operate OFF (UNLOCK) Non-operation D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-23, "Diagnosis Procedure". E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494944 F 1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. G (+) Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Signal (Reference value) (–) H Terminal I R32 7 Ground J JPMIA0013GB RF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 2. L 2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly and power window main switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground. M N (+) Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal R32 7 (–) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 O Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. P 3.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Revision: 2011 September RF-23 2012 QUEST POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM 4. Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M121 8 R32 7 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M121 8 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Check power window main switch. Refer to PWC-45, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Revision: 2011 September RF-24 2012 QUEST SUNROOF SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SUNROOF SWITCH A FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494945 B 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure". FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure C D INFOID:0000000007494946 1.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunroof switch harness connector and ground. F (+) G Front sunroof switch Connector (−) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 Terminal H 1 R6 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly har- RF ness connector. Front sunroof switch Connector Front sunroof motor assembly Terminal Connector 1 R6 4. J Terminal 5 R31 3 10 Continuity Existed M Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and ground. N Front sunroof switch Connector R6 Continuity Terminal Ground 1 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September RF-25 2012 QUEST O P SUNROOF SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Front sunroof switch Connector Terminal R6 2 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 4.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH Check front sunroof switch. Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007494947 SUNROOF SWITCH 1.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front sunroof switch harness connector. Check continuity front sunroof switch terminals. Terminal Condition 1 2 Front sunroof switch 3 Continuity Tilt down or slide open Existed Other than the above Not existed Tilt up or slide close Existed Other than the above Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494948 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494949 1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) and rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September RF-26 2012 QUEST SUNROOF SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > (+) A Rear sunroof switch (front) Connector (−) Voltage (V) Terminal B 4 R6 Ground 6 9.0 – 16.0 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Rear sunroof switch (front) Connector Connector 4 R6 4. Rear sunroof motor assembly Terminal Terminal 5 R32 6 10 Continuity Existed G Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground. H Rear sunroof switch (front) Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 4 R6 Not existed 6 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. F I J RF Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground. Rear sunroof switch (front) Connector Terminal R6 5 Ground L Continuity M Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. N 4.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) Check rear sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace rear sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007494950 SUNROOF SWITCH 1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) Revision: 2011 September RF-27 2012 QUEST O P SUNROOF SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector. 3. Check continuity rear sunroof switch (front) terminals. Terminal Condition 4 Rear sunroof switch (front) 5 6 Continuity Tilt down or slide open Existed Other than the above Not existed Tilt up or slide close Existed Other than the above Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007494951 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (rear). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Refer to RF-28, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494952 1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) and rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground. (+) Rear sunroof switch (rear) Connector (−) Voltage (V) Ground 9.0 – 16.0 Terminal 1 R112 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector. Rear sunroof switch (rear) Connector R112 4. Terminal 1 3 Rear sunroof motor assembly Connector R32 Terminal 5 10 Continuity Existed Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September RF-28 2012 QUEST SUNROOF SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Rear sunroof switch (rear) Connector Continuity Terminal Ground 1 R112 Not existed 3 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. A B C D Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground. E Rear sunroof switch (rear) Connector Terminal R112 2 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector. F G 4.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) Check rear sunroof switch (rear). Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace rear sunroof switch (rear). Refer to RF-67, "REAR : Removal and Installation". REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Inspection H I INFOID:0000000007494953 J SUNROOF SWITCH 1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) 1. 2. 3. RF Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector. Check continuity rear sunroof switch (rear) terminals. Terminal Condition 1 2 3 Rear sunroof switch (rear) L Continuity Tilt down or slide open Existed Other than the above Not existed Tilt up or slide close Existed Other than the above Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace rear sunroof switch (rear). Refer to RF-67, "REAR : Removal and Installation". M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-29 2012 QUEST SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494954 Sunroof does not operate normally. • Glass lid does not slide or tilt. • Judder occurs during sliding operation of glass lid. • Sliding or tilting operation of glass lid is slow. FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494955 1.CHECK GLASS LID Check the following items. • Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip. • Sticking of weather-strip. • Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot. • Misalignment of glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY Check the following items. • Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail. • Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail. Refer to RF-52, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK SUNSHADE Check sunshade for damage, deformation, of interference with other parts. Refer to RF-58, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 5.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit. Refer to RF-17, "FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 6.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH Check sunroof switch. Refer to RF-25, "FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Function Check". Revision: 2011 September RF-30 2012 QUEST SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. A 7.CONFIRM THE OPERATION B Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. C REAR SUNROOF D REAR SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494956 Sunroof does not operate normally. • Glass lid does not slide or tilt. • Judder occurs during sliding operation of glass lid. • Sliding or tilting operation of glass lid is slow. REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure E INFOID:0000000007494957 F 1.CHECK GLASS LID Check the following items. • Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip. • Sticking of weather-strip. • Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot. • Misalignment of glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. G 2.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY J H I Check the following items. • Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail. • Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail. Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. RF L 3.CHECK SUNSHADE M Check sunshade for damage, deformation, of interference with other parts. Refer to RF-60, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. N 4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT O Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. P 5.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit. Refer to RF-17, "REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? Revision: 2011 September RF-31 2012 QUEST SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 6.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH Check sunroof switch. Refer to the following. • Rear sunroof switch (front): Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) Component Function Check". • Rear sunroof switch (rear): Refer to RF-28, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. : : 7.CONFIRM THE OPERATION Confirm the operation again. Is the result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September RF-32 2012 QUEST AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE A FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494958 B Auto operation does not operate • Auto operation of glass lid does not operate. • Glass lid stops halfway. • Anti-pinch function operates. C FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494959 D 1.CHECK GLASS LID Check the following items. • Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip. • Sticking of weather-strip. • Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot. • Misalignment of glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. E F G 2.CHECK WIND DEFLECTOR H Check wind deflector for deformation and interference. Refer to RF-62, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I 3.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY J Check the following items. • Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail. • Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail. Refer to RF-52, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. RF L 4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". M REAR SUNROOF O REAR SUNROOF : Description INFOID:0000000007494960 P Auto operation does not operate • Auto operation of glass lid does not operate. • Glass lid stops halfway. • Anti-pinch function operates. REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494961 1.CHECK GLASS LID Revision: 2011 September N RF-33 2012 QUEST AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Check the following items. • Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip. • Sticking of weather-strip. • Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot. • Misalignment of glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK WIND DEFLECTOR Check wind deflector for deformation and interference. Refer to RF-64, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY Check the following items. • Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail. • Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail. Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September RF-34 2012 QUEST SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007494962 1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE B Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Inspection end. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". C D E F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-35 2012 QUEST RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494963 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH Check door switch. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following. • Front sunroof motor assembly: Refer to RF-17, "FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure". • Rear sunroof motor assembly: Refer to RF-17, "REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 3.REPLACE BCM • Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". • Confirm the operation after replacement. Is the result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". Revision: 2011 September RF-36 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow A INFOID:0000000007494964 B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H customer comments. Refer to RF-41, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain I all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a test drive with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J are provided so that the customer, service adviser, and technician use the same language when describing the noise. • Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) RF Squeak characteristics include the light contact / fast movement / brought on by road conditions / hard surfaces = high-pitched noise / softer surfaces = low-pitched noises / edge to surface = chirping • Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact / slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement / pitch L dependent on materials / often brought on by activity. • Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include fast repeated contact / vibration or similar movement / loose parts/missing clip M or fastener / incorrect clearance. • Knock – (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounds / sometimes repeating / often brought on by driver action. N • Tick – (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials / loose components / can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O Thump characteristics include softer knock / dull sounds often brought on by activity. • Buzz – (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle / firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level varies depending upon the person. A noise that a technician may P judge as acceptable may be very irritating to a customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed. Revision: 2011 September RF-37 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following items: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to the concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis ear: J-39570, engine ear, and mechanics stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • Removing the component(s) in the area that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • Tapping or pushing/pulling the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component(s) with excessive force, otherwise the noise is eliminated only temporarily. • Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise. • Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise. • Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to RF-39, "Inspection Procedure". REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the components, if possible. Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape, or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. • 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in) • 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in) • 76884-71L02: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. • 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in) • 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.181 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in) FELT CLOTHTAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. • 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad • 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape roll Revision: 2011 September RF-38 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that is visible or does not fit. Only lasts a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Used when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Used to eliminate movement. A B C CONFIRM THE REPAIR After repair is complete, test drive the vehicle to confirm that the cause of noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007494965 D E Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the recheck of repair becomes impossible. CENTER CONSOLE Components to check include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. F G H I J RF L M DOORS Check the following items: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon connection to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping, moving the components, or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer. In addition check for the following items: 1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment Revision: 2011 September RF-39 2012 QUEST N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > 3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing, or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof / headlining area can often be traced to one of the following items: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage, or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. SEATS When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Causes of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move, or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: 2011 September RF-40 2012 QUEST SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000007494966 A B C D E F G H I J RF L M N O PIIB8740E Revision: 2011 September RF-41 2012 QUEST P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > PIIB8742E Revision: 2011 September RF-42 2012 QUEST GLASS LID < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A GLASS LID FRONT SUNROOF B FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494967 C D E F G H I J RF L M N JMKIA6143ZZ O 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Front sunroof bracket 4. Center drain hose 5. Side trim 6. Front drain hose 7. Front drain connector 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly P : Metal clip FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494968 REMOVAL 1. Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH). Revision: 2011 September RF-43 2012 QUEST GLASS LID < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove glass lid mounting TORX bolts, and then remove glass lid from vehicle. 3. Fully close glass lid. INSTALLAITON Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation carry out fitting adjustment. Refer to RF-44, "FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment". FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007494969 Adjustment JMKIA6146ZZ 1. Roof panel 2. Glass lid If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the proceduresshownbelow. 1. 2. 3. Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH). Loosen glass lid mounting TORX bolts. Adjust the clearance of glass lid and roof panel according to the fitting standard dimension. Portion a (Clearance) b (Surface height difference) A–A 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] B–B 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] C–C 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] Revision: 2011 September RF-44 2012 QUEST GLASS LID < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. To prevent glass lid from moving after adjustment, first tighten the TORX bolts of front left, and thentightenthe TORX bolts of rear right. 5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly. NOTE: After adjustment the sunroof unit assembly, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Description". A B REAR SUNROOF C REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494970 D E F G H I J RF L M N O JMKIA6144ZZ 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Side trim 4. Rear sunroof bracket 5. Rear drain hose 6. Rear drain connector 7. Rear display bracket 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation P INFOID:0000000007494971 REMOVAL Revision: 2011 September RF-45 2012 QUEST GLASS LID < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH). 2. Remove glass lid mounting TORX bolts, and then remove glass lid from vehicle. 3. Fully close glass lid. INSTALLAITON Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation carry out fitting adjustment. Refer to RF-46, "REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment". REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007494972 Adjustment JMKIA6147ZZ 1. Roof panel 2. Glass lid If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the proceduresshownbelow. 1. 2. 3. Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH). Loosen glass lid mounting TORX bolts. Adjust the clearance of glass lid and roof panel according to the fitting standard dimension. Portion a (Clearance) b (Surface height difference) A–A 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] B–B 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] C–C 6.5 – 8.1 mm (0.256 – 0.319 in) (−2.3) – (+0.7) mm [(−0.091) – (+0.028) in] Revision: 2011 September RF-46 2012 QUEST GLASS LID < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. To prevent glass lid from moving after adjustment, first tighten the TORX bolts of front left, and thentightenthe TORX bolts of rear right. 5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly. NOTE: After adjustment the sunroof unit assembly, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF : Description". A B C D E F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-47 2012 QUEST SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494973 JMKIA6143ZZ 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Front sunroof bracket 4. Center drain hose 5. Side trim 6. Front drain hose 7. Front drain connector 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly : Metal clip FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494974 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Before removing sunroof motor, check that glass lid is fully closed. • After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit. 1. Fully close glass lid. Revision: 2011 September RF-48 2012 QUEST SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove sunroof motor assembly fixinng screws (A), and then remove sunroof motor assembly. A B C JMKIA6151ZZ 4. D Disconnect harness connector from sunroof motor. E INSTALLAITON 1. Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit assembly and mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the sunroof motor assembly with screws. 2. Install map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation". NOTE: After installation sunroof motor, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Description". F G REAR SUNROOF H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-49 2012 QUEST SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494975 JMKIA6144ZZ 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Side trim 4. Rear sunroof bracket 5. Rear drain hose 6. Rear drain connector 7. Rear display bracket 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494976 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Before removing sunroof motor, check that glass lid is fully closed. • After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit. 1. Fully close glass lid. 2. Remove headlining. (without rear display) Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove roof console. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September RF-50 2012 QUEST SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Disconnect harness connector (A) from sunroof motor assembly. 5. Remove sunroof motor assembly fixing screws (B), and then remove sunroof motor assembly. A B C JMKIA6152ZZ D INSTALLAITON 1. Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit assembly and mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the sunroof motor assembly with screws. 2. Install headlining. (without rear display) Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 3. Install roof console.Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View". NOTE: After installation sunroof motor, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF : Description". E F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-51 2012 QUEST SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494977 REMOVAL JMKIA6143ZZ 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Front sunroof bracket 4. Center drain hose 5. Side trim 6. Front drain hose 7. Front drain connector 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly : Metal clip DISASSEMBLY Revision: 2011 September RF-52 2012 QUEST SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > A B C D E F G H I J RF L JMKIA6148ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation 3. M Sunroof frame assembly INFOID:0000000007494978 N REMOVAL CAUTION: • Always work with a helper. • Fully close the glass lid assembly, before removal, then never operate sunroof motor assembly after removal. • After removing sunroof motor assembly, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit. • When remove/install sunroof unit, use cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage. • After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, perform the leak test and check that there is no malfunction. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View". 2. Remove rear display. (with rear display) Refer to AV-217, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September RF-53 2012 QUEST O P SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". 4. Remove rear display brackets. 5. Remove front sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". 6. Disconnect front drain hoses. 7. Remove front sunroof brackets mounting bolts, and then remove front sunroof brackets. 8. Remove nuts from the front end and side rail, and then remove front sunroof unit assembly from roof panel. 9. Remove front sunroof unit assembly from roof panel. 10. Remove sunroof motor assembly. INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Insall front sunroof motor assembly. Bring front sunroof unit into back door. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the side rail of front sunroof unit assembly. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the front end of front sunroof unit assembly. Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts to the front sunroof brackets (LH and RH). Tighten the front sunroof assembly mounting nuts diagonally in order. Tighten front sunroof bracket bolts on the roof panel, and then tighten bolts on the side rail. CAUTION: Install front sunroof unit assembly evenly without any distortion on front sunroof unit assembly. Connect front drain hoses. Install rear display brackets. Install rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Install rear display. (with rear display) Refer to AV-217, "Removal and Installation". Install headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". Install front sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". FRONT SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007494979 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove rear drain assembly from front sunroof unit assembly. Remove sunshade. Refer to RF-58, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Remove wind deflector. Refer to RF-62, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. REAR SUNROOF REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494980 REMOVAL Revision: 2011 September RF-54 2012 QUEST SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > A B C D E F G H I J RF L JMKIA6144ZZ 1. Glass lid 2. TORX bolt 3. Side trim 4. Rear sunroof bracket 5. Rear drain hose 6. Rear drain connector 7. Rear display bracket 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof unit assembly M N DISASSEMBLY O P Revision: 2011 September RF-55 2012 QUEST SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JMKIA6149ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation 3. Sunroof frame assembly INFOID:0000000007494981 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Always work with a helper. • Fully close the glass lid assembly, before removal, then never operate sunroof motor assembly after removal. • After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit. • When remove/install sunroof unit, use cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". 3. Disconnect center drain hoses and rear drain hoses. 4. Remove rear sunroof brackets (LH and RH). Revision: 2011 September RF-56 2012 QUEST SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Remove nuts from the front end and side rail, and then remove rear sunroof unit assembly from roof panel. 6. Remove rear sunroof unit assembly through the back door while being careful not to damage the seats and trim. 7. Remove rear sunroof motor assembly. A B INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Insall rear sunroof motor assembly. Bring rear sunroof unit into back door. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the side rail of rear sunroof unit assembly. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the front end of rear sunroof unit assembly. Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts to the rear sunroof brackets (LH and RH). Tighten the rear sunroof assembly mounting nuts diagonally in order. Tighten rear sunroof bracket bolts on the roof panel, and then tighten bolts on the side rail. CAUTION: Install rear sunroof unit assembly evenly without any distortion on rear sunroof unit assembly. 8. Connect center drain hoses and rear drain hoses. 9. Insall headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 10. Insall glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". REAR SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly C D E F G INFOID:0000000007494982 DISASSEMBLY H 1. 2. 3. I Remove rear drain assembly from rear sunroof unit assembly. Remove sunshade. Refer to RF-60, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Remove wind deflector. Refer to RF-64, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-57 2012 QUEST SUNSHADE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SUNSHADE FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494983 JMKIA6148ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation 3. Sunroof frame assembly INFOID:0000000007494984 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove front sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-53, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Remove rear drain assembly. Revision: 2011 September RF-58 2012 QUEST SUNSHADE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove sunshade stopper (LH and RH) from the sunroof frame end. A B C JMKIA6187ZZ D 4. Remove sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame. INSTALLATION E Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR SUNROOF F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-59 2012 QUEST SUNSHADE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494985 JMKIA6149ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation 3. Sunroof frame assembly INFOID:0000000007494986 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". Remove rear drain assembly. Revision: 2011 September RF-60 2012 QUEST SUNSHADE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove sunshade stopper (1) (LH and RH) from the sunroof frame end. A B C JMKIA2045ZZ D 4. Remove sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame. INSTALLATION E Install in the reverse order of removal. F G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-61 2012 QUEST WIND DEFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WIND DEFLECTOR FRONT SUNROOF FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494987 JMKIA6148ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper 3. Sunroof frame assembly FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494988 REMOAL 1. Open the glass lid to see the wind deflector installation point on the sun roof slide rail. Revision: 2011 September RF-62 2012 QUEST WIND DEFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove wind deflector link base. A : Pawl B C JMKIA6153ZZ D 3. Rotate wind deflector, and then remove the spring from wind deflector spring base. E F G JMKIA6154ZZ INSTALLATION H Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR SUNROOF I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-63 2012 QUEST WIND DEFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494989 JMKIA6149ZZ 1. Rear drain assembly 2. Wind deflector 4. Sunshade 5. Sunshade stopper 3. Sunroof frame assembly REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494990 REMOVAL 1. Open the glass lid to see the wind deflector installation point on the sun roof slide rail. Revision: 2011 September RF-64 2012 QUEST WIND DEFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove mounting pawl of wind deflector link using a removal tool (A) in numerical order as shown in the figure, and then remove wind deflector link. A : Pawl B C JMKIA6155ZZ D 3. Remove hinge fixing screws (A), and then remove wind deflector. E F G JMKIA6156ZZ INSTALLATION H Install in the reverse order of removal. I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-65 2012 QUEST SUNROOF SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SUNROOF SWITCH FRONT FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494991 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove lens from map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation". Using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), disconnect pawls of map lamp assembly (2) from roof console assembly (1), and then remove map lamp assembly (2). : Pawl JMKIA6061ZZ 3. 4. Remove harness connector. Using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), disconnect pawls of switch finisher (2) from map lamp assembly (1), and then remove switch finisher (2). : Pawl JMKIA6062ZZ 5. Disconnect pawls of connector (2) using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), and then remove connector (2) from map lamp assembly (1) in the direction indicated by an arrow as shown in the figure. Remove connector (3) in the same procedures. : Pawl JMKIA6063ZZ 6. Disconnect pawls of sunroof switch (2) using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), and then remove sunroof switch (2) from map lamp assembly (1). Remove sunroof switch (3) in the same procedures. : Pawl JMKIA6064ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September RF-66 2012 QUEST SUNROOF SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR A REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494992 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Remove roof console assembly. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". Remove torx bolts (A), and then remove sunroof switch (2) from roof console assembly (1). C D E JMKIA6065ZZ F INSTALLATION Installation in the reverse order of removal. G H I J RF L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RF-67 2012 QUEST SUSPENSION SECTION RSU REAR SUSPENSION A B C D RSU CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 F Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................10 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................11 Inspection ................................................................11 Disposal ...................................................................12 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 RADIUS ROD .................................................... 13 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 H Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 Exploded View .........................................................13 Removal and Installation .........................................13 Inspection ................................................................13 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4 FRONT LOWER LINK ....................................... 15 I NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 Exploded View .........................................................15 Removal and Installation .........................................15 Inspection ................................................................15 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5 Inspection .................................................................. 5 WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6 Inspection .................................................................. 6 Adjustment ................................................................ 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8 Exploded View .........................................................17 Removal and Installation .........................................17 Inspection ................................................................17 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 19 Exploded View .........................................................19 Removal and Installation .........................................19 Inspection ................................................................20 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING ............... 8 Exploded View .......................................................... 8 Removal and Installation ........................................... 8 Inspection .................................................................. 9 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 21 Exploded View ........................................................ 10 J SUSPENSION ARM .......................................... 17 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 21 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ..............................10 G Wheel Alignment .....................................................21 Ball Joint ..................................................................21 Wheelarch Height ....................................................21 K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RSU-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Suspension INFOID:0000000007495827 • When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. - Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. • After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment. • Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled, tighten as they are. Revision: 2011 September RSU-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495828 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B C D RSU PBIC0190E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RSU-3 2012 QUEST NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000007495829 × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Judder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × NVH in BR section. NVH in WT section. NVH in WT section. NVH in RAX and RSU sections. RSU-6 RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-13, RSU-15, RSU-17, RSU-19 — BRAKE × ROAD WHEEL Shake TIRE × REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Incorrect wheel alignment × Suspension looseness Parts interference × Spring fatigue Bushing or mounting deterioration REAR SUSPENSION — Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Noise Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom — Improper installation, looseness Reference RSU-9 RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-13, RSU-15, RSU-17, RSU-19 Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: 2011 September RSU-4 2012 QUEST REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Inspection INFOID:0000000007495830 B Check the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal. C COMPONENT PART Ball Joint Axial End Play 1. 2. D Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Move axle side of suspension arm in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no end play. RSU Axial end play : Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint". CAUTION: • Never depress brake pedal when measuring. • Never perform with tires on level ground. • Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Never damage the installation position by applying excessive force. F G JSEIA0444ZZ SHOCK ABSORBER H Check for oil leakage and damage. Replace it if necessary. I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RSU-5 2012 QUEST WHEEL ALIGNMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > WHEEL ALIGNMENT Inspection INFOID:0000000007495831 DESCRIPTION Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions. NOTE: “Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. PRELIMINARY CHECK Check the following: • Tires for improper air pressure and wear. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". • Road wheels for runout. • Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to RAX-4, "Inspection". • Ball joint axial end play of suspension arm. Refer to RSU-5, "Inspection". • Shock absorber operation. • Each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation. • Each of front lower link, rear lower link, radius rod, rear suspension member, suspension arm, and shock absorber for cracks, deformation, and other damage. • Vehicle height (posture). GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS • A four-wheel thrust alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle. - The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle. - The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. • Make sure the machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. • When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Never use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. • Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with both “Rolling Compensation” method and optional “Jacking Compensation” method to “compensate” the alignment targets or head units. “Rolling Compensation” is the preferred method. - If using the “Rolling Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body. - If using the “Jacking Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. NOTE: Do not use the “Rolling Compensation” method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment. - Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you're using for more information. Adjustment INFOID:0000000007495832 CAMBER Revision: 2011 September RSU-6 2012 QUEST WHEEL ALIGNMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • If camber is exceeds the standard value, adjust with adjusting bolt (1) in front lower link (2). A Camber: Refer to RSU-21, "Wheel Alignment". B CAUTION: • When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use a wrench to prevent the turning of the bolt. • After adjusting camber, be sure to check toe-in. - If camber is not still within the specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts. C JSEIA0395ZZ D TOE-IN • If toe-in is exceeds the standard value, adjust with adjusting bolt (1) in rear lower link (2). RSU Toe-In: Refer to RSU-21, "Wheel Alignment". CAUTION: • Be sure to adjust equally on right and left side with adjusting bolt. • When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use a wrench to prevent the turning of the bolt. - If toe-in is not still within the specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts. • After toe-in adjustment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". F G JSEIA0396ZZ H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September RSU-7 2012 QUEST REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495833 JSEIA0397GB 1. Rear suspension member 2. Radius rod 3. Adjusting bolt 4. Front lower link 5. Eccentric disk 6. Rear lower link 7. Rubber seat 8. Coil spring 9. Upper seat : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495834 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Set suitable jack under rear lower link. CAUTION: • At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift". • Never damage the rear lower link with a jack. • Check the stable condition when using a jack. Loosen rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from rear suspension member, and then remove rear lower link mounting bolt and nut from axle housing with power tool. Slowly lower jack, then remove upper seat, coil spring, and rubber seat from rear lower link. CAUTION: Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable. Remove rear lower link. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-9, "Inspection". INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Install adjusting bolt so that the graduation marks on adjusting bolt are positioned downward. Revision: 2011 September RSU-8 2012 QUEST REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • When installing upper seat (1), align protrusion (B) on upper seat inside to tabs (A) of vehicle side bracket (2). A B C JPEIB0266ZZ D • Fit rubber seat (1) to step (A) of rear lower link (2). RSU F G JPEIB0013ZZ H • Fit the bottom end of coil spring to the step of rubber seat. CAUTION: Be careful with the vertical direction of the coil spring. I : Upper side • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-9, "Inspection". J K JSEIA0403ZZ L Inspection INFOID:0000000007495835 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check rear lower link, rubber seat, upper seat, and coil spring for deformation, crack, and damage. Replace it if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION M N Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". O P Revision: 2011 September RSU-9 2012 QUEST REAR SHOCK ABSORBER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SHOCK ABSORBER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495836 JPEIB0135GB 1. Shock absorber 4 Bound bumper 2. Piston rod lock nut 3. Mounting bracket : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495837 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Set jack under axle housing. CAUTION: • At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift". • Never damage the axle housing with a jack. • Check the stable condition when using a jack. Separate shock absorber mounting bolt from front lower link. Slowly lower jack, then remove shock absorber from front lower link. CAUTION: Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable. Remove mounting bracket mounting nuts ( shock absorber assembly. ), and remove JPEIB0060ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September RSU-10 2012 QUEST REAR SHOCK ABSORBER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection". • After replacing the shock absorber, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the shock absorber. Refer to RSU-12, "Disposal". Disassembly and Assembly A B INFOID:0000000007495838 DISASSEMBLY C CAUTION: Never damage shock absorber piston rod when removing components from shock absorber. 1. Wrap a shop cloth around lower side of shock absorber and fix it with a vise. CAUTION: Never set the cylindrical part of shock absorber with a vise. 2. Secure the piston rod tip (A) so that piston rod does not turn, and remove piston rod lock nut (1). 3. Remove mounting bracket and bound bumper from shock absorber. 4. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection". D RSU F G JPEIB0241ZZ H ASSEMBLY Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Secure the piston rod tip (A) so that piston rod does not turn, then tighten the piston rod lock nut (1) to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never reuse piston rod lock nut. • Never damage shock absorber piston rod when installing components from shock absorber. • Perform inspection after assembly. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection". I J K JPEIB0241ZZ Inspection L INFOID:0000000007495839 M INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Mounting bracket Check for cracks and damage. Replace it if necessary. N Bound Bumper Check for cracks and damage. Replace it if necessary. O Shock Absorber Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. • Shock absorber for deformation, cracks, and other damage. • Piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion. • Oil leakage P INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY Make sure piston rod on shock absorber is not damaged when attaching components to shock absorber. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September RSU-11 2012 QUEST REAR SHOCK ABSORBER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Disposal INFOID:0000000007495840 1. Set shock absorber horizontally to the ground with the piston rod fully extracted. 2. Drill 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top as shown in the figure to release gas gradually. CAUTION: • Wear eye protection (safety glasses). • Wear gloves. • Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas. NOTE: • Drill vertically in this direction show by arrow. • Directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets. • The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless. A 3. JPEIA0161ZZ : 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in) Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times. CAUTION: Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations. Revision: 2011 September RSU-12 2012 QUEST RADIUS ROD < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > RADIUS ROD A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495841 B C D RSU F G JSEIA0397GB 1. Rear suspension member 2. Radius rod 3. Adjusting bolt 4. Front lower link 5. Eccentric disk 6. Rear lower link 7. Rubber seat 8. Coil spring 9. Upper seat H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) I : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495842 J Remove tire with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation". Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Removal and Installation". Separate front lower link from axle housing. Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View". Loosen front lower link mounting bolt and nut from suspension member. Refer to RSU-15, "Removal and Installation". Remove radius rod mounting bolts and nuts from axle housing with power tool. Remove radius rod mounting bolt from rear suspension member with power tool, then remove radius rod. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-13, "Inspection". K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. INSTALLATION M N O Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Never reuse radius rod mounting nut. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-13, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495843 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check radius rod and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary. Revision: 2011 September L RSU-13 2012 QUEST P RADIUS ROD < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". 2. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September RSU-14 2012 QUEST FRONT LOWER LINK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT LOWER LINK A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495844 B C D RSU F G JSEIA0397GB 1. Rear suspension member 2. Radius rod 3. Adjusting bolt 4. Front lower link 5. Eccentric disk 6. Rear lower link 7. Rubber seat 8. Coil spring 9. Upper seat H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) I : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495845 J Remove tire with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation". Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View". Remove eccentric disc, adjusting bolt, mounting bolt, and nut, then remove front lower link. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspection". K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. L M INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Install adjusting bolt so that the graduation marks on adjusting bolt are positioned downward. • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Never reuse front lower link mounting nut. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495846 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check front lower link and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace it if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September RSU-15 2012 QUEST N O P FRONT LOWER LINK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September RSU-16 2012 QUEST SUSPENSION ARM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SUSPENSION ARM A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495847 B C D RSU F G JSEIA0398GB 1. Rear suspension member 2. Stopper rubber 3. Suspension arm H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. I Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495848 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J Remove tires with power tool. WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Separate suspension arm from front lower link. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolt, and nut, then remove stopper rubber and suspension arm. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-17, "Inspection". K L INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Install stopper rubber to rear suspension member together with suspension arm. • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Never reuse suspension arm mounting nut. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-17, "Inspection". Inspection M N INFOID:0000000007495849 O INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary. P Suspension Arm • Suspension arm and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage. • Ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage. Swing Torque 1. 2. Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding. Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement. Revision: 2011 September RSU-17 2012 QUEST SUSPENSION ARM < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Hook spring balance (A) at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm spring balance measurement value is within specifications when ball stud begins moving. Swing torque : Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint". • If swing torque exceeds standard range, replace suspension arm assembly. JPEIA0005ZZ Axial End Play 1. 2. 3. Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding. Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement. Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness. Axial end play : Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint". • If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace suspension arm assembly. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September RSU-18 2012 QUEST REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495850 B C D RSU F G JSEIA0399GB 1. Rear suspension member stay 2. Rear suspension member 3. Rebound stopper H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495851 I REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". 4. Remove center muffler. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation". 5. Separate the parking brake cable from rear suspension member. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation". 7. Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Removal and Installation". 8. Set jack under rear suspension member. CAUTION: • At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift". • Never damage the rear suspension member with a jack. • Check the stable condition when using a jack. 9. Remove rear suspension member stay. 10. Remove rear suspension member mounting nuts and rebound stopper. 11. Slowly lower jack, then remove rear suspension member, front lower link, radius rod, suspension arm, and axle housing from vehicle as a unit. CAUTION: Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable. 12. Remove the following parts from rear suspension member. • Axle housing: Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". • Suspension arm: Refer to RSU-17, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September RSU-19 2012 QUEST J K L M N O P REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Radius rod: Refer to RSU-13, "Removal and Installation". • Front lower link: Refer to RSU-15, "Removal and Installation". 13. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-20, "Inspection". INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal. • Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on level ground. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-20, "Inspection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007495852 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check rear suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace it if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-3, "Inspection and Adjustment". Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September RSU-20 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000007495853 B FOR USA MODELS C Item Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Standard Minimum –1° 06′ (–1.10°) Nominal –0° 36′ (–0.60°) Maximum –0° 06′ (–0.10°) Minimum In 1.2 mm (0.047 in) Nominal In 2.8 mm (0.110 in) Maximum In 4.4 mm (0.173 in) Minimum In 0° 03′ (0.05°) Nominal In 0° 07′ (0.12°) Maximum In 0° 11′ (0.18°) D RSU F G Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. FOR CANADA MODELS H Item Standard Wheel size 16 inch Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance Toe-in Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel) Degree minute (Decimal degree) 18 inch Minimum –1° 05′ (–1.08°) Nominal –0° 35′ (–0.58°) Maximum –0° 05′ (–0.09°) J Minimum In 0.8 mm (0.031 in) In 0.9 mm (0.035 in) Nominal In 2.4 mm (0.094 in) In 2.5 mm (0.098 in) Maximum In 4.0 mm (0.157 in) In 4.1 mm (0.161 in) Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°) Nominal In 0° 06′ (0.10°) Maximum In 0° 10′ (0.16°) K L Measure value under unladen* conditions. M *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. Ball Joint I INFOID:0000000007495854 N Item Swing torque Measurement on spring balance Standard O 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb) 8.1 – 54.8 N (0.83 – 5.6 kg, 1.82 – 12.32 lb) Axial end play 0 mm (0 in) P Wheelarch Height INFOID:0000000007495855 FOR USA MODELS Revision: 2011 September RSU-21 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Item Standard Grade 3.5S 3.5SV 3.5SL 3.5LE Front (Hf) 760 mm (29.92 in) 769 mm (30.28 in) 770 mm (30.31 in) Rear (Hr) 751 mm (29.57 in) 760 mm (29.92 in) 759 mm (29.88 in) WEIA0030E Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. FOR CANADA MODELS Item Standard Grade 3.5S Front (Hf) Rear (Hr) 3.5SV 3.5SL 760 mm (29.92 in) 752 mm (29.61 in) 3.5LE 770 mm (30.31 in) 751 mm (29.57 in) 760 mm (29.92 in) WEIA0030E Measure value under unladen* conditions. *: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions. Revision: 2011 September RSU-22 2012 QUEST RESTRAINTS SECTION SB SEAT BELT A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................... 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 4 FRONT SEAT BELT ............................................ 4 Exploded View .......................................................... 4 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR .......................................... 5 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 5 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection .................... 6 SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................. 8 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation...... 8 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ............................ 9 SECOND SEAT BELT ........................................10 Exploded View ........................................................ 10 F SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ........................................10 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................11 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ..................11 G SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................13 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation....13 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................13 SB SEAT BELT HOOK ....................................................13 SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation .......13 I THIRD SEAT BELT ........................................... 15 Exploded View .........................................................15 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ........................................16 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................16 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ..................17 SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................19 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation....19 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................19 SEAT BELT HOOK ....................................................20 SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation .......20 J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SB-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492759 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Seat Belt Service INFOID:0000000007492760 CAUTION: • Before removing the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. • Do not use electrical test equipment for front seat belt pre-tensioner connector. • After replacing or reinstalling front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". • Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly. • Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. • Never oil tongue and buckle. • If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the entire seat belt assembly. • If webbing is cut, frayed or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. • When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Revision: 2011 September SB-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt was damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). • The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. A B C D E F G SB I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SB-3 2012 QUEST FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT SEAT BELT Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492761 JMHIA2049GB 1. Adjuster cover 2. Anchor bolt 3. Shoulder anchor 4. Spacer 5. Retaining washer 6. Seat belt adjuster 7. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor (Passenger side) 8. Outer anchor 9. Outer anchor cover Revision: 2011 September SB-4 2012 QUEST FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor (Driver side) 11. Seat belt buckle 12. Wave washer A : Pawl : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) B : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) SEAT BELT RETRACTOR C SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492762 D REMOVAL WARNING: Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes or more. 1. Remove shoulder anchor. a. Slide front seat to the frontmost position. b. Pull adjuster cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. Remove adjuster cover. E F G : Pawl SB I JMHIA1630ZZ c. 2. a. Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove outer anchor. Pull outer anchor cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. Remove outer anchor cover. J K : Pawl L M JMHIA1722ZZ b. 3. a. b. c. Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner retractor. Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation". Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-24, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner harness connector. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September SB-5 2012 QUEST N O P FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock and remove connector. • Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into connector. • After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushed securely into it. PHIA0953J d. 4. a. b. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner retractor mounting anchor bolt and screw. CAUTION: Never place pre-tensioner seat belt in an area where the temperature reaches 80°C or more. Remove seat belt adjuster. Remove center pillar upper garnish. Refer to INT-25, "CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Remove seat belt adjuster mounting anchor bolts. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492763 AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.). • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags were deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. Check the seat belt warning lamp for proper operation as per the following: Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Check that guide swivels freely and that webbing lays flat and does not bind in guide. Check that height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Revision: 2011 September SB-6 2012 QUEST FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. A B Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor 1. 2. 3. 6. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. Fix the seat belt at the center pillar webbing opening with a clip or other device. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor webbing opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull it tightly while moving it up and down several times along the webbing opening surface to remove dirt stuck there. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the webbing contacts the through-anchor webbing opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no slack or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip fixing the seat belt and check that the webbing returns smoothly. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK C D E F G Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the SB retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt I is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop- J erly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. K ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. L M N ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. Revision: 2011 September SB-7 2012 QUEST O P FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the front seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation". Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure. • The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15 degrees or less. • The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35 degrees or more. A and B : Tilting angles : Vehicle front JMHIA1056ZZ 3. Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492764 REMOVAL WARNING: Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes or more. 1. Remove front seat from the vehicle. • Manual seat: Refer to SE-70, "Removal and Installation". • Power seat: Refer to SE-84, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. 2. Remove seat cushion finisher. • Manual seat: Refer to SE-76, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly". • Power seat: Refer to SE-90, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly". 3. Remove seat cushion inner finisher. • Manual seat: Refer to SE-76, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly". • Power seat: Refer to SE-90, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly". 4. Remove seat belt buckle. a. Disconnect harness connector (A). JMHIA2052ZZ b. Remove seat belt buckle mounting anchor bolt. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September SB-8 2012 QUEST FRONT SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492765 A AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.). • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags were deployed. B C D E F PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. b. 2. 3. 4. G Check the seat belt warning lamp for proper operation as pen the following: Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. SB Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". I Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts. J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SB-9 2012 QUEST SECOND SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SECOND SEAT BELT Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492766 JMHIA2176GB 1. Adjuster cover 2. Anchor bolt 3. Shoulder anchor 4. Spacer 5. Retaining washer 6. Seat belt adjuster 7. Second seat belt retractor RH 8. Seat belt hook 9. Outer anchor 10. Second seat belt retractor LH 11. Second seat belt buckle 12. Wave washer 13. Anchor bolt cap : Pawl : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Revision: 2011 September SB-10 2012 QUEST SECOND SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492767 A REMOVAL 1. a. b. Remove shoulder anchor. Slide second seat to the frontmost position. Pull adjuster cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. Remove adjuster cover. B C : Pawl D E JMHIA1630ZZ F Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove outer anchor. Remove rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation". G Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove second seat belt retractor. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal SB and Installation". 4. Remove second seat belt retractor mounting anchor bolt and screw. 5. Remove seat belt adjuster. I a. Remove rear pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "REAR PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". b. Remove seat belt adjuster mounting anchor bolts. J INSTALLATION c. 2. a. b. 3. a. Install in the reverse order of removal. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492768 K WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.). • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags were deployed. L AFTER A COLLISION PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. 2. a. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Revision: 2011 September SB-11 2012 QUEST M N O P SECOND SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. 3. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the second seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation". Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure. Revision: 2011 September SB-12 2012 QUEST SECOND SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15 degrees or less. • The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35 degrees or more. A and B A B : Tilting angles : Vehicle front C JMHIA1064ZZ 3. D Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation E INFOID:0000000007492769 REMOVAL 1. 2. F Remove anchor bolt cap. Remove seat belt buckle mounting anchor bolt, and then remove seat belt buckle. G INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492770 SB AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.) • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. J K L M N PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. 2. I Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Repeat step above if necessary to check the other seat belts. O SEAT BELT HOOK SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492771 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Slide second seat to the frontmost position. Remove third seat from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation". Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SB-13 2012 QUEST P SECOND SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. From back of luggage side lower finisher, press pawls indicated by arrows as shown in the figure and remove seat belt hook from luggage side lower finisher. JMHIA1638ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September SB-14 2012 QUEST THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > THIRD SEAT BELT A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492772 B C D E F G SB I J K L M N O JMHIA2051GB Shoulder anchor cover 4. Spacer 5. Retaining washer 6. Outer seat belt retractor RH 7. Locking washer 8. Seat belt shoulder bracket RH 9. Seat belt hook 10. Outer anchor 2. Anchor bolt 11. Seat belt shoulder bracket LH 3. P 1. Shoulder anchor 12. Outer seat belt retractor LH 13. Center seat belt retractor finisher 14. Center seat belt retractor 15. Center seat belt buckle 16. Outer seat belt buckle RH 17. Connector buckle 18. Outer seat belt buckle LH Revision: 2011 September SB-15 2012 QUEST THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > : Pawl : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) SEAT BELT RETRACTOR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492773 REMOVAL OUTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR 1. a. Remove shoulder anchor. Pull shoulder anchor cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in the figure. Remove outer anchor cover. : Pawl JMHIA1725ZZ b. 2. 3. a. b. 4. Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt, and then remove outer anchor. Remove outer seat belt retractor. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt. Remove seat belt shoulder bracket mounting bolts, and then remove seat belt shoulder bracket. CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR 1. Remove center seat belt retractor finisher. Disengage center seat belt finisher fixing clips, and then remove center seat belt retractor finisher. : Clip JMHIA1726ZZ 2. a. Remove center seat belt retractor. Remove third assist grip (LH and RH), and then remove headlining assembly rear clips. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SB-16 2012 QUEST THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > b. Slightly lower the headlining assembly (1) rear and secure work space. c. Remove outer seat belt retractor mounting anchor bolts (A), and then remove outer seat belt retractor (2). A B C JMHIA1727ZZ D INATALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492774 E AFTER A COLLISION F WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Fail- G ure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in SB which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). I • The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.). • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. J • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags were deployed. K PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts. Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. SB-17 M N O SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Revision: 2011 September L 2012 QUEST P THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. a. Remove the third seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-16, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation". Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure. Outer seat belt retractor • The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15 degrees or less. • The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35 degrees or more. A and B : Tilting angles : Vehicle front JMHIA1064ZZ b. Center seat belt retractor Revision: 2011 September SB-18 2012 QUEST THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15 degrees or less. • The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35 degrees or more. A B A and B : Tilting angles : Vehicle front C JMHIA0522ZZ D 3. Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally. SEAT BELT BUCKLE E SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492775 REMOVAL F OURTER SETA BELT BUCKLE RH & CENTER SETA BELT BUCKLE 1. 2. 3. a. 4. Remove luggage floor rear board. Refer to INT-39, "LUGGAGE FLOOR REAR BOARD : Removal and G Installation". Remove cable cover. Refer to INT-40, "CABLE COVER : Removal and Installation". Remove outer seat belt buckle RH. SB Remove outer seat belt buckle RH mounting anchor bolt. Pull up seat belt buckle from the seat back and remove it. I CONNECTOR BUCKLE 1. 2. Remove third seat (RH) from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. Remove connector buckle mounting anchor bolt, and then remove connector buckle. J OURTER SETA BELT BUCKLE LH 1. 2. Remove third seat (LH) from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. Remove outer seat belt buckle LH mounting anchor bolt, and then remove outer seat belt buckle LH. K L INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. M SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000007492776 N AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision. NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags were deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.) • The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. Revision: 2011 September SB-19 2012 QUEST O P THIRD SEAT BELT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. 2. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly. Repeat step above if necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT HOOK SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492777 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Slide second seat to the frontmost position. Remove third seat from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation". Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". From back of luggage side lower finisher, press pawls indicated by arrows as shown in the figure and remove seat belt hook from luggage side lower finisher. JMHIA1638ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September SB-20 2012 QUEST RESTRAINTS SECTION SR SRS AIRBAG A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 SPIRAL CABLE ................................................ 14 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................14 Removal and Installation .........................................14 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Service ...................................................................... 2 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE ................... 17 Exploded View .........................................................17 Removal and Installation .........................................17 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE .......................... 20 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................20 Removal and Installation .........................................20 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 Exploded View .........................................................22 Removal and Installation .........................................22 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS .................................... 4 FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION .................. 6 FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision ................................... 6 FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision ............................. 7 G SR I CRASH ZONE SENSOR ................................... 22 BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 4 FOR FRONTAL COLLISION ....................................... 4 FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision ..................................................... 4 FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision ............................................... 5 F J SATELLITE SENSOR ....................................... 24 Exploded View .........................................................24 Removal and Installation .........................................25 K DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 28 Exploded View .........................................................28 Removal and Installation .........................................28 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........................ 30 Exploded View .........................................................30 Removal and Installation .........................................30 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11 OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 31 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..............................11 Exploded View .........................................................31 Removal and Installation .........................................31 Exploded View ........................................................ 11 Removal and Installation ......................................... 11 L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007494897 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Service INFOID:0000000007494898 • Never use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. • Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. For approximately 3 minutes after the battery negative terminal are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, never work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have elapsed. • Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required. • The spiral cable must be aligned in the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Never turn steering wheel and column after removal of steering gear. • Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down. • Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper functioning after replacing any components. • After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. • Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment. Revision: 2011 September SR-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007494899 Tool name Description Tamper resistant TORX bit B C Removes of driver air bag module D E S-NT757 F Remover tool Removes clips, pawls and metal clips G JMKIA3050ZZ SR I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-3 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION COLLISION DIAGNOSIS FOR FRONTAL COLLISION FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision INFOID:0000000007494900 CAUTION: Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles. WORK PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been completed. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Remove the front air bag modules, crash zone sensor, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. Check the SRS components using the table below: Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.) Install new front air bag modules, crash zone sensor assembly, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part Inspection Driver air bag module If the driver air bag has deployed: REPLACE Install with new fasteners. Passenger air bag module (if equipped) If the passenger air bag has deployed: REPLACE Install with new fasteners. Crash zone sensor If any of the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners* have been activated: REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, retractor, lap outer) If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated: REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only. Diagnosis sensor unit If any of the SRS components have been activated: REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit. Install with new fasteners. 1. 2. Steering wheel 3. 4. 5. 6. Visually check steering wheel for deformities. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. If no damage is found, reinstall. If damaged − REPLACE. Spiral cable If the driver front air bag has deployed: REPLACE the spiral cable. Occupant classification system (Passenger seat) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Revision: 2011 September Remove passenger seat assembly. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners. If damaged − REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners. SR-4 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > Part Harness and connectors Instrument panel assembly Inspection 1. 2. 3. 4. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. If damaged − REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. If the passenger air bag has deployed: REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. (integrated type) FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision A B C INFOID:0000000007494901 CAUTION: Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles. D WORK PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been completed. Check the SRS components using the table below: Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.) Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part Driver air bag module E F G SR Inspection If the driver air bag has NOT been deployed: 1. Remove driver air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged − REPLACE. Install driver air bag module with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Passenger air bag module (if equipped) If the passenger air bag has NOT been deployed: 1. Remove passenger air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged − REPLACE. Install passenger air bag modules with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Crash zone sensor If the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the crash zone sensor and bracket. 3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 5. If damaged − REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-5 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > Part Inspection Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, retractor, lap outer) If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. 6. If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 7. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 8. If damaged − REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Diagnosis sensor unit If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged − REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 1. 2. Steering wheel 3. 4. 5. 6. Visually check steering wheel for deformities. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. If no damage is found, reinstall. If damaged − REPLACE. Spiral cable If the driver front air bag has not deployed: 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage. 2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage. 3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall. 5. If damaged − REPLACE. Occupant classification system (Passenger seat) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove passenger seat assembly. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners. If damaged − REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners. 1. 2. 3. 4. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. If damaged − REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. Harness and connectors Instrument panel assembly If the passenger air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Visually check instrument panel assembly for damage. 2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel assembly. 3. If damaged − REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision INFOID:0000000007494902 CAUTION: Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles. WORK PROCEDURE 1. 2. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been completed. Replace the following components: • Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) • Door finisher (on the side on which door-mounted curtain air bag is activated) • Pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers Revision: 2011 September SR-6 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > • Satellite sensor LH/RH (on the side on which side air bag is activated) • Diagnosis sensor unit • Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies 3. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) 4. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly. 5. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) Part A B C D Inspection If the curtain air bag LH has deployed: REPLACE the curtain air bag module LH. Install with new fasteners. E Curtain air bag module LH Curtain air bag module RH If the curtain air bag RH has deployed: REPLACE the curtain air bag module RH. Install with new fasteners. F Side air bag module LH If the side air bag LH has deployed: REPLACE front seatback assembly LH. Side air bag module RH If the side air bag RH has deployed: REPLACE front seatback assembly RH. Satellite sensor (LH or RH) If any of the SRS components have deployed: REPLACE the satellite sensor on the collision side with new fasteners. Diagnosis sensor unit If any of the SRS components have deployed: REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, retractor, lap outer) If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated: REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only. Center inner pillar 1. 2. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.). If damaged − REPAIR the center inner pillar. 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the interior trim on the collision side. If damaged − REPLACE the damaged trim parts. Trim/headlining 2. Door-mounted curtain air bag module LH If the door-mounted curtain air bag module LH has deployed: REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module. Install with new fasteners. Door-mounted curtain air bag module RH If the door-mounted curtain air bag module RH has deployed: REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module. Install with new fasteners. Pop-up roll bar assemblies If the pop-up roll bar has deployed: REPLACE pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers. Install with new fasteners. G SR I J K L M N FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision O INFOID:0000000007494903 CAUTION: Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles. WORK PROCEDURE 1. 2. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been completed. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. • If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Revision: 2011 September SR-7 2012 QUEST P COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > • If the door finisher assembly is damaged, the door finisher assembly and door-mounted curtain air bag module must be replaced. 3. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly. 4. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRC-15, "Description". SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) Part Inspection Curtain air bag module LH If the curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged − Remove the curtain air bag module LH. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the curtain air bag module LH. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners. 6. If damaged − REPLACE the curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Curtain air bag module RH If the curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged − Remove the curtain air bag module RH. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the curtain air bag module RH. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners. 6. If damaged − REPLACE the curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Side air bag module LH If the side air bag LH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged − REPLACE the front seatback assembly LH. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Side air bag module RH If the side air bag RH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged − REPLACE the front seatback assembly RH. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Satellite sensor (LH or RH) If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Remove the satellite sensor (LH or RH) on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the satellite sensor (LH or RH). 3. Install the satellite sensor (LH or RH) to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners. 5. If damaged − REPLACE the satellite sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners. Diagnosis sensor unit If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 4. If damaged − REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Revision: 2011 September SR-8 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > Part Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, retractor, lap outer) Seat (with side air bag) Center inner pillar Inspection If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. 6. If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 7. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 8. If damaged − REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. If the front LH or front RH side air bag modules have NOT deployed: 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. Harness, connectors and terminals Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged − REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. 1. 2. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.). If damaged − REPAIR the center inner pillar. 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the interior trim on the collision side. If damaged − REPLACE the damaged trim parts. Trim/headlining 2. Door-mounted curtain air bag module LH If the door-mounted curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the collision side. 2. If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher LH with new fasteners. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module LH. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher. CAUTION: When removing door-mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse door finisher. 6. If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. A B C D E F G SR I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-9 2012 QUEST COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < BASIC INSPECTION > Part Inspection Door-mounted curtain air bag module RH If the door-mounted curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the collision side. 2. If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher RH with new fasteners. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module RH. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher. CAUTION: When removing door-mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse door finisher. 6. If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Pop-up roll bar If the pop-up roll bar has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the pop-up roll bar. 2. If damaged − REPLACE the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners. 3. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners. 5. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the seatback support brace assembly. 6. If damaged − REPAIR the seatback support brace assembly. CAUTION: Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems. Revision: 2011 September SR-10 2012 QUEST DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494904 B C D E F G SR I J JMHIA2034GB 1. Steering column upper cover 2. Combination switch 3. Steering angle sensor 4. Spiral cable 5. Side lid LH 6. TORX bolt 7. Driver air bag module 8. Steering wheel 9. Side lid RH 10. Steering column lower cover K L 11. Steering column assembly M : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) N : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494905 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. REMOVAL 1. Remove side lid (LH and RH). Revision: 2011 September SR-11 2012 QUEST O P DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Insert flat-bladed screwdriver between side lid and steering wheel to disengage pawls as shown in the figure. : Pawl JMHIA1692ZZ 2. 3. 4. Remove TORX bolts (LH and RH) from the steering wheel lower side using TORX bit. Pull out driver air bag module (A). Disconnect driver air bag harness connectors (B). JMHIA2039ZZ CAUTION: • For installing/removing the driver air bag module harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock and remove the connector. • Install the connector with lock raised, and push lock into the connector. • After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushed securely into it. PHIA0953J 5. Remove driver air bag module. CAUTION: • To prevent accidental explosion, always place the driver air bag module with pad side facing upward. : Upward JMHIA0504ZZ Revision: 2011 September SR-12 2012 QUEST DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the driver air bag module. • Replace the driver air bag module if it is dropped or sustains an impact. A B C JMHIA0009ZZ D • To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the driver air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the driver air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the driver air bag module to temperatures of more than 90 °C (194 °F). • To prevent accidental explosion, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the driver air bag module. E F INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting TORX bolts after removal, replace with new TORX bolts. • Fix the driver air bag module harnesses (A) to the harness fixing hook (B). G SR I J JMHIA2035ZZ • Never damage the harness while installing. • Tighten the TORX bolts after completely adjusting the centers of fixing holes on the driver air bag module side and the steering wheel side. If the holes are misaligned, the bolt threads are damaged and the module is not installed securely. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is complete, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-13 2012 QUEST SPIRAL CABLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SPIRAL CABLE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494906 JMHIA2034GB 1. Steering column upper cover 2. Combination switch 3. Steering angle sensor 4. Spiral cable 5. Side lid LH 6. TORX bolt 7. Driver air bag module 8. Steering wheel 9. Side lid RH 10. Steering column lower cover 11. Steering column assembly : Pawl : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494907 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-11, "Removal and Installation". Remove steering column upper cover and steering column lower cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SR-14 2012 QUEST SPIRAL CABLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Disconnect the spiral cable body side harness connectors (A), (B) and steering angle sensor harness connector (C). NOTE: Disconnect the spiral cable body side harness connector (B) after removing the spiral cable body side harness connector (A). A B C JMHIA2036ZZ D 5. 6. Remove the spiral cable fixing screws. Remove the spiral cable fixing pawls with remover tool (A), then remove the spiral cable. E F G JMHIA2037ZZ SR : Pawl CAUTION: Remove pawls slowly so that they are not damaged. 7. Remove the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-121, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the spiral cable. • Replace the spiral cable if it is dropped or sustains an impact. I J K L M JMHIA0009ZZ • To prevent damage to the parts, never disassemble the spiral cable. • To prevent damage to the parts, never apply lubricant to the spiral cable. • To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the spiral cable. N O INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: P Revision: 2011 September SR-15 2012 QUEST SPIRAL CABLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position. The neutral position is set as per the following. • Carefully turn the spiral cable clockwise to the end position. Then turn it counterclockwise (about 2 and a half turns) and stop turning at the mark (B) when the stopper insertion holes are in the same position. • The service part is installed in the neutral position by the stopper and can be set without adjusting after the stopper is removed. • Never over turn the spiral cable or go beyond the number of turns required. (This causes the cable to snap) • Adjust the spiral cable locating pin (A) to the steering wheel locating pin hole (C). JMHIA2038ZZ • Fix the driver air bag module harnesses (A) to the harness fixing hook (B). JMHIA2035ZZ • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. Revision: 2011 September SR-16 2012 QUEST PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494908 B C D E F G SR I J K L JMHIA2043GB 1. Instrument panel assembly 2. Passenger air bag module 3. Steering member assembly M : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) N Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494909 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. REMOVAL 1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SR-17 2012 QUEST O P PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove passenger air bag module fixing screws (A). JMHIA2040ZZ 3. 4. Pull up air bag grid portion of instrument panel, and then disengage the passenger air bag module. Remove passenger air bag module from instrument panel. JMHIA2041ZZ CAUTION: • To prevent accidental explosion, always place the passenger air bag module with pad side facing upward. : Upward JMHIA2042ZZ • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the passenger air bag module. • Replace the passenger air bag module if it is dropped or sustains an impact. JMHIA0009ZZ • To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the passenger air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the passenger air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the passenger air bag module to temperatures of more than 90 °C (194 °F). • To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the passenger air bag module. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September SR-18 2012 QUEST PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts. • Never damage the harness while installing. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. A B C D E F G SR I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-19 2012 QUEST CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494910 JMHIA1700GB 1. Curtain air bag module : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494911 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Always work from the side of curtain air bag module. Never work in front of it. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove headlining assembly. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the curtain air bag harness connector (front and rear). CAUTION: • For installing/removing the curtain air bag harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock and remove the connector. • Install the connector with lock raised, and push lock into the connector. • After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushed securely into it. PHIA0953J Revision: 2011 September SR-20 2012 QUEST CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove the curtain air bag module. CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the curtain air bag module. • Replace the curtain air bag module if it is dropped or sustains an impact. A B C D JMHIA0009ZZ • To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the curtain air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the curtain air bag module. • To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the curtain air bag module to temperatures of more than 90 °C (194 °F). • To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the curtain air bag module. INSTALLATION E F G Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: SR • Check perforation of curtain air bag module to check that curtain air bag module is not twisted. • Never damage the harness while installing. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfuncI tioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-21 2012 QUEST CRASH ZONE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CRASH ZONE SENSOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494912 JMHIA1701GB 1. Crash zone sensor 2. Cooling fan assembly : Vehicle front : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494913 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. REMOVAL 1. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SR-22 2012 QUEST CRASH ZONE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the crash zone sensor. 3. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the crash zone sensor. A B : Vehicle front C JMHIA1702ZZ D CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the crash zone sensor. • Replace the crash zone sensor if it is dropped or sustains an impact. E F G JMHIA0009ZZ SR • Replace the crash zone sensor of deployed driver air bag, deployed passenger air bag, seat belt pretensioner and deployed lap pre-tensioner. I INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut. • Never damage the harness while installing. • Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the crash zone sensor excessively fluctuates according to the installation position. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-23 2012 QUEST SATELLITE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SATELLITE SENSOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494914 JMHIA2045GB 1. 4. Center pillar outer panel 2. Front satellite sensor 3. Front door inner panel Front door satellite sensor 5. Rear wheel house inner panel 6. Rear satellite sensor : Vehicle front : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Revision: 2011 September SR-24 2012 QUEST SATELLITE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494915 A WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. B FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR C Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolt (A), and then pull out the front door satellite sensor. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the front satellite sensor. D E : Vehicle front F G JMHIA2046ZZ CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the front door satellite sensor. • Replace the front door satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains an impact. SR I J K JMHIA0009ZZ • Replace the front door satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag module. Installation Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts. • Never damage the harness while installing. • Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the front door satellite sensor excessively fluctuates according to the installation position. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-24, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September M N O P Removal 1. L SR-25 2012 QUEST SATELLITE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the front satellite sensor. 3. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the front satellite sensor. : Vehicle front JMHIA1704ZZ CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the front satellite sensor. • Replace the front satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains an impact. JMHIA0009ZZ • Replace the front satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag module. Installation Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut. • Never damage the harness while installing. • Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the front satellite sensor excessively fluctuates according to the installation position. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. REAR SATELLITE SENSOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the rear satellite sensor. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove rear satellite sensor. : Vehicle front JMHIA1705ZZ CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September SR-26 2012 QUEST SATELLITE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the rear satellite sensor. • Replace the rear satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains an impact. A B C JMHIA0009ZZ D • Replace the rear satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag module. E Installation Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut. F • Never damage the harness while installing. • Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the rear satellite sensor excessively fluctuates according to the installation position. G • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. SR I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-27 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494916 JMHIA2047GB 1. Diagnosis sensor unit : Always replace after every disassembly. : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494917 WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more. • Before disconnecting the air bag sensor unit harness connector, be sure to disconnect each harness connector of the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt to prevent air bag deployment by static electricity and pre-tensioner seat belt operation. • Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. • When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, always check with the parts department for the latest parts information. Installing an incorrect air bag diagnosis sensor unit may or may not cause the air bag warning lamp to illuminate and may cause incorrect deployment of the supplemental air bags and seat belt pre-tensioners in a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Always check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) using CONSULT. Disconnect each connector of all air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts. Remove instrument lower cover (LH and RH) and the instrument lower center cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SR-28 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove disc eject switch (model with navigation system). Refer to AV-522, "Removal and Installation". 5. Remove AV control unit (model with navigation system). Refer to AV-509, "Removal and Installation". 6. Disconnect the diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors (A). 7. Remove the diagnosis sensor unit mounting bolts (B), and then remove the diagnosis sensor unit. A B : Vehicle front C D JMHIA2048ZZ E CAUTION: • To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the diagnosis sensor unit. • Replace the diagnosis sensor unit if it is dropped or sustains an impact. F G SR JMHIA0009ZZ I • Replace the diagnosis sensor unit of deployed SRS air bag and deployed SRS front seat belt pretensioner. J INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts. • Never damage the harness while installing. • If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". • After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. • After replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, confirm using CONSULT that the ECU discriminated number (identification number) of the new replacement air bag sensor unit matches the ECU discriminated number (identification number) of the replaced (old) air bag diagnosis sensor unit. NOTE: If the ECU discriminated number of the new replacement air bag diagnosis sensor unit differs from the ECU discriminated number of the replaced air bag diagnosis sensor unit, reconfirm the parts information and verify that the correct air bag diagnosis sensor unit was installed. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-29 2012 QUEST SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494918 Refer to SB-4, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494919 For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SR-30 2012 QUEST OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Exploded View A INFOID:0000000007494920 The occupant detection system control unit and seat sensor are an integral part of the front passenger seat frame & adjuster assembly. • Manual seat: Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View". • Power seat: Refer to SE-81, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation B C INFOID:0000000007494921 The occupant detection system control unit and seat sensor are an integral part of the front passenger seat frame & adjuster assembly and are replaced as an assembly. • Manual seat: SE-70, "Removal and Installation". • Power seat: SE-84, "Removal and Installation". D E F G SR I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SR-31 2012 QUEST RESTRAINTS SECTION SRC SRS AIRBAG CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 6 Service ...................................................................... 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 8 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 8 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ........................................................33 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description .................................33 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ......33 ZERO POINT RESET .................................................33 ZERO POINT RESET : Description .........................33 ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement .........................................................................33 Component Parts Location ........................................ 8 SYSTEM .............................................................11 B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 35 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) .....................15 DTC Logic ................................................................35 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................35 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM) ..................................................21 CONSULT Function ................................................ 21 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 22 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................22 DTC Index .............................................................. 22 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 27 SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM .....................................27 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 27 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 30 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........30 Work Flow ............................................................... 30 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................33 Revision: 2011 September G SRC I DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 35 System Description ................................................. 11 Schematic ............................................................... 14 Description .............................................................. 15 On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 15 CONSULT Function ................................................ 19 F B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 36 DTC Logic ................................................................36 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36 B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 37 DTC Logic ................................................................37 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................37 J K L M N B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U ... 38 DTC Logic ................................................................38 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38 B1018 OCCUPANT SENS ................................ 40 DTC Logic ................................................................40 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................40 B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U ......................... 42 DTC Logic ................................................................42 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................42 SRC-1 2012 QUEST O P B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT ........................ 44 DTC Logic ............................................................... 44 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44 B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR ............... 46 DTC Logic ............................................................... 46 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46 B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 48 B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 68 DTC Logic ............................................................... 68 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68 B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 70 DTC Logic ............................................................... 70 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70 DTC Logic ............................................................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48 B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 72 B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........... 49 DTC Logic ............................................................... 72 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72 DTC Logic ............................................................... 49 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49 B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................ 51 DTC Logic ............................................................... 51 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51 B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................ 53 DTC Logic ............................................................... 53 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR .................................................................... 54 DTC Logic ............................................................... 54 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54 B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 56 DTC Logic ............................................................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56 B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 57 DTC Logic ............................................................... 57 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57 B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 59 DTC Logic ............................................................... 59 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59 B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 61 DTC Logic ............................................................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61 B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 63 DTC Logic ............................................................... 63 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 63 B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 74 DTC Logic ............................................................... 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74 B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 75 DTC Logic ............................................................... 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75 B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 77 DTC Logic ............................................................... 77 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77 B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 79 DTC Logic ............................................................... 79 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79 B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 81 DTC Logic ............................................................... 81 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81 B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 83 DTC Logic ............................................................... 83 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 83 B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 85 DTC Logic ............................................................... 85 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85 B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 87 DTC Logic ............................................................... 87 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87 B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 89 DTC Logic ............................................................... 89 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89 B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 65 B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 91 DTC Logic ............................................................... 65 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 65 DTC Logic ............................................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91 B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 66 B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 93 DTC Logic ............................................................... 66 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 DTC Logic ............................................................... 93 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93 Revision: 2011 September SRC-2 2012 QUEST B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................94 DTC Logic ............................................................... 94 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94 B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH .............. 120 DTC Logic .............................................................. 120 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120 B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ..........95 B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 122 DTC Logic ............................................................... 95 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 95 DTC Logic .............................................................. 122 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122 B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ......................97 B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............... 123 DTC Logic ............................................................... 97 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97 DTC Logic .............................................................. 123 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123 B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ......................99 B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 124 DTC Logic ............................................................... 99 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 99 DTC Logic .............................................................. 124 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124 B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ........ 100 B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 126 DTC Logic ............................................................. 100 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100 DTC Logic .............................................................. 126 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126 B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 102 B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 128 DTC Logic ............................................................. 102 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102 DTC Logic .............................................................. 128 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128 B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 104 B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 130 DTC Logic ............................................................. 104 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104 DTC Logic .............................................................. 130 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 130 B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 105 B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 132 A B C DTC Logic ............................................................. 105 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105 B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 106 DTC Logic ............................................................. 106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106 B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 108 DTC Logic ............................................................. 108 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108 B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 110 DTC Logic ............................................................. 110 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110 D E F G SRC I DTC Logic .............................................................. 132 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 134 J DTC Logic .............................................................. 134 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134 B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 136 DTC Logic .............................................................. 136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 136 K L B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 138 DTC Logic .............................................................. 138 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138 M B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 112 B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 140 DTC Logic ............................................................. 112 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112 DTC Logic .............................................................. 140 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140 N B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 114 B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 141 O DTC Logic ............................................................. 114 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114 B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 116 DTC Logic .............................................................. 141 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 141 DTC Logic ............................................................. 116 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116 B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 142 B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 118 DTC Logic .............................................................. 142 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 DTC Logic ............................................................. 118 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118 B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 143 DTC Logic .............................................................. 143 Revision: 2011 September SRC-3 2012 QUEST P Diagnosis Procedure .............................................143 B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 145 DTC Logic ............................................................. 167 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 DTC Logic ..............................................................145 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................145 B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 168 B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 147 DTC Logic ............................................................. 168 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 DTC Logic ..............................................................147 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................147 B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 149 DTC Logic ..............................................................149 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................149 B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 151 DTC Logic ..............................................................151 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................151 B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 153 DTC Logic ..............................................................153 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................153 B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 155 DTC Logic ..............................................................155 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................155 B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 157 DTC Logic ..............................................................157 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................157 B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 159 DTC Logic ..............................................................159 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................159 B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION . 160 Description .............................................................160 DTC Logic ..............................................................160 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................160 B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION ........... 161 Description .............................................................161 DTC Logic ..............................................................161 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................161 B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH .................................................................... 162 DTC Logic ..............................................................162 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................162 B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................................................................... 164 DTC Logic ..............................................................164 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................164 B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .................................................. 169 DTC Logic ............................................................. 169 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169 B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .................................................. 170 DTC Logic ............................................................. 170 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170 B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH ............................ 171 DTC Logic ............................................................. 171 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171 B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH ............................................................. 173 DTC Logic ............................................................. 173 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173 B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH ............................ 175 DTC Logic ............................................................. 175 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 175 B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH ............................. 176 DTC Logic ............................................................. 176 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176 B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH ............................................................. 178 DTC Logic ............................................................. 178 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 178 B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH ............................. 180 DTC Logic ............................................................. 180 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180 B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ........ 181 DTC Logic ............................................................. 181 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 181 B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ..................................................... 183 DTC Logic ............................................................. 183 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183 B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ..................... 185 B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 166 DTC Logic ............................................................. 185 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185 DTC Logic ..............................................................166 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................166 B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ........ 186 B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 167 Revision: 2011 September DTC Logic ............................................................. 186 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186 SRC-4 2012 QUEST B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................................................... 188 DTC Logic .............................................................. 192 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 192 DTC Logic ............................................................. 188 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 193 B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 190 SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF ....................................................... 193 DTC Logic ............................................................. 190 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190 B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR .............. 191 DTC Logic ............................................................. 191 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 191 B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ................................................. 192 A B Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 193 SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON ........................................................ 194 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 194 C D SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS ..... 195 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195 E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-5 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007492778 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Service INFOID:0000000007492779 • Never use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. • Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes or more. For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pretensioner to deploy. Therefore, never work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. • Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required. • The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Never turn steering wheel and column after removal of steering gear. • Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down. • Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components. • After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. • Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment. • Never solder the harness when making repairs. Check that harness is not pinched and that there is no contact with other components. • Never allow harness to come in contact with oil, grease, waste oil, or water. • Never insert foreign materials, such as a screwdriver, into the harness connector. (This is to prevent accidental activation caused by static electricity.) • Always use CONSULT or SRS air bag warning lamp to perform the circuit diagnosis. (Never use an electric tester such as a circuit tester.) Revision: 2011 September SRC-6 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > • Never enter in the deployment area of the pop-up roll bar. Never put an object in the deployment area of the pop-up roll bar. (This is to prevent injury in case of an unintentional deployment.) • When handling a pop-up roll bar, always grip the frame and handle carefully. • Never reuse a pop-up roll bar that has previously deployed. • Modification of the pop-up roll bar may cause unintentional deployment or a malfunction. Never disassemble or modify the pop-up roll bar. • Never allow the pop-up roll bar to be impacted (by dropping or otherwise). Always replace the pop-up roll bar if impacted. • When repairing the surrounding area of the pop-up roll bar, be careful not to apply excessive heat when welding or otherwise. Remove the pop-up roll bar in advance, if necessary. Be careful when modifying the mounting area or installing other parts because an incorrect procedure may cause damage or a malfunction. • Never disassemble the pop-up roll bar. • Never expose the pop-up roll bar to temperatures exceeding 90 °C (194 °F). • Never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the pop-up roll bar. A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-7 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492780 JMHIA2044ZZ A. Backside of radiator B. View with instrument lower cover center removed D. Behind center pillar lower garnish E. View with luggage side finisher lower F. removed G. View with headlining assembly removed H. Backside of passenger seat cushion frame Revision: 2011 September SRC-8 C. View with front door finisher removed Front seat LH 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component Function A 1. Driver air bag module • Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag. • In case of frontal collision where acceleration is more than the specified level, the ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag. 2. Combination switch (spiral cable) Supplies power supply to driver air bag module on steering wheel. 3. Combination meter (air bag warning lamp) Indicates air bag malfunctioning and deployment by blinking and illuminating air bag warning lamp. 4. Passenger air bag OFF indicator Indicates whether or not passenger air bag is in the activation mode based on the judgement of occupant detection system. D 5. Passenger air bag module • Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag. • In case of frontal collision where acceleration is more than the specified level, the ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag. E 6. BCM Receive the collision detection signal when air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects collision. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Crash zone sensor • Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a frontal collision occurs. • Crash zone sensor is a G sensor that outputs voltage signal during deceleration at the time of a vehicle frontal collision that is more than the specified limit is detected. 7. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit • Detects a collision and supplies power supply for deployment to air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt. • It contains the “G” sensors for both frontal and side collisions and spare battery function in case of main battery damage in collision. Front door satellite sensor LH • Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs. • When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, pressure sensor and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of both the side air bag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner. Seat belt pre-tensioner LH • Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys seat belt pretensioner. • In the case of a frontal collision or side collision or roll over that exceeds specified impact level, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects the deceleration caused by collision. It restrains the passenger with seat belt easing the stress on passengers chest with load limiter. Front satellite sensor LH • Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs. • When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of both the side air bag and curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner. 12. Rear satellite sensor LH • Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs. • When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of both the side air bag and curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner. 13. Seat belt buckle switch LH Controls deployment timing depending on the seat belt condition that is fastened or unfastened. Side air bag module LH • Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag. • In case of side collision where acceleration is more than the specified level, the ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag. 8. 9. 10. 11. 14. Revision: 2011 September SRC-9 2012 QUEST B C F G SRC I J K L M N O P COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component Function Rear curtain air bag module • Deploys according to collision judgment of G sensor, and safing sensor. • Receives collision signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, ignites, and burns ignition material by electric ignition system, when side collision exceeds setting limit of the vehicle. Gas is generated by chemical reaction of ignition material, passes filter, and deploys air bag. • Air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator that deploys air bag. 16. Front curtain air bag module • Deploys according to collision judgment of G sensor, and safing sensor. • Receives collision signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, ignites, and burns ignition material by electric ignition system, when side collision exceeds setting limit of the vehicle. Gas is generated by chemical reaction of ignition material, passes filter, and deploys air bag. • Air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator that deploys air bag. 17. Occupant detection system control unit Transmits the passenger seat status (occupied or empty) to air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 18. Occupant detection system sensor Transmits the passenger seat status (occupied or empty) to occupant detection system control unit.Itis installed in the passenger seat cushion frame. 15. Revision: 2011 September SRC-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A System Description INFOID:0000000007492781 SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P JMHIA2032GB DESCRIPTION Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) activates air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner when it detects a frontal collision or a side collision that is more than the specified limit. Revision: 2011 September SRC-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Together with other safety devices, it reduces the impact that occupant receives when vehicle collision occurs. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit supplies power supply to air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt when deceleration that is more than the specified limit is detected by G sensor in air bag diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensor, or front door satellite sensor. Air bag module is composed of electric igniter (squib), filter, pyrotechnic material, and gas generating material. When air bag module receives a signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, air bag module ignites pyrotechnic material using electric igniter (squib) so that gas generating material generates high temperature nitrogen gas. The gas through filter activates air bag. At the same time, pre-tensioner seat belt receives power supply from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, gas generator is activated, and then gas is generated. Balls in pipe are moved according to generated gas pressure and strike pinion gear on ELR shaft. ELR shaft rotates and retracts seat belt. AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT FUNCTIONS Air bag diagnosis sensor unit has the following functions. • Detects a collision and supplies the energy for deploying air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner. • Detects and records electrical malfunction in air bag system and seat belt pre-tensioner system, and blinking air bag warning lamp. • Detects and records the deployment of air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner, and turns ON air bag warning lamp. • Indicates malfunctioning portion via the number of blinks from the air bag warning lamp in the diagnosis mode. • Indicates the malfunction record via CONSULT. • Suppresses the deployment of passenger air bag when passenger seat is empty or occupied by child or child-seat. • When passenger seat is occupied by child or child seat, turns ON passenger air bag OFF indicator. • When judges that passenger seat is occupied by a adult or a child and passenger seat belt is not fasten, turns ON seat belt warning lamp. Further information for the seat belt warning system. • When collision is detected, collision signal is transmitted to BCM (collision detection function). COLLISION MODES The operation of SRS is different depending on the collision modes applications. SRS configurations that are activated for the following collision modes. ×: Apply —: Not apply SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision Driver air bag module × — — Passenger air bag module × — — Seat belt pre-tensioner LH × × — Seat belt pre-tensioner RH × — × Side air bag module LH — × — Side air bag module RH — — × Front curtain air bag module LH — × — Front curtain air bag module RH — — × Rear curtain air bag module LH — × — Rear curtain air bag module RH — — × OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM This Occupant Detection System has the following functions. 1. Suppress the deployment of front passenger air bag when front passenger seat is empty, or when occupied by child and child-seat. Turns ON front passenger air bag OFF indicator when front passenger seat is occupied by child-seat and child. 2. Indicates malfunction portion with blinking times of air bag warning lamp in diagnosis mode. 3. Indicates the malfunctioning record by CONSULT. 4. When “zero point reset” for occupant detection system is incomplete, CONSULT indicates that “zero point reset” is incomplete. This function is applied to NISSAN genuine parts only. NOTE: Revision: 2011 September SRC-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • Operation of air bag diagnosis sensor unit when air bag diagnosis sensor unit receives information from Occupant Detection System. • Even if zero point reset is “complete”, always perform zero point reset after the removal and installation of seat or the removal of control unit harness connector. Status (front passenger seat) Passenger air bag Front passenger air bag OFF indicator Air bag warning lamp Seat belt warning lamp (when front passenger seat is unbuckled) Empty Suppress OFF OFF OFF An object Suppress ON OFF OFF Child/ child-seat Suppress ON OFF ON Adult Enable to deploy OFF OFF ON Malfunction Suppress ON Blinking OFF Zero point reset Not yet performed (NISSAN genuine parts only) A B C D E Suppress ON Blinking OFF F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-13 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Schematic INFOID:0000000007492782 JMHIA2033GB Revision: 2011 September SRC-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) A Description INFOID:0000000007492783 CAUTION: • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. • Never repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a new one. • Keep ground portion clean. B C DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION D • The SRS self-diagnostic results can be read with air bag warning lamp and/or CONSULT. • The user mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the air bag warning lamp. • The diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part. • The mode applications for the air bag warning lamp and CONSULT are as per the following items. E ×: Application, —: Not application Diagnosis tool User mode Diagnosis mode Air bag warning lamp × × CONSULT – × On Board Diagnosis Function F G INFOID:0000000007492784 SRC ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS There are two self diagnosis functions with air bag warning lamp per the following items. • USER MODE • DIAGNOSIS MODE I METHOD OF STARTING • Diagnosis mode changes from user mode to diagnosis mode when changing operation is performed. • In user mode, when SRS air bag warning lamp is not blinking, changing to diagnosis mode by ignition switch operation is not possible. • In diagnosis mode, when repair is complete and system is normal, the mode changes to user mode when ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON. Procedure to Change Diagnosis Mode 1. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. SRS air bag lamp turns ON for 7 second and turns OFF, then turn ignition switch OFF within 1second after the lamp turns OFF. 3. After turning ignition switch OFF, wait for 3 seconds or more. 4. Repeat operation 1 to 3 for 2 times so that operation 1 to 3 is repeated for 3times in total. 5. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON. Diagnosis mode changes. J K L M USER MODE In USER MODE, air bag warning lamp on combination meter blinks when a malfunction is detected and warns the customer (driver). How to Read Air Bag Warning Lamp 1. 2. O Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks. Compare the air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the examples. Air Bag Warning Lamp Examples Revision: 2011 September N P SRC-15 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Air bag warning lamp operation (user mode) SRS condition • No malfunction is detected • No further action is necessary Reference item — SHIA0011E • The system is malfunctioning • Self diagnostic result is not erased after repair Erase “Self Diagnostic Result” Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function", How to Erase Self-diagnostic Result Battery voltage is low (less than 9 V) or high battery voltage (more than 16V) Check “CAUSE OF WARNING” in “Special Function” with CONSULT Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function" Occupant detection function is disabled Refer to SRC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure" Zero point reset is incomplete Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement" Intermittent malfunction is detected in the past Go to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident" • Air bag is deployed • Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed Go to SRC-160, "Diagnosis Procedure" or SRC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure" • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning • Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning • Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning Go to SRC-193, "Diagnosis Procedure" • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning • Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning Go to SRC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure" SHIA0012E SHIA0013E SHIA0014E DIAGNOSIS MODE The diagnosis mode can only be switched when a malfunction is detected in the user mode. Malfunctioning system is indicated according to blinking pattern of air bag warning lamp. How to Read Air Bag Warning Lamp 1. Follow the procedures of “PROCEDURE TO CHANGE DIAGNOSIS MODE”, and switch to the diagnosis mode. Revision: 2011 September SRC-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the blinking pattern of air bag warning lamp. There are 2 blinking patterns for the air bag warning lamp as per the following items. • Front air bag system: 3 second blink followed by a 0.5 second blink repeated. • Side air bag system: Two 1.5 second blinks followed by a 0.5 second blink repeated. A Front air bag system B Number of 0.5 second blinks Malfunctioning items 0 • Self-diagnostic result is not erased after repair • Intermittent malfunction is detected in the past 1 Seat belt pre-tensioner RH 2 Driver air bag module 3 Seat belt pre-tensioner LH 5 Occupant detction system control unit 6 Crash zone sensor 7 Air bag diagnosis sensor unit 8 Passenger air bag module 11 Passenger air bag OFF indicator 17 Air bag diagnosis sensor unit C D E F Side air bag system Number of 0.5-second blinks G Malfunctioning items 1 Side air bag module RH 2 Side air bag module LH 3 Front satellite sensor RH 4 Front satellite sensor LH 5 Rear curtain air bag module RH 6 Rear curtain air bag module LH 7 Front curtain air bag module RH 8 Front curtain air bag module LH 9 Front door satellite sensor RH 10 Front door satellite sensor LH 11 Rear satellite sensor RH 12 Rear satellite sensor LH 20 Front door satellite sensor LH/RH SRC I J K L How to Erase Self-diagnostic Result After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for one second or more, then turn ignition switch ON. The diagnosis mode returns to the user mode. At that time the self-diagnostic result is cleared. M EXAMPLE OF AIR BAG WARNING LAMP OPERATION IN THE DIAGNOSIS MODE N System Normal When system is normal. O P JMHIA0945GB Single System Malfunction • Front air bag system Revision: 2011 September SRC-17 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > When air bag diagnosis sensor unit system (Item display 1) is malfunctioning. JMHIA1822GB • Side air bag system When rear curtain air bag module LH system (Item display 1) is malfunctioning. JMHIA1823GB Multiple Systems Malfunction • Front air bag system When driver air bag module (Item display 1) and air bag diagnosis sensor unit system (Item display 2) are malfunctioning. JMHIA1824GB • Side air bag system When front satellite sensor LH (Item display1) and rear curtain air bag module LH system (Item display 2) are malfunctioning. JMHIA1825GB • Front air bag system and side air bag system Revision: 2011 September SRC-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > When driver air bag module (Item display 1) and front satellite sensor RH (Item display2) are malfunctioning. A B C JMHIA0950GB D CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000007492785 APPLICATION ITEM E CONSULT performs the following functions. Diagnosis mode Description Ecu Identification Air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) is displayed. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit has individual ECU discriminated number (identification number) based on model and equipment. Self Diagnostic Result The current self diagnosis results (also indicated with the number of air bag warning lamp blinks in the diagnosis mode) are displayed on CONSULT screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs. Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index". Function Test CAR COMPUTER DIAG. Test result is indicated using “OK” or “NG” so that the customer recognizes easily. SELF-DIAG [PAST] Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on CONSULT screen. The stored results are not erased until memory erasing is executed. TROUBLE DIAG RECORD With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on CONSULT screen. SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN] This item is displayed, but cannot be supported. CAUSE OF WARNING It displays the cause of warning lamp illumination that is not recorded in memory. Special function F G SRC I J K HOW TO ERASE SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS • “Self Diagnostic Result” A current self-diagnostic result is displayed on CONSULT screen in real time. After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “Self Diagnostic Result”. • “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Return to “Self Diagnostic Result” CONSULT screen by touching the “BACK” key of CONSULT and select “Self Diagnostic Result” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “Erase” in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode. NOTE: If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the user mode shows the system malfunction by the illumination of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. • “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased. • “SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN]” Self-diagnosis result other than “SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN]” is erased when touching “Erase”. L M N O SPECIAL FUNCTION CAUSE OF WARNING (AIR BAG) The SRS air bag warning lamp blinks when the ignition voltage is a voltage value (9V or less, or 16 V or more) at which the SRS air bag cannot operate normally.After blinking, if the ignition voltage returns to normal, SRS air bag warning lamp turns OFF.DTC memory is not performed while the abnormal ignition voltage is detected.The mode cannot be switched to trouble diagnosis mode when the ignition switch is operated.“No DTC” is displayed when checking “Self-diagnosis result” using CONSULT. NOTE: • SRS air bag warning may blink when the condition is out of detection area* of the satellite sensor in door. Revision: 2011 September SRC-19 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > The system is normal if SRS air bag warning lamp turns OFF after the condition returns within detection area of the satellite sensor in door. • SRS air bag warning lamp blinks when the zero point reset is incomplete after replacing the occupant detection system control unit.(SRS air bag warning lamp turns OFF after the zero point reset is complete.) • *: Pressure inside of door is excessively low and air bag system cannot be operated normally (example: altitude is approximately 4,000 m or more). Display item IGN VOLT COND Display content Actions by worker The ignition voltage recognized by air bag system (air bag control unit) is displayed or a message stating that condition is out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is displayed. • OK: Normal • LOW: The ignition voltage is low, high, or out of detection range of satellite sensor in door IGN VOLT TIME Total number of times is displayed, summing up the number of times ignition voltage error is detected and the number of times that out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is detected. (Detection record is erased and counter returns to “0” by “ERASE MEMORY” in “Self-diagnosis results” using CONSULT.) LOW V RECORED Number of times ignition switch ON is displayed after ignition voltage error or out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is detected. (Detection record is erased and counter returns to “0” by “ERASE MEMORY” in “Self-diagnosis results” using CONSULT.) Perform the check at an altitude of 4,000 m or less. • Check battery voltage if the ignition voltage status is displayed as “LOW”. • Check battery voltage if the ignition voltage status is“OK” and the number of times detected is 1 or more. This is because an ignition voltage error may be detected in the past. NOTE: If battery voltage is normal, the cause may be that out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is detected. CAUSE OF WARNING (OCCUPANT DETSCTION SYSTEM) Detection status and detection record is displayed when air bag warning lamp blinks due to occupant detection function stop. Change to trouble diagnosis mode by ignition switch is not possible while warning lamp is blinking due to occupant detection function stop. “NO DTC” is displayed even if the malfunctioning parts are checked by CONSULT. Display item Display content FUNCTION STATUS • “ON” or “STOP” is displayed according to occupant detection status that is recognized by occupant detection system control unit. • “STOP” is displayed when occupant detection function is stopped, if not, “ON” is displayed. STOP DETECTION Displays number of times occupant detection function stop which is detected by occupant detection system control unit is displayed. DETECTION RECORD Displays number of times of IGN ON since first detection of occupant detection function stop is displayed. Revision: 2011 September SRC-20 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM) CONSULT Function A INFOID:0000000007492786 ZERO POINT RESET DESCRIPTION B This vehicle adopts occupant detection system with a weight detecting method. When replacing, or removing and installing passenger seat, always perform “zero point rest” so that the vehicle recognizes zero point. If zero point reset is incomplete, occupant detection seat sensor does not operate normally. C WORK SUPPORT D Monitor item Description Zero point reset function Perform zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement". E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-21 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Index DTC — INFOID:0000000007492787 Diagnostic item NO DTC IS DETECTED. When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in the user mode Explanation Reference page Low battery voltage (Less than 9 V) or High battery voltage (more than 16 V) SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". Occupant detection function is disabled SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". Zero point reset is incomplete SRC-21, "CONSULT Function" Self-diagnostic result is not erased after repair SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function", SRC19, "CONSULT Function". Intermittent malfunction is detected in the past GI-42, "Intermittent Incident" No malfunction is detected — B1001-B1005 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-35, "DTC Logic". B1006-B1010 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-36, "DTC Logic". B1011-B1015 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-37, "DTC Logic". B1017 B1020 B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit SRC-38, "DTC Logic" B1018 OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system sensor SRC-40, "DTC Logic" B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit, circuit of occupant detection system control unit, or air bag diagnosis sensor unit SRC-42, "DTC Logic" B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [UNIT FAIL] Passenger air bag OFF indicator circuit is open or shorted to ground or the circuits are shorted each other SRC-44, "DTC Logic" B1025 B1032 B1048 OCS SENSOR Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit, circuit of occupant detection system control unit, or air bag diagnosis sensor unit SRC-46, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-48, "DTC Logic". B1033 B1034 CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning SRC-49, "DTC Logic". B1035 CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning SRC-51, "DTC Logic". B1036 CRASH ZONE SEN [UNMATCH] Crash zone sensor is out of the specified specification SRC-53, "DTC Logic". B1037 B1039 B1041 CRASH ZONE SENS1 Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning SRC-54, "DTC Logic". CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-56, "DTC Logic". DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable) SRC-57, "DTC Logic". B1026-B1031 B1042-B1047 B1049 B1054 Revision: 2011 September SRC-22 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > DTC Diagnostic item Explanation Reference page B1050 B1055 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply circuit (including the spiral cable) SRC-59, "DTC Logic". B1051 B1056 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable) SRC-61, "DTC Logic". B1052 B1057 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other (including spiral cable) SRC-63, "DTC Logic". CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-65, "DTC Logic". B1065 B1070 ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] Passenger air bag module circuit is open SRC-66, "DTC Logic". B1066 B1071 ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-68, "DTC Logic". B1067 B1072 ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground SRC-70, "DTC Logic". B1068 B1073 ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] Passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other SRC-72, "DTC Logic". CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-74, "DTC Logic". B1080 B1096 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other (including spiral cable) SRC-75, "DTC Logic". B1081 PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is open SRC-77, "DTC Logic". B1082 PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-79, "DTC Logic". B1083 PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-81, "DTC Logic". B1084 PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-83, "DTC Logic". B1086 PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is open SRC-85, "DTC Logic". B1087 PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-87, "DTC Logic". B1088 PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-89, "DTC Logic". B1089 PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-91, "DTC Logic". B1090-B1095 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-93, "DTC Logic". B1106-B1111 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-94, "DTC Logic". B1113 B1114 SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-95, "DTC Logic". B1115 SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-97, "DTC Logic". B1116 SATELLITE SENS RH [UNMATCH] Front satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification SRC-99, "DTC Logic". B1118 B1119 SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-100, "DTC Logic". B1120 SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-102, "DTC Logic". B1121 SATELLITE SENS LH [UNMATCH] Front satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification SRC-104, "DTC Logic". B1058-B1063 B1074-B1079 Revision: 2011 September SRC-23 2012 QUEST A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > DTC Diagnostic item Explanation Reference page CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-105, "DTC Logic". B1129 SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] Side air bag module RH circuit is open SRC-106, "DTC Logic". B1130 SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-108, "DTC Logic". B1131 SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-110, "DTC Logic". B1132 SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] Side air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-112, "DTC Logic". B1134 SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] Side air bag module LH circuit is open SRC-114, "DTC Logic". B1135 SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-116, "DTC Logic". B1136 SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-118, "DTC Logic". B1137 SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] Side air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-120, "DTC Logic". CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-122, "DTC Logic" B1144 CONTROL UNIT [MISS INSTALLATION] Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification SRC-123, "DTC Logic". B1145 CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is open SRC-124, "DTC Logic". B1146 CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-126, "DTC Logic". B1147 CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-128, "DTC Logic". B1148 CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-130, "DTC Logic". B1150 CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is open SRC-132, "DTC Logic". B1151 CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-134, "DTC Logic". B1152 CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-136, "DTC Logic". B1153 CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-138, "DTC Logic". B1154-B1159 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-140, "DTC Logic". B1170-B1175 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-141, "DTC Logic". B1186-B1191 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-142, "DTC Logic". B1193 CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is open SRC-143, "DTC Logic" B1194 CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-145, "DTC Logic" B1195 CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-147, "DTC Logic" B1196 CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] Front curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-149, "DTC Logic" B1122-B1127 B1138-B1143 Revision: 2011 September SRC-24 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > DTC Diagnostic item Explanation Reference page B1198 CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is open SRC-151, "DTC Logic" B1199 CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit SRC-153, "DTC Logic" B1200 CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground SRC-155, "DTC Logic" B1201 CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] Front curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other SRC-157, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-159, "DTC Logic". B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION Seat belt pre-tensioner, driver air bag and passenger air bag are deployed SRC-160, "Description". B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION Side air bag, curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner are deployed SRC-161, "DTC Logic". B1212-B1214 RH1 SAT-SENS Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-162, "DTC Logic". B1215-B1217 LH1 SAT-SENS Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-164, "DTC Logic". B1218-B1223 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-166, "DTC Logic". B1234-B1239 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-167, "DTC Logic" B1202-B1207 A B C D E F G SRC B1250-B1255 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-168, "DTC Logic" B1266-B1269 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-169, "DTC Logic" B1282-B1285 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-170, "DTC Logic" B1304 SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT MALF] Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-171, "DTC Logic" B1306 B1308 B1309 B1310 SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM MALF] Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-173, "DTC Logic" B1307 SATELLITE SENS RH [UNMATCH] Rear satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification SRC-175, "DTC Logic" B1311 SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT MALF] Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-176, "DTC Logic" M B1313 B1315 B1316 B1317 SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM MALF] Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-178, "DTC Logic" N B1314 SATELLITE SENS LH [UNMATCH] Rear satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification SRC-180, "DTC Logic" B1336 B1337 FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [SENSOR MALFUNCTION] Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-181, "DTC Logic" B1338 B1340 B1341 B1342 FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [COMM MALFUNCTION] Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning SRC-183, "DTC Logic" B1339 FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [MIS-INSTALLATION] Front door satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification SRC-185, "DTC Logic" B1343 B1344 FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [SENSOR MALFUNCTION] Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-186, "DTC Logic" I J K Revision: 2011 September SRC-25 2012 QUEST L O P DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > DTC Diagnostic item Explanation Reference page B1345 B1347 B1348 B1349 FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [COMM MALFUNCTION] Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning SRC-188, "DTC Logic" B1346 FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [MIS-INSTALLATION] Front door satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification SRC-190, "DTC Logic" B1350 B1351 FR DOOR SATEL SENS Front door satellite sensor is malfunctioning SRC-191, "DTC Logic" CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning SRC-192, "DTC Logic" B1378-B1381 Revision: 2011 September SRC-26 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492788 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if not C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P JCHWA0606GB Revision: 2011 September SRC-27 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > JCHWA0607GB Revision: 2011 September SRC-28 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O JCHWA0608GB P Revision: 2011 September SRC-29 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492789 OVERALL SEQUENCE JMHIA1324GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September SRC-30 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 1.INTERVIEW THE CUSTOMER FOR THE SYMPTOM A Interview the customer for the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurs). B >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SYMPTOM C Check the symptom from the customer information. >> GO TO 3. D 3.CHECK WARNING LAMP OPERATION Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". Are any malfunction detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. E 4.CHECK LOW VOLTAGE F Check low voltage with CONSULT (Special function). Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function". Are any malfunction detected? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". G 5.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS SRC Check self diagnostic result with CONSULT or diagnosis mode. If it is impossible to switch to diagnosis mode, follow the same procedure that DTC is not detected. NOTE: Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected. • Record DTC (Print them out with CONSULT.) • Erase self diagnostic result. • Study the relationship between the malfunction that DTC or air bag warning lamp indicates and the symptom that the customer describes. • Check related service bulletins for information. Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 7. 6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I J K L Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the DTC. M >> GO TO 8. 7.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS ACCORDING TO WARNING LAMP OPERATION 1. 2. N Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". Perform Diagnosis Procedure for the air bag warning lamp operation. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" (USER MODE). >> GO TO 9. P 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the DTC. >> GO TO 9. 9.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTION PART Revision: 2011 September SRC-31 O 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. >> GO TO 10. 10.FINAL CHECK Check self diagnostic result and air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode. Is the malfunction repaired? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: 2011 September SRC-32 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description INFOID:0000000007492790 When replacing or removing and installing passenger seat, always perform zero point reset so that Occupant Detection System is activated normally. B C ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000007492791 D WORK PROCEDURE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 1.PERFORM ZERO POINT RESET E Perform zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement". >> END F ZERO POINT RESET ZERO POINT RESET : Description INFOID:0000000007492792 G Zero point reset is an initializing procedure for occupant detection sensor that must be performed when replacing or removing and installing passenger seat. If zero point reset is not performed, the initialization is incomplete and Occupant Detection System does not SRC operate normally. NOTE: • When replacing passenger seat with a NISSAN genuine part, air bag warning lamp blinks if zero point reset I is incomplete. • When zero point reset is performed once after removal and installation of passenger seat, CONSULT displays “complete” and air bag warning does not blink. • When reinstalling passenger seat after removal, the initial value for occupant detection sensor changes, and J Occupant Detection System does not operate normally. • Always perform zero point reset after performing the work as per the following. - Reinstallation of passenger seat K - Replacement of passenger seat with a seat that is zero point reset complete. ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000007492793 L 1.PERFORM ZERO POINT RESET 1. 2. 3. Perform zero point reset. NOTE: When performing zero point reset, be careful of the items described as per the following. • Perform zero point reset after installing passenger seat to the vehicle • Do not put any objects on passenger seat • Do not apply excessive vibration to the vehicle • Do not touch the vehicle • Do not tilt the vehicle Select start on “Zero point reset function” screen from, WORK SUPPORT of CONSULT “OCCUPANT DETECTION”. “Zero point reset” starts. M N O P >> GO TO 2. 2.CONFIRMATION OF SETTING 1. Proceed to “Zero point reset function” screen from work support of CONSULT “OCCUPANT DETECTION”. 2. Check that “Complete” or “Incomplete” is displayed on “Zero point reset status”. CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September SRC-33 2012 QUEST INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT < BASIC INSPECTION > • “Complete” is displayed on “zero point reset current status” if the seat is reinstalled by seat removal and installation, or “zero point reset” is already performed. • “Zero point reset current status” displays “Incomplete” if a new seat is installed. When turning key switch ON without performing zero point reset, air bag warning lamp blinks. When zero point reset is performed, air bag warning lamp turns OFF. • Air bag warning lamp blinks in user mode only. • Air bag sensor unit does not record whether or not zero point reset is performed. Is condition “ALREADY PERFORMED”? YES >> Print out “ZERO POINT RESET CURRENT STATUS” screen, and inspection end. NO >> Check condition as per the following, and perform zero point reset again. • Passenger seat is occupied by an object. • Excessive vibration is applied while performing zero point reset. • Occupant detection system is malfunctioning. NOTE: If “Incomplete” is displayed on “zero point reset current status”, zero point reset is not completed normally. Check the condition as per the following and perform zero point reset again. • Passenger seat is occupied by an object. • Excessive vibration is applied while performing zero point reset. • Occupant detection system is malfunctioning. Revision: 2011 September SRC-34 2012 QUEST B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492794 B DTC DETECTION LOGIC C DTC B1001 B1002 B1003 B1004 B1005 Display contents of CONSULT DTC detecting condition Possible cause D CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-35, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492795 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS N Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT P 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-35, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-35 2012 QUEST B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492796 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1006 B1007 B1008 B1009 B1010 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Possible cause Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-36, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492797 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-36, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-36 2012 QUEST B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic A INFOID:0000000007492798 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1011 B1012 B1013 B1014 B1015 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-37, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492799 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. J K L M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-37, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September D SRC-37 P 2012 QUEST B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492800 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1017 B1020 B1021 Display contents of CONSULT OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Trouble occurs in Occupant Detection System control unit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in Occupant Detection System control unit • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492801 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the connection of harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR 1. Replace seat cushion frame. Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Revision: 2011 September SRC-38 2012 QUEST B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-39 2012 QUEST B1018 OCCUPANT SENS < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1018 OCCUPANT SENS DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492802 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1018 Display contents of CONSULT OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System sensor • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in Occupant Detection System sensor • Malfunction in Occupant Detection System control unit • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-40, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492803 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the connection of harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR 1. Replace seat cushion frame. Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-40 2012 QUEST B1018 OCCUPANT SENS < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT A 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-40, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-41 2012 QUEST B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492804 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1022 Display contents of CONSULT OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System control unit, circuit of Occupant Detection System control unit-Air bag diagnosis sensor unit or Air bag diagnosis sensor unit • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in Occupant Detection System control unit • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492805 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the connection of harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR 1. Replace seat cushion frame. Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Revision: 2011 September SRC-42 2012 QUEST B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-42, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-43 2012 QUEST B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492806 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1023 Display contents of CONSULT PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Passenger air bag OFF indicator circuit is open or shorted to ground or the circuits are shorted each other • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front passenger air bag OFF indicator • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-44, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492807 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the connection of harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.CHECK PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR 1. Replace passenger air bag OFF indicator. 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-44, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SRC-44 2012 QUEST B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-44, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-45 2012 QUEST B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492808 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1025 B1032 B1048 Display contents of CONSULT OCS SENSOR DTC detecting condition Possible cause Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System control unit, circuit of Occupant Detection System control unit-Air bag diagnosis sensor unit or Air bag diagnosis sensor unit • Disconnection of wiring harness • Internal breakdown in Occupant Detection System control unit • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-46, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492809 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the connection of harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR 1. Replace seat cushion frame. Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Revision: 2011 September SRC-46 2012 QUEST B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer toSR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-46, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-47 2012 QUEST B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492810 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1026 B1027 B1028 B1029 B1030 B1031 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-48, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492811 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-48, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-48 2012 QUEST B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492812 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1033 B1034 B Display contents of CONSULT CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in crash zone sensor • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492813 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR 1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-49, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-49, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-49 2012 QUEST B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-50 2012 QUEST B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492814 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1035 B Display contents of CONSULT CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in crash zone sensor • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-51, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492815 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR 1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-51, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-51, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-51 2012 QUEST B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-52 2012 QUEST B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492816 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1036 B Display contents of CONSULT CRASH ZONE SEN [UNMATCH] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Crash zone sensor is out of the specified specification Diagnosis sensor unit or crash zone sensor is different from the part specified C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-53, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END E 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492817 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. I J 1.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR 1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-53, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END K L 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT M 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-53, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-53 2012 QUEST B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492818 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1037 B1039 B1041 Display contents of CONSULT CRASH ZONE SENS1 DTC detecting condition Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in crash zone sensor • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-54, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492819 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR 1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-54, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-54, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-54 2012 QUEST B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-55 2012 QUEST B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492820 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1042 B1043 B1044 B1045 B1046 B1047 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Possible cause Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492821 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-56, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-56 2012 QUEST B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492822 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1049 B1054 B Display contents of CONSULT DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable) • Harness or connectors (The module circuit is open.) • Malfunction in driver air bag module • Malfunction in spiral cable • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-57, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492823 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. N 3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Revision: 2011 September K M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3. J L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS 1. 2. D SRC-57 2012 QUEST P B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver air bag module Connector Terminal Connector Terminal 10 M301 Continuity 28 11 30 M32 12 M300 4. Combination switch (spiral cable) 29 9 Existed 30 Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground. Driver side air bag module Connector M301 M300 Continuity Terminal 10 Ground 11 Not existed 12 9 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-57, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> INSPECTION END 5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-57, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-58 2012 QUEST B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492824 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1050 B1055 B Display contents of CONSULT DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply circuit (including the spiral cable) • Harness or connectors (The module circuit is shorted.) • Malfunction in driver air bag module • Malfunction in spiral cable • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-59, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492825 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. K M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE O 1. Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic". Revision: 2011 September J L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS 1. 2. D SRC-59 2012 QUEST B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> INSPECTION END 5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-60 2012 QUEST B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492826 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1051 B1056 B Display contents of CONSULT DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable) • Harness or connectors (The module circuit is shorted.) • Malfunction in driver air bag module • Malfunction in spiral cable • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit C DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-61, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492827 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. N 3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Revision: 2011 September K M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3. J L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS 1. 2. D SRC-61 2012 QUEST P B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Driver air bag module Connector Terminal Connector Terminal 10 M301 Continuity 28 11 30 M32 12 M300 4. Combination switch (spiral cable) 29 9 Existed 30 Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground. Driver side air bag module Connector M301 M300 Continuity Terminal 10 Ground 11 Not existed 12 9 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-61, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> INSPECTION END 5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-61, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-62 2012 QUEST B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492828 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1052 B1057 B Display contents of CONSULT DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Driver air bag module circuit are shorted to each other (including the spiral cable) • Harness or connectors (The module circuit is shorted.) • Malfunction in driver air bag module • Malfunction in spiral cable • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit C DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-63, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492829 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. N 3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-I O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals. Revision: 2011 September K M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3. J L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS 1. 2. D SRC-63 2012 QUEST P B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Combination switch (spiral cable) Connector M301 Terminal 10 Connector Terminal M301 11 9 M300 Continuity Not existed 12 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-II Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals. Combination switch (spiral cable) Connector Terminal M32 28 Terminal 29 30 Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-63, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> INSPECTION END 6.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-63, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-64 2012 QUEST B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1058 B1059 B1060 B1061 B1062 B1063 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT A INFOID:0000000007492830 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-65, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492831 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-65, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-65 P 2012 QUEST B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492832 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1065 B1070 Display contents of CONSULT DTC detecting condition ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] Passenger air bag module circuit is open Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in passenger air bag module • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-66, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492833 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-66, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-66, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-66 2012 QUEST B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-67 2012 QUEST B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492834 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1066 B1071 Display contents of CONSULT ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply circuit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in passenger air bag module • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-68, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492835 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-68, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-68, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-68 2012 QUEST B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-69 2012 QUEST B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492836 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1067 B1072 Display contents of CONSULT ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in passenger air bag module • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-70, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492837 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-70, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-70, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-70 2012 QUEST B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-71 2012 QUEST B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492838 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1068 B1073 Display contents of CONSULT ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in passenger air bag module • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-72, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492839 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-72, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-72, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-72 2012 QUEST B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-73 2012 QUEST B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492840 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1074 B1075 B1076 B1077 B1078 B1079 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492841 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-74, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-74 2012 QUEST B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492842 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1080 B1096 B Display contents of CONSULT DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Driver air bag module circuit are shorted to each other (including the spiral cable) • Harness or connectors (The module circuit is shorted.) • Malfunction in driver air bag module • Malfunction in spiral cable • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit C DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END F 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492843 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. N 3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-I O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals. Revision: 2011 September K M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3. J L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS 1. 2. D SRC-75 2012 QUEST P B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Combination switch (spiral cable) Connector M301 Terminal 10 Connector Terminal M301 11 9 M300 Continuity Not existed 12 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-II Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals. Combination switch (spiral cable) Connector Terminal M32 28 Terminal 29 30 Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-75, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> INSPECTION END 6.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-75, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-76 2012 QUEST B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492844 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1081 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is open • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-77, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492845 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-77, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-77, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-77 2012 QUEST B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-78 2012 QUEST B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492846 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1082 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-79, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492847 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-79, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-79, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-79 2012 QUEST B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-80 2012 QUEST B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492848 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1083 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to ground • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-81, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492849 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-81, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-81, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-81 2012 QUEST B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-82 2012 QUEST B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492850 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1084 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are shorted to each other • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-83, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492851 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-83, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-83, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-83 2012 QUEST B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-84 2012 QUEST B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492852 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1086 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is open • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492853 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-85, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-85, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-85 2012 QUEST B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-86 2012 QUEST B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492854 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1087 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492855 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-87, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-87, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-87 2012 QUEST B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-88 2012 QUEST B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492856 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1088 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to ground • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-89, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492857 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-89, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-89, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-89 2012 QUEST B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-90 2012 QUEST B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492858 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1089 B Display contents of CONSULT PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are shorted to each other • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-91, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492859 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER O 1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-91, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-91, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-91 2012 QUEST B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-92 2012 QUEST B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1090 B1091 B1092 B1093 B0194 B1095 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT A INFOID:0000000007492860 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-93, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492861 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-93, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-93 P 2012 QUEST B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492862 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1106 B1107 B1108 B1109 B1110 B1111 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-94, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492863 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-94, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-94 2012 QUEST B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492864 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1113 B1114 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-95, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492865 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-95, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-95, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-95 2012 QUEST B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-96 2012 QUEST B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492866 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1115 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-97, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492867 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR O 1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-97, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-97, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-97 2012 QUEST B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-98 2012 QUEST B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492868 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1116 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [UNMATCH] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Front satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification Diagnosis sensor unit or front satellite sensor RH is different from the part specified C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-99, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492869 I WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-99, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END K L 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT M 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-99, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-99 2012 QUEST B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492870 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1118 B1119 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-100, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492871 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-100, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-100, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-100 2012 QUEST B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-101 2012 QUEST B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492872 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1120 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-102, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492873 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-102, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-102, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-102 2012 QUEST B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-103 2012 QUEST B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492874 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1121 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [UNMATCH] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Front satellite sensor LH is out of the spec- Diagnosis front sensor unit or satellite sensor RH ified specification is different from the part specified DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-104, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492875 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-104, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-104, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-104 2012 QUEST B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1122 B1123 B1124 B1125 B1126 B1127 A INFOID:0000000007492876 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-105, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492877 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-105, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-105 P 2012 QUEST B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492878 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1129 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module RH circuit is open Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in side air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status.SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-106, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492879 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-106, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-106, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-106 2012 QUEST B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-107 2012 QUEST B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492880 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1130 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-108, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492881 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-108, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-108, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-108 2012 QUEST B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-109 2012 QUEST B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492882 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1131 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-110, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492883 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-110, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-110, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-110 2012 QUEST B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-111 2012 QUEST B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492884 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1132 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-112, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492885 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-112, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-112, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-112 2012 QUEST B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-113 2012 QUEST B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492886 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1134 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module LH circuit is open Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in side air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492887 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-114, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-114, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-114 2012 QUEST B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-115 2012 QUEST B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492888 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1135 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-116, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492889 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-116, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-116, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-116 2012 QUEST B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-117 2012 QUEST B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492890 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1136 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-118, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492891 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-118, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-118, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-118 2012 QUEST B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-119 2012 QUEST B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492892 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1137 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Side air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in side air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-120, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492893 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-120, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat). 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-120, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-120 2012 QUEST B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-121 2012 QUEST B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492894 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1138 B1139 B1140 B1141 B1142 B1143 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Possible cause Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-122, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492895 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-122, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-122 2012 QUEST B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492896 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1144 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT [MISS INSTALLATION] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning or out of the specification • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit • Configuration in air bag diagnosis sensor unit does not match the vehicles specification C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492897 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-123, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-123 O P 2012 QUEST B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492898 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display contents of CONSULT B1145 CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is open Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-124, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492899 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-124, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-124, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-124 2012 QUEST B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-125 2012 QUEST B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492900 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1146 Display contents of CONSULT DTC detecting condition CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492901 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-126, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-126, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-126 2012 QUEST B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-127 2012 QUEST B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492902 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1147 Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-128, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492903 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-128, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-128, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-128 2012 QUEST B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-129 2012 QUEST B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492904 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1148 Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-130, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492905 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-130, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-130, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-130 2012 QUEST B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-131 2012 QUEST B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492906 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display contents of CONSULT B1150 CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is open Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-132, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492907 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-132, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-132, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-132 2012 QUEST B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-133 2012 QUEST B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492908 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1151 Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-134, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492909 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-134, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-134, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-134 2012 QUEST B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-135 2012 QUEST B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492910 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1152 Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-136, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492911 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-136, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-136, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-136 2012 QUEST B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-137 2012 QUEST B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492912 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1153 Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Rear curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-138, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492913 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-138, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-138, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-138 2012 QUEST B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-139 2012 QUEST B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492914 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1154 B1155 B1156 B1157 B1158 B1159 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492915 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-140, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-140 2012 QUEST B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1170 B1171 B1172 B1173 B1174 B1175 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT A INFOID:0000000007492916 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492917 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-141, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-141 P 2012 QUEST B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492918 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1186 B1187 B1188 B1189 B1190 B1191 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-142, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492919 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-142, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-142 2012 QUEST B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492920 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1193 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is open • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-143, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492921 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-143, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-143, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-143 2012 QUEST B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-144 2012 QUEST B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492922 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1194 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Frount curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in frount curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492923 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-145, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-145, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-145 2012 QUEST B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-146 2012 QUEST B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492924 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1195 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492925 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-147, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-147, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-147 2012 QUEST B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-148 2012 QUEST B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492926 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1196 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-149, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492927 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-149, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-149, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-149 2012 QUEST B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-150 2012 QUEST B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492928 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1198 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is open • Disconnection of wiring harness and open • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-151, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492929 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-151, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-151, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-151 2012 QUEST B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-152 2012 QUEST B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492930 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1199 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-153, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492931 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-153, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-153, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-153 2012 QUEST B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-154 2012 QUEST B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492932 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1200 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-155, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492933 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-155, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-155, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-155 2012 QUEST B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-156 2012 QUEST B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492934 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1201 B Display contents of CONSULT CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other • Disconnection of wiring harness and short • Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-157, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492935 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-157, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE 1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation" 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-157, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-157 2012 QUEST B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-158 2012 QUEST B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1202 B1203 B1204 B1205 B1206 B1207 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT A INFOID:0000000007492936 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-159, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492937 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-159, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-159 P 2012 QUEST B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION Description INFOID:0000000007492938 The air bags and seat belt pre-tensioners for driver and passenger are activated by the air bag diagnosis sensor unit signal transmitted at the time of the frontal collision. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492939 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1209 Display contents of CONSULT FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION DTC detecting condition Possible cause Seat belt pre-tensioner, driver side air bag and passenger air bag are deployed — DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-160, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492940 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.PERFORM COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Perform collision diagnosis.Refer to SR-4, "FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision" or SR-5, "FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision". Is collision diagnosis complete? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END 2.FINAL INSPECTION Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform diagnosis of applicable DTC.Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index". Revision: 2011 September SRC-160 2012 QUEST B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION A Description INFOID:0000000007492941 The side air bag and curtain air bag are activated by the air bag diagnosis sensor unit signal transmitted at the time of side collision. DTC Logic B INFOID:0000000007492942 C DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1210 Display contents of CONSULT SIDE COLLISION DETECTION DTC detecting condition Side air bag and curtain air bag are deployed Possible cause — D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492943 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.PERFORM COLLISION DIAGNOSIS L Perform collision diagnosis.Refer to SR-6, "FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision" or SR-7, "FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision". Iscollision diagnosis complete? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END M 2.FINAL INSPECTION N Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Peform diagnosis of applicable DTC.Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index". O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-161 2012 QUEST B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492944 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1212 B1213 B1214 Display contents of CONSULT RH1 SAT-SENS DTC detecting condition Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-162, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492945 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-162, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-162, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-162 2012 QUEST B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-163 2012 QUEST B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492946 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1215 B1216 B1217 Display contents of CONSULT LH1 SAT-SENS DTC detecting condition Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-164, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492947 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-164, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-164, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-164 2012 QUEST B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-165 2012 QUEST B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492948 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1218 B1219 B1220 B1221 B1222 B1223 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-166, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492949 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-166, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-166 2012 QUEST B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1234 B1235 B1236 B1237 B1238 B1239 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT A INFOID:0000000007492950 DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D E DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-167, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure G SRC I INFOID:0000000007492951 J WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. K 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. M 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N O 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-167, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-167 P 2012 QUEST B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492952 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1250 B1251 B1252 B1253 B1254 B1255 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-168, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492953 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-168, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-168 2012 QUEST B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492954 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1266 B1267 B1268 B1269 B Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. F G SRC I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492955 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT O 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-169 P 2012 QUEST B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492956 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1282 B1283 B1284 B1285 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492957 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-170 2012 QUEST B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492958 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1304 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in rear satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-171, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492959 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I J K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-171, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END O P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-171, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-171 2012 QUEST B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-172 2012 QUEST B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492960 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1306 B1308 B1309 B1310 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in rear satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. F G SRC I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492961 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR O 1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-173, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-173, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-173 2012 QUEST B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-174 2012 QUEST B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492962 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1307 B Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS RH [UNMATCH] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Rear satellite sensor RH is out of the speci- Diagnosis sensor unit or rear satellite sensor RH fied specification is different from the part specified D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-175, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492963 I WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-175, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END K L 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT M 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-175, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-175 2012 QUEST B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492964 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1311 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] DTC detecting condition Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in rear satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-176, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492965 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-176, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-176, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. Revision: 2011 September SRC-176 2012 QUEST B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-177 2012 QUEST B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492966 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1313 B1315 B1316 B1317 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] DTC detecting condition Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification Possible cause • Disconnection of wiring harness • Malfunction in rear satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-178, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492967 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-178, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-178, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-178 2012 QUEST B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-179 2012 QUEST B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492968 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1314 Display contents of CONSULT SATELLITE SENS LH [UNMATCH] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Rear satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification Diagnosis sensor unit or rear satellite sensor LH is different from the part specified DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492969 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-180, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-180, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-180 2012 QUEST B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492970 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1336 B1337 B Display contents of CONSULT FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [SENSOR MALFUNCTION] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Harness or connectors • Malfunction in front door satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-181, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. F G SRC I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492971 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR O 1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-181, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-181, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-181 2012 QUEST B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-182 2012 QUEST B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492972 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1338 B1340 B1341 B1342 B Display contents of CONSULT FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [COMM MALFUNCTION] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Harness or connectors • Malfunction in front door satellite sensor RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-183, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. F G SRC I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492973 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. J 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR K Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. L 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS M Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. N 3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR O 1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-183, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END P 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-183, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-183 2012 QUEST B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-184 2012 QUEST B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492974 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1339 B Display contents of CONSULT FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS [MIS-INSTALLATION] DTC detecting condition Possible cause C Front door satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification Diagnosis sensor unit or front door satellite sensor RH is different from the part specified D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT E With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492975 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR I J K 1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-185, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END L 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT M 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-185, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-185 2012 QUEST B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492976 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1343 B1344 Display contents of CONSULT FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [SENSOR MALFUNCTION] DTC detecting condition Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning Possible cause • Harness or connectors • Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-186, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492977 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-186, "DTC Logic" Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-186, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-186 2012 QUEST B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-187 2012 QUEST B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492978 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1345 B1347 B1348 B1349 Display contents of CONSULT FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [COMM MALFUNCTION] DTC detecting condition Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning Possible cause • Harness or connectors • Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492979 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connector. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> INSPECTION END 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September SRC-188 2012 QUEST B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END A B C D E F G SRC I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-189 2012 QUEST B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492980 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1346 Display contents of CONSULT FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS [MIS-INSTALLATION] DTC detecting condition Possible cause Front door satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification Diagnosis sensor unit or front door satellite sensor LH is different from the part specified DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-190, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492981 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR 1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-190, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-190, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-190 2012 QUEST B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492982 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1350 B1351 B Display contents of CONSULT DTC detecting condition Possible cause FR DOOR SATEL SENS Front door satellite sensor is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification • Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH/RH • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit C D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END E 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure F G SRC INFOID:0000000007492983 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. I J 1.REPLACE BOTH OF FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSORS 1. Replace both of front door satellite sensors. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END K L 2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT M 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-191 2012 QUEST B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492984 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B1378 B1379 B1380 B1381 Display contents of CONSULT CONTROL UNIT DTC detecting condition Possible cause Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT. Without CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function". NOTE: SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492985 WARNING: • Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3 minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.) • Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device. 1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic". Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 1. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September SRC-192 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492986 B 1.CHECK AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Check the deployment of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. Is air bag module deployed? YES >> Replace the malfunctioning parts. NO >> GO TO 2. C D 2.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE Check 10 A fuse [No.2, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the fuse. E F 3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace harness connectors. G SRC 4.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace wiring harness. I 5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT J 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Check air bag warning lamp operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 6. K L 6.REPLACE COMBINATION METER 1. Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". 2. Check air bag warning lamp operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 1. M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-193 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK INFOID:0000000007492987 COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check conbination meter unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer toMWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure" . Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace harness connectors. 3.CHECK WIRING HARNESS Check the wiring harness externals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace wiring harness. 4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch ON. Does air bag warning lamp turn ON? YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September SRC-194 2012 QUEST SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007492988 1.RERFORM ZERO POINT RESET B Perorm zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. C 2.CHECK BATTERY D Check battery. Refer to PG-119, "How to Handle Battery". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. E 3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR F 1. Replace seat cushion frame. Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat). 2. Check air bag warning lamp operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 4. G SRC 4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT 1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Check air bag warning lamp operation. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 1. I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September SRC-195 2012 QUEST STEERING SECTION ST STEERING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 STEERING COLUMN ........................................ 12 F PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................12 Removal and Installation .........................................12 Inspection ................................................................13 ST Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System ...... 2 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 STEERING SHAFT ........................................... 15 Exploded View .........................................................15 Removal and Installation .........................................15 Inspection ................................................................17 H STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ................... 19 I PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................19 Removal and Installation .........................................21 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................23 Inspection ................................................................29 Special Service Tools ................................................ 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 5 STEERING WHEEL ............................................. 5 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ....................... 31 Exploded View .........................................................31 Removal and Installation .........................................32 Inspection ................................................................33 K HYDRAULIC LINE ............................................ 34 L Inspection .................................................................. 5 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 7 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 7 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 7 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8 POWER STEERING FLUID ................................ 8 Inspection .................................................................. 8 Exploded View .........................................................34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 35 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 35 N STEERING WHEEL ............................................10 Inspection ................................................................ 10 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11 STEERING WHEEL ............................................11 Exploded View ........................................................ 11 Removal and Installation ......................................... 11 Revision: 2011 September J ST-1 General Specifications .............................................35 Steering Wheel ........................................................35 Steering Angle .........................................................35 Steering Column ......................................................35 Intermediate Shaft ...................................................35 Steering Gear and Linkage ......................................35 Oil Pump ..................................................................36 2012 QUEST O P PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007495856 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System INFOID:0000000007495857 • In case of removing steering gear assembly, make the final tightening with grounded and unloaded vehicle condition, and then check wheel alignment. • Observe the following precautions when disassembling. - Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. - Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. - For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. - Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. - Never reuse non-reusable parts. - Before assembling, apply the specified grease to the directed parts. Revision: 2011 September ST-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495858 B The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. C Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description • • • • ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge Measuring steering wheel turning torque Measuring steering column rotating torque Measuring ball joint rotating torque Measuring pinion rotating torque D E F ZZA0806D Removing steering wheel ST27180001 (J-25726-A) Steering wheel puller ST H ZZA0819D Removing and installing rear cover KV48105400 ( — ) Rear cover wrench a: 19 mm (0.75 in) b: 34.9 mm (1.374 in) I J SGIA0516E Measuring pinion rotating torque KV48103400 ( — ) Preload adapter K L M ZZA0824D Measuring oil pump relief pressure KV48103500 (J-26357) Oil pressure gauge N O S-NT547 Measuring oil pump relief pressure KV481059S0 ( — ) Adapter set 1. KV48105910 Adapter (female side) 2. KV48105920 Adapter (male side) JPGIA0171ZZ Revision: 2011 September ST-3 2012 QUEST P PREPARATION < PREPARATION > Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007495859 Tool name Description Ball joint remover Removing steering outer socket S-NT146 Open head Tightening end cover assembly ZZA0822D Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: 2011 September ST-4 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A STEERING WHEEL Inspection INFOID:0000000007495860 B Check that steering gear assembly, steering column assembly and steering wheel are installed in the correct position. Check wheel alignment within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position and confirm steering wheel is in the neutral position. • Loosen outer socket lock nut and turn inner socket to left and right equally to make fine adjustments if steering wheel is not in the neutral position. CAUTION: If the adjustment is performed by using the inner socket, check wheel alignment after the adjustment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". C NEUTRAL POSITION STEERING WHEEL 1. 2. 3. STEERING WHEEL TURNING TORQUE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E F Park the vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake. Tires need to be inflated to the specified pressure. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". Start the engine. Check that the reading is within the following specified range using the preload gauge (A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]. Steering wheel turning torque D ST H : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Wheel". NOTE: To check, oil temperature must be room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)]. If steering wheel turning torque is out of the specification, check rack sliding force and relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump. Regarding relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump, refer to ST-33, "Inspection". I J JSGIA0431ZZ K RACK SLIDING FORCE 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect lower joint from steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-15, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation". Run the engine at idle and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)]. While pulling outer socket slowly in ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) range from neutral position, make sure rack sliding force is within specification. Rack sliding force : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". L M N O • If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering gear assembly. P SST090B FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Perform toe-in inspection. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". CAUTION: Perform front wheel turning angle inspection, after toe-in inspection. Revision: 2011 September ST-5 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL < BASIC INSPECTION > 2. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges and rear wheels on stands, so that vehicle can be level. 3. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. FAA0016D • With the engine at idle, turn steering wheel from full left stop to full right stop and measure the turning angles (maximum inner wheel steering angle and maximum outer wheel steering angle). A : Inner wheel angle B : Outer wheel angle Steering angle : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Angle". SGIA0055E • Check the following items when turning angle is out of the standard. - Check the neutral position of the rack stroke (L). Rack stroke neutral position (L) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". - Disassemble steering gear assembly to check the cause that rack stroke is outside of the standard. • Steering angles are not adjustable. Check steering gear assembly, steering column assembly and front suspension components for wear or damage if any of the turning angles are different from the specified value. Replace any of them, if any non-standard condition exists. Revision: 2011 September ST-6 SGIA0629J 2012 QUEST Symptom Steering Revision: 2011 September Outer/inner socket ball joint end play Steering fluid leakage Steering wheel play Steering gear rack sliding force × × × × × × × × Judder ST-7 × Shake × × × Vibration × × × Shimmy × — — × × TIRE ROAD WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT BRAKE × AXLE and SUSPENSION NVH in BR section. NVH in FAX section. NVH in WT section. NVH Troubleshooting Chart NVH in WT section. NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU, RSU section. ST-19, "Exploded View" ST-12, "Exploded View" Improper installation or looseness of steering column × Steering linkage looseness ST-13, "Inspection" ST-19, "Exploded View" ST-5, "Inspection" ST-5, "Inspection" ST-8, "Inspection" ST-29, "Inspection" ST-29, "Inspection" ST-29, "Inspection" ST-8, "Inspection" Steering column deformation or damage Mounting looseness Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever Improper steering wheel Outer/inner socket ball joint rotating torque Noise Outer/inner socket ball joint swinging torque Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Air in hydraulic system ST-8, "Inspection" Reference Fluid level NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING A INFOID:0000000007495861 × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2012 QUEST B Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. C D E F ST H I J K L × M N O P POWER STEERING FLUID < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE POWER STEERING FLUID Inspection INFOID:0000000007495862 FLUID LEVEL With the engine stopped, check that the fluid level is between MIN and MAX of the reservoir cap level gauge when the fluid temperature is in COLD state. COLD : Fluid temperature 0 – 30°C (32 – 86°F) Recommended fluid Fluid capacity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". : Refer to ST-35, "General Specifications". JPGIA0164ZZ CAUTION: • The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive fluid causes fluid leakage from the cap. • Never reuse drained power steering fluid. • Always use the specified fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". FLUID LEAKAGE Check hydraulic connections for fluid leakage, cracks, damage, looseness, or wear. 1. Run the engine at idle and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)]. 2. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right stop. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that power steering oil pump assembly may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leaks from the joint, loosen the joint part and retighten it, being careful not to damage it. CAUTION: For tightening torque and non reusable parts, refer to ST-34, "Exploded View". 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid leaked from steering gear. SGIA0506E BLEEDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM If air bleeding is not complete, the following symptoms can be observed. • Bubbles are created in reservoir tank. • Clicking noise can be heard from oil pump. • Excessive buzzing in the oil pump. NOTE: Fluid noise may occur in the steering gear or oil pump. This does not affect performance or durability of the system. 1. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right stop with engine stopped. CAUTION: Fill reservoir tank with a sufficient amount of fluid so that fluid level is not below the MIN line while turning steering wheel. 2. Start the engine and hold steering wheel at each lock position for 3 seconds at idle to check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 above several times at approximately 3 seconds intervals. Revision: 2011 September ST-8 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING FLUID < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > CAUTION: Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Check fluid for bubbles and white contamination. • Stop the engine if bubbles and white contamination do not drain out. Perform step 2 and 3 above after waiting until bubbles and white contamination drain out. 5. Stop the engine, and then check fluid level. A B C D E F ST H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September ST-9 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > STEERING WHEEL Inspection INFOID:0000000007495863 STEERING WHEEL AXIAL END PLAY 1. 2. Check installation conditions of steering gear assembly, front suspension assembly, axle and steering column assembly. Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial direction. Steering wheel axial end play 3. : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Wheel". Check the following items when steering wheel axial end play is out of the standard. • Check the steering column assembly mounting condition. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". • Check steering gear assembly mounting condition for looseness. Refer to ST-19, "Exploded View". STEERING WHEEL PLAY 1. 2. 3. Turn steering wheel so that front wheels come to the straight-ahead position. Start the engine and lightly turn steering wheel to the left and right until front wheels start to move. Measure steering wheel movement on the outer circumference. Steering wheel play 4. : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Wheel". Check the following items when steering wheel play is out of the standard. • Check backlash for each joint of steering column assembly. • Check installation condition of steering gear assembly. Revision: 2011 September ST-10 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A STEERING WHEEL Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495864 B C D E JSGIA0704GB 1. F Steering wheel : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. ST Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495865 H REMOVAL NOTE: When reconnecting spiral cable, fix cable with a tape so that fixing case and rotating part keep aligned. This will omit neutral position alignment procedure during spiral cable installation. 1. Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove steering wheel lock nut after steering is locked. 4. Remove steering wheel with the steering wheel puller (A) [SST: ST27180001 (J-25726-A)]. NOTE: When removing, place a matching mark on both steering wheel and shaft of steering column assembly before removing. I J K L M JSGIA0654ZZ INSTALLATION N Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • Check the spiral cable neutral position after replacing or rotating spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never twist spiral cable excessively after it becomes tight. (Twisting may cause the cable to be torn off.) • Never reuse steering wheel lock nut. Revision: 2011 September ST-11 2012 QUEST O P STEERING COLUMN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > STEERING COLUMN Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495866 JSGIA0920GB 1. Slide plate (outer) 2. Slide plate (inner) 3. Cover 4. Upper joint 5. Spring 6. Steering column assembly : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495867 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Never impact on the axis when removing steering column assembly. • Be careful when removing steering column assembly from the vehicle because it is heavy. • While removing the steering column assembly, never move the steering gear. • When removing the steering column assembly, be careful not to allow the intermediate shaft to turn. • To prevent a malfunction and deformation from occurring in the tilt mechanism, never apply excessive force to the tilt lever. 1. Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position. 2. Place the tilt to the highest level. CAUTION: Securely lock the tilt lever. 3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation". 4. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-11, "Removal and Installation". 5. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". 7. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation". 8. Remove combination switch. Refer to BCS-83, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove knee protector. 10. Disconnect each switch harness connectors installed to steering column assembly. 11. Remove upper joint mounting bolt, and separate upper joint from steering column. CAUTION: • When removing, place a matching mark on both upper joint and steering column assembly before removing. Revision: 2011 September ST-12 2012 QUEST STEERING COLUMN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one. 12. Remove steering column assembly. NOTE: The intermediate shaft slides in axial direction. 13. Remove slide plate (outer, inner), cover, and spring from steering column. 14. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-13, "Inspection". A B C INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: D • Never impact on the axis when removing steering column assembly. • While removing the steering column assembly, never move the steering gear. • When connecting upper joint and steering column assembly, make sure the bolt is securely seated in groove of column shaft before final tightening. E • When installing the steering column assembly, temporarily tighten the bolt and nuts before tightening to the specified torque in the order shown in the figure. F CAUTION: • Never reuse slide plate (outer, inner) (1). • The slide plate must be securely pressed in before tightening the nut of slide plate (outer, inner). ST • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-13, "Inspection". H JPGIA0149ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495868 I INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary. • Measure steering column rotating torque using a preload gauge (A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]. Replace steering column assembly if the rotating torque is outside the standard. Rotating torque J K : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column". L JPGIA0085ZZ • Check the following item, if vehicle has been involved in a minor collision. Replace steering column assembly if outside the standard. - Check the length “L” shown in the figure. CAUTION: Set the telescopic mechanism to its maximum length to measure the length of steering column. Steering column length (L) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column". ST-13 N O P JPGIA0151ZZ Revision: 2011 September M 2012 QUEST STEERING COLUMN < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > - Check the dimension “A” shown in the figure. Impact displacement absorption part dimension (A) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column". JPGIA0152ZZ INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary. • Check that there is no malfunction, such as unusual steering feel or interference when operating tilt and telescopic. • Check tilt and telescopic mechanism operating range “L”, “T” as shown in the figure. Tilt operating range (T) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column". Telescopic operating range (L) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column". • Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle. - Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection". - neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". • Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September ST-14 JPGIA0153ZZ 2012 QUEST STEERING SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > STEERING SHAFT A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495869 B C D E F ST JPGIA0150GB 1. Upper joint 4. Hole cover 2. Intermediate shaft 3. Hole cover seal H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) I : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495870 J REMOVAL CAUTION: Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning. 1. Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position. 2. Fix the steering wheel. 3. Remove upper joint mounting bolt (intermediate shaft side), and separate intermediate shaft from upper joint. NOTE: The intermediate shaft slides in axial direction. CAUTION: • Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and upper joint before removing intermediate shaft. • When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one. 4. Remove intermediate shaft mounting bolt (steering gear side), and separate intermediate shaft from steering gear assembly. CAUTION: • Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly before removing intermediate shaft. • When removing intermediate shaft, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to pull out the intermediate shaft. In case of the violation of the above, replace intermediate shaft with a new one. 5. Remove upper joint mounting bolt (steering column side), and remove upper joint from steering column assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Revision: 2011 September ST-15 2012 QUEST K L M N O P STEERING SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Place a matching mark on both upper joint and steering column assembly before removing upper joint. • When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one. 6. Separate hole cover seal with the following procedure. a. Turn tub (A) of hole cover (1). JSGIA0934ZZ b. Separate hole cover seal (1) from hole cover, using a suitable lever with leverage. Lever insert range (A) : 15 mm (0.59 in) 7. 8. 9. CAUTION: If the lever is inserted into an area other than the lever insertion range, the protrusion on the hole cover may be damaged. Remove hole cover mounting nuts. Remove the intermediate shaft and hole cover. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-17, "Inspection". JSGIA0935ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning. • Never damage seal lip when inserting hole cover seal to intermediate shaft. • When installing hole cover seal (1) to hole cover (2), Insert hole cover seal flange (A) with the groove (B) of hole cover. • For intermediate shaft and upper joint mounting bolt direction, refer to ST-15, "Exploded View". (Do not insert it from the other side.) JPGIA0156ZZ • When installing intermediate shaft to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below. Revision: 2011 September ST-16 2012 QUEST STEERING SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > - Align slit of intermediate shaft (1) with rear cover cap projection (A), insert intermediate shaft end face (B) until contacts steering gear assembly end face (C). - When tightening the mounting bolt of the intermediate shaft (steering gear assembly side), manually tighten the bolt and check that there is no hook and scratch. Check that the bolt is properly placed in the groove of the steering gear assembly before tightening the bolt to the specified torque. A B C JPGIA0155ZZ D • When installing intermediate shaft to upper joint, follow the procedure listed below. - To tighten upper joint mounting bolt (intermediate shaft side), manually tighten the bolt to check for scoring or galling before tightening the bold to the specified torque. - After installation, check that there is no clearance (A) between intermediate shaft (1) and upper joint yoke and between intermediate shaft and mounting bolt (3). • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-17, "Inspection". E F ST H JPGIA0157ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495871 I INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items and replace, if necessary. • Check hole cover and hole cover seal for damage or other malfunctions. • Check intermediate shaft and upper joint for damage or other malfunctions. • Check the length (L) of the intermediate shaft. CAUTION: Check the length extended position of the intermediate shaft. Shaft length (L) J K : Refer to ST-35, "Intermediate Shaft". L M JPGIA0160ZZ N • Check the sliding range (A) of the intermediate shaft. CAUTION: Check the sliding range (between the extended position and the contracted position) of the intermediate shaft. Shaft sliding range (A) O : Refer to ST-35, "Intermediate Shaft". P JPGIA0159ZZ INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the following items and replace, if necessary. Revision: 2011 September ST-17 2012 QUEST STEERING SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Check hole cover and hole cover seal for damage or other malfunctions. • Check intermediate shaft and upper joint for damage or other malfunctions. • Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right. • Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle. - Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection". - neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". • Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September ST-18 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495872 REMOVAL B For 3.5LE Grade C D E F ST H I J JSGIA0993GB 1. Steering gear assembly 4. Front suspension member 2. Cotter pin 3. Heat insulator K : Vehicle front L : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) M : Always replace after every disassembly. Except for 3.5LE Grade N O P Revision: 2011 September ST-19 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JSGIA0925GB 1. Steering gear assembly 4. Front suspension member 2. Cotter pin 3. Heat insulator : Vehicle front : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. DISASSEMBLY Revision: 2011 September ST-20 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > A B C D E F ST H JSGIA0936GB 1. Outer socket 2. Boot clamp 3. Boot 4. Inner socket 5. Boot clamp (stainless wire) 6. Spacer 7. End cover assembly 8. Rack spacer 9. Rack oil seal I 10. Rack assembly 11. O-ring 12. Gear housing assembly 13. Low pressure piping 14. Cylinder tubes 15. Gear-sub assembly 16. O-ring 17. Rear cover 18. Rear cover cap J : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K : Always replace after every disassembly. : Apply power steering fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". : Apply Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". L : Apply multi-purpose grease. M Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495873 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. N Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position. Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-27, "Exploded View". Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation". Remove heat insulator from front suspension member. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen the nut. Revision: 2011 September ST-21 O P 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle so as not to damage ball joint boot using a ball joint remover (A) (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Temporarily tighten the nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent the ball joint remover from suddenly coming off. 8. Remove high pressure piping and return hose of hydraulic piping, and then drain power steering fluid. 9. Remove intermediate shaft mounting bolt (steering gear side), JSGIA0938ZZ and separate intermediate shaft from steering gear assembly. CAUTION: • Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly before removing intermediate shaft. • When removing intermediate shaft, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to pull out the intermediate shaft. In case of the violation of the above, replace intermediate shaft with a new one. • Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning. 10. Remove stabilizer connecting rod. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". 11. Set suitable jack under front suspension member. CAUTION: • At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift". • Never damage the front suspension member with a jack. • Check the stable condition when using a jack. 12. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) mounting bolts. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". 13. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH). Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". 14. Remove steering gear assembly mounting bolts, and nuts. 15. Remove suspension member stay, and remove suspension member mounting bolts, and nuts. Refer to FSU-16, "Removal and Installation". 16. Lower the suitable jack for the front suspension member to the steering gear assembly can be removed. CAUTION: Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable. 17. Remove steering gear assembly. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning. • When installing return hoses (1), refer to the figure. CAUTION: • Never apply fluid to the hose and tube (2). • Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube. • Leave clearance (L) when installing clamp (3). L : 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in) • When installing intermediate shaft to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below. - Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position. NOTE: To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear-sub assembly and measure the distance of inner socket, and then measure the intermediate position of the distance. Revision: 2011 September ST-22 JSGIA0118ZZ 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > - Align slit of intermediate shaft (1) with rear cover cap projection (A), insert intermediate shaft end face (B) until contacts steering gear assembly end face (C). - When tightening the mounting bolt of the intermediate shaft (steering gear assembly side), manually tighten the bolt and check that there is no hook and scratch. Check that the bolt is properly placed in the groove of the steering gear assembly before tightening the bolt to the specified torque. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". A B C JPGIA0155ZZ D Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007495874 DISASSEMBLY E CAUTION: • Disassemble and assemble steering gear assembly by fixing the mounting area with a vise using copper plates. • Clean steering gear assembly with kerosene before disassembling. Be careful to avoid splashing or F applying any kerosene over connector of discharge port or return port. 1. Remove low pressure piping. ST 2. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly. 3. Remove rear cover cap from gear-sub assembly. 4. Remove rear cover from gear-sub assembly, using the rear H cover wrench (A) [SST: KV48105400 ( — )] I J JSGIA0927ZZ 5. K Remove O-ring from rear cover. L M N SGIA0508E 6. 7. 8. 9. Measure adjusting screw height “H”, and loosen adjusting screw. CAUTION: • Never loosen adjusting screw 2 turns or more. • Replace steering gear assembly if adjusting screw is loosened 2 turns or more and it is removed. Remove gear-sub assembly from gear housing assembly. Loosen outer socket lock nut, and remove outer socket. Remove boot clamps, and then remove boot from inner socket. CAUTION: O P SGIA0624E Revision: 2011 September ST-23 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never damage inner socket and gear housing assembly when removing boot. Inner socket and gear housing assembly must be replaced if inner socket and gear housing assembly are damaged because it may cause foreign material interfusion. 10. Remove inner socket from rack assembly. 11. Remove spacer from rack assembly. CAUTION: Never damage rack assembly. 12. Drill out the clinching part of gear housing assembly (end cover assembly side) outer rim with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit. [Drill for approximately 1.5 mm (0.059 in) depth.] STC0013D 13. Remove end cover assembly with a 36 mm (1.42 in) open head (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Never damage rack assembly surface when removing. Rack assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause fluid leakage. 14. Pull rack assembly together with rack spacer and rack oil seal (outer side) from gear housing assembly. CAUTION: Never damage cylinder inner wall when remove rack assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damSST081B aged because it may cause fluid leakage. 15. Remove O-ring from rack assembly. CAUTION: Never damage rack assembly. Rack assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause fluid leakage. 16. Push rack oil seal inside with a 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an extension bar to push out rack oil seal (inner side) from gear housing assembly. CAUTION: Never damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner wall. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause fluid leakage. 17. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". SGIA0179E ASSEMBLY CAUTION: • Disassemble and assemble steering gear assembly by fixing the mounting area with a vise using copper plates. • Clean steering gear assembly with kerosene before disassembling. Be careful to avoid splashing or applying any kerosene over connector of discharge port or return port. 1. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to rack assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse O-ring. Revision: 2011 September ST-24 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Apply recommended grease to rack oil seal, and then install rack oil seal in the following procedure. Then assemble rack assembly to gear housing assembly. CAUTION: • Install rack oil seal in a direction so that the lip of inner oil seal and the lip of outer oil seal face each other. • Never damage retainer sliding surface by rack assembly. Replace gear housing assembly if damaged. • Never damage gear housing assembly inner wall by rack assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause fluid leakage. • Never reuse rack oil seal. a. A B C SGIA0205E D Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)]. Around rack assembly teeth to avoid damaging rack oil seal (inner). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull OHP sheet along with rack oil seal until they pass rack assembly teeth, and remove OHP sheet. E F ST SGIA0155E b. c. H Insert rack oil seal (inner) into rack assembly piston (rack Teflon ring). Push retainer to adjusting screw side by hand, and move the rack assembly inside the gear housing assembly so that the rack oil seal (inner) can be pressed against the gear housing assembly. I J K PGIA0076E d. e. f. Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)]. Around the edge to avoid damaging rack oil seal (outer). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull oil seal along with OHP sheet until they pass rack edge, and remove OHP sheet. Apply recommended grease to rack spacer. Install end cover assembly and rack spacer to rack edge, and move rack oil seal (outer) until it contacts with gear housing assembly. L M N SGIA0157E O P Revision: 2011 September ST-25 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Tighten end cover assembly to specified torque using a 36 mm (1.42 in) open head (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Never damage rack assembly. Replace it if damaged because it may cause fluid leakage. SST081B 4. Crimp gear housing assembly at one point using a punch as shown in the figure so as to prevent end cover assembly from getting loose after tightening end cover assembly. A 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. c. 9. : 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) Install gear-sub assembly to gear housing assembly. CAUTION: In order to protect oil seal from any damage, insert gearsub assembly straightly. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to rear cover. CAUTION: Never reuse O-ring. Install rear cover to gear-sub assembly, using the rear cover wrench (A) [SST: KV48105400 ( — )] CAUTION: Never reuse rear cover. Install inner socket to rack assembly with the following procedure. Install spacer to rack assembly. Apply thread sealant into the thread of inner socket. Use Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Screw inner socket into rack part and tighten at the specified torque. Decide on the neutral position of the rack stroke (L). Rack stroke neutral position (L) JSGIA0928ZZ JSGIA0927ZZ : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". 10. Install rear cover cap to gear sub-assembly. CAUTION: Make sure that the projection of rear cover cap is aligned with the marking position of gear housing assembly. SGIA0877E Revision: 2011 September ST-26 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 11. Apply recommended thread sealant to the thread of adjusting screw (2 turns thread), and then screw in the adjusting screw until it reaches height “H” from gear housing assembly measured before disassembling. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 12. Move rack assembly 10 strokes throughout the full stroke so that the parts can fit with each other. A B C SGIA0624E D 13. Adjust pinion rotating torque with the following procedure. a. Measure pinion rotating torque within ±180° of neutral position of the rack assembly using Tools. Stop the gear at the point where highest torque is read. E A: Preload gauge [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)] F B: Preload adapter [SST: KV48103400 ( — )] b. Loosen adjusting screw and retighten to 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb), and then loosen by 20 to 40°. ST SGIA1383E c. Pinion rotating torque d. H Measure pinion rotating torque using tools to make sure that the measured value is within the standard. Readjust if the value is outside the standard. Replace steering gear assembly, if the value is outside the standard after readjusting, or adjusting screw rotating torque is 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) or less. I J : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". Turn pinion fully to left. K JSGIA0937GB e. f. Install dial indicator at 5 mm (0.20 in) (L) from the edge of gear housing assembly (1), and tooth point. Measure vertical movement of rack assembly when pinion is turned clockwise with torque of 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb). L M Vertical movement 14. 15. 16. 17. : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". • If reading is outside of the specification, readjust screw angle with adjusting screw. CAUTION: JSGIA0104ZZ • Replace steering gear assembly when adjusting screw is removed or turned more than twice. • Never turn adjusting screw more than twice. • If reading is still outside of specification, or if the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace steering gear assembly. Install large end of boot to gear housing assembly. Install small end of boot to inner socket boot mounting groove. Install boot clamp to boot small end. Install boot clamp to the large side of boot with the following procedure. CAUTION: Never reuse boot clamp. Revision: 2011 September ST-27 2012 QUEST N O P STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > a. Tighten large side of boot with boot clamp (stainless wire). Wire length (L) b. : 390 mm (15.35 in) Wrap clamp around boot groove for two turns. Insert a flatbladed screwdriver in loops on both ends of wire. Twist 4 to 4.5 turns while pulling them with force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb). SGIA0163E c. Twist boot clamp as shown. Pay attention to relationship between winding and twisting directions. SGIA0164E d. Twisted area (A) of clamp is in the adjusting screw side (1) as shown in the figure (to prevent contact with other parts). A : 80° JSGIA0926ZZ e. Bent cut end of the wire toward rack axial as shown in the figure after twisting the wire 4 to 4.5 turns so that cut end does not contact with boot. CAUTION: Keep gap from cylinder tube 5 mm (0.20 in) or more. A : 30° 18. Install cylinder tubes to gear housing assembly. 19. Install low pressure piping. JSGIA0042ZZ 20. Install outer socket with the following procedure. • Adjust inner socket to standard length (L), and then tighten lock nut (1) to the specified torque. Check length again after tightening lock nut. Inner socket length (L) : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". JPGIA0187ZZ Revision: 2011 September ST-28 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: • When tightening the lock nut (1), be sure to fix outer socket (2) with a wrench or an equivalent to prevent the ball joint from getting contact with the knuckle. • Adjust toe-in after this procedure. The length achieved after toe-in adjustment is not necessary the above value. A B C D JSGIA0538ZZ Inspection INFOID:0000000007495875 E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for cracks, and replace it if a malfunction is detected. F Rack Assembly Check rack for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected. ST Gear-Sub Assembly • Check gear-sub assembly for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected. • Rotate gear-sub assembly and check for torque variation or rattle, and replace it if a malfunction is detected. H Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if there are. I Outer Socket and Inner Socket Check the following items and replace the component if it does not meet the standard. BALL JOINT SWINGING FORCE Hook a spring balance at the point and pull the spring balance. Make sure that the spring balance reads the specified value when ball stud and inner socket start to move. Replace outer socket and inner socket if they are outside the standard. Measuring point of outer socket (1) : Ball stud upper side (A) Measuring point of inner socket (2) : Point (B) shown in the figure Swinging force (Spring balance measurement) J K L : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". M JPGIA0188ZZ BALL JOINT ROTATING TORQUE Make sure that the reading is within the following specified range using preload gauge (A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]. Replace outer socket if the reading is outside the specified value. N O Rotating torque : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". P SGIA1382E BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAY Revision: 2011 September ST-29 2012 QUEST STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Apply an axial load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) to ball stud. Using a dial indicator, measure amount of stud movement, and then make sure that the value is within the following specified range. Replace outer socket (1) and inner socket (2) if the measured value is outside the standard. Axial end play : Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and Linkage". JSGIA0109ZZ INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right. • Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle. - Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection". - Neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". • Bleed the hydraulic system. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection". • Check the fluid level and check for leakage. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection". • Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". • Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September ST-30 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > POWER STEERING OIL PUMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495876 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY: IRON COVER TYPE B C D E F ST H I JSGIA0923GB 1. Reservoir cap 4. Noise insulator 2. Power steering oil pump assembly 3. J Bracket K : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L : Always replace after every disassembly. POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY: RESIN COVER TYPE M N O P Revision: 2011 September ST-31 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JSGIA0989GB 1. Reservoir cap 2. Power steering oil pump assembly 3. Bracket : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007495877 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Disconnect the battery negative terminal before performing the work. • Noise insulator is function part, never remove. (Iron cover type) 1. Remove reservoir tank of radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". 2. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-51, "Exploded View". 3. Disconnect each connector and grand cable from power steering control module. 4. Remove high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-34, "HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation". 5. Remove return hose, and drain power steering fluid. CAUTION: • Never reuse drained power steering fluid. • Always use the specified fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants". 6. Remove high-pressure piping and O-ring. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View". 7. Remove food side cover. Refer to DLK-397, "Exploded View". 8. Remove oil pump assembly mounting bolts and nuts, and then remove oil pump assembly. 9. Remove brackets. 10. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection". INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. • When installing high-pressure piping, securely install O-ring to high-pressure piping. Revision: 2011 September ST-32 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: Never reuse O-ring. • When installing return hoses, refer to the figure. CAUTION: • Never apply fluid to the hose (1) and tube (2). • Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube. • Leave clearance (L) when installing clamp (3). L A B C : 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in) • If noise insulator is removed, clean mounting surface, and install new noise insulator. (Iron cover type) CAUTION: Never reuse noise insulator. • Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection". Inspection D JSGIA0118ZZ INFOID:0000000007495878 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E F Check oil pump assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check oil pump assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary. • Check the fluid level and check for leakage. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection". • Bleed the hydraulic system. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection". ST RELIEF OIL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Relief oil pressure 4. 5. 6. 7. H Connect the oil pressure gauge (A) [SST: KV48103500 (J26357)] and the adapter set (B) [SST: KV481059S0 ( — )] between oil pump discharge port and high-pressure piping. Bleed air from the hydraulic circuit while opening valve fully. CAUTION: Check that O-ring is installed on adapter (male side) [SST: KV48105920 ( — )]. Start the engine and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)]. CAUTION: Leave the valve of the oil pressure gauge fully open while starting and running engine. If engine is started with the valve closed, the hydraulic pressure in oil pump goes up to the relief pressure along with unusual increase of oil temperature. Fully close the oil pressure gauge valve with engine at idle and measure the relief oil pressure. I J K L M N : Refer to ST-36, "Oil Pump". CAUTION: Never keep valve closed for 10 seconds or longer. JSGIA0930GB Open the valve slowly after measuring. Replace oil pump if the relief oil pressure is outside the standard. Disconnect the oil pressure gauge and adapters from hydraulic circuit. Connect high-pressure piping with O-ring to oil pump assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse O-ring. Check fluid level, fluid leakage and air bleeding hydraulic system after the installation. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September ST-33 2012 QUEST O P HYDRAULIC LINE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > HYDRAULIC LINE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007495879 JSGIA0924GB 1. Power steering oil pump assembly 4. Collar 5. Bushing 6. Return tube 7. Return hose 8. Steering gear assembly 9. High pressure piping 10. O-ring A. 2. Clamp 3. Return hose assembly 11. Gear housing assembly Location in steering gear assembly : Vehicle front : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. Revision: 2011 September ST-34 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications INFOID:0000000007495880 Steering gear model PR26AM Fluid capacity (Approx.) (US qt, lmp qt) B C 1.0 (1-1/8, 7/8) Steering Wheel INFOID:0000000007495881 D Item Standard Steering wheel axial end play E 0 mm (0 in) Steering wheel play on the outer circumference 0 – 35 mm (0 – 1.38 in) Steering wheel turning torque 7.45 N·m (0.76 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Steering Angle F INFOID:0000000007495882 Unit: Degree minute (Decimal degree) Item Inner wheel Outer wheel ST Standard Minimum 39° 00′ (39.0°) Nominal 42° 00′ (42.0°) Maximum 43° 00′ (43.0°) Nominal 36° 00′ (36.0°) Steering Column H I INFOID:0000000007495883 J Item Standard Rotating torque 0.49 N·m (0.05 kg-m, 4 in-lb) or less K Steering column length* 416 – 420 mm (16.38 – 16.54 in) Impact displacement absorption part dimension* 95.3 – 97.3 mm (3.752 – 3.831 in) Tilt operating range* 46 mm (1.81 in) Telescopic operating range* 40 mm (1.57 in) L *: For measuring position, refer to ST-13, "Inspection". M Intermediate Shaft INFOID:0000000007495884 Item N Standard Shaft length* 630.7 – 638.5 mm (24.83 – 25.14 in) Shaft sliding range* 80 mm (3.15 in) O *: For measuring position, refer to ST-17, "Inspection". Steering Gear and Linkage INFOID:0000000007495885 P Item Pinion rotating torque* Standard Around neutral position (within ±100°) Average Maximum variation 0.98 N·m (0.10 kg-m, 9 in-lb) Rack sliding force Revision: 2011 September 1.59 – 2.0 N·m (0.17 – 0.20 kg-m, 14 – 17 in-lb) 226 – 285 N (23.1 – 29.0 kg-f, 50.1 – 64.0 lb-f) ST-35 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Item Rack vertical movement Outer socket ball joint Standard Rack axial direction Measuring position: At 5 mm (0.20 in) from the edge of gear housing assembly 0.265 mm (0.0104 in) or less Rack turning direction Measuring position: At adjusting screw axial direction 0.265 mm (0.0104 in) or less Swing force* (Spring balance measurement) 4.41 – 42.7 N (0.45 – 4.35 kg-f, 1.0 – 9.59 lb-f) Rotating torque 0.3 – 2.9 N·m (0.03 – 0.29 kg-m, 3 – 25 in-lb) Axial end play 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less Swing force* (Spring balance measurement) Inner socket ball joint Axial end play 7.2 – 56.1 N (0.74 – 5.72 kg-f, 1.62 – 12.61 lb-f) 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less Inner socket length 120 mm (4.72 in) or less Rack stroke neutral position 79.0 mm (3.110 in) *: For measuring position, refer to ST-29, "Inspection". Oil Pump INFOID:0000000007495886 Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Item Relief oil pressure Standard Oil pump assembly: Iron cover type 9,700 – 10,300 (99 – 105, 1,407 – 1,493) Oil pump assembly: Resin cover type 9,900 – 10,400 (101 – 106, 1,436 – 1,508) Revision: 2011 September ST-36 2012 QUEST STEERING SECTION STC STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Service Notice and Precautions for Hydraulic Pump Electric Power Steering System ..................... 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly ......................... 5 SYSTEM .............................................................. 6 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM ............................................................... 6 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : System Description .............. 6 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe ............................... 8 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function .............. 9 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) ........................................10 CONSULT Function ................................................ 10 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM ......................................... 14 Wiring Diagram ........................................................14 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 15 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 15 Work Flow ................................................................15 Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................16 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 18 DTC Logic ................................................................18 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................18 H I J C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY ................ 19 DTC Logic ................................................................19 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19 K C1606 EPS MOTOR .......................................... 22 DTC Logic ................................................................22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ................................................ 23 DTC Logic ................................................................23 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23 L M N C160A HEAT PROTECTION ............................ 24 DTC Logic ................................................................24 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ........11 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 25 Reference Value ..................................................... 11 Fail-safe .................................................................. 12 Protection Function ................................................. 12 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 13 DTC Index ............................................................... 13 Description ...............................................................25 DTC Logic ................................................................25 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................25 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP ........................... 26 Component Function Check ....................................26 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 27 Revision: 2011 September STC C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............... 18 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 14 F STC-1 2012 QUEST O P HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON ........................................................... 27 UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT ......................................................... 31 Description .............................................................. 27 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 27 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 31 HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF ......................................................... 28 Description .............................................................. 28 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28 STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT ............................................. 29 UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) ....................... 32 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 32 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 34 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ....... 34 Removal and Installation ......................................... 34 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29 Revision: 2011 September STC-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492022 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: E Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by F an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag STC Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Service Notice and Precautions for Hydraulic Pump Electric Power Steering System I J K INFOID:0000000007492023 • Check if air pressure and size of tires are proper, the specified part is used for the steering wheel is genuine part. • Check if the connection of steering column assembly and steering gear assembly is proper (there is not looseness of mounting bolts, damage of rods, boots or sealants, and leakage of grease, etc.). • Check if the wheel alignment is adjusted properly. • Check if there is any damage or modification to suspension or body resulting in increased weight or altered ground clearance. • Check if installation conditions of each link and suspension are proper. • Check if the battery voltage is proper. • Check connection conditions of each connector are proper. • Check that NISSAN genuine power steering fluid (E-PSF) is used. If power steering fluid other than genuine fluid is used, steering may become extremely hard. • You may hear a high pitch noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated, especially at low speed such as a parking lot. However this is not a malfunction. Steer at low speed condition makes higher load for steering rack, so pump works higher rotation to provide more hydraulic flow to create more power assistance for lighter steering effort. This pump rotation is electrically controlled based on rotation map in ECU. • Before connecting or disconnecting the power steering control module harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable. Because battery voltage is applied to power steering control module even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. Revision: 2011 September STC-3 2012 QUEST L M N O P COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492024 JSGIA0913GB A. Engine room right side No. 1. 2. Component Function Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Steering angle sensor signal Steering angle sensor Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Vehicle speed signal Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Combination meter The hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON according to the signal received by CAN communication from the power steering control module. 3. 4. Hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp (In combination meter) STC-6, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : System Description" ECM Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Engine status signal Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. Revision: 2011 September STC-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Component 5. 6. 7. Function A Reservoir tank Power steering oil pump assembly 8. Power steering oil pump STC-5, "Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly" Power steering motor B Power steering control module Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly INFOID:0000000007492025 The power steering oil pump assembly is primarily composed of the reservoir tank (1), power steering oil pump (2), power steering motor (3), and power steering control module (4). C D E F JSGIA0914ZZ RESERVOIR TANK STC Fluid is filled from the reservoir tank. POWER STEERING OIL PUMP The power steering oil pump is driven by the power steering motor and generates hydraulic oil pressure in the system. H POWER STEERING MOTOR The power steering motor is controlled by the power steering control module and drives the power steering oil pump. POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE By receiving steering angle sensor signal and vehicle speed signal, the power steering control module calculates hydraulic pressure of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system according to the driving conditions. The power steering control module controls the power steering motor. I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-5 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492026 • The system is composed primarily of the power steering oil pump assembly (power steering control module, power steering motor, power steering oil pump, and reservoir tank), hydraulic pipes, and steering gear assembly. • The power steering control module controls the speed of the power steering motor according to the vehicle speed and steering angle speed. By changing the power steering oil pump flow, the power steering control module controls the steering assist force. • According to the power steering motor control, the system hydraulic pressure is transmitted from the power steering motor to power steering oil pump. The power steering oil pump is driven by the system hydraulic pressure. • After engine start, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system performs control. • When a malfunction occurs in the system, the fail-safe function stops the hydraulic pump electric power steering system (manual steering state) or restricts its operation (certain steering assist force). Refer to STC8, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe". • When the power steering function is used continuously in an extreme manner, the protective function reduces the output to the power steering motor. Refer to STC-9, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function". SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSGIA0915GB INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Communicates the signal from each control unit via CAN communication. Control unit Signal status ECM Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Engine status signal Steering angle sensor Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Steering angle sensor signal Combination meter Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication. • Vehicle speed signal Receives mainly the following signals from power steering control module via CAN communication. • Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp signal OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS Revision: 2011 September STC-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > When the steering angle speed is high or the vehicle speed is low, force is generated by increasing discharge amount from the power steering oil pump and by raising system hydraulic pressure. A B C JSGIA0916GB D OPERATION PRINCIPLE When Steering Wheel is in the Neutral Position E F STC H I J JSGIA0918GB Because the hydraulic routes open at the power steering pump, gear housing right side, gear housing left side, and reservoir tank, the hydraulic pressure applied to the right side and left side of the gear housing is equal and no steering assist force is generated. K When Steering Wheel is Rotated to the Right L M N O P JSGIA0919GB The hydraulic routes open from power steering pump to gear housing right side and from gear housing left side to reservoir tank, providing left direction assist force to the rack. Revision: 2011 September STC-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > When Steering Wheel is Rotated to the Left JSGIA0917GB The hydraulic routes open from power steering pump to gear housing left side and from gear housing right side to reservoir tank, providing right direction assist force to the rack. CONDITIONS FOR HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP ON • When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is operating and steering assist force is being generated, the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp is OFF. • When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is stopped by the fail-safe or protective function and steering assist force is not being generated, the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turns ON to inform the driver that the system is in the manual steering state. NOTE: When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system turns ON according to the protection system, the cause is internal high temperature state of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system. By stopping the engine, internal temperature of the system decreases. After starting the engine, the system returns to the normal state and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. (The system is not malfunctioning.) For information about the protective function, refer to STC-9, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function". • When the ignition switch is turned ON, this lamp turns ON for lamp check (system check). When the system is operating normally, the lamp turns OFF after the engine starts. Condition Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp Ignition switch ON. (Lamp check) ON After engine start (steering assist force is generated) OFF When steering assist is stopped ON HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492027 When an error occurs in the hydraulic pump electric power steering system, fail-safe brings the system to a halt (manual steering) or restricted (constant steering assist level) state. When the system is in a halt state, fail-safe turns ON the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp to warn the driver that the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is in the manual steering state. DTC Fail-safe condition C1143 Certain steering assist force C1601 Manual steering state C1606 Manual steering state C1607 Certain steering assist force Revision: 2011 September STC-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DTC Fail-safe condition A C1608 Manual steering state U1000 Normal control NOTE: If the cause is in a different ECU, the state changes to fixed steering assist force. B HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function INFOID:0000000007492028 • When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or turned all the way for a long period during parking or low speed driving, the function of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system becomes limited to prevent the system from overheating. If the steering wheel is operated further more, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system stops and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp may be turned ON. In this case, the steering wheel operation temporarily becomes hard. This is not a malfunction. When the engine is turned OFF (ignition switch OFF) and steering operation is stopped for a while, the temperature of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system decreases and the steering operation returns to normal after restarting the engine. • Then, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. If the system is OFF under the protection state, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON to warn that the system is in the manual steering state. (This is not a system malfunction.) In addition, the following DTC remains to distinguish from malfunction. DTC C160A C D E F STC vehicle condition The system temporarily enters the manual steering state. (This is not a hydraulic pump electric power steering system malfunction.) H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-9 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000007492029 FUNCTION CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown as per the following. Diagnostic test mode Function ECU identification The part number stored in the control unit can be read. Self Diagnostic Results Self-diagnostic results and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly* Data monitor Input/Output data in the power steering control module can be read. * : The following diagnosis information is erased by erasing. ECU IDENTIFICATION Displays the part number stored in the control unit. SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index". When “CRNT” is displayed on self-diagnosis result. • The system is presently malfunctioning. When “PAST” is displayed on self-diagnosis result. • System malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal. DATA MONITOR MODE Monitor item (Unit) Remarks BATTERY VOLT (V) Displays the power supply voltage for power steering control module. STR ANG SPD (deg/s) Displays the steering angle speed based on the steering angle signal transmitted by CAN communications. MOTOR CURRENT (A) Displays the current value consumed by power steering control module. MTR REV SPD COMM (rpm) Displays the power steering motor speed command value. MTR REV SPD (rpm) Displays the power steering motor speed. C/U TEMP (°C or °F) Displays the temperature of the power steering control module. C/U TEMP A (°C or °F) Displays the temperature of the power steering control module. MTR ASSIST (%) Displays the current percentage of the allowable assist ratio power steering motor. ESTM VHCL SPD (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the power steering control module. WARNING LAMP (On/Off) Hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp control status is displayed. ENGINE STATUS (STOP/RUN/CRANK) Engine speed is displayed from engine condition signal with CAN communication VHCL SPD JUDGE (OK/NG) Displays the receiving status of the vehicle speed signal transmitted by CAN communications. Revision: 2011 September STC-10 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE Reference Value INFOID:0000000007492030 B VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL C Data monitor Monitor item BATTERY VOLT STR ANG SPD MOTOR CURRENT MTR REV SPD COMM Condition D Engine running Battery voltage (V) The steering wheel is not steered. Approx. 0.0 deg/s The steering wheel is steered. Displays steering angle speed (deg/s) Engine running Engine running Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering force) MAX approx. 10 Steering wheel: Right or left turn Displays consumption current of power steering control module (A) Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering force) Shows an almost constant value (rpm) Steering wheel: Right or left turn The value changes as a steering speed (rpm) Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering force) MTR REV SPD Display value Engine running Steering wheel: Right or left turn Shows an almost constant value (rpm)*2 speed (rpm)*2 C/U TEMP A Engine running Displays temperature of inside of power steering control module (°C or °F) MTR ASSIST Engine running 100%*3 Vehicle stopped 0.00 km/h or mph WARNING LAMP ENGINE STATUS VHCL SPD JUDGE Approximately equal to the indication While driving on speedometer*4 (inside of ±10%) Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp: ON On Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp: OFF Off Engine not running STOP Engine running RUN Engine cranking CRANK Vehicle speed signal can be received via CAN communication OK Vehicle speed signal cannot be received via CAN communication NG STC-11 H J K L M N O *1: The value changes according to load of power steering motor. *2: This is in close agreement with a motor speed command value. Although a quick steering operation may cause disagreement, this is not a malfunction. *3: Usually, 100% is displayed. An excessive steering operation gradually lowers the percentage. When left standing, the percentage returns to 100%. *4: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This is not a malfunction. Revision: 2011 September STC I Engine running ESTM VHCL SPD F The value changes as a steering Displays temperature of inside of power steering control module (°C or °F) C/U TEMP E A*1 2012 QUEST P POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > TERMINAL LAYOUT JSGIA0835ZZ PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire Color) Description Condition Value (Approx.) + − Signal name Input/Output 1 (R) Ground Battery power supply Input Always 8.5 – 18.5 V 2 (B) Ground Ground — Always 0V 5 (BR) Ground Ignition power supply 7 (P) — CAN-L Input/Output — — 8 (L) — CAN-H Input/Output — — Input Ignition switch: ON 8.5 – 18.5 V Ignition switch: OFF 0V Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492031 When an error occurs in the hydraulic pump electric power steering system, fail-safe brings the system to a halt (manual steering) or restricted (constant steering assist level) state. When the system is in a halt state, fail-safe turns ON the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp to warn the driver that the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is in the manual steering state. DTC Fail-safe condition C1143 Certain steering assist force C1601 Manual steering state C1606 Manual steering state C1607 Certain steering assist force C1608 Manual steering state U1000 Normal control NOTE: If the cause is in a different ECU, the state changes to fixed steering assist force. Protection Function INFOID:0000000007492032 • When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or turned all the way for a long period during parking or low speed driving, the function of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system becomes limited to prevent the system from overheating. If the steering wheel is operated further more, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system stops and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp may be turned ON. In this case, the steering wheel operation temporarily becomes hard. This is not a malfunction. When the engine is turned OFF (ignition switch OFF) and steering operation is stopped for a while, the temperature of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system decreases and the steering operation returns to normal after restarting the engine. • Then, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. If the system is OFF under the protection state, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON to Revision: 2011 September STC-12 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > warn that the system is in the manual steering state. (This is not a system malfunction.) In addition, the following DTC remains to distinguish from malfunction. DTC A vehicle condition C160A The system temporarily enters the manual steering state. (This is not a hydraulic pump electric power steering system malfunction.) DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000007492033 B C When multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check one by one depending on the following priority list. Priority D Priority order item (DTC) 1 • C1601 BATTERY VOLT • C1606 EPS MOTOR • C1608 CONTROL UNIT 2 • C1607 EEPROM 3 • C160A HEAT PROTECTION 4 • C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT • U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT E F DTC Index INFOID:0000000007492034 DTC Items (CONSULT screen terms) STC Reference C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT STC-18, "DTC Logic" C1601 BATTERY VOLT STC-19, "DTC Logic" C1606 EPS MOTOR STC-22, "DTC Logic" C1607 EEPROM STC-23, "DTC Logic" C1608 CONTROL UNIT STC-23, "DTC Logic" C160A HEAT PROTECTION STC-24, "DTC Logic" U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT STC-25, "DTC Logic" NOTE: If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to STC-13, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-13 2012 QUEST HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492035 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCGWA0343GB Revision: 2011 September STC-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007492036 B DETAILED FLOW 1.INTERVIEW FROM THE CUSTOMER C Clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, perform an interview utilizing reproduce symptoms as well as fully understand it. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. Check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer, if necessary. CAUTION: Customers are not professional. Never guess easily like “maybe the customer means that...,” or “maybe the customer mentions this symptom”. D E >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SYMPTOM F Reproduce the symptom that is indicated by the customer, based on the information from the customer obtained by interview. Also check that the symptom is not caused by protection function. Refer to STC-12, STC "Protection Function". CAUTION: When the symptom is caused by normal operation, fully inspect each portion and obtain the understanding of customer that the symptom is not caused by a malfunction. H >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION 1. 2. I With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. Check “C/U TEMP“ and “C/U TEMP A“ in “DATA MONITOR“ in “EPS“. Monitor item J Values C/U TEMP 90°C (194°F) or less C/U TEMP A 90°C (194°F) or less K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Wait with the ignition switch OFF until the data monitor indication becomes 90 °C (194 °F) or less. Go to 4 after the temperature drops to 90 °C (194 °F) or less. L M 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform self-diagnosis. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Record or print DTC and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 7. N O 5.RECHECK SYMPTOM With CONSULT 1. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”. 2. Perform DTC confirmation procedures for the error detected system. NOTE: If some DTCs are detected at the same time, determine the order for performing the diagnosis based on STC13, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". Is any DTC detected? Revision: 2011 September STC-15 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. 6.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PARTS • Repair or replace error-detected parts. • Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing. • When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”. >> GO TO 8. 7.IDENTIFY ERROR-DETECTED SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Estimate error-detected system based on symptom diagnosis and perform inspection. Can the error-detected system be identified? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. 8.FINAL CHECK With CONSULT 1. Check the reference value for power steering control module. 2. Recheck the symptom and check that symptom is not reproduced on the same conditions. Is the symptom reproduced? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000007492037 Description • In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about his/her concerns carefully. To systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the interview sheet referring to the interview points. • In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may cause a DTC to be detected. Interview sheet sample Interview sheet Customer name MR/MS Storage date Registration number Initial year registration Vehicle type VIN Engine Mileage km (Mile) The steering wheel position (center) is in the wrong position. Warning lamp turns on. Symptom Noise Vibration Others ( ) First occurrence Recently Frequency of occurrence Always Others ( ) Under a certain conditions of Sometimes (time(s)/day) Irrelevant Climate conditions Weather Fine Temperature Hot Relative humidity High Road conditions Revision: 2011 September Cloud Warm Rain Cool Moderate Snow Cold Others ( Temperature [Approx. ) °C (°F)] Low Urban area Suburb area High way Mounting road (uphill or down hill) Rough road STC-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > Interview sheet A Registration number Initial year registration Vehicle type VIN Storage date Engine Mileage Operation conditions, etc. Irrelevant When engine starts During idling During driving During acceleration At constant speed driving During deceleration During cornering (right curve or left curve) During steering Customer name MR/MS km (Mile) B C D Other conditions Memo E F STC H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-17 2012 QUEST C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492038 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display item C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT Malfunction detected condition Possible cause When a malfunction is detected in steering angle sensor. • Harness or connector • Steering angle sensor • Power steering control module DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “C1143” detected? YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492039 1.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to BRC-77, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. 2.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. Revision: 2011 September STC-18 2012 QUEST C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492040 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC B Display item C1601 BATTERY VOLT Malfunction detected condition Possible cause When a power supply voltage to the power steering control module is maintained at 18.5 V or more or at less than 8.5 V continuously for 0.5 seconds or more. • Harness or connector • Power steering control module • Fuse • Battery power supply circuit • Battery DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE C D E 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. F STC 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “C1601” detected? YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure" NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure H I INFOID:0000000007492041 J 1.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power steering control module harness connector. Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground. Power steering control module Connector Terminal E33 2 K L — Continuity Ground Existed M Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors, and repair or replace error-detected parts. N 2.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (1) 1. Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground. Power steering control module 2. 3. Connector Terminal E33 1 — Voltage (Approx.) Ground 8.5 – 18.5 V P Turn ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground. Revision: 2011 September STC-19 O 2012 QUEST C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Power steering control module Connector Terminal E33 1 — Voltage (Approx.) Ground 8.5 – 18.5 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (2) 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the 100A fusible link (#D). Disconnect battery terminal with fusible link harness connector. Check continuity and short between power steering control module harness connector terminal and battery terminal with fusible link harness connector terminal. Power steering control module 5. Battery terminal with fusible link Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E33 1 E1 3 Continuity Existed Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground. Power steering control module Connector Terminal E33 1 — Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for battery power supply circuit. Refer to PG-11, "Wiring Diagram BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. 4.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (3) 1. Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground. Power steering control module 2. 3. Connector Terminal E34 5 — Voltage (Approx.) Ground 0V Turn ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground. Power steering control module Connector Terminal E34 5 — Voltage (Approx.) Ground 8.5 – 18.5 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (4) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the 10A fuse block (#3). Check continuity and short between power steering control module harness connector terminal and fuse block harness connector terminal. Revision: 2011 September STC-20 2012 QUEST C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Power steering control module 4. Fuse block (J/B) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E34 5 E103 4F A Continuity Existed B Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground. Power steering control module Connector Terminal E34 5 — Continuity Ground Not existed C Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-29, "Wiring Diagram IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. D E 6.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec- F tor. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace steering oil pump assembly. Refer to STC ST-32, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-21 2012 QUEST C1606 EPS MOTOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1606 EPS MOTOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492042 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display item C1606 EPS MOTOR Malfunction detected condition Possible cause When the motor driver malfunction of power steering control module or power steering control module motor driver malfunction is detected. • Harness or connector • Power steering control motor • Power steering control module DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “C1606” detected? YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-22, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492043 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds. 4. Perform self-diagnosis for “EPS”. Is DTC “C1606” detected? YES >> Power steering motor is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST32, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions. Revision: 2011 September STC-22 2012 QUEST C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492044 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1607 C1608 B Display item Malfunction detected condition EEPROM When the memory (EEPROM) system malfunction is detected in power steering control module. CONTROL UNIT When the internal malfunction is detected in power steering control module. Possible cause C Power steering control module D DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING E If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F >> GO TO 2. 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE STC With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected? YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-23, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure H I INFOID:0000000007492045 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS J With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds. 4. Perform self-diagnosis for “EPS”. Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected? YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-23 2012 QUEST C160A HEAT PROTECTION < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C160A HEAT PROTECTION DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492046 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C160A Display item HEAT PROTECTION Malfunction detected condition Possible cause When the steering wheel is operated excessively and the interior temperature of the power steering system reaches 118°C (244.4°F) or more. (Protection function) NOTE: Although the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON, this is not a system malfunction. The state returns to normal after stopping steering operation and waiting until the system interior temperature drops to 90°C (194°F) or less. The protection of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “C160A” detected? YES >> Go to STC-15, "Work Flow". NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September STC-24 2012 QUEST U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT A Description INFOID:0000000007492047 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit communicate data but selectively reads required data only. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007492048 B C D DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC U1000 Display item CAN COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction detected condition Power steering control module is not transmitting/receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. Possible cause CAN communication error E F DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING STC If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H >> GO TO 2. 2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE I With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is DTC “U1000” detected? YES >> Go to STC-25, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure J K INFOID:0000000007492049 L Proceed to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-25 2012 QUEST HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492050 1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP Check that the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turns ON when ignition switch turns ON. Then, hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turns OFF after the engine is started. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis. Refer to STC-26, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492051 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. 2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP SIGNAL With CONSULT Turn the ignition switch ON. Select in “WARNING LAMP” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Check that the item in “DATA MONITOR” is “On”. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 4. Start the engine. CAUTION: Never drive the vehicle. 5. Check that the item in “DATA MONITOR” is “Off”. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for combination meter power supply circuit. Refer to MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. 3.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. Revision: 2011 September STC-26 2012 QUEST HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON Description B INFOID:0000000007492052 The hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON (lamp check). Diagnosis Procedure C INFOID:0000000007492053 D 1.CHECK THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP Perform trouble diagnosis for the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp system. Refer to STC26, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check that the pin terminals and the connection of each connector are normal. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. E F STC H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-27 2012 QUEST HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF Description INFOID:0000000007492054 Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp does not turn OFF several seconds after engine started Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492055 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP Perform the trouble diagnosis of hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp. Refer to STC-26, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. 3.POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Perform the trouble diagnosis of power steering control module power supply and ground. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check that the pin terminals and the connection of each connector are normal. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. Revision: 2011 September STC-28 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007492056 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS B With CONSULT Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is a malfunctioning system displayed? YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (1) D With CONSULT Start the engine. CAUTION: Never drive the vehicle. 2. Turn the steering wheel until it stops. 3. Select “MTR ASSIST” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “100%”? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 1. E F STC 3.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (2) With CONSULT 1. Select “C/U TEMP” and “C/U TEMP A” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. 2. Stop the system until the DATA MONITOR display value drops to “90°C (194°F)” or less. 3. Check whether symptom continues. Did symptom continue? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> This occurs because the protection function lowers the assist force. It is not a system malfunction. INSPECTION END H I J 4.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (3) With CONSULT 1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. (There is no steering force) 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “10.5 V” or more? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Check the battery power system. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". K 5.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (4) M L With CONSULT Select “ESTM VHCL SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Monitor item Test condition When stopped ESTM VHCL SPD N Display value O 0.00 km/h or mph Approximately equal to the in- While driving dication on speedometer* (Inside of ±10%) P *: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This is not a malfunction. Is the check result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Check the combination meter, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to MWI-35, "CONSULT Function" and BRC-29, "CONSULT Function". Revision: 2011 September STC-29 2012 QUEST STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > 6.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (5) With CONSULT Select “STR ANG SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Monitor item STR ANG SPD Test condition Display value The steering wheel is not steered. Approx. 0.0 deg/s The steering wheel is steered. Displays steering angle speed (deg/s) Is the check result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check the steering angle sensor. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure". 7.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (6) With CONSULT Select “ENGINE STATUS” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “RUN”? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check the ECM. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function". 8.CHECK THE STEERING FORCE Check the steering force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". Is the check result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> It is possible that there is a mechanical malfunction. Check the steering system. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". Revision: 2011 September STC-30 2012 QUEST UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007492057 B 1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP Check the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp while engine is running. Does the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turn OFF? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to STC-28, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D 2.CHECK WHEEL ALIGNMENT E Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Adjustment of wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Adjustment". F 3.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". STC H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-31 2012 QUEST UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492058 1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis. Is a malfunctioning system displayed? YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (1) With CONSULT Start the engine. CAUTION: Never drive the vehicle. 2. Turn the steering wheel until it stops. 3. Select “MTR ASSIST” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “100%”? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 1. 3.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (2) With CONSULT 1. Select “C/U TEMP” and “C/U TEMP A” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. 2. Stop the system until the DATA MONITOR display value drops to “90°C (194°F)” or less. 3. Check whether symptom continues. Did symptom continue? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> This occurs because the protection function lowers the assist force. It is not a system malfunction. INSPECTION END 4.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (3) With CONSULT 1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. (There is no steering force) 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “10.5 V” or more? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Check the battery power system. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure". 5.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (4) With CONSULT Select in “ESTM VHCL SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Monitor item Test condition When stopped ESTM VHCL SPD Display value 0.00 km/h or mph Approximately equal to the in- While driving dication on speedometer* (Inside of ±10%) *: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This is not a malfunction. Is the check result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. Revision: 2011 September STC-32 2012 QUEST UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NO >> Check the combination meter, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to MWI-35, "CONSULT Function" and BRC-29, "CONSULT Function". A 6.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (5) With CONSULT Select “STR ANG SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Monitor item STR ANG SPD B Test condition Display value The steering wheel is not steered. Approx. 0.0 deg/s The steering wheel is steered. Displays steering angle speed (deg/s) C D Is the check result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check the steering angle sensor. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure". E 7.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (6) F With CONSULT Select “ENGINE STATUS” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”. Is the display value “RUN”? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check the ECM. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function". STC 8.CHECK STEERING COLUMN AND STEERING GEAR H Check the steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. • Steering column assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". • Steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-19, "Exploded View". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. I J 9.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection". K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STC-33 2012 QUEST POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492059 CAUTION: Disconnect battery negative terminal before starting operations. Never remove power steering control module from steering oil pump assembly. When replacing power steering control module, replace steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September STC-34 2012 QUEST ENGINE SECTION STR STARTING SYSTEM A STR C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 10 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 10 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Description ...............................................................10 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................10 PREPARATION ............................................ 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 F G S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 11 Description ...............................................................11 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................11 Special Service Tools ................................................ 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 Symptom Table .......................................................12 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 13 H I STARTING SYSTEM ......................................... 12 J Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 SYSTEM .............................................................. 5 System Description ................................................... 5 WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 6 STARTING SYSTEM ........................................... 6 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 6 STARTER MOTOR ........................................... 13 Exploded View .........................................................13 Removal and Installation .........................................14 Inspection ................................................................15 K L SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................ 17 BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 17 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 7 Starter Motor ............................................................17 Work Flow ................................................................. 7 M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-1 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007494668 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Revision: 2011 September STR-2 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007494669 Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name STR C Description — (J-44373 Model MCR620) Starting/Charging System Tester D E SEL403X Tests starting and charging systems. For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. F G Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007494670 Tool name H Description I Power tool Loosening bolts, nuts and screws J K PIIB1407E L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007494671 JMBIA3732ZZ A. Engine room LH No. Component part Description 1. BCM BCM controls the starter relay. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 2. IPDM E/R CPU inside IPDM E/R controls the starter control relay. Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location". 4. Starter motor The starter motor plunger closes and the motor is supplied with battery power, which in turn cranks the engine, when the “S” terminal is supplied with electric power. TCM TCM supplies power to the starter relay and starter control relay inside IPDM E/R when the selector lever is shifted to the P or N position. Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location". 3. Revision: 2011 September STR-4 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A System Description INFOID:0000000007494672 SYSTEM DIAGRAM STR C D E F G H I JMBIA3733GB OUTLINE J • TCM transmits shift position signal to BCM and IPDM E/R, when selector lever is in the P or N position. • IPDM E/R supplies power supply to starter relay and starter control relay, when shift position signal is received. • When starter operating condition is satisfied, IPDM E/R turns starter control relay ON by starter control relay control signal. • When engine cranking condition is satisfied, BCM turns starter relay ON by starter control relay control signal. • Then battery power is supplied to starter motor (“S” terminal) through starter control relay and starter relay. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-5 2012 QUEST STARTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM STARTING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007494673 JCBWA2061GB Revision: 2011 September STR-6 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007494674 STR OVERALL SEQUENCE C D E F G H I J K L M N O P JSBIA0001GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September STR-7 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter motor and alternator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER Perform the starting system test with Starting/Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. Test result CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL>>GO TO 2. CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW>>GO TO 5. CHARGE BATTERY>>Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin. REPLACE BATTERY>>Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin. If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. 2.CRANKING CHECK Check that the starter motor operates correctly. Does the engine crank normally? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4. 3.ENGINE START CHECK Check that the engine starts. Does the engine start? YES >> Starter motor is OK. INSPECTION END NO >> Starter motor is OK. Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or engine control system. Refer EM and EC sections. Once resolved, perform battery test again. 4.STARTER MOTOR ACTIVATION Check that the starter motor operates. Does the starter motor turn? YES >> Check ring gear and starter motor drive pinion. Once resolved, perform battery test again. NO >> GO TO 7. 5.COMPARISON BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT AND CRANKING VOLTAGE Compare the engine coolant temperature and the cranking voltage with the specifications. Minimum Specification of Cranking Voltage Referencing Coolant Temperature Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Voltage [V] −30 to −20 (−22 to −4) 8.6 −19 to −10 (−2 to 14) 9.1 −9 to 0 (16 to 32) 9.5 More than 1 (More than 34) 9.9 Is the voltage less than the specified value? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> GO TO 6. 6.STARTER OPERATION Check the starter operation status. Does the starter motor turn smoothly? YES >> Starter motor is OK. INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 7. 7.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-10, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is “B” terminal circuit normal? Revision: 2011 September STR-8 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair as needed. A 8.“S” CONNECTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check “S” connector circuit. Refer to STR-11, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is “S” connector circuit normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair as needed. STR C 9.ENGINE ROTATION STATUS Check that the engine can be rotated by hand. Does the engine turn freely by hand? YES >> Replace starter motor. NO >> Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or powertrain mechanism. Refer to EM, TM or CL sections. Once resolved, perform battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-9 2012 QUEST B TERMINAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS B TERMINAL CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000007494675 The “B” terminal is constantly supplied with battery power. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494676 CAUTION: Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure. 1. Remove fuel pump fuse. 2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. 1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check that starter motor “B” terminal connection is clean and tight. Check voltage between starter motor “B” terminal and ground. Terminals (+) Starter motor “B” terminal Terminal F10 2 Voltage (Approx.) (–) Ground Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check harness between battery and starter motor for open circuit. 2.CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) 1. 2. Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and starter motor “B” terminal. Terminals (–) (+) Starter motor “B” terminal Terminal Battery positive terminal F10 2 Condition Voltage (Approx.) When the ignition switch is in START position Less than 0.5 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) 1. 2. Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal. Terminals (+) (–) Starter motor case Battery negative terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.) When the ignition switch is in START position Less than 0.2 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow". NO >> Check the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity. Revision: 2011 September STR-10 2012 QUEST S TERMINAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > S TERMINAL CIRCUIT A Description INFOID:0000000007494677 The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition switch is turned to the START posi- STR tion while the selector lever is in the P or N position. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007494678 C CAUTION: Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure. 1. Remove fuel pump fuse. 2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. D 1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect starter motor connector. Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position. Check voltage between starter motor harness connector and ground. E F Terminals (+) Starter motor harness connector Terminal F47 1 Condition Voltage (Approx.) G When the ignition switch is in START position Battery voltage H (–) Ground Is the inspection result normal? YES >> “S” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow". NO >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between starter motor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. Starter motor harness connector IPDM E/R harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No. F47 1 F12 80 Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow". NO >> Repair the harness. J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-11 2012 QUEST STARTING SYSTEM < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS STARTING SYSTEM Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007494679 Symptom No normal cranking Starter motor does not rotate Revision: 2011 September Reference Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow". STR-12 2012 QUEST STARTER MOTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A STARTER MOTOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000007494680 STR REMOVAL C D E F G H I J JMBIA3731GB 1. Converter housing 2. Starter motor mounting bolt 3. “B” terminal harness 4. “B” terminal harness nut 5. “S” terminal harness connector 6. Starter motor K : Vehicle front L : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) M DISASSEMBLY N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-13 2012 QUEST STARTER MOTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Type: M000TA0072 JPBIA1777GB 1. Magnetic switch assembly 2. Dust cover kit 3. Gear case assembly 4. Pinion assembly 5. Stopper 6. Ring 7. Ring 8. Stopper 9. Yoke assembly 10. Armature assembly 11. Brush holder assembly 12. Metal 13. Rear cover 14. Gear assembly 15. Shift lever set 16. Clutch gear assembly 17. Center bracket 18. Packing 19. Gear shaft : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) NOTE: Apply high-temperature grease to lubricate the bearing, gears and frictional surface when assembling the starter. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007494681 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove battery. Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation". Remove air duct (inlet) and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect TCM harness connector (1) and ECM harness connectors (2). : Vehicle front JMBIA3032ZZ Revision: 2011 September STR-14 2012 QUEST STARTER MOTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove harness fixing clips (A) and harness mounting bolt (B). A : Vehicle front STR C JMBIA3033ZZ 5. D Remove ECM bracket mounting bolts (A), and then remove ECM bracket (1). E : Vehicle front F G JMBIA3034ZZ 6. Remove battery tray mounting bolts (A), and then remove battery tray (1). H : Vehicle front I J JMBIA3035ZZ 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. K Disconnect “S” terminal harness connector Remove “B” terminal harness nut, and then diconnect “B” terminal harness. Remove splash guard LH. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". Remove starter motor mounting bolts form the left side of the vehicle and the engine room. Remove starter motor form the vehicle L M INSTALLATION Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut to the specified torque. • To prevent damage to the parts, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first. • To prevent damage to the vehicle, after connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. • To prevent damage to the parts, check battery terminal for poor connection caused by corrosion. NOTE: Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to GI-53, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection". Inspection INFOID:0000000007494682 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Pinion/Clutch Check 1. Inspect pinion teeth. Revision: 2011 September STR-15 2012 QUEST N O P STARTER MOTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of ring gear teeth.) 2. Inspect reduction gear teeth. • Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.) 3. Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates smoothly in the opposite direction. • If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is evident, replace. Revision: 2011 September STR-16 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Starter Motor INFOID:0000000007494683 M000TA0072 Type STR C MITSUBISHI make Reduction gear type System voltage No-load [V] 12 Terminal voltage [V] 11 Current [A] Less than 90 Revolution [rpm] [mm (in)] 28.0 (1.102) Minimum length of brush [mm (in)] 5.5 (0.217) [N (kg, lb)] E More than 2,400 Minimum diameter of commutator Brush spring tension D F 15.0 - 20.4 (1.53 - 2.08, 3.37 - 4.59) Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft [mm (in)] Less than 0.2 (0.008) Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper [mm (in)] 0.5 - 2.0 (0.020 - 0.079) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September STR-17 2012 QUEST VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER SECTION VTL VENTILATION SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 PREPARATION ............................................ 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 VENTILATION SYSTEM ..................................... 5 VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) ..................................................................... 5 VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description ................................ 5 VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) .............................................................................. 6 VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description ................................ 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 7 DUCT AND GRILLE ............................................ 7 Exploded View .......................................................... 7 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE ................................ 8 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation ................................................................. 8 SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE ....................................... 9 SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation .................................................................... 9 SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE ....................................... 9 SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation .................................................................... 9 Revision: 2011 September CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT ................................... 9 CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation ................................................................... 9 FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE .................................10 FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................10 F G H SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE .....................................10 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................10 VTL FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 ............................................11 FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................11 J FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 ............................................11 FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................11 K FOOT DUCT ...............................................................11 FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation .................11 L REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE ...................................12 REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................12 M REAR FOOT DUCT ...................................................12 REAR FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation ......12 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT ......................................13 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation ........................................................................13 N O BLOWER UNIT ................................................. 15 Exploded View .........................................................15 Removal and Installation .........................................16 BLOWER MOTOR ............................................ 17 Exploded View .........................................................17 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR ........................................17 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................17 VTL-1 2012 QUEST P REAR BLOWER MOTOR ......................................... 17 REAR BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 17 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 19 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER .................................. 18 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 19 Exploded View ........................................................ 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 Replacement .......................................................... 18 Revision: 2011 September In-cabin microfilter ................................................... 19 VTL-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007797663 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: VTL Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September VTL-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007491429 Tool name Description Remover tool Removes clips, pawls and metal clips JMKIA3050ZZ Revision: 2011 September VTL-4 2012 QUEST VENTILATION SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A VENTILATION SYSTEM VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) B VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description INFOID:0000000007491430 C OUTLINE Ventilation system is controlled by A/C auto amp. (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or A/C amp. (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING). For details of air conditioning system, refer to HAC-16, "FRONT AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or HAC-153, "FRONT MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING). D AIR FLOW E Front F G H VTL J JMIIA1796ZZ K Rear (Second seat underfoot portion) L M N JMIIA0959ZZ ×: Applicable Air outret MODE/DEF position indication Revision: 2011 September Ventilator (1) Foot Front (2) Rear (3) Defroster (4) Center Side × × × × × × — — × × × × — × × × × — × — — VTL-5 O P — × 2012 QUEST VENTILATION SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description INFOID:0000000007491431 OUTLINE Ventilation system is controlled by A/C auto amp. (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or A/C amp. (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING). For details of air conditioning system, refer to HAC-26, "REAR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or HAC-158, "REAR MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING). AIR FLOW Headlining JMIIA0960ZZ Rear (Third seat underfoot portion) JMIIA1797ZZ ×: Applicable Air outlet Mode position Revision: 2011 September VTL-6 Ventilator (1) Foot (2) × — × × — × 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A DUCT AND GRILLE Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491432 B FRONT C D E F G H VTL J K L M N JMIIA1798ZZ O 1. Instrument upper garnish 2. Sunload sensor 3. Instrument panel center bracket 4. Front defroster nozzle 5. Instrument panel bracket LH 6. Side defroster nozzle LH 7. Center ventilator duct 8. Ionizer 9. Ionizer bracket 10. Front pillar lower garnish LH 11. Instrument panel 12. Side defroster grille LH 13. Side ventilator grille LH 14. Center ventilator grille LH 15. Cluster lid D 16. Center ventilator grille RH 17. Side ventilator grille RH 18. Front floor duct 2 LH 19. Front floor duct 2 RH 20. Front floor duct 1 RH 21. Foot duct RH 22. Blower unit assembly 23. Intake duct 24. Clip 25. Heater & cooling unit assembly 26. Front floor duct 1 LH 27. Foot duct LH Revision: 2011 September VTL-7 P 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 28. Side defroster grille RH 29. Front pillar lower garnish RH 30. Side defroster nozzle RH 31. Instrument panel bracket RH : Pawl : Metal clip REAR JMIIA1799ZZ 1. Rear ventilator grille 1 LH 2. Rear upper ventilator duct 1 3. Rear ventilator grille 2 LH 4. Rear foot duct 1 5. Rear A/C unit assembly 6. Rear ventilator pillar duct 7. Rear upper ventilator duct 3 8. Rear upper ventilator duct 2 9. Rear ventilator grille 2 RH 10. Rear ventilator grille 1 RH : Clip CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491433 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disengage fixing pawls, and then remove center ventilator grille. INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September VTL-8 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Install in the reverse order of removal. SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE A SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491434 B REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screw (passenger side only). Disengage fixing pawls and metal clips, and then remove side ventilator grille. C INSTALLATION D Install in the reverse order of removal. SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491435 E REMOVAL F Disengage fixig pawl using a remover tool (A), and then remove side defroster grille. CAUTION: Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage. G : Pawl H JMIIA1155ZZ VTL INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. J CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491436 K REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screws, and then remove center ventilator duct. L M N O P JMIIA1800ZZ : Screw INSTALLATION Revision: 2011 September VTL-9 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491437 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove center ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-9, "CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation". Remove side defroster nozzle LH and RH. Refer to VTL-10, "SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screw (A), and then remove instrument panel center bracket (1). Remove fixing screws (B), and then remove front defroster nozzle (2). JMIIA1801ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491438 REMOVAL Driver Side 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove instrument panel bracket LH (1). Remove fixing screw (B), and then remove side defroster nozzle LH (2). JMIIA1802ZZ Passenger Side 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove instrument panel bracket RH (1). Remove fixing screw (B), and then remove side defroster nozzle RH (2). JMIIA1803ZZ Revision: 2011 September VTL-10 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491439 B REMOVAL C Driver Side 1. 2. Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove front floor duct 1 LH. D Passenger Side 1. 2. Remove instrument lower cover RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove harness fixing clip (A), and then remove front floor duct 1 RH. E F G JMIIA1804ZZ H INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. VTL FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491440 J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Pull up front of front floor carpet to secure work space. Refer to INT-29, "FRONT FLOOR CARPET : Removal and Installation". Remove front floor spacer. Refer to INT-29, "Exploded View". Remove fixing screws (A) and harness clips (B), and then remove front floor duct 2. K L M N JMIIA1160ZZ O INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. FOOT DUCT P FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491441 REMOVAL Driver Side 1. Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September VTL-11 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove foot duct LH (1) and aspirator (2) from heater & cooling unit assembly as a set. JMIIA1805ZZ Passenger Side 1. 2. Remove heater & cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-48, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove foot duct RH from heater & cooling unit assembly. JMIIA1806ZZ INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491442 REMOVAL Disengage fixing metal clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove rear ventilator grille. : Metal clip JMIIA1185ZZ INSTALLATION Install in reverse order of removal. REAR FOOT DUCT REAR FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491443 REMOVAL 1. Remove luggage side lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September VTL-12 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove fixing clips (A), and then remove rear foot duct 1. A B C JMIIA1861ZZ D INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR VENTILATOR DUCT E REAR VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491444 F REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove back pillar garnish RH. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove rear ventilator pillar duct. G H VTL JMIIA1807ZZ 3. 4. 5. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". Remove mounting bolt (A). Slide the right side of rear upper ventilator duct 2 as shown in the figure, disengage rear upper ventilator duct 3, and then remove rear upper ventilator duct 2. J K L M N JMIIA1167ZZ 6. 7. Remove rear sunroof stay (sunroof models only). Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View". Remove cartain air bag mounting bolts. Refer to SR-20, "Exploded View". O P Revision: 2011 September VTL-13 2012 QUEST DUCT AND GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 8. Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove fixing clips. : Clip JMIIA1168ZZ 9. Remove rear upper ventilator duct 3. 10. Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove fixing clips. : Clip JMIIA1169ZZ 11. Remove rear upper ventilator duct 1. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September VTL-14 2012 QUEST BLOWER UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BLOWER UNIT A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491445 REMOVAL B C D E F G H VTL JMIIA1808GB 1. Steering member 2. Knee protector 3. Instrument stay LH 4. Instrument stay RH 5. Drain hose 6. Blower unit assembly 7. Heater & cooling unit assembly J K : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L DISASSEMBLY M N O P Revision: 2011 September VTL-15 2012 QUEST BLOWER UNIT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JMIIA1809ZZ 1. Intake duct case 2. Intake shutter case 3. Intake door 4. Intake upper case 5. Intake lower case 6. Intake door motor 7. Blower motor 8. Outlet seal 9. Intake seal : Vehicle front Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491446 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove front A/C unit assembly. Refer to HA-48, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screw, and then separate blower unit assembly and heater & cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September VTL-16 2012 QUEST BLOWER MOTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BLOWER MOTOR A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491447 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR B Refer to VTL-15, "Exploded View". REAR BLOWER MOTOR C Refer to HA-55, "Exploded View". FRONT BLOWER MOTOR FRONT BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491448 D REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. E Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect harness connector (A). Remove fixing screws (B), and then remove front blower motor. F : Vehicle front G H JMIIA1810ZZ INSTALLATION VTL Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR BLOWER MOTOR REAR BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation J INFOID:0000000007491449 REMOVAL 1. 2. K Removal rear A/C unit assembly. Refer to HA-56, "REAR A/C UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". Remove fixing screws (A), and then disconnect harness connector (B). L M N JMIIA1164ZZ 3. O Remove rear blower motor. P INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September VTL-17 2012 QUEST IN-CABIN MICROFILTER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007491450 Refer to HA-46, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007491451 REMOVAL 1. Remove filter cover. 2. Compress in-cabin microfilter while sliding it towards vehicle right side. 3. Remove in-cabin microfilter from heater & cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: If the filter is deformed/damaged when removing, replace it with a new one. Deformed/damaged filter may deteriorate the dust collecting performance. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing, handle the filter with extreme care to avoid deforming/damaging. Replacement INFOID:0000000007491452 Replace in-cabin microfilter. Refer to VTL-19, "In-cabin microfilter". Revision: 2011 September VTL-18 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) In-cabin microfilter INFOID:0000000007491453 Replacement interval MA-6, "Schedule 1" and MA-8, "Schedule 2". B C D E F G H VTL J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September VTL-19 2012 QUEST DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA SECTION WCS WARNING CHIME SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 COMMON ITEM .........................................................18 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................18 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 BUZZER .....................................................................19 BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....20 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 COMBINATION METER ................................... 21 Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 Combination Meter .................................................... 4 SYSTEM .............................................................. 5 BCM ................................................................... 30 J LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME ....................... 8 LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description ................................................................ 8 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 32 List of ECU Reference .............................................30 Wiring Diagram ........................................................31 Work Flow ................................................................32 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ................................ 10 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description .......................................................................... 10 COMBINATION METER ............................................34 COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure ....34 Revision: 2011 September L DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 32 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 34 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................18 K WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ............................. 31 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME .......................................................................... 9 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description ..................................... 9 CONSULT Function ................................................ 14 H I WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 31 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) ..............................................................14 G Reference Value ......................................................21 Fail-Safe ..................................................................28 DTC Index ...............................................................29 WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ....................................... 5 WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description ...... 5 WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......... 7 WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-Safe ................... 7 PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME .... 11 PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME : System Description ............................................... 11 F M POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 34 WCS O METER BUZZER CIRCUIT ............................... 35 Component Function Check ....................................35 Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................35 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................................................................. 36 Component Function Check ..................................36 Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................36 Component Inspection .............................................37 WCS-1 2012 QUEST P PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 38 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 38 Component Inspection ............................................ 38 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 39 THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND ...................................................... 39 Description .............................................................. 39 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 39 Revision: 2011 September THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND .............................................................. 40 Description .............................................................. 40 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 40 THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND ............... 41 Description .............................................................. 41 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 41 WCS-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007495725 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-3 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007495726 JSNIA4337ZZ Component Function 1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 2. Parking brake switch Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter. BCM Based on the signals received from various units and switches, transmits the buzzer output signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 4. Combination meter • Receives a buzzer output signal from the BCM with CAN communication line and sounds the buzzer. • Judges whether the parking brake is released from the vehicle speed signal received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line and the parking brake switch signal from the parking brake switch, and sounds the buzzer if necessary. 5. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) Transmits the seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) to the combination meter. 3. Combination Meter INFOID:0000000007495727 The buzzer (1) for the warning chime system is integrated in the combination meter. JSNIA3387ZZ Revision: 2011 September WCS-4 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A WARNING CHIME SYSTEM WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007495728 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F JSNIA3116GB G COMBINATION METER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL) H Input signal Signal name Transmit unit Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Buzzer output signal BCM I J Output signal Signal name Vehicle speed signal Reception unit K BCM BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL) L Input signal Signal name Vehicle speed signal Transmit unit M Combination meter Output signal WCS Signal name Buzzer output signal Reception unit Combination meter O COMBINATION METER The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer installed in the combination meter when receiving the buzzer output signal transmitted from each unit. BCM BCM receives signals from various units and transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter via CAN communication if it judges that the warning buzzer should be activated. WARNING CHIME FUNCTION LIST Revision: 2011 September WCS-5 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Warning functions Out line Light reminder warning chime The warning chime sounds when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position with the combination switch (lighting switch) in the 1st or 2nd position and the driver side door open. Front fog light reminder warning chime The warning chime sounds when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK, OFF or ACC position from ON position, with combination switch (lighting switch) is in AUTO position and the front fog lamp switch in ON position. Seat belt warning chime Parking brake release warning chime Revision: 2011 September The warning chime sounds when the driver seat belt is unfastened with the ignition switch in ON position. The warning chime sounds when the ignition switch is in ON position with the parking brake in operation and the vehicle speed 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more. WCS-6 Warning judgment unit Refer to BCM WCS-8, "LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description" BCM WCS-9, "FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description" BCM WCS-10, "SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description" Combination meter WCS-11, "PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME : System Description" 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007495729 A B C D E F G H I J K L M WCS O JSNIA4223GB WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000007495730 The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning. Function Buzzer Revision: 2011 September Specifications The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication. WCS-7 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description INFOID:0000000007495731 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSNIA2421GB WARNING CHIME OPERATION CONDITIONS If all of the following conditions are fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch OFF or ACC position Combination switch (Lighting switch) 1st or 2nd position Driver side door Open [front door switch (driver side) ON] WARNING CHIME CANCEL CONDITIONS Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch ON Combination switch (Lighting switch) OFF or AUTO position Driver side door Close [front door switch (driver side) OFF] SIGNAL PATH 1. BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges light reminder warning chime is necessary from signals below. Signal name Signal source Ignition switch signal — Combination switch signal Combination switch (Lighting switch) Driver door switch signal Front door switch (driver side) 2. BCM BCM Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM. Signal name Buzzer output signal Revision: 2011 September Signal source BCM Combination meter WCS-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > TIMING CHART A B C D E JSNIA2426GB F FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description INFOID:0000000007495732 G SYSTEM DIAGRAM H I J JSNIA3117GB K WARNING CHIME OPERATION CONDITIONS Warning chime sounds during 2 seconds when the ignition switch is in LOCK, OFF or ACC position, if all of below operation conditions is met. L Operation conditions Ignition switch ON position Combination switch (Lighting switch) AUTO position and front fog lamp switch ON position M SIGNAL PATH 1. WCS BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges front fog light reminder warning chime is necessary from signals below. O Signal name Ignition switch signal Combination switch signal 2. Signal source — P Combination switch (Lighting switch) BCM Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM. Revision: 2011 September WCS-9 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Signal name Signal source Buzzer output signal BCM Combination meter TIMING CHART JSNIA3110GB SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description INFOID:0000000007495733 SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSNIA3118GB WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS If all of the following conditions are fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch ON Driver seat belt Unfastened [seat belt buckle switch (driver side) ON] WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch OFF Seat belt (driver side) Fastened (driver side seat belt buckle switch OFF) 6 seconds after the start of warning sound SIGNAL PATH 1. BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges seat belt warning chime is necessary from signals below. Revision: 2011 September WCS-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Signal name Ignition switch signal Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) A Signal source — Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) B Combination meter BCM 2. Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM. Signal name Buzzer output signal D Signal source BCM C Combination meter E TIMING CHART F G H I JSNIA3123GB J SOUND SPECIFICATION K L M JSNIA3111GB PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME : System Description WCS INFOID:0000000007495734 SYSTEM DIAGRAM O P JSNIA2422GB Revision: 2011 September WCS-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS If all of the following conditions are fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch ON Parking brake During the operation (parking brake switch ON) Vehicle speed Approximately 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions are fulfilled. Operation conditions Ignition switch OFF Parking brake Release condition (parking brake switch OFF) Vehicle speed Approximately 3 km/h (1.9 MPH) or less SIGNAL PATH Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer when it judges that parking brake release warning chime is necessary from signals below. Signal name Signal source Ignition switch signal — Parking brake switch signal Parking brake switch Vehicle speed signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Combination meter Combination meter TIMING CHART JSNIA2428GB Revision: 2011 September WCS-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SOUND SPECIFICATION A B C JSNIA3139GB D E F G H I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-13 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000007616395 CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS CONSULT can perform the following diagnosis modes via CAN communication and the combination meter. System METER/M&A Diagnosis mode Description Self Diagnostic Result The combination meter checks the conditions and displays memorized errors. Data Monitor Displays the combination meter input/output data in real time. W/L ON History Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked. SELF DIAG RESULT Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR Display Item List X: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description SPEED METER [km/h] X Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] X Vehicle speed signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication. NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. Display item [Unit] ODO OUTPUT [km/h or mph] Odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication. TACHO METER [rpm] X Value of the engine speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication. NOTE: 8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received. FUEL METER [L] X Fuel level indicated on combination meter. X Value of engine coolant temperature signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. NOTE: 215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input. W TEMP METER [°C] ABS W/L [On/Off] Status of ABS warning lamp detected from ABS warning lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. VDC/TCS IND [On/Off] Status of VDC OFF indicator lamp detected from VDC OFF indicator lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. SLIP IND [On/Off] Status of VDC warning lamp detected from VDC warning lamp signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. BRAKE W/L [On/Off] Status of brake warning lamp detected from brake warning lamp signal is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. NOTE: Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts, the parking brake switch is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON. DOOR W/L [On/Off] Status of door open warning detected from door switch signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HI-BEAM IND [On/Off] Status of high beam indicator lamp detected from high beam request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. TURN IND [On/Off] Status of turn indicator lamp detected from turn indicator signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. Revision: 2011 September WCS-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description A LIGHT IND [On/Off] • Status of light indicator lamp detected from dimmer signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For U.S.A) • Status of light indicator lamp detected from position light request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For Canada) OIL W/L [On/Off] Status of oil pressure warning lamp detected from oil pressure switch signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. MIL [On/Off] Status of malfunction indicator lamp detected from malfunctioning indicator lamp signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. CRUISE IND [On/Off] Status of CRUISE indicator detected from ASCD status signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. SET IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. CRUISE W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. BA W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. O/D OFF IND [On/Off] Status of O/D OFF indicator detected from O/D OFF indicator signal is received from CVT shift selector. 4WD W/L [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. 4WD LOCK IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. FUEL W/L [On/Off] Low fuel warning status detected by the identified fuel level. WASHER W/L [On/Off] Status of low washer fluid warning judged from washer level switch input to combination meter. AIR PRES W/L [On/Off] Status of low tire pressure warning lamp judged from TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. KEY G/Y W/L [On/Off] Status of Intelligent Key system malfunction detected from Intelligent Key warning display signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. EPS W/L [On/Off] Status of EPS warning lamp judged from EPS warning lamp signal received from EPS control unit with CAN communication line. AFS OFF IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ECO MODE IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. LCD [B&P N, B&P I, ID NG, ROTAT, SFT P, INSRT, BATT, NO KY, OUTKY, LK WN, KY>PSW, Off] Displays status of Intelligent Key system warning judged from meter display signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. ACC TARGET [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC DISTANCE [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC OWN VHL [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC SET SPEED [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACC UNIT [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. SHIFT IND [P, R, N, D, L] Status of shift position indicator judged from shift position signal received from TCM with CAN communication line. Revision: 2011 September B C D E F G H I J K L M WCS O P WCS-15 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Display item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description BSW IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. BSW W/L [On/Off] Status of BSW warning lamp judged from BSW warning lamp signal received from BSW control module with CAN communication line. FUEL CAP W/L [On/Off] Status of fuel filler cap warning detected from fuel filler cap warning display signal is received from ECM via CAN communication. O/D OFF SW [On/Off] Status of overdrive control switch. M RANGE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NM RANGE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. AT SFT UP SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. AT SFT DWN SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. COMP F/B SIG [On/Off] A/C compressor activation condition that ECM judges according to the water temperature and the acceleration degree. PKB SW [On/Off] Status of parking brake switch. BUCKLE SW [On/Off] Status of seat belt buckle switch (driver side). BRAKE OIL SW [On/Off] Status of brake fluid level switch. A/C AMP CONN [On/Off] Status of A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal. ENTER SW [On/Off] Status of (ENTER) switch. SELECT SW [On/Off] Status of (SELECT) switch. ECO MODE SW [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. DISTANCE [km] Value of distance to empty calculated by combination meter. OUTSIDE TEMP [°C or °F] Ambient temperature value converted from ambient sensor signal received from ambient sensor. NOTE: This may not match with the temperature value indicated on the information display. (Because the information display value is a corrected value from the ambient sensor input value.) FUEL LOW SIG [On/Off] Status of fuel level low warning signal to output to AV control unit via CAN communication. BUZZER [On/Off] X Buzzer status (in the combination meter) is detected from the buzzer output signal received from each unit via CAN communication and the warning output condition of the combination meter. TPMS PRESS L [On/Off] Status of low tire pressure warning judged from low tire pressure warning lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line. 4WD AUTO IND [Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. NOTE: Some items are not available according to vehicle specification. W/L ON HISTORY • Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on. Revision: 2011 September WCS-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • “W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/indicator lamp is turned on. • The “TIME” above is: - 0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine and waiting for 30 seconds. - 1 - 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition. - NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp. NOTE: • W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts. • Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets low. A B C Display Item D Display item Description ABS W/L Lighting history of ABS warning lamp. VDC/TCS IND Lighting history of VDC OFF indicator lamp. SLIP IND Lighting history of VDC warning lamp. BRAKE W/L Lighting history of brake warning lamp. DOOR W/L Lighting history of door open warning. OIL W/L Lighting history of oil pressure warning lamp. C-ENG W/L Lighting history of malfunction indicator lamp. CRUISE IND Lighting history of CRUISE indicator. O/D OFF IND Lighting history of O/D OFF indicator lamp. FUEL W/L Lighting history of low fuel level warning. WASHER W/L Lighting history of low washer fluid warning. AIR PRES W/L Lighting history of low tire pressure warning lamp. KEY G/Y W/L Lighting history of Intelligent Key system malfunction. EPS W/L Lighting history of EPS warning lamp. BSW W/L Lighting history of BSW warning lamp. E F G H I J NOTE: In items displayed on the CONSULT screen, only those listed in the above table are used. K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-17 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007687416 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × Door lock DOOR LOCK × × Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September WCS-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter A Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* C D E F While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 B G H I J K The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: L M *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC WCS • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. O • Closing door P • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. BUZZER Revision: 2011 September WCS-19 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER) INFOID:0000000007495737 CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS Test item BUZZER Diagnosis mode Description Data Monitor Displays BCM input data in real time. Active Test Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending driving signal to them. DATA MONITOR Display item [Unit] Description PUSH SW [On/Off] Status of push-button ignition switch judged by BCM. UNLK SEN-DR [On/Off] Status of unlock sensor judged by BCM. VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] Value of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter with CAN communication line. TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] Status of lighting switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function. FR FOG SW [On/Off] Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function. DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM. CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Status of door lock unlock switch judged by BCM. ACTIVE TEST Display item [Unit] Description SEAT BELT WARN TEST The seat belt warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). ID REGIST WARNING The ID regist warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). LIGHT WARN ALM The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off). Revision: 2011 September WCS-20 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A COMBINATION METER Reference Value INFOID:0000000007616396 B VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL C Monitor Item SPEED METER [km/h] SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] ODO OUTPUT [km/h or mph] Condition Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON While driving Input value of vehicle speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received While driving Output value of vehicle speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received Ignition switch ON TACHO METER [rpm] Ignition switch ON FUEL METER [L] Ignition switch ON Value/Status — G H Input value of fuel level sensor signal — Input value of engine coolant temperature signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input J K I Ignition switch ON ABS W/L Ignition switch ON ABS warning lamp ON On ABS warning lamp OFF Off VDC/TCS IND Ignition switch ON VDC OFF indicator lamp ON On VDC OFF indicator lamp OFF Off SLIP IND Ignition switch ON VDC warning lamp ON On VDC warning lamp OFF Off BRAKE W/L Ignition switch ON Brake warning lamp ON On Brake warning lamp OFF Off DOOR W/L Ignition switch ON Door open warning ON On Door open warning OFF Off HI-BEAM IND Ignition switch ON High-beam indicator lamp ON On High-beam indicator lamp OFF Off TURN IND Ignition switch ON Turn signal indicator lamp ON On Turn signal indicator lamp OFF Off LIGHT IND Ignition switch ON Light indicator lamp ON On Light indicator lamp OFF Off Ignition switch ON Oil pressure warning lamp ON On Oil pressure warning lamp OFF Off Revision: 2011 September F — W TEMP METER [°C] OIL W/L E Output value of odometer signal (CAN communication signal) Input value of engine speed signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: 8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received Engine running D WCS-21 L M WCS O P 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition Value/Status MIL Ignition switch ON Malfunction indicator lamp ON On Malfunction indicator lamp OFF Off CRUISE IND Ignition switch ON CRUISE indicator ON On CRUISE indicator OFF Off Off SET IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. CRUISE W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off BA W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off O/D OFF IND Ignition switch ON O/D OFF indicator lamp ON On O/D OFF indicator lamp OFF Off 4WD W/L Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off 4WD LOCK IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off FUEL W/L Ignition switch ON During low fuel warning indication On Other than the above Off WASHER W/L Ignition switch ON During low washer fluid warning indication On Other than the above Off AIR PRES W/L Ignition switch ON Low tire pressure warning lamp ON On Low tire pressure warning lamp OFF Off KEY G/Y W/L Ignition switch ON During Intelligent Key system malfunction indication On Other than the above Off EPS warning lamp ON On EPS warning lamp OFF Off EPS W/L Ignition switch ON AFS OFF IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ECO MODE IND Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off Revision: 2011 September WCS-22 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition Value/Status A Ignition switch ON During engine start information indication B&P I Ignition switch ACC During engine start information indication B&P N Ignition switch LOCK During key ID warning indication ID NG Ignition switch LOCK During steering lock information indication ROTAT Ignition switch LOCK During P position warning indication SFT P Ignition switch LOCK During Intelligent Key insert information indication INSRT Ignition switch LOCK During Intelligent Key low battery warning indication BATT Ignition switch ON During take away warning indication NO KY Ignition switch LOCK During key warning indication OUTKY Ignition switch ON During ACC warning indication LK WN Ignition switch LOCK During Key ID verification information indication Ignition switch ON Other than above Off ACC TARGET Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC DISTANCE Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off ACC OWN VHL Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off K ACC SET SPEED Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off L ACC UNIT Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off M During the indication of “P” by shift position indicator P During the indication of “R” by shift position indicator R During the indication of “N” by shift position indicator N During the indication of “D” by shift position indicator D During the indication of “L” by shift position indicator L NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off BSW warning lamp ON On BSW warning lamp OFF Off LCD SHIFT IND Ignition switch ON BSW IND Ignition switch ON BSW W/L Ignition switch ON Revision: 2011 September B C WCS-23 D E F G KY>PSW H I J WCS O P 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item FUEL CAP W/L Condition Ignition switch ON Value/Status During fuel filler cap warning display indication On Other than above Off Overdrive control switch ON On Overdrive control switch OFF Off O/D OFF SW Ignition switch ON M RANGE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off NM RANGE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off AT SFT UP SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off AT SFT DWN SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off COMP F/B SIG Ignition switch ON A/C compressor activation condition On A/C compressor deactivation condition Off PKB SW Ignition switch ON Parking brake switch ON On Parking brake switch OFF Off BUCKLE SW Ignition switch ON Driver seat belt not fastened On Driver seat belt fastened Off BRAKE OIL SW Ignition switch ON Brake fluid level switch ON On Brake fluid level switch OFF Off A/C AMP CONN Ignition switch ON Other than the following On Receives ambient sensor power signal Off Ignition switch ON When On ENTER SW SELECT SW Ignition switch ON switch (enter switch) is pressed Other than above When Off switch (select switch) is pressed On Other than above Off ECO MODE SW Ignition switch ON NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off DISTANCE [km] Ignition switch ON — Distance to empty calculated by combination meter — Input value of ambient sensor signal (CAN communication signal) NOTE: This may not match the indicated value on the information display. OUTSIDE TEMP [°C or °F] Ignition switch ON FUEL LOW SIG Ignition switch ON During low fuel warning indication On Other than above Off BUZZER Ignition switch ON Buzzer ON On Buzzer OFF Off Revision: 2011 September WCS-24 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Monitor Item Condition TPMS PRESS L Ignition switch ON 4WD AUTO IND Ignition switch ON Value/Status During low tire pressure warning indication On Other than above Off NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. Off A B NOTE: Some items are not available according to vehicle specification. C TERMINAL LAYOUT D E F JPNIA1324ZZ G PHYSICAL VALUES Terminal No. (Wire color) Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) + – 1 (O) Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF — Battery voltage 2 (Y) Ground Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON — Battery voltage 3 (B) Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V 4 (B) Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V H I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-25 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + – Description Signal name Condition Input/ Output Value (Approx.) • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is maximum JPNIA1687GB 5 (B/P) Ground Illumination control signal Output Ignition switch ON • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is step 11 JPNIA1686GB 8 (SB) 10 (P) 10 (P) Ground 11 (G) 10 (P) 12 (BR) 13 (Y) 14 (V) 15 (BR) 10 (P) 10 (P) 10 (P) — Trip reset switch signal Meter control switch ground Enter switch signal Select switch signal Illumination control switch signal (+) Illumination control switch signal (−) Air bag signal Revision: 2011 September Input Ignition switch ON • Lighting switch 1ST position • When meter illumination is minimum 12 V When trip reset switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V — Ignition switch ON Input Ignition switch ON When switch (enter switch) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V Ignition switch ON When switch (select switch) is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When switch [illumination control switch (+)] is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V When switch [illumination control switch (−)] is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V Input Input Input Input Ignition switch ON Ignition switch ON — — WCS-26 — 0V — 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) + Description – Signal name Condition Input/ Output A Value (Approx.) B At idle [after warming up, approx. 20°C (68°F)] 16 (L) Ground Engine coolant temperature signal Output C Ignition switch ON JSNIA3528ZZ D E At idle [after warming up, approx. 80°C (176°F)] F JSNIA3530ZZ G 18 (LG) Ground Ambient sensor signal Input Ignition switch ON — H JSNIA0014GB 19 (R) Ground Input Ignition switch ON Ambient sensor ground — Ignition switch ON — 0V A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal — 5V J 20 (Y) Ground 21 (L) — CAN-H — — — — 22 (P) — CAN-L — — — — — Ignition switch ON — 0V — Ignition switch ON — Charge warning lamp ON 12 V Charge warning lamp OFF 0V 23 (B) 24 (B) Ground Ground Ground Fuel level sensor ground K L M 0V WCS 25 (BR) Ground Alternator signal Input Ignition switch ON 26 (BR) 0V Parking brake switch signal Input Ignition switch ON Parking brake applied. Ground Parking brake released. 12 V 27 (Y) Brake fluid level switch signal 12 V Input Ignition switch ON Brake fluid level is normal Ground Brake fluid level is less than LOW level 0V 28 (V) 0V Security signal Input Ignition switch ON Security indicator lamp ON Ground Security indicator lamp OFF 12 V Revision: 2011 September I WCS-27 2012 QUEST O P COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Description + – Signal name Input/ Output 29 (G) Ground Washer level switch signal Input Value (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch ON Washer level switch ON 0V Washer level switch OFF 5V NOTE: The maximum voltage varies depending on the specification (destination unit). 31 (SB) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Output Ignition switch ON Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)] JSNIA0012GB 32 (P) Ground 34 (O) 24 (B) 35 (P) Ground 36 (BR) — Ignition switch ON Overdrive control switch signal Input Fuel level sensor signal Input Ignition switch ON Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) Input Ignition switch ON Passenger seat belt warning signal Input When overdrive control switch is pressed 0V Other than the above 5V MWI-68, "Component Inspection" — When driver seat belt is fastened 5V When driver seat belt is unfastened 0V — — — Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000007616397 FAIL-SAFE The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning. Function Specifications Speedometer Tachometer Reset to zero by suspending communication. Engine coolant temperature gauge Illumination control Revision: 2011 September When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode. WCS-28 2012 QUEST COMBINATION METER < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > Function Specifications Odo/trip meter An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout. Shift position indicator The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Door open warning Interrupt indication Fuel filler cap warning B The display turns OFF by suspending communication. Low tire pressure warning Information display A C Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Trip computer Distance to empty Average vehicle speed • When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result. • When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two seconds, the last calculation results are indicated. D E Travel distance Buzzer The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication. F ABS warning lamp VDC warning lamp Brake warning lamp G The lamp turns ON by suspending communication. EPS warning lamp Malfunction indicator lamp Low tire pressure warning lamp The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication. H High beam indicator lamp Warning lamp/indicator lamp Turn signal indicator lamp I VDC OFF indicator lamp O/D OFF indicator lamp Tail lamp indicator lamp The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication. J CRUISE indicator lamp Oil pressure warning lamp K Key warning lamp BSW warning lamp L DTC Index Display contents of CONSULT INFOID:0000000007616398 Diagnostic item is detected when... Refer to CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. MWI-58, "Diagnosis Procedure" CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination meter. MWI-59, "Diagnosis Procedure" The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more. MWI-60, "Diagnosis Procedure" ENGINE SPEED [B2267] If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more. MWI-61, "Diagnosis Procedure" WATER TEMP [B2268] If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or more. MWI-62, "Diagnosis Procedure" VEHICLE SPEED [B2205] Revision: 2011 September WCS-29 2012 QUEST M WCS O P BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > BCM List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007495741 ECU Reference BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" BCS-59, "DTC Index" Revision: 2011 September WCS-30 2012 QUEST WARNING CHIME SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM A WARNING CHIME SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007495742 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". B (option abbreviation; if notdeC D E F G H I J K L M WCS O P JCNWA3917GB Revision: 2011 September WCS-31 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007495743 OVERALL SEQUENCE JSNIA4492GB DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under which the malfunction occurred. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SYMPTOM • Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer. • Check if any other malfunctions are present. >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK CONSULT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS 1. Connect CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index". 2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below: Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data. Are self-diagnosis results normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 5. Revision: 2011 September WCS-32 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 4.NARROW DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts. >> GO TO 5. B 5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. NOTE: If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repairing or replacing malfunctioning parts. C D >> GO TO 6. 6.FINAL CHECK E Check that the warning buzzer in the combination meter operates normally. Does it operate normally? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 1. F G H I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-33 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT COMBINATION METER COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007616401 1.CHECK FUSE Check for blown fuses. Power source Fuse No. Battery 11 Ignition switch ON or START 4 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (−) Combination meter Connector Terminal 1 M34 Ground 2 Ignition switch position OFF ON Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check harness between combination meter and fuse. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Combination meter Connector Continuity Terminal 3 M34 Ground 4 Existed 23 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: 2011 September WCS-34 2012 QUEST METER BUZZER CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > METER BUZZER CIRCUIT A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495745 1.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER B 1. Select “BUZZER” of “BCM” on CONSULT. 2. Perform “LIGHT WARN ALM” of “Active Test”. Does meter buzzer beep? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL D Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “BUZZER” monitor value. E BUZZER Under the condition of buzzer input : On Except above : Off F Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Diagnosis Procedure G INFOID:0000000007495746 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF COMBINATION METER H Check power supply of combination meter. Refer to MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair power supply circuit of combination meter. I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-35 2012 QUEST SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007495747 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “BUCKLE SW” monitor value. BUCKLE SW When seat belt is fastened : Off When seat belt is unfastened : On >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495748 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal M34 35 Voltage (Approx.) Condition Combination meter Ground When driver seat belt is fastened 12 V When driver seat belt is unfastened 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) harness connector. Combination meter 4. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M34 35 B523 51 Continuity Existed Check harness continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 35 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check harness continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September WCS-36 2012 QUEST SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > A Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) Connector Terminal B523 50 Continuity Ground Existed B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. C Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495749 1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector. Check continuity between terminals. Terminal 51 Condition 50 When seat belt is fastened Continuity F Not existed When seat belt is unfastened Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace seat belt buckle (driver side). Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation". G H I J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-37 2012 QUEST PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495750 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground. (+) (−) Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 26 Condition Ground Ignition switch ON Voltage (Approx.) When parking brake is applied 0V When parking brake is released 12 V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and parking brake switch harness connector. Terminals Combination meter 4. Parking brake switch Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M34 26 E27 1 Continuity Existed Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. Terminals Combination meter Connector Terminal M34 26 Continuity Ground Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007495751 1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September WCS-38 2012 QUEST THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND Description INFOID:0000000007495752 B INFOID:0000000007495753 C Check that the headlamps operate normally by operating the combination switch (lighting switch). Do they operate normally? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to EXL-75, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [XENON TYPE (without daytime running light system)], EXL-77, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [XENON TYPE (with daytime running light system)], EXL-173, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [HALOGEN TYPE (without daytime running light system)], or EXL-175, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [HALOGEN TYPE (with daytime running light system)]. D Light reminder warning chime does not sound even though headlamp is illuminated. Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (LIGHTING SWITCH) OPERATION 2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT E F G Perform the check for the driver side door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-209, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH H I Perform a unit check for the driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-210, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-453, "Removal and Installation". J K L M WCS O P Revision: 2011 September WCS-39 2012 QUEST THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND Description INFOID:0000000007495754 • The parking brake warning buzzer sounds continuously during vehicle travel though the parking brake is released. • The parking brake warning buzzer does not sound at all even though driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495755 1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP 1. 2. Start the engine. Check the operation of the brake warning lamp by operating the parking brake. When parking brake is applied : ON When parking brake is released : OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation" NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Perform check for the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to BRC-99, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Perform a unit check for the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September WCS-40 2012 QUEST THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND Description A INFOID:0000000007495756 B • Seat belt warning chime does not sound. • Seat belt warning chime sounds continuously. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007495757 1.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check the operation of the seat belt warning lamp in the combination meter. Seat belt fastened : OFF Seat belt not fastened : ON C E Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 4. F 2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL G Check if the seat belt warning chime is activated by performing BCM active test. Refer to WCS-20, "BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. H 3.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL I Check if buzzer switches to proper condition (On/Off) on data monitor of combination meter. Refer to WCS-14, "CONSULT Function". Buzzer active condition : On Buzzer non-active condition : Off K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". L 4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT Perform the check for the seat belt buckle "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair harness or connector. J switch (driver side) circuit. Refer to WCS-36, M WCS 5.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) Perform a unit check for the seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to WCS-37, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace seat belt buckle (driver side). Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September WCS-41 2012 QUEST O P SUSPENSION SECTION WT ROAD WHEELS & TIRES A B C D WT CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 16 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM ...... 16 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Service Notice and Precautions for TPMS ................ 3 Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel ...... 4 Wiring Diagram ........................................................16 PREPARATION ............................................ 5 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 17 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 Description ...............................................................19 Work Procedure .......................................................19 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION .................................................................. 20 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6 Description ...............................................................20 Work Procedure .......................................................20 System Description ................................................... 8 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9 Easy Fill Tire Alert Function ...................................... 9 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................11 COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 11 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 11 AIR PRESSURE MONITOR ...................................... 12 AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) ...................... 12 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 15 BCM ....................................................................15 List of ECU Reference ............................................ 15 Revision: 2011 September H Work Flow ................................................................17 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 SYSTEM .............................................................. 8 G BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 17 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM ................................................................... 19 Component Parts Location ........................................ 6 BCM .......................................................................... 6 Tire Pressure Sensor ................................................ 7 Tire Pressure Receiver ............................................. 7 Information Display ................................................... 7 F I J DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 22 K L C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE ....................................................... 22 DTC Logic ................................................................22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 M C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................. 24 N DTC Logic ................................................................24 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24 C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................. 26 DTC Logic ................................................................26 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26 C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL .................... 28 DTC Logic ................................................................28 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................28 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 29 WT-1 2012 QUEST O P Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 30 TPMS ................................................................. 30 Symptom Table ...................................................... 30 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON ....................................... 33 Description .............................................................. 33 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 33 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF ..................................... 34 Description .............................................................. 34 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 34 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 39 NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 39 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 40 ROAD WHEEL ................................................... 40 Inspection ................................................................ 40 Wheel Balance Adjustment ..................................... 40 Tire Rotation ........................................................... 42 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 43 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY .................... 43 Exploded View ........................................................ 43 Removal and Installation ......................................... 43 Inspection ................................................................ 43 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP BLINKS .............................................................. 35 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR .............................. 45 Description .............................................................. 35 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35 Exploded View ........................................................ 45 Removal and Installation ......................................... 45 EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE .................................................................. 36 TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER ........................... 47 Description .............................................................. 36 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED ..................... 38 Description .............................................................. 38 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 38 Revision: 2011 September Removal and Installation ......................................... 47 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 48 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 48 Road Wheel ............................................................ 48 Tire Air Pressure ..................................................... 48 WT-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492989 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: WT Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by F an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag G Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Service Notice and Precautions for TPMS WT-3 J K INFOID:0000000007492990 • Low tire pressure warning lamp blinks for 1min, then turns ON when occurring any malfunction except low tire pressure. Erase the self-diagnosis memories for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), or register the ID to turn low tire pressure warning lamp OFF. For ID registration, refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". • ID registration is required when replacing or rotating wheels, replacing tire pressure sensor or BCM. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". • For easy fill tire alert function, refer to the following. - When inflating the tires, park the vehicle in the safe area and ensure the safety of the working area. - Read and understand the easy fill tire alert function prior to use. - Inflate the tires one at a time. - If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again. The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area. - Despite the high-precision TPMS pressure sensor, an indicated value may differ from that of the pressure gauge. - Air pressure is measured rather high due to the rise in tire air temperature after driving. - If TPMS is malfunctioning, the easy fill tire alert is unusable. • Replace grommet seal, valve core and valve cap of tire pressure sensor in TPMS, when replacing each tire by reaching the wear limit. Refer to WT-45, "Exploded View". • Because the tire pressure sensor conforms to North America radio law, the following items must be observed. - The sensor may be used only in North America. - It may not be used in any method other than the specified method. - It must not be disassembled or modified. Revision: 2011 September I 2012 QUEST L M N O P PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel INFOID:0000000007492991 • Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel is designed for each type of vehicle. Use it on the specified vehicle only. • Use Genuine NISSAN parts for the road wheels, valve caps and wheel nuts. • Always use them after adjusting the wheel balance. For the balance weights, use Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel weights. • Use caution when handling the aluminum wheels, because they can be easily scratched. When removing dirt, do not use any abrasives, a wire brush, or other items that may scratch the coating. Use a neutral detergent if a detergent is needed. • After driving on roads scattered with anti-icing salts, wash off the wheels completely. • When installing road wheels onto the vehicle, always wipe off any dirt or foreign substances to prevent them from being trapped between the contact surfaces of wheel. • Never apply oil to nut and bolt threads. • When tightening the valve cap there is a risk of damaging the valve cap if a tool is used. Tighten by hand. Revision: 2011 September WT-4 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION A PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000007492992 B The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name C Description ID registration — (J-45295) Tire pressure sensor activation tool D WT SEIA0462E F Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007492993 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts G H I PBIC0190E J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-5 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492994 JSEIA0404GB A. Behind of combination meter No. B. Wheel C. Component parts View with roof finisher removed Function 1. Low tire pressure warning lamp (in combination meter) WT-8, "System Description" 2. Information display (in combination meter) WT-7, "Information Display" 3. Combination meter Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication. • Low tire pressure warning lamp signal • TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal 4. TCM Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication. • P range signal 5. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication. • Vehicle speed signal 6. BCM WT-6, "BCM" 7. Tire pressure sensor WT-7, "Tire Pressure Sensor" 8. Remote keyless entry receiver (tire pressure receiver) WT-7, "Tire Pressure Receiver" BCM INFOID:0000000007492995 • The BCM reads the air pressure signal received by the tire pressure receiver, controls the low tire pressure warning lamp, hazard warning lamp, and horn operation. It also has a judgment function to detect a system malfunction. • Controls easy fill tire alert function. Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function". Revision: 2011 September WT-6 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Tire Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000007492996 A The tire pressure sensor integrated with a valve is installed on a wheel, and transmits a detected air pressure signal by radio wave. Tire Pressure Receiver INFOID:0000000007492997 • Tire pressure receiver is incorporated into remote keyless entry receiver. • The tire pressure receiver receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the tire pressure sensor in each wheel. Information Display B C INFOID:0000000007492998 D The vehicle information display is shown when a low tire pressure warning lamp signal is transmitted from BCM to combination meter. via CAN communication. Condition Vehicle information display Ignition switch OFF WT Not indicated Ignition switch ON Low tire pressure warning lamp remains ON after blinking for one minute. [Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction.] Ignition switch ON Low tire pressure warning lamp remains ON. (low tire pressure) Not indicated F Indicated G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-7 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000007492999 • During driving, the TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) receives the signal transmitted from tire pressure sensor installed in each wheel. The BCM (Body Control Module) of this system has pressure judgment and trouble diagnosis functions. When the tire pressure monitoring system detects low inflation pressure or another unusual symptom, the low tire pressure warning lamps in the combination meter comes on. • If the tire pressure is less than the specified value, the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates that the tire pressure is less than the specified value. • Activates the TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) when the vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more. • Added easy fill tire alert function to TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System). Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function". SYSTEM DIAGRAM JSEIA0407GB INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table. Component parts Signal item Combination meter Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication. • Low tire pressure warning lamp signal • TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication. • Vehicle speed signal TCM Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication. • P range signal IPDM E/R Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication. • Horn remainder signal LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP INDICATION CONDITION Uses CAN communication from the BCM to illuminate the low tire pressure warning lamp on the combination meter. Condition Low tire pressure warning lamp Ignition switch OFF OFF Ignition switch ON (system normal) Warning lamp turns on for 1second, then turns off. Revision: 2011 September WT-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Condition Low tire pressure warning lamp A Low tire pressure ON Tire pressure sensor ID not registered in BCM Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction (Other diagnostic item) B Warning lamp blinks 1 min, then turns on. HAZARD WARNING LAMP INDICATION CONDITION The hazard warning lamp blinks under the following conditions. • When ID registration is completed. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". • During the use of the easy fill tire alert function. C HORN CONTROL CONDITION D During the use of easy fill tire alert function. Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007493000 WT F G H I J K L M JSEIA0405GB N Easy Fill Tire Alert Function INFOID:0000000007493001 • This function operates only when the select lever position is in P-range with the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. NOTE: The easy fill tire alert function is recommended to use with the ignition switch ON. Revision: 2011 September WT-9 2012 QUEST O P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • This function informs the driver of the satisfaction of the recommended COLD tire pressure. The hazard warning lamp blinks when reaching the recommended COLD tire pressure during radio wave reception. After reaching the recommended COLD tire pressure, the horn sounds once and the hazard warning lamp stops blinking. • When tire pressure becomes a value equal to or more than 30 kPa (0.31 kg/cm2, 4 psi) more than the recommended COLD tire pressure, the hazard warning lamp and the horn operates three times. After deflating the tire and reaching the recommended COLD tire pressure, the horn sounds only once and the hazard warning lamp JSEIA0214GB stops blinking. NOTE: • After starting to inflate the tire, it takes a few seconds for the easy fill tire alert to function. • If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again. The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area. Revision: 2011 September WT-10 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) A COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007705897 B APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. C Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. D CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. WT F SYSTEM APPLICATION G BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × × × Door lock DOOR LOCK Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × I J K L M N × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September H WT-11 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. • Closing door • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. AIR PRESSURE MONITOR AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONIRevision: 2011 September WT-12 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > TOR) INFOID:0000000007493003 A APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. B Diagnosis mode Function Description Self Diagnostic Result Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. Active Test Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed. Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. C D SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". WT DATA MONITOR MODE Monitor item (Unit) Remarks F AIR PRESS FL (kPa kg/cm2 or Psi) AIR PRESS FR (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) AIR PRESS RR (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) G Tire pressure H AIR PRESS RL (kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi) ID REGST FL1 (Yet, Done) I ID REGST FR1 (Yet, Done) Registration ID ID REGST RR1 (Yet, Done) J ID REGST RL1 (Yet, Done) K WARNING LAMP (On/Off) Low tire pressure warning lamp BUZZER (On/Off) NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item. L ACTIVE TEST MODE M NOTE: After completing the work below, perform an active test. 1. Check ID registration state and perform self-diagnosis. 2. Erase the self-diagnosis result history. Item N Description WARNING LAMP Low tire pressure warning lamp can be turned ON arbitrarily. ID REGIST WARNING NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. RUN FLAT TIRE W/L NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. RUN FLAT/T WARN BUZZER NOTE: Displayed but not used in TPMS. FLASHER Turn signal lamps can be turned ON arbitrarily. HORN This test is able to check to check that the horn sounds. Revision: 2011 September WT-13 O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WORK SUPPORT Item Description ID READ Registered tire pressure sensor ID can be displayed. ID REGIST Tire pressure sensor ID can be registered. Revision: 2011 September WT-14 2012 QUEST BCM < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BCM List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007493004 ECU Reference C BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM B BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D BCS-59, "DTC Index" WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-15 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007493005 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". (option abbreviation; if not JCEWA0241GB Revision: 2011 September WT-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION A DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007493006 B DETAILED FLOW 1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER C It is also important to clarify customer concerns before starting the inspection. Reproduce the symptom, and understand it fully. Interview the customer about the concerns carefully. In some cases, it is necessary to D check the symptoms by driving the vehicle with the customer. CAUTION: Customers are not professionals. Never assume“maybe the customer means...” or “maybe the customer mentioned this symptom. WT >> GO TO 2. 2.BASIC INSPECTION F 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspect or repair the tires or wheels. G H 3.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP I Check low tire pressure warning lamp display. Does not low tire pressure warning lamp turn OFF? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 8. J 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS K With CONSULT Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Record or print DTC and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 7. L M 5.RECHECK THE SYMPTOM With CONSULT Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” with recorded DTC. If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index" and determine trouble diagnosis order. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 7. N O 6.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PART P • Repair or replace error-detected parts. • Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing. • When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic result in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. >> GO TO 9. 7.CRUISE FOR SYMPTOM CHECK Revision: 2011 September WT-17 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive for 10 minutes at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more, then stop the vehicle. CAUTION: Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes. >> GO TO 8. 8.IDENTIFY ERROR-DETECTED SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Estimate error-detected system based on symptom diagnosis. >> GO TO 10. 9.FINAL CHECK (WHEN DTC WAS DETECTED) With CONSULT Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” with displayed DTC. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> INSPECTION END 10.FINAL CHECK (WHEN SYMPTOM OCCURRED) Make sure that the symptom is not detected. Does symptom remain? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: 2011 September WT-18 2012 QUEST ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM < BASIC INSPECTION > ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM Description A INFOID:0000000007493007 When replacing BCM, tire pressure sensor ID registration is required. Work Procedure B INFOID:0000000007493008 1.PERFORM TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION C Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. D >> Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-19 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION < BASIC INSPECTION > TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Description INFOID:0000000007493009 This procedure must be done after replacing or rotating wheels, replacing tire pressure sensor or BCM. Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007493010 1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: To perform ID registration, observe the following points: • Never register ID in a place where radio waves are interfered (e.g. radio tower). • Never register ID in a place close to vehicles including TPMS. With CONSULT 1. Display the “WORK SUPPORT” screen and select “ID REGIST”. Is the tire pressure sensor activation tool (J-45295) used for the tire pressure sensor ID registration procedure? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE (WITH TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ACTIVATION TOOL) 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Select the start button on the “ID REGIST” screen. 3. Contact the tire pressure sensor activation tool (J-45295) (1) to the side of the tire at the location to the tire pressure sensor. 4. Press and hold the tire pressure sensor activation tool button while pushing the tool to the tire surface. (approximately for 5 seconds) CAUTION: Perform the ID registration procedure starting from the vehicle front left wheel, then repeat the procedure in the order of the front right wheel, rear right wheel, and rear left wheel. NNEIC0020ZZ 5. When ID registration is completed, check the following pattern at each wheel. Sequence ID registration position 1 Front left wheel 2 Front right wheel 3 Rear right wheel 4 Rear left wheel Turn signal lamp CONSULT 2 blinks “Red” ↓ “Green” 6. After the ID registration procedure for all wheels is completed, press “END” to end ID registration, and check that ID registration for all wheels is completed. Is the check result normal? YES >> ID registration END. NO >> Refer to WT-38, "Diagnosis Procedure". 3.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE (WITHOUT TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ACTIVATION TOOL) 1. Adjust the tire pressure for all wheels to match the list below. Revision: 2011 September WT-20 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION < BASIC INSPECTION > 2. 3. Tire position Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Front LH 240 (2.4, 35) Front RH 220 (2.2, 31) Rear RH 200 (2.0, 29) Rear LH 180 (1.8, 26) A B Drive the vehicle at a speed at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) for 3 minutes or more, then perform the tire pressure sensor ID registration procedure. After ID registration for all wheels is completed, press “END” to end ID registration. C D ID registration position CONSULT Front LH WT “Red” ↓ “Green” Front RH Rear RH Rear LH F 4. Adjust the tire pressures for all wheels to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". Is ID registrations for all wheels completed? YES >> ID registration END. NO >> Performs trouble-diagnosis of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-21 2012 QUEST C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493011 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display Item Malfunction detected condition Possible causes 2 C1704 LOW PRESSURE FL Front LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm , * psi) or less. C1705 LOW PRESSURE FR Front RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. C1706 LOW PRESSURE RR Rear RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. C1707 LOW PRESSURE RL Rear LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less. Low tire pressure *:189.6 kPa (1.9 kg/cm2, 27 psi) [Standard air pressure is for 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2,35 psi) vehicles.] DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION With CONSULT Turn the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". 3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”. Is DTC “C1704”, “C1705”, “C1706”, or “C1707” detected? YES >> Proceed to WT-22, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493012 1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE Check the air pressure of all wheels. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". CAUTION: If the checked value is close to the standard, reduce the tire pressure, and then with the ignition switch ON, adjust the tire pressure again so that it is within the standard. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” (self-diagnosis) again. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> After adjusting the air pressure, GO TO 3 3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL 1. 2. With CONSULT Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Check that the tire pressures match the standard value. Monitor item Displayed value AIR PRESS FL Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for front LH tire AIR PRESS FR Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for front RH tire Revision: 2011 September WT-22 2012 QUEST C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Monitor item Displayed value AIR PRESS RR Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for rear RH tire AIR PRESS RL Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for rear LH tire A Is the inspection result normal? YES >> After erasing DTC record, INSPECTION END. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. B C D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-23 2012 QUEST C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493013 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display Item Malfunction detected condition Possible causes • Harness or connector (Tire pressure receiver, BCM) • Tire pressure sensor ID registration incomplete • Tire pressure sensor • Tire pressure sensor battery voltage • Driving in area where radio wave cannot be transmitted/received. C1708 [NO DATA] FL Tire pressure data signal from the front LH wheel tire pressure sensor cannot be detected. C1709 [NO DATA] FR Tire pressure data signal from the front RH wheel tire pressure sensor cannot be detected. C1710 [NO DATA] RR Tire pressure data signal from the rear RH wheel tire pressure sensor cannot be detected. C1711 [NO DATA] RL Tire pressure data signal from the rear LH wheel tire pressure sensor cannot be detected. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION With CONSULT Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 10 minutes. CAUTION: Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes. NOTE: Avoid driving in area where radio wave cannot be transmitted/received. 2. Stop the vehicle. 3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Is DTC “C1708”, “C1709”, “C1710” or “C1711” detected? YES >> Proceed to WT-24, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END 1. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493014 1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL With CONSULT Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Check the values that are displayed for “AIR PRESS FL”, “AIR PRESS FR”, “AIR PRESS RR”, and “AIR PRESS RL”. Are all tire pressures displayed 0 kPa (psi)? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation". 1. 2. 2.CHECK RECEIVER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove 10A fuse (#10). Disconnect BCM harness connector and tire pressure receiver harness connector. Check the continuity between BCM harness connector and tire pressure receiver harness connector. Revision: 2011 September WT-24 2012 QUEST C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > BCM Connector Tire pressure receiver Terminal R108 2 57 Existed B 1 Check the continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector A 4 38 M123 Continuity Terminal 18 M121 5. Connector C — Terminal Continuity D 18 M121 38 M123 Ground Not existed WT 57 Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. F 3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER IGNITION SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Connect tire pressure receiver harness connector. Install 10A fuse (#10). CAUTION: Check that the fuse is not blown, that there are no other abnormalities, and that the fuse is of the specified capacity. Check the voltage between tire pressure receiver harness connector and the ground when the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. CAUTION: Never start the engine. Tire pressure receiver Connector Terminal R108 1 — Voltage Ground 9 – 16 V G H I J K Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. L 4.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL Check the function tire pressure receiver. Refer to DLK-233, "Component Function Check". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BCM. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-25 2012 QUEST C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493015 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC Display Item Malfunction detected condition C1716 [PRESSDATA ERR] FL Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the front LH wheel tire pressure sensor. C1717 [PRESSDATA ERR] FR Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the front RH wheel tire pressure sensor. C1718 [PRESSDATA ERR] RR Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the rear RH wheel tire pressure sensor. C1719 [PRESSDATA ERR] RL Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the rear LH wheel tire pressure sensor. Possible causes • Excessive tire pressure • Tire pressure sensor ID registration incomplete • Tire pressure sensor DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION With CONSULT Turn the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". CAUTION: If the tire pressure before adjustment is close to the standard, reduce the tire pressure, and then with the ignition switch ON, adjust the tire pressure again so that it is within the standard. 3. Perform self-diagnosis in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Is DTC “C1716”, “C1717”, “C1718”, or “C1719” detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Check that after the ignition switch is turned ON, the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second and then turns OFF. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> After erase DTC, INSPECTION END. NO >> Leave the ignition switch ON and proceed to WT-26, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493016 1.PERFORM TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration for all wheels. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL With CONSULT Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". 2. Stop the vehicle. 3. Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. 4. Within 15 minutes after vehicle stopped, read the values that are displayed for “AIR PRESS FL”, “AIR PRESS FR”, “AIR PRESS RR”, and “AIR PRESS RL”. 1. Which tire pressures is displayed as 438.60 kPa (4.47 kg/cm2, 63.60 psi)? Revision: 2011 September WT-26 2012 QUEST C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Replace tire pressure sensor the tire pressure as 438.60 kPa (4.47 kg/cm2, 63.60 psi) displayed. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” (self-diagnosis) again. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". A B C D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-27 2012 QUEST C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007493017 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC C1729 Display Item VHCL SPEED SIG ERR Malfunction detected condition Vehicle speed signal not detected. Possible causes With intelligent key • CAN communication • BCM • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) malfunction DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Drive the vehicle. 2. Stop the vehicle. 3. Perform self-diagnosis in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Is DTC “C1729” detected? YES >> Proceed to WT-28, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493018 1.PERFORM ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. Is any DTCs detected? YES >> Check the DTCs. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Check BCM input/output signal values. Refer to BCS-36, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions. NO >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". Revision: 2011 September WT-28 2012 QUEST POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure A INFOID:0000000007493019 1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT B Check BCM power supply and ground. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-29 2012 QUEST TPMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS TPMS Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007493020 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP SYMPTOM CHART Revision: 2011 September WT-30 2012 QUEST TPMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnosis items Symptom (Ignition switch ON) A Low tire pressure warning lamp Cause Action B The low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates for 1 second, then turns OFF. Wake-up operation for all tire pressure sensors at wheels is completed. No system malfunctions SEIA0592E The low tire pressure warning lamp repeats blinking ON for 2 seconds and OFF for 0.2 seconds. C D Wake-up operation for all tire pressure sensors at wheels is not completed. Perform the ID registration for all tire pressure sensors at wheels. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". WT F SEIA0593E G The front left tire pressure sensor is not activated. The low tire pressure warning lamp blinks once. Perform the ID registration for the tire pressure sensor at front left wheel. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". H JPEIC0090GB I Low tire pressure warning lamp The low tire pressure warning lamp repeats blinking twice. The front right tire pressure sensor is not activated. Perform the ID registration for the tire pressure sensor at front right wheel. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". K SEIA0595E The low tire pressure warning lamp repeats blinking for 3 times. J The rear right tire pressure sensor is not activated. Perform the ID registration for the tire pressure sensor at rear right wheel. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". L M SEIA0596E N The low tire pressure warning lamp repeats blinking for 4 times. The rear left tire pressure sensor is not activated. Perform the ID registration for the tire pressure sensor at rear left wheel. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". SEIA0597E The low tire pressure warning lamp turns ON and stays illuminated. P Low tire pressure Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". SEIA0598E Revision: 2011 September WT-31 O 2012 QUEST TPMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnosis items Low tire pressure warning lamp Symptom (Ignition switch ON) Low tire pressure warning lamp The low tire pressure warning lamp repeats blinking at 0.5-second intervals for 1 minute, and then stays illuminated. SEIA0788E Cause Action The combination meter fuse is open or removed (or pulled out). Check and install the combination meter fuse. If necessary, replace the fuse. The BCM harness connector is removed. Check the connection conditions of the BCM harness connector, and repair if necessary. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction. • Perform CONSULT selfdiagnosis. Refer to WT12, "AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR)". • If necessary, perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". NOTE: If tire pressure sensor wake-up operation is not completed for two or more tire pressure sensors, the applicable low tire pressure warning lamp blinking patterns are displayed continuously. (Example: Blinks once/OFF/blinks 3 times = Wake-up operation is not completed at the front left wheel and rear right wheel tire pressure sensors.) Revision: 2011 September WT-32 2012 QUEST LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON Description A INFOID:0000000007493021 The low tire pressure warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON. NOTE: The low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second and then turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. This is to check that no abnormal condition is present in the tire pressure monitoring system. The lamp bulb may be burnt out or the tire pressure monitoring system may be malfunctioning if the low tire pressure warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493022 1.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP SIGNAL B C D WT With CONSULT 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 2. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. 3. Touch “WARNING LAMP” to turn ON the low tire pressure warning lamp. When “ACTIVE TEST” is performed, does the low tire pressure warning lamp in the combination meter turn ON? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. F G H 2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP OPERATION Check that the low tire pressure warning lamp is turned OFF after turns ON for approximately 1 second, when the ignition switch is turned ON. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". I J 3.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Perform the trouble diagnosis for combination meter power supply circuit. Refer to WT-29, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES-1 >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-33 2012 QUEST LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF Description INFOID:0000000007493023 The low tire pressure warning lamp does not turn OFF after several seconds is passed after engine starts. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493024 1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. CAUTION: Never start the engine. 2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspect or repair the tires or wheels. 2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Check low tire pressure warning lamp display. Does not low tire pressure warning lamp turn OFF? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK BCM With CONSULT Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply and ground circuit. Refer to WT-29, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. Revision: 2011 September WT-34 2012 QUEST LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP BLINKS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP BLINKS Description A INFOID:0000000007493025 The low tire pressure warning lamp blinks when the ignition switch is turned ON. NOTE: The position of an inactive tire pressure sensor can be identified by checking the blinking timing of the low tire pressure warning lamp. B C D WT F G JPEIC0089GB Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493026 H 1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Perform the self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-35 2012 QUEST EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE Description INFOID:0000000007493027 The easy fill tire alert does not function while inflating a tire when the select lever position is in P-range with the ignition switch ON. NOTE: • After starting to inflate the tire, it takes a few seconds for the easy fill tire alert to function. • If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again. The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area. • For easy fill tire alert, Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493028 1. LOCATION CHANGE Move the vehicle to other area and repeat the procedure of the easy fill tire alert function. Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function". Is the function normal? YES >> Normal (the easy fill tire alert may not operate, depending on reception condition.) NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP OPERATION Check hazard warning lamp operation with hazard switch. Does the hazard warning lamp blink? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for the hazard warning lamp. Refer to EXL-73, "Diagnosis Procedure" (XENON TYPE), EXL-171, "Diagnosis Procedure" (HALOGEN TYPE). 4.PERFORM TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Perform self-diagnosis for “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check malfunctioning circuit. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK HORN OPERATION Check horn operation. Refer to SEC-109, "Component Function Check". Is the operation normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. 6.PERFORM BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT Drive for 10 minutes at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more. CAUTION: Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes. 2. Stop the vehicle. 3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”. Is any DTC detected? 1. Revision: 2011 September WT-36 2012 QUEST EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > YES >> Check malfunctioning circuit. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index". NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". A B C D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-37 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED Description INFOID:0000000007493029 The ID of the tire pressure sensor installed in each wheel cannot be registered in the tire pressure monitoring system. Inspect the tire pressure sensor or the tire pressure monitoring system circuit. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007493030 1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ACTIVATION TOOL Check tire pressure sensor activation tool. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace the battery of tire pressure sensor activation tool or repair/replace the tire pressure sensor activation tool. 2.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". CAUTION: To perform ID registration, observe the following points: • Never register ID in a place where radio waves are interfered (e.g. radio tower). • Never register ID in a place close to vehicles including TPMS. Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL Change the work location and perform ID registration again. NOTE: Depending on the tire pressure sensor position*, a blind spot exists, and the tire pressure receiver gets a poor reception. If an ID registration is performed under this condition, the registration may not be completed. In such case, follow the instructions below to improve the radio wave receiving environment. • Rotate tire by 90°, 180°, or 270°. (This Step is to change tire pressure sensor position.) • Open the door close to the tire of which ID registration is ongoing. *: Radio wave reception condition depends on vehicle architecture (e.g. body harness layout, tire wheel design) or environment. When ID registration is performed, which wheels do not react? All wheels react and ID registration is possible.>>INSPECTION END Only certain wheel(s) do not react.>>Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation". All wheels do not react.>>Check the tire pressure receiver. Refer to DLK-233, "Component Function Check". Revision: 2011 September WT-38 2012 QUEST TIRE Symptom ROAD WHEEL Revision: 2011 September Unbalance Incorrect tire pressure Vibration Uneven tire wear Deformation or damage WT-39 Non-uniformity Noise × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × Judder × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × Shake × × × × × Shimmy, Judder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × STEERING × BRAKE × DRIVE SHAFT × NVH in ST section. NVH in BR section. NVH in FAX, RAX section. Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. Refer to TIRE in this chart. NVH Troubleshooting Chart ROAD WHEELS TIRE NVH in FAX and FSU sections. DIFFERENTIAL × NVH in RAX and RSU sections. NVH in DLN section. PROPELLER SHAFT NVH in DLN section. WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure" — — WT-40, "Inspection" WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure" WT-40, "Wheel Balance Adjustment" WT-43, "Inspection" WT-43, "Exploded View" Reference page Incorrect tire size Out-of-round Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Improper installation, looseness NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING INFOID:0000000007493031 A Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B C × × × × × × × × × 2012 QUEST D WT F G H I J K × L M N ×: Applicable O P ROAD WHEEL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ROAD WHEEL Inspection INFOID:0000000007493032 APPEARANCE Check the road wheel for bend, damage, crack or wear. Wheel Balance Adjustment INFOID:0000000007493033 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTMENT Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel. CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. • After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road wheel. ADJUSTMENT (ALUMINUM WHEEL) • The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to each instruction manual. • If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for aluminum wheels. 1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value above and install to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: • Never install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. • Before installing the balance weight, always clean the mating surface of the road wheel. a. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) NOTE: Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz) 36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) SMA054D b. Installed balance weight in the position. Revision: 2011 September WT-40 2012 QUEST ROAD WHEEL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > • When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) is aligned with the tire balance machine indication position (angle) (C). CAUTION: • Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights. • Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones. • Never install three or more sheets of balance weight. A B C D WT F G JPEIC0040ZZ c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Never install one balance weight sheet on top of another. H I J PEIA0033E 3. 4. 5. Start the tire balance machine again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the tire balance machine indication position (angle). CAUTION: Never install three or more balance weight. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the allowable unbalance value. CAUTION: If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures. Allowable unbalance value Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". Static (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". L M N O ADJUSTMENT (STEEL WHEEL) P Preparation Before Adjustment Remove balance weight from the road wheel. Wheel Balance Adjustment • The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to each instruction manual. • If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for steel wheels. Revision: 2011 September K WT-41 2012 QUEST ROAD WHEEL < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > 1. Set road wheel to wheel balancer, and then start wheel balancer. 2. Install balance weight to road wheel according to the unbalance and position (angle) displayed on wheel balancer. CAUTION: • Never install three or more balance weights on one side. • Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights. • Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones. • Always use a plastic hammer when attaching the weight. 3. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the allowable unbalance value. CAUTION: If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures. Allowable unbalance value Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". Static (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". Tire Rotation INFOID:0000000007493034 • Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-4, "Explanation of General Maintenance". • When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified torque. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires. • When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. • Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding the criteria. • Use NISSAN genuine wheel nut. • Perform the ID registration, after tire rotation. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September WT-42 SMA829C 2012 QUEST ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493035 B C D WT F G JSGIA0639GB 1. Tire assembly H : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493036 I REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove wheel nuts. Remove tire assembly. J INSTALLATION K Note the following, install in the reverse order of removal. • When replacing or rotating wheels, perform the ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Inspection INFOID:0000000007493037 L Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the figure. Check runout, if the axial runout (A) or radial runout (B) exceeds the limit, replace aluminum wheel. M ALUMINUM WHEEL 1. 2. a. b. c. Limit Axial runout (A) Radial runout (B) STEEL WHEEL Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Revision: 2011 September WT-43 O P : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". SEIA0737E 1. N 2012 QUEST ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from steel wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set two dial indicators as shown in the illustration. c. Set each dial indicator to “0”. d. Rotate wheel and check dial indicators at several points around the circumference of the wheel. e. Calculate runout at each point as shown below. f. Axial runout (A) :( + )/2 Radial runout (B) :( + )/2 Select maximum positive runout value and the maximum negative value. Add the two values to determine total runout. CAUTION: In case a positive or negative value is not available, use the maximum value (negative or positive) for total runout. Limit A : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". B : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel". g. If the total runout value exceeds limit, replace steel wheel. SEIA0738E Revision: 2011 September WT-44 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007493038 B C D WT F JSEIA0324GB 1. Tire pressure sensor 2. Grommet seal 4. Valve core 5. Valve cap 3. G Valve nut H : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Always replace after every disassembly. I : Parts that are replaced as a set when the tire is replaced. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493039 J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove tire assembly. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Remove valve cap, valve core and then deflate tire. NOTE: If the tire is reused, apply a matching mark to the position of the tire road wheel valve hole for the purpose of wheel balance adjustment after installation. Remove valve nut retaining tire pressure sensor and allow tire pressure sensor to fall into tire. Use the tire changer and disengage the tire beads. CAUTION: • Verify that the tire pressure sensor (1) is at the bottom of the tire while performing the above. • Be sure not to damage the road wheel or tire pressure sensor. Apply bead cream or an equivalent to the tire beads. Set tire onto the tire changer turntable so that the tire pressure sensor inside the tire is located close to the road wheel valve hole. K L M N O P JPEIC0104ZZ Revision: 2011 September WT-45 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom and bounce so that tire pressure sensor (1) is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and tire pressure sensor) 270 degree from mounting/dismounting head (2). CAUTION: Be sure not to damage the road wheel and tire pressure sensor. 8. Remove tire pressure sensor from tire. 9. Remove the grommet seal. JPEIC0014GB INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Apply bead cream or an equivalent to the tire beads. Install the tire inside beads (1) onto the road wheel (2) in the position shown in the figure. Install grommet seal to the tire pressure sensor. CAUTION: • Never reuse grommet seal. • Insert grommet seal all the way to the base. JPEIC0105ZZ 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Hold tire pressure sensor as shown in the figure, and press the sensor in the direction shown by arrow ( ) to bring it into absolute contact with valve hole. After this, tighten valve nut to the specified torque. CAUTION: • Never reuse valve core and valve cap. • Check that grommet seal is free of foreign matter. • Check that grommet seal contacts horizontally with road wheel. • Manually tighten valve nut all the way to the wheel. (Never use a power tool to avoid impact.) JSEIA0466GB Set the tire onto the turntable so that the tire changer arm (2) is at a position approximately 270° from the tire pressure sensor (1). CAUTION: Be sure that the arm does not contact the tire pressure sensor. Install the tire outer side beads onto the road wheel. CAUTION: When installing, check that the tire does not turn together with the road wheel. JPEIC0014GB Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure". NOTE: Before adding air, align the tire with the position of the matching mark applied at the time of removal. Install tire to the vehicle. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation". Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure". Revision: 2011 September WT-46 2012 QUEST TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007493040 REMOVAL 1. B Remove the remote keyless entry receiver. (The tire pressure receiver is incorporated into remote keyless entry receiver.) Refer to DLK-459, "Removal and Installation". C INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: 2011 September WT-47 2012 QUEST SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel INFOID:0000000007493041 ALUMINUM WHEEL Item Limit Axial runout Runout Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in) Radial runout Dynamic (At flange) Allowable unbalance Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side) Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) STEEL WHEEL Item Runout Limit Axial runout (Average) Less than 0.8 mm (0.031 in) Radial runout (Average) Less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in) Dynamic (At flange) Allowable unbalance Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side) Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) STEEL WHEEL (EMERGENCY) Item Limit Axial runout (Average) Runout Less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Radial runout (Average) Tire Air Pressure INFOID:0000000007493042 Unit: kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) Item Standard Front Rear P225/65R16 99T 240 (2.4, 35) P235/55R18 99T 240 (2.4, 35) T135/80D16 101M 420 (4.2, 60) T135/90D16 102M Revision: 2011 September WT-48 2012 QUEST DRIVER CONTROLS SECTION WW WIPER & WASHER A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) .......17 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ................... 18 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3 Diagnosis Description ..............................................18 CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) .............................20 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 23 PREPARATION ............................................ 4 BCM, IPDM E/R ................................................. 23 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 24 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ..................... 24 Wiring Diagram ........................................................24 Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 26 SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 26 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ................... 7 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description ......................................................... 7 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 10 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : FailSafe ......................................................................... 10 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ................... 11 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description .............................................................. 11 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 13 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Failsafe ......................................................................... 13 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................15 COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 15 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 15 WIPER ....................................................................... 16 Revision: 2011 September G H List of ECU Reference .............................................23 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 F I J K Work Flow ................................................................26 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29 WW FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT .............. 29 Component Function Check ....................................29 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................29 M FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT ............... 30 Component Function Check ....................................30 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................30 FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................................................ 31 N O Component Function Check ....................................31 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................31 FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT ... 32 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32 WASHER SWITCH ............................................ 33 Component Inspection .............................................33 REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT ...................... 34 WW-1 2012 QUEST P Component Function Check ................................... 34 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 34 REAR WIPER .................................................... 47 REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 36 WIPER ARM .............................................................. 47 WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation ................. 47 WIPER ARM : Adjustment ...................................... 48 Component Function Check ................................... 36 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36 Exploded View ........................................................ 47 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 37 WIPER BLADE .......................................................... 48 WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation ............. 49 WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 37 WIPER REFILL .......................................................... 49 WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation ............. 49 Symptom Table ...................................................... 37 WIPER MOTOR ......................................................... 49 WIPER MOTOR : Removal and Installation ........... 49 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 39 Description .............................................................. 39 WASHER TANK ................................................ 51 FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 40 Exploded View ........................................................ 51 Removal and Installation ......................................... 51 Description .............................................................. 40 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40 WASHER PUMP ................................................ 53 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 42 Exploded View ........................................................ 53 Removal and Installation ......................................... 53 FRONT WIPER .................................................. 42 WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE ............................. 55 Exploded View ........................................................ 42 WIPER ARM .............................................................. 43 WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation ................ 43 WIPER ARM : Adjustment ...................................... 44 WIPER BLADE .......................................................... 44 WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation ............. 44 WIPER REFILL ......................................................... 45 WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation ............ 45 WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 45 WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ....................................................................... 45 WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................ 46 Revision: 2011 September Exploded View ........................................................ 55 Hydraulic Layout ..................................................... 57 WASHER NOZZLE .................................................... 57 WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ....... 57 WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment ... 58 WASHER TUBE ........................................................ 60 WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation ........... 60 WASHER LEVEL SWITCH ............................... 63 Removal and Installation ......................................... 63 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ...................... 64 Exploded View ........................................................ 64 WW-2 2012 QUEST PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > PRECAUTION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000007492411 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. • Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover I J K INFOID:0000000007492412 When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to windshield. WW M N PIIB3706J O P Revision: 2011 September WW-3 2012 QUEST PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000007492413 Tool name Description Adjusting washer nozzle. (Available in SEC. 289 of PARTS CATALOG: Part No. 28949 1EA0A) NOTE: Washer nozzle adjuster is included with shipment of nozzle. Washer nozzle adjuster JSLIA0149ZZ Revision: 2011 September WW-4 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007492414 B C D E F G H I J K WW M N O P JMLIA2162ZZ A. Cowl top, left side of engine room Revision: 2011 September B. Behind front bumper (RH) WW-5 C. Back door finisher inside 2012 QUEST COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > No. Part Function 1. Combination meter Transmits the vehicle speed signal to BCM via CAN communication. 2. Combination switch (Wiper & washer switch) Refer to BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description" for detailed installation location. 3. Front wiper motor • IPDM E/R controls front wiper operation. • Front wiper stop position signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R. 4. IPDM E/R • Controls the integrated relay according to the request (via CAN communication) from BCM. • Performs the auto stop control of the front wiper. • Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 5. Washer level switch • Combination meter indicates low washer fluid warning judged by the signal from the washer level switch. • Refer to MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description". 6. Washer pump • Washer fluid is sprayed according to washer switch states. • Switching between front washer and rear washer is performed according to the voltage polarity change to washer pump. 7. BCM • Judges the each switch status by the combination switch reading function. • Requests (via CAN communication) the front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay ON to IPDM E/R. • Supplies power to the rear wiper motor. • Performs the auto stop control of the rear wiper. • Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location. 8. Rear wiper motor • BCM controls rear wiper operation. • Rear wiper stop position signal is transmitted to BCM. Revision: 2011 September WW-6 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM A FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007492415 B SYSTEM DIAGRAM C D E F JMLIA2011GB G OUTLINE The front wiper is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R. H Control by BCM • Combination switch reading function • Front wiper control function I Control by IPDM E/R • Front wiper control function • Relay control function Combination meter indicates low washer fluid level warning judged by the signal from the washer level switch. For detailes of low washer fluid level warning, refer to MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description". J K FRONT WIPER BASIC OPERATION • BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication depending on each oper- WW ating condition of the front wiper. • IPDM E/R turns ON/OFF the integrated front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay according to the front wiper request signal. IPDM E/R provides the power supply to operate the front wiper HI/LO operation. M FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the front wiper LO operating condition. N Front wiper LO operating condition - Ignition switch ON - Front wiper switch LO or front wiper switch MIST (while pressing) • IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay according to the front wiper request signal (LO). O FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the front wiper HI operating condition. Front wiper HI operating condition - Ignition switch ON - Front wiper switch HI • IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay according to the front wiper request signal (HI). Revision: 2011 September WW-7 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > FRONT WIPER INT OPERATION • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication depending on the front wiper INT operating condition and intermittent operation delay interval according to the wiper intermittent dial position. Front wiper INT operating condition - Ignition switch ON - Front wiper switch INT • IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay so that the front wiper is operated only once according to the front wiper request signal (INT). • BCM detects stop position/except stop position of the front wiper motor according to the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication. • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) again after the intermittent operation delay interval. JPLIA1256GB NOTE: Factory setting of the front wiper intermittent operation is operation linked without vehicle speed. Front wiper intermittent operation can be set to operation linked or not linked with vehicle speed using CONSULT. Refer to WW-17, "WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)". Front wiper intermittent operation with vehicle speed • BCM calculates the intermittent operation delay interval from the following - Vehicle speed signal - Wiper intermittent dial position Unit: Second Intermittent operation delay Interval Wiper intermittent dial position Intermittent operation interval Vehicle speed 0 – 5 km/h (0 – 3.1 MPH) 5 – 65 km/h (3.1 – 40.4 MPH)* 65 km/h (40.4 MPH) or more 1 0.4 0.24 2.5 1 0.6 3 5 2 1.2 4 7.5 3 1.8 5 12.5 5 3 25 10 6 40 16 9.6 1 2 6 7 Short ↑ ↓ Long *: When operation setting is not linked with vehicle speed. FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP OPERATION • BCM stops transmitting the front wiper request signal when the front wiper switch is turned OFF. • IPDM E/R detects the front wiper stop position signal from the front wiper motor and detects the front wiper motor position (stop position/except stop position). Revision: 2011 September WW-8 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • When the front wiper request signal is stopped, IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay until the front wiper motor returns to the stop position. A B C D E JPLIA0410GB NOTE: • BCM stops the transmitting of the front wiper request signal when the ignition switch is OFF. • IPDM E/R turns the front wiper relay OFF when the ignition switch is OFF. F FRONT WIPER OPERATION LINKED WITH WASHER • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the washer linked operating condition of the front wiper. • BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) so that the front wiper operates approximately 2 times when the front washer switch OFF is detected. G H Washer linked operating condition of front wiper • • Ignition switch ON Front washer switch ON (0.4 second or more) IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay according to the front wiper request signal (LO). The washer pump is grounded through the combination switch with the front washer switch ON. I J WIPER LINKED AUTO LIGHTING FUNCTION When light switch is in the AUTO position, front wiper operates, and then headlamp illuminates. Refer to EXL13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) : System Description". K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-9 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007492416 JMLIA2150GB FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000007492417 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM Revision: 2011 September WW-10 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Control part Fail-safe operation A • The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed. • The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating. • Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other position than stop position. Front wiper motor B C FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal. When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop. Ignition switch E Front wiper switch Front wiper stop position signal OFF The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds. ON The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds. ON NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item “WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped. F G REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description D INFOID:0000000007492418 H SYSTEM DIAGRAM I J K WW JPLIA1257GB M OUTLINE The rear wiper is controlled by each function of BCM. N Control by BCM • Combination switch reading function • Rear wiper control function O REAR WIPER BASIC OPERATION • BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. • BCM controls the rear wiper to start or stop. P REAR WIPER ON OPERATION • BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the rear wiper ON operating condition. Rear wiper ON operating condition - Ignition switch ON - Rear wiper switch ON REAR WIPER INT OPERATION Revision: 2011 September WW-11 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > • BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the INT operating condition. Rear wiper INT operating condition • • • Ignition switch ON Rear wiper switch INT BCM controls the rear wiper to operate once. BCM detects the rear wiper motor stopping position. BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor after an intermittent from the stop of the rear wiper motor. JPLIA1258GB REAR WIPER AUTO STOP OPERATION • BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper switch is turned OFF. • BCM reads a rear wiper stop position signal from the rear wiper motor to detect a rear wiper motor position. • When the rear wiper motor is at other than the stopping position, BCM continues to supply power to the rear wiper motor until it returns to the stopping position. JPLIA1259GB NOTE: BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the ignition switch is turned OFF. REAR WIPER OPERATION LINKED WITH WASHER • BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the washer linked operating condition of rear wiper. When the rear washer switch is turned OFF, BCM controls rear wiper to operate approximately 3 times. Washer linked operating condition of rear wiper - Ignition switch ON - Rear washer switch ON (0.4 second or more) • The washer pump is grounded through the combination switch with the rear washer switch ON. Revision: 2011 September WW-12 2012 QUEST SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007492419 A B C D E F G H I J K WW M N O JMLIA2150GB REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000007492420 REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal. When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor. Revision: 2011 September WW-13 2012 QUEST P SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Condition of cancellation 1. 2. 3. More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop. Turn rear wiper switch OFF. Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch. Revision: 2011 September WW-14 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) A COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007848877 B APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. C Diagnosis mode Function Description Work Support Changes the setting for each system function. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. D CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed. Configuration • Read and save the vehicle specification. • Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. E F SYSTEM APPLICATION G BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. ×: Applicable item System Sub system selection item Diagnosis mode Work Support Data Monitor Active Test × × × Door lock DOOR LOCK Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Interior room lamp control system INT LAMP × × × Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper and washer WIPER × × × Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × × Air conditioning control system AIR CONDITONER × ×* • Intelligent Key system • Engine start system INTELLIGENT KEY × × Combination switch COMB SW Body control system BCM × NVIS IMMU × × × Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × × Back door open TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM RAP system RETAINED PWR × Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × × × I J K WW M N × × × × × NOTE: *: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT. Revision: 2011 September H WW-15 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected Vehicle Condition SLEEP>LOCK While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] SLEEP>OFF While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC ACC>ON While turning power supply position from ACC to ON RUN>ACC While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except emergency stop operation) CRANK>RUN While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation) ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF) OFF>LOCK OFF>ACC IGN Counter Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected* While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF (LOCK) While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK OFF>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode LOCK>SLEEP While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode LOCK Power supply position is OFF (LOCK) OFF Power supply position is OFF (OFF) ACC Power supply position is ACC ON Power supply position is ON ENGINE RUN Power supply position is RUN CRANKING Power supply position is CRANK 0 - 39 The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected • The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. • The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. NOTE: *: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position. • OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF • ACC: Ignition switch ACC • IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped • RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running • CRANK: At engine cranking Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P position, and any of the following conditions are met. • Closing door • Opening door • Door is locked using door request switch • Door is locked using Intelligent Key The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”. WIPER Revision: 2011 September WW-16 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) INFOID:0000000007492422 A WORK SUPPORT Service item Setting item With vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and wiper intermittent dial position) On WIPER SPEED SETTING Without vehicle speed (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper intermittent dial position) Off* B Description The setting of front wiper INT operation can be changed C D *: Factory setting DATA MONITOR E Monitor Item [Unit] Description F PUSH SW [Off/On] The switch status input from push-button ignition switch. VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter via CAN communication. G FR WIPER HI [Off/On] H FR WIPER LOW [Off/On] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function FR WASHER SW [Off/On] I FR WIPER INT [Off/On] FR WIPER STOP [Off/On] Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication. INT VOLUME [1 − 7] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function J K RR WIPER ON [Off/On] RR WIPER INT [Off/On] Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function RR WASHER SW [Off/On] M RR WIPER STOP [Off/On] Rear wiper motor (stop position) status input from the rear wiper motor N ACTIVE TEST Test item FR WIPER RR WIPER Revision: 2011 September WW Operation Description Hi Transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper HI operation. Lo Transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper LO operation. INT Transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper INT operation. Off Stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to stop the front wiper operation. On Output the voltage to operate the rear wiper motor. Off Stops the voltage to stop the rear wiper motor. WW-17 2012 QUEST O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000007848890 AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. • Oil pressure warning lamp • Front wiper (LO, HI) • Parking lamp • License plate lamp • Tail lamp • Side marker lamp • Front fog lamp • Headlamp (LO, HI) • A/C compressor (magnet clutch) • Cooling fan Operation Procedure NOTE: Never perform auto active test in the following condition. • Passenger door is open. • CONSULT is connected. 1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation) NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the front door switch (driver side) 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. NOTE: Engine starts when ignition switch is turned ON while brake pedal is depressed. 5. The oil pressure warning lamp starts blinking when the auto active test starts. 6. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: • When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF. • When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check". Inspection in Auto Active Test When auto active test is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Operation sequence Inspection location Operation 1 Oil pressure warning lamp Blinks continuously during operation of auto active test 2 Front wiper motor LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds 3 • • • • • 10 seconds 4 Headlamp 5 A/C compressor (magnet clutch) ON ⇔ OFF 5 times 6 Cooling fan LO for 5 seconds →MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds Parking lamp License plate lamp Tail lamp Side marker lamp Front fog lamp Revision: 2011 September • LO 10 seconds • HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times WW-18 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Concept of auto active test A B C D E JMMIA0836GB F • IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. • The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. G Diagnosis chart in auto active test H Symptom • • • • • • • Any of the following components do not operate Parking lamp License plate lamp Tail lamp Side marker lamp Front fog lamp Headlamp (HI, LO) Front wiper motor A/C compressor does not operate Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate Revision: 2011 September Inspection contents Perform auto active test. Does the applicable system operate? Possible cause I YES BCM signal input circuit NO • Lamp or motor • Lamp or motor ground circuit • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and applicable system • IPDM E/R J K YES • Combination meter signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between Combination meter and ECM • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Magnet clutch • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and magnet clutch • IPDM E/R YES • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and oil pressure switch • Oil pressure switch • IPDM E/R NO • CAN communication signal between IPDM E/R and BCM • CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination meter • Combination meter Perform auto active test. Does the magnet clutch operate? Perform auto active test. Does the oil pressure warning lamp blink? WW-19 2012 QUEST WW M N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause YES • ECM signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Cooling fan • Harness or connector between cooling fan and cooling fan relay • Harness or connector between IPDM E/ R and cooling fan relay • Cooling fan relay • IPDM E/R Perform auto active test. Does the cooling fan operate? Cooling fan does not operate CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000007848891 APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. Diagnosis mode Description Ecu Identification Allows confirmation of IPDM E/R part number. Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by IPDM E/R. Data Monitor Displays the real-time input/output data from IPDM E/R input/output data. Active Test IPDM E/R can provide a drive signal to electronic components to check their operations. CAN Diag Support Monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index". DATA MONITOR Monitor item Monitor Item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description MOTOR FAN REQ [1/2/3/4] × Displays the value of the cooling fan speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication. AC COMP REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the A/C compressor request signal received from ECM via CAN communication. TAIL&CLR REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HL LO REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the low beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HL HI REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the high beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. FR FOG REQ [Off/On] × Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi] × Displays the status of the front wiper request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P] × Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal judged by IPDM E/R. WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK] × Displays the status of the front wiper fail-safe operation judged by IPDM E/R. IGN RLY1 -REQ [Off/On] IGN RLY [Off/On] PUSH SW [Off/On] Revision: 2011 September Displays the status of the ignition switch ON signal received from BCM via CAN communication. × Displays the status of the ignition relay judged by IPDM E/R. Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch judged by IPDM E/R. WW-20 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Monitor Item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description A INTER/NP SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the shift position judged by IPDM E/R. ST RLY CONT [Off/On] Displays the status of the starter relay status signal received from BCM via CAN communication. IHBT RLY -REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the starter control relay signal received from BCM via CAN communication. ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI/UNKWN] Displays the status of the starter relay and starter control relay judged by IPDM E/R. DETENT SW [Off/On] Displays the status of the CVT shift selector (detention switch) judged by IPDM E/R. S/L RLY -REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. S/L STATE [LOCK/UNLK/UNKWN] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. DTRL REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the daytime running light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. NOTE: This item is monitored only on the vehicle with daytime running light system. OIL P SW [Open/Close] Displays the status of the oil pressure switch judged by IPDM E/R. HOOD SW [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. HL WASHER REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. THFT HRN REQ [Off/On] Displays the status of the theft warning horn request signal received from BCM via CAN communication. HORN CHIRP [Off/On] Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BCM via CAN communication. CRNRNG LMP REQ [Off/On] NOTE: The item is indicated, but not monitored. B C D E F G H I J K ACTIVE TEST Test item Test item Operation WW Description Off CORNERING LAMP LH NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. M RH HORN FRONT WIPER MOTOR FAN HEAD LAMP WASHER On Operates horn relay for 20 ms. Off OFF Lo Operates the front wiper relay. N Hi Operates the front wiper relay and front wiper high relay. 1 OFF 2 Operates the cooling fan relay-1. 3 Operates the cooling fan relay-2. 4 Operates the cooling fan relay-2 and cooling fan relay-3. On NOTE: The item is indicated, but cannot be tested. Revision: 2011 September WW-21 O P 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > Test item EXTERNAL LAMPS Operation Description Off OFF TAIL Operates the tail lamp relay and the daytime running light relay. Lo Operates the headlamp low relay. Hi Operates the headlamp low relay and ON/OFF the headlamp high relay at 1 second intervals. Fog Operates the front fog lamp relay. Revision: 2011 September WW-22 2012 QUEST BCM, IPDM E/R < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A BCM, IPDM E/R List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007492425 ECU Reference C BCS-36, "Reference Value" BCM B BCS-58, "Fail-safe" BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D BCS-59, "DTC Index" PCS-16, "Reference Value" IPDM E/R E PCS-23, "Fail-safe" PCS-24, "DTC Index" F G H I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-23 2012 QUEST WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WIRING DIAGRAM WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007492426 JCLWA5179GB Revision: 2011 September WW-24 2012 QUEST WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > A B C D E F G H I J K WW M N O JCLWA5180GB P Revision: 2011 September WW-25 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow INFOID:0000000007848899 OVERALL SEQUENCE JMKIA8652GB DETAILED FLOW Revision: 2011 September WW-26 2012 QUEST DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > 1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM 1. 2. A Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurs). Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning. B >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC C 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected. Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) Erase DTC. Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5. D E F 3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM G Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. H >> GO TO 5. 4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. J >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected K again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time. If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) or PCS-24, "DTC Index" (IPDM E/R), and determine trouble diagnosis order. WW NOTE: • Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. • Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service M Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRN MATION PROCEDURE. Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 7. O NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. Is the symptom described? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE Revision: 2011 September WW-27 2012 QUEST P DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". 8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it. >> GO TO 9. 9.FINAL CHECK When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the malfunction is repaired securely. When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the symptom is not detected. Is DTC detected and does symptom remain? YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7. YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC. Revision: 2011 September WW-28 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492428 B 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION C CONSULT ACTIVE TEST 1. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. 2. With operating the test item, check front wiper operation. Lo Off D : Front wiper (LO) operation : Stop the front wiper. E Is front wiper (LO) operation normally? YES >> Front wiper motor LO circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to WW-29, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492429 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE G CONSULT ACTIVE TEST 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front wiper motor connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. 5. With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground. H I (+) Front wiper motor (−) Connector Terminal E12 5 Condition Voltage (Approx.) J Ground FRONT WIPER Lo 9-16V Off 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front wiper motor. NO >> GO TO 2. K WW 2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector. IPDM E/R 4. M N Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E10 4 E12 5 Continuity Existed O Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 4 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September WW-29 2012 QUEST P FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492430 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION 1. 2. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. With operating the test item, check front wiper operation. Hi Off : Front wiper (HI) operation : Stop the front wiper. Is front wiper (HI) operation normally? YES >> Front wiper motor HI circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to WW-30, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492431 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front wiper motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground. (+) Front wiper motor (−) Connector Terminal E12 3 Condition Ground FRONT WIPER Voltage (Approx.) Hi 9-16V Off 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front wiper motor. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector. IPDM E/R 4. Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E10 5 E12 3 Continuity Existed Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 5 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September WW-30 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT A Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492432 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. B CONSULT DATA MONITOR Select “WIP AUTO STOP” of IPDM E/R data monitor item. Operate the front wiper. With the front wiper operation, check the monitor status. Monitor item C Condition WIP AUTO STOP Front wiper motor Monitor status Stop position Except stop position ACT P E Is the status of item normal? YES >> Front wiper stop position signal circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to WW-31, "Diagnosis Procedure". F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492433 1.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. D STOP P G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front wiper motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground. H (+) I Front wiper motor Connector Terminal E12 1 (−) Voltage (Approx.) Ground 9-16V J Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front wiper motor. NO >> GO TO 2. K 2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector. IPDM E/R 4. WW M Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E10 16 E12 1 Continuity Existed N Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E10 16 Ground Continuity Not existed P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September O WW-31 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492434 1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector and ground. Front wiper motor Connector Terminal E12 4 Ground Continuity Existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September WW-32 2012 QUEST WASHER SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > WASHER SWITCH A Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007492435 1.CHECK WASHER SWITCH B 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination switch connector. Check continuity between the combination switch terminals. A : Terminal 4 B : Terminal 6 C : Terminal 3 D : Terminal 1 D E JPLIA0164GB F Combination switch Condition Terminal Continuity G 3 4 1 6 1 4 6 3 Front washer switch ON Existed H Rear washer switch ON Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace combination switch (Wiper and washer switch). I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-33 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492436 1.CHECK REAR WIPER ON OPERATION 1. 2. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Select “RR WIPER” of BCM active test item. With operating the test item, check rear wiper operation. On Off : Rear wiper ON operation : Stop the rear wiper. Is rear wiper operation normally? YES >> Rear wiper motor circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to WW-34, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492437 1.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear wiper motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “RR WIPER” of BCM active test item. With operating the test item, check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground. (+) Rear wiper motor (−) Connector Terminal D193 1 Ground Condition REAR WIPER Voltage (Approx.) On 9-16V Off 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear wiper motor harness connector. BCM 4. Rear wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M122 54 D193 1 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M122 54 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground. Revision: 2011 September WW-34 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > Rear wiper motor Connector Terminal D193 3 Ground Continuity A Existed B Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear wiper motor. NO >> Repair or replace harness. C D E F G H I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-35 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007492438 1.CHECK REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. CONSULT DATA MONITOR Select “WIPER” of BCM data monitor item. Operate the rear wiper. Check that “RR WIPER STOP” changes to “On” and “Off” linked with the wiper operation. Monitor item Condition RR WIPER STOP Rear wiper motor Monitor status Stop position On Except stop position Off Is the status of item normal? YES >> Rear wiper stop position signal circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to WW-36, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492439 1.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear wiper motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground. (+) Rear wiper motor Connector Terminal D193 4 (−) Voltage (Approx.) Ground 12V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace rear wiper motor. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear wiper motor harness connector. BCM 4. Rear wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M122 44 D193 4 Continuity Existed Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal M122 44 Ground Continuity Not existed Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: 2011 September WW-36 2012 QUEST WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS Symptom Table INFOID:0000000007492440 Symptom HI only Front wiper does not operate Lo and INT INT only HI, LO and INT HI only Probable malfunction location Inspection item • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" • IPDM E/R • Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor • Front wiper motor Front wiper motor (HI) circuit Refer to WW-30, "Component Function Check". Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" • IPDM E/R • Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor • Front wiper motor Front wiper motor (LO) circuit Refer to WW-29, "Component Function Check" Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” LO only Revision: 2011 September E F G H I J K • Combination switch • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" WW Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” M — N • Combination switch • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” IPDM E/R INT only C D SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS “FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE” Refer to WW-40, "Diagnosis Procedure". IPDM E/R Front wiper does not stop B O P — • Combination switch • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" Front wiper request signal • BCM • IPDM E/R IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR “FR WIP REQ” WW-37 2012 QUEST WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Symptom Intermittent adjustment cannot be performed. Probable malfunction location Inspection item • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" BCM Intermittent control linked with vehicle speed cannot be performed Front wiper does not operate normally Wiper is not linked to the washer operation. — Check that the wiper setting is linked with vehicle speed Refer to WW-17, "WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)". • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM BCM — Does not return to stop position. [Repeatedly operates for 10 seconds and then stops for 20 seconds. (Failsafe)] • IPDM E/R • Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor • Front wiper motor Front wiper stop position signal circuit Refer to WW-31, "Component Function Check" ON only • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" INT only • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" • Combination switch • Harness between combination switch and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" • • • • Rear wiper motor circuit Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" Rear wiper does not operate ON and INT BCM Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM Harness between rear wiper motor and ground Rear wiper motor ON only • Combination switch • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" INT only • Combination switch • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" • Combination switch • Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM • BCM Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" Rear wiper does not stop Wiper is not linked to the washer operation. Rear wiper does not operate normally Combination switch Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table" BCM Rear wiper does not return to the stop position. [Stops after a fivesecond operation. (Fail-safe)] Revision: 2011 September — • BCM • Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM • Rear wiper motor WW-38 Rear wiper stop position signal circuit Refer to WW-36, "Component Function Check" 2012 QUEST NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description A INFOID:0000000007492441 FRONT WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION B • IPDM E/R may stop the front wiper to protect the front wiper motor if any obstruction (operation resistance) such as a large amount of snow is detected during the front wiper operation. • At that time turn OFF the front wiper and remove the foreign object. Then wait for approximately 20 seconds or more and reactivate the front wiper. The wiper will operate normally. C REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION • BCM may stop rear wiper to protect the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper is stopped for 5 seconds or more due to a snowfall. • Rear wiper operates normally one minute after the obstacles are removed with rear wiper OFF. D E F G H I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-39 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE Description INFOID:0000000007492442 The front wiper does not operate under any operation conditions. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007492443 1.CHECK WIPER RELAY OPERATION 1. 2. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. With operating the test item, check front wiper operation. Lo Hi Off : Front wiper LO operation : Front wiper HI operation : Stop the front wiper. Is front wiper operation normally? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuse is not fusing. Unit Front wiper motor Location No. Capacity IPDM E/R 60 30 A Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the fuse with a new one after repairing the applicable circuit. 3.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check front wiper motor ground circuit. Refer to WW-32, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR INPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONSULT ACTIVE TEST Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front wiper motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item. With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground. (+) Front wiper motor Connector (−) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Terminal 5 E12 Ground FRONT WIPER 3 Lo 9-16V Off 0V Hi 9-16V Off 0V Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace front wiper motor. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Revision: 2011 September WW-40 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > 5.CHECK FRONT WIPER REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT A CONSULT DATA MONITOR 1. Select “FR WIP REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item. 2. Switch the front wiper switch to HI and LO. 3. With operating the front wiper switch, check the status of “FR WIP REQ”. Monitor item Condition Front wiper switch HI FR WIP REQ Front wiper switch LO B Monitor status On Hi Off Stop On Low Off Stop C D Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> GO TO 6. E 6.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH F Perform the inspection of the combination switch. Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table". Is combination switch normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace the applicable parts. G H I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-41 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT WIPER Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492444 REMOVAL VIEW JMLIA2122GB 1. Front wiper arm cap 2. Front wiper arm LH 3. Front wiper blade LH 6. Front wiper blade RH 4. Front wiper refill LH 5. Front wiper arm RH 7. Front wiper refill RH 8. Front wiper drive assembly : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) DISASSEMBLY VIEW Revision: 2011 September WW-42 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > A B C D E F JMLIA2064ZZ 1. 4. Wiper linkage 2 2. Wiper linkage 1 3. Shaft seal Motor arm 5. Front wiper motor assembly 6. Front wiper frame G : Multi-purpose grease or an equivalent WIPER ARM H WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492445 I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Operate front wiper to move it to the auto stop position. Fully open hood assembly. Pull front wiper arm caps in direction indicated by arrow as shown in the figure. Remove front wiper arm caps. J K : Pawl WW M JMLIA2157ZZ 4. 5. Remove front wiper arm mounting nuts. Raise front wiper arm, and remove front wiper arm from the front wiper drive assembly. N INSTALLATION 1. Clean front wiper arm mount as shown in the figure to prevent nuts from being loosened. O P ELH0717D Revision: 2011 September WW-43 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Operate front wiper motor to move the wiper to the auto stop position. 3. Install front wiper arm to front wiper drive assembly. Temporarily tighten mounting nut. 4. Adjust front wiper blade position. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment". 5. Install front wiper arms by tightening the mounting nuts. For the specified torque, refer to WW-42, "Exploded View". 6. Operation wiper to move it to the auto stop position. CAUTION: Before operating wiper, inject washer fluid so that windshield glass damage by wiper operation is prevented. 7. Check that front wiper blades stop at the specified position. 8. Install front wiper arm caps. WIPER ARM : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007492446 WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT Clearance between the end of cowl top cover/ front fender cover and the top of front wiper blade center. JMLIA2124ZZ 1. Windshield glass 2. Front fender cover 4. Cowl top cover 5. Front wiper blade LH 3. Front wiper blade RH Standard clearance D P : 35.0 ± 7.5 mm (1.378 ± 0.295 in) : 37.2 ± 7.5 mm (0.295 ± 0.295 in) WIPER BLADE WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492447 REMOVAL 1. Lift up front wiper arm, and set to the position where wiper arm can be locked back. Revision: 2011 September WW-44 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove lock lever (A) of front wiper blade (1). Pull front wiper blade in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure to remove front wiper blade from front wiper arm (2). A B C JMLIA2123ZZ CAUTION: Wrap wiper arm using a shop cloth so that wiper blade does not damage windshield glass. INSTALLATION D E Install in the reverse order of removal. WIPER REFILL WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation F INFOID:0000000007492448 REMOVAL 1. 2. G Remove front wiper blade from the front wiper arm. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation". From portion (A) of front wiper refill (1), disengage front wiper blade portion (B) and remove front wiper refill in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure. H I J JMLIA2224ZZ K INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • For installation of vertebra (1), align cutout of vertebra to convex portion (A) of wiper refill (2) as shown in the figure. WW M N O JMLIA1613ZZ • For installation of wiper refill, check that wiper refill is not twisted while installing. • Check that wiper refill is inserted normally from the correct direction. P WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492449 REMOVAL Revision: 2011 September WW-45 2012 QUEST FRONT WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 1. Remove front wiper arm (LH and RH). Refer to WW-43, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation". 2. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". 3. Disconnect front wiper motor harness connector. 4. Remove mounting bolts from front wiper drive assembly. 5. Remove front wiper drive assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000007492450 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove wiper linkage 1 and 2 from the front wiper frame. CAUTION: Never bend the linkage or damage the plastic part of the ball joint when removing the wiper linkage. Remove wiper motor mounting nuts, and then remove the motor arm. Remove wiper motor mounting bolts, and then remove the front wiper motor from the front wiper frame. ASSEMBLY 1. Connect front wiper motor harness connector. 2. Operate front wiper to move it to the auto stop position. 3. Disconnect front wiper motor harness connector. 4. Install front wiper motor to front wiper frame. 5. Install front wiper motor to the motor arm. 6. Install wiper linkage 1 to the front wiper motor and the front wiper frame. 7. Install wiper linkage 2 to the front wiper frame. CAUTION: • Never drop wiper motor or cause it to come into contact with other parts. • Be careful for the grease condition at the wiper motor and wiper linkage joint (retainer). Apply multipurpose grease or an equivalent if necessary. Revision: 2011 September WW-46 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR WIPER A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492451 B C D E F G H I J JMLIA2131GB 1. Rear wiper refill 2. Rear wiper blade 3. Rear wiper arm 4. Rear wiper arm cover 5. Pivot seal 6. Rear wiper motor K : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) WW WIPER ARM WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492452 M REMOVAL 1. 2. N Operate rear wiper to move it to the auto stop position. Pull rear wiper arm caps in direction indicated by arrow as shown in the figure. Remove rear wiper arm caps. O : Pawl P JMLIA2132ZZ 3. Remove rear wiper arm mounting nuts. Revision: 2011 September WW-47 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Raise rear wiper arm, and remove rear wiper arm from the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Clean rear wiper arm mount as shown in the figure to prevent nuts from being loosened. SKIA0082J 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Operate rear wiper motor to move the wiper to the auto stop position. Install rear wiper arm to wiper drive assembly. Temporarily tighten mounting nut. Adjust rear wiper blade position. Refer to WW-48, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment". Install rear wiper arms by tightening the mounting nuts. For the specified torque, refer to WW-47, "Exploded View". Operate rear wiper to move it to the auto stop position. CAUTION: Before operating rear wiper, inject washer fluid so that windshield glass damage by rear wiper operation is prevented. Check that rear wiper blades stop at the specified position. Install rear wiper arm caps. WIPER ARM : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007492453 REAR WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT Set the wiper blade top on the defrosting wire (A) (clearance between the end of back door glass and the top of wiper blade center). Standard clearance 1. 2. 3. 4. A L Rear wiper blade Back door window glass Back door panel Back door trim : Rear defogger wire print : 50.2 ± 7.5 mm (1.976 ± 0.295in) JMLIA2158ZZ WIPER BLADE Revision: 2011 September WW-48 2012 QUEST REAR WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492454 A REMOVAL 1. Lift up and hold rear wiper arm. Remove rear wiper blade (1) from rear wiper arm (2) while rotating rear wiper blade (1) in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure. B C D E JMLIA1989ZZ CAUTION: Wrap wiper arm using a shop cloth so that wiper blade does not damage back door window glass. F INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. WIPER REFILL G WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492455 REMOVAL 1. 2. H Remove rear wiper blade from the rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-49, "WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation". Remove rear wiper refill (2) from the end portion of rear wiper blade (1) in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure. Remove rear wiper refill while sliding it sideward. I J K JMLIA2026ZZ WW INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • For installation of wiper refill, check that wiper refill is not twisted while installing. • Check that wiper refill is inserted normally from the correct direction. M WIPER MOTOR N WIPER MOTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492456 O REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-47, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation". Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Disconnect rear wiper motor harness connector. Remove rear wiper motor mounting nut. Raise rear waiper motor, and remove rear wiper motor from the vehicle. CAUTION: Never drop rear wiper motor or cause it to come into contact with other parts. Revision: 2011 September WW-49 2012 QUEST P REAR WIPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove pivot seal from the back door. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September WW-50 2012 QUEST WASHER TANK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WASHER TANK A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492457 B C D E F G H I J K WW JMLIA2134GB 1. Washer tank inlet 2. Washer tank inlet cap 3. Washer tank assembly M : N·m (kg-m, in-lb) : Vehicle front N Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492458 O REMOVAL 1. Fully open hood assembly. P Revision: 2011 September WW-51 2012 QUEST WASHER TANK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2. Remove washer tank inlet fixing clip (A). 3. Pull out washer tank inlet (1) from the washer tank. : Vehicle front JMLIA1535ZZ 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect washer pump connector (A) and washer level switch connector (B). Remove harness fixing clips (C) from the washer tank (1). Disconnect front washer tube (3) and rear washer tube (4) from the front & rear washer pump (2). : Clip : Vehicle front JMLIA2152ZZ 8. 9. Remove washer tank mounting bolts. Remove washer tank from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • When installing tube to front & rear washer pump, be sure to install to front and rear correctly. • Add water up to the top of the washer tank inlet after installing. Check that there is no leakage. Revision: 2011 September WW-52 2012 QUEST WASHER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WASHER PUMP A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492459 B C D E F G H I JMLIA2136ZZ 1. Washer tank 2. Packing 3. Rear washer tube 4. Front & rear washer pump 5. Front washer tube 6. Washer pump connector J : Vehicle front K Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492460 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. WW Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect washer pump connector (A). Disconnect front washer tube (3) and rear washer tube (4) from the front & rear washer pump (2). Remove washer pump from the washer tank (1). M N : Vehicle front O JMLIA2153ZZ P 5. Remove packing from the washer tank. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • When installing tube to front & rear washer pump, be sure to install to front and rear correctly. • Check that there is no leakage after installation or replace packing with new part if it has been damage. Revision: 2011 September WW-53 2012 QUEST WASHER PUMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > • Never twist the packing when installing the washer pump. Revision: 2011 September WW-54 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE A Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492461 FRONT WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE B C D E F G H I J JMLIA2149ZZ 1. Front washer nozzle LH 2. Front washer nozzle RH 3. Cowl top cover 4. Front washer tube B 5. Joint A 6. Washer tank assembly 7. Front washer tube A 8. Check valve 9. Front washer tube C 10. Front washer tube D K WW 11. Joint B : Clip M REAR WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-55 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JMLIA2156ZZ 1. Rear washer tube A 2. Washer tank assembly 3. 4. Joint A 5. Rear washer tube B 6. Grommet A Rear washer tube C 7. Rear washer nozzle 8. Joint B 9. Grommet B 10. Back door seal rubber : Clip Revision: 2011 September WW-56 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Hydraulic Layout INFOID:0000000007492462 A B C D E F G H I JMLIA2135ZZ 1. Grommet A 2. Rear washer tube 3. Washer tank assembly 6. Rear washer nozzle 4. Front washer tube 5. Front washer nozzle 7. Grommet B 8. Back door seal rubber J K : Clip WASHER NOZZLE WW WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492463 M FRONT WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. N Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect front washer tube (3) from the front washer nozzle (1). Press front washer nozzle fixing pawls toward the direction shown by the arrows 2 and pull up remove from cowl top cover (2). O P JMLIA1537ZZ INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September WW-57 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > CAUTION: • The spray positions differ, check that left and right nozzles are installed correctly. • Adjust the washer nozzle spray position. Refer to WW-58, "WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment". REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove rear spoiler. Refer to EXT-44, "Removal and Installation". Remove high-mounted stop lamp. • Xenon type: Refer to EXL-104, "Removal and Installation". • Halogen type: Refer to EXL-201, "Removal and Installation". Press rear washer nozzle fixing pawls (A) toward the direction shown by the arrows and remove from rear spoiler (1). JMLIA2161ZZ 4. Disconnect front washer tube from the front washer nozzle. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Adjust the washer nozzle spray position. Refer to WW-58, "WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment". WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000007492464 INSPECTION FRONT CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Check that air can pass through the hose by blowing forward (toward the nozzle), and check that air cannot pass through by sucking. JMLIA1538ZZ REAR CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Check that air can pass through the hose by blowing forward (toward the nozzle), and check that air cannot pass through by sucking. JMLIA2159ZZ Revision: 2011 September WW-58 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ADJUSTMENT A FRONT WASHER NOZZLE SPRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT Adjust spray positions to match the positions shown in the figure. B C D E F G JMLIA2065ZZ : Spray area 1. H Black printed frame line Unit: mm (in) Driver side Passenger side A B C D E F G H X 578 (22.76) 381 (15.00) 181 (7.13) 129 (5.08) 88 (3.46) 169 (6.65) 366 (14.41) 484 (19.06) Y 638 (14.49) 62 (2.44) 56 (2.20) 703 (27.68) 674 (26.54) 49 (1.93) 61 (2.40) 504 (19.84) Check that washer fluid is splayed on 70% or more the splay area ( spray area deviates from the specification, adjust the washer nozzle. CAUTION: • Use washer nozzle adjuster (A) for nozzle (1) insert adjustment if the jet a is outside the angle. • Never use needle or small pin. I J ) when spraying washer fluid. If the K WW M N JMLIA1539ZZ O NOTE: If wax or dust gets into the nozzle, remove wax or dust with a needle or small pin. REAR WASHER NOZZLE SPRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT Adjust spray positions to match the positions shown in the figure. Revision: 2011 September WW-59 P 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JMLIA2155ZZ 1. Rear washer nozzle 2. Black print frame line Unit: mm (in) H : Height L : Length φ : Spray position area 3.0 (0.118) 115.0 (4.528) 30 (1.181) Insert a needle or similar object (A) into the spray opening (1) and move up/down and left/right to adjust the spray position. JMLIA2160ZZ NOTE: If wax or dust gets into the nozzle, remove wax or dust with a needle or small pin. WASHER TUBE WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492465 FRONT WASHER TUBE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Fully open hood assembly. Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect front washer tub A from the front & rear washer pump. Revision: 2011 September WW-60 2012 QUEST WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Disconnect front washer tube A (1) from joint A (2). 5. Remove front washer tube mounting clips (A) from the Vehicle. 6. Remove front washer tube mounting clips from front washer tube A and B (3). 7. Remove front washer tube A from the vehicle. A B : Vehicle front C D E F G JMLIA2165ZZ Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect front washer tube C and D from the front washer nozzle. Refer to WW-57, "WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation". 10. Remove front washer tube B. a. Disconnect front washer tube B from the cowl top cover. b. Disconnect front washer tube B check valve. 11. Remove front washer tube C. a. Disconnect front washer tube C from the cowl top cover. b. Disconnect front washer tube C check valve. 12. Remove front washer tube D. a. Disconnect front washer tube D from the cowl top cover. b. Disconnect front washer tube D check valve. 8. 9. H I J K WW INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • When installing front washer tube C to the check valve, install to portion (B: RH side). • When installing front washer tube D to the check valve, install to portion (A: LH side). M N O JMLIA2154ZZ REAR WASHER TUBE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Fully open hood assembly. Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect rear washer tube A from the front & rear washer pump. Revision: 2011 September WW-61 2012 QUEST P WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4. Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation". 5. Remove luggage side lower finisher and back pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation". 6. Remove third assist grip (LH and RH), and then remove headlining assembly rear clips. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation". 7. Slightly lower the headlining assembly (1) rear and secure work space. 8. Disconnect rear washer tube B (3) from joint B (2). JMLIA2166ZZ 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to INT-48, "BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER : Removal and Installation". Disconnect rear washer tube C from the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-57, "WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation". Remove rear washer tube mounting clips (A) from the Vehicle. Remove rear washer tube mounting clips from the rear washer tube. Remove rear washer tube from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: 2011 September WW-62 2012 QUEST WASHER LEVEL SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WASHER LEVEL SWITCH A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007492466 The washer level switch must be replaced together with the washer tank as an assembly. Refer to WW-51, "Removal and Installation". B C D E F G H I J K WW M N O P Revision: 2011 September WW-63 2012 QUEST WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Exploded View INFOID:0000000007492467 Refer to BCS-83, "Exploded View". Revision: 2011 September WW-64 2012 QUEST

Nissan - Quest - Workshop Manual - 2011 - 2011

Get your hands on the complete Nissan factory workshop software

Get notified when we add a new NissanQuest Manual

We cover 60 Nissan vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

2007 Nissan Tiida Model C11 Series Service Repair Manual PDF

Nissan Micra Model K12 Series Service Repair Manual PDF

Nissan Qashqai Model J11 Series Service Repair Manual

Nissan Note Model E11 Series Service Manual PDF

Nissan QASHQAI Model J10 Series Electronic Service Manual

NISSAN PATROL GQ MODEL Y60 SERIES SERVICE REPAIR MANUAL

2001 Nissan Primera Model P11 Service Repair Manual PDF

2013 Nissan Leaf Model ZE0 series Service Manual PDF

Nissan Pathfinder 2006 Model R51 Service Repair Manual PDF

2001 Nissan Almera N16 series Service Manual PDF

2016 Nissan Juke Model F15 Series Service and Repair Manual PDF

Nissan Note Model E12 Series Service Manual PDF

1998 NISSAN PATROL GR Y61 SERIES SERVICE MANUAL PDF

Nissan Primastar X83 series Service Manual PDF

Nissan Teana Model J31 Series Service Repair Manual PDF

2005-2006 Nissan Altima Model L31 Factory Service Manual PDF

2008 Nissan Altima Model L32 Service Repair Manual PDF

Nissan X-Trail T31 Series Electronic Service Manual

2001-2005 Nissan Primera P12 ESM (Electronic Service Manual)

2004 Nissan 350z Service & Repair Manual (SM4E-1Z33U8)

Nissan - Tiida - Owners Manual - 2006 - 2020

Nissan Patrol Model Y61 Series Electronic Service Manual

Nissan Patrol Model Y61 Series ESM (Electronic Service Manual)

Nissan Terrano 2004 Service and Repair Manual

2002 Nissan Sentra Service Repair Manual (SM2E-1B15U2)

2014 Nissan Leaf Model ZE0 series Service Manual PDF

1992 Nissan Serena C23 Service Manual PDF

2014 Nissan Sentra Service Repair Manual (SM14E00B17U0)

2007 Nissan 350Z-Z33 Service Repair Manual PDF

2007 Nissan Qashqai Repair Manual (SM7E00-1J10E1E)

2011 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual

2011 Nissan Maxima Repair Manual

Nissan - Auto - nissan-serena-2012-104086

2009 Nissan Murano Repair Manual (SM9E-1Z51U2)

2014 Nissan Juke Model F15 Series Service Manual PDF

2012 Nissan Leaf Model ZE0 series Service Manual PDF

2008 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual

2004-2005 Nissan Altima Model L31 Factory Service Manual PDF

Nissan - Cabstar - Workshop Manual - 1994 - 1999

2005 Nissan 350z Service & Repair Manual (SM5E-1Z33U2)

2006 Nissan Note Model E11 Series Electronic Service Manual

2014 Nissan Rogue T32 Series Factory Service Repair Manual PDF

2003 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual

Nissan Patrol Y62 Technical Training Manual

2006 Nissan Murano Repair Manual (SM6E-1Z50U0)

Nissan Qashqai J10 ESM (Electronic Service Manual) January 2007

2003 Nissan 350z Service & Repair Manual (SM3E-1Z33U0)

2013 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual

2005 Nissan Titan Repair Manual (SM5E-1A60U0)

Nissan - Pixo - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2020

2010 Nissan Sentra Service Repair Manual (SM0E-1B16U1)

Nissan - Patrol Y61 - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007

1999-2002 Nissan Primera P11 ESM (Electronic Service Manual)

2008 Nissan 350z Service & Repair Manual (SM8E-1Z33U1)

2004 Nissan Sentra Service Repair Manual (SM4E-1B15U1)

Sentra SE-R Spec V L4-2.5L (QR25DE) (2002)

2006 Nissan Patrol Model Y61 Series Electronic Service Manual

Nissan - Pulsar - Workshop Manual - 1990 - 1990

2007 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual

2012 Nissan Pathfinder Service and Repair Manual